Learn Staad Pro at Home

Introduction
Page 1 of 199
Getting Started
1. Introduction
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose program for performing the analysis and design of a wide variety of types of structures. The basic three activities which are to be carried out to achieve that goal - a) model generation b) the calculations to obtain the analytical results c) result verification - are all facilitated by tools contained in the program's graphical environment. This manual contains four sample tutorials which guide the user through those 3 activities. The first of those tutorials demonstrates these processes using a simple two-dimensional steel portal frame. It is a good starting point for learning the program. If you are unfamiliar with STAAD.Pro, you will greatly benefit by going through this tutorial first. For the second tutorial, we have chosen a reinforced concrete frame. We generate the model, perform the analysis, and design the concrete beams and columns. It contains extensive details on the various facilities available for visualization and verification of results. The modelling and analysis of a slab is demonstrated in the third tutorial. Slabs, and other surface entities like walls are modelled using plate elements. Large surface entities may have to be defined using several elements and this sometimes requires a tool called a mesh generator. This tutorial shows the simple techniques as well as the mesh generation method for generating the finite element model of the slab. It also explains the methods by which one can check the results for plate elements. Tutorial 1 Tutorial 2 Tutorial 3
Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

1. Introduction
STAAD.Pro is an analysis and design software package for structural engineering. This manual is intended to guide users who are new to this software as well as experienced users who want specific information on the basics of using the program. Part-I of this manual describes the following: Hardware Requirements Contents of the STAAD.Pro Installation Image Installation Running STAAD.Pro Part II of this manual contains tutorials on using STAAD.Pro. The tutorials guide a user through the processes of: Creating a structural model. This consists of generating the structural geometry, specifying member properties, material constants, loads, analysis and design specifications, etc. Visualization and verification of the model geometry Running the STAAD analysis engine to perform analysis and design Verification of results - graphically and numerically Report generation and printing Inter-operability. In other words, using STAAD.Pro in conjunction with other programs created by REI/Bentley Systems, such as RAM Concept, RAM Connection etc.

2. Hardware Requirements
The following requirements are suggested minimums. Systems with increased capacity provide enhanced performance. PC with Intel-Pentium or equivalent. Graphics card and monitor with 1024x768 screen resolution, 256 color display (16 bit high color recommended). 256 MB RAM or higher. Windows NT 4.0 or higher operating system. Windows 95, Windows 98 & Windows Me are no longer supported. The program works best on Windows 2000 and XP operating systems. The program will run on Windows Vista only with SELECT licensing system. Legacy copy protection systems may not work on Windows Vista. Sufficient free space on the hard disk to hold the program and data files. The disk space requirement will vary depending on the modules you are installing. A typical minimum is 500MB free space. Note: Additional RAM, disk space, and video memory will enhance the performance of STAAD.Pro. Starting with STAAD.Pro Version 2001, the size of structures that the program can handle has been increased significantly. As a result of this, the minimum amount of physical + virtual memory required by the program also has increased to over 600MB. Users may need to ensure that adequate amounts of virtual memory are available, and in Windows NT and 2000 systems, parameters such as paging file sizes should be large enough or span over multiple drives if the free space on any one drive runs low. Another issue to keep in mind is the location of the TEMP parameter as in the SET TEMP environment variable in Windows NT and 2000 systems. While performing calculations, depending on the structure size, the program may create gigantic scratch files which are placed in the folder location associated with the TEMP parameter. Users may wish to point the SET TEMP variable to a folder on a drive that has disk space sufficiently large to accommodate the requirements for large size structures.
Note: The user must have a basic familiarity with Microsoft Windows systems in order to use the software.
Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD Installation Copy Protection Device

3. Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD
STAAD.Pro installation image may be downloaded from SELECT download site or ordered on a CD from the SELECT download site. The content comprises of a setup initialization program Setup.exe and several supporting installation files/programs/packages. The image also contains .NET 2.0 framework installation. If you do not have .NET 2.0 framework already installed, it is recommended that you initiate the installation process using Setup.exe. If .NET 2.0 framework is already available on the system, STAAD.Pro can be installed using the MSI package (STAAD.Pro 20.07.01.01.msi). Setup.exe will automatically detect .NET 2.0 availability status and invoke .NET 2.0 installer if necessary. All online documentation that comes with the program is created in compiled HTML format and best viewed using Microsofts Internet Explorer
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 2 of 199
component. A set of multi-media movies which demonstrate the procedure for using STAAD.Pro are accessible after installing the program. They can be accessed from the Help menu of the main screen of the program. These too can be viewed using a web browser. Installation

4. Installation
If you receive a document titled Installation Notes, it will supercede all other related instructions. Close all applications before installing STAAD.Pro and make sure that the current user account has administrative privileges. Typically, the installation process is initiated by invoking Setup.exe. STAAD.Pro could also be deployed using the Windows MSI package available with the installation file set. Once the installation process is initiated, the installation program will follow standard installation procedures available with any software running on Microsoft Windows. The input dialog boxes are self-explanatory. Users will encounter the following license agreement acknowledgement screen once the installation initilialization is complete.
Figure 1: License Agreement Installation will not proceed further unless the EULA terms are accepted. The user may install the program in any folder of youre his/her choice. A default folder name is supplied by the program.
Figure 2: Selection of the Installation Folder Next, the SELECT Server Settings dialog box will be displayed on the screen.
. Figure 3: SELECT Server Settings Here, the user may choose to provide the requested information on a later date. The user may proceed to the next installation input screen by clicking on the Next button. The user may choose to reconfigure SELECT Server Settings using Bentley License Tool application (installed with the program). If necessary, the user may continue to use legacy copy protection system (if a valid 2007 license is already programmed on your hardlock or SentinelLM license) and this can be configured using REI Application Assistant Program. Please refer to Quick Start & Troubleshooting Guide link after the installation is completed. This document explains how to install and configure SELECT XM licenses. If the user do not have SELECT XM license information, the program will run in Trial Mode for 15 days. The SELECT XM License configuration should be completed within that period. The next input screen seeks information about the user.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 3 of 199
Figure 4: User Information Information provided in this dialog box will be reflected in the prints and reports generated by STAAD.Pro. The user also has to choose a default unit system. This is to ensure that the length and force units frequently used by the user will be available upon entry into the program each time. This is known as the base unit system, and mainly affects the units in which results are displayed, as well as default values for certain parameters. Please refer to one of the tutorials provided in this manual for additional information on these. This does not limit the user from changing the base unit system when the program is running.
Figure 5: Selection of Default Unit System for STAAD.Pro Towards the end of the installation process, a message resembling the one shown in the next figure will appear. Now that all the necessary information has been gathered, the program is ready to begin the installation process.
Figure 6: Ready to Installation. A dialog box confirming that the installation process has been successfully completed will be displayed.
Figure 7: Installation Confirmation At this stage if prompted by the installation program, please restart the machine for the changes to take effect.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 4 of 199
6. Running STAAD.Pro
Click on the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2007 program group.
Figure 8: Starting STAAD.Pro The STAAD.Pro main screen appears as shown in below.
Figure 9: The STAAD.Pro screen If you are a first time user who is unfamiliar with STAAD.Pro, we suggest that you go through the tutorials shown in Section II of this manual.

7. Running Sectionwizard
To launch Sectionwizard, choose one of the programs from the Sectionwizard menu.
Figure 10: Starting Sectionwizard For help on using this program, please go through Sectionwizard Help shown in the above figure.

8. Running Mesher
To launch Mesher, click on the Mesher icon.
Figure 11: Starting Mesher Information on using this program is available from the Help menus of the program.
Getting Started
Tutorial Problem 1: 2D Portal Frame
This chapter provides a step-by-step tutorial for creating a 2D portal frame using STAAD.Pro. This tutorial covers the following topics.

Starting the Program Creating a New Structure Creating Joints and Members
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 5 of 199
Switching On Node and Beam Labels Specifying Member Properties Specifying Material Constants Specifying Member Offsets Printing Member Information Specifying Supports Specifying Loads Specifying the Analysis Type Specifying Post-Analysis Print Commands Specifying Steel Design Parameters Performing Analysis and Design Viewing the Output File
Getting Started
1.1 Methods of creating the model :
There are two methods of creating the structure data. a) using the command file b) using the graphical model generation mode or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. The Command File is a text file which contains the data for the structure being modeled. This file consists of simple English-language like commands. This command file may be created directly using the editor built into the program, or for that matter, any editor which saves data in text form, such as Notepad or WordPad available in Microsoft Windows. This command file is also automatically created behind the scenes when the structure is generated using the Graphical User Interface.The graphical model generation mode and the command file are seamlessly integrated. So, at any time, you may temporarily exit the graphical model generation mode and access the command file. You will find that it reflects all data entered through the graphical model generation mode. Further, when you make changes to the command file and save it, the GUI immediately reflects the changes made to the structure through the command file. Both methods of creating our model are explained in this tutorial. Section 1.3 through 1.6 explain the procedure for creating the file using the GUI. Section 1.7 describes creation of the command file using the STAAD.Pro text editor.
Getting Started
1.2 Description of the Tutorial Problem
The structure for this project is a single bay, single story steel portal frame that will be analyzed and designed. The figure below shows the structure.
Figure 1. 1 An input file called "Tut-01-portal.std" containing the input data for the above structure has been provided with the program. This file contains what would otherwise have resulted had we followed the procedure explained in Section 1.7. BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE DATA Member properties Members 1 & 3 : W12X35 Member 2 : W14X34 Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity : 29000 ksi Poisson's Ratio : 0.30 Member Offsets 6.0 inches along global X for member 2 at both ends
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 6 of 199
Supports Loads
Node 1 : Fixed Node 4 : Pinned Load case 1 : Dead + Live Beam 2 : 2.5 kips/ft downward along global Y Load case 2 : Wind From Left 10 kips point force at Node 2 Load case 3 : 75 Percent of (DL+LL+WL) Load Combination - L1 X 0.75 + L2 X 0.75
Analysis Type Steel Design
Linear Elastic (PERFORM) Consider load cases 1 and 3 only. Parameters: Unsupported length of compression flange for bending : 10 ft for members 2 and 3, 15 ft for member 1. Steel Yield Stress : 40 ksi Perform member selection for members 2 and 3
Getting Started
1.3 Starting the Program
Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program group
Figure 1. 2 The STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment will be invoked and the following screen comes up.
Figure 1. 3 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog box at the Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu. Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types Steel, Concrete, Aluminum selected from the programs library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.) If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 7 of 199
tutorial, let us choose the English units (Kip, Feet, etc.).
Figure 1. 4
Figure 1. 5 Click on the Accept button to close the above dialog box. Following this, select File | New once again.
Figure 1. 6 The dialog box shown in Figure 1.3 will re-appear.
Getting Started
1.4 Creating a New Structure
1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model. The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Plane. We choose Foot as the length unit and Kilo Pound as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name Structure? (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name PORTAL. A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 8 of 199
in a different location, type in the name, or click the
button and specify the desired path.
After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
Figure 1. 7 2. In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially construct the model. Add Beams, Add Plates or Add Solids are, respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of structural templates which the program comes equipped with. Those template models can be extracted and modified parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts. If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command language, the Open Editor box can take us to the STAAD editor. Please remember that all these options are also available from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss this dialog box.
Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 1.7 . For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.
Figure 1. 8
Getting Started
1.5 Creating the Model using the Graphical User Interface
In order to generate the model graphically, we have to familiarize ourselves with the components of the STAAD.Pro screen. A sample of the STAAD.Pro screen is shown in Figure 1.9. The screen has five major elements as described below: Menu bar Located at the top of the screen, the Menu bar gives access to all the facilities of STAAD.Pro. Toolbar The dockable Toolbar gives access to the most frequently used commands. You may also create your own customized toolbar. Main Window This is the largest area at the center of the screen, where the model drawings and results are displayed in pictorial form.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 9 of 199
Page Control The Page Control is a set of tabs that appear on the left-most part of the screen. Each tab on the Page Control allows you to perform specific tasks. The organization of the Pages, from top to bottom, represents the logical sequence of operations, such as, definition of beams, specification of member properties, loading, and so on. Each tab has a name and an icon for easy identification. The name on the tabs may or may not appear depending on your screen resolution and the size of the STAAD.Pro window. However, the icons on the Page Control tabs always appear. The Pages in the Page Control area depend on the Mode of operation. The Mode of operation may be set from the Mode menu from the Menu bar. Elements of the STAAD.Pro Screen
Figure 1. 9 Data Area The right side of the screen is called the Data Area, where different dialog boxes, tables, list boxes, etc. appear depending on the type of operation you are performing. For example, when you select the Geometry | Beam Page, the Data Area contains the Node-Coordinate table and the Member-incidence table. When you are in the Load Page, the contents of the Data Area changes to display the currently assigned Load cases and the icons for different types of loads. The icons in the toolbar as well as in the Page Control area offer ToolTip help. As we move the mouse pointer over a button, the name of the button called a ToolTip appears above or below the button. This floating Tool tip help will identify the icon. A brief description of the icon also appears in the status bar. We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are described in the following sections.
Getting Started
1.5.1 Generating the Model Geometry
The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the structure shown in section 1.2 are :: JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4 Steps:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 10 of 199
1.
We selected the Add Beam option earlier to facilitate adding beams to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X,Y,Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area.
Figure 1. 10 2. A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments. The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane We will use the Linear tab. In our structure, the segment consisting of members 1 to 3, and nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane. So, in this dialog box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 20 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 15 above the origin along Y, and a spacing of 1 feet between lines along both X and Y (see figure below) we can draw a frame 20ft X 15ft, adequate for our structure. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits.
Figure 1. 11 3. To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Beam button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the mouse, click at the origin (0, 0) to create the first node.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 11 of 199
Figure 1. 12 4. In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by beam members. (0, 15), (20, 15), and (20, 0) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the structure will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
Figure 1. 13 5. At this point, let us remove the grid from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 12 of 199
Figure 1. 14 The grid will now be removed and the structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below.
Figure 1. 15 It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command.
Getting Started
1.5.2 Switching On Node And Beam Labels
1. Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the dialog box that comes up, choose Labels. Alternatively, one may access this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 13 of 199
2.
Figure 1. 16 In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK.
Figure 1. 17 The following figure illustrates the node and beam numbers displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below.
Figure 1. 18 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box.
Getting Started
1.5.3 Specifying Member Properties
Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams and columns (see figure in section 1.2). For those of us curious to know the equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they are :
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 14 of 199
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 TABLE ST W12X35 2 TABLE ST W14X34 Steps: 1. To define member properties, click on the Property Page icon located on the top toolbar.
Figure 1. 19 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Property page from the left side of the screen as shown below.
Figure 1. 20 2. In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up (see next Figure). The property type we wish to create is the W shape from the AISC table. This is available under the Section Database button in the Properties dialog box as shown below. So, let us click on the Section Database button.
3.
Figure 1. 21 In the Section Profile Tables dialog box that comes up, select W Shape under the American option. Notice that the Material box is checked. Let us keep it that way because it will enable us to subsequently assign the material constants E, Density, Poisson, etc. along with the cross-section since we want to assign the default values. Choose W12X35 as the beam size, and ST as the section type. Then, click on the Add button as shown in the figure below. Detailed explanation of the terms such as ST, T, CM, TC, BC, etc. is available in Section 5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 15 of 199
Figure 1. 22 4. To create the second member property (ST W14X34), select the W14X34 shape and click on the Add button. After the member properties have been created, let us close the Section Profiles Table dialog box. 5. The next step is to associate the properties we just created with selected members in our model. Follow these steps. a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog box (W12X35). b. Make sure that the Use Cursor to Assign button is selected under the Assignment Method box. c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 3. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or click on the Esc button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.
Figure 1. 23 6. In a similar fashion, assign the second property reference (W14X34) to member 2.
After both the properties have been assigned to the respective members, our model should resemble the following figure.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 16 of 199
Figure 1. 24 Let us once again save our structure by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Getting Started
1.5.4 Specifying Material Constants
In Section 1.5.3, we kept the Material check box on while assigning the member properties. Consequently, the material constants got assigned to the members along with the properties, and the following commands were generated in the command file: CONSTANTS E 29000 MEMB 1 TO 3 POISSON 0.3 MEMB 1 TO 3 DENSITY 0.000283 MEMB 1 TO 3 ALPHA 6.5e-006 MEMB 1 TO 3 Hence, there is no more a need to assign the constants separately. However, if we hadnt assign them as before, we could go to the menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them explicitly as shown in the figure below.
Figure 1. 25
Getting Started
1.5.5 Changing The Input Units Of Length
For specifying member offset values, as a matter of convenience, it is simpler if our length units are inches instead of feet. The commands to be generated are: UNIT INCHES KIP
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 17 of 199
Steps: 1. To change the length units from feet to inch, either click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar.
Figure 1. 26 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option as shown in the next figure.
Figure 1. 27 2. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Inch and click on the OK button.
Figure 1. 28
Getting Started
1.5.6 Specifying Member Offsets
Since beam 2 actually spans only the clear distance between the column faces, and not the center to center distance, we can take advantage of this aspect by specifying offsets. Member 2 is OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global X direction, 0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is offset by negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. The corresponding STAAD commands are: MEMBER OFFSET 2 START 6.0 0.0 0.0 2 END -6.0 0.0 0.0 Steps: 1. Since we know that member 2 is the one to be assigned with the offset, let us first select this member prior to defining the offset itself. Select member 2 by clicking on it using the Beams Cursor . The selected member will be highlighted. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Taskssection at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) To define member offsets, click on the Specification Page icon located in the top toolbar.
2.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 18 of 199
Figure 1. 29 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Spec Page from the left side of the screen.
Figure 1. 30 3. In either case, the Specifications dialog box shown below comes up. Member Releases and Offsets are defined through the Beam button in this dialog box as shown below.
Figure 1. 31 4. In the Beam Specs dialog box that opens, select the Offset tab. We want to define the offset at the start node in the X direction. Hence, make sure that the Start button is selected. Then, enter 6.0 in the X edit box. Since we have already selected the member, let us click on the Assign button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 19 of 199
Figure 1. 32 5. To apply the offset at the end node, repeat steps 3 and 4, except for selecting the End option and providing -6.0 in the X edit box.
After both the Start and End offsets have been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 33 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member. Let us save the work again by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Getting Started
1.5.7 Printing Member Information in the Output File
We would like to get a report consisting of information about all the members including start and end joint numbers (incidence), member length, beta angle and member end releases in the STAAD output file. The corresponding STAAD command is: PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL Steps: 1. Since the information is required for all the members, select all the members by going to Select | By All | All Beams menu option.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 20 of 199
Figure 1. 34 2. Then, go to Commands | Pre Analysis Print | Member Information from the top menu bar as shown in the figure below.
Figure 1. 35 3. Notice that the assignment method is set To Selection. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
Figure 1. 36 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. Let us also save our structure again by using the Save option of the File menu.
Getting Started
1.5.8 Specifying Supports
The specifications of this problem call for restraining all degrees of freedom at node 1 (FIXED support) and a pinned type of restraint at node 4 (restrained against all translations, free for all rotations) The commands to be generated are : SUPPORTS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 21 of 199
1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED Steps: 1. To create a support, click on the Support Page icon located in the top toolbar as shown below.
Figure 1. 37 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Support Page from the left side of the screen.
Figure 1. 38 2. In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the next figure. Since we already know that node 1 is to be associated with a Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor , select node 1. It becomes highlighted. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting nodes.) 3. Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below.
Figure 1. 39 4. In the Create Support dialog box that opens, select the Fixed tab (which also happens to be the default) and click on the Assign button as shown below. This creates a FIXED type of support at node 1 where all 6 degrees of freedom are restrained.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 22 of 199
Figure 1. 40 5. To create a PINNED support at node 4, repeat steps 2 to 4, except for selecting node 4 and selecting the Pinned tab in the Create Support dialog box. After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below.
Figure 1. 41 After assigning both the supports, let us save our structure using the File | Save option.
Getting Started
1.5.9 Viewing the model in 3D
Let us see how we can display our model in 3D. To do this, either right-click and select Structure Diagrams or go to View | Structure Diagrams menu.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 23 of 199
Figure 1. 42 In the ensuing dialog box, the Structure tab page allows you to set up structural view parameters as explained below. The options under 3D Sections control how the members are displayed. Selecting None displays the structure without displaying the cross-sectional properties of the members and elements. Selecting Full Sections displays the 3D cross-sections of members, depending on the member properties. Sections Outline displays only the outline of the cross-sections of members. Let us select Full Sections to draw the 3D sections. You can also change the color of the sections by clicking on the Section Outline color button under the Colors section. Then, click on OK.
Figure 1. 43 The resulting diagram is shown below.
Figure 1. 44
Getting Started
1.5.10 Specifying Loads
Three load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. UNIT FEET KIP LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -2.5 LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10. LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) 1 0.75 2 0.75 Steps: The creation and assignment of load cases involves the following two steps: a. First, we will be creating all 3 load cases. b. Then, we will be assigning them to the respective members/nodes. Creating load cases 1 and 2 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the top tool bar.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 24 of 199
Figure 1. 45 Click on the New Load button in the Loads dialog box that comes up to initiate the first load case. Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left side of the screen.
Figure 1. 46 2. Before we create the first load case, we need to change our length units to feet. To do that, as before, utilize the 1.5.5). Input Units icon (see section
Notice that a window titled Load appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To create the first load case, highlight Load Cases Details and then click on the Add button in the Load dialog box.
Figure 1. 47 3. The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD + LIVE as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on the Add button
Figure 1. 48 The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases Details option.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 25 of 199
Figure 1. 49 To create the Member load, first highlight DEAD + LIVE. You will notice that the Create New Load Item dialog box shows more options now.
Figure 1. 50 4. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Uniform Force option under the Member Load item. Specify GY as the Direction, enter -2.5 as the Force and click on the Add button.
Figure 1. 51 The next step is to create the second load case which contains a joint load. 5. Highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as WIND FROM LEFT and click on the Add button.
Figure 1. 52 6. Next, to create the Joint load, highlight WIND FROM LEFT.
Figure 1. 53 7. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Node option under the Nodal Load item. Specify 10 for Fx, and click on the Add button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 26 of 199
Figure 1. 54 Creating load case 3 Load cases 1 and 2 were primary load cases. Load case 3 will be defined as a load combination. So, the next step is to define load case 3 as 0.75 x (Load 1 + Load 2), which is a load combination. 8. To do this, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Specify the Title as 75 Percent of [DL+LL+WL].
Figure 1. 55 In the Define Combinations box, the default load combination type is set to be an algebraic combination, and hence, an explicit switch setting instructing the program to use this type of combination is not necessary. The other combination type available is called SRSS, square root of sum of squares. This type offers the flexibility of part SRSS and part Algebraic. That is, some load cases are combined using the square root of sum of squares approach, and the result is combined with other cases algebraically, as in A + SQRT(B*B + C*C) where A, B and C are the individual primary cases. We intend to use the default algebraic combination type. 9. In the Define Combinations box, select both load cases from the left side list box (by holding down the Ctrl key) and click on the button. The load cases appear in the right side list box. Then, enter 0.75 in the Factor edit box. (These data indicate that we are adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 0.75 and that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic summation of the results for individual load cases.) Press the Add button.
Figure 1. 56 Now that we have completed the task of creating all 3 load cases, let us Close the Add New Load Cases dialog box. Our next step is to associate load case 1 with member 2. Follow these steps. a. Select the first load reference in the Load dialog box (UNI GY -2.5 kip/ft). b. Make sure that the Use Cursor to Assign button is selected under the Assignment Method box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 27 of 199
c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to . d. Using the cursor, click on member 2. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the Esc button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.
Figure 1. 57 After the member load has been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 58 In a similar fashion, assign the second load case (FX 10 kip, ft) to Node 2. After assigning the joint load, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 59 Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the Ctrl key and pressing the S key.
Getting Started
1.5.11 Specifying The Analysis Type
The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We also need to obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the command: PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK Steps: To specify the Analysis command, first go to Analysis/Print Page from the left side of the screen. By Default, the Analysis sub-page from 1. the second row is in focus as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 28 of 199
2.
Figure 1. 60 In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, make sure that the Perform Analysis tab is selected. Then, check the Statics Check print option. Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
Figure 1. 61 Let us save the data once again using the File | Save option.
Getting Started
1.5.12 Specifying Post Analysis Print Commands
We would like to obtain the member end forces and support reactions written into the output file. This requires the specification of the following commands: PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4 Steps:
1.
The dialog box for specifying the above commands is nested in the Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis | Print page.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 29 of 199
Figure 1. 62 2. 3. Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right hand side of the screen.
Figure 1. 63 4. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the Member Forces tab and click on the Assign button followed by the Close button.
Figure 1. 64 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 except for selecting both the supports and selecting the Support Reactions tab in the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box. (Recall that the supports can be selected by turning the Nodes Cursor on, holding the Ctrl key down, and clicking on the supports.) After clicking on the Assign button, Close the dialog box. At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box should resemble the figure shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 30 of 199
Figure 1. 65 Save the work using the File | Save menu option.
Getting Started
1.5.13 Short-listing The Load Cases To Be Used In Steel Design
The steel design has to be performed for load cases 1 and 3 only per the specification at the beginning of this tutorial. To instruct the program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we have to use the LOAD LIST command. The command will appear in the STAAD file as : LOAD LIST 1 3 Steps: 1. In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading | Load List option as shown below.
2.
Figure 1. 66 A Load List dialog box comes up. From the Load Cases list box on the left, double click on 1: DEAD + LIVE and 3: 75 Percent of [DL+LL+WL] to send them to the Load List box on the right, as shown below. Then click on the OK button to dismiss the dialog box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 31 of 199
Figure 1. 67
Getting Started
1.5.14 Specifying Steel Design Parameters
The specifications listed in section 2.2 of this tutorial require us to provide values for some of the terms used in steel design because the default values of those terms are not suitable. The corresponding commands to be generated are:
PARAMETER CODE AISC FYLD 5760 ALL UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3 UNB 10.0 MEMB 23 TRACK 2 MEMB 2 3 SELECT MEMB 2 3
Steps: 1. To specify steel design parameters, go to Design | Steel Page from the left side of the screen. Make sure that under the Current Code selections on the top right hand side, AISC ASD is selected.
Figure 1. 68 2. Click on the Define Parameters button in the Steel Design dialog box.
Figure 1. 69 3. In the Design Parameters dialog box that comes up, select the Fyld tab. Then, provide the Yield Strength as 5760 Kip/ft 2 and click on the Assign button followed by the close button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 32 of 199
Figure 1. 70 4. To define the remaining parameters, repeat steps 2 to 4 except for selecting the parameters and providing the values listed below. Parameter UNT UNB TRACK Value 10 10 2
5. When all the parameters have been added, click on the Close button in the Design Parameters dialog box. 6. The next step is to assign these parameters to specific members of the model. From looking at the requirements listed in the beginning of this tutorial, we know that the FYLD parameter is to be assigned to all the members, while the remaining parameters are to assigned to members 2 and 3. As before, use the Use Cursor to Assign method to assign these parameters.
Figure 1. 71 After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Steel Design dialog box will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 72 7. To specify the SELECT command, click on the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog box as shown below. The SELECT command is an instruction to the program to fetch and assign the least-weight cross-section which satisfies all the code requirements (PASSes) for the member.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 33 of 199
Figure 1. 73 8. In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the Select tab. Since members 2 and 3 are already selected, let us straightaway click on the Assign button followed by the Close button.
Figure 1. 74 9. Once again, we need to associate this command with members 2 and 3. You may either use the Use Cursor to Assign method or first select members 2 and 3 and then use the Assign to Selected Beams option. After the parameters are assigned, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. Let us save our structure by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Getting Started
1.5.15 Re-specifying The Analysis Command
When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect this new stiffness distribution. The command to be generated is hence: PERFORM ANALYSIS Steps: 1. To specify the Analysis command, repeat steps 1 and 2 of Section 1.5.11 of this tutorial. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that comes up, select the Perform Analysis tab. Since we are not interested in a statics check report once again, let us check the No Print option. Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. We should again save the work using File | Save.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 34 of 199
Getting Started
1.5.16 Re-specifying The TRACK Parameter

The final calculation we need to do is make sure the current set of member properties pass the code requirements based on the up-to-date member forces. This will require that we do a code checking operation again. To restrict the output produced to a reasonable level, we specify the TRACK parameter again as:
TRACK 1 ALL
Steps: 1. To define and assign 1.0 for the TRACK parameter, repeat steps 1 to 4 of Section 1.5.14 of this tutorial. 2. Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) Then, assign this parameter to all the members.
Getting Started
1.5.17 Specifying The Check Code Command

The analysis operation carried out in response to the command in Section 1.5.15 will create a new set of member forces. These forces will very likely be quite different from those which were used in the member selection operation (see the commands of section 1.5.14). Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely able from the standpoint of the design code requirements to carry these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the up-todate cross sections of the members, and the latest member forces, will provide us with a status report on this issue. The command to be generated is hence: CHECK CODE ALL Steps: 1. If you have wandered away from the Steel Design page, from the Commands menu on top of the screen, select Design | Steel Design. 2. Click on the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog box as shown below.
Figure 1. 75 3. In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the Check Code tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 35 of 199
Figure 1. 76 4. Since the CHECK CODE command has to be assigned to all the members, the easiest way to do that is to click on the Assign to View button.
Figure 1. 77 We have now completed the tasks for assigning the input for this model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save option.
Getting Started
2.9 Graphical Post Processing
STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. For this tutorial problem, you shall perform the following tasks:

Annotate the structure with different labels Create Bending Moment Diagram on screen Display the Dimensions on the structure Display Loads on the structure
For information on generating Customized Reports, please refer to the Tutorial Problem 2, described in Chapter 3. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. The Post Processing mode is invoked from the Mode menu as shown in Figure 2.57.
Select the Post Processing option from the Mode menu. The Results Setup dialog box (shown in Figure 2.58) appears. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For our case, select all Load Cases. Then click OK.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 36 of 199
Notice the tabbed Page Control bar and the menu bar change to offer the post processing functions. You shall now annotate the view of the structure displayed in the Main Window area. Select the Symbols and Labels icon from the toolbar.
From the Labels tab of the Diagrams dialog box (see Figure 2.60), select Node Numbers, Beam Numbers, Property References and Supports. Select the OK button to see the changes.
Figure 2.61 shows the structure with the annotations.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 37 of 199
Using the Front View icon from the toolbar, change the view of the structure to the XY plane.
You shall now display the bending moment diagrams on the structure. Select the Results menu. Then select the Bending Moment option to view the bending moment diagrams on the model. In the main drawing area, a diagram similar to the one shown in Figure 2.66 is displayed.
You can display the Bending Moment values on the diagram as well. To display the values of the bending moments at the ends and midpoints of the members, select the View Value option from the Results menu. The dialog box of Figure 2.65 appears.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 38 of 199
From the Ranges tab, select All members. From the Beam Results tab, select the Ends and Midpoint checkboxes under the Bending group. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box. Maximize the Whole Structure window to get a better view. Figure 2.66 shows the bending moment diagrams on the structure. To fit the diagram within the bounds of the drawing area, select View | Zoom | Zoom Out.
Now let us display the bending moment diagrams for load case 2. Select the Symbols and Labels icon from the toolbar. Select the Loads and Results tab. Choose Load Case 2: WIND FROM LEFT from the Load case list box, and None for Deflection as shown in Figure 2.67.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 39 of 199
Click the OK button and the diagram shown below will be displayed.
You shall now display the structure with dimensions as well as applied loads. Select the Symbols and Labels icon from the toolbar. From the Loads and Results tab, deselect Bending zz and select the Loads checkbox. Select load case 1: DEAD + LIVE from the Load Case list box. Click Apply followed by OK. Now display the dimension of the members using the Dimension icon (shown below). The option Dimension to View is active. Click on the Display button, and the dimensions of the members will appear alongside the members.
At this point, the diagram looks like the one shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 40 of 199
You may save the screen shot by clicking on the Take Picture icon (shown below). This picture may be included in custom reports. See Chapter 3 for tutorial on generating custom reports.
For detailed information on the Post Processing features, please refer to the Post Processing section in the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment manual.
Getting Started
1.6 Viewing The Input Command File
Steps: Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved above. The contents of the file can be viewed either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.
Figure 1. 78
Figure 1. 79 A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 41 of 199
Figure 1. 80 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor. We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). As we saw in Section 1.1, we could also have created the same model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 1.8 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
Getting Started
1.7 Creating the Model using the Command File
Let us now use the command file method to create the model for the above structure. The commands used in the command file are described later in this section. The STAAD.Pro command file may be created using the built-in editor, the procedure for which is explained further below in this section. Any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data, comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general appearance.
Figure 1. 81 To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the procedure explained in Section 1.3. Next, follow step 1 of Section 1.4.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 42 of 199
Figure 1. 82 You will then encounter the dialog box shown in figure shown below. In that dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor.
Figure 1. 83 At this point, the editor screen similar to the one shown below will open.
Figure 1. 84 Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold below (You dont have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The required letters are underlined. (PLANE = PLA = plane = pla)
STAAD PLANE PORTAL FRAME
Every STAAD.Pro input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame (in the XY plane). The remainder of the words are the title of the problem, which is optional. If a line is typed with an asterisk in the first column, it signifies that the line is a comment line and should not be executed. For example, one could have put the optional title above on a separate line as follows.
* PORTAL FRAME UNIT FEET KIP
Specify the force and length units for the commands to follow.
JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0.
Joint numbers and their corresponding global X and Y coordinates are provided above. For example, 3 20 15. indicates that node 3 has an X coordinate of 20 ft and a Y coordinate of 15 ft. Note that the reason for not providing the Z coordinate is because the structure is a plane frame. If this were a space frame, the Z coordinate would also be required. Semicolons (;) are used as line separators. In other words, data which is normally put on multiple lines can be put on one line by separating them with a semicolon.
MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4
The members are defined by the joints to which they are connected.
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 TABLE ST W12X35 2 TABLE ST W14X34
Members 1 and 3 are assigned a W12X35 section from the built-in AMERICAN steel table. Member 2 has been assigned a W14X34. The word ST stands for standard single section. Sections 5.20.1 through 5.20.5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual explain the convention for assigning member property names.
UNIT INCHES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 43 of 199
CONSTANTS E 29000.0 ALL POISSON 0.3 ALL
The length unit is changed from FEET to INCHES to facilitate input of the modulus of elasticity (E). The keyword CONSTANT is required before material properties such as E, density, Poissons ratio, coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPHA) etc. can be provided. See Section 5.26 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for more information.
MEMBER OFFSET 2 START 6.0 0. 0. 2 END -6.0 0. 0.
The beam member is physically connected to the 2 columns at the face of the column, and not at the column centerline. This creates a rigid zone, about half the depth of the columns, at the 2 ends of the beam 2. This rigid zone is taken advantage of using member offsets (It is the users choice whether or not he/she wishes to use these). So, the above commands define that member 2 is eccentrically connected or OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global X direction, 0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is offset by negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. See Section 5.25 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for more information.
PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL
The above command is self-explanatory. The information that is printed includes start and end joint numbers (incidence), member length, beta angle and member end releases.
SUPPORTS 1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED
A fixed support is located at joint 1 and a pinned support (fixed for translations, released for rotations) at joint 4. More information on the support specification is available in Section 5.27 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
UNIT FT
The length unit is changed to FEET to facilitate input of loads.

LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -2.5
The above commands identify a loading condition. DEAD + LIVE is an optional title to identify this load case. A UNIformly distributed MEMBER LOAD of 2.5 kips/ft is acting on member 2 in the negative global Y direction. Member Load specification is explained in Section 5.32 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10.
The above commands identify a second load case. This load is a JOINT LOAD. A 10 kip force is acting at joint 2 in the global X direction.
LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) 1 0.75 2 0.75
This command identifies a combination load with an optional title. The second line provides the components of the load combination case - primary load cases and the factors by which they should be individually multiplied.
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis and produce a report of static equilibrium checks. Section 5.37 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual offers information on the various analysis options available.
PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4
The above print commands are self-explanatory. The member forces are in the member local axes while support reactions are in the global axes.
LOAD LIST 1 3 PARAMETERS CODE AISC UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3 UNB 10.0 MEMB 2 3 FYLD 5760 ALL TRACK 2.0 MEMB 2 3 SELECT MEMBER 2 3
The above sequence of commands is used to initiate the steel design process. The command PARAMETERS is followed by the various steel design parameters. Parameters are specified typically when their values differ from the built-in program defaults. Specifications of the AISC ASD code are to be followed. A parameter list for the AISC code is available in Table 3.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. ALL members have 10 ft unsupported length for the top and bottom flange (UNT and UNB). UNT and UNB are used to compute the allowable compressive stress in bending. The yield strength of steel is specified as 5760 ksf (40 ksi) since it is different from the default value of 36 ksi. The TRACK parameter controls the level of description of the output, 2.0 being the most detailed. The LOAD LIST command lists the load cases (1 and 3) to be used in the design. The SELECT MEMBER command asks the program to come up with the most economical section for members 2 and 3 in the context of the above analysis.
PERFORM ANALYSIS
When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect this new stiffness distribution. The above command instructs the program to do another cycle of analysis.
PARAMETER TRACK 1 ALL
The TRACK parameter is re-specified. It controls the level of information produced in the steel design output. We have lowered it from 2.0 we specified earlier to 1.0 since we arent interested in the highest level of detail at this time.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 44 of 199
CHECK CODE ALL
The analysis operation carried out earlier will create a new set of member forces. These forces will very likely be quite different from those which were used in the member selection operation. Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely able from the standpoint of the design code requirements to carry these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the up-to-date cross sections of the members, and the latest member forces, will provide us with a status report on this issue.
FINISH
A STAAD run is terminated using the FINISH command. Save the file and return to the main screen. This concludes the session on generating our model as a command file using the built-in editor. If you wish to perform the analysis and design, you may proceed directly to Section 2.8 of this manual. The on-screen post-processing facilities are explained in Section 1.10. (Remember that without successfully completing the analysis and design, the post-processing facilities will not be accessible.)
Getting Started
1.8 Performing Analysis/Design
STAAD.Pro performs Analysis and Design simultaneously. In order to perform Analysis and Design, select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu.
Figure 1. 85 If the structure has not been saved after the last change was made, you should save the structure first by using the Save command from the File menu. When you select the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu, the following dialog box appears:
Figure 1. 86 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine. Click on the Run Analysis button. As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the figure below.
Figure 1. 87 Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the above dialog box:
Figure 1. 88 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 45 of 199
analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 3.10 offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modeling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we current are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
Getting Started
1.9 Viewing The Output File
During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file. This file provides important information on whether the analysis were performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported in the output file. We can access the output file using the method explained at the end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File | View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu. The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in the next few pages.
Figure 1. 89 The STAAD.Pro output file is displayed through a file viewer called SproView. This viewer allows us to set the text font for the entire file and print the output file to a printer. Use the appropriate File menu option from the menu bar.
Figure 1. 90 By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire Input also. You may choose not to print the echo of the Input commands in the Output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set Echo option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button. It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered during the analysis & design can disable access to the post-processing mode the graphical screens where results can be viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is a crucial indicator of whether or not the structure satisfies the engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 46 of 199
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 47 of 199
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 48 of 199
Getting Started
1.10 Post-Processing
STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks: Display deflection diagrams Annotate Displacements Display the force and moment diagrams. Change the degree of freedom for which the force/moment diagram is plotted
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 49 of 199
Annotate the force diagram Displaying dimensions of members
Getting Started
1.10.1 Going To The Post-Processing Mode
Steps: 1. At the end of section 1.8, we saw how one could go directly from the Analysis window to the post-processing screen. However, the formal method of accessing the Post Processing mode is either by clicking on the Post-Processing icon from the top toolbar or from the Mode menu as shown in the figures below.
Figure 1. 91
Figure 1. 92 2. The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For this tutorial, let us select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button.
Figure 1. 93 Notice that in the Post-Processing mode, the tabbed Page Control bar and the menu bar change to offer the post processing functions.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 50 of 199
Figure 1. 94 Menu Bar in Modeling Mode Menu Bar in Post-Processing Mode
Figure 1. 95
Getting Started
1.10.2 Annotating The Displacements
Steps: The screen will now look like the figure shown below.
Figure 1. 96 The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram for load case 1 (DEAD + LIVE). The title at the bottom of the diagram is indicative of that aspect. If you, lets say, wandered off into any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page control area on the left side.
Figure 1. 197 Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
Figure 1. 98 The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes, specify the node numbers in the node list.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 51 of 199
Figure 1. 99 We will annotate the results for all the nodes. So, keep the button on All. From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 1. 100 The following figure shows the annotated deflection diagram for load case 1.
Figure 1. 101
Getting Started
1.10.3 Displaying Force/Moment Diagrams
Steps: The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be found in the form of the Mz icon show in the diagram below
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 52 of 199
which becomes active.
Figure 1. 102
Figure 1. 103 The option for selecting the forces/moment diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu option - as shown below.
Figure 1. 104
Getting Started
1.10.4 Annotating The Force/Moment Diagram
Steps: Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 53 of 199
Figure 1. 105 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Ranges tab and select All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list.
Figure 1. 106 We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button on All. From the Beam Results tab, check the Ends and Mid Point options under the Bending section. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 1. 107 The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load case.
Figure 1. 108
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 54 of 199
1.10.5 Changing The Degree Of Freedom For Which Forces Diagram Is Plotted
Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of freedom Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment-Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results. Let us select Shear yy and select load case 3 (75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) as shown below.
Figure 1. 109 The resulting figure is shown below.
Figure 1. 110 All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a tick mark in the Diagrams dialog box. The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off specific degrees of freedom.
Figure 1. 111 For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f) has been assigned a different color (see Diagrams dialog box shown above). One may change the color for that d.o.f. by clicking on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and make a new choice from the color palette.
Figure 1. 112 The appearance of the diagram may also be set to one of the 3 Hatch, Fill or Outline by turning on the relevant option in the dialog box shown earlier.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 55 of 199
Figure 1. 113
Getting Started
1.10.6 Displaying The Dimensions Of The Members
To display the dimension of the members, click on the Dimension icon. Alternatively, one may select the Dimension Beams option from the Tools menu. In the dialog box that opens, the option Dimension to View is active. Click on the Display button followed by the Close button, and the dimensions of the members will appear alongside the members.
Figure 1. 114
Figure 1. 115 The diagram will look like the one shown below.
Figure 1. 116 We can opt to save the screenshot by clicking on the Take Picture icon (shown below). This picture may be included in custom reports. See Chapter 2 for a tutorial on taking pictures as well as generating custom reports.
Figure 1. 117 For obtaining a quick print of the plot on the screen, select the Print Current View icon as shown below.
Figure 1. 118 For detailed information on the Post Processing features, please refer to the Post Processing section in the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment manual.
Getting Started
2. Tutorial Problem 2: RC Framed Structure
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 56 of 199
This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for creating the model of a reinforced concrete framed structure using STAAD.Pro. The following topics are covered :

Starting the Program Creating Joints and Members Switching On Node and Beam Labels Specifying Member Properties Specifying Material Constants Specifying Member Orientation using Beta Angle Specifying Supports Specifying Loads Specifying the Analysis Type Specifying the parameters and instructions for Concrete Design Performing Analysis and Design Viewing results using the Output File Viewing results on screen both graphically and numerically Producing customized reports
Getting Started
2.1 Methods Of Creating The Model

As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two methods of creating the structure data: a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. b) using the command file. Both methods are explained in this tutorial also. The graphical method is explained first, from Section 2.2 onwards. Section 2.8 describes the process of creating the model using the command file method and the STAAD.Pro text editor.
Getting Started
The structure for this project is a 2 bay, 2 story reinforced concrete frame. The figure below shows the structure. Our goal is to create the model, assign all required input, and perform the analysis and concrete design.
Figure 2. 1 BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE Member properties DATA Beams 2 & 5 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X 350 mm depth Columns 1 & 4 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X 300 mm depth Column 3 : Circular, 350 mm diameter
Member Orientation All members except column 4 : Default Column 4 : Rotated by 90 degrees with respect to default condition Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity : 22 KN/sq.mm Density : 25 kn/cu.m Poisson's Ratio : 0.17
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 57 of 199
Supports Loads
Base of all columns : Fixed Load case 1 : Dead Load Selfweight of the structure. Beams 2 & 5 : 400 kg/m in global Y downward Load case 2 : Live Load Beams 2 & 5 : 600 kg/m in global Y downward Load case 3 : Wind Load Beam 1 : 300 kg/m along positive global X Beam 4 : 500 kg/m along positive global X Load Case 4 : DEAD + LIVE L1 X 1.2 + L2 X 1.5 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not Load Combination) Load Case 5 : DEAD + WIND L1 X 1.1 + L2 X 1.3 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not Load Combination)
Getting Started
2.3 Starting The Program
Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program group.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 58 of 199
Figure 2. 3 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog at Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu. Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types Steel, Concrete, Aluminum selected from the programs library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.) If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the Metric units (KN, Meter, etc.).
Figure 2. 4
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 59 of 199
Getting Started
1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model. The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Space. We choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name Structure? (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name rcframe. A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
Figure 2. 7 2. In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially construct the model. Add Beams, Add Plates or Add Solids are, respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of structural templates which the program comes equipped with. Those template models can be extracted and modified parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts. If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command language, the Open STAAD Editor box can take us to the STAAD editor. Please remember that all these options are also available from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss this dialog box. Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 2.8. For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.
Figure 2. 8
Getting Started
2.5 Elements Of The STAAD.Pro Screen
The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where the model generation process takes place. It is important to familiarize ourselves with the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 60 of 199
components of that window before we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window in details.
Getting Started
2.6 Building The STAAD.Pro Model

We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are described in the following sections.
Getting Started
2.6.1 Generating The Model Geometry
The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the structure shown in section 2.2 are : JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 0.0 3.5 0.0 3 6.0 3.5 0.0 ; 4 6.0 0.0 0.0 5 6.0 0.0 6.0 ; 6 6.0 3.5 6.0 MEMBER INCIDENCE 112;223;334;456;536 Steps: We selected the Add Beam option earlier to enable us to add beams and columns to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main 1. drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X,Y,Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area.
2.
Figure 2. 9 A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. In our structure, the segment consisting of members 1 to 3, and nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane. So, in this dialog box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 12 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 7 above the origin along Y, and a spacing of 0.5 meter between lines along both X and Y (see figure below) we can draw a frame 6m X 3.5m, adequate for our segment. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 61 of 199
4.
Figure 2. 11 In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by beam members. (0, 3.5), (6, 3.5) and (6, 0) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the frame will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
5.
Figure 2. 12 At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 62 of 199
6.
Figure 2. 14 It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command. Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the dialog box that appears, choose Labels (as shown in the figure below). Alternatively, one may access this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up.
Switching On Node And Beam Labels

7.
8.
Figure 2.15 In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK .
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 63 of 199
Figure 2. 17 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box. 9. Examining the structure shown in section 2.2 of this tutorial, it can be seen that members 4 and 5 can be easily generated if we could first create a copy of members 1 and 2 and then rotate those copied units about a vertical line passing through the point (6, 0, 0, that is, node 4) by 90 degrees. Fortunately, such a facility does exist which can be executed in a single step. It is called Circular Repeat and is available under the Geometry menu. First, select Members 1 and 2 using the Beams Cursor . . (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) 10. Then, either click on the Circular Repeat icon from the appropriate toolbar, or, go to the Geometry | Circular Repeat menu option as shown below.
11.
Figure 2. 18 In the 3D Circular dialog box that comes up, specify the Axis of Rotation as Y, Total Angle as 90 degrees, No. of Steps as 1 and the vertical line passing through Node 4. Instead of specifying as passing through Node 4, one may also specify the X and Z co-ordinates as 6 and 0 respectively. Leave the Link Steps box unchecked and click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 19 After completing the circular repeat procedure, the model will look as shown below. Before
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 64 of 199
Figure 2. 20 After
Figure 2. 21 If any of the members are presently selected, let us unselect them by clicking anywhere else in the drawing area. Then, let us once again save the work by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Getting Started
As a matter of convenience, for specifying member properties for our structure, it is simpler if our length units are millimeter instead of meter. This will require changing the current length units of input. The commands to be generated are: UNIT MMS KN Steps: Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar. 1.
Figure 2. 22 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Unit menu option as shown in next figure.
2.
Figure 2. 23 In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Millimeter and click on the OK button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 65 of 199
Figure 2. 24
Getting Started
Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams and columns. For those of us curious to know the equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they are :
MEMB PROP 1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275 2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275 3 PRIS YD 350
Steps: 1. Click on the Property Page icon located on the Structure Tools toolbar.
Figure 2. 26 2. In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up. The property type we wish to assign is called PRISMATIC, and is available under the Define button in the Properties dialog box as shown below.
Figure 2. 27
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 66 of 199
4. In the dialog box that comes up, select the Rectangle tab. Notice that the field called Material is presently on the checked mode. If we keep it that way, the material properties of concrete (E, Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be assigned along with the cross-section name. The material property values so assigned will be the program defaults. We do not want default values, instead we will assign our own values later on. Consequently, let us uncheck the Material box. Then, enter the following values: YD = 300mm ZD = 275mm Finally, click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 2. 28 4. To create the second member property (PRIS YD 350 ZD 275), provide 350 for YD and 275 for ZD (instead of 300 and 275) and click on the Add button. To create the third member property, in the Property dialog box, select the Circle option. Specify the diameter (YD) as 350 mm. Once again, uncheck the Material box and click on the Add button.
Figure 2. 29 Now that we have finished creating the member properties, let us Close this dialog box. The next step is to assign these member properties in the following manner: Rect 0.30x0.28 members 1 and 4 Rect 0.35x0.28 members 2 and 5 Cir 0.35 member 3 To assign the member properties, follow these steps: a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog box (Rect 0.30x28). b. Make sure that the Use Cursor to Assign button is selected under the Assignment Method box. c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 4. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the Esc button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.
Figure 2. 30 In a similar fashion, assign the remaining properties. After all the member properties have been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 67 of 199
Figure 2. 31 We ought to save the model once again by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Getting Started
2.6.4 Specifying Geometric Constants
In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way. Orientation refers to the directions along which the width and depth of the cross section are aligned with respect to the global axis system. The rules which dictate this default orientation are explained in Section 1 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. We wish to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel to local Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis. This requires applying a beta angle of 90 degrees. The command which needs to be generated is : BETA 90 MEMB 4 Steps: 1. Select the Beta Angle tab in the Properties dialog box . 2. In the dialog box, specify the angle as 90 degrees. Select member 4 using the Beams Cursor . Notice that as we select the member, the Assignment Method automatically sets to Assign to Selected Beams. Click on the Assign button. Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member.
Figure 2. 32 (An alternative method for assign beta angles is the following. First select the member for which you wish to assign the beta angle. Then, go to the Commands | Geometric Constants | Beta Angle menu option. Specify the Angle in Degrees to be 90, ensure that the assignment method is To Selection and click on OK. )
Figure 2. 33 One may view the orientation of the member local axes by going to the View | Structure diagrams | Labels menu option and switching on Beam Orientation.
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 68 of 199

At the time of assigning member properties, we deliberately chose not to assign the material constants simultaneously, since we wanted to specify values which are different from the built-in defaults. The desired values are listed at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands we wish to generate in the STAAD input file are:
CONSTANTS E 22 ALL UNIT METER DENSITY 25.0 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL
Steps: 1. From the Commands menu, select Material Constants. To define the Modulus of Elasticity, select the Elasticity option as shown below.
2.
Figure 2. 34 In the Material Constant dialog box that appears, enter 22 in the Enter Value box. Since the value has to be assigned to all the members of the structure, the current setting of the assignment method, namely, To View, allows us to achieve this easily. Then, click on OK
3.
Figure 2. 35 For specifying the DENSITY constant, it will be convenient if we change our length units to meters. To change the length units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the Structure toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Units menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the length units as Meter.
4. 5.
Figure 2. 36 Following the steps 1 and 2 above, we choose Commands | Material Constants | Density, specify the value as 25KN/m 3 , and assign To View. To define the POISSONS RATIO, using the similar procedure as described above, provide the value 0.17 to all members in the View.
Getting Started
The base nodes of all the columns are restrained against translation and rotation about all the 3 global axes. In other words, fixed supports are to be specified at those nodes. The commands to be generated are :
SUPPORTS 1 4 5 FIXED
Steps: 1. To create supports, click on the Support Page icon located in the Structure Tools toolbar as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 69 of 199
2. 3.
Figure 2. 38 In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up. Since we already know that nodes 1, 4 and 5 are to be associated with the Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor , select these nodes. Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below.
4.
Figure 2. 39 The Create Support dialog box comes up. In the dialog box, the Fixed tab happens to be the default which is convenient for this case. Click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 2. 40 After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 70 of 199
Figure 2. 41 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-select all selected nodes and prevent accidental assignment of unwanted data to those nodes. As earlier, save the work completed so far by going to the File menu and clicking on the Save command.
Getting Started
5 load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. Notice that cases 4 and 5 are to be generated not as the standard combination type, but using a combination load type called REPEAT LOAD. The instructions at the beginning of this tutorial require us to analyze this structure using an analysis type called PDelta. A Pdelta analysis is a non-linear type of analysis. In STAAD, to accurately account for the PDelta effects arising from the simultaneous action of previously defined horizontal and vertical loads, those previous cases must be included as components of the combination case using the REPEAT LOAD type.
UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1 MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY 400 LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY 600 LOAD 3 WIND LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GX 300 4 UNI GX 500 LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE REPEAT LOAD 1 1.2 2 1.5 LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND REPEAT LOAD 1 1.1 3 1.3
Steps: LOAD CASE 1 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the Structure Tools tool bar.
Figure 2. 42 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left side of the screen.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 71 of 199
2.
Figure 2. 43 A window titled Load appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight the Load Cases Details option and click on the Add button.
3.
Figure 2. 44 The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC . This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
4.
Figure 2. 46 To generate and assign the selfweight load type, first highlight DEAD LOAD. You will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog box shows more options now.
5.
Figure 2. 47 In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 72 of 199
Figure 2. 48 Let use close this dialog box before we proceed to the next step. 6. Load 1 contains an additional load component, the member loads on members 2 and 5. However, notice that the load values are listed in the beginning of this tutorial in kg and meter units. Rather than convert those values to the current input units, we will conform to those units. The current input units, which we last set while specifying Density, are KN and METER. We have to change the force unit to Kilogram. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Kilogram. STAAD has a limitation in that one cannot change the units while editing load cases. If we attempt to, the following message will be displayed.
Figure 2. 49 Click on OK. Close the Add New Load Items dialog box. Then, go to the Setup Page as shown below (or any other page).
Figure 2. 50 As before, click on the Input Units icon from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Kilogram. Again, click on General | Load page to resume creating the load cases. To create the member load, first click on the expression DEAD LOAD followed by the Add button. Then, click on the Member Load item in the Add New Load Items dialog box.
7.
8.
9.
Figure 2. 51 Select the Uniform Force option and specify GY as the Direction and -400 as the Force. For these members, since the local Y axis coincides with the global Y axis, one may choose the direction of the load as either Y or GY, they will both have the same effect. (One may view the orientation of the member local axes by going to View | Structure Diagrams | Labels | Beam Orientation.) The negative value signifies that the load acts along the negative GY direction. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.. The member load we just created has to be assigned to members 2 and 5. First, make sure that the expression UNI GY -400Kg/m is selected in the Load dialog box as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 73 of 199
Figure 2. 52 10. Then, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor . (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) Then click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign button.
Figure 2. 53 As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed wish to associate the loadcase with the selected beams. So, let us choose Yes.
Figure 2. 54 After the load has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below:
Figure 2. 55 LOAD CASE 2 11. The next step is to create the second load case which again contains MEMBER LOADs. Highlight the Load Cases Details option. Highlight Load Cases Details and click on the Add button. Once again, the Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up.
Figure 2. 56 In this dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, we will leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as LIVE LOAD and click on the Add button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 74 of 199
Figure 2. 57 12. Next, to create the member load, highlight LIVE LOAD as shown below.
Figure 2. 58 13. Follow steps 6 to 9 to create and assign a uniformly distributed force of -600Kg/m on members 2 and 5. After the second load case has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below:
Figure 2. 59 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. LOAD CASE 3 14. Creating the third load case, which again has MEMBER LOADs, involves the same procedure as that for load case 2. As before, first highlight the Load Cases Details option in the Create New Load Item dialog box to initiate the third load case. Enter WIND LOAD as the Title for Load Case 3. 15. To apply the load on member 1, follow the procedure similar to that in steps 6 to 9. The only differences are, the member which receives this load is 1, the Direction is GX and the Force is +300Kg/m. 16. Similarly, for member 4 and the third load case, specify the Force as 500Kg/m and the Direction as GX. After the third load case has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below:
Figure 2. 60 LOAD CASE 4 17. We now come to the point where we have to create load case 4 as (1.2 x Load 1) + (1.5 x Load 2). We saw in the beginning of this section that we should be creating a REPEAT LOAD type of combination, and not the LOAD COMBINATION type. To initiate load case 4, highlight the Load Cases Details option in the Create New Load Item dialog box and specify the title as DEAD + LIVE.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 75 of 199
18. Then, click on DEAD + LIVE in the Loads dialog box as shown below.
Figure 2. 61 19. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, click on the Repeat Load option. Then, select Load Case 1 (DEAD LOAD), click on the button and enter the Factor as 1.2. (This indicates that the load data values from load case 1 are multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and the resulting values are utilized in load case 4.) 20. Similarly, select Load Case 2 (LIVE LOAD), click on the button and enter the Factor as 1.5,. The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown below. Click on the Add button.
Figure 2. 62 No further operation is required for load case 4. The recipients of the loads in load case 4 are automatically chosen to be the very same ones to which the components of the REPEAT LOAD cases (loads 1 and 2) were assigned. The structure will now look similar to the one shown below.
Figure 2. 63 LOAD CASE 5 21. Since load cases 4 and 5 are near identical in nature, the same procedure used in creating load case 4 is applicable for case 5 also. Let us highlight the Load Cases Details option in the Create New Load Item dialog box to initiate the fifth load case. Enter DEAD + WIND as the Title for Load Case 5. 21. Follow steps 18 to 20 except for associating a Factor of 1.1 with the first load case and a Factor of 1.3 with the third load case. The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown below. Click on the Add button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 76 of 199
Figure 2. 64 Since we have completed creating all the load cases, we may now click on the Close button to dismiss the Add New Load Items dialog box. The structure will now look similar to the one shown below.
Figure 2. 65 Let us save the work completed so far by going to the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the Ctrl key and pressing the S key.
Getting Started
The analysis type for this structure is called P-Delta. Since this problem involves concrete beam and column design per the ACI code, secondorder analysis is required and has to be done on factored loads acting simultaneously. The factored loads have been created earlier as cases 4 and 5. Now is the time to specify the analysis type. The command for a pdelta analysis will appear in the STAAD file as: PDELTA ANALYSIS Steps: Go to Analysis/Print Page on the left side of the screen. 1.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 77 of 199
Figure 2. 66 2. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the PDelta Analysis tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
Figure 2. 67 Save the work again using the Save option of the File menu.
Getting Started
2.6.9 Short-listing The Load Cases To Be Used In Concrete Design
The concrete design has to be performed for load cases 4 and 5 only since only those are the factored cases. To instruct the program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we have to use the LOAD LIST command. The command will appear in the STAAD file as : LOAD LIST 4 5 Steps: 1. In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading | Load List option as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 78 of 199
2.
Figure 2. 68 In the Load List dialog box that comes up, select load cases 4 (DEAD + LIVE) and 5 (DEAD + WIND) by holding the Ctrl key down. Then, click on the button. Load cases 4 and 5 will be selected and placed in the Load List selection box as shown below. Click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 69
Getting Started
2.6.10 Specifying Concrete Design Parameters
Among the various terms which appear in the equations for design of concrete beams and columns, some of them can be user controlled, such as, the grade of concrete, or the maximum size of reinforcing bar one may wish to use. Such terms are called concrete design parameters. For the ACI code, a list of these parameters is available in Section 3 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. The parameters we wish to use, and the corresponding command which ought to appear in the STAAD input file are : UNIT MMS NEWTON CODE ACI CLT 25 ALL CLB 30 ALL CLS 25 ALL FC 25 ALL FYMAIN 415 ALL TRACK 1 ALL Steps: Before we can start assigning the parameters, we want our force units to be Newton and our length units to be millimeter. We last set the 1. units during load specification as Kg and Meter. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Inpu Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Newton and the length units as Millimeter. Next, go to Design | Concrete Page from the left side of the screen. Make sure that under the Current Code selections on the top right hand side, ACI is selected. Then, click on the Define Parameters button in the Concrete Design dialog box.
2.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 79 of 199
3.
Figure 2. 70 In the Design Parameters dialog box that opens, select the Clt (Clear Cover for top) tab. Then, provide the value as 25mm and click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 2. 71 To define the remaining parameters, follow the above procedure and provide the following values. Parameter Value Clb 30 Cls 25 Fc 25 Fymain 415 Track 1.0 When all the above parameters have been assigned, click on the Close button in the Design Parameters dialog box. After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Concrete Design dialog box will look as shown below. 4.
Figure 2. 72 The next step is to assign these parameters to all the members in our model. The easiest way to do that is to use the Assign To View method. Follow the steps as shown in the figure below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 80 of 199
Figure 2. 73 Let us save our structure once again using the Save option of the File menu.
Getting Started
2.6.11 Specifying Design Commands
Design commands are the actual instructions for the design of beams and columns. We intend to design beams 2 and 5 and columns 1, 3 and 4. The commands to be generated are : DESIGN BEAM 2 5 DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4 Steps: 1. Design commands are generated through the dialog boxes available under the Commands button in the Concrete Design dialog box. So, let us click on the Commands button as shown below.
2.
Figure 2. 74 In the Design Commands dialog box that comes up, select the DESIGN BEAM option and click on the Add button.
3.
Figure 2. 75 We also need to add a command for designing columns. So, select the DESIGN COLUMN option and click on Add button. After steps 2 and 3 are completed, let us Close this dialog box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 81 of 199
4.
The next step is to associate the Design Beam command with members 2 and 5 and the Design Column command with members 1, 3 and 4. To do this, as before, first highlight the expression DESIGN BEAM. Then, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor . Click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign button.
Figure 2. 76 As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed wish to associate the design command with the selected beams. So, let us say Yes.
Figure 2. 77 Similarly, assign the Design Column command to members 1, 3 and 4 This concludes the task of assigning all the input for our model. Let us Save the file one final time.
Getting Started
Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved above. The contents of the file can be viewed either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.
Figure 2.79 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor. We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). As we saw in Section 2.1, we could also have created the same model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 2.9 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 82 of 199
Getting Started
2.8 Creating The Model Using The Command File
Figure 2. 81 You will then encounter the dialog box shown below. In that dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor.
Figure 2. 82 At this point, the editor screen will open as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 83 of 199
Figure 2. 83 Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold below (You dont have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The required letters are underlined. (SPACE = SPA = space = spa) Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation.
STAAD SPACE RC FRAMED STRUCTURE
Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates.
UNIT METER KN
Specifies the unit to be used.

JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 0 ; 3 6 3.5 0 4 6 0 0 ; 5 6 0 6 ; 6 6 3.5 6
Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line.
MEMBER INCIDENCES 112;223;334 456;563
Defines the members by the joints they are connected to.

UNIT MMS KN MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275 2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275 3 PRIS YD 350
Member properties have been defined above using the PRISMATIC attribute for which YD (depth) and ZD (width) values are provided in MM unit. When YD and ZD are provided together, STAAD considers the section to be rectangular. When YD alone is specified, the section is considered to be circular. Details are available in Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CONSTANTS E 22 MEMB 1 TO 5
Material constant E (modulus of elasticity) is specified as 22KN/sq.mm following the command CONSTANTS.
UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS DENSITY 25.0 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL
Length unit is changed from MMS to METER to facilitate the input of Density. Next, the Poissons Ratio is specified.
BETA 90 MEMB 4
In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way (see Section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details.) In order to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel to local Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis, we need to apply a beta angle of 90 degrees.
SUPPORT 1 4 5 FIXED
Joints 1, 4 and 5 are defined as fixed supported.

UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of loads. Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title.
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
One of the components of load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards.
MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY -400
Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5.
LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD
Load case 2 is initiated along with an accompanying title.

Load 2 also contains member loads. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5.
LOAD 3 WIND LOAD

MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GX 300 4 UNI GX 500
Load 3 also contains member loads. GX indicates that the load is in the global X direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 1 and 4.
LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 84 of 199

REPEAT LOAD 1 1.2 2 1.5
Load case 4 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases specified earlier. We are instructing the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting simultaneously. The load data values from load case 1 are multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and the resulting values are utilized in load case 4. Similarly, the load data values from load case 2 are multiplied by a factor of 1.5, and the resulting values too are utilized in load case 4.
LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND

We are instructing the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 3 acting simultaneously.
PDELTA ANALYSIS
The PDELTA ANALYSIS command is an instruction to the program to execute a second-order analysis and account for P-delta effects. LOAD LIST 4 5 The above LOAD LIST command is a means of stating that all further calculations should be based on the results of load cases 4 and 5 only. The intent here is to restrict concrete design calculations to that for load cases 4 and 5 only.
START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE ACI UNIT MMS NEWTON CLT 25 ALL CLB 30 ALL CLS 25 ALL FC 25 ALL FYMAIN 415 ALL TRACK 1 ALL
We first line is the command that initiates the concrete design operation. The values for the concrete design parameters are defined in the above commands. Design is performed per the ACI Code. The length units are changed from METER to MMS to facilitate the input of the design parameters. Similarly, force units are changed from KG to NEWTON. The TRACK value dictates the extent of design related information which should be produced by the program in the output. The parameters specified include CLT(Clear cover for top surface), CLB (Clear cover for bottom surface), CLS (Clear cover for sides), FC(Strength of concrete), and FYMAIN(Ultimate strength of steel). These parameters are described in Section 3 of the Technical Reference Manual.
DESIGN BEAM 2 5 DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4
The above commands instruct the program to design beams 2 and 5 for flexure, shear and torsion, and to design columns 1, 3 and 4 for axial load and biaxial bending.
END CONCRETE DESIGN
This command terminates the concrete design operation.

FINISH
This command terminates the STAAD run. Let us save the file and exit the editor.
Getting Started
2.9 Performing The Analysis And Design
Figure 2. 85 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine. Click on the Run Analysis button. As the Analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the figure below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 85 of 199
Figure 2. 86 Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the above dialog box :
Figure 2. 87 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 2.10 offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modeling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we current are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
Getting Started
During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file. This file provides important information on whether the analysis was performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported in the output file. We can access the output file using the method explained at the end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File | View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu. The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in the next few pages.
Figure 2.89 By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire Input also. You may choose not to print the echo of the Input commands in the Output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set Echo option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button. It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered during the analysis & design can disable access to the post-processing mode the graphical screens where results can be viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is a crucial indicator of whether or not the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 86 of 199
structure satisfies the engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 87 of 199
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 88 of 199
Getting Started
STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks: Display deflection diagrams Annotate Displacements Change the Display units for displacement values shown in the tables. Switching between load cases for viewing deflection diagrams. Display the force and moment diagrams. Changing the degree of freedom for which the force/moment diagram is plotted Annotating the force diagram Changing the Display units for the force and moment values shown in the tables. Restricting the load cases for which results are viewed Using Member Query Viewing Concrete Design results using Query. Producing an on-screen report Taking pictures Creating Customized Reports
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 89 of 199

Figure 2. 90
Figure 2. 91 2. The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For our case, let us select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 92
Getting Started
2.11.2 Viewing The Deflection Diagram
The screen will now look like the figure shown below.
Figure 2. 93 The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram for load case 1 (DEAD LOAD). The title at the bottom of the diagram is
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 90 of 199
indicative of that aspect. If you, lets say, wandered off into any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page control area on the left side.
Figure 2.94 The option for selecting the deflection diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Deflection menu option - as shown below.
Figure 2. 95
Getting Started
2.11.3 Switching Between Load Cases For Viewing The Deflection Diagram
Steps: 1. To change the load case for which to view the deflection diagram, you may click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one you want.
2.
Figure 2. 96 Alternatively, either click on the Symbols and Labels icon or, go to View | Structure Diagrams menu option as shown below.
3.
Figure 2. 97 In either case, theDiagrams dialog box comes up. Select the Loads and Results tab and choose the desired load case from the Load Case list box. Then, click on OK.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 91 of 199
Figure 2. 98 The diagram below shows the deflected shape of the structure for load case 3.
Figure 2. 99 4. To display the deflection for say, load case 5 (DEAD + WIND), follow step 1 or 2 and select load case 5. The deflection of Load Case 3 will now displayed on the model as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 92 of 199
Figure 2. 100
Getting Started
2.11.4 Changing The Size Of The Deflection Diagram
Steps: If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the deflection plot, you may a) click on the Scale icon
Figure 2. 101 b) choose Scale from the Results menu
Figure 2. 102 or c) go to View | Structure Diagrams | Scales menu option. All of the above will bring up the following dialog box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 93 of 199
Figure 2. 103 In the Displacement field, specify a smaller number than what is currently listed, and click on OK. The deflection diagram should now be larger. In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down arrow keys.
Figure 2. 104
Getting Started
2.11.5 Annotating Displacements
Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on the screen. Steps: 1. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 94 of 199
Figure 2. 105 2. The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes, specify the node numbers in the node list.
Figure 2. 106 We will annotate the results for all nodes. So, keep the button on All. From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 2. 108
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 95 of 199
Getting Started
2.11.6 Changing The Units In Which Displacement Values Are Annotated
The units in which displacement values are displayed in the post-processing mode are referred to as the display units. Steps: 1. Display units may be modified by using any one of the following methods: a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon,
Figure 2. 109 b. by going to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu option
Figure 2. 110 or, c. by selecting the View | Options menu option
2.
Figure 2. 111 In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Structure Units tab. Change the Dimensions of Displacement from Millimeter to say, cm or inches or anything else you desire, and select OK.
Figure 2. 112 The diagram will be updated to reflect the new units.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 96 of 199
Figure 2.113
Getting Started
2.11.7 The Node Displacement Table
Upon entering the Post-Processing mode, the first screen that we came across is shown below.
Figure 2. 114 For the Node | Displacement page on the left side, notice that there are 2 tables displayed along the right side. The upper table, called the Node Displacements table, lists the displacement values for every node for every selected load case. Load cases may be selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details) The lower table is called the Beam relative displacement table. If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore them from the View | Tables menu.
Figure 2. 115 The Node Displacement table window has two tabs: All and Summary (see figure below).
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 97 of 199
Figure 2. 116 All - This tab presents all nodal displacements in tabular form for all load cases and all degrees of freedom.
Figure 2. 117 Summary - This tab, shown in the figure below, presents the maximum and minimum nodal displacements (translational and rotational) for each degree of freedom. All nodes and all Load Cases specified during the Results Setup are considered. Maximum values for all degrees of freedom are presented with the corresponding Node of occurrence and Load Case number (L/C).
Figure 2. 118 For the Beam Relative Displacement table, the details are as follows : All The All tab presents the displacements of members at intermediate section points. All specified members and all specified load cases are included. The table shows displacements along the local axes of the members, as well as their resultants. Max Displacements The Max Displacements tab presents the summary of maximum sectional displacements (see figure below). This table includes the maximum displacement values and location of its occurrence along the member, for all specified members and all specified load cases. The table also provides the ratio of the span length of the member to the resultant maximum section displacement of the member.
Figure 2. 119 The sub-pages under the Node page are described below in brief. Page Sub-Page Purpose Node Displacement Displays nodal displacements along with
tabular results for Node-Displacements and sectional Beam displacements.
Reactions Modes
Displays support reactions on the drawing as well as in a tabular form. Displays mode shapes for the selected Mode shape number. The eigenvectors are simultaneously displayed in tabular form. This Page appears only for dynamic analyses cases, namely, response spectrum, time history, and if modal calculations are requested. Displays Time history plots, for time history analysis. This sub-page too will appear only if time history analysis is performed.
Time History
Getting Started
Steps: 1. The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be found in the form of the Mz
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 98 of 199
icon show in the diagram below which becomes active.
Figure 2. 120
2.
Figure 2.121 The option for selecting the force/moment diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu option - as shown below.
Figure 2. 122
Getting Started
2.11.9 Switching Between Load Cases For Viewing The Force/Moment Diagram
Steps: 1. To change the load case for which to view the force/moment diagram, you may click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one you want.
2.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 99 of 199
Figure 2. 124 3. In either case, theDiagrams dialog box comes up. Select the Loads and Results tab and choose the first load case (LIVE LOAD) from the Load Case list box. Also, let us check the Shear yy check box. Then, click on OK.
Figure 2. 125 4. The figure below shows the Mz diagram for load case 2.
Figure 2. 126 5. To display the bending moment diagram for, say, load case 4 (DEAD + LIVE), follow steps 1 to 3 above and select load case 4. The following diagram should appear on the drawing area :
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 100 of 199
Figure 2. 127
Getting Started
2.11.10 Changing The Size Of The Force/Moment Diagram
Steps: If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the moment plot, you may a) click on the Scale icon
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 101 of 199
Figure 2. 130 In the Bending field, specify a smaller number than what is currently listed, and click on OK. The moment diagram should now be larger. In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down arrow keys.
Figure 2. 131
Getting Started
Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of freedom Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment-Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 102 of 199
Figure 2. 132 All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a tick mark. The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off specific degrees of freedom.
Figure 2. 133 For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f) has been assigned a different color(see Figure 3.126). One may change the color for that d.o.f. by clicking on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and make a new choice from the color palette.
Figure 2. 135
Getting Started
Steps: 1. Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
Figure 2. 136 2. The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 103 of 199
Figure 2. 137 We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button on All. From the Beam Results tab, check the Bending | Maximum option. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 2. 138 The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load case 5.
Figure 2. 139
Getting Started
2.11.13 Changing The Units In Which Force/Moment Values Are Annotated
Steps: 1. The units in which force and moment values are displayed in the post-processing mode are referred to as the display units. Display units may be modified by using any one of the following methods: a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 104 of 199
2.
Figure 2. 142 In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units tab. For bending moments, change the Moment unit from its current setting to one of the choices available, say, Mton-m or kip-ft or anything else you desire, and select OK.
Figure 2. 144
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 105 of 199
2.11.14 Beam Forces Table

When we select the Beam | Forces page from the page control area on the left side, the screen that appears is shown below.
Figure 2. 145 The axial forces and shear forces, bending and torsional moments in all selected beams for all selected load cases are displayed in a tabular form along the right half of the screen. Load cases may be selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details) If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore them from the View | Tables menu.
Figure 2. 146 The Beam End Forces table window has three tabs: All, Summary and Envelope.
Figure 2. 147 All - This tab presents all forces and moments corresponding to all 6 degrees of freedom at the start and end of each selected member for all selected load cases.
Figure 2. 148 Summary - This tab, shown in the figure below, presents the maximum and minimum values (forces and moments) for each degree of freedom. All beams and all Load Cases specified during the Results Setup are considered. Maximum values for all degrees of freedom are presented with the corresponding Node of occurrence and Load Case number (L/C).
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 106 of 199
Figure 2. 149 Envelope : This tab shows a table consisting of the maximum and minimum for each degree of freedom for each member, and the load case responsible for each of those values.
Figure 2. 150
Getting Started
2.11.15 Viewing The Force/Moment Diagrams From The Beam Graphs Page
The Graphs page in the Post Processing Mode allows us to graphically view moments and forces such as Axial, Bending zz, Shear yy and Combined Stresses for individual members. Select the Graphs sub-page nested under the Beam page from the left side of the screen as shown below.
Figure 2.151 The Main Window area of the screen shows the loading on the structure. On the right side of the screen, the force/moment diagrams appear (see figure below). When we highlight a member in the main window by clicking on it, the graphs are plotted for that member in the data area. The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 1 for load case 4.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 107 of 199
Figure 2. 152 The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 2 for the same load case.
Figure 2. 153 We can change the degree of freedom for which results are plotted by doing the following. Go into one of the 3 drawing windows on the right side, and click the right mouse button. The following dialog box will appear.
Figure 2. 154 Select Diagrams. In the dialog box which appears, switch on/switch off the degrees of freedom you desire.
Figure 2. 155 Click on OK and that degree of freedom will be plotted in that window.
Getting Started
2.11.16 Restricting The Load Cases For Which Results Are Viewed
Steps: 1. To restrict the load cases for which results are viewed, either click on the Results Setup icon option as shown below. or, go to Results | Select Load Case menu
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 108 of 199
2.
Figure 2. 156 In the Results Setup dialog box that comes up, let us first un-select the already selected load cases by clicking on the
button.
3.
Figure 2. 157 Select load cases 1 (DEAD LOAD) and 3 (WIND LOAD) by holding the Ctrl key down. Then, click on the have been selected, click on the OK button.
button. After the load cases
Figure 2. 158
Getting Started
2.11.17 Using Member Query
Member query is a facility where several results for specific members can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box. It is also a place from where many of the member attributes such as the property definition, specifications (releases, truss, cable, etc.) and beta angle can be changed for input purposes. Steps: To access this facility, first select the member. Then, either go to Tools | Query | Member menu option or, double-click on the member. Let 1. us try double-clicking on member 4.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 109 of 199
Figure 2. 159 As we double-click on member 4, the following dialog box comes up. Let us take a look at the Property tab.
Figure 2. 160 The figure above shows where the buttons are located on the member query box. If the member contains output result tabs (Shear/Bending, Deflection, Steel Design, etc.) in the query box, changing member attributes like releases will cause these result tabs to disappear. This is due to the fact that the current output no longer reflects the new input. NOTE: If you assign or change property by clicking on the Assign/Change Property button in the above dialog box, ensure that you keep the check mark on Apply to this Member only in the ensuing dialog box. Else, changing the member attributes for one member will subsequently change the attributes of all other members belonging to the same attribute list. For example, if the current member's property is also assigned to other members, changing the property on the current member will change the property of all the members. Let us click on the Shear/Bending tab. The following dialog box appears.
Figure 2. 161 The above page contains facilities for viewing values for shears and moments, selecting the load cases for which those results are presented, a slider bar (see figure below) for looking at the values at specific points along the member length, and a Print option for printing the items on display. Experiment with these options to see what sort of results you can get. Grab the slider bar using the mouse and move it to obtain the values at specific locations.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 110 of 199
Figure 2. 162 Another page (deflection) of the above dialog box is shown below.
Figure 2. 163 The concrete design page of the above dialog box is shown below.
Figure 2. 164 To look at the results of another member using this query facility, simply close down this query dialog box and repeat the steps outlined earlier in this section for the desired member.
Getting Started
2.11.18 Producing An On-screen Report

Steps: Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the screen. Let us create one such report. We will create a table that shows the member major axis moment (MZ) values sorted in the order High to 1. Low, for members 1 and 4 for all the load cases. The first step to do this is to select members 1 and 4 from the structure. With the beams cursor active, select members 1 and 4 using the mouse, or use the Select | By List | Beams option of the Select menu and type 1 and 4 as the member numbers. Next, go to the Report | Beam End Forces menu option as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 111 of 199
2.
Figure 2. 165 In the dialog box that appears, select the Sorting tab. Let us select Moment-Z as the End Force, set the Sorting Order to List from High to Low, and switch on Absolute values under If Sorting done. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save ID option.) Under the Loading tab, make sure all the 5 load cases have been selected. Then, click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 166 The next figure shows the member end forces sorted table with the MZ values sorted from High to Low based on Absolute numbers.
3.
Figure 2. 167 To print this table, click the right mouse button anywhere within the table. A list of options will appear.
Figure 2. 168 Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report.
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 112 of 199
2.11.19 Taking Pictures

There are several options available for taking pictures. The simplest of these is in the edit menu and is called Copy Picture. It transfers the contents of the active drawing window to the windows clipboard. We can then go into any picture processing program like Microsoft Paint or Microsoft Word and paste the picture in that program for further processing. Another more versatile option enables us to include any "snapshot" or picture of the drawing window into a report. It is called Take Picture and is under the Edit menu. Let us examine this feature. Steps: 1. To take a picture, either click on the Take Picture icon or, go to Tools | Take Picture menu option.
2.
Figure 2. 169 The following dialog box comes up. Here, we may provide a caption for the picture so that it may be identified later on.
Figure 2. 170 This picture will be saved till we are ready to produce a customized report of results. Proceed to the next section for details.
Getting Started
2.11.20 Creating Customized Reports
STAAD.Pro offers extensive report generation facilities. Items which can be incorporated into such reports include input information, numerical results, steel design results, etc. One can choose from among a select set of load cases, mode shapes, structural elements, etc.. We may include any "snapshot" or picture of the screen taken using the Take Picture toolbar icon. Other customizable parameters include the font size, title block, headers, footers, etc. 1. The Report Setup utility may be accessed either by selecting the Reports Page or by clicking on the Report Setup icon.
Figure 2. 171 In either case, the following dialog box appears:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 113 of 199
Figure 2. 172 Different tabs of this dialog box offer different options. The Items tab lists all available data which may be included in the report. Note that the items under the Selected list are the ones which have been selected by default. Available items are classified into five categories: Input, Output, Pictures, Reports and Steel Design Output and Advanced Query Reports.
2.
Figure 2. 173 In our report, we want to show Job Information, Node Displacement Summary, Beam Max Moments, and Picture 1. Job Information is already selected by default. From the Available list box, select Output. From the available output items, select Node Displacement Summary and Beam Max Moments. Then select Pictures from the Available list box and select Picture 1. When all the items have been selected, the Report Setup dialog box should appear as shown below.
Figure 2. 174 The Report Detail Increments check box at the bottom indicates the number of segments into which a member would be divided for printing sectional displacements, forces, etc. 3. Click on the Load Cases tab to select the Load Cases to be included in the report. The Grouping buttons indicate whether the report data will be grouped by Node/Beam numbers or by Load Case number. In the first case, all Load Case results will appear under a particular Node or Beam. In the second case, results for all Nodes or Beams for a particular Load Case will appear together.
4.
Figure 2. 175 Click on the Picture Album tab to visually identify the pictures taken earlier. The following figure displays the Picture 1 as stored by the program.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 114 of 199
Figure 2. 176 The Options tab lets you include Header, Footer, Page Numbers, Table Grids, fonts for Column Heading and Table data, etc. The Name and Logo tab allows you to enter the Company Name and Logo. Click on the blank area and type the name and address of the company. Click on the Font button in the Text group and adjust the font to be Arial 16 Pt Bold. Click on the Right radio button in the Alignment group under Text to right-align the company name.
5.
Figure 2. 177 Click OK to finish or click Print to print the report. However, it is always a good idea to first preview the report before printing it. To preview the report just created, select the Print Preview icon from the Toolbar.
Figure 2. 178 The first two pages of the report are shown in the next two figures.
Figure 2. 179
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 115 of 199
Figure 2. 180 This brings us to the end of this tutorial. Though we have covered a large number of topics, there are several more in various menus and dialog boxes. Happy exploring !!!!!
Getting Started
Tutorial Problem 3: Analysis of a slab
This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for modelling and analysis of a slab supported along two edges. The following topics are covered: Starting the program Modelling the slab using quadrilateral plate elements Specifying slab properties Specifying material constants Specifying supports Specifying loads Specifying the analysis type Viewing results for individual plates
Getting Started
3.1 Methods of creating the model
As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two methods of creating the structure data: a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. b) using the command file. Both methods of creating the model are explained in this tutorial. The graphical method is explained from Section 3.2 onwards. The command file method is explained in Section 3.8.
Getting Started
3.2 Description of the tutorial problem
The structure for this project is a slab fixed along two edges. We will model it using 6 quadrilateral (4-noded) plate elements. The structure and the mathematical model are shown in the figures below. It is subjected to selfweight, pressure loads and temperature loads. Our goal is to create the model, assign all required input, perform the analysis, and go through the results.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 116 of 199
Figure 3. 1
Figure 3. 2 BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE Element properties Material Constants Supports Primary Loads DATA Slab is 300mm thick E, Density, Poisson, Alpha Default values for concrete Nodes along 2 edges are fixed as shown in Figure 5.2 Load 1: Selfweight Load 2: Pressure Load of 300Kg/sq.m. acting vertically downwards Load 3: 75 degree F uniform expansion, plus top surface is 60 degrees hotter than the bottom Combination Loads Analysis Type Case 101: Case 1 + Case 2 Case 102: Case 1 + Case 3 Linear Elastic
Getting Started
3.3 Starting the program
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 117 of 199
Figure 3. 4 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. If you wish to turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog at Startup box at the lower left hand corner. It can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu. Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types Steel, Concrete, Aluminum selected from the programs library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.) If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the Metric units (KN, Meter, etc.).
Figure 3. 5
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 118 of 199
Getting Started
3.4 Creating a new structure
1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model.
The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Space. Let us choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name Structure? (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name Plates Tutorial.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 119 of 199
A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved - is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 3.8 . For our model, let us check the Add Plate option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.
Figure 3. 9
Getting Started
3.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen
The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where the model generation process takes place. It is important to familiarize ourselves with the components of that window before we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window in detail.
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 120 of 199
3.6 Building the STAAD.Pro model

Getting Started
3.6.1 Generating the model geometry
The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated are :
JOINT COORDINATES 1000;2200;3202;4002 5400;6402;7600;8602 9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4 ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL 11234;22563;35786 4 4 3 9 10 ; 5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11
In this tutorial, we will explore 4 different methods to create the model shown in Section 3.2: 1. 2. 3. 4. Using Using Using Using a mixture of drawing an element and the Copy/Paste facility. a mixture of drawing an element and the Translational Repeat facility. the Structure Wizard facility in the Geometry menu. the Mesh Generation facility of the main graphical screen.
Creating the Plates - Method 1

Steps: The Grid Settings 1. We selected the Add Plate option earlier to enable us to add plates to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X, Y, Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area. (Note that we could initiate this grid by selecting the Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate menu option also.)
Figure 3. 10 It is worth paying attention to the fact that when we chose the Add Plate option in section 3.4, the page control area has been automatically set up to have the Geometry Plate page be in focus.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 121 of 199
Figure 3. 11 2. A Snap Node/Plate dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments. The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane. We will use the Linear tab. In our structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this dialog box, let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 6 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 4 along Z, and a spacing of 1 meter between lines along both X and Z (see next figure) we can draw a frame 6m X 4m, adequate for our model. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits. In fact, we do not even need this 6m X 4m grid. The method we are using here requires just a 2m X 2m grid since we are about to draw just a single element.
Figure 3. 12 Creating element 1 3. The four corners of the first element are at the coordinates (0, 0, 0), (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2), and (0, 0, 2) respectively. To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Beam button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the mouse, click at the origin (0, 0, 0) to create the first node.
Figure 3. 13 4. In a similar fashion, click on the remaining three points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by a plate. (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2) and (0, 0, 2) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 122 of 199
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the element will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
Figure 3. 14 5. At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Plate dialog box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 123 of 199
Figure 3. 16 6. 7. It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command. For easy identification, the entities drawn on the screen can be labelled. Let us display the plate numbers. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about switching on node/beam/plate labels.)
The following figure illustrates the plate number displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below.
Figure 3. 17 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the plate labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Plate labels) from the Options dialog box. Creating element 2 8. Examining the structure shown in section 3.2 of this tutorial, it can be seen that the remaining elements can be easily generated if we could copy the existing plate and then, paste the copied unit at specific distances. The program does indeed have a Copy-Paste facility and it is under the Edit menu. First, select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor 9. .
Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again, click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose Paste Plates from the Edit menu) as shown below.
Figure 3. 18 Figure 3. 19 10. Since this facility allows us to create only one copy at a time, all that we can create from element 1 is element 2. The four nodes of element 2 are at distance of X = 2, Y = 0, and Z = 0 away from element 1. So, in the dialog box that comes up, provide 2, 0, and 0 for X, Y and Z respectively and click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 20 The model will now look like the one shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 124 of 199
Figure 3. 21 Creating element 3 11. The nodes of element 3 are at X = 4m away from those of element 1. So, let us create the third element by repeating steps 8 to 10 except for providing 4m for X in the Paste with Move dialog box. Alternatively, we could use element 2 as the basis for creating element 3, in which case, the X increment will be 2m. If you make a mistake and end up pasting the element at a wrong location, you can undo the operation by selecting Undo from the Edit menu. After creating the third element, the model should look like the one shown below.
. Figure 3. 22 Click anywhere in the screen to un-highlight the highlighted plate. Creating elements 4, 5 and 6 12. The elements 4, 5 and 6 are identical to the first three elements except that their nodes are at a Z distance of 2m away from the corresponding nodes of elements 1 to 3. We can hence use the Copy-Paste technique and specify the Z increment as 2m. Select all three of the existing plates by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. 13. Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again, click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose Paste Plates from the Edit menu).
14. Provide 0, 0, and 2 for X, Y and Z respectively in the Paste with Move dialog box that comes up. Then, click on the OK button and observe that three new elements are created. Since some elements are still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight those elements. The model, with all the six plates generated, will now look as shown below.
Figure 3. 23 If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data, go to section 3.6.2. If instead, you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted. This can be done using the following procedure. From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the below will appear. Click on the OK button. key on your keyboard. A message box shown
Figure 3. 24
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 125 of 199
As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears. Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire structure will be deleted.
Figure 3. 25

Steps: Creating element 1 1. In this method, we will be using STAADs Translational Repeat facility to create our model. To utilize this facility, we need at least one existing entity to use as the basis for the translational repeat. So, let us follow steps 1 to 7 from Method 1 to create the first element. Once that is done, our model will look like the one shown below.
Note: If you have trouble bringing the grid settings dialog box, go to the Geometry menu and select Snap/Grid Node Plate.
Figure 3. 26 Creating elements 2 and 3 2. In Method 1, it required two separate executions of the Copy/Paste function to create elements 2 and 3. That is because, that facility does not contain a provision for specifying the number of copies one would like to create. Translational Repeat is a facility where such a provision is available. . (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting
Select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor plates.) 3.
Click on the Translational Repeat icon or select the Geometry | Translational Repeat menu option as shown below.
Figure 3. 27
Figure 3. 28
The 3D Repeat dialog box comes up. By default (when the Geometry Only option is not checked), all loads, properties, design parameters, member releases, etc. on the selected entities will automatically be copied along with the entities. By checking the new option labeled Geometry Only, the translational repeating will be performed using only the Geometry data. In our example, it does not matter because no other attributes have been assigned yet. 4. To create elements 2 and 3 along the X direction, specify the Global Direction as X, No of Steps as 2 and the Default Step Spacing (along X) as 2m. The Link Steps option is applicable when the newly created units are physically removed from the existing units, and when one wishes to connect them using members. Renumber Bay enables us to use our own numbering scheme for entities that will be created, instead of using a sequential numbering that the program does if no instructions are provided. Let us leave these boxes unchecked. Then, click on OK.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 126 of 199
Figure 3. 29 Since element 1 is still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight it. The model will now look as shown below.
Figure 3. 30 Creating elements 4, 5 and 6 5. Let us follow the same Translational Repeat method to create these elements. Select all the three existing plates by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. Make sure that before you do this, the cursor type is the Plates Cursor 6. , else, no plates will be selected.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 but this time, specify the Global Direction as Z, No of Steps as 1 and the Default Step Spacing as 2m. Leave the Link Steps box unchecked. Then, click on OK.
All the 6 elements are now created. Since some of the plates are still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight them. Our model will now look like the one shown below.
Figure 3. 31 If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data, go to section 3.6.2. Instead, if you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted. This can be done using the following procedure. From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the below will appear. Click on the OK button. key on your keyboard. A message box shown
Figure 3. 32 As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears. Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire structure will be deleted.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 127 of 199
Figure 3. 33

Steps: There is a facility in STAAD called Structure Wizard which offers a library of pre-defined structure prototypes, such as Pratt Truss, Northlight Truss, Cylindrical Frame, etc. A surface entity such as a slab or wall, which can be defined using 3-noded or 4-noded plate elements is one such prototype. We can also create our own library of structure prototypes. From this wizard, a structural model may parametrically be generated, and can then be incorporated into our main structure. Structure Wizard can hence be thought of as a store from where one can fetch various components and assemble a complete structure. 1. Select the Geometry | Run Structure Wizard menu option from the top menu bar.
Figure 3. 34 The Structure Wizard window opens up as shown below.
Figure 3. 35 (Note that the Open Structure Wizard option in the Where do you want to go? dialog box in the beginning stage of creating a new structure see Figure 3.9 also brings up this facility.) 2. The unit of length should be specified prior to the generation of a model. From the File menu of this Structure Wizard window, click Select Units. In the Select Units dialog box that comes up, we can select one of the units of length from Imperial (inch, feet) or SI/Metric (millimeter, centimeter, meter) system of units. Let us choose Meters and click on the OK button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 128 of 199
Figure 3. 36 3. From the Model Type list box, select Surface/Plate Models as shown below.
Figure 3. 37
Figure 3. 38 4. To select the Quad Plate option, click on it using the mouse.
Figure 3. 39 5. Then, using the mouse, either double-click on the Quad Plate option or, drag the Quad Plate option to the right side of the Structure Wizard window as shown below.
6.
Figure 3. 40 A dialog box by the name Select Meshing Parameters comes up. In this box, we specify, among other things, two main pieces of information - a) the dimensions of the boundary (or superelement as it is commonly known) from which the individual elements are generated b) the number of individual elements that must be generated. (a) is defined in terms of the X, Y, Z coordinates of its Corners A, B, C and D. (b) is defined in terms of the number of divisions along sides AB, BC, etc.
Let us provide the Corners, the Bias and the Divisions of the model as shown in the figure below. Then, click on the Apply button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 129 of 199
Figure 3. 41 If you made a mistake and wish to bring up the above dialog box again, click the right mouse button in the drawing area and choose Change Property.
7.
Figure 3. 42 tTo transfer the model to the main window, select File | Merge Model with STAAD.Pro Model as shown below.
Figure 3. 43 8. When the following message box comes up, let us confirm our transfer by clicking on the Yes button.
Figure 3. 44 The dialog box shown in next figure comes up. If we had an existing structure in the main window, in this dialog box, we will be able to provide the coordinates of a node of the structure in the main window to which we want to connect the piece being brought from the wizard. If there isnt any existing structure, this box is a means of specifying any distances along X, Y and Z axes by which we want the unit (being brought from the Wizard) to be shifted. In our case, since we do not have an existing structure in the main window, nor do we wish to shift the unit by any amount, let us simply click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 45 The model will now be transferred to the main window.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 130 of 199
Figure 3. 48

Steps: The STAAD.Pro GUI contains a facility for generating a mesh of elements from a boundary (or superelement) defined by a set of corner nodes. This facility is in addition to the one we saw in Method 3. The boundary has to form a closed surface and has to be a plane, though that plane can be inclined to any of the global planes. 1. The first step in defining the boundary is selecting the corner nodes. If these nodes do not exist, they must be created before they can be selected. So, either click on the Snap Node/Quad Plates icon or select Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate | Quad menu option as shown in the figures below.
Figure 3. 49
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 131 of 199
2.
Figure 3. 50 A Snap Node/Plate dialog box appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. (We have already seen this dialog box in methods 1 and 2.) In our structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this dialog box, let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. All that we are interested in is the 4 corner nodes of the super-element. So, let us set 1 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X and Z, and a spacing of 6m between lines along X and 4m along Z.
Figure 3. 51 The main drawing area will now look similar to the one shown below.
3.
Figure 3. 52 To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Plate button by clicking on it. Holding the Ctrl key down, click at the four corners of the grid as shown below. Those four points represent the four corners of our slab and are (0, 0, 0), (6, 0, 0), (6, 0, 4), and (0, 0, 4). In fact, keeping the Ctrl key pressed and clicking at points on the grid successively, is a way of creating new nodes without connecting those nodes with beams or plates. If the Ctrl key werent kept pressed, the nodes would become connected.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 132 of 199
Figure 3. 53 It is worth noting that the purpose of the previous four steps was to merely create the four nodes. Consequently, any of the several methods available in the program could have been used to create those nodes. We could have typed the data into the editor, or in the grid tables of the Geometry-Plate page control area, or even used the Snap Grid/Node Beam option of the Geometry menu from the top of the screen to graphically create the points 4. Let us now Close the Snap Node/Plate dialog box as shown below.
Figure 3. 54 We are now ready to utilize the second method available in the program for mesh generation. 5. For this, either click on the Generate Surface Meshing icon or go to Geometry | Surface Mesh Generator menu option as shown below.
Figure 3. 55
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 133 of 199
Figure 3. 56 6. We now have to select the points which form the boundary of the superelement from which the individual elements will be created. The four points we just created are those four points. So, let us click at the four node points in succession as shown below. Lastly, close the loop by clicking at the start node (or the first clicked point) again.
Figure 3. 57 As we click at the start node the second time, the following dialog box comes up. Let us choose the Quadrilateral Meshing option and click on the OK button.
7.
Figure 3. 58 The Select Meshing Parameters dialog box (as we saw earlier in Method 3), comes up. Notice that this time however, the data for the four corners is automatically filled in. The program used the coordinates of the four nodes we selected to define A, B, C, and D. Provide the Bias and the Divisions of the model as shown in the figure below. Click on the Apply button.
Figure 3. 59 As we click on the Apply button, our model will appear in the drawing area as the one shown below.Click on the button to exit the mesh generating mode.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 134 of 199
Figure 3. 60
Getting Started
3.6.2 Changing the input units of length
As a matter of convenience, for specifying member properties for our structure, it is simpler if our length units are centimeter instead of meter. This will require changing the current length units of input. The command to be generated is: UNIT CM KN Steps: 1. Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar.
Figure 3. 61 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option as shown below.
Figure 3. 62 2. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Centimeter and click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 63
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 135 of 199
3.6.3 Specifying Element Properties

Just as properties are assigned to members, properties must be assigned to plate elements too. The property required for plates is the plate thickness (or the thickness at each node of elements if the slab has a varying thickness). The corresponding command which should be generated in the STAAD command file is:
ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30
2.
Figure 3. 65 In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up as shown below. Plate thickness is specified through the dialog box available under the Thickness button.
Figure 3. 66 3. The dialog box shown below comes up. Let us provide the plate thickness as 30cm. Notice that the field called Material is presently on the checked mode. If we keep it that way, the material properties of concrete (E, Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be assigned along with the plate thickness. The material property values so assigned will be the program defaults. (To see those default values, click on the Materials button in the dialog box shown in Figure 3.64.) Since we want to assign just the default values, let us keep the Material box in the checked mode itself. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 136 of 199
Figure 3. 67 At this point, the Properties dialog box will look as shown below.
Figure 3. 68 4. Since we want the thickness to be applied to all elements of the structure, let us select the Assignment Method called Assign To View and then click on the Assign button as shown in the above figure. As we click on the Assign button, the following message box comes up. Let us click on the Yes button to confirm our choice.
Figure 3. 69 The structure will now look as shown below.
Figure 3. 70 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the selected entities. We do this only as a safety precaution. When an entity is highlighted, clicking on any Assign option is liable to cause an undesired attribute to be assigned to that entity.
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 137 of 199
In Section 3.6.3, we kept the Material check box on while assigning the element properties. Consequently, the material constants (E, Density, Poissons Ratio, etc.) of concrete got assigned to the plates along with the properties, and the following commands were generated in the command file:
UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS E 2.17185e+007 MEMB 1 TO 6 POISSON 0.17 MEMB 1 TO 6 DENSITY 23.5616 MEMB 1 TO 6 ALPHA 5.5e-006 MEMB 1 TO 6
Hence, there is no longer a need to assign the constants separately. However, if we hadnt assigned them as before, we could go to the menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them explicitly as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3. 71
Getting Started
The slab is fixed-supported along the entire length of two of its sides. However, when modelled as plate elements, the supports can be specified only at the nodes along those edges, and not at any point between the nodes. It hence becomes apparent that if one is keen on better modelling the edge conditions, the slab would have to be modelled using a larger number of elements. In our case, the commands we need to generate are:
SUPPORTS 1 2 4 5 7 10 FIXED
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 138 of 199
2. 3. 4. 5.
Figure 3. 73 In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the next figure. For easy identification of the nodes where we wish to place the supports, let us turn the Node Numbers on. Since we already know that nodes 1, 2, 5, 7, 4 and 10 are to be associated with the Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below. , select these nodes.
Figure 3. 74 6. The dialog box shown below comes up. The Fixed tab happens to be the default which is convenient for this case. Click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 3. 75 It is important to understand that the Assign button is active because of what we did in step 4 earlier. Had we not selected the nodes before reaching this point, this option would not have been active.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 139 of 199
After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below.
Figure 3. 76
Getting Started
3.6.6 Specifying Primary Load Cases
Three primary load cases have to be created for this structure. Details of these load cases are available at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below.
UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELF Y -1.0 LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 6 PR GY -300 LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD 1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30
Steps: 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the Structure Tools tool bar.
Figure 3. 78 2. Notice that the pressure load value listed in the beginning of this tutorial is in KN and meter units. Rather than convert that value to the current input units, we will conform to those units. The current input units, which we last set while specifying THICKNESS was CENTIMETER. We have to change the force unit to Kilogram and the length units to Meter. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 140 of 199
from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the length units as meter and the force units as Kilogram. LOAD CASE 1 3. A window titled Load appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight the Load Cases Details option and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 79 4. The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
Figure 3. 80 The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box.
Figure 3. 81 5. To generate and assign the first load type, highlight DEAD LOAD. You will notice that the Create New Load Item dialog box shows more options now.
Figure 3. 82 6. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 141 of 199
Figure 3. 83 LOAD CASE 2 7. Next, let us initiate the creation of the second load case which is a pressure load on the elements. To do this, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load cases dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 84
To
generate and assign the second load type, highlight EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD.
8.
Figure 3. 85 In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Pressure on Full Plate option under the Plate Loads item enables the load to be applied on the full area of the element. (The Concentrated Load is for applying a concentrated force on the element. The Trapezoidal and Hydrostatic options are for defining pressures with intensities varying from one point to another. The Partial Plate Pressure Load is useful if the load is to be applied as a patch on a small localised portion of an element.) Let us keep our focus on the Pressure on Full Plate option. Provide -300kg/m2 for W1 (Force), GY as the Direction and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 86 9. Since the pressure load is to be applied on all the elements of the model, the easiest way to do that is to set the Assignment Method to Assign To View.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 142 of 199
Then, click on the Assign button in the Load dialog box as shown below.
Figure 3. 87 After the load has been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 3. 88 LOAD CASE 3 10. Next, let us create the third load case which is a temperature load. The initiation of a new load case is best done using the procedure explained in steps 7. In the dialog box that comes up, let us specify the Title of the third load case as TEMPERATURE LOAD and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 89 To generate and assign the third load type, as before, highlight TEMPERATURE LOAD. 11. Temperature Loads are created (and assigned if the elements are selected prior to the creation of the load) from the input screens available under the Temp button in the Add New Load Items dialog box. 12. In the Add New Load Items dialog box , make sure that the Temperature item is selected under the Temperature Loads option. Then, provide 40 as the Temperature Change for Axial Elongation and 30 as the Temperature Differential from Top to Bottom and click on the Add button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 143 of 199
Figure 3.90 13. Since we intend to apply the temperature load on all the plates, as before, choose Assign To View and click on the Assign button in the Loads dialog box (see step 9 for explanation).
Getting Started
3.6.7 Creating load combinations
The specifications at the beginning of this tutorial require us to create two combination cases. The commands required are:
LOAD COMBINATION 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2 1 1.0 2 1.0 LOAD COMBINATION 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3 1 1.0 3 1.0
Steps: LOAD COMBINATION 101 1. To initiate and define load case 4 as a load combination, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Enter the Load No: as 101 and the Title as CASE 1 + CASE 2.
Figure 3. 91 2. Next, in the Define Combinations box, select load case 1 from the left side list box and click on the button. Repeat this with load case 2 also. Load case 1 and 2 will appear in the right side list box as shown in the figure below. (These data indicate that we are adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 1.0 and that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic summation of the results for individual load cases.) Finally, click on the Add button
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 144 of 199
Figure 3. 92 Case 101 has now been created. LOAD COMBINATION 102 3. To initiate and define load case 5 as a load combination, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Create New Load Item dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Enter the Load No: as 102 and the Title as CASE 1 + CASE 3. Next, repeat step 2 except for selecting load cases 1 and 3 instead of cases 1 and 2.
Figure 3. 93 Thus, load 102 is also created. If we change our mind about the composition of any existing combination case, we can click in the box shown circled above, select the case we want to alter, and make the necessary changes in terms of the constituent cases or their factors.
Figure 3. 94 Let us exit this dialog box by clicking on the Close button. It is also worth noting that as load cases are created, a facility for quickly switching between the various cases becomes available at the top of the screen in the form of a load case selection box as shown below.
Figure 3. 95 We have now completed the task of creating all load cases. Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the Ctrl key and pressing the S key.
Getting Started
3.6.8 Specifying the analysis type
The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We will also obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the command:
Steps:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 145 of 199
1.
To specify the Analysis command, first go to Analysis/Print Page from the left side of the screen.
2.
Figure 3. 96 In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, the instruction for specifying a linear elastic type analysis is provided using the Perform Analysis tab. To obtain the static equilibrium report, check the Statics Check print option. (In response to this option, a report consisting of the summary of applied loading and summary of support reactions, for each load case, will be produced in the STAAD output file. See section 3.10 for information on viewing this report).
Figure 3. 97 Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. The Analysis dialog box in the data area with the newly added instruction will look as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 146 of 199
Getting Started
3.6.9 Specifying post-analysis print commands
Two types of element results can be requested: a) ELEMENT STRESSES at the centroid or any point on the element surface b) the element forces at the nodes. The former consists of stresses and moments per unit width, as explained in sections 1.6.1 and 5.41 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The latter consists of the 3 forces and 3 moments at each node of the elements in the global axis system (see section 3.41 for details). We would like to obtain both these results. We will also set the units in which these results are printed to KN and Meter for element stresses and Kg and Meter for element forces. This requires the specification of the following commands:
UNIT METER KN PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 3 UNIT KG METER PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6
These results will be written in the STAAD output file and can be viewed using the procedure explained in section 3.10. Steps: 1. Go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the length and force units to Meter and Kilo Newton respectively. 2. The dialog box for requesting element results is available in the Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis | Print page. Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right hand side of the screen.
3.
Figure 3. 99 In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the Element Forces/Stresses tab. Choose the Print Element Stresses option and click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 147 of 199
Figure 3. 100 4. Again, go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the length and force units to Meter and Kilogram respectively. on the Close button.
Then, repeat steps 2 and 3. In step 3, select the Print Element Forces option and click on the Add button. Finally, click At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box will look as shown below.
Figure 3. 101 5. To associate the PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES command with element 3, first select the command as shown in the previous figure. Then, using the Plates Cursor , click on element no. 3. As we select the plate, the Assignment Method automatically becomes Assign to Selected Plates. Click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 3. 102 6. To associate the PRINT ELEMENT FORCES command with element 6, repeat step 4 except for selecting element no. 6 in the place of element no. 3.
We have now completed the tasks of assigning the input for this model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save option.
Getting Started
3.7 Viewing the input command file
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 148 of 199
Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved earlier. As we have seen in the previous tutorials, while the model is being created graphically, a corresponding set of commands describing that aspect of the model is being simultaneously written into a command file which is a simple text file. An abstract of those commands was also mentioned under the title commands to be generated are . . at the beginning of each section of this tutorial. The contents of that text file can be viewed in its entirety either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.
Figure 3. 103
Figure 3. 105 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor. We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). Instead of using the graphical methods explained in the previous sections, we could have created the entire model by typing these specific commands into the editor. This was one of the methods mentioned in section 3.1 of this tutorial. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 3.9 where we perform the analysis on this model.
Getting Started
3.8 Creating the model using the command file
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 149 of 199
Figure 3. 106 To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the procedure explained in Section 3.3. Next, follow step 1 of Section 3.4 (also, see Figure below).
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 150 of 199
STAAD SPACE SLAB SUPPORTED ALONG 2 EDGES
UNIT METER KN
Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow.

JOINT COORDINATES 1000;2200;3202;4002 5400;6402;7600;8602 9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4
Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. For example, node 6 has (X, Y, Z) coordinates of (4, 0, 2).
ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL 1 1 2 3 4 ; 2 2 5 6 3 ; 3 5 7 8 6 ; 4 4 3 9 10 ; 5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11
The incidences of elements are defined above. For example, element 3 is defined as connected between the nodes 5, 7, 8 and 6.
UNIT CM KN ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30
The length unit is changed from meter to centimeter. Element properties are then provided by specifying that the elements are 30 cm thick.
UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS E 2.17185e+007 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL DENSITY 23.5616 ALL ALPHA 5.5e-006 ALL
Material constants, which are E (modulus of elasticity), Density, Poissons Ratio and Alpha, are specified following the command CONSTANTS. Prior to this, the input units are changed to Meter and KN.
Joints 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 and 10 are defined as fixed supported. This will cause all 6 degrees of freedom at these nodes to be restrained.
UNIT KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of loads. Load case 1 is then initiated along with an accompanying title.
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
Load case 1 consists of selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 151 of 199
LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD

ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 6 PR GY -300
Load 2 is a pressure load on the elements. A uniform pressure of 300Kg/m2 is applied on all the elements. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The negative sign (-300) indicates that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of global Y.
LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD

TEMPERATURE LOAD 1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30
Load 3 is a temperature load. All the 6 elements are subjected to a in-plane temperature increase of 75 degrees and a temperature variation across the thickness of 60 degrees. This increase is in the same temperature units as the Alpha value specified earlier under CONSTANTS.
LOAD COMB 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2 1 1.0 2 1.0
Load combination 101 is initiated along with an accompanying title. Load cases 1 and 2 are individually factored by a value of 1.0, and the factored values are combined algebraically.
The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. A static equilibrium report is also requested with the help of the words PRINT STATICS CHECK.
UNIT METER KN PRINT ELEMENT STRESS LIST 3
The stresses and unit width moments are requested at the centroid of element 3 in KN and Meter units.
UNIT KG METER PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6
The forces and moments for all 6 d.o.f at the corner nodes of element 6 are requested in KG and Meter units.
FINISH
Getting Started
3.9 Performing the analysis and design
In order to obtain the displacements, forces, stresses and reactions in the structure due to the applied loads, the model has to be analyzed. If the pass-fail status of the members and elements per the requirements of steel and concrete codes is to be determined, that involves a process called design. Both these processes are launched using the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 152 of 199
Figure 3. 111 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. For this problem, let us use the STAAD engine. Then, click on the Run Analysis button. As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the next figure.
Figure 3. 112 At the end of these calculations, two activities take place. a) A Done button becomes active b) three options become available at the bottom left corner of this information window.
Figure 3. 113 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 3.10 (also, see section 1.9) offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 3.11 explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modeling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we currently are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
Getting Started
3.10 Viewing the output file
During the analysis stage, an output file containing results, warnings and messages associated with errors if any in the output, is produced. This file has the extension .anl and may be viewed using the output viewer. Section 1.9 of this manual contains information on viewing this file. In Sections 3.6.8 and 3.6.9, we had provided instructions to the program to write some very specific results in the output file. Let us examine those results.
PRINT STATICS CHECK
This instruction was provided so that we could view a report indicating if the structure is in equilibrium for the various load cases. If we scroll down the output file, we will see information which looks like the following:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 153 of 199
***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -17298.83 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= 34597.65 MY= 0.00 MZ= -51896.48 1)
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Z = MX= -34597.65 MY= 0.00 0.00 0.00 MZ= 51896.48 1) SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 17298.83 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE
X = 0.00000E+00 Y = -3.20681E-01 Z = 0.00000E+00 RX= 9.80406E-04 RY= 0.00000E+00 RZ= -6.49355E-04
0 12 0 12 0 9
For each primary load case, the report consists of: a. Summary of total applied loads for all 6 degrees of freedom, with moments calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0) b. Summary of total reactions from the supports of the structure, with moments calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0) c. Maximum displacements (3 translations and 3 rotations) in the structure induced by this load case Each of the 6 terms of item (a) must be equal and opposite to the corresponding term of item (b). A failure to meet this criteria would mean the analysis results (for a linear elastic analysis) may be erroneous. Factors such as instability conditions or improperly applied loads can cause the equilibrium check to fail. It is quite important to examine the maximum displacements since they tell us whether the deformations are within tolerable limits. Since the information presented above is for load case 1, and since load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure, we can conclude that the structure weighs 17298.83 Kgs. STRESSES FOR ELEMENT 3 This information consists of the stress and moment over unit width values at the centroid of element 3. A typical sample is presented below.
ELEMENT STRESSES ----------------
FORCE, LENGTH UNITS = KN METE
FORCE OR STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX SQY VONB 72.86 1308.63 MX SX -3.96 0.00 MY SY -20.42 0.00 MXY SXY -3.35 0.00
VONT 3 1 -18.13 1308.63
TOP : SMAX= -220.33 SMIN= -1404.81 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1 BOTT: SMAX= 1404.81 SMIN= 220.33 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1
These terms are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual in elaborate detail. Example problem 18 of the Examples Manual explains the method involved in calculating the principal stresses SMAX, SMIN and TMAX.
FORCES FOR ELEMENT 6
This information consists of the force and moment values at each of the 4 corner nodes of element 6. A typical sample is presented below.
ELEMENT FORCES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KG METE -------------JOINT FX ELE.NO. FY FZ MX MY 1 MZ
6 FOR LOAD CASE
6 0.0000E+00 4.5323E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.1313E+03 0.0000E+00 7.9082E+02 8 0.0000E+00 5.0615E+02 0.0000E+00 -3.2047E+02 0.0000E+00 2.3981E+02 12 0.0000E+00 -7.2078E+02 0.0000E+00 1.4890E-03 0.0000E+00 -1.4168E-03 11 0.0000E+00 -2.3860E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.6697E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.0136E+02
The corner forces are in the global coordinate system. These values may be used to create a free body diagram of the element and verify that the element is in equilibrium. In this case for example, the FX and FZ forces are zero, and sum of the FY forces is also zero. The complete text of the output file is shown in the next few pages.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 154 of 199
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 155 of 199
Getting Started
3.11 Post Processing
If there are no errors in the input, the analysis is successfully completed. The extensive facilities of the Post-processing mode can then be used to
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 156 of 199
a) view the results graphically and numerically b) assess the suitability of the structure from the standpoint of safety, serviceability and efficiency c) create customized reports and plots The procedure for entering the post processing mode is explained in section 2.11.1 of this manual. Node results such as displacements and support reactions are available for all models. The methods explained in the first two tutorials see sections 2.11.2 to 2.11.7 may be used to explore these. If beams are present in the model, beam results will be available too (see sections 2.11.8 to 2.11.18 for information on these). For this example, we will look at the support reactions. We do not have any beams in our model, so no results will be available for this type of entity. For plates, the results available are stresses, and unit width moments. There are several different methods for viewing these results, as explained in the next few sections.
Getting Started
3.11.1 Viewing stress values in a tabular form
From the View menu, select Tables (or click the right mouse button in the drawing area and select Tables). Choose Plate Centre Stress.
Figure 3. 114 The following table will be displayed.
Figure 3. 115
Figure 3. 116 The table has the following tabs: Shear, Membrane and Bending : These terms are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The individual values for each plate for each selected load case are displayed. Summary : This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values listed in the Shear, Membrane and Bending tab. Principal and Von Mises : These terms too are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The individual values for each plate for each selected load case are displayed, for the top and bottom surfaces of the elements. Summary : This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values listed in the Principal and Von Mises tab. Global Moments: This tab provides the moments about the global X, Y and Z axes at the center of each element.
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 157 of 199
3.11.2 Printing the tables

All of these tables may be printed by clicking the right mouse button in the table area and selecting the Print option.
Figure 3. 117
Getting Started
3.11.3 Changing the units of values which appear in the above tables
The length and force units of the stresses and moments are displayed alongside the individual column headings for the terms. To view the values in a different set of units, go to the Tools menu and select Set Current Display Unit.
Figure 3. 118 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Force Units tab and specify the required unit from the Stress and Moment fields. Click on the Apply button for the changes to take effect immediately. Once you are sure that you have chosen the proper unit combination, click on the OK button.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 158 of 199
Figure 3. 119
Getting Started
3.11.4 Limiting the load cases for which the results are displayed
When we entered the post-processing mode, we chose all load cases in the Results Setup dialog box. The tables hence contain results for all the load cases. To change that load list, choose Select Load Case from the Results menu.
Figure 3. 120 In the dialog box that comes up, select the load cases you want, and click on the single arrow Selected category. Then, click on the OK button. , so they are transferred from the Available category to the
Figure 3. 121
Getting Started
3.11.5 Stress Contours
Stress contours are a color-based plot of the variation of stress or moment across the surface of the slab or a selected portion of it. There are 2 ways to switch
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 159 of 199
on stress contour plots: a) From the left side, select the Contour sub-page under the Plate page.
Figure 3. 122 or b) From the top of the screen, click on the Results menu and select the Plate Stress Contour option.
Figure 3. 123 In each of the above cases, the following dialog box appears.
Figure 3. 124
From the Stress type field, select the specific type of stress for which you want the contour drawn.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 160 of 199
From the Load Case selection box, select the load case number. Stress values are known exactly only at the plate centroid locations. Everywhere else, they are calculated by linear interpolation between the center point stress values of adjacent plates. The Enhanced type contour chooses a larger number of points compared to the Normal type contour in determining the stress variation. View Stress Index will display a small table consisting of the numerical range of values from smallest to largest which are represented in the plot.
Let us set the following:

Load case 102 Stress Type Von Mis Top Contour Type Normal Fill Index based on Center Stress Re-Index for new view
Figure 3. 125 Click on the Apply button. The following diagram will be displayed. We can keep changing the settings and click on Apply to see all the various possible results in the above facility.
Figure 3. 126 Let us keep the dialog box open to examine the feature (Animation) explained in the next section. If some portion of the structure appears truncated, we can bring that portion into view by choosing one of the following methods: a. Click on the Zoom Out button to shrink the size of the region drawn. Before After
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 161 of 199
Figure 3. 127 b. Use the Pan button
Figure 3. 128
to physically shift the position of the structure away from the index.
Before After
Figure 3. 129
Figure 3. 130
Getting Started
3.11.6 Animating stress contours
The same dialog box shown in the previous section may be used to obtain the stress contours in an animated view. This is a method of getting a dynamic instead of static representation of the plot. After making the choices as explained in that section, click on the Animation tab of that dialog box. Switch on Stress followed by Apply.
Figure 3. 131 To stop the animation, click on No Animation and click Apply again.
Getting Started
3.11.7 Creating AVI Files
AVI files are a mechanism by which a dynamic result, such as, a deflection diagram in animation, may be captured and recorded. Presently, this facility is available in STAAD for node deflection, beam section displacement, mode shape and plate stress contour diagrams. The facility in STAAD for creating AVI files is under the Tools menu and is called Create AVI File. These files can then be viewed using tools such as the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 162 of 199
Windows Media Explorer.
Figure 3. 132 The following dialog box will appear.
Figure 3. 133 In an animated view, the movement from one extremity to the other is captured as several frames. The number of frames that comprise such a movement is controlled by specifying a value for Total No. of Frames. The speed of motion is controlled by the Frame Rate /sec. The rest of the options in the above dialog box are for the type of diagram from which the AVI file is to be created. Certain items such as Mode Shape and Plate Stress contour do not become active (remain grayed out) if the required data of that type are not present in the STAAD file, such as a modal extraction, or finite elements. After making the appropriate selections, click OK. Following this, another dialog box appears, where we are instructed to specify a file name for the .AVI file. Subsequently, we are prompted for the type of video compression. AVI files can be quite large, and compression is a technique by which one may reduce the size of these files.
Figure 3. 134 Finally, a message indicating that the operation was successful will appear at the end of the file creation process as shown below.
Figure 3. 135 As mentioned earlier, other tools like Windows Media Explorer may be used to view the AVI file. The file with the extension .AVI should be located in the same folder where the STAAD input file is present.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 163 of 199
Getting Started
3.11.8 Viewing plate results using element query
Element Query is a facility where several results for a specific element can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box. Let us explore this facility for element 4. Select element 4 and double click on it. Alternatively, select element 4, and from the Tools menu, choose Query Plate.
Figure 3. 136 The various tabs of the query box enable one to view various types of information like the plate geometry, property constants, stresses, etc., for various load cases, as well as print those values. Some typical screens are shown.
Figure 3. 137
Figure 3. 138
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 164 of 199
Figure 3. 139
Figure 3. 140
Figure 3. 141 The length and force units in which the values appear in the above tables are also modified using the method explained in section 3.11.3.
Getting Started
3.11.9 Producing an onscreen report
Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the screen. Let us produce a report consisting of the plate principal stresses, for all plates, sorted in the order from Low to High of the Principal Maximum Stress (SMAX) for load cases 101 and 102. The first step to do this is to select all the plates using the Plates Cursor shown below. . Then, go to the Report | Plate Results | Principal Stresses menu option as
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 165 of 199
Figure 3. 142 In the dialog box that appears, select the Loading tab. Make sure that load cases 101 and 102 are selected as shown below.
Figure 3. 143 Next, select the Sorting tab. Choose SMAX under the Sort by Plate Stress category and set the Sorting Order List from Low to High. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save ID option.) Then, click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 144 The following figure shows the table of maximum principal stress with SMAX values sorted from Low to High.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 166 of 199
Figure 3. 146 Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report. To transfer the contents of this table to a Microsoft Excel file, click at the top left corner of the table with the left mouse button. The entire table will become highlighted. Click the right mouse button and select Copy. Then, open an Excel worksheet, click at the desired cell and click Paste.
Getting Started
3.11.10 Viewing Support Reactions
Since supports are located at nodes of the structure, results of this type are available along with other node results like displacements. To view the reactions graphically, click on the Node page on the left side of the screen, and select the Reactions sub-page.
Figure 3. 147 The reactions at the supports will be displayed on the drawing as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 167 of 199
Figure 3. 148 The six values namely, the 3 forces along global X, Y and Z, and the 3 moments Mx, My and Mz, in the global axis system are displayed in a box for each support node. The words N1, N2, etc. stand for the node numbers of the supports. We may choose to un-display one or more of the 6 terms of each support node in the following manner. From the Results menu, choose View Value.
Figure 3. 149 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Reactions tab. Let us switch off Global X and Global Z under the Direct category. Then, click on the Annotate button followed by the Close button.
Figure 3. 150 The drawing will now contain only the remaining 4 terms (see figure below).
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 168 of 199
Figure 3. 151 To change the load case for which the reactions are displayed, select the desired case from the load selection box.
Figure 3. 152 For better clarity in viewing the results in the drawing area (and for reducing the clutter on the screen), a variety of methods are available. For example, keep the mouse pressed on top of Zoom In button, and watch the drawing get progressively bigger. Use the Pan button to physically shift the drawing around. Other options like Dynamic Zoom and Zoom Window buttons may also be used. To restore the original view, click on the Zoom All button. (Some of these options are explained in greater detail in the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual.) Icon Name Zoom In Pan Dynamic Zoom Zoom Window Display Whole Structure The table on the right side of the screen contains the reaction values for all supports for all selected load cases.
Figure 3. 153 This table can also be displayed from any mode by clicking on the View menu, choosing Tables, and switching on Support Reactions. The method explained in section 3.11.3 may be used to change the units in which these values are displayed. The summary tab contains the maximum value for each of the 6 degrees of freedom along with the load case number responsible for it.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 169 of 199
Figure 3. 154 This brings us to the conclusion of this tutorial. Additional help on using plates is available in Examples 9, 10 and 18 in the Examples Manual.
Getting Started
1. Selecting nodes, beams, plates, etc.
The Selection Toolbar
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 170 of 199
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 171 of 199
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 172 of 199
Getting Started
2. Viewing the structure from different angles
The Rotation Toolbar
Icon
Description Example Displays the structure as seen from the front. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the elevation view, as looking View From + Z towards the negative direction of the Z-axis.
Displays the structure as seen from the back. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the elevation view, as seen looking View From - Z towards the positive direction of the Z-axis.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 173 of 199
Displays the structure as seen from the right side. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the side elevation, as seen looking View From + X towards the negative direction of the X-axis.
Displays the structure as seen from the left side. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the side elevation, as seen looking View From - X towards the positive direction of the X-axis.
Displays the structure as seen from the top looking down. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the plan view, as seen from the View From + Y sky looking down.
Displays the structure as if one is looking up skywards. View From - Y
Isometric View
Displays the structure in the isometric view. The angle which defines isometric view is generally X = 30, Y = 30, Z = 0
Getting Started
3. Switching on labels for nodes, beams, plates, etc.
Labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. To demonstrate this facility, let us open EXAMP01.std. The structure will look as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 174 of 199
1.
To switch the node and beam labels on, we may utilize any one of the following methods:
a. Click on the Symbols and Labels icon as shown below.
b. Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing area. In the dialog box that appears, choose Labels (as shown in the figure below).
c. Select the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up.
2.
In all of the above three cases, the following Diagrams dialog box will appear. Make sure that the Labels tab is selected. Then, switch the appropriate labels on and click on OK.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 175 of 199
The following figure shows the structure with the node and beam labels displayed on it.
3.
To change the font of the node/beam labels, go to the View menu and select the Options command. Then, select the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box. Choose the Font option and make the necessary changes.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 176 of 199
Getting Started
4. Displaying a portion of the model by isolating it from the rest of the structure
Sometimes, the large number of entities that are drawn on the screen may make it difficult to clearly see the details at any particular region of the structure. In such cases, one is confronted with the task of de-cluttering the screen or looking at specific regions or entities while removing the rest of the structure from the view. There are different methods in STAAD.Pro by which the user can view a portion of the structure. The following pages demonstrate three different methods.
Method 1 View | New View

Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
2.
Let us say that we wish to view only the members which are at the midheight level. The first step to doing this is to select those members. The quickest way to select them is to bring up the View From + Z active cursor. and creating a rubber-band around them, after making sure that the Beams Cursor is the
3.
To visually verify that the correct members have been selected, click on the Isometric View icon and the rest of the structure in another.
. The selected members will appear in one color
4.
Next, either click the right mouse button and select the New View option or, pull down the View menu and select the New View option.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 177 of 199
5.
In either case, the following dialog box comes up. These radio buttons determine whether the selected view would be opened in a new (child) window or whether it would replace the current (parent) view window. Let us select the Create a new window for the view option and click on the OK button.
The portion of the structure that we selected will now be displayed in a new window as shown below. We can create more than one child view window this way.
All sorts of operations can be performed inside the New View such as adding and deleting members, assigning properties, loads, supports, etc. A new view of a selected portion offers the advantage of de-cluttering the screen and limiting the displayed objects to just a few chosen entities. 6. 7. To return to the parent view window, simply close the new view (child) window. Next, let us try the Display the view in the active window option. Follow steps 2 to 4. Then, select the Display the view in the active window option and click on the OK button.
The original structure will be hidden and, the portion of the structure that we selected will instead be displayed in the current (parent) window as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 178 of 199
We may restore the original view of the structure by simply clicking on the Display Whole Structure icon.
These new views may be saved by going to the View | View Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View | Open View menu option. Method 2 Tools | Cut Section Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us once again open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
We will once again try to view just the members at the mid-height level. 2. Click on the Symbols and Labels icon and in the Diagrams dialog box that comes up, switch the Node Numbers on. The reason for doing this will become evident in the next step.
3.
From the Tools menu, select Cut Section.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 179 of 199
The following dialog box comes up.
The Range By Joint method Since the beams of the mid-height level happen to contain joint # 10 (or any of the joint numbers from 7 to 12), it would be convenient if we could instruct the program to display the entities lying in the X-Z plane, and passing through any one of those joints 7 to 12. The facilities of the Range By Joint tab enable us to do that. 4. Let us select that tab (it happens to be the default). Here, we can select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the options X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for our example. Then, in the Node # drop down list, provide a joint that lies on the sectional plane. In our example, we may choose any one of the nodes between 7 and 12. Let us choose node # 10. Click on the OK button.
The following figure shows the cut portion of the original structure displayed in the drawing area.
5.
To restore the original view, simply click on the Display Whole Structure icon.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 180 of 199
Alternatively, go to the dialog box shown in step 4 and click on the Show All button.
The Range By Min/Max method

Steps: Another convenient way of choosing the beams at the mid-height level is to specify that those beams lie in the X-Z plane between the Y range values of 12ft a and 12ft + a, where, a is an arbitrary value such as say, 2ft. 6. To do this, let us select the Range By Min/Max tab. Here, we can again select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the options X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for our example. The Minimum and Maximum edit boxes represent the boundary distances along the axis perpendicular to the sectional plane. Every object lying between these two distances will be displayed. In our example, let us provide 10 as the Minimum and 14 as the Maximum distance. (Before doing so, make sure that the current input units of length, displayed at the bottom right corner of the STAAD program window, are feet.) Then, click on the OK button.
7.
To restore the original view, again, click on the Display Whole Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box shown in step 6.
The Select to View method

For demonstrating this method, instead of viewing specific beams, let us look at the nodes instead. Steps: Using this option, the portion of the structure we wish to view can be selected by specifying the objects which lie in that portion. The Window/Rubber Band option allows us to select the portion of the structure to view by specifying a rubber-band window around it. The View Highlighted Only option displays only the selected (highlighted) objects on screen and, the members and elements we wish to view must be selected before choosing this option. The Select To View option allows us to view only Beams, Plates, and/or Solids, depending on the corresponding check boxes that are activated. 8. For our example, let us choose the Select To View option and check the Nodes check box. Then, click on the OK button as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 181 of 199
The following figure shows the view of the structure with only the nodes displayed.
9.
To restore the original view, click on the Display Whole Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box shown in step 8.
These new views may be saved by going to the View | View Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View | Open View menu option.
Method 3 View | Zoom

The Zoom menu option allows us to zoom in (magnify) or out (reduce) on a portion of the structure, as one would, using a telescope. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP09.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
2.
Say, we want to magnify the portion of the structure shown in the figure below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 182 of 199
3.
To select the plates as shown in the above figure, click on the View From + Z icon. Then, using the Plates Cursor as shown below.
, select the plates by rubber-banding around them
By the way, looking at the model from View From + Y, or, View From - X, and using the rubber-band window methods can be just as effective in selecting these elements. 4. To restore the original isometric view, click on the Isometric View icon. We do this only to make sure that we have selected the correct entities.
5.
To magnify the selected portion of the structure, either click on the Zoom Window icon or, pull down the View menu and select the Zoom | Zoom Window menu option as shown below.
The cursor changes as shown below.
6.
Using the cursor, drag a window around the selected portion of the structure.
The magnified view of the selected portion of the structure will now be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 183 of 199
If we click on the Zoom In icon, it magnifies or enlarges the view of the structure even further by a pre-defined factor. You can keep the mouse cursor pressed over the Zoom In or Zoom Out icons, and the screen will continuously refresh to draw the structure larger or smaller.
To display the enlarged view in a new window, use the Dynamic Zoom icon instead of the Zoom Window option.
The region you wish to see will have to be selected by creating a rubber-band window around it. That region will now be displayed in a new window in the drawing area as shown in the next figure.
7.
To restore the view of the full structure, click on the Display Whole Structure icon.
Getting Started
5. Creating Groups
Group names are a means for easily identifying a collection of entities like Beams, Plates or Solids using a single moniker. By grouping these entities, we need to assign attributes such as member properties and material constants just to the group, a simple process, compared to the task of assigning them to the individual members. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 184 of 199
Let us classify the members of the topmost level of this structure into three groups Top Chords, Bottom Chords and Transverse Truss. Top Chords: 2. Make sure that the Beams Cursor has been selected. Then, using the mouse, select the inclined members as shown in the figure below.
3.
From the Tools menu, choose Create New Group.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 185 of 199
4.
In the Give Group Name dialog box, type _TOPCOR for Group name (Group Names must begin with the underscore _ character). Since group names can be assigned to Nodes, Beams, Plates, Solids as well as a general category called Geometry, it is very important that we choose the proper entity type. Hence, specify the Select Type as Beam.
5.
Click on the OK button. Notice that the Assign Methods is presently set to Associate to Selected Geometry. Click on the Associate button.
Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. This is necessary before we start selecting the members for the next group name. Bottom Chords: 6. Using the mouse, select the bottom chords as shown in the figure below.
7.
Next, to bring up the Give Group Name dialog box, click on the Create button. Then, follow steps 4 and 5 and assign the Group Name _BOTCOR to these members.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 186 of 199
Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. Transverse Truss: 8. Using the mouse, select the Transverse Truss members as shown in the figure below.
9.
Next, follow step 7 except for specifying the Group Name as _TRNTRUS.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 187 of 199
Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. Also, Close the create Group dialog box. Three groups have now been created. If we now go to the Select menu, an option called By Group should be available. Let us click on that option, and the following dialog box comes up.
It is apparent that we can now select the members using the group name method. The three dark buttons under Color may be used to assign specific colors for drawing these members. If the check boxes for Show Label are switched off, labels such as beam numbers will not be displayed for these specific members, even if the beam numbering icon is switched on for the entire structure.
Getting Started
6. Displaying Loads on the screen
Steps: 1. To demonstrate this feature, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 188 of 199
2. The easiest way to display a load is to click on the Loads icon as shown below. To choose a specific load, we can click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one we want.
Alternatively, we may pull the View menu down and select the Structure Diagrams menu option. In the Diagrams dialog box that opens, select the Loads and Results tab. Check the Loads check box and select the load case we want from the Load Case list box. Then, click on the Apply button.
Drag the dialog box out of the way if it obstructs the view of the structure. The following figure shows load case 1 displayed on our structure.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 189 of 199
3. We can change the color in which load icons are drawn. Click on the color button alongside the Loads checkbox, and make a new choice from the color palette (see figure below).
Let us assign say, blue color, as shown in the above figure. Select load case 2 from the Load Case list box. The following figure shows load case 2 displayed (in blue) on our structure.
Getting Started
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 190 of 199
7. Displaying Load Values on the screen

Steps: 1. In the previous exercise, we saw the method for turning on load icons, but not the numeric value of those loads. To view load values, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
2.
Let us first display the load by clicking on the Loads icon . After this, click the right mouse button and choose the Labels option. Alternatively, we may click on the Symbols and Labels icon or go to View | Structure Diagrams and select the Labels tab in the Diagrams dialog box.
3.
The dialog box shown below appears. Switch on the Load Values option under the Loading Display Options category as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 191 of 199
The following figure shows our structure with the load values displayed on it.
4.
To change the unit in which load values are displayed, go to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu command.
In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units tab. Then, change the selection under the Force, Distributed Force, etc. options as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 192 of 199
The following figure shows our structure with the load values displayed in KN/m.
Getting Started
8. Structural Tool Tip Options
Structural tool tips offer a facility for displaying any customized input or output information about a node, beam, plate or solid element when the mouse cursor is placed over the structural entity. The tool tips are similar to the ones displayed when the mouse cursor hovers over a toolbar icon. When the mouse cursor is moved away from that spot, the information displayed is switched off too. To activate the structural tool tips, go to View | Structural Tool Tip Options from the top menu.
The dialog box shown in the figure below will prompt for the data to be displayed when the mouse hovers a particular structural entity.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 193 of 199
To turn the structural tool tips on or off, simply check the Show Tool Tip box in the upper left hand corner. The Tip Delay box signifies the amount of time it takes from when the mouse cursor first appears over an entity to when the tool tip actually pops up. This number is expressed in milliseconds (i.e. 1000 = 1 second). The options (items that can be displayed) for each entity are shown under the Options box. A check mark signifies that the particular data item will be displayed in the tool tip. An option with a + next to it signifies that further options can be enabled or disabled. The figure below shows the options that can be turned on or off for Node Displacements.
A red X indicates the data will not be shown in the tool tip. Simply click on the check box to turn an option on or off. The resulting tool tip that is displayed from the options chosen in the previous figure is shown in the figure below.
The tool tips automatically display the results for the active load case. All values are reported in the current display units.
Getting Started
9. Identifying Beam Start and End
When assigning attributes like member releases or member offsets, one additional item of information which accompanies this information is whether that
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 194 of 199
attribute is applied at the START node of a member or the END node. Hence, there has to be a way to quickly identify these two points without mistaking one for the other. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
2. a)
There are two different ways to identify the start and/or end of a beam: simply place the mouse over a specific beam. The resulting tool tip will display the start node and end node of that beam in two distinct colors along with their corresponding coordinates. Of course, it is necessary to have the tool tips display turned on for this method to work.
b)
Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing area and choose Labels.
The following Diagrams dialog box will appear. Make sure that the Labels tab is selected. Then, switch the Beam Ends option on. To alter the color in which the start and/or end is displayed, simply click on the color palette next to the Start Color and/or End Color options and choose the color you want. Then, click on Apply for the changes to take effect immediately. Click on OK to close the dialog box.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 195 of 199
The following figure shows the structure with the start and end of all beams displayed in two separate colors.
Getting Started
10. Plotting from STAAD.Pro
Explained below are 5 methods for plotting the drawing of the STAAD model and STAAD result diagrams. Method 1 : Using the Print Current View option 1. We shall use example problem 14 to illustrate this feature. Open the example. The model should appear as shown below.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 196 of 199
2.
To plot this picture, click on the Print Current View icon as shown in the following figure.
3.
The standard Windows Print dialog box will appear asking you to choose the printer to which you wish to plot the drawing.
4.
If you wish to catch a glimpse of the plot, as it would appear on paper, select the Print Preview Current View option.
A preview screen similar to the one shown below will be displayed.
Method 2 : Using the Take Picture option 1. Bring up the diagram of the STAAD model you wish to print. On the Print toolbar of the STAAD screen, you will find an icon of a camera called Take Picture.
Alternatively, this option can be accessed from Edit | Take Picture.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 197 of 199
2.
A dialog box will appear prompting you to provide a Picture ID and caption.
3.
Next, select Report Setup from the File menu, or click on the Report Setup icon as shown below.
4.
A Report Setup dialog box will appear. In the Items tab, select Pictures from the available list of items.
5.
If more than one picture is available, select the one you wish to plot by pressing the Page. Click OK.
button. Next, go to the Picture Album tab and switch on Full
6.
From the File menu, select Print Report. The diagram will be plotted.
Alternatively, from the File menu, select Export Report | MS Word File.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 198 of 199
7.
In the Save As dialog box, type in the name of the .doc file you want and click on the Save button. In the template dialog box, select the Normal template.
Microsoft Word will now start building the file with the picture in it. Once this task is completed, Word will open this file, and program can be accessed from the Windows Taskbar. Browse the file, and if you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions. Method 3 : Using the Export view option 1. STAAD.Pro has a facility to export the drawing to a graphic image file. The icon for this facility is called Export View and is available in the Print toolbar.
2.
When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen, click on the Export View icon. Select the graphic format in which you wish to save the file (i.e., .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .gif, etc.)
Provide a file name and save the file. 3. Then go to a document publishing or graphic editing program such as Microsoft Word or Adobe Photoshop. Import the drawing from the file saved above. In Word, this can be done using Insert | Picture | From File. Once you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.
Method 4 : Using the Copy Picture option 1. Highlight the window containing the diagram that you wish to plot. This can be done by making sure the title bar of that window has the color which indicates that it is in focus. From the Edit menu, choose Copy Picture.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 199 of 199
2.
Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for handling graphic images such as Microsoft Paint, Adobe Photoshop, etc. In the Edit menu of that program, select Paste. You will notice that the drawing from the STAAD window is now pasted in that program. Using the tools provided by the graphics program, you can modify the drawing if you wish. Once you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.
Method 5 : Using the Windows Clipboard 1. When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen, press the "Print Screen" key on your keyboard or Shift-Print Screen", depending on how your keyboard is set up. The entire image currently in view will be copied to the Windows clipboard. Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for cropping portions of a graphic image (such as Microsoft Paint, Hijaak, Full Shot, etc.). In the Edit menu of those programs, select Paste. You will notice that the entire STAAD screen including the diagram, menus, toolbar icons, tables, etc., which were in view, are part of the pasted image. Using the tools provided by the graphics program, crop the image so as to preserve just the drawing and eliminate unwanted portions. Using the File | Print option, print the drawing.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 1 of 201
Tutorials
1. Introduction
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose program for performing the analysis and design of a wide variety of types of structures. The basic three activities which are to be carried out to achieve that goal - a) model generation b) the calculations to obtain the analytical results c) result verification - are all facilitated by tools contained in the program's graphical environment. This manual contains four sample tutorials which guide the user through those 3 activities. The first of those tutorials demonstrates these processes using a simple two-dimensional steel portal frame. It is a good starting point for learning the program. If you are unfamiliar with STAAD.Pro, you will greatly benefit by going through this tutorial first. For the second tutorial, we have chosen a reinforced concrete frame. We generate the model, perform the analysis, and design the concrete beams and columns. It contains extensive details on the various facilities available for visualization and verification of results. The modelling and analysis of a slab is demonstrated in the third tutorial. Slabs, and other surface entities like walls are modelled using plate elements. Large surface entities may have to be defined using several elements and this sometimes requires a tool called a mesh generator. This tutorial shows the simple techniques as well as the mesh generation method for generating the finite element model of the slab. It also explains the methods by which one can check the results for plate elements. A tutorial which demonstrates the inter-operability features between STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc. is presented in the fourth tutorial. STAAD.etc is a set of modules which can be used to perform component designs such as for a rectangular footing, base plate, cantilever retaining wall, moment connection, bolt group, etc. Users who have purchased STAAD.etc in addition to STAAD.Pro may go through this tutorial to familiarize themselves with the process of utilizing STAAD.etc to perform secondary analysis and design tasks on a structure for which the primary analysis and design is done using STAAD.Pro. Tutorial 1 Tutorial 2 Tutorial 3 Tutorial 4
Tutorials
Tutorial Problem 1: 2D Portal Frame
This chapter provides a step-by-step tutorial for creating a 2D portal frame using STAAD.Pro. This tutorial covers the following topics.

Starting the Program Creating a New Structure Creating Joints and Members Switching On Node and Beam Labels Specifying Member Properties Specifying Material Constants Specifying Member Offsets Printing Member Information Specifying Supports Specifying Loads Specifying the Analysis Type Specifying Post-Analysis Print Commands Specifying Steel Design Parameters Performing Analysis and Design Viewing the Output File
Tutorials
1.1 Methods of creating the model :
There are two methods of creating the structure data. a) using the command file b) using the graphical model generation mode or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. The Command File is a text file which contains the data for the structure being modeled. This file consists of simple English-language like commands. This command file may be created directly using the editor built into the program, or for that matter, any editor which saves data in text form, such as Notepad or WordPad available in Microsoft Windows. This command file is also automatically created behind the scenes when the structure is generated using the Graphical User Interface.The graphical model generation mode and the command file are seamlessly integrated. So, at any time, you may temporarily exit the graphical model generation mode and access the command file. You will find that it reflects all data entered through the graphical model generation mode. Further, when you make changes to the command file and save it, the GUI immediately reflects
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhDFB9.htm
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 2 of 201
the changes made to the structure through the command file. Both methods of creating our model are explained in this tutorial. Section 1.3 through 1.6 explain the procedure for creating the file using the GUI. Section 1.7 describes creation of the command file using the STAAD.Pro text editor.
Tutorials
The structure for this project is a single bay, single story steel portal frame that will be analyzed and designed. The figure below shows the structure.
Figure 1. 1 An input file called "Tut-01-portal.std" containing the input data for the above structure has been provided with the program. This file contains what would otherwise have resulted had we followed the procedure explained in Section 1.7. BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE DATA Member properties Members 1 & 3 : W12X35 Member 2 : W14X34 Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity : 29000 ksi Poisson's Ratio : 0.30 Member Offsets Supports Loads 6.0 inches along global X for member 2 at both ends Node 1 : Fixed Node 4 : Pinned Load case 1 : Dead + Live Beam 2 : 2.5 kips/ft downward along global Y Load case 2 : Wind From Left 10 kips point force at Node 2 Load case 3 : 75 Percent of (DL+LL+WL) Load Combination - L1 X 0.75 + L2 X 0.75 Analysis Type Steel Design Linear Elastic (PERFORM) Consider load cases 1 and 3 only. Parameters: Unsupported length of compression flange for bending : 10 ft for members 2 and 3, 15 ft for member 1. Steel Yield Stress : 40 ksi Perform member selection for members 2 and 3
Tutorials
1.3 Starting the Program
Select the STAAD.Pro icon from the STAAD.Pro 2006 program group
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 3 of 201
Figure 1. 3 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog box at the Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu. Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types Steel, Concrete, Aluminum selected from the programs library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.) If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the English units (Kip, Feet, etc.).
Figure 1. 4
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 4 of 201
Tutorials
1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model. The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Plane. We choose Foot as the length unit and Kilo Pound as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name Structure? (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name PORTAL. A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 5 of 201
Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 1.7 . For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.
Figure 1. 8
Tutorials
1.5 Creating the Model using the Graphical User Interface
In order to generate the model graphically, we have to familiarize ourselves with the components of the STAAD.Pro screen. A sample of the STAAD.Pro screen is shown in Figure 1.9. The screen has five major elements as described below: Menu bar Located at the top of the screen, the Menu bar gives access to all the facilities of STAAD.Pro. Toolbar The dockable Toolbar gives access to the most frequently used commands. You may also create your own customized toolbar. Main Window This is the largest area at the center of the screen, where the model drawings and results are displayed in pictorial form. Page Control The Page Control is a set of tabs that appear on the left-most part of the screen. Each tab on the Page Control allows you to perform specific tasks. The organization of the Pages, from top to bottom, represents the logical sequence of operations, such as, definition of beams, specification of member properties,
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 6 of 201
loading, and so on. Each tab has a name and an icon for easy identification. The name on the tabs may or may not appear depending on your screen resolution and the size of the STAAD.Pro window. However, the icons on the Page Control tabs always appear. The Pages in the Page Control area depend on the Mode of operation. The Mode of operation may be set from the Mode menu from the Menu bar. Elements of the STAAD.Pro Screen
Figure 1. 9 Data Area The right side of the screen is called the Data Area, where different dialog boxes, tables, list boxes, etc. appear depending on the type of operation you are performing. For example, when you select the Geometry | Beam Page, the Data Area contains the Node-Coordinate table and the Member-incidence table. When you are in the Load Page, the contents of the Data Area changes to display the currently assigned Load cases and the icons for different types of loads. The icons in the toolbar as well as in the Page Control area offer ToolTip help. As we move the mouse pointer over a button, the name of the button called a ToolTip appears above or below the button. This floating Tool tip help will identify the icon. A brief description of the icon also appears in the status bar. We are now ready to start building the model geometry. The steps and, wherever possible, the corresponding STAAD.Pro commands (the instructions which get written in the STAAD input file) are described in the following sections.
Tutorials
1.5.1 Generating the Model Geometry
The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the structure shown in section 1.2 are :: JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4 Steps: 1. We selected the Add Beam option earlier to facilitate adding beams to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X,Y,Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 7 of 201
Figure 1. 10 2. A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments. The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane We will use the Linear tab. In our structure, the segment consisting of members 1 to 3, and nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane. So, in this dialog box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 20 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 15 above the origin along Y, and a spacing of 1 feet between lines along both X and Y (see figure below) we can draw a frame 20ft X 15ft, adequate for our structure. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 8 of 201
Figure 1. 12 4. In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by beam members. (0, 15), (20, 15), and (20, 0) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the structure will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
Figure 1. 13 5. At this point, let us remove the grid from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 9 of 201
Figure 1. 15 It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command.
Tutorials
1.5.2 Switching On Node And Beam Labels
1. Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the dialog box that comes up, choose Labels. Alternatively, one may access this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 10 of 201
2.
Figure 1. 16 In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK.
Figure 1. 18 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box.
Tutorials
Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams and columns (see figure in section 1.2). For those of us curious to know the equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they are :
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 11 of 201
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 TABLE ST W12X35 2 TABLE ST W14X34 Steps: 1. To define member properties, click on the Property Page icon located on the top toolbar.
Figure 1. 20 2. In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up (see next Figure). The property type we wish to create is the W shape from the AISC table. This is available under the Section Database button in the Properties dialog box as shown below. So, let us click on the Section Database button.
3.
Figure 1. 21 In the Section Profile Tables dialog box that comes up, select W Shape under the American option. Notice that the Material box is checked. Let us keep it that way because it will enable us to subsequently assign the material constants E, Density, Poisson, etc. along with the cross-section since we want to assign the default values. Choose W12X35 as the beam size, and ST as the section type. Then, click on the Add button as shown in the figure below. Detailed explanation of the terms such as ST, T, CM, TC, BC, etc. is available in Section 5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 12 of 201
Figure 1. 22 4. To create the second member property (ST W14X34), select the W14X34 shape and click on the Add button. After the member properties have been created, let us close the Section Profiles Table dialog box. 5. The next step is to associate the properties we just created with selected members in our model. Follow these steps. a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog box (W12X35). b. Make sure that the Use Cursor to Assign button is selected under the Assignment Method box. c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 3. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or click on the Esc button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.
Figure 1. 23 6. In a similar fashion, assign the second property reference (W14X34) to member 2.
After both the properties have been assigned to the respective members, our model should resemble the following figure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 13 of 201
Figure 1. 24 Let us once again save our structure by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Tutorials
In Section 1.5.3, we kept the Material check box on while assigning the member properties. Consequently, the material constants got assigned to the members along with the properties, and the following commands were generated in the command file: CONSTANTS E 29000 MEMB 1 TO 3 POISSON 0.3 MEMB 1 TO 3 DENSITY 0.000283 MEMB 1 TO 3 ALPHA 6.5e-006 MEMB 1 TO 3 Hence, there is no more a need to assign the constants separately. However, if we hadnt assign them as before, we could go to the menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them explicitly as shown in the figure below.
Figure 1. 25
Tutorials
For specifying member offset values, as a matter of convenience, it is simpler if our length units are inches instead of feet. The commands to be generated are: UNIT INCHES KIP
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 14 of 201
Steps: 1. To change the length units from feet to inch, either click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar.
Figure 1. 26 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option as shown in the next figure.
Figure 1. 27 2. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Inch and click on the OK button.
Figure 1. 28
Tutorials
1.5.6 Specifying Member Offsets
Since beam 2 actually spans only the clear distance between the column faces, and not the center to center distance, we can take advantage of this aspect by specifying offsets. Member 2 is OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global X direction, 0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is offset by negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. The corresponding STAAD commands are: MEMBER OFFSET 2 START 6.0 0.0 0.0 2 END -6.0 0.0 0.0 Steps: 1. Since we know that member 2 is the one to be assigned with the offset, let us first select this member prior to defining the offset itself. Select member 2 by clicking on it using the Beams Cursor . The selected member will be highlighted. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Taskssection at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) To define member offsets, click on the Specification Page icon located in the top toolbar.
2.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 15 of 201
Figure 1. 29 Alternatively, one may go to the General | Spec Page from the left side of the screen.
Figure 1. 30 3. In either case, the Specifications dialog box shown below comes up. Member Releases and Offsets are defined through the Beam button in this dialog box as shown below.
Figure 1. 31 4. In the Beam Specs dialog box that opens, select the Offset tab. We want to define the offset at the start node in the X direction. Hence, make sure that the Start button is selected. Then, enter 6.0 in the X edit box. Since we have already selected the member, let us click on the Assign button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 16 of 201
Figure 1. 32 5. To apply the offset at the end node, repeat steps 3 and 4, except for selecting the End option and providing -6.0 in the X edit box.
After both the Start and End offsets have been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 33 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member. Let us save the work again by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Tutorials
1.5.7 Printing Member Information in the Output File
We would like to get a report consisting of information about all the members including start and end joint numbers (incidence), member length, beta angle and member end releases in the STAAD output file. The corresponding STAAD command is: PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL Steps: 1. Since the information is required for all the members, select all the members by going to Select | By All | All Beams menu option.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 17 of 201
Figure 1. 34 2. Then, go to Commands | Pre Analysis Print | Member Information from the top menu bar as shown in the figure below.
Figure 1. 35 3. Notice that the assignment method is set To Selection. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
Figure 1. 36 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. Let us also save our structure again by using the Save option of the File menu.
Tutorials
The specifications of this problem call for restraining all degrees of freedom at node 1 (FIXED support) and a pinned type of restraint at node 4 (restrained against all translations, free for all rotations) The commands to be generated are : SUPPORTS
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 18 of 201
1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED Steps: 1. To create a support, click on the Support Page icon located in the top toolbar as shown below.
Figure 1. 38 2. In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the next figure. Since we already know that node 1 is to be associated with a Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor , select node 1. It becomes highlighted. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting nodes.) 3. Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below.
Figure 1. 39 4. In the Create Support dialog box that opens, select the Fixed tab (which also happens to be the default) and click on the Assign button as shown below. This creates a FIXED type of support at node 1 where all 6 degrees of freedom are restrained.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 19 of 201
Figure 1. 40 5. To create a PINNED support at node 4, repeat steps 2 to 4, except for selecting node 4 and selecting the Pinned tab in the Create Support dialog box. After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below.
Figure 1. 41 After assigning both the supports, let us save our structure using the File | Save option.
Tutorials
1.5.9 Viewing the model in 3D
Let us see how we can display our model in 3D. To do this, either right-click and select Structure Diagrams or go to View | Structure Diagrams menu.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 20 of 201
Figure 1. 42 In the ensuing dialog box, the Structure tab page allows you to set up structural view parameters as explained below. The options under 3D Sections control how the members are displayed. Selecting None displays the structure without displaying the cross-sectional properties of the members and elements. Selecting Full Sections displays the 3D cross-sections of members, depending on the member properties. Sections Outline displays only the outline of the cross-sections of members. Let us select Full Sections to draw the 3D sections. You can also change the color of the sections by clicking on the Section Outline color button under the Colors section. Then, click on OK.
Figure 1. 43 The resulting diagram is shown below.
Figure 1. 44
Tutorials
Three load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. UNIT FEET KIP LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -2.5 LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10. LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) 1 0.75 2 0.75 Steps: The creation and assignment of load cases involves the following two steps: a. First, we will be creating all 3 load cases. b. Then, we will be assigning them to the respective members/nodes. Creating load cases 1 and 2 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the top tool bar.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 21 of 201
Figure 1. 45 Click on the New Load button in the Loads dialog box that comes up to initiate the first load case. Alternatively, one may go to the General | Load Page from the left side of the screen.
Figure 1. 46 2. Before we create the first load case, we need to change our length units to feet. To do that, as before, utilize the 1.5.5). Input Units icon (see section
Notice that a window titled Load appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To create the first load case, highlight Load Cases Details and then click on the Add button in the Load dialog box.
Figure 1. 47 3. The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD + LIVE as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on the Add button
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 22 of 201
Figure 1. 49 To create the Member load, first highlight DEAD + LIVE. You will notice that the Create New Load Item dialog box shows more options now.
Figure 1. 50 4. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Uniform Force option under the Member Load item. Specify GY as the Direction, enter -2.5 as the Force and click on the Add button.
Figure 1. 51 The next step is to create the second load case which contains a joint load. 5. Highlight Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as WIND FROM LEFT and click on the Add button.
Figure 1. 52 6. Next, to create the Joint load, highlight WIND FROM LEFT.
Figure 1. 53 7. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Node option under the Nodal Load item. Specify 10 for Fx, and click on the Add button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 23 of 201
Figure 1. 54 Creating load case 3 Load cases 1 and 2 were primary load cases. Load case 3 will be defined as a load combination. So, the next step is to define load case 3 as 0.75 x (Load 1 + Load 2), which is a load combination. 8. To do this, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Specify the Title as 75 Percent of [DL+LL+WL].
Figure 1. 55 In the Define Combinations box, the default load combination type is set to be an algebraic combination, and hence, an explicit switch setting instructing the program to use this type of combination is not necessary. The other combination type available is called SRSS, square root of sum of squares. This type offers the flexibility of part SRSS and part Algebraic. That is, some load cases are combined using the square root of sum of squares approach, and the result is combined with other cases algebraically, as in A + SQRT(B*B + C*C) where A, B and C are the individual primary cases. We intend to use the default algebraic combination type. 9. In the Define Combinations box, select both load cases from the left side list box (by holding down the Ctrl key) and click on the button. The load cases appear in the right side list box. Then, enter 0.75 in the Factor edit box. (These data indicate that we are adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 0.75 and that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic summation of the results for individual load cases.) Press the Add button.
Figure 1. 56 Now that we have completed the task of creating all 3 load cases, let us Close the Add New Load Cases dialog box. Our next step is to associate load case 1 with member 2. Follow these steps. a. Select the first load reference in the Load dialog box (UNI GY -2.5 kip/ft). b. Make sure that the Use Cursor to Assign button is selected under the Assignment Method box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 24 of 201
c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to . d. Using the cursor, click on member 2. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the Esc button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.
Figure 1. 57 After the member load has been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 58 In a similar fashion, assign the second load case (FX 10 kip, ft) to Node 2. After assigning the joint load, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 59 Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the Ctrl key and pressing the S key.
Tutorials
The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We also need to obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the command: PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK Steps: To specify the Analysis command, first go to Analysis/Print Page from the left side of the screen. By Default, the Analysis sub-page from 1. the second row is in focus as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 25 of 201
2.
Figure 1. 60 In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, make sure that the Perform Analysis tab is selected. Then, check the Statics Check print option. Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
Tutorials
1.5.12 Specifying Post Analysis Print Commands
We would like to obtain the member end forces and support reactions written into the output file. This requires the specification of the following commands: PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4 Steps:
1.
The dialog box for specifying the above commands is nested in the Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis | Print page.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 26 of 201
Figure 1. 62 2. 3. Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right hand side of the screen.
Figure 1. 63 4. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the Member Forces tab and click on the Assign button followed by the Close button.
Figure 1. 64 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 except for selecting both the supports and selecting the Support Reactions tab in the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box. (Recall that the supports can be selected by turning the Nodes Cursor on, holding the Ctrl key down, and clicking on the supports.) After clicking on the Assign button, Close the dialog box. At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box should resemble the figure shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 27 of 201
Figure 1. 65 Save the work using the File | Save menu option.
Tutorials
1.5.13 Short-listing The Load Cases To Be Used In Steel Design
The steel design has to be performed for load cases 1 and 3 only per the specification at the beginning of this tutorial. To instruct the program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we have to use the LOAD LIST command. The command will appear in the STAAD file as : LOAD LIST 1 3 Steps: 1. In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading | Load List option as shown below.
2.
Figure 1. 66 A Load List dialog box comes up. From the Load Cases list box on the left, double click on 1: DEAD + LIVE and 3: 75 Percent of [DL+LL+WL] to send them to the Load List box on the right, as shown below. Then click on the OK button to dismiss the dialog box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 28 of 201
Figure 1. 67
Tutorials
1.5.14 Specifying Steel Design Parameters
The specifications listed in section 2.2 of this tutorial require us to provide values for some of the terms used in steel design because the default values of those terms are not suitable. The corresponding commands to be generated are:
PARAMETER CODE AISC FYLD 5760 ALL UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3 UNB 10.0 MEMB 23 TRACK 2 MEMB 2 3 SELECT MEMB 2 3
Steps: 1. To specify steel design parameters, go to Design | Steel Page from the left side of the screen. Make sure that under the Current Code selections on the top right hand side, AISC ASD is selected.
Figure 1. 68 2. Click on the Define Parameters button in the Steel Design dialog box.
Figure 1. 69 3. In the Design Parameters dialog box that comes up, select the Fyld tab. Then, provide the Yield Strength as 5760 Kip/ft 2 and click on the Assign button followed by the close button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 29 of 201
Figure 1. 70 4. To define the remaining parameters, repeat steps 2 to 4 except for selecting the parameters and providing the values listed below. Parameter UNT UNB TRACK Value 10 10 2
5. When all the parameters have been added, click on the Close button in the Design Parameters dialog box. 6. The next step is to assign these parameters to specific members of the model. From looking at the requirements listed in the beginning of this tutorial, we know that the FYLD parameter is to be assigned to all the members, while the remaining parameters are to assigned to members 2 and 3. As before, use the Use Cursor to Assign method to assign these parameters.
Figure 1. 71 After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Steel Design dialog box will look as shown below.
Figure 1. 72 7. To specify the SELECT command, click on the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog box as shown below. The SELECT command is an instruction to the program to fetch and assign the least-weight cross-section which satisfies all the code requirements (PASSes) for the member.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 30 of 201
Figure 1. 73 8. In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the Select tab. Since members 2 and 3 are already selected, let us straightaway click on the Assign button followed by the Close button.
Figure 1. 74 9. Once again, we need to associate this command with members 2 and 3. You may either use the Use Cursor to Assign method or first select members 2 and 3 and then use the Assign to Selected Beams option. After the parameters are assigned, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. Let us save our structure by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Tutorials
1.5.15 Re-specifying The Analysis Command
When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect this new stiffness distribution. The command to be generated is hence: PERFORM ANALYSIS Steps: 1. To specify the Analysis command, repeat steps 1 and 2 of Section 1.5.11 of this tutorial. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that comes up, select the Perform Analysis tab. Since we are not interested in a statics check report once again, let us check the No Print option. Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. We should again save the work using File | Save.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 31 of 201
Tutorials
1.5.16 Re-specifying The TRACK Parameter

The final calculation we need to do is make sure the current set of member properties pass the code requirements based on the up-to-date member forces. This will require that we do a code checking operation again. To restrict the output produced to a reasonable level, we specify the TRACK parameter again as:
TRACK 1 ALL
Steps: 1. To define and assign 1.0 for the TRACK parameter, repeat steps 1 to 4 of Section 1.5.14 of this tutorial. 2. Next, select all the members by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) Then, assign this parameter to all the members.
Tutorials
1.5.17 Specifying The Check Code Command

The analysis operation carried out in response to the command in Section 1.5.15 will create a new set of member forces. These forces will very likely be quite different from those which were used in the member selection operation (see the commands of section 1.5.14). Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely able from the standpoint of the design code requirements to carry these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the up-todate cross sections of the members, and the latest member forces, will provide us with a status report on this issue. The command to be generated is hence: CHECK CODE ALL Steps: 1. If you have wandered away from the Steel Design page, from the Commands menu on top of the screen, select Design | Steel Design. 2. Click on the Commands button in the Steel Design dialog box as shown below.
Figure 1. 75 3. In the Design Commands dialog box that appears, click on the Check Code tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 32 of 201
Figure 1. 76 4. Since the CHECK CODE command has to be assigned to all the members, the easiest way to do that is to click on the Assign to View button.
Figure 1. 77 We have now completed the tasks for assigning the input for this model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save option.
Tutorials
2.9 Graphical Post Processing
STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. For this tutorial problem, you shall perform the following tasks:

Annotate the structure with different labels Create Bending Moment Diagram on screen Display the Dimensions on the structure Display Loads on the structure
For information on generating Customized Reports, please refer to the Tutorial Problem 2, described in Chapter 3. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. The Post Processing mode is invoked from the Mode menu as shown in Figure 2.57.
Select the Post Processing option from the Mode menu. The Results Setup dialog box (shown in Figure 2.58) appears. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For our case, select all Load Cases. Then click OK.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 33 of 201
Notice the tabbed Page Control bar and the menu bar change to offer the post processing functions. You shall now annotate the view of the structure displayed in the Main Window area. Select the Symbols and Labels icon from the toolbar.
From the Labels tab of the Diagrams dialog box (see Figure 2.60), select Node Numbers, Beam Numbers, Property References and Supports. Select the OK button to see the changes.
Figure 2.61 shows the structure with the annotations.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 34 of 201
Using the Front View icon from the toolbar, change the view of the structure to the XY plane.
You shall now display the bending moment diagrams on the structure. Select the Results menu. Then select the Bending Moment option to view the bending moment diagrams on the model. In the main drawing area, a diagram similar to the one shown in Figure 2.66 is displayed.
You can display the Bending Moment values on the diagram as well. To display the values of the bending moments at the ends and midpoints of the members, select the View Value option from the Results menu. The dialog box of Figure 2.65 appears.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 35 of 201
From the Ranges tab, select All members. From the Beam Results tab, select the Ends and Midpoint checkboxes under the Bending group. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box. Maximize the Whole Structure window to get a better view. Figure 2.66 shows the bending moment diagrams on the structure. To fit the diagram within the bounds of the drawing area, select View | Zoom | Zoom Out.
Now let us display the bending moment diagrams for load case 2. Select the Symbols and Labels icon from the toolbar. Select the Loads and Results tab. Choose Load Case 2: WIND FROM LEFT from the Load case list box, and None for Deflection as shown in Figure 2.67.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 36 of 201
Click the OK button and the diagram shown below will be displayed.
You shall now display the structure with dimensions as well as applied loads. Select the Symbols and Labels icon from the toolbar. From the Loads and Results tab, deselect Bending zz and select the Loads checkbox. Select load case 1: DEAD + LIVE from the Load Case list box. Click Apply followed by OK. Now display the dimension of the members using the Dimension icon (shown below). The option Dimension to View is active. Click on the Display button, and the dimensions of the members will appear alongside the members.
At this point, the diagram looks like the one shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 37 of 201
You may save the screen shot by clicking on the Take Picture icon (shown below). This picture may be included in custom reports. See Chapter 3 for tutorial on generating custom reports.
For detailed information on the Post Processing features, please refer to the Post Processing section in the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment manual.
Tutorials
Steps: Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved above. The contents of the file can be viewed either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.
Figure 1. 78
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 38 of 201
Figure 1. 80 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor. We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). As we saw in Section 1.1, we could also have created the same model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 1.8 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
Tutorials
1.7 Creating the Model using the Command File
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 39 of 201
Figure 1. 82 You will then encounter the dialog box shown in figure shown below. In that dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor.
Figure 1. 83 At this point, the editor screen similar to the one shown below will open.
Figure 1. 84 Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold below (You dont have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. Usually the first three letters of a keyword are all that are needed -- the rest of the letters of the word are not required. The required letters are underlined. (PLANE = PLA = plane = pla)
STAAD PLANE PORTAL FRAME
Every STAAD.Pro input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame (in the XY plane). The remainder of the words are the title of the problem, which is optional. If a line is typed with an asterisk in the first column, it signifies that the line is a comment line and should not be executed. For example, one could have put the optional title above on a separate line as follows.
* PORTAL FRAME UNIT FEET KIP
Specify the force and length units for the commands to follow.
JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0.
Joint numbers and their corresponding global X and Y coordinates are provided above. For example, 3 20 15. indicates that node 3 has an X coordinate of 20 ft and a Y coordinate of 15 ft. Note that the reason for not providing the Z coordinate is because the structure is a plane frame. If this were a space frame, the Z coordinate would also be required. Semicolons (;) are used as line separators. In other words, data which is normally put on multiple lines can be put on one line by separating them with a semicolon.
MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2;2 2 3;3 3 4
The members are defined by the joints to which they are connected.
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 TABLE ST W12X35 2 TABLE ST W14X34
Members 1 and 3 are assigned a W12X35 section from the built-in AMERICAN steel table. Member 2 has been assigned a W14X34. The word ST stands for standard single section. Sections 5.20.1 through 5.20.5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual explain the convention for assigning member property names.
UNIT INCHES
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 40 of 201
CONSTANTS E 29000.0 ALL POISSON 0.3 ALL
The length unit is changed from FEET to INCHES to facilitate input of the modulus of elasticity (E). The keyword CONSTANT is required before material properties such as E, density, Poissons ratio, coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPHA) etc. can be provided. See Section 5.26 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for more information.
MEMBER OFFSET 2 START 6.0 0. 0. 2 END -6.0 0. 0.
The beam member is physically connected to the 2 columns at the face of the column, and not at the column centerline. This creates a rigid zone, about half the depth of the columns, at the 2 ends of the beam 2. This rigid zone is taken advantage of using member offsets (It is the users choice whether or not he/she wishes to use these). So, the above commands define that member 2 is eccentrically connected or OFFSET at its START joint by 6 inches in the global X direction, 0.0 and 0.0 in Y and Z directions. The same member is offset by negative 6.0 inches at its END joint. See Section 5.25 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for more information.
PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION ALL
The above command is self-explanatory. The information that is printed includes start and end joint numbers (incidence), member length, beta angle and member end releases.
SUPPORTS 1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED
A fixed support is located at joint 1 and a pinned support (fixed for translations, released for rotations) at joint 4. More information on the support specification is available in Section 5.27 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
UNIT FT
The length unit is changed to FEET to facilitate input of loads.

LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -2.5
The above commands identify a loading condition. DEAD + LIVE is an optional title to identify this load case. A UNIformly distributed MEMBER LOAD of 2.5 kips/ft is acting on member 2 in the negative global Y direction. Member Load specification is explained in Section 5.32 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10.
The above commands identify a second load case. This load is a JOINT LOAD. A 10 kip force is acting at joint 2 in the global X direction.
LOAD COMBINATION 3 75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) 1 0.75 2 0.75
This command identifies a combination load with an optional title. The second line provides the components of the load combination case - primary load cases and the factors by which they should be individually multiplied.
This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis and produce a report of static equilibrium checks. Section 5.37 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual offers information on the various analysis options available.
PRINT MEMBER FORCES ALL PRINT SUPPORT REACTION LIST 1 4
The above print commands are self-explanatory. The member forces are in the member local axes while support reactions are in the global axes.
LOAD LIST 1 3 PARAMETERS CODE AISC UNT 10.0 MEMB 2 3 UNB 10.0 MEMB 2 3 FYLD 5760 ALL TRACK 2.0 MEMB 2 3 SELECT MEMBER 2 3
The above sequence of commands is used to initiate the steel design process. The command PARAMETERS is followed by the various steel design parameters. Parameters are specified typically when their values differ from the built-in program defaults. Specifications of the AISC ASD code are to be followed. A parameter list for the AISC code is available in Table 3.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. ALL members have 10 ft unsupported length for the top and bottom flange (UNT and UNB). UNT and UNB are used to compute the allowable compressive stress in bending. The yield strength of steel is specified as 5760 ksf (40 ksi) since it is different from the default value of 36 ksi. The TRACK parameter controls the level of description of the output, 2.0 being the most detailed. The LOAD LIST command lists the load cases (1 and 3) to be used in the design. The SELECT MEMBER command asks the program to come up with the most economical section for members 2 and 3 in the context of the above analysis.
PERFORM ANALYSIS
When the analysis & design engine executes the member selection operation we specified in the previous step, a new set of properties will end up being assigned to those members. This has the effect of changing the stiffness distribution for the entire structure. Since the structure is statically indeterminate, we ought to re-analyze it if we want the nodal displacements, member forces, etc. to reflect this new stiffness distribution. The above command instructs the program to do another cycle of analysis.
PARAMETER TRACK 1 ALL
The TRACK parameter is re-specified. It controls the level of information produced in the steel design output. We have lowered it from 2.0 we specified earlier to 1.0 since we arent interested in the highest level of detail at this time.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 41 of 201
CHECK CODE ALL
The analysis operation carried out earlier will create a new set of member forces. These forces will very likely be quite different from those which were used in the member selection operation. Consequently, we have to verify that the structure is safely able from the standpoint of the design code requirements to carry these new forces. A code checking operation, which uses the up-to-date cross sections of the members, and the latest member forces, will provide us with a status report on this issue.
FINISH
A STAAD run is terminated using the FINISH command. Save the file and return to the main screen. This concludes the session on generating our model as a command file using the built-in editor. If you wish to perform the analysis and design, you may proceed directly to Section 2.8 of this manual. The on-screen post-processing facilities are explained in Section 1.10. (Remember that without successfully completing the analysis and design, the post-processing facilities will not be accessible.)
Tutorials
1.8 Performing Analysis/Design
Figure 1. 86 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine. Click on the Run Analysis button. As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the figure below.
Figure 1. 87 Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the above dialog box:
Figure 1. 88 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 42 of 201
analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 3.10 offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modeling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we current are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
Tutorials
During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file. This file provides important information on whether the analysis were performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported in the output file. We can access the output file using the method explained at the end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File | View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu. The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in the next few pages.
Figure 1. 90 By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire Input also. You may choose not to print the echo of the Input commands in the Output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set Echo option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button. It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered during the analysis & design can disable access to the post-processing mode the graphical screens where results can be viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is a crucial indicator of whether or not the structure satisfies the engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 43 of 201
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 44 of 201
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 45 of 201
Tutorials
STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks: Display deflection diagrams Annotate Displacements Display the force and moment diagrams. Change the degree of freedom for which the force/moment diagram is plotted
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 46 of 201
Annotate the force diagram Displaying dimensions of members
Tutorials
Figure 1. 91
Figure 1. 92 2. The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For this tutorial, let us select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button.
Figure 1. 93 Notice that in the Post-Processing mode, the tabbed Page Control bar and the menu bar change to offer the post processing functions.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 47 of 201
Figure 1. 94 Menu Bar in Modeling Mode Menu Bar in Post-Processing Mode
Figure 1. 95
Tutorials
1.10.2 Annotating The Displacements
Steps: The screen will now look like the figure shown below.
Figure 1. 96 The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram for load case 1 (DEAD + LIVE). The title at the bottom of the diagram is indicative of that aspect. If you, lets say, wandered off into any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page control area on the left side.
Figure 1. 197 Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
Figure 1. 98 The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes, specify the node numbers in the node list.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 48 of 201
Figure 1. 99 We will annotate the results for all the nodes. So, keep the button on All. From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 1. 101
Tutorials
Steps: The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be found in the form of the Mz icon show in the diagram below
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 49 of 201
which becomes active.
Figure 1. 102
Figure 1. 103 The option for selecting the forces/moment diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu option - as shown below.
Figure 1. 104
Tutorials
Steps: Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 50 of 201
Figure 1. 105 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Ranges tab and select All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list.
Figure 1. 106 We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button on All. From the Beam Results tab, check the Ends and Mid Point options under the Bending section. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 1. 107 The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load case.
Figure 1. 108
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 51 of 201
Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of freedom Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment-Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results. Let us select Shear yy and select load case 3 (75 PERCENT OF (DL+LL+WL) as shown below.
Figure 1. 109 The resulting figure is shown below.
Figure 1. 110 All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a tick mark in the Diagrams dialog box. The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off specific degrees of freedom.
Figure 1. 111 For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f) has been assigned a different color (see Diagrams dialog box shown above). One may change the color for that d.o.f. by clicking on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and make a new choice from the color palette.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 52 of 201
Figure 1. 113
Tutorials
1.10.6 Displaying The Dimensions Of The Members
To display the dimension of the members, click on the Dimension icon. Alternatively, one may select the Dimension Beams option from the Tools menu. In the dialog box that opens, the option Dimension to View is active. Click on the Display button followed by the Close button, and the dimensions of the members will appear alongside the members.
Figure 1. 114
Figure 1. 115 The diagram will look like the one shown below.
Figure 1. 116 We can opt to save the screenshot by clicking on the Take Picture icon (shown below). This picture may be included in custom reports. See Chapter 2 for a tutorial on taking pictures as well as generating custom reports.
Figure 1. 117 For obtaining a quick print of the plot on the screen, select the Print Current View icon as shown below.
Figure 1. 118 For detailed information on the Post Processing features, please refer to the Post Processing section in the STAAD.Pro Graphical Environment manual.
Tutorials
2. Tutorial Problem 2: RC Framed Structure
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 53 of 201
This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for creating the model of a reinforced concrete framed structure using STAAD.Pro. The following topics are covered :

Starting the Program Creating Joints and Members Switching On Node and Beam Labels Specifying Member Properties Specifying Material Constants Specifying Member Orientation using Beta Angle Specifying Supports Specifying Loads Specifying the Analysis Type Specifying the parameters and instructions for Concrete Design Performing Analysis and Design Viewing results using the Output File Viewing results on screen both graphically and numerically Producing customized reports
Tutorials
2.1 Methods Of Creating The Model

As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two methods of creating the structure data: a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. b) using the command file. Both methods are explained in this tutorial also. The graphical method is explained first, from Section 2.2 onwards. Section 2.8 describes the process of creating the model using the command file method and the STAAD.Pro text editor.
Tutorials
The structure for this project is a 2 bay, 2 story reinforced concrete frame. The figure below shows the structure. Our goal is to create the model, assign all required input, and perform the analysis and concrete design.
Figure 2. 1 BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE Member properties DATA Beams 2 & 5 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X 350 mm depth Columns 1 & 4 : Rectangular, 275 mm width X 300 mm depth Column 3 : Circular, 350 mm diameter
Member Orientation All members except column 4 : Default Column 4 : Rotated by 90 degrees with respect to default condition Material Constants Modulus of Elasticity : 22 KN/sq.mm Density : 25 kn/cu.m Poisson's Ratio : 0.17
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 54 of 201
Supports Loads
Base of all columns : Fixed Load case 1 : Dead Load Selfweight of the structure. Beams 2 & 5 : 400 kg/m in global Y downward Load case 2 : Live Load Beams 2 & 5 : 600 kg/m in global Y downward Load case 3 : Wind Load Beam 1 : 300 kg/m along positive global X Beam 4 : 500 kg/m along positive global X Load Case 4 : DEAD + LIVE L1 X 1.2 + L2 X 1.5 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not Load Combination) Load Case 5 : DEAD + WIND L1 X 1.1 + L2 X 1.3 (Use REPEAT LOAD, not Load Combination)
Tutorials
2.3 Starting The Program
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 55 of 201
Figure 2. 3 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. To turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog at Startup box at the lower left hand corner. This feature can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu. Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types Steel, Concrete, Aluminum selected from the programs library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.) If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option (see figure below) and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the Metric units (KN, Meter, etc.).
Figure 2. 4
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 56 of 201
Tutorials
1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model. The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Space. We choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name Structure? (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name rcframe. A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
Figure 2. 7 2. In the next dialog box, we choose the tools to be used to initially construct the model. Add Beams, Add Plates or Add Solids are, respectively, the starting points for constructing beams, plates or solids. Open Structure Wizard provides access to a library of structural templates which the program comes equipped with. Those template models can be extracted and modified parametrically to arrive at our model geometry or some of its parts. If the model is to be created initially using the STAAD command language, the Open STAAD Editor box can take us to the STAAD editor. Please remember that all these options are also available from the menus and dialog boxes of the GUI, even after we dismiss this dialog box. Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open STAAD Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 2.8. For our model, let us check the Add Beam option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.
Figure 2. 8
Tutorials
2.5 Elements Of The STAAD.Pro Screen
The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where the model generation process takes place. It is important to familiarize ourselves with the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 57 of 201
components of that window before we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window in details.
Tutorials
2.6 Building The STAAD.Pro Model

Tutorials
2.6.1 Generating The Model Geometry
The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated for the structure shown in section 2.2 are : JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 0.0 3.5 0.0 3 6.0 3.5 0.0 ; 4 6.0 0.0 0.0 5 6.0 0.0 6.0 ; 6 6.0 3.5 6.0 MEMBER INCIDENCE 112;223;334;456;536 Steps: We selected the Add Beam option earlier to enable us to add beams and columns to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main 1. drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X,Y,Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area.
2.
Figure 2. 9 A Snap Node/Beam dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. In our structure, the segment consisting of members 1 to 3, and nodes 1 to 4, happens to lie in the X-Y plane. So, in this dialog box, let us keep X-Y as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 12 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 7 above the origin along Y, and a spacing of 0.5 meter between lines along both X and Y (see figure below) we can draw a frame 6m X 3.5m, adequate for our segment. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 58 of 201
4.
Figure 2. 11 In a similar fashion, click on the following points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by beam members. (0, 3.5), (6, 3.5) and (6, 0) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the frame will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
5.
Figure 2. 12 At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Beam dialog box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 59 of 201
6.
Figure 2. 14 It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command. Node and beam labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. In order to display the node and beam numbers, right click anywhere in the drawing area. In the dialog box that appears, choose Labels (as shown in the figure below). Alternatively, one may access this option by selecting the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up.
Switching On Node And Beam Labels

7.
8.
Figure 2.15 In the Diagrams dialog box that appears, turn the Node Numbers and Beam Numbers on and then click on OK .
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 60 of 201
Figure 2. 17 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the node/beam labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box. 9. Examining the structure shown in section 2.2 of this tutorial, it can be seen that members 4 and 5 can be easily generated if we could first create a copy of members 1 and 2 and then rotate those copied units about a vertical line passing through the point (6, 0, 0, that is, node 4) by 90 degrees. Fortunately, such a facility does exist which can be executed in a single step. It is called Circular Repeat and is available under the Geometry menu. First, select Members 1 and 2 using the Beams Cursor . . (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) 10. Then, either click on the Circular Repeat icon from the appropriate toolbar, or, go to the Geometry | Circular Repeat menu option as shown below.
11.
Figure 2. 18 In the 3D Circular dialog box that comes up, specify the Axis of Rotation as Y, Total Angle as 90 degrees, No. of Steps as 1 and the vertical line passing through Node 4. Instead of specifying as passing through Node 4, one may also specify the X and Z co-ordinates as 6 and 0 respectively. Leave the Link Steps box unchecked and click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 19 After completing the circular repeat procedure, the model will look as shown below. Before
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 61 of 201
Figure 2. 20 After
Figure 2. 21 If any of the members are presently selected, let us unselect them by clicking anywhere else in the drawing area. Then, let us once again save the work by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Tutorials
As a matter of convenience, for specifying member properties for our structure, it is simpler if our length units are millimeter instead of meter. This will require changing the current length units of input. The commands to be generated are: UNIT MMS KN Steps: Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar. 1.
Figure 2. 22 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Unit menu option as shown in next figure.
2.
Figure 2. 23 In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Millimeter and click on the OK button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 62 of 201
Figure 2. 24
Tutorials
Our next task is to assign cross section properties for the beams and columns. For those of us curious to know the equivalent commands in the STAAD command file, they are :
MEMB PROP 1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275 2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275 3 PRIS YD 350
Figure 2. 26 2. In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up. The property type we wish to assign is called PRISMATIC, and is available under the Define button in the Properties dialog box as shown below.
Figure 2. 27
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 63 of 201
4. In the dialog box that comes up, select the Rectangle tab. Notice that the field called Material is presently on the checked mode. If we keep it that way, the material properties of concrete (E, Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be assigned along with the cross-section name. The material property values so assigned will be the program defaults. We do not want default values, instead we will assign our own values later on. Consequently, let us uncheck the Material box. Then, enter the following values: YD = 300mm ZD = 275mm Finally, click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 2. 28 4. To create the second member property (PRIS YD 350 ZD 275), provide 350 for YD and 275 for ZD (instead of 300 and 275) and click on the Add button. To create the third member property, in the Property dialog box, select the Circle option. Specify the diameter (YD) as 350 mm. Once again, uncheck the Material box and click on the Add button.
Figure 2. 29 Now that we have finished creating the member properties, let us Close this dialog box. The next step is to assign these member properties in the following manner: Rect 0.30x0.28 members 1 and 4 Rect 0.35x0.28 members 2 and 5 Cir 0.35 member 3 To assign the member properties, follow these steps: a. Select the first property reference in the Properties dialog box (Rect 0.30x28). b. Make sure that the Use Cursor to Assign button is selected under the Assignment Method box. c. Click on the Assign button. The cursor changes to d. Using the cursor, click on members 1 and 4. e. Finally, click on the Assign button again, or type the Esc button on your keyboard to stop the assignment process.
Figure 2. 30 In a similar fashion, assign the remaining properties. After all the member properties have been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 64 of 201
Figure 2. 31 We ought to save the model once again by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command.
Tutorials
2.6.4 Specifying Geometric Constants
In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way. Orientation refers to the directions along which the width and depth of the cross section are aligned with respect to the global axis system. The rules which dictate this default orientation are explained in Section 1 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. We wish to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel to local Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis. This requires applying a beta angle of 90 degrees. The command which needs to be generated is : BETA 90 MEMB 4 Steps: 1. Select the Beta Angle tab in the Properties dialog box . 2. In the dialog box, specify the angle as 90 degrees. Select member 4 using the Beams Cursor . Notice that as we select the member, the Assignment Method automatically sets to Assign to Selected Beams. Click on the Assign button. Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the member.
Figure 2. 32 (An alternative method for assign beta angles is the following. First select the member for which you wish to assign the beta angle. Then, go to the Commands | Geometric Constants | Beta Angle menu option. Specify the Angle in Degrees to be 90, ensure that the assignment method is To Selection and click on OK. )
Figure 2. 33 One may view the orientation of the member local axes by going to the View | Structure diagrams | Labels menu option and switching on Beam Orientation.
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 65 of 201

At the time of assigning member properties, we deliberately chose not to assign the material constants simultaneously, since we wanted to specify values which are different from the built-in defaults. The desired values are listed at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands we wish to generate in the STAAD input file are:
CONSTANTS E 22 ALL UNIT METER DENSITY 25.0 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL
Steps: 1. From the Commands menu, select Material Constants. To define the Modulus of Elasticity, select the Elasticity option as shown below.
2.
Figure 2. 34 In the Material Constant dialog box that appears, enter 22 in the Enter Value box. Since the value has to be assigned to all the members of the structure, the current setting of the assignment method, namely, To View, allows us to achieve this easily. Then, click on OK
3.
Figure 2. 35 For specifying the DENSITY constant, it will be convenient if we change our length units to meters. To change the length units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the Structure toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Units menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the length units as Meter.
4. 5.
Figure 2. 36 Following the steps 1 and 2 above, we choose Commands | Material Constants | Density, specify the value as 25KN/m 3 , and assign To View. To define the POISSONS RATIO, using the similar procedure as described above, provide the value 0.17 to all members in the View.
Tutorials
The base nodes of all the columns are restrained against translation and rotation about all the 3 global axes. In other words, fixed supports are to be specified at those nodes. The commands to be generated are :
SUPPORTS 1 4 5 FIXED
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 66 of 201
2. 3.
Figure 2. 38 In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up. Since we already know that nodes 1, 4 and 5 are to be associated with the Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor , select these nodes. Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below.
4.
Figure 2. 39 The Create Support dialog box comes up. In the dialog box, the Fixed tab happens to be the default which is convenient for this case. Click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 2. 40 After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 67 of 201
Figure 2. 41 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-select all selected nodes and prevent accidental assignment of unwanted data to those nodes. As earlier, save the work completed so far by going to the File menu and clicking on the Save command.
Tutorials
5 load cases are to be created for this structure. Details of the individual cases are explained at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below. Notice that cases 4 and 5 are to be generated not as the standard combination type, but using a combination load type called REPEAT LOAD. The instructions at the beginning of this tutorial require us to analyze this structure using an analysis type called PDelta. A Pdelta analysis is a non-linear type of analysis. In STAAD, to accurately account for the PDelta effects arising from the simultaneous action of previously defined horizontal and vertical loads, those previous cases must be included as components of the combination case using the REPEAT LOAD type.
UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1 MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY 400 LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD MEMBER LOAD 2 5 UNI GY 600 LOAD 3 WIND LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GX 300 4 UNI GX 500 LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE REPEAT LOAD 1 1.2 2 1.5 LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND REPEAT LOAD 1 1.1 3 1.3
Steps: LOAD CASE 1 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the Structure Tools tool bar.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 68 of 201
2.
Figure 2. 43 A window titled Load appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight the Load Cases Details option and click on the Add button.
3.
Figure 2. 44 The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC . This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
4.
Figure 2. 46 To generate and assign the selfweight load type, first highlight DEAD LOAD. You will notice that the Add New Load Items dialog box shows more options now.
5.
Figure 2. 47 In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 69 of 201
Figure 2. 48 Let use close this dialog box before we proceed to the next step. 6. Load 1 contains an additional load component, the member loads on members 2 and 5. However, notice that the load values are listed in the beginning of this tutorial in kg and meter units. Rather than convert those values to the current input units, we will conform to those units. The current input units, which we last set while specifying Density, are KN and METER. We have to change the force unit to Kilogram. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Kilogram. STAAD has a limitation in that one cannot change the units while editing load cases. If we attempt to, the following message will be displayed.
Figure 2. 49 Click on OK. Close the Add New Load Items dialog box. Then, go to the Setup Page as shown below (or any other page).
Figure 2. 50 As before, click on the Input Units icon from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Kilogram. Again, click on General | Load page to resume creating the load cases. To create the member load, first click on the expression DEAD LOAD followed by the Add button. Then, click on the Member Load item in the Add New Load Items dialog box.
7.
8.
9.
Figure 2. 51 Select the Uniform Force option and specify GY as the Direction and -400 as the Force. For these members, since the local Y axis coincides with the global Y axis, one may choose the direction of the load as either Y or GY, they will both have the same effect. (One may view the orientation of the member local axes by going to View | Structure Diagrams | Labels | Beam Orientation.) The negative value signifies that the load acts along the negative GY direction. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.. The member load we just created has to be assigned to members 2 and 5. First, make sure that the expression UNI GY -400Kg/m is selected in the Load dialog box as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 70 of 201
Figure 2. 52 10. Then, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor . (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting members.) Then click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign button.
Figure 2. 53 As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed wish to associate the loadcase with the selected beams. So, let us choose Yes.
Figure 2. 54 After the load has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below:
Figure 2. 55 LOAD CASE 2 11. The next step is to create the second load case which again contains MEMBER LOADs. Highlight the Load Cases Details option. Highlight Load Cases Details and click on the Add button. Once again, the Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up.
Figure 2. 56 In this dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, we will leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as LIVE LOAD and click on the Add button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 71 of 201
Figure 2. 57 12. Next, to create the member load, highlight LIVE LOAD as shown below.
Figure 2. 58 13. Follow steps 6 to 9 to create and assign a uniformly distributed force of -600Kg/m on members 2 and 5. After the second load case has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below:
Figure 2. 59 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the members. LOAD CASE 3 14. Creating the third load case, which again has MEMBER LOADs, involves the same procedure as that for load case 2. As before, first highlight the Load Cases Details option in the Create New Load Item dialog box to initiate the third load case. Enter WIND LOAD as the Title for Load Case 3. 15. To apply the load on member 1, follow the procedure similar to that in steps 6 to 9. The only differences are, the member which receives this load is 1, the Direction is GX and the Force is +300Kg/m. 16. Similarly, for member 4 and the third load case, specify the Force as 500Kg/m and the Direction as GX. After the third load case has been assigned, the structure will look as shown below:
Figure 2. 60 LOAD CASE 4 17. We now come to the point where we have to create load case 4 as (1.2 x Load 1) + (1.5 x Load 2). We saw in the beginning of this section that we should be creating a REPEAT LOAD type of combination, and not the LOAD COMBINATION type. To initiate load case 4, highlight the Load Cases Details option in the Create New Load Item dialog box and specify the title as DEAD + LIVE.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 72 of 201
18. Then, click on DEAD + LIVE in the Loads dialog box as shown below.
Figure 2. 61 19. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, click on the Repeat Load option. Then, select Load Case 1 (DEAD LOAD), click on the button and enter the Factor as 1.2. (This indicates that the load data values from load case 1 are multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and the resulting values are utilized in load case 4.) 20. Similarly, select Load Case 2 (LIVE LOAD), click on the button and enter the Factor as 1.5,. The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown below. Click on the Add button.
Figure 2. 62 No further operation is required for load case 4. The recipients of the loads in load case 4 are automatically chosen to be the very same ones to which the components of the REPEAT LOAD cases (loads 1 and 2) were assigned. The structure will now look similar to the one shown below.
Figure 2. 63 LOAD CASE 5 21. Since load cases 4 and 5 are near identical in nature, the same procedure used in creating load case 4 is applicable for case 5 also. Let us highlight the Load Cases Details option in the Create New Load Item dialog box to initiate the fifth load case. Enter DEAD + WIND as the Title for Load Case 5. 21. Follow steps 18 to 20 except for associating a Factor of 1.1 with the first load case and a Factor of 1.3 with the third load case. The Add New Load Items dialog box will now look as shown below. Click on the Add button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 73 of 201
Figure 2. 64 Since we have completed creating all the load cases, we may now click on the Close button to dismiss the Add New Load Items dialog box. The structure will now look similar to the one shown below.
Figure 2. 65 Let us save the work completed so far by going to the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the Ctrl key and pressing the S key.
Tutorials
The analysis type for this structure is called P-Delta. Since this problem involves concrete beam and column design per the ACI code, secondorder analysis is required and has to be done on factored loads acting simultaneously. The factored loads have been created earlier as cases 4 and 5. Now is the time to specify the analysis type. The command for a pdelta analysis will appear in the STAAD file as: PDELTA ANALYSIS Steps: Go to Analysis/Print Page on the left side of the screen. 1.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 74 of 201
Figure 2. 66 2. In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the PDelta Analysis tab. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
Figure 2. 67 Save the work again using the Save option of the File menu.
Tutorials
2.6.9 Short-listing The Load Cases To Be Used In Concrete Design
The concrete design has to be performed for load cases 4 and 5 only since only those are the factored cases. To instruct the program to use just these cases, and ignore the remaining, we have to use the LOAD LIST command. The command will appear in the STAAD file as : LOAD LIST 4 5 Steps: 1. In the menus on the top of the screen, go to Commands | Loading | Load List option as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 75 of 201
2.
Figure 2. 68 In the Load List dialog box that comes up, select load cases 4 (DEAD + LIVE) and 5 (DEAD + WIND) by holding the Ctrl key down. Then, click on the button. Load cases 4 and 5 will be selected and placed in the Load List selection box as shown below. Click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 69
Tutorials
2.6.10 Specifying Concrete Design Parameters
Among the various terms which appear in the equations for design of concrete beams and columns, some of them can be user controlled, such as, the grade of concrete, or the maximum size of reinforcing bar one may wish to use. Such terms are called concrete design parameters. For the ACI code, a list of these parameters is available in Section 3 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. The parameters we wish to use, and the corresponding command which ought to appear in the STAAD input file are : UNIT MMS NEWTON CODE ACI CLT 25 ALL CLB 30 ALL CLS 25 ALL FC 25 ALL FYMAIN 415 ALL TRACK 1 ALL Steps: Before we can start assigning the parameters, we want our force units to be Newton and our length units to be millimeter. We last set the 1. units during load specification as Kg and Meter. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Inpu Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the force units as Newton and the length units as Millimeter. Next, go to Design | Concrete Page from the left side of the screen. Make sure that under the Current Code selections on the top right hand side, ACI is selected. Then, click on the Define Parameters button in the Concrete Design dialog box.
2.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 76 of 201
3.
Figure 2. 70 In the Design Parameters dialog box that opens, select the Clt (Clear Cover for top) tab. Then, provide the value as 25mm and click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 2. 71 To define the remaining parameters, follow the above procedure and provide the following values. Parameter Value Clb 30 Cls 25 Fc 25 Fymain 415 Track 1.0 When all the above parameters have been assigned, click on the Close button in the Design Parameters dialog box. After all the design parameters have been assigned, the Concrete Design dialog box will look as shown below. 4.
Figure 2. 72 The next step is to assign these parameters to all the members in our model. The easiest way to do that is to use the Assign To View method. Follow the steps as shown in the figure below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 77 of 201
Figure 2. 73 Let us save our structure once again using the Save option of the File menu.
Tutorials
2.6.11 Specifying Design Commands
Design commands are the actual instructions for the design of beams and columns. We intend to design beams 2 and 5 and columns 1, 3 and 4. The commands to be generated are : DESIGN BEAM 2 5 DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4 Steps: 1. Design commands are generated through the dialog boxes available under the Commands button in the Concrete Design dialog box. So, let us click on the Commands button as shown below.
2.
Figure 2. 74 In the Design Commands dialog box that comes up, select the DESIGN BEAM option and click on the Add button.
3.
Figure 2. 75 We also need to add a command for designing columns. So, select the DESIGN COLUMN option and click on Add button. After steps 2 and 3 are completed, let us Close this dialog box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 78 of 201
4.
The next step is to associate the Design Beam command with members 2 and 5 and the Design Column command with members 1, 3 and 4. To do this, as before, first highlight the expression DESIGN BEAM. Then, select members 2 and 5 using the Beams Cursor . Click on Assign to Selected Beams followed by the Assign button.
Figure 2. 76 As we click on the Assign button, the following dialog box appears. This message box appears just to confirm that we indeed wish to associate the design command with the selected beams. So, let us say Yes.
Figure 2. 77 Similarly, assign the Design Column command to members 1, 3 and 4 This concludes the task of assigning all the input for our model. Let us Save the file one final time.
Tutorials
Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved above. The contents of the file can be viewed either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.
Figure 2.79 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor. We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). As we saw in Section 2.1, we could also have created the same model by typing the relevant STAAD commands into a text file using either the STAAD editor, or by using any external editor of our choice. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 2.9 where we perform the analysis and design on this model.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 79 of 201
Tutorials
2.8 Creating The Model Using The Command File
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 80 of 201
STAAD SPACE RC FRAMED STRUCTURE
UNIT METER KN
Specifies the unit to be used.

JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 0 ; 3 6 3.5 0 4 6 0 0 ; 5 6 0 6 ; 6 6 3.5 6
MEMBER INCIDENCES 112;223;334 456;563

UNIT MMS KN MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 4 PRIS YD 300 ZD 275 2 5 PRIS YD 350 ZD 275 3 PRIS YD 350
Member properties have been defined above using the PRISMATIC attribute for which YD (depth) and ZD (width) values are provided in MM unit. When YD and ZD are provided together, STAAD considers the section to be rectangular. When YD alone is specified, the section is considered to be circular. Details are available in Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CONSTANTS E 22 MEMB 1 TO 5
Material constant E (modulus of elasticity) is specified as 22KN/sq.mm following the command CONSTANTS.
UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS DENSITY 25.0 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL
Length unit is changed from MMS to METER to facilitate the input of Density. Next, the Poissons Ratio is specified.
BETA 90 MEMB 4
In the absence of any explicit instructions, STAAD will orient the beams and columns of the structure in a pre-defined way (see Section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details.) In order to orient member 4 so that its longer edges (sides parallel to local Y axis) are parallel to the global Z axis, we need to apply a beta angle of 90 degrees.
SUPPORT 1 4 5 FIXED
Joints 1, 4 and 5 are defined as fixed supported.

UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of loads. Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title.
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
One of the components of load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards.
Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5.
LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD

Load 2 also contains member loads. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 2 and 5.
LOAD 3 WIND LOAD

MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GX 300 4 UNI GX 500
Load 3 also contains member loads. GX indicates that the load is in the global X direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 1 and 4.
LOAD 4 DEAD + LIVE
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 81 of 201

Load case 4 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases specified earlier. We are instructing the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting simultaneously. The load data values from load case 1 are multiplied by a factor of 1.2, and the resulting values are utilized in load case 4. Similarly, the load data values from load case 2 are multiplied by a factor of 1.5, and the resulting values too are utilized in load case 4.
LOAD 5 DEAD + WIND

We are instructing the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 3 acting simultaneously.
PDELTA ANALYSIS
The PDELTA ANALYSIS command is an instruction to the program to execute a second-order analysis and account for P-delta effects. LOAD LIST 4 5 The above LOAD LIST command is a means of stating that all further calculations should be based on the results of load cases 4 and 5 only. The intent here is to restrict concrete design calculations to that for load cases 4 and 5 only.
START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE ACI UNIT MMS NEWTON CLT 25 ALL CLB 30 ALL CLS 25 ALL FC 25 ALL FYMAIN 415 ALL TRACK 1 ALL
We first line is the command that initiates the concrete design operation. The values for the concrete design parameters are defined in the above commands. Design is performed per the ACI Code. The length units are changed from METER to MMS to facilitate the input of the design parameters. Similarly, force units are changed from KG to NEWTON. The TRACK value dictates the extent of design related information which should be produced by the program in the output. The parameters specified include CLT(Clear cover for top surface), CLB (Clear cover for bottom surface), CLS (Clear cover for sides), FC(Strength of concrete), and FYMAIN(Ultimate strength of steel). These parameters are described in Section 3 of the Technical Reference Manual.
DESIGN BEAM 2 5 DESIGN COLUMN 1 3 4
The above commands instruct the program to design beams 2 and 5 for flexure, shear and torsion, and to design columns 1, 3 and 4 for axial load and biaxial bending.
END CONCRETE DESIGN
This command terminates the concrete design operation.

FINISH
Tutorials
2.9 Performing The Analysis And Design
Figure 2. 85 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. So, let us ensure that the radio button is on the STAAD engine. Click on the Run Analysis button. As the Analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the figure below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 82 of 201
Figure 2. 86 Notice that we can choose from the three options available in the above dialog box :
Figure 2. 87 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 2.10 offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modeling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we current are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
Tutorials
During the analysis process, STAAD.Pro creates an Output file. This file provides important information on whether the analysis was performed properly. For example, if STAAD.Pro encounters an instability problem during the analysis process, it will be reported in the output file. We can access the output file using the method explained at the end of the previous section. Alternatively, we can select the File | View | Output File | STAAD Output option from the top menu. The STAAD.Pro output file for the problem we just ran is shown in the next few pages.
Figure 2.89 By default, the output file contains a listing of the entire Input also. You may choose not to print the echo of the Input commands in the Output file. Please select Commands | Miscellaneous | Set Echo option from the menu bar and select the Echo Off button. It is quite important that we browse through the entire output file and make sure that the results look reasonable, that there are no error messages or warnings reported, etc. Errors encountered during the analysis & design can disable access to the post-processing mode the graphical screens where results can be viewed graphically. The information presented in the output file is a crucial indicator of whether or not the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 83 of 201
structure satisfies the engineering requirements of safety and serviceability.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 84 of 201
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 85 of 201
Tutorials
STAAD.Pro offers extensive result verification and visualization facilities. These facilities are accessed from the Post Processing Mode. The Post Processing mode is used to verify the analysis and design results and generate reports. For this tutorial problem, we shall perform the following tasks: Display deflection diagrams Annotate Displacements Change the Display units for displacement values shown in the tables. Switching between load cases for viewing deflection diagrams. Display the force and moment diagrams. Changing the degree of freedom for which the force/moment diagram is plotted Annotating the force diagram Changing the Display units for the force and moment values shown in the tables. Restricting the load cases for which results are viewed Using Member Query Viewing Concrete Design results using Query. Producing an on-screen report Taking pictures Creating Customized Reports
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 86 of 201

Figure 2. 90
Figure 2. 91 2. The Results Setup dialog box appears as shown below. Select the load cases for which to display the results. For our case, let us select all the load cases. Then click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 92
Tutorials
2.11.2 Viewing The Deflection Diagram
The screen will now look like the figure shown below.
Figure 2. 93 The diagram currently on display is the node deflection diagram for load case 1 (DEAD LOAD). The title at the bottom of the diagram is
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 87 of 201
indicative of that aspect. If you, lets say, wandered off into any other result diagram, and wanted to get back to the deflection diagram, just select the Node | Displacement tab along the page control area on the left side.
Figure 2.94 The option for selecting the deflection diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Deflection menu option - as shown below.
Figure 2. 95
Tutorials
2.11.3 Switching Between Load Cases For Viewing The Deflection Diagram
Steps: 1. To change the load case for which to view the deflection diagram, you may click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one you want.
2.
3.
Figure 2. 97 In either case, theDiagrams dialog box comes up. Select the Loads and Results tab and choose the desired load case from the Load Case list box. Then, click on OK.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 88 of 201
Figure 2. 98 The diagram below shows the deflected shape of the structure for load case 3.
Figure 2. 99 4. To display the deflection for say, load case 5 (DEAD + WIND), follow step 1 or 2 and select load case 5. The deflection of Load Case 3 will now displayed on the model as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 89 of 201
Figure 2. 100
Tutorials
2.11.4 Changing The Size Of The Deflection Diagram
Steps: If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the deflection plot, you may a) click on the Scale icon
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 90 of 201
Figure 2. 103 In the Displacement field, specify a smaller number than what is currently listed, and click on OK. The deflection diagram should now be larger. In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down arrow keys.
Figure 2. 104
Tutorials
2.11.5 Annotating Displacements
Annotation is the process of displaying the displacement values on the screen. Steps: 1. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 91 of 201
Figure 2. 105 2. The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All nodes. If you wish to annotate deflection for just a few nodes, specify the node numbers in the node list.
Figure 2. 106 We will annotate the results for all nodes. So, keep the button on All. From the Node tab, check the Resultant option. Resultant stands for the square root of sum of squares of values of X,Y and Z displacements. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 2. 108
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 92 of 201
Tutorials
2.11.6 Changing The Units In Which Displacement Values Are Annotated
The units in which displacement values are displayed in the post-processing mode are referred to as the display units. Steps: 1. Display units may be modified by using any one of the following methods: a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon,
2.
Figure 2. 111 In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Structure Units tab. Change the Dimensions of Displacement from Millimeter to say, cm or inches or anything else you desire, and select OK.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 93 of 201
Figure 2.113
Tutorials
2.11.7 The Node Displacement Table
Upon entering the Post-Processing mode, the first screen that we came across is shown below.
Figure 2. 114 For the Node | Displacement page on the left side, notice that there are 2 tables displayed along the right side. The upper table, called the Node Displacements table, lists the displacement values for every node for every selected load case. Load cases may be selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details) The lower table is called the Beam relative displacement table. If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore them from the View | Tables menu.
Figure 2. 115 The Node Displacement table window has two tabs: All and Summary (see figure below).
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 94 of 201
Figure 2. 116 All - This tab presents all nodal displacements in tabular form for all load cases and all degrees of freedom.
Figure 2. 117 Summary - This tab, shown in the figure below, presents the maximum and minimum nodal displacements (translational and rotational) for each degree of freedom. All nodes and all Load Cases specified during the Results Setup are considered. Maximum values for all degrees of freedom are presented with the corresponding Node of occurrence and Load Case number (L/C).
Figure 2. 118 For the Beam Relative Displacement table, the details are as follows : All The All tab presents the displacements of members at intermediate section points. All specified members and all specified load cases are included. The table shows displacements along the local axes of the members, as well as their resultants. Max Displacements The Max Displacements tab presents the summary of maximum sectional displacements (see figure below). This table includes the maximum displacement values and location of its occurrence along the member, for all specified members and all specified load cases. The table also provides the ratio of the span length of the member to the resultant maximum section displacement of the member.
Figure 2. 119 The sub-pages under the Node page are described below in brief. Page Sub-Page Purpose Node Displacement Displays nodal displacements along with
tabular results for Node-Displacements and sectional Beam displacements.
Reactions Modes
Displays support reactions on the drawing as well as in a tabular form. Displays mode shapes for the selected Mode shape number. The eigenvectors are simultaneously displayed in tabular form. This Page appears only for dynamic analyses cases, namely, response spectrum, time history, and if modal calculations are requested. Displays Time history plots, for time history analysis. This sub-page too will appear only if time history analysis is performed.
Time History
Tutorials
Steps: 1. The simplest method to access the facilities for displaying force/moment diagrams is from the Beam | Forces page along the page control area on the left side of the screen. The bending moment MZ will be plotted by default, evidence of which can be found in the form of the Mz
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 95 of 201
icon show in the diagram below which becomes active.
Figure 2. 120
2.
Figure 2.121 The option for selecting the force/moment diagram is available from another facility also - the Results | Bending Moment menu option - as shown below.
Figure 2. 122
Tutorials
2.11.9 Switching Between Load Cases For Viewing The Force/Moment Diagram
Steps: 1. To change the load case for which to view the force/moment diagram, you may click in the list box called Active Load and choose the one you want.
2.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 96 of 201
Figure 2. 124 3. In either case, theDiagrams dialog box comes up. Select the Loads and Results tab and choose the first load case (LIVE LOAD) from the Load Case list box. Also, let us check the Shear yy check box. Then, click on OK.
Figure 2. 125 4. The figure below shows the Mz diagram for load case 2.
Figure 2. 126 5. To display the bending moment diagram for, say, load case 4 (DEAD + LIVE), follow steps 1 to 3 above and select load case 4. The following diagram should appear on the drawing area :
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 97 of 201
Figure 2. 127
Tutorials
2.11.10 Changing The Size Of The Force/Moment Diagram
Steps: If the diagram appears too imperceptible, it may be because it may be drawn to too small a scale. To change the scale of the moment plot, you may a) click on the Scale icon
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 98 of 201
Figure 2. 130 In the Bending field, specify a smaller number than what is currently listed, and click on OK. The moment diagram should now be larger. In the above dialog box, if you switch on the check box Apply Immediately, pressing the up or down arrow keys alongside the number will produce immediate results in terms of a smaller or a larger diagram depending on whether you click the up or the down arrow keys.
Figure 2. 131
Tutorials
Force and moment diagrams can be plotted for 6 degrees of freedom Axial, Shear-Y, Shear-Z, Torsion, Moment-Y, Moment-Z. One may select or de-select one of more of these degrees of freedom from View | Structure Diagrams | Loads and Results.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 99 of 201
Figure 2. 132 All degrees of freedom currently plotted will be indicated with a tick mark. The icons of the Results toolbar may also be used to turn on/off specific degrees of freedom.
Figure 2. 133 For the sake of easy identification, each degree of freedom (d.o.f) has been assigned a different color(see Figure 3.126). One may change the color for that d.o.f. by clicking on the color button alongside the d.o.f, and make a new choice from the color palette.
Figure 2. 135
Tutorials
Steps: 1. Annotation is the process of displaying the force/moment values on the screen. Select the View Value option from the Results menu.
Figure 2. 136 2. The following dialog box comes up. From the Ranges tab, select All members. If you wish to annotate the force/moment for just a few members, specify the beam numbers in the beam list.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 100 of 201
Figure 2. 137 We will annotate the results for all members. So, keep the button on All. From the Beam Results tab, check the Bending | Maximum option. Click the Annotate button and notice that the values appear on the structure. Click the Close button to close the dialog box.
Figure 2. 138 The following figure shows the annotated MZ diagram for load case 5.
Figure 2. 139
Tutorials
2.11.13 Changing The Units In Which Force/Moment Values Are Annotated
Steps: 1. The units in which force and moment values are displayed in the post-processing mode are referred to as the display units. Display units may be modified by using any one of the following methods: a. by clicking on the Change Graphical Display Unit icon
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 101 of 201
2.
Figure 2. 142 In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units tab. For bending moments, change the Moment unit from its current setting to one of the choices available, say, Mton-m or kip-ft or anything else you desire, and select OK.
Figure 2. 144
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 102 of 201
2.11.14 Beam Forces Table

When we select the Beam | Forces page from the page control area on the left side, the screen that appears is shown below.
Figure 2. 145 The axial forces and shear forces, bending and torsional moments in all selected beams for all selected load cases are displayed in a tabular form along the right half of the screen. Load cases may be selected or de-selected for the purpose of this table from the Results | Select Load Case menu. (See section 2.11.16 for details) If you happen to close down any of these tables, you can restore them from the View | Tables menu.
Figure 2. 146 The Beam End Forces table window has three tabs: All, Summary and Envelope.
Figure 2. 147 All - This tab presents all forces and moments corresponding to all 6 degrees of freedom at the start and end of each selected member for all selected load cases.
Figure 2. 148 Summary - This tab, shown in the figure below, presents the maximum and minimum values (forces and moments) for each degree of freedom. All beams and all Load Cases specified during the Results Setup are considered. Maximum values for all degrees of freedom are presented with the corresponding Node of occurrence and Load Case number (L/C).
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 103 of 201
Figure 2. 149 Envelope : This tab shows a table consisting of the maximum and minimum for each degree of freedom for each member, and the load case responsible for each of those values.
Figure 2. 150
Tutorials
2.11.15 Viewing The Force/Moment Diagrams From The Beam Graphs Page
The Graphs page in the Post Processing Mode allows us to graphically view moments and forces such as Axial, Bending zz, Shear yy and Combined Stresses for individual members. Select the Graphs sub-page nested under the Beam page from the left side of the screen as shown below.
Figure 2.151 The Main Window area of the screen shows the loading on the structure. On the right side of the screen, the force/moment diagrams appear (see figure below). When we highlight a member in the main window by clicking on it, the graphs are plotted for that member in the data area. The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 1 for load case 4.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 104 of 201
Figure 2. 152 The following figure shows the graphs plotted for member 2 for the same load case.
Figure 2. 153 We can change the degree of freedom for which results are plotted by doing the following. Go into one of the 3 drawing windows on the right side, and click the right mouse button. The following dialog box will appear.
Figure 2. 154 Select Diagrams. In the dialog box which appears, switch on/switch off the degrees of freedom you desire.
Figure 2. 155 Click on OK and that degree of freedom will be plotted in that window.
Tutorials
2.11.16 Restricting The Load Cases For Which Results Are Viewed
Steps: 1. To restrict the load cases for which results are viewed, either click on the Results Setup icon option as shown below. or, go to Results | Select Load Case menu
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 105 of 201
2.
Figure 2. 156 In the Results Setup dialog box that comes up, let us first un-select the already selected load cases by clicking on the
button.
3.
Figure 2. 157 Select load cases 1 (DEAD LOAD) and 3 (WIND LOAD) by holding the Ctrl key down. Then, click on the have been selected, click on the OK button.
button. After the load cases
Figure 2. 158
Tutorials
2.11.17 Using Member Query
Member query is a facility where several results for specific members can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box. It is also a place from where many of the member attributes such as the property definition, specifications (releases, truss, cable, etc.) and beta angle can be changed for input purposes. Steps: To access this facility, first select the member. Then, either go to Tools | Query | Member menu option or, double-click on the member. Let 1. us try double-clicking on member 4.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 106 of 201
Figure 2. 159 As we double-click on member 4, the following dialog box comes up. Let us take a look at the Property tab.
Figure 2. 160 The figure above shows where the buttons are located on the member query box. If the member contains output result tabs (Shear/Bending, Deflection, Steel Design, etc.) in the query box, changing member attributes like releases will cause these result tabs to disappear. This is due to the fact that the current output no longer reflects the new input. NOTE: If you assign or change property by clicking on the Assign/Change Property button in the above dialog box, ensure that you keep the check mark on Apply to this Member only in the ensuing dialog box. Else, changing the member attributes for one member will subsequently change the attributes of all other members belonging to the same attribute list. For example, if the current member's property is also assigned to other members, changing the property on the current member will change the property of all the members. Let us click on the Shear/Bending tab. The following dialog box appears.
Figure 2. 161 The above page contains facilities for viewing values for shears and moments, selecting the load cases for which those results are presented, a slider bar (see figure below) for looking at the values at specific points along the member length, and a Print option for printing the items on display. Experiment with these options to see what sort of results you can get. Grab the slider bar using the mouse and move it to obtain the values at specific locations.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 107 of 201
Figure 2. 162 Another page (deflection) of the above dialog box is shown below.
Figure 2. 163 The concrete design page of the above dialog box is shown below.
Figure 2. 164 To look at the results of another member using this query facility, simply close down this query dialog box and repeat the steps outlined earlier in this section for the desired member.
Tutorials
2.11.18 Producing An On-screen Report

Steps: Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the screen. Let us create one such report. We will create a table that shows the member major axis moment (MZ) values sorted in the order High to 1. Low, for members 1 and 4 for all the load cases. The first step to do this is to select members 1 and 4 from the structure. With the beams cursor active, select members 1 and 4 using the mouse, or use the Select | By List | Beams option of the Select menu and type 1 and 4 as the member numbers. Next, go to the Report | Beam End Forces menu option as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 108 of 201
2.
Figure 2. 165 In the dialog box that appears, select the Sorting tab. Let us select Moment-Z as the End Force, set the Sorting Order to List from High to Low, and switch on Absolute values under If Sorting done. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save ID option.) Under the Loading tab, make sure all the 5 load cases have been selected. Then, click on the OK button.
Figure 2. 166 The next figure shows the member end forces sorted table with the MZ values sorted from High to Low based on Absolute numbers.
3.
Figure 2. 168 Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report.
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 109 of 201
2.11.19 Taking Pictures

There are several options available for taking pictures. The simplest of these is in the edit menu and is called Copy Picture. It transfers the contents of the active drawing window to the windows clipboard. We can then go into any picture processing program like Microsoft Paint or Microsoft Word and paste the picture in that program for further processing. Another more versatile option enables us to include any "snapshot" or picture of the drawing window into a report. It is called Take Picture and is under the Edit menu. Let us examine this feature. Steps: 1. To take a picture, either click on the Take Picture icon or, go to Tools | Take Picture menu option.
2.
Figure 2. 169 The following dialog box comes up. Here, we may provide a caption for the picture so that it may be identified later on.
Figure 2. 170 This picture will be saved till we are ready to produce a customized report of results. Proceed to the next section for details.
Tutorials
2.11.20 Creating Customized Reports
STAAD.Pro offers extensive report generation facilities. Items which can be incorporated into such reports include input information, numerical results, steel design results, etc. One can choose from among a select set of load cases, mode shapes, structural elements, etc.. We may include any "snapshot" or picture of the screen taken using the Take Picture toolbar icon. Other customizable parameters include the font size, title block, headers, footers, etc. 1. The Report Setup utility may be accessed either by selecting the Reports Page or by clicking on the Report Setup icon.
Figure 2. 171 In either case, the following dialog box appears:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 110 of 201
Figure 2. 172 Different tabs of this dialog box offer different options. The Items tab lists all available data which may be included in the report. Note that the items under the Selected list are the ones which have been selected by default. Available items are classified into five categories: Input, Output, Pictures, Reports and STAAD.etc output and Steel Design Output and Advanced Query Reports.
2.
Figure 2. 173 In our report, we want to show Job Information, Node Displacement Summary, Beam Max Moments, and Picture 1. Job Information is already selected by default. From the Available list box, select Output. From the available output items, select Node Displacement Summary and Beam Max Moments. Then select Pictures from the Available list box and select Picture 1. When all the items have been selected, the Report Setup dialog box should appear as shown below.
Figure 2. 174 The Report Detail Increments check box at the bottom indicates the number of segments into which a member would be divided for printing sectional displacements, forces, etc. Click on the Load Cases tab to select the Load Cases to be included in the report. The Grouping buttons indicate whether the report data 3. will be grouped by Node/Beam numbers or by Load Case number. In the first case, all Load Case results will appear under a particular Node or Beam. In the second case, results for all Nodes or Beams for a particular Load Case will appear together.
4.
Figure 2. 175 Click on the Picture Album tab to visually identify the pictures taken earlier. The following figure displays the Picture 1 as stored by the program.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 111 of 201
Figure 2. 176 The Options tab lets you include Header, Footer, Page Numbers, Table Grids, fonts for Column Heading and Table data, etc. The Name and Logo tab allows you to enter the Company Name and Logo. Click on the blank area and type the name and address of the company. Click on the Font button in the Text group and adjust the font to be Arial 16 Pt Bold. Click on the Right radio button in the Alignment group under Text to right-align the company name.
5.
Figure 2. 177 Click OK to finish or click Print to print the report. However, it is always a good idea to first preview the report before printing it. To preview the report just created, select the Print Preview icon from the Toolbar.
Figure 2. 178 The first two pages of the report are shown in the next two figures.
Figure 2. 179
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 112 of 201
Figure 2. 180 This brings us to the end of this tutorial. Though we have covered a large number of topics, there are several more in various menus and dialog boxes. Happy exploring !!!!!
Tutorials
Tutorial Problem 3: Analysis of a slab
This tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for modelling and analysis of a slab supported along two edges. The following topics are covered: Starting the program Modelling the slab using quadrilateral plate elements Specifying slab properties Specifying material constants Specifying supports Specifying loads Specifying the analysis type Viewing results for individual plates
Tutorials
3.1 Methods of creating the model
As explained in Section 1.1 of tutorial problem 1, there are two methods of creating the structure data: a) using the graphical model generation mode, or graphical user interface (GUI) as it is usually referred to. b) using the command file. Both methods of creating the model are explained in this tutorial. The graphical method is explained from Section 3.2 onwards. The command file method is explained in Section 3.8.
Tutorials
3.2 Description of the tutorial problem
The structure for this project is a slab fixed along two edges. We will model it using 6 quadrilateral (4-noded) plate elements. The structure and the mathematical model are shown in the figures below. It is subjected to selfweight, pressure loads and temperature loads. Our goal is to create the model, assign all required input, perform the analysis, and go through the results.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 113 of 201
Figure 3. 1
Figure 3. 2 BASIC DATA FOR THE STRUCTURE ATTRIBUTE Element properties Material Constants Supports Primary Loads DATA Slab is 300mm thick E, Density, Poisson, Alpha Default values for concrete Nodes along 2 edges are fixed as shown in Figure 5.2 Load 1: Selfweight Load 2: Pressure Load of 300Kg/sq.m. acting vertically downwards Load 3: 75 degree F uniform expansion, plus top surface is 60 degrees hotter than the bottom Combination Loads Analysis Type Case 101: Case 1 + Case 2 Case 102: Case 1 + Case 3 Linear Elastic
Tutorials
3.3 Starting the program
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 114 of 201
Figure 3. 4 This New dialog box will come up every time we start the program. If you wish to turn this feature off, simply uncheck the Display this dialog at Startup box at the lower left hand corner. It can be turned on again at a later time when File | New is invoked from the main menu. Note about the unit system : There are two base unit systems in the program which control the units (length, force, temperature, etc.) in which, values, specifically results and other information presented in the tables and reports, are displayed in. The base unit system also dictates what type of default values the program will use when attributes such as Modulus of Elasticity, Density, etc., are assigned based on material types Steel, Concrete, Aluminum selected from the programs library (Please refer to Section 5 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual for details). These two unit systems are English (Foot, Pound, etc.) and Metric (KN, Meter, etc.) If you recall, one of the choices made at the time of installing STAAD.Pro is this base unit system setting. That choice will serve as the default until we specifically change it. The place from where we can change this setting is under the File | Configure menu. To get to that option, first close down the dialog box shown in the earlier figure by clicking on Cancel. Then, click on the File | Configure menu option and choose the appropriate unit system you want. For this tutorial, let us choose the Metric units (KN, Meter, etc.).
Figure 3. 5
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 115 of 201
Tutorials
3.4 Creating a new structure
1. In the New dialog box, we provide some crucial initial data necessary for building the model.
The structure type is to be defined by choosing from among Space, Plane, Floor and Truss. A Space type is one where the structure, the loading or both, cause the structure to deform in all 3 global axes (X, Y and Z). In a Plane type, the geometry, loading and deformation are restricted to the global X-Y plane only. A Floor type is a structure whose geometry is confined to the X-Z plane. A Truss type of structure carries loading by pure axial action. Truss members are deemed incapable of carrying shear, bending and torsion. For our model, let us choose Space. Let us choose Meter as the length unit and Kilo Newton as the force unit in which we will start to build the model. The units can be changed later if necessary, at any stage of the model creation. We also need to provide a name in the File Name edit box. This is the name under which the structure data will be saved on the computer hard disk. The name Structure? (? will be a number) is recommended by the program by default, but we can change it to any name we want. Let us choose the name Plates Tutorial.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 116 of 201
A default path name - the location on the computer drive where the file will be saved - is provided by the program under Location. If you wish to save the file in a different location, type in the name, or click the button and specify the desired path. After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.
Note: If you wish to use the Editor to create the model, choose Open Editor, click Finish, and proceed to Section 3.8 . For our model, let us check the Add Plate option. Click on the Finish button. The dialog box will be dismissed and the STAAD.Pro graphical environment will be displayed.
Figure 3. 9
Tutorials
3.5 Elements of the STAAD.Pro screen
The STAAD.Pro main window is the primary screen from where the model generation process takes place. It is important to familiarize ourselves with the components of that window before we embark on creating the RC Frame. Section 1.5 in tutorial problem 1 of this manual explains the components of that window in detail.
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 117 of 201
3.6 Building the STAAD.Pro model

Tutorials
3.6.1 Generating the model geometry
The structure geometry consists of joint numbers, their coordinates, member numbers, the member connectivity information, plate element numbers, etc. From the standpoint of the STAAD command file, the commands to be generated are :
JOINT COORDINATES 1000;2200;3202;4002 5400;6402;7600;8602 9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4 ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL 11234;22563;35786 4 4 3 9 10 ; 5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11
In this tutorial, we will explore 4 different methods to create the model shown in Section 3.2: 1. 2. 3. 4. Using Using Using Using a mixture of drawing an element and the Copy/Paste facility. a mixture of drawing an element and the Translational Repeat facility. the Structure Wizard facility in the Geometry menu. the Mesh Generation facility of the main graphical screen.

Steps: The Grid Settings 1. We selected the Add Plate option earlier to enable us to add plates to create the structure. This initiates a grid in the main drawing area as shown below. The directions of the global axes (X, Y, Z) are represented in the icon in the lower left hand corner of the drawing area. (Note that we could initiate this grid by selecting the Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate menu option also.)
Figure 3. 10 It is worth paying attention to the fact that when we chose the Add Plate option in section 3.4, the page control area has been automatically set up to have the Geometry Plate page be in focus.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 118 of 201
Figure 3. 11 2. A Snap Node/Plate dialog box also appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. The Linear tab is meant for placing the construction lines perpendicular to one another along a "left to right - top to bottom" pattern, as in the lines of a chess board. The Radial tab enables construction lines to appear in a spider-web style, which makes it is easy to create circular type models where members are modelled as piece-wise linear straight line segments. The Irregular tab can be used to create gridlines with unequal spacing that lie on the global planes or on an inclined plane. We will use the Linear tab. In our structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this dialog box, let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. By setting 6 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X, 4 along Z, and a spacing of 1 meter between lines along both X and Z (see next figure) we can draw a frame 6m X 4m, adequate for our model. Please note that these settings are only a starting grid setting, to enable us to start drawing the structure, and they do not restrict our overall model to those limits. In fact, we do not even need this 6m X 4m grid. The method we are using here requires just a 2m X 2m grid since we are about to draw just a single element.
Figure 3. 12 Creating element 1 3. The four corners of the first element are at the coordinates (0, 0, 0), (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2), and (0, 0, 2) respectively. To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Beam button by clicking on it. Then, with the help of the mouse, click at the origin (0, 0, 0) to create the first node.
Figure 3. 13 4. In a similar fashion, click on the remaining three points to create nodes and automatically join successive nodes by a plate. (2, 0, 0), (2, 0, 2) and (0, 0, 2) The exact location of the mouse arrow can be monitored on the status bar located at the bottom of the window where the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the current cursor position are continuously updated.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 119 of 201
When steps 1 to 4 are completed, the element will be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
Figure 3. 14 5. At this point, let us remove the grid display from the structure. To do that, click on the Close button in the Snap Node/Plate dialog box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 120 of 201
Figure 3. 16 6. 7. It is very important that we save our work often, to avoid loss of data and protect our investment of time and effort against power interruptions, system problems, or other unforeseen events. To save the file, pull down the File menu and select the Save command. For easy identification, the entities drawn on the screen can be labelled. Let us display the plate numbers. (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about switching on node/beam/plate labels.)
The following figure illustrates the plate number displayed on the structure. The structure in the main window should resemble the figure shown below.
Figure 3. 17 If you are feeling adventurous, here is a small exercise for you. Change the font of the plate labels by going to the View menu and selecting the Options command, and then selecting the appropriate tab (Plate labels) from the Options dialog box. Creating element 2 8. Examining the structure shown in section 3.2 of this tutorial, it can be seen that the remaining elements can be easily generated if we could copy the existing plate and then, paste the copied unit at specific distances. The program does indeed have a Copy-Paste facility and it is under the Edit menu. First, select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor 9. .
Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again, click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose Paste Plates from the Edit menu) as shown below.
Figure 3. 18 Figure 3. 19 10. Since this facility allows us to create only one copy at a time, all that we can create from element 1 is element 2. The four nodes of element 2 are at distance of X = 2, Y = 0, and Z = 0 away from element 1. So, in the dialog box that comes up, provide 2, 0, and 0 for X, Y and Z respectively and click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 20 The model will now look like the one shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 121 of 201
Figure 3. 21 Creating element 3 11. The nodes of element 3 are at X = 4m away from those of element 1. So, let us create the third element by repeating steps 8 to 10 except for providing 4m for X in the Paste with Move dialog box. Alternatively, we could use element 2 as the basis for creating element 3, in which case, the X increment will be 2m. If you make a mistake and end up pasting the element at a wrong location, you can undo the operation by selecting Undo from the Edit menu. After creating the third element, the model should look like the one shown below.
. Figure 3. 22 Click anywhere in the screen to un-highlight the highlighted plate. Creating elements 4, 5 and 6 12. The elements 4, 5 and 6 are identical to the first three elements except that their nodes are at a Z distance of 2m away from the corresponding nodes of elements 1 to 3. We can hence use the Copy-Paste technique and specify the Z increment as 2m. Select all three of the existing plates by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. 13. Click the right mouse button and choose Copy from the pop-up menu (or click on the Edit menu and choose Copy). Once again, click the right mouse button and select Paste Plates (or choose Paste Plates from the Edit menu).
14. Provide 0, 0, and 2 for X, Y and Z respectively in the Paste with Move dialog box that comes up. Then, click on the OK button and observe that three new elements are created. Since some elements are still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight those elements. The model, with all the six plates generated, will now look as shown below.
Figure 3. 23 If you want to proceed with assigning the remainder of the data, go to section 3.6.2. If instead, you wish to explore the remaining methods of creating this model, the current structure will have to be entirely deleted. This can be done using the following procedure. From the Select menu, choose By All | All Geometry option. The entire structure will be highlighted. Hit the below will appear. Click on the OK button. key on your keyboard. A message box shown
Figure 3. 24
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 122 of 201
As we click on the OK button, the following message box appears. Let us say Yes. The message box will be dismissed and the entire structure will be deleted.
Figure 3. 25

Steps: Creating element 1 1. In this method, we will be using STAADs Translational Repeat facility to create our model. To utilize this facility, we need at least one existing entity to use as the basis for the translational repeat. So, let us follow steps 1 to 7 from Method 1 to create the first element. Once that is done, our model will look like the one shown below.
Note: If you have trouble bringing the grid settings dialog box, go to the Geometry menu and select Snap/Grid Node Plate.
Figure 3. 26 Creating elements 2 and 3 2. In Method 1, it required two separate executions of the Copy/Paste function to create elements 2 and 3. That is because, that facility does not contain a provision for specifying the number of copies one would like to create. Translational Repeat is a facility where such a provision is available. . (Please refer to the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual to learn more about selecting
Select plate 1 using the Plates Cursor plates.) 3.
Click on the Translational Repeat icon or select the Geometry | Translational Repeat menu option as shown below.
Figure 3. 27
Figure 3. 28
The 3D Repeat dialog box comes up. By default (when the Geometry Only option is not checked), all loads, properties, design parameters, member releases, etc. on the selected entities will automatically be copied along with the entities. By checking the new option labeled Geometry Only, the translational repeating will be performed using only the Geometry data. In our example, it does not matter because no other attributes have been assigned yet. 4. To create elements 2 and 3 along the X direction, specify the Global Direction as X, No of Steps as 2 and the Default Step Spacing (along X) as 2m. The Link Steps option is applicable when the newly created units are physically removed from the existing units, and when one wishes to connect them using members. Renumber Bay enables us to use our own numbering scheme for entities that will be created, instead of using a sequential numbering that the program does if no instructions are provided. Let us leave these boxes unchecked. Then, click on OK.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 123 of 201
Figure 3. 29 Since element 1 is still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight it. The model will now look as shown below.
Figure 3. 30 Creating elements 4, 5 and 6 5. Let us follow the same Translational Repeat method to create these elements. Select all the three existing plates by rubber-banding around them using the mouse. Make sure that before you do this, the cursor type is the Plates Cursor 6. , else, no plates will be selected.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 but this time, specify the Global Direction as Z, No of Steps as 1 and the Default Step Spacing as 2m. Leave the Link Steps box unchecked. Then, click on OK.
All the 6 elements are now created. Since some of the plates are still highlighted, click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight them. Our model will now look like the one shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 124 of 201
Figure 3. 33

Steps: There is a facility in STAAD called Structure Wizard which offers a library of pre-defined structure prototypes, such as Pratt Truss, Northlight Truss, Cylindrical Frame, etc. A surface entity such as a slab or wall, which can be defined using 3-noded or 4-noded plate elements is one such prototype. We can also create our own library of structure prototypes. From this wizard, a structural model may parametrically be generated, and can then be incorporated into our main structure. Structure Wizard can hence be thought of as a store from where one can fetch various components and assemble a complete structure. 1. Select the Geometry | Run Structure Wizard menu option from the top menu bar.
Figure 3. 34 The Structure Wizard window opens up as shown below.
Figure 3. 35 (Note that the Open Structure Wizard option in the Where do you want to go? dialog box in the beginning stage of creating a new structure see Figure 3.9 also brings up this facility.) 2. The unit of length should be specified prior to the generation of a model. From the File menu of this Structure Wizard window, click Select Units. In the Select Units dialog box that comes up, we can select one of the units of length from Imperial (inch, feet) or SI/Metric (millimeter, centimeter, meter) system of units. Let us choose Meters and click on the OK button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 125 of 201
Figure 3. 36 3. From the Model Type list box, select Surface/Plate Models as shown below.
Figure 3. 37
Figure 3. 38 4. To select the Quad Plate option, click on it using the mouse.
Figure 3. 39 5. Then, using the mouse, either double-click on the Quad Plate option or, drag the Quad Plate option to the right side of the Structure Wizard window as shown below.
6.
Figure 3. 40 A dialog box by the name Select Meshing Parameters comes up. In this box, we specify, among other things, two main pieces of information - a) the dimensions of the boundary (or superelement as it is commonly known) from which the individual elements are generated b) the number of individual elements that must be generated. (a) is defined in terms of the X, Y, Z coordinates of its Corners A, B, C and D. (b) is defined in terms of the number of divisions along sides AB, BC, etc.
Let us provide the Corners, the Bias and the Divisions of the model as shown in the figure below. Then, click on the Apply button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 126 of 201
Figure 3. 41 If you made a mistake and wish to bring up the above dialog box again, click the right mouse button in the drawing area and choose Change Property.
7.
Figure 3. 42 tTo transfer the model to the main window, select File | Merge Model with STAAD.Pro Model as shown below.
Figure 3. 43 8. When the following message box comes up, let us confirm our transfer by clicking on the Yes button.
Figure 3. 44 The dialog box shown in next figure comes up. If we had an existing structure in the main window, in this dialog box, we will be able to provide the coordinates of a node of the structure in the main window to which we want to connect the piece being brought from the wizard. If there isnt any existing structure, this box is a means of specifying any distances along X, Y and Z axes by which we want the unit (being brought from the Wizard) to be shifted. In our case, since we do not have an existing structure in the main window, nor do we wish to shift the unit by any amount, let us simply click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 45 The model will now be transferred to the main window.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 127 of 201
Figure 3. 48

Steps: The STAAD.Pro GUI contains a facility for generating a mesh of elements from a boundary (or superelement) defined by a set of corner nodes. This facility is in addition to the one we saw in Method 3. The boundary has to form a closed surface and has to be a plane, though that plane can be inclined to any of the global planes. 1. The first step in defining the boundary is selecting the corner nodes. If these nodes do not exist, they must be created before they can be selected. So, either click on the Snap Node/Quad Plates icon or select Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate | Quad menu option as shown in the figures below.
Figure 3. 49
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 128 of 201
2.
Figure 3. 50 A Snap Node/Plate dialog box appears in the data area on the right side of the screen. (We have already seen this dialog box in methods 1 and 2.) In our structure, the elements lie in the X-Z plane. So, in this dialog box, let us choose X-Z as the Plane of the grid. The size of the model that can be drawn at any time is controlled by the number of Construction Lines to the left and right of the origin of axes, and the Spacing between adjacent construction lines. All that we are interested in is the 4 corner nodes of the super-element. So, let us set 1 as the number of lines to the right of the origin along X and Z, and a spacing of 6m between lines along X and 4m along Z.
Figure 3. 51 The main drawing area will now look similar to the one shown below.
3.
Figure 3. 52 To start creating the nodes, let us first activate the Snap Node/Plate button by clicking on it. Holding the Ctrl key down, click at the four corners of the grid as shown below. Those four points represent the four corners of our slab and are (0, 0, 0), (6, 0, 0), (6, 0, 4), and (0, 0, 4). In fact, keeping the Ctrl key pressed and clicking at points on the grid successively, is a way of creating new nodes without connecting those nodes with beams or plates. If the Ctrl key werent kept pressed, the nodes would become connected.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 129 of 201
Figure 3. 53 It is worth noting that the purpose of the previous four steps was to merely create the four nodes. Consequently, any of the several methods available in the program could have been used to create those nodes. We could have typed the data into the editor, or in the grid tables of the Geometry-Plate page control area, or even used the Snap Grid/Node Beam option of the Geometry menu from the top of the screen to graphically create the points 4. Let us now Close the Snap Node/Plate dialog box as shown below.
Figure 3. 54 We are now ready to utilize the second method available in the program for mesh generation. 5. For this, either click on the Generate Surface Meshing icon or go to Geometry | Surface Mesh Generator menu option as shown below.
Figure 3. 55
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 130 of 201
Figure 3. 56 6. We now have to select the points which form the boundary of the superelement from which the individual elements will be created. The four points we just created are those four points. So, let us click at the four node points in succession as shown below. Lastly, close the loop by clicking at the start node (or the first clicked point) again.
Figure 3. 57 As we click at the start node the second time, the following dialog box comes up. Let us choose the Quadrilateral Meshing option and click on the OK button.
7.
Figure 3. 58 The Select Meshing Parameters dialog box (as we saw earlier in Method 3), comes up. Notice that this time however, the data for the four corners is automatically filled in. The program used the coordinates of the four nodes we selected to define A, B, C, and D. Provide the Bias and the Divisions of the model as shown in the figure below. Click on the Apply button.
Figure 3. 59 As we click on the Apply button, our model will appear in the drawing area as the one shown below.Click on the button to exit the mesh generating mode.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 131 of 201
Figure 3. 60
Tutorials
3.6.2 Changing the input units of length
As a matter of convenience, for specifying member properties for our structure, it is simpler if our length units are centimeter instead of meter. This will require changing the current length units of input. The command to be generated is: UNIT CM KN Steps: 1. Click on the Input Units icon from the appropriate toolbar.
Figure 3. 61 Alternatively, one may select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option as shown below.
Figure 3. 62 2. In either case, the following dialog box comes up. Set the Length Units to Centimeter and click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 63
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 132 of 201
3.6.3 Specifying Element Properties

Just as properties are assigned to members, properties must be assigned to plate elements too. The property required for plates is the plate thickness (or the thickness at each node of elements if the slab has a varying thickness). The corresponding command which should be generated in the STAAD command file is:
ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30
2.
Figure 3. 65 In either case, the Properties dialog box comes up as shown below. Plate thickness is specified through the dialog box available under the Thickness button.
Figure 3. 66 3. The dialog box shown below comes up. Let us provide the plate thickness as 30cm. Notice that the field called Material is presently on the checked mode. If we keep it that way, the material properties of concrete (E, Poisson, Density, Alpha, etc.) will be assigned along with the plate thickness. The material property values so assigned will be the program defaults. (To see those default values, click on the Materials button in the dialog box shown in Figure 3.64.) Since we want to assign just the default values, let us keep the Material box in the checked mode itself. Then, click on the Add button followed by the Close button as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 133 of 201
Figure 3. 67 At this point, the Properties dialog box will look as shown below.
Figure 3. 68 4. Since we want the thickness to be applied to all elements of the structure, let us select the Assignment Method called Assign To View and then click on the Assign button as shown in the above figure. As we click on the Assign button, the following message box comes up. Let us click on the Yes button to confirm our choice.
Figure 3. 69 The structure will now look as shown below.
Figure 3. 70 Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the selected entities. We do this only as a safety precaution. When an entity is highlighted, clicking on any Assign option is liable to cause an undesired attribute to be assigned to that entity.
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 134 of 201
In Section 3.6.3, we kept the Material check box on while assigning the element properties. Consequently, the material constants (E, Density, Poissons Ratio, etc.) of concrete got assigned to the plates along with the properties, and the following commands were generated in the command file:
UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS E 2.17185e+007 MEMB 1 TO 6 POISSON 0.17 MEMB 1 TO 6 DENSITY 23.5616 MEMB 1 TO 6 ALPHA 5.5e-006 MEMB 1 TO 6
Hence, there is no longer a need to assign the constants separately. However, if we hadnt assigned them as before, we could go to the menu option Commands | Material Constants and assign them explicitly as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3. 71
Tutorials
The slab is fixed-supported along the entire length of two of its sides. However, when modelled as plate elements, the supports can be specified only at the nodes along those edges, and not at any point between the nodes. It hence becomes apparent that if one is keen on better modelling the edge conditions, the slab would have to be modelled using a larger number of elements. In our case, the commands we need to generate are:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 135 of 201
2. 3. 4. 5.
Figure 3. 73 In either case, the Supports dialog box comes up as shown in the next figure. For easy identification of the nodes where we wish to place the supports, let us turn the Node Numbers on. Since we already know that nodes 1, 2, 5, 7, 4 and 10 are to be associated with the Fixed support, using the Nodes Cursor Then, click on the Create button in the Supports dialog box as shown below. , select these nodes.
Figure 3. 74 6. The dialog box shown below comes up. The Fixed tab happens to be the default which is convenient for this case. Click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 3. 75 It is important to understand that the Assign button is active because of what we did in step 4 earlier. Had we not selected the nodes before reaching this point, this option would not have been active.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 136 of 201
After the supports have been assigned, the structure will look like the one shown below.
Figure 3. 76
Tutorials
3.6.6 Specifying Primary Load Cases
Three primary load cases have to be created for this structure. Details of these load cases are available at the beginning of this tutorial. The corresponding commands to be generated are listed below.
UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELF Y -1.0 LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 6 PR GY -300 LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD 1 TO 6 TEMP 75 60
Steps: 1. To create loads, click on the Load Page icon located on the Structure Tools tool bar.
Figure 3. 78 2. Notice that the pressure load value listed in the beginning of this tutorial is in KN and meter units. Rather than convert that value to the current input units, we will conform to those units. The current input units, which we last set while specifying THICKNESS was CENTIMETER. We have to change the force unit to Kilogram and the length units to Meter. To change the units, as before, click on the Input Units icon
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 137 of 201
from the top toolbar, or select the Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option from the top menu bar. In the Set Current Input Units dialog box that comes up, specify the length units as meter and the force units as Kilogram. LOAD CASE 1 3. A window titled Load appears on the right-hand side of the screen. To initiate the first load case, highlight the Load Cases Details option and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 79 4. The Add New Load Cases dialog box comes up. The drop-down list box against Loading Type is available in case we wish to associate the load case we are creating with any of the ACI, AISC or IBC definitions of Dead, Live, Ice, etc. This type of association needs to be done if we intend to use the program's facility for automatically generating load combinations in accordance with those codes. Notice that there is a check box called Reducible per UBC/IBC. This feature becomes active only when the load case is assigned a Loading Type called Live at the time of creation of that case. Please refer to STAAD.Pro 2004 Release Report for further details. As we do not intend to use the automatic load combination generation option, we will leave the Loading Type as None. Enter DEAD LOAD as the Title for Load Case 1 and click on Add.
Figure 3. 80 The newly created load case will now appear under the Load Cases Details in the Load dialog box.
Figure 3. 81 5. To generate and assign the first load type, highlight DEAD LOAD. You will notice that the Create New Load Item dialog box shows more options now.
Figure 3. 82 6. In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Selfweight Load option under the Selfweight item. Specify the Direction as Y, and the Factor as -1.0. The negative number signifies that the selfweight load acts opposite to the positive direction of the global axis (Y in this case) along which it is applied. Click on the Add button. The selfweight load is applicable to every member of the structure, and cannot be applied on a selected list of members.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 138 of 201
Figure 3. 83 LOAD CASE 2 7. Next, let us initiate the creation of the second load case which is a pressure load on the elements. To do this, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load cases dialog box, once again, we are not associating the load case we are about to create with any code based Loading Type and so, leave that box as None. Specify the Title of the second load case as EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 84
To
generate and assign the second load type, highlight EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD.
8.
Figure 3. 85 In the Add New Load Items dialog box, select the Pressure on Full Plate option under the Plate Loads item enables the load to be applied on the full area of the element. (The Concentrated Load is for applying a concentrated force on the element. The Trapezoidal and Hydrostatic options are for defining pressures with intensities varying from one point to another. The Partial Plate Pressure Load is useful if the load is to be applied as a patch on a small localised portion of an element.) Let us keep our focus on the Pressure on Full Plate option. Provide -300kg/m2 for W1 (Force), GY as the Direction and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 86 9. Since the pressure load is to be applied on all the elements of the model, the easiest way to do that is to set the Assignment Method to Assign To View.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 139 of 201
Then, click on the Assign button in the Load dialog box as shown below.
Figure 3. 87 After the load has been assigned, the model will look as shown below.
Figure 3. 88 LOAD CASE 3 10. Next, let us create the third load case which is a temperature load. The initiation of a new load case is best done using the procedure explained in steps 7. In the dialog box that comes up, let us specify the Title of the third load case as TEMPERATURE LOAD and click on the Add button.
Figure 3. 89 To generate and assign the third load type, as before, highlight TEMPERATURE LOAD. 11. Temperature Loads are created (and assigned if the elements are selected prior to the creation of the load) from the input screens available under the Temp button in the Add New Load Items dialog box. 12. In the Add New Load Items dialog box , make sure that the Temperature item is selected under the Temperature Loads option. Then, provide 40 as the Temperature Change for Axial Elongation and 30 as the Temperature Differential from Top to Bottom and click on the Add button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 140 of 201
Figure 3.90 13. Since we intend to apply the temperature load on all the plates, as before, choose Assign To View and click on the Assign button in the Loads dialog box (see step 9 for explanation).
Tutorials
3.6.7 Creating load combinations
The specifications at the beginning of this tutorial require us to create two combination cases. The commands required are:
LOAD COMBINATION 101 CASE 1 + CASE 2 1 1.0 2 1.0 LOAD COMBINATION 102 CASE 1 + CASE 3 1 1.0 3 1.0
Steps: LOAD COMBINATION 101 1. To initiate and define load case 4 as a load combination, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Add New Load Cases dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Enter the Load No: as 101 and the Title as CASE 1 + CASE 2.
Figure 3. 91 2. Next, in the Define Combinations box, select load case 1 from the left side list box and click on the button. Repeat this with load case 2 also. Load case 1 and 2 will appear in the right side list box as shown in the figure below. (These data indicate that we are adding the two load cases with a multiplication factor of 1.0 and that the load combination results would be obtained by algebraic summation of the results for individual load cases.) Finally, click on the Add button
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 141 of 201
Figure 3. 92 Case 101 has now been created. LOAD COMBINATION 102 3. To initiate and define load case 5 as a load combination, once again, highlight the Load Cases Details option. In the Create New Load Item dialog box, click on the Define Combinations option from the left-hand side. Enter the Load No: as 102 and the Title as CASE 1 + CASE 3. Next, repeat step 2 except for selecting load cases 1 and 3 instead of cases 1 and 2.
Figure 3. 93 Thus, load 102 is also created. If we change our mind about the composition of any existing combination case, we can click in the box shown circled above, select the case we want to alter, and make the necessary changes in terms of the constituent cases or their factors.
Figure 3. 94 Let us exit this dialog box by clicking on the Close button. It is also worth noting that as load cases are created, a facility for quickly switching between the various cases becomes available at the top of the screen in the form of a load case selection box as shown below.
Figure 3. 95 We have now completed the task of creating all load cases. Let us once again save our model by pulling down the File menu and selecting the Save command or by holding the Ctrl key and pressing the S key.
Tutorials
3.6.8 Specifying the analysis type
The analysis type we are required to do is a linear static type. We will also obtain a static equilibrium report. This requires the command:
Steps:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 142 of 201
1.
To specify the Analysis command, first go to Analysis/Print Page from the left side of the screen.
2.
Figure 3. 96 In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, the instruction for specifying a linear elastic type analysis is provided using the Perform Analysis tab. To obtain the static equilibrium report, check the Statics Check print option. (In response to this option, a report consisting of the summary of applied loading and summary of support reactions, for each load case, will be produced in the STAAD output file. See section 3.10 for information on viewing this report).
Figure 3. 97 Finally, click on the Add button followed by the Close button. The Analysis dialog box in the data area with the newly added instruction will look as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 143 of 201
Tutorials
3.6.9 Specifying post-analysis print commands
Two types of element results can be requested: a) ELEMENT STRESSES at the centroid or any point on the element surface b) the element forces at the nodes. The former consists of stresses and moments per unit width, as explained in sections 1.6.1 and 5.41 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The latter consists of the 3 forces and 3 moments at each node of the elements in the global axis system (see section 3.41 for details). We would like to obtain both these results. We will also set the units in which these results are printed to KN and Meter for element stresses and Kg and Meter for element forces. This requires the specification of the following commands:
UNIT METER KN PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 3 UNIT KG METER PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6
These results will be written in the STAAD output file and can be viewed using the procedure explained in section 3.10. Steps: 1. Go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the length and force units to Meter and Kilo Newton respectively. 2. The dialog box for requesting element results is available in the Post-Print sub-page of the Analysis | Print page. Click on the Define Commands button in the data area on the right hand side of the screen.
3.
Figure 3. 99 In the Analysis/Print Commands dialog box that appears, select the Element Forces/Stresses tab. Choose the Print Element Stresses option and click on the Add button followed by the Close button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 144 of 201
Figure 3. 100 4. Again, go to Tools | Set Current Input Unit menu option. Set the length and force units to Meter and Kilogram respectively. on the Close button.
Then, repeat steps 2 and 3. In step 3, select the Print Element Forces option and click on the Add button. Finally, click At this point, the Post Analysis Print dialog box will look as shown below.
Figure 3. 101 5. To associate the PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES command with element 3, first select the command as shown in the previous figure. Then, using the Plates Cursor , click on element no. 3. As we select the plate, the Assignment Method automatically becomes Assign to Selected Plates. Click on the Assign button as shown below.
Figure 3. 102 6. To associate the PRINT ELEMENT FORCES command with element 6, repeat step 4 except for selecting element no. 6 in the place of element no. 3.
We have now completed the tasks of assigning the input for this model. Let us save the file one last time using the File | Save option.
Tutorials
3.7 Viewing the input command file
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 145 of 201
Let us now take a look at the data that has been written into the file that we just saved earlier. As we have seen in the previous tutorials, while the model is being created graphically, a corresponding set of commands describing that aspect of the model is being simultaneously written into a command file which is a simple text file. An abstract of those commands was also mentioned under the title commands to be generated are . . at the beginning of each section of this tutorial. The contents of that text file can be viewed in its entirety either by clicking on the STAAD Editor icon or, by going to the Edit menu and choosing Edit Input Command File as shown below.
Figure 3. 103
Figure 3. 105 This window and the facilities it contains is known as the STAAD Editor. We could make modifications to the data of our structure in this Editor if we wish to do so. Let us Exit the Editor without doing so by selecting the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window). Instead of using the graphical methods explained in the previous sections, we could have created the entire model by typing these specific commands into the editor. This was one of the methods mentioned in section 3.1 of this tutorial. If you would like to understand that method, proceed to the next section. If you want to skip that part, proceed to section 3.9 where we perform the analysis on this model.
Tutorials
3.8 Creating the model using the command file
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 146 of 201
Figure 3. 106 To access the built-in editor, first start the program using the procedure explained in Section 3.3. Next, follow step 1 of Section 3.4 (also, see Figure below).
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 147 of 201
STAAD SPACE SLAB SUPPORTED ALONG 2 EDGES
UNIT METER KN

JOINT COORDINATES 1000;2200;3202;4002 5400;6402;7600;8602 9 2 0 4 ; 10 0 0 4 ; 11 4 0 4 ; 12 6 0 4
Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. For example, node 6 has (X, Y, Z) coordinates of (4, 0, 2).
ELEMENT INCIDENCES SHELL 1 1 2 3 4 ; 2 2 5 6 3 ; 3 5 7 8 6 ; 4 4 3 9 10 ; 5 3 6 11 9 ; 6 6 8 12 11
The incidences of elements are defined above. For example, element 3 is defined as connected between the nodes 5, 7, 8 and 6.
UNIT CM KN ELEMENT PROPERTY 1 TO 6 THICKNESS 30
The length unit is changed from meter to centimeter. Element properties are then provided by specifying that the elements are 30 cm thick.
UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS E 2.17185e+007 ALL POISSON 0.17 ALL DENSITY 23.5616 ALL ALPHA 5.5e-006 ALL
Material constants, which are E (modulus of elasticity), Density, Poissons Ratio and Alpha, are specified following the command CONSTANTS. Prior to this, the input units are changed to Meter and KN.
Joints 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 and 10 are defined as fixed supported. This will cause all 6 degrees of freedom at these nodes to be restrained.
UNIT KG LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
Force units are changed from KN to KG to facilitate the input of loads. Load case 1 is then initiated along with an accompanying title.
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
Load case 1 consists of selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 148 of 201
LOAD 2 EXTERNAL PRESSURE LOAD

ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 6 PR GY -300
Load 2 is a pressure load on the elements. A uniform pressure of 300Kg/m2 is applied on all the elements. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The negative sign (-300) indicates that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of global Y.
LOAD 3 TEMPERATURE LOAD

TEMPERATURE LOAD 1 TO 6 TEMP 40 30
Load 3 is a temperature load. All the 6 elements are subjected to a in-plane temperature increase of 75 degrees and a temperature variation across the thickness of 60 degrees. This increase is in the same temperature units as the Alpha value specified earlier under CONSTANTS.
The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. A static equilibrium report is also requested with the help of the words PRINT STATICS CHECK.
UNIT METER KN PRINT ELEMENT STRESS LIST 3
The stresses and unit width moments are requested at the centroid of element 3 in KN and Meter units.
UNIT KG METER PRINT ELEMENT FORCE LIST 6
The forces and moments for all 6 d.o.f at the corner nodes of element 6 are requested in KG and Meter units.
FINISH
Tutorials
3.9 Performing the analysis and design
In order to obtain the displacements, forces, stresses and reactions in the structure due to the applied loads, the model has to be analyzed. If the pass-fail status of the members and elements per the requirements of steel and concrete codes is to be determined, that involves a process called design. Both these processes are launched using the Run Analysis option from the Analyze menu.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 149 of 201
Figure 3. 111 We are presented with the choice of 2 engines : the STAAD engine and the STARDYNE Advanced Analysis engine. The STARDYNE Analysis engine is suitable for advanced problems such as Buckling Analysis, Modal Extraction using various methods, etc. However, if the calculations call for steel or concrete design, UBC load generation, etc., we have to select the STAAD engine. For this problem, let us use the STAAD engine. Then, click on the Run Analysis button. As the analysis progresses, several messages appear on the screen as shown in the next figure.
Figure 3. 112 At the end of these calculations, two activities take place. a) A Done button becomes active b) three options become available at the bottom left corner of this information window.
Figure 3. 113 These options are indicative of what will happen after we click on the Done button. The View Output File option allows us to view the output file created by STAAD. The output file contains the numerical results produced in response to the various input commands we specified during the model generation process. It also tells us whether any errors were encountered, and if so, whether the analysis and design was successfully completed or not. Section 3.10 (also, see section 1.9) offers additional details on viewing and understanding the contents of the output file. The Go To Post Processing Mode option allows us to go to graphical part of the program known as the Post-processor. This is where one can extensively verify the results, view the results graphically, plot result diagrams, produce reports, etc. Section 3.11 explains the Post processing mode in greater detail. The Stay in Modeling Mode lets us continue to be in the Model generation mode of the program (the one we currently are in) in case we wish to make further changes to our model.
Tutorials
3.10 Viewing the output file
During the analysis stage, an output file containing results, warnings and messages associated with errors if any in the output, is produced. This file has the extension .anl and may be viewed using the output viewer. Section 1.9 of this manual contains information on viewing this file. In Sections 3.6.8 and 3.6.9, we had provided instructions to the program to write some very specific results in the output file. Let us examine those results.
PRINT STATICS CHECK
This instruction was provided so that we could view a report indicating if the structure is in equilibrium for the various load cases. If we scroll down the output file, we will see information which looks like the following:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 150 of 201
***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1 ) SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -17298.83 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= 34597.65 MY= 0.00 MZ= -51896.48 1)
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KG METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Z = MX= -34597.65 MY= 0.00 0.00 0.00 MZ= 51896.48 1) SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 17298.83 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE
X = 0.00000E+00 Y = -3.20681E-01 Z = 0.00000E+00 RX= 9.80406E-04 RY= 0.00000E+00 RZ= -6.49355E-04
0 12 0 12 0 9
For each primary load case, the report consists of: a. Summary of total applied loads for all 6 degrees of freedom, with moments calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0) b. Summary of total reactions from the supports of the structure, with moments calculated about the origin of the coordinate system (0, 0, 0) c. Maximum displacements (3 translations and 3 rotations) in the structure induced by this load case Each of the 6 terms of item (a) must be equal and opposite to the corresponding term of item (b). A failure to meet this criteria would mean the analysis results (for a linear elastic analysis) may be erroneous. Factors such as instability conditions or improperly applied loads can cause the equilibrium check to fail. It is quite important to examine the maximum displacements since they tell us whether the deformations are within tolerable limits. Since the information presented above is for load case 1, and since load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure, we can conclude that the structure weighs 17298.83 Kgs. STRESSES FOR ELEMENT 3 This information consists of the stress and moment over unit width values at the centroid of element 3. A typical sample is presented below.
ELEMENT STRESSES ----------------
FORCE, LENGTH UNITS = KN METE
FORCE OR STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX SQY VONB 72.86 1308.63 MX SX -3.96 0.00 MY SY -20.42 0.00 MXY SXY -3.35 0.00
VONT 3 1 -18.13 1308.63
TOP : SMAX= -220.33 SMIN= -1404.81 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1 BOTT: SMAX= 1404.81 SMIN= 220.33 TMAX= 592.24 ANGLE= -11.1
These terms are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual in elaborate detail. Example problem 18 of the Examples Manual explains the method involved in calculating the principal stresses SMAX, SMIN and TMAX.
FORCES FOR ELEMENT 6
This information consists of the force and moment values at each of the 4 corner nodes of element 6. A typical sample is presented below.
ELEMENT FORCES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KG METE -------------JOINT FX ELE.NO. FY FZ MX MY 1 MZ
6 FOR LOAD CASE
6 0.0000E+00 4.5323E+02 0.0000E+00 -1.1313E+03 0.0000E+00 7.9082E+02 8 0.0000E+00 5.0615E+02 0.0000E+00 -3.2047E+02 0.0000E+00 2.3981E+02 12 0.0000E+00 -7.2078E+02 0.0000E+00 1.4890E-03 0.0000E+00 -1.4168E-03 11 0.0000E+00 -2.3860E+02 0.0000E+00 -4.6697E+02 0.0000E+00 -6.0136E+02
The corner forces are in the global coordinate system. These values may be used to create a free body diagram of the element and verify that the element is in equilibrium. In this case for example, the FX and FZ forces are zero, and sum of the FY forces is also zero. The complete text of the output file is shown in the next few pages.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 151 of 201
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 152 of 201
Tutorials
3.11 Post Processing
If there are no errors in the input, the analysis is successfully completed. The extensive facilities of the Post-processing mode can then be used to
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 153 of 201
a) view the results graphically and numerically b) assess the suitability of the structure from the standpoint of safety, serviceability and efficiency c) create customized reports and plots The procedure for entering the post processing mode is explained in section 2.11.1 of this manual. Node results such as displacements and support reactions are available for all models. The methods explained in the first two tutorials see sections 2.11.2 to 2.11.7 may be used to explore these. If beams are present in the model, beam results will be available too (see sections 2.11.8 to 2.11.18 for information on these). For this example, we will look at the support reactions. We do not have any beams in our model, so no results will be available for this type of entity. For plates, the results available are stresses, and unit width moments. There are several different methods for viewing these results, as explained in the next few sections.
Tutorials
3.11.1 Viewing stress values in a tabular form
From the View menu, select Tables (or click the right mouse button in the drawing area and select Tables). Choose Plate Centre Stress.
Figure 3. 114 The following table will be displayed.
Figure 3. 115
Figure 3. 116 The table has the following tabs: Shear, Membrane and Bending : These terms are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The individual values for each plate for each selected load case are displayed. Summary : This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values listed in the Shear, Membrane and Bending tab. Principal and Von Mises : These terms too are explained in Section 1.6.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. The individual values for each plate for each selected load case are displayed, for the top and bottom surfaces of the elements. Summary : This tab contains the maximum for each of the 8 values listed in the Principal and Von Mises tab. Global Moments: This tab provides the moments about the global X, Y and Z axes at the center of each element.
Tutorials
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 154 of 201
3.11.2 Printing the tables

All of these tables may be printed by clicking the right mouse button in the table area and selecting the Print option.
Figure 3. 117
Tutorials
3.11.3 Changing the units of values which appear in the above tables
The length and force units of the stresses and moments are displayed alongside the individual column headings for the terms. To view the values in a different set of units, go to the Tools menu and select Set Current Display Unit.
Figure 3. 118 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Force Units tab and specify the required unit from the Stress and Moment fields. Click on the Apply button for the changes to take effect immediately. Once you are sure that you have chosen the proper unit combination, click on the OK button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 155 of 201
Figure 3. 119
Tutorials
3.11.4 Limiting the load cases for which the results are displayed
When we entered the post-processing mode, we chose all load cases in the Results Setup dialog box. The tables hence contain results for all the load cases. To change that load list, choose Select Load Case from the Results menu.
Figure 3. 120 In the dialog box that comes up, select the load cases you want, and click on the single arrow Selected category. Then, click on the OK button. , so they are transferred from the Available category to the
Figure 3. 121
Tutorials
3.11.5 Stress Contours
Stress contours are a color-based plot of the variation of stress or moment across the surface of the slab or a selected portion of it. There are 2 ways to switch
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 156 of 201
on stress contour plots: a) From the left side, select the Contour sub-page under the Plate page.
Figure 3. 122 or b) From the top of the screen, click on the Results menu and select the Plate Stress Contour option.
Figure 3. 123 In each of the above cases, the following dialog box appears.
Figure 3. 124
From the Stress type field, select the specific type of stress for which you want the contour drawn.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 157 of 201
From the Load Case selection box, select the load case number. Stress values are known exactly only at the plate centroid locations. Everywhere else, they are calculated by linear interpolation between the center point stress values of adjacent plates. The Enhanced type contour chooses a larger number of points compared to the Normal type contour in determining the stress variation. View Stress Index will display a small table consisting of the numerical range of values from smallest to largest which are represented in the plot.
Let us set the following:

Load case 102 Stress Type Von Mis Top Contour Type Normal Fill Index based on Center Stress Re-Index for new view
Figure 3. 125 Click on the Apply button. The following diagram will be displayed. We can keep changing the settings and click on Apply to see all the various possible results in the above facility.
Figure 3. 126 Let us keep the dialog box open to examine the feature (Animation) explained in the next section. If some portion of the structure appears truncated, we can bring that portion into view by choosing one of the following methods: a. Click on the Zoom Out button to shrink the size of the region drawn. Before After
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 158 of 201
Figure 3. 127 b. Use the Pan button
Figure 3. 128
to physically shift the position of the structure away from the index.
Before After
Figure 3. 129
Figure 3. 130
Tutorials
3.11.6 Animating stress contours
The same dialog box shown in the previous section may be used to obtain the stress contours in an animated view. This is a method of getting a dynamic instead of static representation of the plot. After making the choices as explained in that section, click on the Animation tab of that dialog box. Switch on Stress followed by Apply.
Figure 3. 131 To stop the animation, click on No Animation and click Apply again.
Tutorials
3.11.7 Creating AVI Files
AVI files are a mechanism by which a dynamic result, such as, a deflection diagram in animation, may be captured and recorded. Presently, this facility is available in STAAD for node deflection, beam section displacement, mode shape and plate stress contour diagrams. The facility in STAAD for creating AVI files is under the Tools menu and is called Create AVI File. These files can then be viewed using tools such as the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 159 of 201
Windows Media Explorer.
Figure 3. 132 The following dialog box will appear.
Figure 3. 133 In an animated view, the movement from one extremity to the other is captured as several frames. The number of frames that comprise such a movement is controlled by specifying a value for Total No. of Frames. The speed of motion is controlled by the Frame Rate /sec. The rest of the options in the above dialog box are for the type of diagram from which the AVI file is to be created. Certain items such as Mode Shape and Plate Stress contour do not become active (remain grayed out) if the required data of that type are not present in the STAAD file, such as a modal extraction, or finite elements. After making the appropriate selections, click OK. Following this, another dialog box appears, where we are instructed to specify a file name for the .AVI file. Subsequently, we are prompted for the type of video compression. AVI files can be quite large, and compression is a technique by which one may reduce the size of these files.
Figure 3. 134 Finally, a message indicating that the operation was successful will appear at the end of the file creation process as shown below.
Figure 3. 135 As mentioned earlier, other tools like Windows Media Explorer may be used to view the AVI file. The file with the extension .AVI should be located in the same folder where the STAAD input file is present.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 160 of 201
Tutorials
3.11.8 Viewing plate results using element query
Element Query is a facility where several results for a specific element can be viewed at the same time from a single dialog box. Let us explore this facility for element 4. Select element 4 and double click on it. Alternatively, select element 4, and from the Tools menu, choose Query Plate.
Figure 3. 136 The various tabs of the query box enable one to view various types of information like the plate geometry, property constants, stresses, etc., for various load cases, as well as print those values. Some typical screens are shown.
Figure 3. 137
Figure 3. 138
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 161 of 201
Figure 3. 139
Figure 3. 140
Figure 3. 141 The length and force units in which the values appear in the above tables are also modified using the method explained in section 3.11.3.
Tutorials
3.11.9 Producing an onscreen report
Occasionally, we will come across a need to obtain results conforming to certain restrictions, such as, say, the resultant node displacements for a few selected nodes, for a few selected load cases, sorted in the order from low to high, with the values reported in a tabular form. The facility which enables us to obtain such customized on-screen results is the Report menu on top of the screen. Let us produce a report consisting of the plate principal stresses, for all plates, sorted in the order from Low to High of the Principal Maximum Stress (SMAX) for load cases 101 and 102. The first step to do this is to select all the plates using the Plates Cursor shown below. . Then, go to the Report | Plate Results | Principal Stresses menu option as
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 162 of 201
Figure 3. 142 In the dialog box that appears, select the Loading tab. Make sure that load cases 101 and 102 are selected as shown below.
Figure 3. 143 Next, select the Sorting tab. Choose SMAX under the Sort by Plate Stress category and set the Sorting Order List from Low to High. (If we wish to save this report for future use, we may select the Report tab, provide a title for the report, and turn on the Save ID option.) Then, click on the OK button.
Figure 3. 144 The following figure shows the table of maximum principal stress with SMAX values sorted from Low to High.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 163 of 201
Figure 3. 146 Select the print option to get a hardcopy of the report. To transfer the contents of this table to a Microsoft Excel file, click at the top left corner of the table with the left mouse button. The entire table will become highlighted. Click the right mouse button and select Copy. Then, open an Excel worksheet, click at the desired cell and click Paste.
Tutorials
3.11.10 Viewing Support Reactions
Since supports are located at nodes of the structure, results of this type are available along with other node results like displacements. To view the reactions graphically, click on the Node page on the left side of the screen, and select the Reactions sub-page.
Figure 3. 147 The reactions at the supports will be displayed on the drawing as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 164 of 201
Figure 3. 148 The six values namely, the 3 forces along global X, Y and Z, and the 3 moments Mx, My and Mz, in the global axis system are displayed in a box for each support node. The words N1, N2, etc. stand for the node numbers of the supports. We may choose to un-display one or more of the 6 terms of each support node in the following manner. From the Results menu, choose View Value.
Figure 3. 149 In the dialog box that comes up, click on the Reactions tab. Let us switch off Global X and Global Z under the Direct category. Then, click on the Annotate button followed by the Close button.
Figure 3. 150 The drawing will now contain only the remaining 4 terms (see figure below).
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 165 of 201
Figure 3. 151 To change the load case for which the reactions are displayed, select the desired case from the load selection box.
Figure 3. 152 For better clarity in viewing the results in the drawing area (and for reducing the clutter on the screen), a variety of methods are available. For example, keep the mouse pressed on top of Zoom In button, and watch the drawing get progressively bigger. Use the Pan button to physically shift the drawing around. Other options like Dynamic Zoom and Zoom Window buttons may also be used. To restore the original view, click on the Zoom All button. (Some of these options are explained in greater detail in the Frequently Performed Tasks section at the end of this manual.) Icon Name Zoom In Pan Dynamic Zoom Zoom Window Display Whole Structure The table on the right side of the screen contains the reaction values for all supports for all selected load cases.
Figure 3. 153 This table can also be displayed from any mode by clicking on the View menu, choosing Tables, and switching on Support Reactions. The method explained in section 3.11.3 may be used to change the units in which these values are displayed. The summary tab contains the maximum value for each of the 6 degrees of freedom along with the load case number responsible for it.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 166 of 201
Figure 3. 154 This brings us to the conclusion of this tutorial. Additional help on using plates is available in Examples 9, 10 and 18 in the Examples Manual.
Tutorials
Tutorial Problem 4: Interoperability (using STAAD.Pro and STAAD.etc)
This tutorial is relevant only for users who have purchased the program called STAAD.etc. If this tutorial is created using the Demo CD, the user will not have the ability to alter certain input items. This chapter provides a step-by-step tutorial on using the interoperability features between STAAD.Pro and the program called STAAD.etc. The structure created in Tutorial Problem 1 will be used as the basis for this tutorial. This tutorial covers the following topics:

Understanding STAAD.etc Description of the Tutorial Problem Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro Designing a footing based on results from STAAD.Pro Designing a base plate based on results from STAAD.Pro Saving the Interactive Design information as a STAAD.etc file
Tutorials
4.1 Understanding STAAD.etc
STAAD.etc is the engineers structural toolkit containing various component analysis and design module groups including foundations, masonry, timber, steel, concrete and general analysis. As a standalone product, STAAD.etc can be used to design small portal frames, continuous beams, footings, retaining walls one-way slabs, connections, shear walls and much more. STAAD.etc allows the engineer to complete the design cycle on the primary structure by analyzing and designing several structural components or accessories within the STAAD.Pro environment using STAAD.Pros results database.
Tutorials
Using the structure created in Tutorial Problem 1 as the primary model, STAAD.etc will be utilized to analyze and design footings, base plates and moment connections inside the STAAD.Pro environment for the model.
Tutorials
4.3 Using the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro
Start the STAAD.Pro 2006 Program from your STAAD.Pro program folder, as explained in Section 1.2. From File | Open, open the file Tut_01_portal.std from the ../SPRO2006/STAAD/Examp/US directory as shown below (please note that the .. represents the drive or root directory the program was installed in) or from wherever the file was saved:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 167 of 201
Figure 4. 1 The picture in the preview pane is made possible by a file with the extension .emf. When a model is created using the graphical method, or when a model is saved from the graphical mode, the .emf file is created alongside the .std file. If you follow the procedure explained in Section 1.5 of this manual for creating tutorial 1, the Tut-01-portal.emf file will be produced, and if you re-open the Tut-01-portal.std subsequently, you will see the picture in the preview pane. If you have not performed the analysis and design for Tut_01_portal.std, please execute the following steps: 1. After opening the file in STAAD.Pro, go to Analyze | Run Analysis from the top menu bar as shown below.
Figure 4. 2 2. A dialog box providing a choice of engines to run the file with will then popup. Select the STAAD Analysis engine as the default engine and click on the Run Analysis button.
Figure 4. 3 3. If the analysis is successfully completed, a dialog box showing the different steps STAAD took to analyze the structure will come up (see figure 4.4). Click Done to proceed to the next step. If a message reporting errors in the input file were found, please refer to Tutorial 1 to rectify those problems.
Figure 4. 4 Starting the Interactive Mode in STAAD.Pro After tut_01_portal.std has been successfully analyzed and designed, proceed to the Interactive Mode by clicking on Mode | Interactive Designs | Component Design from
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 168 of 201
the top menu bar as shown in next figure. If this menu item is grayed-out, the STAAD.etc program has not been installed properly or is missing. Please install or reinstall the STAAD.etc program from the STAAD.suite CD.
Figure 4. 5 The STAAD.etc interface to STAAD.Pro is shown in the bottom right-hand corner of the screen. At the time of release of STAAD.Pro 2003 Build 1001, there are only three STAAD.etc modules interfaced with STAAD.Pro 2003. These modules are the footing, slab and base plate analysis/design as shown below.
Figure 4. 6 Using the Drag and Drop Facilities To run any of the STAAD.etc modules, hold the left-mouse button down over a particular module and drag it to a specific joint or node in the main structure window.
Figure 4. 7
Tutorials
4.4 Designing a footing based on the results from STAAD.Pro
In this section of the tutorial, a footing will be designed for node #1. The details of the input of the footing will not be discussed here. For further information about the input for the STAAD.etc footing module, please refer to the STAAD.etc HTML Help accompanied with the STAAD.etc program. To identify Node #1, click on Select | By List | Nodes from the main menu bar. Select number 1 in the list box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 169 of 201
Figure 4. 8 Figure 4. 9 Node #1 is now marked by a red dot in the main structure window as shown below.
Figure 4. 10 Once Node #1 is identified, drag the footing icon from the Interactive Design dialog box and drop it over #1. The input for the footing pops up. Provide the name of the footing in the Job Name edit box.
Figure 4. 11 If the Column Depth and Width are not provided under the Column Data box, obtain those data (either from the member query or from the property table) and provide them. STAAD.etc defines the Column Depth as the dimension of the supported column along the local Y axis of the column. The Column Width is defined as the dimension of the supported column along the local Z axis of the column. Leave the Concrete Pedestal option unchecked. Switch to the Loading Tab page and select the Dead Load as Load Case 1 (the Selfweight load case) and the Live Load and Wind Load as None. Check the Reversal of Wind option off as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 170 of 201
Figure 4. 12 Keep all the other data as the defaults. Click on OK to begin designing the footing for Node #1. If the design completes successfully, the results for the footing will be displayed in a separate window. Each interactive design module produces a separate results window containing three tabs at the bottom. These tabs are Results, Calculations and Output Drawing. The different facets of the results output are as follows:
Tab
Description
Sample
Results
Displays all results (analysis and design) in tabulated form
Calculations
Displays the step-by-step intermediate calculations explaining the derivation of all results.
Output Drawing
Detailed output drawing schematic
Figure 4. 13
Editing and Viewing Interactive Designs

All interactive design results for a particular STAAD file are listed in the Interactive Design dialog box which can be brought up by clicking on Mode | Interactive Design from the top menu bar. To view any interactive design result, select the design job and click on View Results. To edit any job, select the job and click on Edit Job to bring up the input dialog box with the existing data.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 171 of 201
Figure 4. 14 STAAD.Pro also has the ability to design group footings. This tutorial does not cover the basics of running a group footing inside of STAAD.Pro.
Tutorials
4.5 Designing a base plate based on results from STAAD.Pro
The base plate and other modules in the Interactive Design mode of STAAD.Pro are similar to the footing module explained previously. A brief description of the base plate input will be explained here. For a detailed description of the base plate module, please refer to the STAAD.etc HTML Help. Following the steps in the footing module tutorial in Section 4.4, the input for a base plate can be supplied after the base plate icon is dragged and dropped over a particular joint. A base plate can be designed only for a member with a support.
Figure 4. 15 To check the adequacy of an existing base plate for a specfic load case, provide the Plate Length, Plate Width and Thickness of that plate. However, to have the program design a base plate, set the Plate Length, Plate Width and Thickness to zero (0).
Tutorials
4.6 Saving the Interactive Design as a STAAD.etc File
All interactive design jobs are saved with the STAAD.Pro .std input file as a separate file with the extension .etc. For example, in this tutorial, the STAAD file is named tut_01_portal.std . Thus, the name of the interactive design file will be tut_01_portal.etc and will be saved in the same directory as the tut_01_portal.std file. STAAD.Pro is capable of inherently reading STAAD.etc files without the need for importing or exporting the file. Similarly, any .etc file generated by STAAD.Pro can be read in STAAD.etc. This is particularly useful when the engineer wants to design other structural components on top of the ones already produced in STAAD.Pro.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 172 of 201
Tutorials
1. Selecting nodes, beams, plates, etc.
The Selection Toolbar
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 173 of 201
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 174 of 201
Tutorials
2. Viewing the structure from different angles
The Rotation Toolbar
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 175 of 201
Icon
Description Example Displays the structure as seen from the front. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the elevation view, as looking View From + Z towards the negative direction of the Z-axis.
Displays the structure as seen from the back. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the elevation view, as seen looking View From - Z towards the positive direction of the Z-axis.
Displays the structure as seen from the right side. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the side elevation, as seen looking View From + X towards the negative direction of the X-axis.
Displays the structure as seen from the left side. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the side elevation, as seen looking View From - X towards the positive direction of the X-axis.
Displays the structure as seen from the top looking down. When the global Y axis is vertical, this is the plan view, as seen from the View From + Y sky looking down.
Displays the structure as if one is looking up skywards. View From - Y
Isometric View
Displays the structure in the isometric view. The angle which defines isometric view is generally X = 30, Y = 30, Z = 0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 176 of 201
Tutorials
3. Switching on labels for nodes, beams, plates, etc.
Labels are a way of identifying the entities we have drawn on the screen. To demonstrate this facility, let us open EXAMP01.std. The structure will look as shown below.
1.
To switch the node and beam labels on, we may utilize any one of the following methods:
a. Click on the Symbols and Labels icon as shown below.
b. Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing area. In the dialog box that appears, choose Labels (as shown in the figure below).
c. Select the View menu followed by the Structure Diagrams option from the top menu bar, and the Labels tab of the dialog box that comes up.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 177 of 201
2.
In all of the above three cases, the following Diagrams dialog box will appear. Make sure that the Labels tab is selected. Then, switch the appropriate labels on and click on OK.
The following figure shows the structure with the node and beam labels displayed on it.
3.
To change the font of the node/beam labels, go to the View menu and select the Options command. Then, select the appropriate tab (Node Labels / Beam labels) from the Options dialog box. Choose the Font option and make the necessary changes.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 178 of 201
Tutorials
4. Displaying a portion of the model by isolating it from the rest of the structure
Sometimes, the large number of entities that are drawn on the screen may make it difficult to clearly see the details at any particular region of the structure. In such cases, one is confronted with the task of de-cluttering the screen or looking at specific regions or entities while removing the rest of the structure from the view. There are different methods in STAAD.Pro by which the user can view a portion of the structure. The following pages demonstrate three different methods.
Method 1 View | New View

Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
2.
Let us say that we wish to view only the members which are at the midheight level. The first step to doing this is to select those members. The quickest way to select them is to bring up the View From + Z active cursor. and creating a rubber-band around them, after making sure that the Beams Cursor is the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 179 of 201
3.
To visually verify that the correct members have been selected, click on the Isometric View icon and the rest of the structure in another.
. The selected members will appear in one color
4.
Next, either click the right mouse button and select the New View option or, pull down the View menu and select the New View option.
5.
In either case, the following dialog box comes up. These radio buttons determine whether the selected view would be opened in a new (child) window or whether it would replace the current (parent) view window. Let us select the Create a new window for the view option and click on the OK button.
The portion of the structure that we selected will now be displayed in a new window as shown below. We can create more than one child view window this way.
All sorts of operations can be performed inside the New View such as adding and deleting members, assigning properties, loads, supports, etc. A new view of a selected portion offers the advantage of de-cluttering the screen and limiting the displayed objects to just a few chosen entities. 6. To return to the parent view window, simply close the new view (child) window.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 180 of 201
7.
Next, let us try the Display the view in the active window option. Follow steps 2 to 4. Then, select the Display the view in the active window option and click on the OK button.
The original structure will be hidden and, the portion of the structure that we selected will instead be displayed in the current (parent) window as shown below.
We may restore the original view of the structure by simply clicking on the Display Whole Structure icon.
These new views may be saved by going to the View | View Management | Save View menu option. Provide a title for the new view. These saved views may later be opened by going to the View | Open View menu option. Method 2 Tools | Cut Section Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us once again open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
We will once again try to view just the members at the mid-height level. 2. Click on the Symbols and Labels icon and in the Diagrams dialog box that comes up, switch the Node Numbers on. The reason for doing this will become evident in the next step.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 181 of 201
3.
From the Tools menu, select Cut Section.
The following dialog box comes up.
The Range By Joint method Since the beams of the mid-height level happen to contain joint # 10 (or any of the joint numbers from 7 to 12), it would be convenient if we could instruct the program to display the entities lying in the X-Z plane, and passing through any one of those joints 7 to 12. The facilities of the Range By Joint tab enable us to do that. 4. Let us select that tab (it happens to be the default). Here, we can select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the options X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for our example. Then, in the Node # drop down list, provide a joint that lies on the sectional plane. In our example, we may choose any one of the nodes between 7 and 12. Let us choose node # 10. Click on the OK button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 182 of 201
5.
To restore the original view, simply click on the Display Whole Structure icon.
Alternatively, go to the dialog box shown in step 4 and click on the Show All button.
The Range By Min/Max method

Steps: Another convenient way of choosing the beams at the mid-height level is to specify that those beams lie in the X-Z plane between the Y range values of 12ft a and 12ft + a, where, a is an arbitrary value such as say, 2ft. 6. To do this, let us select the Range By Min/Max tab. Here, we can again select the plane of the section by clicking on one of the options X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z. We have to choose the X-Z plane for our example. The Minimum and Maximum edit boxes represent the boundary distances along the axis perpendicular to the sectional plane. Every object lying between these two distances will be displayed. In our example, let us provide 10 as the Minimum and 14 as the Maximum distance. (Before doing so, make sure that the current input units of length, displayed at the bottom right corner of the STAAD program window, are feet.) Then, click on the OK button.
7.
To restore the original view, again, click on the Display Whole Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box shown in step 6.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 183 of 201
The Select to View method

For demonstrating this method, instead of viewing specific beams, let us look at the nodes instead. Steps: Using this option, the portion of the structure we wish to view can be selected by specifying the objects which lie in that portion. The Window/Rubber Band option allows us to select the portion of the structure to view by specifying a rubber-band window around it. The View Highlighted Only option displays only the selected (highlighted) objects on screen and, the members and elements we wish to view must be selected before choosing this option. The Select To View option allows us to view only Beams, Plates, and/or Solids, depending on the corresponding check boxes that are activated. 8. For our example, let us choose the Select To View option and check the Nodes check box. Then, click on the OK button as shown below.
The following figure shows the view of the structure with only the nodes displayed.
9.
To restore the original view, click on the Display Whole Structure icon or click on the Show All button in the dialog box shown in step 8.
Method 3 View | Zoom

The Zoom menu option allows us to zoom in (magnify) or out (reduce) on a portion of the structure, as one would, using a telescope. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this method, let us open EXAMP09.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 184 of 201
2.
Say, we want to magnify the portion of the structure shown in the figure below.
3.
To select the plates as shown in the above figure, click on the View From + Z icon. Then, using the Plates Cursor as shown below.
, select the plates by rubber-banding around them
By the way, looking at the model from View From + Y, or, View From - X, and using the rubber-band window methods can be just as effective in selecting these elements. 4. To restore the original isometric view, click on the Isometric View icon. We do this only to make sure that we have selected the correct entities.
5.
To magnify the selected portion of the structure, either click on the Zoom Window icon or, pull down the View menu and select the Zoom | Zoom Window menu option as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 185 of 201
The cursor changes as shown below.
6.
Using the cursor, drag a window around the selected portion of the structure.
The magnified view of the selected portion of the structure will now be displayed in the drawing area as shown below.
If we click on the Zoom In icon, it magnifies or enlarges the view of the structure even further by a pre-defined factor. You can keep the mouse cursor pressed over the Zoom In or Zoom Out icons, and the screen will continuously refresh to draw the structure larger or smaller.
To display the enlarged view in a new window, use the Dynamic Zoom icon instead of the Zoom Window option.
The region you wish to see will have to be selected by creating a rubber-band window around it. That region will now be displayed in a new window in the drawing area as shown in the next figure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 186 of 201
7.
To restore the view of the full structure, click on the Display Whole Structure icon.
Tutorials
5. Creating Groups
Group names are a means for easily identifying a collection of entities like Beams, Plates or Solids using a single moniker. By grouping these entities, we need to assign attributes such as member properties and material constants just to the group, a simple process, compared to the task of assigning them to the individual members. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
Let us classify the members of the topmost level of this structure into three groups Top Chords, Bottom Chords and Transverse Truss. Top Chords: 2. Make sure that the Beams Cursor has been selected. Then, using the mouse, select the inclined members as shown in the figure below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 187 of 201
3.
From the Tools menu, choose Create New Group.
4.
In the Give Group Name dialog box, type _TOPCOR for Group name (Group Names must begin with the underscore _ character). Since group names can be assigned to Nodes, Beams, Plates, Solids as well as a general category called Geometry, it is very important that we choose the proper entity type. Hence, specify the Select Type as Beam.
5.
Click on the OK button. Notice that the Assign Methods is presently set to Associate to Selected Geometry. Click on the Associate button.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 188 of 201
Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. This is necessary before we start selecting the members for the next group name. Bottom Chords: 6. Using the mouse, select the bottom chords as shown in the figure below.
7.
Next, to bring up the Give Group Name dialog box, click on the Create button. Then, follow steps 4 and 5 and assign the Group Name _BOTCOR to these members.
Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. Transverse Truss:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 189 of 201
8.
Using the mouse, select the Transverse Truss members as shown in the figure below.
9.
Next, follow step 7 except for specifying the Group Name as _TRNTRUS.
Click anywhere in the drawing area to un-highlight the highlighted members. Also, Close the create Group dialog box. Three groups have now been created. If we now go to the Select menu, an option called By Group should be available. Let us click on that option, and the following dialog box comes up.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 190 of 201
It is apparent that we can now select the members using the group name method. The three dark buttons under Color may be used to assign specific colors for drawing these members. If the check boxes for Show Label are switched off, labels such as beam numbers will not be displayed for these specific members, even if the beam numbering icon is switched on for the entire structure.
Tutorials
6. Displaying Loads on the screen
Steps: 1. To demonstrate this feature, let us open EXAMP08.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
The easiest way to display a load is to click on the Loads icon as shown below. To choose a specific load, we can click in the list box called 2. Active Load and choose the one we want.
Alternatively, we may pull the View menu down and select the Structure Diagrams menu option. In the Diagrams dialog box that opens, select the Loads and
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 191 of 201
Results tab. Check the Loads check box and select the load case we want from the Load Case list box. Then, click on the Apply button.
Drag the dialog box out of the way if it obstructs the view of the structure. The following figure shows load case 1 displayed on our structure.
3. We can change the color in which load icons are drawn. Click on the color button alongside the Loads checkbox, and make a new choice from the color palette (see figure below).
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 192 of 201
Let us assign say, blue color, as shown in the above figure. Select load case 2 from the Load Case list box. The following figure shows load case 2 displayed (in blue) on our structure.
Tutorials
7. Displaying Load Values on the screen
Steps: 1. In the previous exercise, we saw the method for turning on load icons, but not the numeric value of those loads. To view load values, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
2.
Let us first display the load by clicking on the Loads icon . After this, click the right mouse button and choose the Labels option. Alternatively, we may click on the Symbols and Labels icon or go to View | Structure Diagrams and select the Labels tab in the Diagrams dialog box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 193 of 201
3.
The dialog box shown below appears. Switch on the Load Values option under the Loading Display Options category as shown below.
The following figure shows our structure with the load values displayed on it.
4.
To change the unit in which load values are displayed, go to Tools | Set Current Display Unit menu command.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 194 of 201
In the Options dialog box that comes up, select the Force Units tab. Then, change the selection under the Force, Distributed Force, etc. options as shown below.
The following figure shows our structure with the load values displayed in KN/m.
Tutorials
8. Structural Tool Tip Options
Structural tool tips offer a facility for displaying any customized input or output information about a node, beam, plate or solid element when the mouse cursor is placed over the structural entity. The tool tips are similar to the ones displayed when the mouse cursor hovers over a toolbar icon. When the mouse cursor is moved away from that spot, the information displayed is switched off too. To activate the structural tool tips, go to View | Structural Tool Tip Options from the top menu.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 195 of 201
The dialog box shown in the figure below will prompt for the data to be displayed when the mouse hovers a particular structural entity.
To turn the structural tool tips on or off, simply check the Show Tool Tip box in the upper left hand corner. The Tip Delay box signifies the amount of time it takes from when the mouse cursor first appears over an entity to when the tool tip actually pops up. This number is expressed in milliseconds (i.e. 1000 = 1 second). The options (items that can be displayed) for each entity are shown under the Options box. A check mark signifies that the particular data item will be displayed in the tool tip. An option with a + next to it signifies that further options can be enabled or disabled. The figure below shows the options that can be turned on or off for Node Displacements.
A red X indicates the data will not be shown in the tool tip. Simply click on the check box to turn an option on or off. The resulting tool tip that is displayed from the options chosen in the previous figure is shown in the figure below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 196 of 201
The tool tips automatically display the results for the active load case. All values are reported in the current display units.
Tutorials
9. Identifying Beam Start and End
When assigning attributes like member releases or member offsets, one additional item of information which accompanies this information is whether that attribute is applied at the START node of a member or the END node. Hence, there has to be a way to quickly identify these two points without mistaking one for the other. Steps: 1. To demonstrate this, let us open EXAMP01.STD file. The structure will look as shown below.
2. a)
There are two different ways to identify the start and/or end of a beam: simply place the mouse over a specific beam. The resulting tool tip will display the start node and end node of that beam in two distinct colors along with their corresponding coordinates. Of course, it is necessary to have the tool tips display turned on for this method to work.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 197 of 201
b)
Click the right mouse button anywhere in the drawing area and choose Labels.
The following Diagrams dialog box will appear. Make sure that the Labels tab is selected. Then, switch the Beam Ends option on. To alter the color in which the start and/or end is displayed, simply click on the color palette next to the Start Color and/or End Color options and choose the color you want. Then, click on Apply for the changes to take effect immediately. Click on OK to close the dialog box.
The following figure shows the structure with the start and end of all beams displayed in two separate colors.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 198 of 201
Tutorials
10. Plotting from STAAD.Pro
Explained below are 5 methods for plotting the drawing of the STAAD model and STAAD result diagrams. Method 1 : Using the Print Current View option 1. We shall use example problem 14 to illustrate this feature. Open the example. The model should appear as shown below.
2.
To plot this picture, click on the Print Current View icon as shown in the following figure.
3.
The standard Windows Print dialog box will appear asking you to choose the printer to which you wish to plot the drawing.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 199 of 201
4.
If you wish to catch a glimpse of the plot, as it would appear on paper, select the Print Preview Current View option.
A preview screen similar to the one shown below will be displayed.
Method 2 : Using the Take Picture option 1. Bring up the diagram of the STAAD model you wish to print. On the Print toolbar of the STAAD screen, you will find an icon of a camera called Take Picture.
Alternatively, this option can be accessed from Edit | Take Picture.
2.
A dialog box will appear prompting you to provide a Picture ID and caption.
3.
Next, select Report Setup from the File menu, or click on the Report Setup icon as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 200 of 201
4.
A Report Setup dialog box will appear. In the Items tab, select Pictures from the available list of items.
5.
If more than one picture is available, select the one you wish to plot by pressing the Page. Click OK.
button. Next, go to the Picture Album tab and switch on Full
6.
From the File menu, select Print Report. The diagram will be plotted.
Alternatively, from the File menu, select Export Report | MS Word File.
7.
In the Save As dialog box, type in the name of the .doc file you want and click on the Save button. In the template dialog box, select the Normal template.
Microsoft Word will now start building the file with the picture in it. Once this task is completed, Word will open this file, and program can be accessed from the Windows Taskbar. Browse the file, and if you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 201 of 201
Method 3 : Using the Export view option 1. STAAD.Pro has a facility to export the drawing to a graphic image file. The icon for this facility is called Export View and is available in the Print toolbar.
2.
When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen, click on the Export View icon. Select the graphic format in which you wish to save the file (i.e., .bmp, .jpg, .tif, .gif, etc.)
Provide a file name and save the file. 3. Then go to a document publishing or graphic editing program such as Microsoft Word or Adobe Photoshop. Import the drawing from the file saved above. In Word, this can be done using Insert | Picture | From File. Once you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.
Method 4 : Using the Copy Picture option 1. Highlight the window containing the diagram that you wish to plot. This can be done by making sure the title bar of that window has the color which indicates that it is in focus. From the Edit menu, choose Copy Picture.
2.
Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for handling graphic images such as Microsoft Paint, Adobe Photoshop, etc. In the Edit menu of that program, select Paste. You will notice that the drawing from the STAAD window is now pasted in that program. Using the tools provided by the graphics program, you can modify the drawing if you wish. Once you are sure the image meets your needs, select Print from the File menu and follow the instructions.
Method 5 : Using the Windows Clipboard 1. When the diagram that you wish to plot is displayed on the screen, press the "Print Screen" key on your keyboard or Shift-Print Screen", depending on how your keyboard is set up. The entire image currently in view will be copied to the Windows clipboard. Next, run a graphics program which offers facilities for cropping portions of a graphic image (such as Microsoft Paint, Hijaak, Full Shot, etc.). In the Edit menu of those programs, select Paste. You will notice that the entire STAAD screen including the diagram, menus, toolbar icons, tables, etc., which were in view, are part of the pasted image. Using the tools provided by the graphics program, crop the image so as to preserve just the drawing and eliminate unwanted portions. Using the File | Print option, print the drawing.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 1 of 493
Application Examples (U.S.)

Introduction
The tutorials in the Getting Started Manual mention 2 methods of creating the STAAD input data. a. Using the facilities of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) modelling mode b. Using the editor which comes built into the STAAD program Method (a) is explained in great detail in the various tutorials of that manual. The emphasis in this Examples manual is on creating the data using method (b). A number of examples, representing a wide variety of structural engineering problems, are presented. All the input needed is explained line by line to facilitate the understanding of the STAAD command language. These examples also illustrate how the various commands in the program are to be used together. Although a user can prepare the input through the STAAD GUI, it is quite useful to understand the language of the input for the following reasons: 1) STAAD is a large and comprehensive structural engineering software. Knowledge of the STAAD language can be very useful in utilizing the large number of facilities available in the program. The Graphical User Interface can be used to generate the input file for even the most complex of structures. However, the user can easily make changes to the input data if he/she has a good understanding of the command language and syntax of the input. 2) The input file represents the user's thought about what he/she wants to analyze or design. With the knowledge of the STAAD command language, the user or any other person can verify the accuracy of the work. The commands used in the input file are explained in Section 5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Users are urged to refer to that manual for a better understanding of the language. The procedure for creating the file using the built-in editor is explained further below in this section. Alternatively, any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data, comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pro editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general appearance.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh4B1D.htm
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 2 of 493
To access the built-in editor, first start the program and follow the steps explained in Sections 2. and 2.4 of the Getting Started manual.
You will then encounter the dialog box shown in the following figure. In this dialog box, choose Open Editor.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 3 of 493
At this point, the editor screen will open as shown below.
Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold in the various examples in this book (You dont have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. For your convenience, the data for all the examples presented in this manual are supplied to you along with the program CD. You will find them in the folder location X:\spro2006\staad\examp\us where "X:" is the drive, and "spro2006" is the name of the installation folder if you happened to go with the default during installation. The example files are named in accordance with the order they appear in this manual, namely, examp01.std for example 1, examp08.std for example 8, and so on. The second part of this book contains a set of verification problems which compares the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 4 of 493
analytical results from the program with standard publications on the subject. They too are installed along with the examples. To view their contents in the editor, open the file you are interested in. Then, click on the STAAD editor icon, or, go to the Edit menu, and choose Edit Input Command File, as shown below.
A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 5 of 493
To exit the Editor, select the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window).

Description of Example Problems
1. Example problem No. 1 - Plane frame with steel design. After one analysis, member selection is requested. Since member sizes change during the member selection, another analysis is done followed by final code checking to verify that the final sizes meet the requirements of the code based on the latest analysis results. 2. Example problem No. 2 - A floor structure (bound by global X-Z axis) made up of steel beams is subjected to area load (i.e. load/area of floor). Load generation based on oneway distribution is illustrated in this example. 3. Example problem No. 3 - A portal frame type steel structure is sitting on a concrete footing. The soil is to be considered as an elastic foundation. 4. Example problem No. 4 - This example is a typical case of a load-dependent structure where the structural condition changes for different load cases. In this example, different bracing members are made inactive for different load cases. This is done to prevent these members from carrying any compressive forces. 5. Example problem No. 5 - This example demonstrates the application of support displacement load (commonly known as sinking support) on a space frame structure. 6. Example problem No. 6 - This is an example of prestress loading in a plane frame
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 6 of 493
structure. It covers two situations: 1) The prestressing effect is transmitted from the member on which it is applied to the rest of the structure through the connecting members (known in the program as PRESTRESS load). 2) The prestressing effect is experienced by the member(s) alone and not transmitted to the rest of the structure (known in the program as POSTSTRESS load). 7. Example problem No. 7 - This example illustrates modelling of structures with OFFSET connections. Offset connections arise when the center lines of the connected members do not intersect at the connection point. The connection eccentricity is modeled through specification of MEMBER OFFSETS. 8. Example problem No. 8 - In this example, concrete design is performed on some members of a space frame structure. Design calculations consist of computation of reinforcement for beams and columns. Secondary moments on the columns are obtained through the means of a P-Delta analysis. 9. Example problem No. 9 - A space frame structure in this example consists of frame members and finite elements. The finite element part is used to model floor flat plates and a shear wall. Design of an element is performed. 10. Example problem No. 10 - A tank structure is modeled with four-noded plate elements. Water pressure from inside is used as loading for the tank. Reinforcement calculations have been done for some elements. 11. Example problem No. 11 - Dynamic analysis (Response Spectrum) is performed for a steel structure. Results of a static and dynamic analysis are combined. The combined results are then used for steel design. 12. Example problem No. 12 - This example demonstrates generation of load cases for the type of loading known as a moving load. This type of loading occurs classically when the load-causing units move on the structure, as in the case of trucks on a bridge deck. The mobile loads are discretized into several individual immobile load cases at discrete positions. During this process, enormous number of load cases may be created resulting in plenty of output to be sorted. To avoid looking into a lot of output, the maximum force envelope is requested for a few specific members. 13. Example problem No. 13 - Calculation of displacements at intermediate points of members of a plane frame is demonstrated in this example. 14. Example problem No. 14 - A space frame is analyzed for seismic loads. The seismic loads are generated using the procedures of the 1994 UBC Code. A P-Delta analysis is peformed to obtain the secondary effects of the lateral and vertical loads acting simultaneously. 15. Example problem No. 15 - A space frame is analyzed for loads generated using the built-in wind and floor load generation facilities. 16. Example problem No. 16 - Dynamic Analysis (Time History) is performed for a 3 span beam with concentrated and distributed masses. The structure is subjected to "forcing function" and "ground motion" loading. The maxima of the joint displacements, member end forces and support reactions are determined. 17. Example problem No. 17 - The usage of User Provided Steel Tables is illustrated in this example for the analysis and design of a plane frame.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 7 of 493
18. Example problem No. 18 - This is an example which demonstrates the calculation of principal stresses on a finite element. 19. Example problem No. 19 - This example demonstrates the usage of inclined supports. The word INCLINED refers to the fact that the restraints at a joint where such a support is specified are along a user-specified axis system instead of along the default directions of the global axis system. STAAD offers a few different methods for assigning inclined supports, and we examine those in this example. 20. Example problem No. 20 - This example generates the geometry of a cylindrical tank structure using the cylindrical coordinate system. 21. Example problem No. 21 - This example illustrates the modeling of tension-only members using the MEMBER TENSION command. 22. Example problem No. 22 - A space frame structure is subjected to a sinusoidal loading. The commands necessary to describe the sine function are demonstrated in this example. Time History analysis is performed on this model. 23. Example problem No. 23 - This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to automatically generate spring supports for a slab on grade. The slab is subjected to various types of loading and analysis of the structure is performed. 24. Example problem No. 24 - This is an example of the analysis of a structure modelled using SOLID finite elements. This example also illustrates the method for applying an enforced displacement on the structure. 25. Example problem No. 25 - This example demonstrates the usage of compression-only members. Since the structural condition is load dependent, the PERFORM ANALYSIS command is specified, once for each primary load case. 26. Example problem No. 26 - The structure in this example is a building consisting of member columns as well as floors made up of beam members and plate elements. Using the master-slave command, the floors are specified to be rigid diaphragms for inplane actions but flexible for bending actions. 27. Example problem No. 27 - This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to apply the compression only attribute to automatically generated spring supports for a slab on grade. The slab is subjected to pressure and overturning loading. A tension/compression only analysis of the structure is performed. 28. Example problem No. 28 - This example demonstrates the input required for obtaining the modes and frequencies of the skewed bridge. The structure consists of piers, pier-cap girders and a deck slab. 29. Example problem No. 29 Analysis and design of a structure for seismic loads is demonstrated in this example. The elaborate dynamic analysis procedure called time history analysis is used.

Example Problem No. 1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 8 of 493
Plane frame with steel design. After one analysis, member selection is requested. Since member sizes change during the member selection, another analysis is done followed by final code checking to verify that the final sizes meet the requirements of the code based on the latest analysis results.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE PROBLEM NO. 1 Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT FT KIP Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 30 0 ; 3 0 20 0 6 30 20 0 7 0 35 ; 8 30 35 ; 9 7.5 35 ; 10 22.5 35. 11 15 35 ; 12 5. 38. ; 13 25 38 14 10 41 ; 15 20 41 ; 16 15 44 Joint number followed by X and Y coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 9 of 493
structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to allow for input of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 3;2 3 7;3 2 6;4 6 8;5 3 4 6 4 5 ; 7 5 6 ; 8 7 12 ; 9 12 14 10 14 16 ; 11 15 16 ; 12 13 15 ; 13 8 13 14 9 12 ; 15 9 14 ; 16 11 14 ; 17 11 15 18 10 15 ; 19 10 13 ; 20 7 9 21 9 11 ; 22 10 11 ; 23 8 10 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 4 TABLE ST W14X90 ; 2 TA ST W10X49 5 6 7 TA ST W21X50 ; 8 TO 13 TA ST W18X35 14 TO 23 TA ST L40404 Member properties are from the AISC steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. MEMB TRUSS 14 TO 23 The above command defines that members 14 through 23 are of type truss. This means that these members can carry only axial tension/compression and no moments. MEMB RELEASE 5 START MZ Member 5 has local moment-z (MZ) released at the start joint. This means that the member cannot carry any moment-z (i.e. strong axis moment) at node 3. UNIT INCH CONSTANTS E 29000. ALL DEN 0.000283 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 90.0 MEMB 3 4 UNIT FT The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), POISSON, etc. Length unit is changed from FEET to INCH to facilitate the input. The BETA command specifies that members 3 and 4 are rotated by 90 degrees around their own longitudinal axis. See section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual for the definition of the BETA angle. SUPPORT 1 FIXED ; 2 PINNED A fixed support is located at joint 1 and a pinned support at joint 2.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 10 of 493
PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION LIST 1 5 14 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTY LIST 1 2 5 8 14 The above PRINT commands are self-explanatory. The LIST option restricts the print output to the members listed. LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD Load case 1 is initiated long with an accompanying title. SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 One of the components of load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards. JOINT LOAD 4 5 FY -15. ; 11 FY -35. Load 1 contains joint loads also. Loads are applied at nodes 4, 5 and 11. FY indicates that the load is a force in the global Y direction. MEMB LOAD 8 TO 13 UNI Y -0.9 ; 6 UNI GY -1.2 Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction while Y indicates local Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 6, and, 8 to 13. CALCULATE RAYLEIGH FREQUENCY The above command at the end of load case 1, is an instruction to perform a natural frequency calculation based on the Rayleigh method using the data in the above load case. LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT MEMBER LOAD 1 2 UNI GX 0.6 ; 8 TO 10 UNI Y -1. Load case 2 is initiated and contains several member loads. * 1/3 RD INCREASE IS ACCOMPLISHED BY 75% LOAD LOAD COMB 3 75 PERCENT DL LL WL 1 0.75 2 0.75 The above command identifies a combination load (case no. 3) with a title. The subsequent line provides the load cases and their respective factors used for the load combination. Any line beginning with the * mark is treated as a comment line. PERFORM ANALYSIS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 11 of 493
This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. LOAD LIST 1 3 The above command activates load cases 1 and 3 only for the commands to follow. This also means that load case 2 will be made inactive. PRINT MEMBER FORCES PRINT SUPPORT REACTION The above PRINT commands are self-explanatory. Also note that all the forces and reactions will be printed for load cases 1 and 3 only. PARAMETER CODE AISC NSF 0.85 ALL BEAM 1.0 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL PROFILE W14 MEMB 1 3 4 The PARAMETER command is used to specify steel design parameters such as NSF, KY, etc. Information on these parameters can be obtained from the manual where the implementation of the code is explained. The BEAM parameter is specified to perform design at every 1/12th point along the member length which by the way is the default too. The RATIO parameter specifies that the ratio of actual loading over section capacity should not exceed 0.9. SELECT ALL The above command instructs the program to select the most economic section for ALL the members based on the results of the analysis. GROUP MEMB GROUP MEMB GROUP MEMB GROUP MEMB 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 TO 13 14 TO 23
Although the program selects the most economical section for all members, it is not always practical to use many different sizes in one structure. GROUPing is a procedure by which the cross section which has the largest value for the specified attribute, which in this case is the default and hence the AREA, from among the associated member list, is assigned to all members in the list. Hence, the cross sections for members 1, 3 and 4 are replaced with the one with the largest area from among the three. PERFORM ANALYSIS As a result of the selection and grouping, the member sizes are no longer the same as the ones used in the original analysis. Hence, it is necessary to reanalyze the structure using the new properties to get new values of forces in the members. PARAMETER BEAM 1.0 ALL
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 12 of 493
RATIO 1.0 ALL TRACK 1.0 ALL A new set of values are now provided for the above parameters. The actual load to member capacity RATIO has been redefined as 1.0. The TRACK parameter tells the program to print out the design results to the intermediate level of descriptivity. CHECK CODE ALL With the above command, the latest member sizes with the latest analysis results are checked to verify that they satisfy the CODE specifications. STEEL TAKE OFF The above command instructs the program to list the length and weight of all the different member sizes. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 13 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 14 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 15 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 16 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 17 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 18 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 19 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 20 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 21 of 493

A floor structure (bound by global X-Z axis) made up of steel beams is subjected to area load (i.e. load/area of floor). Load generation based on one-way distribution is illustrated in this example. In the case of loads such as joint loads and member loads, the magnitude and direction of the load at the applicable joints and members is directly known from the input. However, the area load is a different sort of load where a load intensity on the given area has to be converted to joint and member loads. The calculations required to perform this conversion are done only during the analysis. Consequently, the loads generated from the AREA LOAD command can be
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 22 of 493
viewed only after the analysis is completed.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD FLOOR A FLOOR FRAME DESIGN WITH AREA LOAD Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word FLOOR signifies that the structure is a floor structure and the structure is in the x z plane. UNIT FT KIP Defines the UNITs for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. 0. 5 20. 0. 0. ; 7 5. 0. 10. 8 10. 0. 10. ; 9 13. 0. 10. ; 10 15. 0. 10. ; 11 16.5 0. 10. 12 20. 0. 10. ; 13 0. 0. 25. ; 14 5. 0. 25. ; 15 11. 0. 25. 16 16.5 0. 25 ; 17 20. 0. 25. 18 0. 0. 28. 19 20. 0. 28. ; 20 0. 0. 35. ; 21 20. 0. 35.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 23 of 493
Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a floor structure, the Y coordinates are all the same, in this case zero. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to allow for input of multiple sets of data on one line. Joints between 1 and 5 (i.e. 2, 3, 4) are generated in the first line of input taking advantage of the equal spacing between the joints (see section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual for more information). MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 4 ; 5 7 8 9 ; 10 13 14 13 ; 14 18 19 15 20 21 ; 16 18 20 ; 17 13 18 ; 18 1 13 19 7 14 ; 20 2 7 ; 21 9 15 22 3 8 ; 23 11 16 ; 24 4 10 ; 25 19 21 26 17 19 ; 27 12 17 ; 28 5 12 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMB PROP AMERICAN 1 TO 28 TABLE ST W12X26 Member properties are specified from the AISC steel table. In this case, the W12X26 section is chosen. The word ST stands for standard single section. * MEMBERS WITH PINNED ENDS ARE RELEASED FOR MZ MEMB RELEASE 1 5 10 14 15 18 17 28 26 20 TO 24 START MZ 4 9 13 14 15 18 16 27 25 19 21 TO 24 END MZ The first set of members (1 5 10 etc) have local moment-z (MZ) released at the start joint. This means that these members cannot carry any moment-z (i.e. strong axis moment) at the start joint. The second set of members have MZ released at the end joints. Any line beginning with the * mark is treated as a comment line. CONSTANT E 4176E3 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), POISSON, etc. E has been assigned as 4176E3 (4176000.0 Kips/sq.ft) which is the equivalent of 29000 ksi. The built-in default for Poissons value for steel is used during the analysis. SUPPORT 1 5 13 17 20 21 FIXED The above joints are declared as being restrained for all 6 global degrees of freedom. LOADING 1 300 POUNDS PER SFT DL+LL Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. AREA LOAD 1 TO 28 ALOAD -0.30 All the 28 members are subjected to an Area load of 0.3 kips/sq.ft. The program converts area
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 24 of 493
loads into individual member loads. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The PRINT LOAD DATA command is specified to obtain a listing of the member loads which were generated from the AREA LOAD. PARAMETERS CODE AISC BEAM 1 ALL DMAX 2.0 ALL DMIN 1.0 ALL UNT 1.0 ALL UNB 1.0 ALL The PARAMETER command is used to specify steel design parameters (Table 2.1 of Technical Reference Manual). Design is to be performed per the specifications of the AISC ASD Code. The BEAM parameter is specified to perform design at every 1/12 th point along the member length. DMAX and DMIN specify maximum and minimum depth limitations to be used during member selection. UNT and UNB stand for unsupported length for top and bottom flange to be used for calculation of allowable bending stress. SELECT MEMB 2 6 11 14 15 16 18 19 21 23 24 27 The above command instructs the program to select the most economical section from the AISC steel table for the members listed. FINISH The FINISH command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 25 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 26 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 27 of 493

A portal frame type steel structure is sitting on a concrete footing. The soil is to be considered as an elastic foundation. Value of soil subgrade reaction is known from which spring constants are calculated by simply multiplying the subgrade reaction by the tributary area of each modeled spring.
NOTE: 1) All dimensions are in feet. 2) Soil Subgrade Reaction - 250 Kips/cft Spring constant calculation Spring of joints 1, 5, 10 & 14 =
8 x 1 x 250 = 2000Kips/ft Spring of joints 2, 3, 4, 11, 12 & 13 8 x 2 x 250 = = 4000Kips/ft Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 28 of 493
STAAD PLANE PORTAL ON FOOTING FOUNDATION Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT FT KIPS Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 5 8.0 0.0 0.0 6 4.0 10.0 0.0 ; 7 4.0 20.0 0.0 8 24.0 20.0 0.0 ; 9 24.0 10.0 0.0 10 20.0 0.0 0.0 14 28.0 0.0 0.0 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates are given as all zeros. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to facilitate specification of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 4 5 3 6 ; 6 6 7 7 7 8 ; 8 6 9 9 8 9 ;10 9 12 11 10 11 14 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 1 4 11 14 PRIS YD 1.0 ZD 8.0 2 3 12 13 PRIS YD 2.0 ZD 8.0 5 6 9 10 TABLE ST W10X33 7 8 TA ST W12X26 The first two lines define member properties as PRIS (prismatic) followed by YD (depth) and ZD (width) values. The program will calculate the properties necessary to do the analysis. Additional information is available in sections 1 and 5 of the Technical Reference Manual. Member properties for the remaining members are chosen from the American (AISC) steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. * E FOR STEEL IS 29,000 AND FOR CONCRETE 3000 UNIT INCHES CONSTANTS E 29000. MEMB 5 TO 10 E 3000. MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14 DEN 0.283E-3 MEMB 5 TO 10 DEN 8.68E-5 MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14 POISSON STEEL MEMB 5 TO 10 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 29 of 493
The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Density and Poissons ratio. Length unit is changed from FT to INCH to facilitate the input. Any line beginning with an * mark is treated as a comment line. UNIT FT SUPPORTS 2 TO 4 11 TO 13 FIXED BUT MZ KFY 4000. 1 5 10 14 FIXED BUT MZ KFY 2000. The supports for the structure are specified above. The first set of joints are restrained in all directions except MZ (which is global moment-z). Also, a spring having a spring constant of 4000 kip/ft is provided in the global Y direction at these nodes. The second set is similar to the former except for a different value of the spring constant. LOADING 1 DEAD AND WIND LOAD COMBINED Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. SELF Y -1.0 The selfweight of the structure is specified as acting in the global Y direction with a -1.0 factor. Since global Y is vertically upwards, the -1.0 factor indicates that this load will act downwards. JOINT LOAD 6 7 FX 5.0 Load 1 contains joint loads also. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. The load is applied at nodes 6 and 7. MEMBER LOAD 7 8 UNI GY -3.0 Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load acts in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load, and is applied on members 7 and 8, acting downwards. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The above PRINT command instructs the program to print analysis results which include joint displacements, member forces and support reactions. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 30 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 31 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 32 of 493

This example is a typical case of a load-dependent structure where the structural condition changes for different load cases. In this example, different bracing members are made inactive for different load cases. This is done to prevent these members from carrying any compressive forces.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 33 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE * A PLANE FRAME STRUCTURE WITH TENSION BRACING Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT INCH KIP Specifies the unit to be used. SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the members which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command).
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 34 of 493
JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 3 480. 0 0 4 0 180. 0 6 480. 180. 0 7 240. 360. 0 ; 8 480. 360. 0 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates are given as all zeros. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators, to facilitate specification of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 4 2 ; 3 5 7 ; 4 3 6 ; 5 6 8 ; 6 4 5 7 8 7 8 ; 9 1 5 ; 10 2 4 ; 11 3 5 ; 12 2 6 13 6 7 ; 14 5 8 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER TRUSS 9 TO 14 The above command defines that members 9 through 14 are of type truss. This means these members can only carry axial tension/compression and no moments. MEMBER PROP AMERICAN 1 TO 5 TABLE ST W12X26 6 7 8 TA ST W18X35 9 TO 14 TA LD L50505 Properties for all members are assigned from the American (AISC) steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. The word LD stands for long leg back-to-back double angle. Since the spacing between the two angles of the double angle is not provided, it is assumed to be 0.0. CONSTANTS E 29000. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio, etc. Built-in default value of steel is used for the latter. SUPPORT 1 2 3 PINNED PINNED supports are specified at Joints 1, 2 and 3. The word PINNED signifies that no moments will be carried by these supports. INACTIVE MEMBERS 9 TO 14 The above command makes the listed members inactive. The stiffness contribution of these members will not be considered in the analysis till they are made active again.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 35 of 493
UNIT FT LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title. The length UNIT is changed from INCH to FT for input values which follow. MEMBER LOAD 6 8 UNI GY -1.0 7 UNI GY -1.5 Load 1 contains member loads. GY indicates that the load acts in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. The loads are applied on members 6, 8 and 7. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. It is worth noting that members 9 TO 14 will not be used in this analysis since they were declared inactive earlier. In other words, for dead and live load, the bracings are not used to carry any load. CHANGES The members inactivated earlier are restored using the CHANGE command. INACTIVE MEMBERS 10 11 13 A new set of members are made inactive. The stiffness contribution from these members will not be used in the analysis till they are made active again. They have been inactivated to prevent them from being subject to any forces for the next load case. LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT Load case 2 is initiated along with an accompanying title. JOINT LOAD 4 FX 30 ; 7 FX 15 Load 2 contains joint loads. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. Nodes 4 and 7 are subjected to the loads. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The analysis will be performed for load case 2 only. CHANGE The above CHANGE command is an instruction to re-activate all inactive members. INACTIVE MEMBERS 9 12 14 Members 9, 12 and 14 are made inactive. The stiffness contribution of these members will not
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 36 of 493
be used in the analysis till they are made active again. They have been inactivated to prevent them from being subject to compressive forces for the next load case. LOADING 3 WIND FROM RIGHT Load case 3 is initiated followed by a title. JOINT LOAD 6 FX -30 ; 8 FX -15 Load 3 contains joint loads at nodes 6 and 8. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. The negative numbers (-30 and -15) indicate that the load is acting along the negative global X direction. LOAD COMBINATION 4 1 0.75 2 0.75 LOAD COMBINATION 5 1 0.75 3 0.75 Load combination case 4 involves the algebraic summation of the results of load cases 1 and 2 after multiplying each by a factor of 0.75. For load combinations, the program simply gathers the results of the component primary cases, factors them appropriately, and combines them algebraically. Thus, an analysis in the real sense of the term (multiplying the inverted stiffness matrix by the load vector) is not carried out for load combination cases. Load combination case 5 combines the results of load cases 1 and 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. Only primary load case 3 will be considered for this analysis. (As explained earlier, a combination case is not truly analysed for, but handled using other means.) CHANGE The above CHANGE command will re-activate all inactive members. LOAD LIST ALL At the end of any analysis, only those load cases for which the analysis was done most recently, are recognized as the "active" load cases. The LOAD LIST ALL command enables all the load cases in the structure to be made active for further processing. PRINT MEMBER FORCES The above PRINT command is an instruction to produce a report, in the output file, of the member end forces. LOAD LIST 1 4 5 A LOAD LIST command is a means of instructing the program to use only the listed load cases for further processing.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 37 of 493
PARAMETER CODE AISC BEAM 1.0 ALL UNT 6.0 ALL UNB 6.0 ALL KY 0.5 ALL The PARAMETER command is used to specify the steel design parameters (information on these parameters can be obtained from the manual where the implementation of the code is explained). Design will be done according to the specifications of the AISC ASD Code. The BEAM parameter is specified to perform design at every 1/12 th point along the member length. UNT and UNB represent the unsupported length of the flanges to be used for calculation of allowable bending stress. KY 0.5 ALL sets the effective length factor for column buckling about the local Y-axis to be 0.5 for ALL members. CHECK CODE ALL The above command instructs the program to perform a check to determine how the user defined member sizes along with the latest analysis results meet the code requirements. FINISH This command terminates a STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 38 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 39 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 40 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 41 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 42 of 493

This example demonstrates the Application of support displacement load (commonly known as sinking support) on a space frame structure.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 43 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE TEST FOR SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates. UNITS KIP FEET Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 0.0 10.0 0.0 3 20.0 10.0 0.0 ; 4 20.0 0.0 0.0 5 20. 10. 20. ; 6 20. 0. 20. Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2 3 4 3 5 ; 5 5 6 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. UNIT INCH MEMB PROP 1 TO 5 PRIS AX 10. IZ 300. IY 300. IX 10.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 44 of 493
Member properties have been defined above using the PRISMATIC attribute. Values of AX (area), IZ (moment of inertia about major axis), IY (moment of inertia about minor axis) and IX (torsional constant) are provided in INCH unit. CONSTANT E 29000. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are specified following the command CONSTANTS. SUPPORT 1 4 6 FIXED Joints 1, 4 and 6 are fixed supports. LOADING 1 SINKING SUPPORT Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title. SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT LOAD 4 FY -0.50 Load 1 is a support displacement load which is also commonly known as a sinking support. FY signifies that the support settlement is in the global Y direction and the value of this settlement is 0.5 inch downward. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The above PRINT command instructs the program to print joint displacements, support reactions and member forces. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 45 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 46 of 493

This is an example of prestress loading in a plane frame structure. It covers two situations: 1) From the member on which it is applied, the prestressing effect is transmitted to the rest of the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 47 of 493
structure through the connecting members (known in the program as PRESTRESS load). 2) The prestressing effect is experienced by the member(s) alone and not transmitted to the rest of the structure (known in the program as POSTSTRESS load).
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE FRAME WITH PRESTRESSING LOAD Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT KIP FT Specifies the unit to be used for input to follow. JOINT COORD 1 0. 0. ; 2 40. 0. ; 3 0. 20. ; 4 40. 20. 5 0. 35. ; 6 40. 35. ; 7 0. 50. ; 8 40. 50. Joint number followed by X and Y coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 48 of 493
separators, and that allows us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 3 ; 2 3 5 ; 3 5 7 ; 4 2 4 ; 5 4 6 6 6 8 ; 7 3 4 ; 8 5 6 ; 9 7 8 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. SUPPORT 1 2 FIXED The supports at joints 1 and 2 are defined to be fixed supports. MEMB PROP 1 TO 9 PRI AX 2.2 IZ 1.0 Member properties are provided using the PRI (prismatic) attribute. Values of area (AX) and moment of inertia about the major axis (IZ) are provided. UNIT INCH CONSTANT E 3000. ALL ; POISSON CONCRETE ALL The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio, etc. Length unit is changed from FT to INCH to facilitate the input. LOADING 1 PRESTRESSING LOAD MEMBER PRESTRESS 7 8 FORCE 300. ES 3. EM -12. EE 3. Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title. Load 1 contains PRESTRESS load. Members 7 and 8 have a cable force of 300 kips. The location of the cable at the start (ES) and end (EE) is 3 inches above the center of gravity while at the middle (EM) it is 12 inches below the c.g. The assumptions and facts associated with this type of loading are explained in section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual. LOADING 2 POSTSTRESSING LOAD MEMBER POSTSTRESS 7 8 FORCE 300. ES 3. EM -12. EE 3. Load case 2 is initiated along with an accompanying title. Load 2 is a POSTSTRESS load. Members 7 and 8 have cable force of 300 kips. The location of the cable is the same as in load case 1. For a difference between PRESTRESS loading and POSTSTRESS loading, as well as additional information about both types of loads, please refer to section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to perform the analysis. UNIT FT PRINT ANALYSIS RESULT The above command is an instruction to write joint displacements, support reactions and member forces in the output file. The preceding line causes the results to be written in the length unit of feet.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 49 of 493
FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 50 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 51 of 493

This example illustrates modelling of structures with OFFSET connections. OFFSET connections arise when the center lines of the connected members do not intersect at the connection point. The connection eccentricity is modeled through specification of MEMBER OFFSETS.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE TEST FOR MEMBER OFFSETS Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT FT KIP Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORD 1 0. 0. ; 2 20. 0. ; 3 0. 15. 4 20. 15. ; 5 0. 30. ; 6 20. 30.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 52 of 493
Joint number followed by X and Y coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. This allows us to provide multiple sets of data in one line. MEMB INCI 1 1 3 2 ; 3 3 5 4 5 3 4 ; 6 5 6 ; 7 1 4 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMB PROP AMERICAN 1 TO 4 TABLE ST W14X90 5 6 TA ST W12X26 7 TA LD L90408 Member properties are assigned from the American (AISC) steel table for all members. The word ST stands for standard single section. LD stands for long leg back-to-back double angle. UNIT INCH MEMB OFFSET 5 6 START 7.0 0.0 0.0 5 6 END -7.0 0.0 0.0 7 END -7.0 -6.0 0.0 The above specification states that an OFFSET is located at the START/END joint of the members. The X, Y and Z global coordinates of the offset distance from the corresponding incident joint are also provided. These attributes are applied to members 5, 6 and 7. CONSTANT E 29000. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are provided following the keyword CONSTANT. SUPPORT 1 2 PINNED Pinned supports are specified at joints 1 and 2. The word PINNED signifies that no moments will be carried by these supports. LOADING 1 WIND LOAD Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title. JOINT LOAD 3 FX 50. ; 5 FX 25.0 Load 1 contains joint loads at nodes 3 and 5. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 53 of 493
PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command is an instruction to perform the analysis. UNIT FT PRINT FORCES PRINT REACTIONS The above PRINT commands are self-explanatory. The preceding line causes the results to be written in the length unit of feet. FINISH This command terminates a STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 54 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 55 of 493

In this example, concrete design is performed on some members of a space frame structure. Design calculations consist of computation of reinforcement for beams and columns. Secondary moments on the columns are obtained through the means of a P-Delta analysis.
The above example represents a space frame, and the members are made of concrete. The input in the next page will show the dimensions of the members. Two load cases, namely one for dead plus live load and another with dead, live and wind load, are considered in design. Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 56 of 493
STAAD SPACE FRAME WITH CONCRETE DESIGN Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through all X, Y and Z coordinates. UNIT KIP FT Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATE 1 0 0 0 ; 2 18 0 0 ; 3 38 0. 0 4 0 0 24 ; 5 18 0 24 ; 6 38 0 24 7 0 12 0 ; 8 18. 12 0 ; 9 38 12 0 10 0 12 24 ; 11 18 12 24 ; 12 38 12 24 13 18 24 0 ; 14 38 24 0 ; 15 18 24 24 16 38 24 24 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators, that is, multiple data can be input in one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 7 ; 2 4 10 ; 3 2 8 5 5 11 ; 6 11 15 ; 7 3 9 6 12 ; 10 12 16 ; 11 13 10 11 14 ; 15 13 14 17 7 10 ; 18 8 11 ; 19 20 13 15 ; 21 14 16 ; 9 7 ; 9 4 8 13 ; 8 9 14 8 12 16 15 16 12
Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. UNIT INCH MEMB PROP 1 2 PRISMATIC YD 12.0 IZ 509. IY 509. IX 1018. 3 TO 10 PR YD 12.0 ZD 12.0 IZ 864. IY 864. IX 1279. 11 TO 21 PR YD 21.0 ZD 16.0 IZ 5788. IY 2953. IX 6497. All member properties are provided using the PRISMATIC option. YD and ZD stand for depth and width. If ZD is not provided, a circular shape with diameter = YD is assumed for that cross section. All properties are calculated automatically from these dimensions unless a different set of values of the properties are defined. For this particular example, moment of inertia (IZ, IY and IX) are provided. The values provided in this example are only half the values of a full section to account for the fact that the full moments of inertia will not be effective due to cracking of concrete. Clause 10.11.1 of ACI 318-99 offers some guidelines on the amount of reduction to be applied on the gross section moment of inertia for beams, columns, walls and slabs to account for cracking. CONSTANT E 3150.0 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL UNIT FT CONSTANT
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 57 of 493
DEN .15 ALL The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio, Density, etc. Length unit is changed from INCH to FT to facilitate input for DENsity. The built-in value for Poissons ratio for concrete will be used in the analysis. SUPPORT 1 TO 6 FIXED Joints 1 to 6 are fixed supports. LOAD 1 (1.4DL + 1.7LL) Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. SELF Y -1.4 The selfweight of the structure is applied in the global Y direction with a -1.4 factor. Since global Y is vertically upward, the negative factor indicates that this load will act downwards. MEMB LOAD 11 TO 16 UNI Y -2.8 11 TO 16 UNI Y -5.1 Load 1 contains member loads also. Y indicates that the load is in the local Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. LOAD 2 .75 (1.4DL + 1.7LL + 1.7WL) Load case 2 is initiated followed by a title. REPEAT LOAD 1 0.75 The above command will gather the loading values from load case 1, multiply them with a factor of 0.75 and utilize the resulting values in load 2. JOINT LOAD 15 16 FZ 8.5 11 FZ 20.0 12 FZ 16.0 10 FZ 8.5 Load 2 contains some additional joint loads also. FZ indicates that the load is a force in the global Z direction. PDELTA ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The analysis type is P-DELTA indicating that second-order effects are to be calculated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 58 of 493
PRINT FORCES LIST 2 5 9 14 16 Member end forces are printed using the above PRINT command. The LIST option restricts the print output to the members listed. START CONCRETE DESIGN
The above command initiates a concrete design.

CODE ACI TRACK 1.0 MEMB 14 TRACK 2.0 MEMB 16 MAXMAIN 11 ALL The values for the concrete design parameters are defined in the above commands. Design is performed per the ACI 318 Code. The TRACK value dictates the extent of design related information that should appear in the output. MAXMAIN indicates that the maximum size of main reinforcement is the #11 bar. These parameters are described in the manual where American concrete design related information is available. DESIGN BEAM 14 16 The above command instructs the program to design beams 14 and 16 for flexure, shear and torsion. DESIGN COLUMN 2 5 The above command instructs the program to design columns 2 and 5 for axial load and biaxial bending. END CONCRETE DESIGN This will end the concrete design. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 59 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 60 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 61 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 62 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 63 of 493

The space frame structure in this example consists of frame members and finite elements (plates). The finite element part is used to model floor slabs and a shear wall. Concrete design of an element is performed.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 64 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE

* EXAMPLE PROBLEM WITH FRAME MEMBERS AND FINITE ELEMENTS
Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The second line forms the title to identify this project. UNIT FEET KIP The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 0 20 REP ALL 2 20 0 0 7 0 15 0 11 0 15 20 12 5 15 0 14 15 15 0 15 5 15 20 17 15 15 20 18 20 15 0 22 20 15 20 23 25 15 0 25 35 15 0 26 25 15 20 28 35 15 20 29 40 15 0 33 40 15 20 34 20 3.75 0 36 20 11.25 0 37 20 3.75 20 39 20 11.25 20 The joint numbers and their coordinates are defined through the above set of commands. The automatic generation facility has been used several times in the above lines. Users may refer to section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual where the joint coordinate generation facilities are
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 65 of 493
described.. MEMBER INCI *COLUMNS 1 1 7 ; 2 2 11 3 3 34 ; 4 34 35 ; 5 35 36 ; 6 36 18 7 4 37 ; 8 37 38 ; 9 38 39 ; 10 39 22 11 5 29 ; 12 6 33 *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=0 13 7 8 16 *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=20 17 18 19 20 *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=40 21 29 30 24 *BEAMS IN X DIRECTION AT Z = 0 25 7 12 ; 26 12 13 ; 27 13 14 ; 28 14 18 29 18 23 ; 30 23 24 ; 31 24 25 ; 32 25 29 *BEAMS IN X DIRECTION AT Z = 20 33 11 15 ; 34 15 16 ; 35 16 17 ; 36 17 22 37 22 26 ; 38 26 27 ; 39 27 28 ; 40 28 33 The member incidences are defined through the above set of commands. For some members, the member number followed by the start and end joint numbers are defined. In other cases, STAAD's automatic generation facilities are utilized. Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual describes these facilities in detail. DEFINE MESH A JOINT 7 B JOINT 11 C JOINT 22 D JOINT 18 E JOINT 33 F JOINT 29 G JOINT 3 H JOINT 4 The above lines define the nodes of super-elements. Super-elements are plate/shell surfaces from which a number of individual plate/shell elements can be generated. In this case, the points describe the outer edges of a slab and that of a shear wall. Our goal is to define the slab and the wall as several plate/shell elements. GENERATE ELEMENT MESH ABCD 4 4 MESH DCEF 4 4 MESH DCHG 4 4 The above lines form the instructions to generate individual 4-noded elements from the superelement profiles. For example, the command MESH ABCD 4 4 means that STAAD has to generate 16 elements from the surface formed by the points A, B, C and D with 4 elements along the side AB & CD and 4 elements along the edges BC & DA. MEMB PROP
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 66 of 493
1 TO 40 PRIS YD 1 ZD 1 Members 1 to 40 are defined as a rectangular prismatic section with 1 ft depth and 1 ft width. ELEM PROP 41 TO 88 TH 0.5 Elements 41 to 88 are defined to be 0.5 ft thick. UNIT INCH CONSTANT E 3000 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The modulus of elasticity and Poissons ratio are defined above for all the members and elements following the keyword CONSTANT. Length units are changed to inches to facilitate the above input. SUPPORT 1 TO 6 FIXED Joints 1 to 6 are defined as fixed supported. UNIT FEET LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD FROM FLOOR ELEMENT LOAD 41 TO 72 PRESSURE -1.0 Load 1 consists of a pressure load of 1 Kip/sq.ft. intensity on elements 41 to 72. The negative sign (and the default value for the axis) indicates that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of the element local z-axis. LOAD 2 WIND LOAD JOINT LOAD 11 33 FZ -20. 22 FZ -100. Load 2 consists of joint loads in the Z direction at joints 11, 22 and 33. LOAD COMB 3 1 0.9 2 1.3 Load 3 is a combination of 0.9 times load case 1 and 1.3 times load case 2. PERFORM ANALYSIS The command to perform a linear elastic analysis is specified above. LOAD LIST 1 3 PRINT SUPP REAC PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 27 PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 47
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 67 of 493
Support reactions, members forces and element stresses are printed for load cases 1 and 3. START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE ACI DESIGN ELEMENT 47 END CONCRETE DESIGN The above set of command form the instructions to STAAD to perform a concrete design on element 47. Design is done according to the ACI 318 code. Note that design will consist only of flexural reinforcement calculations in the longitudinal and transverse directions of the elements for the moments MX and MY. FINI The STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 68 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 69 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 70 of 493

A tank structure modeled with four-noded plate elements. Water pressure from inside is used as loading for the tank. Reinforcement calculations have been done for some elements.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 71 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE FINITE ELEMENT MODEL OF TANK Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame (3-D) structure. UNITS FEET KIPS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. 0. 5 0. 20. 0. REPEAT 4 5. 0. 0. REPEAT 4 0. 0. 5. REPEAT 4 -5. 0. 0. REPEAT 3 0. 0. -5. 81 5. 0. 5. 83 5. 0. 15. REPEAT 2 5. 0. 0. Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. The REPEAT command generates joint coordinates by repeating the pattern of the previous line of joint coordinates. The number following the REPEAT command is the number of repetitions to be carried out. This is followed by X, Y and Z coordinate increments. This is explained in section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 2 7 6 TO 4 1 1 REPEAT 14 4 5 61 76 77 2 1 TO 64 1 1 65 1 6 81 76 66 76 81 82 71 67 71 82 83 66 68 66 83 56 61 69 6 11 84 81 70 81 84 85 82 71 82 85 86 83
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 72 of 493
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
83 11 84 85 86 16 87 88 89
86 16 87 88 89 21 26 31 36
51 87 88 89 46 26 31 36 41
56 84 85 86 51 87 88 89 46
Element connectivities are input as above by providing the element number followed by joint numbers defining the element. The REPEAT command generates element incidences by repeating the pattern of the previous line of element joints. The number following the REPEAT command is the number of repetitions to be carried out and that is followed by element and joint number increments. This is explained in detail in Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual. UNIT INCHES ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 80 TH 8.0 Element properties are provided by specifying the THickness of 8.0 inches. CONSTANTS E 3000. ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are provided following the keyword CONSTANTS. SUPPORT 1 TO 76 BY 5 81 TO 89 PINNED Pinned supports are specified at the joints listed above. No moments will be carried by these supports. The expression 1 TO 76 BY 5 means 1, 6, 11, etc. up to 76. UNIT FT LOAD 1 ELEMENT LOAD 4 TO 64 BY 4 PR 1. 3 TO 63 BY 4 PR 2. 2 TO 62 BY 4 PR 3. 1 TO 61 BY 4 PR 4. Load case 1 is initiated. It consists of element loads in the form of uniform Pressure. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. UNIT INCHES PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 5 25 45 65
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 73 of 493
The joint displacement values for the listed nodes will be reported in the output file as a result of the above command. PRINT ELEM FORCE LIST 13 16 PRINT ELEM STRESS LIST 9 12 Two types of results are requested for elements. The first one requests the nodal point forces in the global axes directions to be reported for elements 13 and 16. The second one requests element centroid stresses in the element local axes directions to be reported for elements 9 and 12. These results will appear in a tabular form in the output file. START CONCRETE DESIGN The above command initiates concrete design. CODE ACI DESIGN SLAB 9 12 Slabs (i.e. elements) 9 and 12 will be designed and the reinforcement requirements obtained. In STAAD, elements are typically designed for the moments MX and MY at the centroid of the element. END CONCRETE DESIGN Terminates the concrete design operation. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 74 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 75 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 76 of 493

Dynamic analysis (Response Spectrum) is performed for a steel structure. Results of a static and dynamic analysis are combined. The combined results are then used for steel design.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 77 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANALYSIS Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axis. UNIT FEET KIPS Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 20 0 0 3 0 10 0 ; 4 20 10 0 5 0 20 0 ; 6 20 20 0 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Note that, since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates are given as all zeros. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to allow for input of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3 ; 2 2 4 ; 3 3 5 ; 4 4 6 5 3 4 ; 6 5 6
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 78 of 493
Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 1 TO 4 TA ST W10X33 5 TA ST W12X40 6 TA ST W8X40 Properties for all members are assigned from the American (AISC) steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. SUPPORTS 1 2 FIXED Fixed supports are specified at joints 1 and 2.. UNIT INCH CONSTANTS E 29000. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL DEN 0.000283 ALL Material constants such as E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio and DENsity are specified above. Length unit is changed from FT to INCH to facilitate the input. CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 2 The number of mode shapes to be considered in dynamic analysis is set to 2. Without the above command, this will be set to the default which can be found in Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual. * LOAD 1 WILL BE STATIC LOAD UNIT FEET LOAD 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOADS Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title. Prior to this, the length unit is changed to FEET for specifying distributed member loads. A line starting with an asterisk (*) mark indicates a comment line. SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 The above command indicates that the selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction is part of this load case. The factor of 1.0 is meant to indicate that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of global Y, hence downwards. MEMBER LOADS 5 CON GY -5.0 6.0 5 CON GY -7.5 10.0 5 CON GY -5.0 14.0 5 6 UNI Y -1.5
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 79 of 493
Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction while Y indicates local Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load while CON stands for concentrated load. GY is followed by the value of the load and the distance at which it is applied. * NEXT LOAD WILL BE RESPONSE SPECTRUM LOAD * WITH MASSES PROVIDED IN TERMS OF LOAD. LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOADING The two lines which begin with the asterisk are comment lines which tell us the purpose of the next load case. Load case 2 is then initiated along with an optional title. This will be a dynamic load case. Permanent masses will be provided in the form of loads. These masses (in terms of loads) will be considered for the eigensolution. Internally, the program converts these loads to masses, hence it is best to specify them as absolute values (without a negative sign). Also, the direction (X, Y, Z etc.) of the loads will correspond to the dynamic degrees of freedom in which the masses are capable of vibrating. In a PLANE frame, only X and Y directions need to be considered. In a SPACE frame, masses (loads) should be provided in all three (X, Y and Z) directions if they are active along all three. The user has the freedom to restrict one or more directions. SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 The above commands indicate that the selfweight of the structure acting in the global X and Y directions with a factor of 1.0 are taken into consideration for the mass matrix. MEMBER LOADS 5 CON GX 5.0 6.0 5 CON GY 5.0 6.0 5 CON GX 7.5 10.0 5 CON GY 7.5 10.0 5 CON GX 5.0 14.0 5 CON GY 5.0 14.0 The mass matrix will also consist of terms derived from the above member loads. GX and GY indicate that the load, and hence the resulting mass, is capable of vibration along the global X and Y directions. The word CON stands for concentrated load. Concentrated forces of 5, 7.5, and 5 kips are located at 6ft, 10ft and 14ft from the start of member 5. SPECTRUM CQC X 1.0 ACC DAMP 0.05 SCALE 32.2 0.03 1.00 ; 0.05 1.35 0.1 1.95 ; 0.2 2.80 0.5 2.80 ; 1.0 1.60 The above SPECTRUM command specifies that the modal responses be combined using the CQC method (alternatives being the SRSS method, ABS method, etc.). The spectrum effect is in the global X direction with a factor of 1.0. Since this spectrum is in terms of ACCeleration (the other possibility being displacement), the spectrum data is given as period vs. acceleration. Damping ratio of 0.05 (5%) and a scale factor of 32.2 are used. The scale factor is the quantity by which spectral accelerations (and spectral displacements) must be multiplied by before they are used in the calculations. The values of periods and the corresponding accelerations are given in the last 3 lines. LOAD COMBINATION 3
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 80 of 493
1 0.75 2 0.75 LOAD COMBINATION 4 1 0.75 2 -0.75 In a response spectrum analysis, the sign of the forces cannot be determined, and hence are absolute numbers. Consequently, to account for the fact that the force could be positive or negative, it is necessary to create 2 load combination cases. That is what is being done above. Load combination case no. 3 consists of the sum of the static load case (1) with the positive direction of the dynamic load case (2). Load combination case no. 4 consists of the sum of the static load case (1) with the negative direction of the dynamic load case (2). In both cases, the result is factored by 0.75. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT MODE SHAPES This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The PRINT command will cause the program to print mode shapes. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS Displacements, reactions and member forces are recorded in the output file using the above command. LOAD LIST 1 3 4 PARAMETER CODE AISC SELECT ALL A steel design in the form of a member selection is performed. Only the member forces resulting from load cases 1, 3 and 4 will be considered for these calculations. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 81 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 82 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 83 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 84 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 85 of 493

This example demonstrates generation of load cases for the type of loading known as a moving load. This type of loading occurs classically when the load-causing units move on the structure, as in the case of trucks on a bridge deck. The mobile loads are discretized into several individual immobile load cases at discrete positions. During this process, enormous number of load cases may be created resulting in plenty of output to be sorted. To avoid looking into a lot of output, the maximum force envelope is requested for a few specific members.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 86 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD FLOOR A SIMPLE BRIDGE DECK Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word FLOOR signifies that the structure is a floor structure and the geometry is defined through X and Z axis. UNITS FEET KIPS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 6 25 0 0 R 5 0 0 30 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a floor structure, the Y coordinates are given as all zeros. The first line generates joints 1 through 6. A repeat command (R), repeats these 6 coordinates 5 times with X, Y and Z increments of 0, 0, 30 respectively. With the repeat (R) command, the coordinates of the next 30 joints are generated by repeating the pattern of the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 87 of 493
coordinates of the first 6 joints 5 times with X, Y and Z increments of 0,0 & 30 respectively. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 7 6 7 1 2 11 R A 4 11 6 56 31 32 60 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. The fourth number indicates the final member number upto which they will be generated. Repeat all (abbreviated as R A) will create members by repeating the member incidence pattern of the previous 11 members. The number of repetitions to be carried out is provided after the R A command and the member increment and joint increment are defined as 11 and 6 respectively. The fifth line of input defines the member incidences for members 56 to 60. MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 1 TO 60 TA ST W12X26 Member properties are assigned from the American AISC table for all members. The word ST stands for standard single section. SUPPORTS 1 TO 6 31 TO 36 PINNED Pinned supports are specified at the above joints. A pinned support is one which can resist only translational forces. UNITS INCH CONSTANTS E 29000. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL DEN 0.283E-3 ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio and DENsity are specified above following a change in the units of length from FT to INCH. UNIT FEET KIP DEFINE MOVING LOAD TYPE 1 LOAD 20. 20. 10. DISTANCE 10. 5. WIDTH 10.0 The characteristics of the vehicle are defined above in FEET and KIP units. The above lines represent the first out of two sets of data required in moving load generation. The type number (1) is a label for identification of the load-causing unit, such as a truck. 3 axles ( 20 20 10) are specified with the LOAD command. The spacing between the axles in the direction of movement (longitudinal direction) is specified after the DISTANCE command. WIDTH is the spacing in the transverse direction, that is, it is the distance between the 2 prongs of an axle of the truck. LOAD 1 Load case 1 is initiated. SELF Y -1.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 88 of 493
Selfweight of the structure acting in the negative (due to the factor -1.0) global Y direction is the only component of load case 1. LOAD GENERATION 10 TYPE 1 7.5 0. 0. ZI 10. This constitutes the second of the two sets of data required for moving load generation. 10 load cases are generated using the Type 1 vehicle whose characteristics were described earlier. For the first of these load cases, the X, Y and Z location of the reference load (see section 5.31.1 of the Technical Reference Manual) have been specified after the command TYPE 1. The Z Increment of 10ft denotes that the vehicle moves along the Z direction and the individual positions which are 10ft apart will be used to generate the remaining 9 load cases. The basis for determining the number of load cases to generate is as follows: As seen in Section 5.31.1 of the Technical Reference manual, the reference wheel is on the last axle. The first load case which is generated will be the one for which the first axle is just about to enter the bridge. The last load case should be the one for which the last axle is just about to exit the bridge. Thus, the total distance travelled by the reference load will be the length of the vehicle (distance from first axle to last axle) plus the span of the bridge. In this problem, that comes to (10+5) + 150 = 165 feet. If we want the vehicle to move forward in 15 feet increments (each 15 foot increment will create a discrete position of the truck on the bridge), it would required 165/15+1 = 12 cases to be generated. As this example is for demonstration purposes only, 10 ft increments have been used, and 10 cases generated. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis and print the values and positions of all the generated load cases. PRINT MAXFORCE ENVELOP LIST 3 41 42 A maximum force envelope consisting of the highest forces for each degree of freedom on the listed members will be written into the output file. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 89 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 90 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 91 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 92 of 493

Calculation of displacements at intermediate points of members of a plane frame is demonstrated in this
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 93 of 493
example.
The dashed line represents the deflected shape of the structure. The shape is generated on the basis of displacements at the ends plus eleven intermediate points of the members. Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE TEST FOR SECTION DISPLACEMENT Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axis. UNIT KIP FEET Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 15. ; 3 20. 15. ; 4 20. 0. Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators which allows us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2 ; 2 2 3 ; 3 3 4 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 94 of 493
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 3 TABLE ST W8X18 2 TABLE ST W12X26 Properties for all members are assigned from the American AISC steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. UNIT INCHES CONSTANTS E 29000.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL In the above lines, material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are provided after the length unit is changed from FT to INCH. SUPPORT 1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED Joint 1 is restrained for all six degrees of freedom. At joint 4, all three translations are restrained. UNIT FT LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE + WIND Load case 1 is initiated along with an accompanying title. JOINT LOAD 2 FX 5. Load 1 contains a joint load of 5 kips at node 2. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -3.0 Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT MEMBER FORCES The above PRINT command is self-explanatory. * * FOLLOWING PRINT COMMAND WILL PRINT * DISPLACEMENTS OF THE MEMBERS * CONSIDERING EVERY TWELVETH INTERMEDIATE * POINTS (THAT IS TOTAL 13 POINTS). THESE * DISPLACEMENTS ARE MEASURED IN GLOBAL X
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 95 of 493
* Y Z COORDINATE SYSTEM AND THE VALUES * ARE FROM ORIGINAL COORDINATES (THAT IS * UNDEFLECTED) OF CORRESPONDING TWELVETH * POINTS. * * MAX LOCAL DISPLACEMENT IS ALSO PRINTED. * THE LOCATION OF MAXIMUM INTERMEDIATE * DISPLACEMENT IS DETERMINED. THIS VALUE IS * MEASURED FROM ABOVE LOCATION TO THE * STRAIGHT LINE JOINING START AND END * JOINTS OF THE DEFLECTED MEMBER. * PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENT The above PRINT command is explained in the comment lines above. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 96 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 97 of 493

A space frame is analyzed for seismic loads. The seismic loads are generated using the procedures of the 1994 UBC Code. A P-Delta analysis is peformed to obtain the secondary effects of the lateral and vertical loads acting simultaneously.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 98 of 493
STAAD SPACE EXAMPLE PROBLEM FOR UBC LOAD Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame. UNIT FEET KIP Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 4 30 0 0 REPEAT 3 0 0 10 REPEAT ALL 3 0 10 0 The X, Y and Z coordinates of the joints are specified here. First, coordinates of joints 1 through 4 are generated by taking advantage of the fact that they are equally spaced. Then, this pattern is REPEATed 3 times with a Z increment of 10 feet for each repetition to generate joints 5 to 16. The REPEAT ALL command will then repeat 3 times, the pattern of joints 1 to 16 to generate joints 17 to 64. MEMBER INCIDENCES * beams in x direction 101 17 18 103 104 21 22 106 107 25 26 109 110 29 30 112 REPEAT ALL 2 12 16
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 99 of 493
* beams in z direction 201 17 21 204 205 21 25 208 209 25 29 212 REPEAT ALL 2 12 16 * columns 301 1 17 348 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. Following the specification of incidences for members 101 to 112, the REPEAT ALL command command is used to repeat the pattern and generate incidences for members 113 through 136. A similar logic is used in specification of incidences of members 201 through 212 and generation of incidences for members 213 to 236. Finally, members incidences of columns 301 to 348 are specified. UNIT INCH MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 PRIS YD 15 ZD 15 301 TO 348 TA ST W18X35 The beam members have prismatic member property specification (YD & ZD) while the columns (members 301 to 348) have their properties called from the built-in American (AISC) steel table. CONSTANT E STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 E CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 DENSITY STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 DENSITY CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 POISSON STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 In the specification of material constants, the default built-in values are used. The user may see these values with the help of the command PRINT MATERIAL PROPERTIES following the above commands. SUPPORT 1 TO 16 FIXED Indicates the joints where the supports are located as well as the type of support restraints. UNIT FEET DEFINE UBC LOAD ZONE 0.2 I 1.0 RWX 9 RWZ 9 S 1.5 CT 0.032 SELFWEIGHT JOINT WEIGHT 17 TO 48 WEIGHT 2.5 49 TO 64 WEIGHT 1.25 There are two stages in the command specification of the UBC loads. The first stage is initiated with the command DEFINE UBC LOAD. Here we specify parameters such as Zone factor, Importance factor, site coefficient for soil characteristics etc. and, the vertical loads (weights)
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 100 of 493
from which the base shear will be calculated. The vertical loads may be specified in the form of selfweight, joint weights and/or member weights. Member weights are not shown in this example. It is important to note that these vertical loads are used purely in the determination of the horizontal base shear only. In other words, the structure is not analysed for these vertical loads. LOAD 1 UBC LOAD X 0.75 SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOADS 17 TO 48 FY -2.5 49 TO 64 FY -1.25 This is the second stage in which the UBC load is applied with the help of load case number, corresponding direction (X in the above case) and a factor by which the generated horizontal loads should be multiplied. Along with the UBC load, deadweight and other vertical loads are also added to the same load case. Since we will be doing second-order (PDELTA) analysis, it is important that we add horizontal and vertical loads in the same load case. LOAD 2 UBC LOAD Z 0.75 SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOADS 17 TO 48 FY -2.5 49 TO 64 FY -1.25 In load case 2, the UBC load is being applied in the Z direction. Vertical loads too are part of this case. PDELTA ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA We are requesting a second-order analysis by specifying the command PDELTA ANALYSIS. PRINT LOAD DATA is used to obtain a report in the output file of all the applied and generated loadings. PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS FINISH The above commands are self-explanatory.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 101 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 102 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 103 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 104 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 105 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 106 of 493

A space frame is analyzed for loads generated using the built-in wind and floor load generation facilities.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 107 of 493
STAAD SPACE - WIND AND FLOOR LOAD GENERATION This is a SPACE frame analysis problem. Every STAAD input has to start with the command STAAD. The SPACE specification is used to denote a SPACE frame. UNIT FEET KIP The UNIT specification is used to specify the length and/or force units to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1000 2 10 0 0 3 21 0 0 4 0 0 10 5 10 0 10 6 0 0 20 7 10 0 20 8 21 0 20 REPEAT ALL 2 0 12 0 The JOINT COORDINATE specification is used to specify the X, Y and Z coordinates of the JOINTs. Note that the REPEAT ALL command has been used to generate JOINTs for two higher levels each with a Y increment of 12 ft. MEMBER INCIDENCES * Columns 1 1 9 16
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 108 of 493
* Beams in the X direction 17 9 10 18 19 12 13 20 14 15 21 22 17 18 23 24 20 21 25 22 23 26 * Beams in the Z direction 27 9 12 ; 28 12 14 ; 29 10 13 ; 30 13 15 ; 31 11 16 32 17 20 ; 33 20 22 ; 34 18 21 ; 35 21 23 ; 36 19 24 The MEMBER INCIDENCE specification is used for specifying MEMBER connectivities. UNIT INCH MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 1 TO 16 TA ST W21X50 17 TO 26 TA ST W18X35 27 TO 36 TA ST W14X90 Properties for all members are specified from the built-in American (AISC) steel table. Three different sections have been used. CONSTANT E STEEL ALL DENSITY STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL The CONSTANT specification is used to specify material properties. In this case, the default values have been used. SUPPORT 1 TO 8 FIXED BUT MX MZ The SUPPORTs of the structure are defined through the SUPPORT specification. Here all the supports are FIXED with RELEASES specified in the MX (rotation about global X-axis) and MZ (rotation about global Z-axis) directions. UNIT FEET DEFINE WIND LOAD TYPE 1 INTENSITY 0.1 0.15 HEIGHT 12 24 EXPOSURE 0.90 YRANGE 11 13 EXPOSURE 0.85 JOINT 17 20 22 When a structure has to be analysed for wind loading, the engineer is confronted with the task of first converting an abstract quantity like wind velocity or wind pressure into concentrated loads at joints, distributed loads on members, or pressure loads on plates. The large number of calculations involved in this conversion can be avoided by making use of STAADs wind load generation utility. This utility takes wind pressure at various heights as the input, and converts them to values that can then be used as concentrated forces known as joint loads in specific load cases. The input specification is done in two stages. The first stage is initiated above through the DEFINE WIND LOAD command. The basic
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 109 of 493
parameters of the WIND loading are specified here. All values need to be provided in the current UNIT system. Each wind category is identified with a TYPE number (an identification mark) which is used later to specify load cases. In this example, two different wind intensities (0.1 Kips/sq. ft and 0.15 Kips/sq. ft) are specified for two different height zones (0 to 12 ft. and 12 to 24 ft.). The EXPOSURE specification is used to mitigate or magnify the effect at specific nodes due to special considerations like openings in the structure. In this case, two different exposure factors are specified. The first EXPOSURE specification specifies the exposure factor as 0.9 for all joints within the height range (defined as global Y-range) of 11 ft. - 13 ft. The second EXPOSURE specification specifies the exposure factor as 0.85 for joints 17, 20 and 22. In the EXPOSURE factor specification, the joints may be specified directly or through a vertical range specification. LOAD 1 WIND LOAD IN X-DIRECTION WIND LOAD X 1.2 TYPE 1 This is the second stage of input specification for the wind load generation. The term WIND LOAD and the direction term that follows are used to specify the WIND LOADING in a particular lateral direction. In this case, WIND loading TYPE 1, defined previously, is being applied in the global X-direction with a positive multiplication factor of 1.2 . LOAD 2 FLOOR LOAD @ Y = 12 FT AND 24 FT FLOOR LOAD YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD -0.45 XRANGE 0.0 10.0 ZRANGE 0.0 20.0 YRANGE 11.9 12.1 FLOAD -0.25 XRANGE 10.0 21.0 ZRANGE 0.0 20.0 YRANGE 23.9 24.1 FLOAD -0.25 In load case 2 in this problem, a floor load generation is performed. In a floor load generation, a pressure load (force per unit area) is converted by the program into specific points forces and distributed forces on the members located in that region. The YRANGE, XRANGE and ZRANGE specifications are used to define the area of the structure on which the pressure is acting. The FLOAD specification is used to specify the value of that pressure. All values need to be provided in the current UNIT system. For example, in the first line in the above FLOOR LOAD specification, the region is defined as being located within the bounds YRANGE of 11.9-12.1 ft, XRANGE of 0.0-10.0 ft and ZRANGE of 0.0-20.0 ft. The -0.45 signifies that the pressure is 0.45 Kip/sq. ft in the negative global Y direction. The program will identify the members lying within the specified region and derive MEMBER LOADS on these members based on two-way load distribution. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA We can view the values and position of the generated loads with the help of the PRINT LOAD DATA command used above along with the PERFORM ANALYSIS command. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION FINISH Above commands are self-explanatory.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 110 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 111 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 112 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 113 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 114 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 115 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 116 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 117 of 493

Dynamic Analysis (Time History) is performed for a 3 span beam with concentrated and distributed masses. The structure is subjected to "forcing function" and "ground motion" loading. The maxima of the joint displacements, member end forces and support reactions are determined.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 118 of 493
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS Every input file has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame. UNITS FEET KIP Specifies the units to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 2 0.0 3.5 0.0 3 0.0 7.0 0.0 4 0.0 10.5 0.0 Joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1123 Incidences of members 1 to 3 are specified above. UNIT INCH MEMBER PROPERTIES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 119 of 493
1 2 3 PRIS AX 3.0 IZ 240.0 The PRISMATIC attribute is used for assigning properties for all the members. Since this is a PLANE frame, Area of cross section "AX", and Moment of Inertia "IZ" about the Z axis are adequate for the analysis. SUPPORTS 1 4 PINNED Pinned supports are located at nodes 1 and 4. CONSTANTS E 14000 ALL DENSITY 0.0868E-3 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The material constants defined include Young's Modulus "E", density and Poissons ratio. DEFINE TIME HISTORY TYPE 1 FORCE 0.0 -0.0001 0.5 0.0449 1.0 0.2244 1.5 0.2244 2.0 0.6731 2.5 -0.6731 TYPE 2 ACCELERATION 0.0 0.001 0.5 -7.721 1.0 -38.61 1.5 -38.61 2.0 -115.82 2.5 115.82 ARRIVAL TIMES 0.0 DAMPING 0.075 There are 2 stages in the command specification required for a time history analysis. The first stage is defined above. First, the characteristics of the time varying load are provided. The loading type may be a forcing function (vibrating machinery) or ground motion (earthquake). The former is input in the form of time-force pairs while the latter is in the form of timeacceleration pairs. Following this data, all possible arrival times for these loads on the structure as well as the modal damping ratio are specified. In this example, the damping ratio is the same (7.5%) for all modes. UNIT FEET LOAD 1 STATIC LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 2 3 UNI GX 0.5 Load case 1 above is a static load case. A uniformly distributed force of 0.5 kip/ft acts along the global X direction on all 3 members. LOAD 2 TIME HISTORY LOAD SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 JOINT LOAD 2 3 FX 2.5 TIME LOAD 2 3 FX 1 1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 120 of 493
GROUND MOTION X 2 1 This is the second stage in the command specification for time history analysis. This involves the application of the time varying load on the structure. The masses that constitute the mass matrix of the structure are specified through the selfweight and joint load commands. The program will extract the lumped masses from these weights. Following that, both the "TIME LOAD" and "GROUND MOTION" are applied simultaneously. The user must note that this example is only for illustration purposes and that it may be unlikely that a "TIME FUNCTION" and a "GROUND MOTION" both act on the structure at the same time. The Time load command is used to apply the Type 1 force, acting in the global X direction, at arrival time number 1, at nodes 2 and 3. The Ground motion, namely, the Type 2 time history loading, is also in the global X direction at arrival time 1. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command initiates the analysis process. UNIT INCH PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS During the analysis, the program calculates joint displacements for every time step. The absolute maximum value of the displacement for every joint is then extracted from this joint displacement history. So, the value printed using the above command is the absolute maximum value for each of the six degrees of freedom at each node. UNIT FEET PRINT MEMBER FORCES PRINT SUPPORT REACTION The member forces and support reactions too are calculated for every time step. For each degree of freedom, the maximum value of the member force and support reaction is extracted from these histories and reported in the output file using the above command. FINISH
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 121 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 122 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 123 of 493

The usage of User Provided Steel Tables is illustrated in this example for the analysis and design of a plane frame. User provided tables allow one to specify property data for sections not found in the built-in steel section tables.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 124 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR USER TABLE Every input file has to start with the command STAAD. The PLANE command is used to designate the structure as a plane frame. UNIT FT KIP The UNIT command sets the length and force units to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 30 0 ; 3 0 20 0 6 30 20 0 7 0 35 ; 8 30 35 ; 9 7.5 35 ; 10 22.5 35. 11 15 35 ; 12 5. 38. ; 13 25 38 ; 14 10 41 ; 15 20 41 16 15 44 The above set of data is used to provide joint coordinates for the various joints of the structure. The cartesian system is being used here. The data consists of the joint number followed by global X and Y coordinates. Note that for a space frame, the Z coordinate(s) need to be provided also. In the above input, semicolon (;) signs are used as line separators. This allows the user to provide multiple sets of data on one line.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 125 of 493
MEMBER INCIDENCES 113;237;326;468;534 6 4 5 ; 7 5 6 ; 8 7 12 ; 9 12 14 10 14 16 ; 11 15 16 ; 12 13 15 ; 13 8 13 14 9 12 ; 15 9 14 ; 16 11 14 ; 17 11 15 18 10 15 ; 19 10 13 ; 20 7 9 21 9 11 ; 22 10 11 ; 23 8 10 The above data set contains the member incidence information or the joint connectivity data for each member. This completes the geometry of the structure. UNIT INCH START USER TABLE This command is utilized to set up a User Provided steel table. All user provided steel tables must start with this command. TABLE 1 Each table needs a unique numerical identification. The above command starts setting up Table no. 1. Upto twenty tables may be specified per run. WIDE FLANGE This command is used to specify the section-type as WIDE FLANGE in this table. Note that several section-types (WIDE FLANGE, CHANNEL, ANGLE, TEE etc.) are available for specification (See section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual). WFL14X30 8.85 13.84 .27 6.73 .385 291. 19.6 .38 4.0 4.1 WFL21X62 18.3 20.99 .4 8.24 .615 1330 57.5 1.83 0.84 7.0 WFL14X109 32. 14.32 .525 14.605 .86 1240 447 7.12 7.52 16. The above data set is used to specify the properties of three wide flange sections. The data for each section consists of two parts. In the first line, the section-name is provided. The user is allowed to provide any section name within twelve characters. The second line contains the section properties required for the particular section-type. Each section-type requires a certain number of data (area of cross-section, depth, moment of inertias etc.) provided in a certain order. For example, in this case, for wide flanges, ten different properties are required. For detailed information on the various properties required for the different section-types and their order of specification, refer to Section 5.19 in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Without exception, all required properties for the particular section-type must be provided. TABLE 2 ANGLES LANG25255 2.5 2.5 .3125 .489 0 0 LANG40404
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 126 of 493
4 4 .25 .795 0 0 The above command and data lines set up another user provided table consisting of angle sections. END This command signifies the end of the user provided table data set. All user provided table related input must be terminated with this command. MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 3 4 UPT 1 WFL14X109 2 UPT 1 WFL14X30 ; 5 6 7 UPT 1 WFL21X62 8 TO 13 UPT 1 WFL14X30 14 TO 23 UPT 2 LANG40404 In the above command lines, the member properties are being assigned from the user provided tables created earlier. The word UPT signifies that the properties are from the user provided table. This is followed by the table number and then the section name as specified in the user provided table. The numbers 1 or 2 following the word UPT indicate the table from which section names are fetched. MEMBER TRUSS 14 TO 23 The above command is used to designate members 14 to 23 as truss members. MEMBER RELEASE 5 START MZ The MEMBER RELEASE command is used to release the MZ moment at the start joint of member no. 5. UNIT INCH This command resets the current length unit to inches. CONSTANTS E 29000. ALL DEN 0.000283 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 90.0 MEMB 3 4 The above command set is used to specify modulus of elasticity, density, Poissons ratio and beta angle values. UNIT FT The length unit is reset to feet using this command. SUPPORT
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 127 of 493
1 FIXED ; 2 PINNED The above command set is used to designate supports. Here, joint 1 is designated as a fixed support and joint 2 is designated as a pinned support. LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 4 5 FY -15. ; 11 FY -35. MEMB LOAD 8 TO 13 UNI Y -0.9 ; 6 UNI GY -1.2 The above command set is used to specify the loadings on the structure. In this case, dead and live loads are provided through load case 1. It consists of selfweight, concentrated loads at joints 4, 5 and 11, and distributed loads on members 6, and 8 to 13. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to execute the analysis at this point. PARAMETER CODE AISC BEAM 1.0 ALL NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 The above commands are used to specify parameters for steel design. SELECT MEMBER 3 6 9 19 This command will perform selection of members per the AISC ASD steel design code. For each member, the member selection will be performed from the table that was originally used for the specification of the member property. In this case, the selection will be from the respective user tables from which the properties were initially assigned. It may be noted that properties may be provided (and selection may be performed) from built-in steel tables and user provided tables in the same problem. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 128 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 129 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 130 of 493

This is an example which demonstrates the calculation of principal stresses on a finite element.
Fixed Supports at Joints 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 13 Load intensity = 1 pound/in 2 in negative global Y direction Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE SAMPLE CALCULATION FOR * ELEMENT STRESSES Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame (3-D structure). UNIT KIP FEET
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 131 of 493
Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 10004300 REPEAT 3 0 0 1 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. The REPEAT command is used to generate coordinates of joints 5 to 16 based on the pattern of joints 1 to 4. ELEMENT INCIDENCE 1 1 5 6 2 TO 3 REPEAT 2 3 4 Element connectivities of elements 1 to 3 are defined first, based on which, the connectivities of elements 4 to 9 are generated. UNIT INCH ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 9 THICK 1.0 Elements 1 to 9 have a thickness of 1 inch. CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL Modulus of Elasticity and Poissons ratio of all the elements is that of the built-in default value for concrete. SUPPORT 1 TO 4 5 9 13 FIXED "Fixed support" conditions exist at the above mentioned joints. UNIT POUND LOAD 1 ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 9 PRESSURE -1.0 A uniform pressure of 1 pound/sq. in is applied on all the elements. In the absence of an explicit direction specification, the load is assumed to act along the local Z axis. The negative value indicates that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of the local Z. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION The above command is self-explanatory.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 132 of 493
PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 4 Element stresses at the centroid of the element are printed using the above command. The output includes membrane stresses, shear stresses, bending moments per unit width and principal stresses. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 133 of 493
Calculation of principal stresses for element 4 Calculations are presented for the top surface only.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 134 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 135 of 493

This example demonstrates the usage of inclined supports. The word INCLINED refers to the fact that the restraints at a joint where such a support is specified are along a user-specified axis system instead of along the default directions of the global axis system. STAAD offers a few different methods for assigning inclined supports, and we examine those in this example.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 136 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation.

STAAD SPACE INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN

JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 5 0; 2 10 5 10; 3 20 5 20; 4 30 5 30; 5 5 0 5; 6 25 0 25;
MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 5 2; 5 6 3;

UNIT MMS KN MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 4 5 PRIS YD 800 1 TO 3 PRIS YD 750 ZD 500
Properties for all members of the model are provided using the PRISMATIC option. YD and ZD stand for depth and width. If ZD is not provided, a circular shape with diameter = YD is assumed for that cross section. All properties required for the analysis, such as, Area, Moments of Inertia, etc. are calculated automatically from these dimensions unless these are explicitly defined. The values are provided in MMS unit.
CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL DENSITY CONCRETE ALL
Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are specified following the command
CONSTANTS. UNIT METER KN SUPPORTS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 137 of 493
5 INCLINED REF 10 5 10 FIXED BUT MX MY MZ KFX 30000 6 INCLINED REFJT 3 FIXED BUT MX MY MZ KFX 30000 1 PINNED 4 INCLINED 1 0 1 FIXED BUT FX MX MY MZ
We assign supports (restraints) at 4 nodes - 5, 6, 1 and 4. For 3 of those, namely, 5, 6 and 4, the node number is followed by the keyword INCLINED, signifying that an INCLINED support is defined there. For the remaining one - node 1 - that keyword is missing. Hence, the support at node 1 is a global direction support. The most important aspect of inclined supports is their axis system. Each node where an inclined support is defined has its own distinct local X, local Y and local Z axes. In order to define the axis system, we first have to define a datum point. The support node and the datum point together help define the axis system. 3 different methods are shown in the above 3 instances for defining the datum point. At node 5, notice the keyword REF followed by the numbers (10,5,10). This means that the datum point associated with node 5 is one which has the global coordinates of (10m, 5m, 10m). Coincidentally, this happens to be node 2. At node 6, the keyword REFJT is used followed by the number 3. This means that the datum point for support node 6 is the joint number 3 of the model. The coordinates of the datum point are hence those of node 3, namely, (20m, 5m and 20m). At node 4, the word INCLINED is merely followed by 3 numbers (1,0,1). In the absence of the words REF and REFJT, the program sets the datum point to be the following. It takes the coordinates of node 4, which are (30m,5m,30m) and adds to them, the 3 numbers which comes after the word INCLINED. Thus, the datum point becomes (31m, 5m and 31m). Once the datum point is established, the local axis system is defined as follows. Local X is a straight line (vector) pointing from the support node towards the datum point. Local Z is the vector obtained by the cross product of local X and the global Y axis (unless the SET Z UP command is used in which case one would use global Z instead of global Y and that would yield local Y). Local Y is the vector resulting from the cross product of local Z and local X. The right hand rule must be used when performing these cross products. Notice the unique nature of these datum points. The one for node 5 tells us that a line connecting nodes 5 to 2 is the local X axis, and is hence along the axis of member 4. By defining a KFX spring at that one, we are saying that the lower end of member 4 can move along its axis like the piston of a car engine. Think of a pile bored into rock with a certain amount of freedom to expand and contract axially. The same is true for the support at the bottom of member 5. The local X axis of that support is along the axis of member 5. That also happens to be the case for the supported end of member 3. The line going from node 4 to the datum point (31,5,31) happens to be coincident with the axis of the member, or the traffic direction. The expression FIXED BUT FX MX MY MZ for that support indicates that it is free to translate along local X, suggesting that it is an expansion joint - free to expand or contract along the axis of member 3. Since MX, MY and MZ are all released at these supports, no moment will be resisted by these supports.
LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 138 of 493
SELFWEIGHT Y -1.2 LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 TO 3 UNI GY -6 LOAD COMB 3 1 1.0 2 1.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
3 load cases followed by the instruction for the type of analysis are specified. The PRINT STATICS CHECK option will instruct the program to produce a report consisting of total applied load versus total reactions from the supports for each primary load case.
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
By default, support reactions are printed in the global axis directions. The above command is an instruction for such a report.
SET INCLINED REACTION PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
Just earlier, we saw how to obtain support reactions in the global axis system. What if we need them in the inclined axis system? The SET INCLINED REACTION is a switch for that purpose. It tells the program that reactions should be reported in the inclined axis system instead of the global axis system. This has to be followed by the PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS command.
PRINT MEMBER FORCES PRINT JOINT DISP FINISH
Member forces are reported in the local axis system of the members. Joint displacements at all joints are reported in the global axis system. Following this, the STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 139 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 140 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 141 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 142 of 493

This example generates the geometry of a cylindrical tank structure using the cylindrical coordinate system. The tank lies on its side in this example.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 143 of 493
In this example, a cylindrical tank is modeled using finite elements. The radial direction is in the XY plane and longitudinal direction is along the Z-axis. Hence, the coordinates in the XY plane are generated using the cylindrical coordinate system. STAAD SPACE UNIT KIP FEET The type of structure (SPACE frame) and length and force units for data to follow are specified. JOINT COORD CYLINDRICAL The above command instructs the program that the coordinate data that follows is in the cylindrical coordinate system (r,theta,z). 1 10 0 0 8 10 315 0 Joint 1 has an 'r' of 10 feet, theta of 0 degrees and Z of 0 ft. Joint 8 has an 'r' of 10 feet, theta of 315 degrees and Z of 0 ft. The 315 degrees angle is measured counter-clockwise from the +ve direction of the X-axis. Joints 2 to 7 are generated by equal incrementation the coordinate values between joints 1 and 8. REPEAT 2 0 0 8.5 The REPEAT command is used to generate joints 9 through 24 by repeating twice, the pattern of joints 1 to 8 at Z-increments of 8.5 feet for each REPEAT.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 144 of 493
PRINT JOINT COORD The above command is used to produce a report consisting of the coordinates of all the joints in the cartesian coordinate system. Note that even though the input data was in the cylindrical coordinate system, the output is in the cartesian coordinate system. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 2 10 9 TO 7 1 1 8 8 1 9 16 REPEAT ALL 1 8 8 The above 4 lines identify the element incidences of all 16 elements. Incidences of element 1 is defined as 1 2 10 9. Incidences of element 2 is generated by incrementing the joint numbers of element 1 by 1, incidences of element 3 is generated by incrementing the incidences of element 2 by 1 and so on upto element 7. Incidences of element 8 has been defined above as 8 1 9 16. The REPEAT ALL command states that the pattern of ALL the elements defined by the previous 2 lines, namely elements 1 to 8, must be REPEATED once with an element number increment of 8 and a joint number increment of 8 to generate elements 9 through 16. PRINT ELEMENT INFO The above command is self-explanatory. FINISH
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 145 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 146 of 493

This example illustrates the modeling of tension-only members using the MEMBER TENSION command.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 147 of 493
This example has been created to illustrate the command specification for a structure with certain members capable of carrying tensile force only. It is important to note that the analysis can be done for only 1 load case at a time. This is because, the set of active members (and hence the stiffness matrix) is load case dependent. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR TENSION-ONLY MEMBERS The input data is initiated with the word STAAD. This structure is a PLANE frame. UNIT FEET KIP Units for the commands to follow are defined above. SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the members which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command).
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 148 of 493
JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 0 10 ; 3 0 20 ; 4 15 20 ; 5 15 10 ; 6 15 0 Joint coordintes of joints 1 to 6 are defined above. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1125 6 1 5;7 2 6;8 2 4;9 3 5;10 2 5 Incidences of members 1 to 10 are defined. MEMBER TENSION 6 TO 9 Members 6 to 9 are defined as TENSION-only members. Hence for each load case, if during the analysis, any of the members 6 to 9 is found to be carrying a compressive force, it is disabled from the structure and the analysis is carried out again with the modified structure. MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TO 10 TA ST W12X26 All members have been assigned a WIDE FLANGE section from the built in American table. UNIT INCH CONSTANTS E 29000.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Following the command CONSTANTS, material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity) and Poissons ratio are specified. The length units have been changed from feet to inch to facilitate the input of these values. We do not require DENSITY since selfweight is not one of the load cases considered. SUPPORT 1 PINNED 6 PINNED The supports are defined above. LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 15 3 FX 10 Load 1 is defined above and consists of joint loads at joints 2 and 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS An analysis is carried out for load case 1.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 149 of 493
CHANGE MEMBER TENSION 6 TO 9 One or more among the members 6 to 9 may have been inactivated in the previous analysis. The CHANGE command restores the original structure to prepare it for the analysis for the next primary load case. The members with the tension-only attribute are specified again. LOAD 2 JOINT LOAD 4 FX -10 5 FX -15 Load case 2 is described above. PERFORM ANALYSIS CHANGE The instruction to analyze the structure is specified again. Next, any tension-only members that become inactivated during the second analysis (due to the fact that they were subjected to compressive axial forces) are re-activated with the CHANGE command. Without re-activation, these members cannot be accessed for any further operations. MEMBER TENSION 6 TO 9 LOAD 3 REPEAT LOAD 1 1.0 2 1.0 Load case 3 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases already specified earlier. We would like the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting simultaneously. In other words, the above instruction is the same as the following: LOAD 3 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 15 3 FX 10 4 FX -10 5 FX -15 PERFORM ANALYSIS The analysis is carried out for load case 3. CHANGE LOAD LIST ALL The members inactivated during the analysis of load 3 are re-activated for further processing. At the end of any analysis, only those load cases for which the analysis was done most recently, are recognized as the "active" load cases. The LOAD LIST command enables the above listed
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 150 of 493
load cases to be made active for further processing. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS FINI The analysis results are printed and the run terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 151 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 152 of 493

A space frame structure is subjected to a sinusoidal (dynamic) loading. The commands necessary to describe the sine function are demonstrated in this example. Time History analysis is performed on this model.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 153 of 493
STAAD SPACE *EXAMPLE FOR HARMONIC LOADING GENERATOR Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The comment line which begins with an asterisk is an optional title to identify this project. UNIT KIP FEET The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 15 0 0 ; 3 15 0 15 ; 4 0 0 15 5 0 20 0 ; 6 7.5 20 0 ; 7 15 20 0 ; 8 15 20 7.5 9 15 20 15 ; 10 7.5 20 15 ; 11 0 20 15 12 0 20 7.5 The joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. Semicolon
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 154 of 493
characters (;) are used as line separators to facilitate input of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 5 ; 2 2 7 ; 3 3 9 ; 4 4 11 ; 5 5 6 ; 6 6 7 7 7 8 ; 8 8 9 ; 9 9 10 ; 10 10 11 ; 11 11 12 ; 12 12 5 The members are defined by the joints they are connected to. UNIT INCH MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 TO 12 PRIS YD 12 ZD 12 Members 1 to 12 are defined as PRISmatic sections with width and depth values of 12 inches. The UNIT command is specified to change the units for input from FEET to INCHes. SUPPORTS 1 TO 4 PINNED Joints 1 to 4 are declared to be pinned-supported. CONSTANTS E 3150 ALL DENSITY 0.0868E-3 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The modulus of elasticity (E), density and Poissons ratio are specified following the command CONSTANTS. Built-in default value for concrete is used for the Poissons Ratio. DEFINE TIME HISTORY TYPE 1 FORCE * FOLLOWING LINES FOR HARMONIC LOADING GENERATOR FUNCTION SINE AMPLITUDE 6.2831 FREQUENCY 60 CYCLES 100 * ARRIVAL TIMES 0.0 DAMPING 0.075 There are two stages in the command specification required for a time-history analysis. The first stage is defined above. Here, the parameters of the sinusoidal loading are provided. Each data set is individually identified by the number that follows the TYPE command. In this file, only one data set is defined, which is apparent from the fact that only one TYPE is defined. The word FORCE that follows the TYPE 1 command signifies that this data set is for a forcing function. (If one wishes to specify an earthquake motion, an ACCELERATION may be specified.) The command FUNCTION SINE indicates that instead of providing the data set as discrete TIME-FORCE pairs, a sinusoidal function, which describes the variation of force with time, is provided.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 155 of 493
The parameters of the sine function, such as FREQUENCY, AMPLITUDE, and number of CYCLES of application are then defined. STAAD internally generates discrete TIME-FORCE pairs of data from the sine function in steps of time defined by the default value (See section 5.31.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for more information). The arrival time value indicates the relative value of time at which the force begins to act upon the structure. The modal damping ratio for all the modes is set to 0.075. LOAD 1 STATIC LOAD CASE MEMBER LOAD 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 UNI GY -1.0 The above data describe a static load case. A uniformly distributed load of 1.0 kip/ft acting in the negative global Y direction is applied on some members. LOAD 2 DYNAMIC LOAD CASE SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 JOINT LOAD 8 12 FX 4.0 8 12 FY 4.0 8 12 FZ 4.0 TIME LOAD 8 12 FX 1 1 This is the second stage of command specification for time history analysis. The 2 sets of data specified here are a) the weights for generation of the mass matrix and b) the application of the time varying loads on the structure. The weights (from which the masses for the mass matrix are obtained) are specified in the form of selfweight and joint loads. Following that, the sinusoidal force is applied using the "TIME LOAD" command. The forcing function described by the TYPE 1 load is applied on joints 8 and 12 and it starts to act starting at a time defined by the 1st arrival time number. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS FINI The above commands are self explanatory. The FINISH command terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 156 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 157 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 158 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 159 of 493

This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to utilize the built-in generation facility to generate spring supports for a slab on grade. The slab is subjected to various types of loading and analysis of the structure is performed. The numbers shown in the diagram below are the element numbers.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 160 of 493
STAAD SPACE SLAB ON GRADE Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The remainder of the words form a title to identify this project. UNIT FEET KIP The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 40.0 2 0.0 0.0 36.0 3 0.0 0.0 28.167 4 0.0 0.0 20.333 5 0.0 0.0 12.5 6 0.0 0.0 6.5 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT ALL 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 5 6.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 For joints 1 through 7, the joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. The coordinates of these joints is used as a basis for generating 21 more joints by incrementing the X coordinate of each of these 7 joints by 8.5 feet, 3 times. REPEAT commands are used to generate the remaining joints of the structure. The results of the generation may be visually verified using the STAAD graphical viewing facilities. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 8 9 2 TO 6 REPEAT 16 6 7 The incidences of element number 1 is defined and that data is used as a basis for generating the 2nd through the 6th element. The incidence pattern of the first 6 elements is then used to generate the incidences of 96 (= 16 x 6) more elements using the REPEAT command. UNIT INCH ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 102 TH 5.5 The thickness of elements 1 to 102 is specified as 5.5 inches following the command ELEMENT PROPERTIES.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 161 of 493
UNIT FEET CONSTANTS E 420000. ALL POISSON 0.12 ALL The modulus of elasticity (E) and Poissons Ratio are specified following the command CONSTANTS. SUPPORTS 1 TO 126 ELASTIC MAT DIRECTION Y SUB 10.0 The above command is used to instruct STAAD to generate supports with springs which are effective in the global Y direction. These springs are located at nodes 1 to 126. The subgrade modulus of the soil is specified as 10 kip/cu.ft. The program will determine the area under the influence of each joint and multiply the influence area by the subgrade modulus to arrive at the spring stiffness for the "FY" degree of freedom at the joint. Additional information on this feature may be found in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. PRINT SUPP INFO This command will enable us to obtain the details of the support springs which were generated using the earlier commands. LOAD 1 WEIGHT OF MAT & EARTH ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 102 PR GY -1.55 The above data describe a static load case. A pressure load of 1.55 kip/sq.ft acting in the negative global Y direction is applied on all the 102 elements. LOAD 2 'COLUMN LOAD-DL+LL' JOINT LOADS 1 2 FY -217. 8 9 FY -109. 5 FY -308.7 6 FY -617.4 22 23 FY -410. 29 30 FY -205. 26 FY -542.7 27 FY -1085.4 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -307.5 47 54 82 FY -264.2 48 55 76 83 FY -528.3 92 93 FY -205.0 99 100 FY -410.0 103 FY -487.0 104 FY -974.0 113 114 FY -109.0 120 121 FY -217.0 124 FY -273.3 125 FY -546.6 Load case 2 consists of several joint loads acting in the negative global Y direction.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 162 of 493
LOADING COMBINATION 101 TOTAL LOAD 1 1. 2 1. A load combination case, identified with load case number 101, is specified above. It instructs STAAD to factor loads 1 and 2 by a value of 1.0 and then algebraically add the results. PERFORM ANALYSIS The analysis is initiated using the above command. LOAD LIST 101 PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 33 56 PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 34 67 Joint displacements for joints 33 and 56, and element stresses for elements 34 and 67, for load case 101, is obtained with the help of the above commands. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 163 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 164 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 165 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 166 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 167 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 168 of 493

This is an example of the analysis of a structure modelled using SOLID finite elements. This example also illustrates the method for applying an enforced displacement on the structure.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 169 of 493
STAAD SPACE *EXAMPLE PROBLEM USING SOLID ELEMENTS Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The comment line which begins with an asterisk is an optional title to identify this project. UNIT KNS MET The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 2.0 4 0.0 3.0 2.0 5 1.0 0.0 2.0 8 1.0 3.0 2.0 9 2.0 0.0 2.0 12 2.0 3.0 2.0 21 0.0 0.0 1.0 24 0.0 3.0 1.0 25 1.0 0.0 1.0 28 1.0 3.0 1.0 29 2.0 0.0 1.0 32 2.0 3.0 1.0 41 0.0 0.0 0.0 44 0.0 3.0 0.0 45 1.0 0.0 0.0 48 1.0 3.0 0.0 49 2.0 0.0 0.0 52 2.0 3.0 0.0 The joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. The coordinates of some of those nodes are generated utilizing the fact that they are equally spaced between the extremities. ELEMENT INCIDENCES SOLID
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 170 of 493
1 1 5 6 2 21 25 26 22 TO 3 4 21 25 26 22 41 45 46 42 TO 6 1 1 7 5 9 10 6 25 29 30 26 TO 9 1 1 10 25 29 30 26 45 49 50 46 TO 12 1 1 The incidences of solid elements are defined above. The word SOLID is used to signify that these are 8-noded solid elements as opposed to 3-noded or 4-noded plate elements. Each line contains the data for generating 3 elements. For example, element number 1 is first defined by all of its 8 nodes. Then, increments of 1 to the joint number and 1 to the element number (the defaults) are used for generating incidences for elements 2 and 3. Similarly, incidences of elements 4, 7 and 10 are defined while those of 5, 6, 8, 9, 11 and 12 are generated. CONSTANTS E 2.1E7 ALL POIS 0.25 ALL DENSITY 7.5 ALL Following the command CONSTANTS above, the material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity), Poisson's Ratio, and Density are specified. PRINT ELEMENT INFO SOLID LIST 1 TO 5 This command will enable us to obtain, in a tabular form, the details of the incidences and material property values of elements 1 to 5. SUPPORTS 1 5 21 25 29 41 45 49 PINNED 9 ENFORCED The above lines contain the data for supports for the model. The ENFORCED support condition is used to declare a point at which an enforced displacement load is applied later (see load case 3). LOAD 1 SELF Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 28 FY -1000.0 The above data describe a static load case. It consists of selfweight loading and a joint load, both in the negative global Y direction. LOAD 2 JOINT LOADS 2 TO 4 22 TO 24 42 TO 44 FX 100.0 Load case 2 consists of several joint loads acting in the positive global X direction. LOAD 3 SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT 9 FX 0.0011 Load case 3 consists of an enforced displacement along the global X direction at node 9. The displacements in the other enforced support directions will default to zero.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 171 of 493
UNIT POUND FEET LOAD 4 ELEMENT LOAD SOLIDS 3 6 9 12 FACE 4 PRE GY -500.0 In Load case 4, a pressure load of 500 pounds/sq.ft is applied on Face # 4 of solid elements 3, 6, 9 and 12. Face 4 is defined as shown in the following table :
The above table, and other details of this type of loading can be found in section 5.32.3.2 of the STAAD.Pro 2003 Technical Reference manual. UNIT KNS MMS LOAD 5 REPEAT LOAD 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 1.0 4 1.0 Load case 5 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases already specified earlier. We would like the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 through 4 acting simultaneously. In other words, the above instruction is the same as the following: LOAD 5 SELF Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 28 FY -1000.0 2 TO 4 22 TO 24 42 TO 44 FX 100.0 SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT 9 FX .0011 ELEMENT LOAD SOLIDS 3 6 9 12 FACE 4 PRE GY -500.0 LOAD COMB 10 1 1.0 2 1.0 Load case 10 is a combination load case, which combines the effects of cases 1 & 2. While the syntax of this might look very similar to that of the REPEAT LOAD case shown in case 5, there is a fundamental difference. In a REPEAT LOAD case, the program computes the displacements by multiplying the inverted stiffness matrix by the load vector built for the REPEAT LOAD case. But in solving load combination cases, the program merely calculates the end results (displacements, forces, reactions) by gathering up the corresponding values from the individual components of the combination case, factoring them, and then algebraically summing
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 172 of 493
them up. This difference in approach is quite important in that non-linear problems such as PDELTA ANALYSIS, MEMBER TENSION and MEMBER COMPRESSION situations, changes in support conditions etc. should be handled using REPEAT LOAD cases, not load combination cases. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK A static equilibrium report, consisting of total applied loading and total support reactions from each primary load case is requested along with the instructions to carry out a linear static analysis. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 8 9 Global displacements at nodes 8 and 9 are obtained using the above command. UNIT KNS METER PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS Reactions at the supports are obtained using the above command. UNIT NEWTON MMS PRINT ELEMENT JOINT STRESS SOLID LIST 4 6 This command requests the program to provide the element stress results at the nodes of elements 4 and 6. The results will be printed for all the load cases. The word SOLID is used to signify that these are solid elements as opposed to plate or shell elements. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 173 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 174 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 175 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 176 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 177 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 178 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 179 of 493

This example demonstrates the usage of compression-only members. Since the structural
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 180 of 493
condition is load dependent, the PERFORM ANALYSIS command is specified once for each primary load case.
This example has been created to illustrate the command specification for a structure with certain members capable of carrying compressive force only. It is important to note that the analysis can be done for only 1 load case at a time. This is because, the set of active members (and hence the stiffness matrix) is load case dependent. STAAD PLANE * EXAMPLE PROBLEM FOR COMPRESSION MEMBERS The input data is initiated with the word STAAD. This structure is a PLANE frame. The second line is an optional comment line. UNIT FEET KIP Units for the commands to follow are specified above. SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the members which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 181 of 493
called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command). JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 0 10 ; 3 0 20 ; 4 15 20 ; 5 15 10 ; 6 15 0 Joint coordinates of joints 1 to 6 are defined above. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1125 6 1 5 ; 7 2 6 ; 8 2 4 ; 9 3 5 ; 10 2 5 Member numbers, and the joints between which they are connected, are defined above. This model contains 10 members. MEMBER COMPRESSION 6 TO 9 Members 6 to 9 are defined as COMPRESSION-only members. Hence for each load case, if during the analysis, any of the members 6 to 9 is found to be carrying a tensile force, it is disabled from the structure and the analysis is carried out again with the modified structure. MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TO 10 TA ST W12X26 Properties for members 1 to 10 are defined as the STandard W12X26 section from the American AISC steel table. UNIT INCH CONSTANTS E 29000.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Following the command CONSTANTS, material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity) and Poissons ratio are specified. DENSITY is not specified since selfweight does not happen to be one of the load cases being solved for. The length units have been changed from feet to inch to facilitate the input of E. SUPPORT 1 6 PINNED Joints 1 and 6 are declared as pinned-supported. LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 15 3 FX 10 Load 1 is defined above and consists of joint loads in the global X direction at joints 2 and 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 182 of 493
The above structure is analyzed for load case 1. CHANGE MEMBER COMPRESSION 6 TO 9 One or more among the members 6 to 9 may have been in-activated in the previous analysis. The CHANGE command restores the original structure to prepare it for the analysis for the next primary load case. The members with the compression-only attribute are specified again. LOAD 2 JOINT LOAD 4 FX -10 5 FX -15 In load case 2, joint loads are applied in the negative global X direction at joints 4 and 5. PERFORM ANALYSIS CHANGE The instruction to analyze the structure is specified again. Next, any compression-only members that were inactivated during the second analysis (due to the fact that they were subjected to tensile axial forces) are re-activated with the CHANGE command. Without the reactivation, these members cannot be accessed for further processing. MEMBER COMPRESSION 6 TO 9 Members 6 to 9 are once again declared compression-only for the load case to follow. LOAD 3 REPEAT LOAD 1 1.0 2 1.0 Load case 3 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases already specified earlier. We would like the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting simultaneously. In other words, the above instruction is the same as the following: LOAD 3 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 15 3 FX 10 4 FX -15 5 FX 10 PERFORM ANALYSIS The analysis is carried out for load case 3. CHANGE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 183 of 493
The members inactivated during the analysis of load case 3 are re-activated for further processing. LOAD LIST ALL At the end of any analysis, only those load cases for which the analysis was done most recently, are recognized as the "active" load cases. The LOAD LIST ALL command enables all the load cases in the structure to be made active for further processing. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The program is instructed to write the joint displacements, support reactions and member forces to the output file. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 184 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 185 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 186 of 493

The structure in this example is a building consisting of member columns as well as floors made up of beam members and plate elements. Using the master-slave command, the floors are specified to be rigid diaphragms for inplane actions but flexible for bending actions.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 187 of 493
STAAD SPACE *MODELING RIGID DIAPHRAGMS USING MASTER SLAVE Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The second line is an optional title to identify this project. UNITS KIP FT Specify units for the data to follow. JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 4 0 48 0 REPEAT 3 24 0 0 REPEAT ALL 3 0 0 24 DELETE JOINT 21 25 37 41 The joint numbers and coordinates are specified above. The unwanted joints, created during the generation process used above, are then deleted. MEMBER INCI 1 1 2 3 ; 4 5 6 6 ; 7 9 10 9 ; 10 13 14 12 13 17 18 15 ; 22 29 30 24 ; 25 33 34 27 34 45 46 36 ; 37 49 50 39 ; 40 53 54 42 43 57 58 45 ; 46 61 62 48 ; 49 2 6 51 52 6 10 54 ; 55 10 14 57 ; 58 18 22 60 61 22 26 63 ; 64 26 30 66 ; 67 34 38 69 70 38 42 72 ; 73 42 46 75 ; 76 50 54 78 79 54 58 81 ; 82 58 62 84 ; 85 18 2 87 88 22 6 90 ; 91 26 10 93 ; 94 30 14 96 97 34 18 99 ; 100 38 22 102 ; 103 42 26 105 106 46 30 108 ; 109 50 34 111 ; 112 54 38 114 115 58 42 117 ; 118 62 46 120
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 188 of 493
The MEMBER INCIDENCE specification is used for specifying MEMBER connectivities. ELEMENT INCI 152 50 34 38 54 TO 154 155 54 38 42 58 TO 157 158 58 42 46 62 TO 160 161 34 18 22 38 TO 163 164 38 22 26 42 TO 166 167 42 26 30 46 TO 169 170 18 2 6 22 TO 172 173 22 6 10 26 TO 175 176 26 10 14 30 TO 178 The ELEMENT INCIDENCE specification is used for specifying plate element connectivities. MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 48 TA ST W14X90 49 TO 120 TABLE ST W27X84 All members are WIDE FLANGE sections whose properties are obtained from the built in American table. ELEMENT PROP 152 TO 178 THICK 0.75 The thickness of the plate elements is specified above. CONSTANTS E STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 DENSITY STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 POISSON STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 BETA 90.0 MEMB 13 14 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 39 E CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 DENSITY CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 Following the command CONSTANTS above, the material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity), Poisson's Ratio, and Density are specified. Built-in default values for steel and concrete for these quantities are assigned. The orientation of some of the members is set using the BETA angle command. SUPPORTS 1 TO 17 BY 4 29 33 45 TO 61 BY 4 FIXED The supports at the above mentioned joints are declared as fixed. SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 22 JOINTS YR 15.0 17.0 SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 23 JOINTS YR 31.0 33.0 SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 24 JOINTS YR 47.0 49.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 189 of 493
The 3 floors of the structure are specified to act as rigid diaphragms in the ZX plane with the corresponding master joint specified. The associated slave joints in a floor are specified by the YRANGE parameter. The floors may still resist out-of-plane bending actions flexibly. LOADING 1 LATERAL LOADS JOINT LOADS 2 3 4 14 15 16 50 51 52 62 63 64 FZ 10.0 6 7 8 10 11 12 18 19 20 30 31 32 FZ 20.0 34 35 36 46 47 48 54 55 56 58 59 60 FZ 20.0 22 23 24 26 27 28 38 39 40 42 43 44 FZ 40.0 The above data describe a static load case. It consists of joint loads in the global Z direction. LOADING 2 TORSIONAL LOADS JOINT LOADS 2 3 4 50 51 52 FZ 5.0 14 15 16 62 63 64 FZ 15.0 6 7 8 18 19 20 FZ 10.0 10 11 12 30 31 32 FZ 30.0 34 35 36 54 55 56 FZ 10.0 46 47 48 58 59 60 FZ 30.0 22 23 24 38 39 40 FZ 20.0 26 27 28 42 43 44 FZ 60.0 The above data describe a second static load case. It consists of joint loads that create a torsional loading on the structure. LOADING 3 DEAD LOAD ELEMENT LOAD 152 TO 178 PRESS GY -1.0 In the above static load case, plate element pressure loading on a floor is applied in the negative global Y direction. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 4 TO 60 BY 8 PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 116 115 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS LIST 9 57 Print displacements at selected joints, then print member forces for two members, then print support reactions at selected joints. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 190 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 191 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 192 of 493

This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to apply the compression only attribute to spring supports for a slab on grade. The spring supports themselves are generated utilizing the built-in support generation facility. The slab is subjected to pressure and overturning loading. A tension/compression only analysis of the structure is performed. The numbers shown in the diagram below are the element numbers.
STAAD SPACE SLAB ON GRADE * SPRING COMPRESSION EXAMPLE Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. An optional title to identify this project is provided in the second line.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 193 of 493
SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the supports which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command). UNIT FEET KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 40.0 2 0.0 0.0 36.0 3 0.0 0.0 28.167 4 0.0 0.0 20.333 5 0.0 0.0 12.5 6 0.0 0.0 6.5 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT ALL 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 5 6.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 For joints 1 through 7, the joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. The coordinates of these joints is used as a basis for generating 21 more joints by incrementing the X coordinate of each of these 7 joints by 8.5 feet, 3 times. REPEAT commands are used to generate the remaining joints of the structure. The results of the generation may be visually verified using the STAAD graphical viewing facilities. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 8 9 2 TO 6 REPEAT 16 6 7 The incidences of element number 1 is defined and the data is used as the basis for generating the 2nd through the 6th element. The incidence pattern of the first 6 elements is then used to generate the incidences of 96 more elements using the REPEAT command. UNIT INCH ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 102 TH 8.0 The thickness of elements 1 to 102 is specified as 8.0 inches following the command ELEMENT PROPERTIES. CONSTANTS E 4000.0 ALL POISSON 0.12 ALL The modulus of elasticity (E) and Poissons Ratio are specified following the command
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 194 of 493
CONSTANTS. SPRING COMPRESSION 1 TO 126 KFY The above two lines declare the spring supports at nodes 1 to 126 as having the compressiononly attribute. The supports themselves are being generated later (see the ELASTIC MAT command which appears later). UNIT FEET SUPPORTS 1 TO 126 ELASTIC MAT DIRECTION Y SUBGRADE 12.0 The above command is used to instruct STAAD to generate support springs which are effective in the global Y direction. These springs are located at nodes 1 to 126. The subgrade modulus of the soil is specified as 12 kip/cu.ft. The program will determine the area under the influence of each joint and multiply the influence area by the subgrade modulus to arrive at the spring stiffness for the "FY" degree of freedom at the joint. Units for length are changed to FEET to facilitate the input of subgrade modulus of soil. Additional information on this feature may be found in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. LOAD 1 'WEIGHT OF MAT & EARTH' ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 102 PR GY -1.50 The above data describe a static load case. A pressure load of 1.50 kip/sq.ft acting in the negative global Y direction is applied on all the elements. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK CHANGE Tension/compression cases must each be followed by PERFORM ANALYSIS and CHANGE commands. The CHANGE command restores the original structure to prepare it for the analysis for the next primary load case. LOAD 2 'COLUMN LOAD-DL+LL' JOINT LOADS 1 2 FY -217. 8 9 FY -109. 5 FY -308.7 6 FY -617.4 22 23 FY -410. 29 30 FY -205. 26 FY -542.7 27 FY -1085.4 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -307.5 47 54 82 FY -264.2 48 55 76 83 FY -528.3 92 93 FY -205.0 99 100 FY -410.0 103 FY -487.0 104 FY -974.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 195 of 493
113 114 FY -109.0 120 121 FY -217.0 124 FY -273.3 FY -546.6 125 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK CHANGE Load case 2 consists of several joint loads acting in the negative global Y direction. This is followed by another ANALYSIS command. The CHANGE command restores the original structure once again for the forthcoming load case. LOAD 3 'COLUMN OVERTURNING LOAD' ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 102 PR GY -1.50 JOINT LOADS 1 2 FY -100. 8 9 FY -50. 5 FY -150.7 6 FY -310.4 22 23 FY -205. 29 30 FY -102. 26 FY -271.7 27 FY -542.4 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -153.5 47 54 82 FY -132.2 48 55 76 83 FY -264.3 92 93 FY 102.0 99 100 FY 205.0 103 FY 243.0 104 FY 487.0 113 114 FY 54.0 120 121 FY 108.0 124 FY 136.3 125 FY 273.6 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK Load case 3 consists of several joint loads acting in the upward direction at one end and downward on the other end to apply an overturning moment that will lift off one end. The CHANGE command is not needed after the last analysis. LOAD LIST 3 PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 113 114 120 121 PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 34 67 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS LIST 5 6 12 13 A list of joint displacements, element stresses for elements 34 and 67, and support reactions at a list of joints, are obtained for load case 3, with the help of the above commands. FINISH
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 196 of 493
The STAAD run is terminated.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 197 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 198 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 199 of 493

This example demonstrates the input required for obtaining the modes and frequencies of the skewed bridge shown in the figure below. The structure consists of piers, piercap girders and a deck slab.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 200 of 493
STAAD SPACE FREQUENCIES OF VIBRATION OF A SKEWED BRIDGE Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The remainder of the words forms a title to identify this project. IGNORE LIST Further below in this file, we will call element lists in which some element numbers may not actually be present in the structure. We do so because it minimizes the effort involved in fetching the desired elements and reduces the size of the respective commands. To prevent the program from treating that condition (referring to elements which do not exist) as an error, the above command is required. UNIT METER KN The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0; 3 6.5 0 0; 4 9 0 0; 5 11.5 0 0; 6 15.5 0 0; 11 -1 10 0 25 16.5 10 0 REPEAT ALL 3 4 0 14 For joints 1 through 6, the joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified first. Next, using the coordinates of joints 11 and 25 as the basis, joints 12 through 24 are generated using linear interpolation. Following this, using the data of these 21 joints (1 through 6 and 11 through 25), 63 new joints are generated. To achieve this, the X coordinate of these 21 joints is incremented by 4 meters and the Z coordinate is incremented by 14 meters, in 3 successive operations. The REPEAT ALL command is used for the generation. Details of this command is available in Section 5.11 of the Technical Reference manual. The results of the generation may be visually verified using STAAD.Pro's graphical viewing facilities. MEMBER INCI 1 1 13 ; 2 2 15 ; 3 3 17 ; 4 4 19 ; 5 5 21 ; 6 6 23
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 201 of 493
26 26 34 ; 27 27 36 ; 28 28 38 ; 29 29 40 ; 30 30 42 ; 31 31 44 47 47 55 ; 48 48 57 ; 49 49 59 ; 50 50 61 ; 51 51 63 ; 52 52 65 68 68 76 ; 69 69 78 ; 70 70 80 ; 71 71 82 ; 72 72 84 ; 73 73 86 The member connectivity data (joint numbers between which members are connected) is specified for the 24 columns for the structure. The above method, where the member number is followed by the 2 node numbers, is the explicit definition method. No generation is involved here. 101 11 12 114 202 32 33 215 303 53 54 316 404 74 75 417 The member connectivity data is specified for the pier cap beams for the structure. The above method is a combination of explicit definition and generation. For example, member 101 is defined as connected between 11 & 12. Then, by incrementing those nodes by 1 unit at a time (which is the default increment), the incidences of members 102 to 114 are generated. Similarly, we create members 202 to 215, 303 to 316, and, 404 to 417. DEFINE MESH A JOINT 11 B JOINT 25 C JOINT 46 D JOINT 32 E JOINT 67 F JOINT 53 G JOINT 88 H JOINT 74 The next step is to generate the deck slab which will be modeled using plate elements. For this, we use a technique called mesh generation. Mesh generation is a process of generating several "child" elements from a "parent" or "super" element. The above set of commands defines the corner nodes of the super-element. Details of the above can be found in Section 5.14 of the Technical Reference manual. Note that instead of elaborately defining the coordinates of the corner nodes of the super-elements, we have taken advantage of the fact that the coordinates of these joints (A through H) have already been defined or generated earlier. Thus, A is the same as joint 11 while D is the same as joint 32. Alternatively, we could have defined the super-element nodes as A -1 10 0 ; B 16.5 10 0 ; C 20.5 10 14 ; D 3 10 14 ; etc. GENERATE ELEMENT MESH ABCD 14 12 MESH DCEF 14 12 MESH FEGH 14 12 The above lines are the instructions for generating the child elements from the superelements. For example, from the super-element bound by the corners A, B, C and D (which in turn are nodes 11, 25, 46 and 32), we generate a total of 14X12=168 elements, with 14 divisions along the edges AB and CD, and 12 along the edges BC
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 202 of 493
and DA. These are the elements which make up the first span. Similarly, 168 elements are created for the 2nd span, and another 168 for the 3rd span. It may be noted here that we have taken great care to ensure that the resulting elements and the piercap beams form a perfect fit. In other words, there is no overlap between the two in a manner that nodes of the beams are at a different point in space than nodes of elements. At every node along their common boundary, plates and beams are properly connected. This is absolutely essential to ensure proper transfer of load and stiffness from beams to plates and vice versa. The tools of the graphical user interface may be used to confirm that beam-plate connectivity is proper for this model. START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _GIRDERS 101 TO 114 202 TO 215 303 TO 316 404 TO 417 _PIERS 1 TO 6 26 TO 31 47 TO 52 68 TO 73 ELEMENT _P1 447 TO 450 454 TO 457 461 TO 464 468 TO 471 _P2 531 TO 534 538 TO 541 545 TO 548 552 TO 555 _P3 615 TO 618 622 TO 625 629 TO 632 636 TO 639 _P4 713 TO 716 720 TO 723 727 TO 730 734 TO 737 _P5 783 TO 786 790 TO 793 797 TO 800 804 TO 807 _P6 881 TO 884 888 TO 891 895 TO 898 902 TO 905 END GROUP DEFINITION The above block of data is referred to as formation of groups. Group names are a mechanism by which a single moniker can be used to refer to a cluster of entities, such as members. For our structure, the piercap beams are being grouped to a name called GIRDERS, the pier columns are assigned the name PIERS, and so on. For the deck, a few selected elements are chosen into a few selective groups. The reason is that these elements happen to be right beneath wheels of vehicles whose weight will be used in the frequency calculation. MEMBER PROPERTY _GIRDERS PRIS YD 0.6 ZD 0.6 _PIERS PRIS YD 1.0 Member properties are assigned as prismatic rectangular sections for the girders, and prismatic circular sections for the columns. ELEMENT PROPERTY YRA 9 11 TH 0.375 The plate elements of the deck slab, which happen to be at a Y elevation of 10 metres (between a YRANGE of 9 metres and 11 metres) are assigned a thickness of 375 mms. UNIT NEWTON MMS CONSTANTS E 21000 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 203 of 493
The Modulus of elasticity (E) is set to 21000 N/sq.mm for all members. The keyword CONSTANTS has to precede this data. Built-in default value for Poisson's ratio for concrete is also assigned to ALL members and elements. UNIT KNS METER CONSTANTS DENSITY 24 ALL Following a change of units, density of concrete is specified. SUPPORTS 1 TO 6 26 TO 31 47 TO 52 68 TO 73 FIXED The base nodes of the piers are fully restrained (FIXED supports). CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 65 Theoretically, a structure has as many modes of vibration as the number of degrees of freedom in the model. However, the limitations of the mathematical process used in extracting modes may limit the number of modes that can actually be extracted. In a large structure, the extraction process can also be very time consuming. Further, not all modes are of equal importance. (One measure of the importance of modes is the participation factor of that mode.) In many cases, the first few modes may be sufficient to obtain a significant portion of the total dynamic response. Due to these reasons, in the absence of any explicit instruction, STAAD calculates only the first 6 modes. This is like saying that the command CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 6 has been specified. (Versions of STAAD prior to STAAD.Pro 2000 calculated only 3 modes by default). If the inspection of the first 6 modes reveals that the overall vibration pattern of the structure has not been obtained, one may ask STAAD to compute a larger (or smaller) number of modes with the help of this command. The number that follows this command is the number of modes being requested. In our example, we are asking for 65 modes by specifying CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 65. UNIT KGS METER LOAD 1 FREQUENCY CALCULATION SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 * PERMANENT WEIGHTS ON DECK ELEMENT LOAD YRA 9 11 PR GX 200 YRA 9 11 PR GY 200 YRA 9 11 PR GZ 200 * VEHICLES ON SPANS - ONLY Y & Z EFFECT CONSIDERED ELEMENT LOAD _P1 PR GY 700
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 204 of 493
_P2 PR GY 700 _P3 PR GY 700 _P4 PR GY 700 _P5 PR GY 700 _P6 PR GY 700 _P1 PR GZ 700 _P2 PR GZ 700 _P3 PR GZ 700 _P4 PR GZ 700 _P5 PR GZ 700 _P6 PR GZ 700 The mathematical method that STAAD uses is called the eigen extraction method. Some information on this is available in Section 1.18.3 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. The method involves 2 matrices - the stiffness matrix, and the mass matrix. The stiffness matrix, usually called the [K] matrix, is assembled using data such as member and element lengths, member and element properties, modulus of elasticty, Poisson's ratio, member and element releases, member offsets, support information, etc. For assembling the mass matrix, called the [M] matrix, STAAD uses the load data specified in the load case in which the MODAL CAL REQ command is specified. So, some of the important aspects to bear in mind are : 1. 2. The input you specify is weights, not masses. Internally, STAAD will convert weights to masses by dividing the input by "g", the acceleration due to gravity. If the structure is declared as a PLANE frame, there are 2 possible directions of vibration - global X, and global Y. If the structure is declared as a SPACE frame, there are 3 possible directions - global X, global Y and global Z. However, this does not guarantee that STAAD will automatically consider the masses for vibration in all the available directions. You have control over and are responsible for specifying the directions in which the masses ought to vibrate. In other words, if a weight is not specified along a certain direction, the corresponding degrees of freedom (such as for example, global X at node 34 hypothetically) will not receive a contribution in the mass matrix. The mass matrix is assembled using only the masses from the weights and directions specified by the user. In our example, notice that we are specifying the selfweight along global X, Y and Z directions. Similarly, a 200 kg/sq.m pressure load is also specified along all 3 directions on the deck. But for the truck loads, we choose to apply it on just a few elements in the global Y and Z directions only. The reasoning is something like - for the X direction, the mass is not capable of vibrating because the tires allow the truck to roll along X. Remember, this is just a demonstration example, not necessarily what you may wish to do. The point we wish to illustrate is that if a user wishes to restrict a certain weight to
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 205 of 493
certain directions only, all he/she has to do is not provide the directions in which those weights cannot vibrate in. 3. As much as possible, provide absolute values for the weights. STAAD is programmed to algebraically add the weights at nodes. So, if some weights are specified as positive numbers and others as negative, the total weight at a given node is the algebraic summation of all the weights in the global directions at that node and the mass is then derived from this algebraic resultant.
MODAL CALCULATION REQUESTED This is the command which tells the program that frequencies and modes should be calculated. It is specified inside a load case. In other words, this command accompanies the loads that are to be used in generating the mass matrix. Frequencies and modes have to be calculated also when dynamic analysis such as response spectrum or time history analysis is carried out. But in such analyses, the MODAL CALCULATION REQUESTED command is not explicitly required. When STAAD encounters the commands for response spectrum (see example 11) and time history (see examples 16 and 22), it automatically will carry out a frequency extraction without the help of the MODAL .. command. PERFORM ANALYSIS This initiates the processes which are required to obtain the frequencies. Frequencies, periods and participation factors are automatically reported in the output file when the operation is completed. FINISH This terminates the STAAD run.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 206 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 207 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 208 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 209 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 210 of 493
Understanding the output: After the analysis is complete, look at the output file. (This file can be viewed from File - View - Output File - STAAD output). (i) Mode number and corresponding frequencies and periods Since we asked for 65 modes, we obtain a report, a portion of which is as shown:
CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE 1 MODE FREQUENCY (CYCLES/SEC) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1.636 2.602 2.882 3.754 4.076 4.373 4.519 4.683 5.028 7.189 7.238 7.363 PERIOD (SEC) 0.61111 0.38433 0.34695 0.26636 0.24532 0.22870 0.22130 0.21355 0.19889 0.13911 0.13815 0.13582 1.344E-16 0.000E+00 8.666E-16 0.000E+00 3.466E-16 6.025E-16 5.641E-16 5.253E-16 0.000E+00 8.916E-16 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 ACCURACY
(ii) Participation factors in Percentage

MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 211 of 493
MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X 0.01
Y 0.00 0.00 0.23 3.27 0.04 0.04
Z 99.04 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.19 0.00 0.00 0.00
SUMM-X SUMM-Y SUMM-Z 0.012 99.151 99.151 99.151 99.151 99.202 99.204 99.204 99.735 99.736 99.736 99.736 0.000 0.000 0.229 3.496 3.536 3.575 30.000 55.587 55.740 55.871 55.927 55.969 99.042 99.061 99.062 99.062 99.112 99.135 99.135 99.136 99.326 99.326 99.326 99.326
99.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.05
0.00 26.42 0.00 25.59 0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.15 0.13 0.06 0.04
In the explanation earlier for the CUT OFF MODE command, we said that one measure of the importance of a mode is the participation factor of that mode. We can see from the above report that for vibration along Z direction, the first mode has a 99.04 percent participation. It is also apparent that the 7th mode is primarily a Y direction mode with a 26.42 % participation along Y and 0 in X and Z. The SUMM-X, SUMM-Y and SUMM-Z columns show the cumulative value of the participation of all the modes upto and including a given mode. One can infer from those terms that if one is interested in 95% participation along X, the first 2 modes are sufficient. But for the Y direction, even with 10 modes, we barely obtained 60%. The reason for this can be understood by an examination of the nature of the structure. The deck slab is capable of vibrating in several low energy and primarily vertical direction modes. The outof-plane flexible nature of the slab enables it to vibrate in a manner resembling a series of wave like curves. Masses on either side of the equilibrium point have opposing eigenvector values leading to a lot of cancellation of the contribution from the respective masses. Localized modes, where small pockets in the structure undergo flutter due to their relative weak stiffness compared to the rest of the model, also result in small participation factors. (iii) Viewing the mode shapes After the analysis is completed, select Post-processing from the mode menu. This screen contains facilities for graphically examining the shape of the mode in static and animated views. The Dynamics page on the left side of the screen is available for viewing the shape of the mode statically. The Animation option of the Results menu can be used for animating the mode. The mode number can be selected from the Loads and Results tab of the Diagrams dialog box which comes up when the Animation option is chosen. The size to which the mode is drawn is controlled using the Scales tab of the Diagrams dialog box.

02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 212 of 493
Analysis and design of a structure for seismic loads is demonstrated in this example. The elaborate dynamic analysis procedure called time history analysis is used. In this model, static load cases are solved along with the seismic load case. For the seismic case, the maximum values of displacements, forces and reactions are obtained. The results of the dynamic case are combined with those of the static cases and steel design is performed on the combined cases.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation.

STAAD SPACE DYNAMIC ANALYSIS FOR SEISMIC LOADS
Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The remainder of the words form a title to identify this project. UNIT METER KNS The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 0 ; 3 0 5.3 0 ; 4 0 7 0 REPEAT ALL 1 9.5 0 0 REPEAT ALL 1 0 0 3 17 1.8 7 0 ; 18 4.6 7 0 ; 19 7.6 7 0 REPEAT ALL 1 0 0 3 For joints 1 through 4, the joint number is followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates as specified above. The coordinates of these joints are used as a basis for generating 12 more joints by incrementing the X & Z coordinates by specific amounts. REPEAT ALL commands are used for the generation. Details of these commands are available in Section 5.11 of the Technical Reference manual. Following this, another round of explicit definition (joints 17, 18 & 19) and generation (20, 21 & 22) is carried out. The results of the generation may be visually verified using STAAD.Pro's graphical viewing facilities.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 213 of 493
MEMBER INCIDENCES 1123 REPEAT 1 3 4 7 9 10 9 10 13 14 12 13 4 17; 14 17 18; 15 18 19; 16 19 8 17 12 20; 18 20 21; 19 21 22; 20 22 16 21 2 10; 22 4 12; 23 6 14 24 8 16; 25 3 17; 26 7 19; 27 11 20; 28 15 22; 29 18 21 A mixture of explicit definition and generation of member connectivity data (joint numbers between which members are connected) is used to generate 29 members for the structure. START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _VERTICAL 1 TO 12 _XBEAM 13 TO 20 _ZBEAM 21 TO 24 29 _BRACE 25 TO 28 END GROUP DEFINITION The above block of data is referred to as formation of groups. Group names are a mechanism by which a single moniker can be used to refer to a cluster of entities, such as members. For our structure, the columns are being grouped to a name called VERTICAL, the beams running along the X direction are assigned the name XBEAM, and so on. MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN _VERTICAL TA ST W310X97 _XBEAM TA ST W250X39 _ZBEAM TA ST C200X17 _BRACE TA ST L150X150X13 Member properties are assigned from the Canadian steel table. The members which receive these properties are those embedded within the respective group names. The benefit of using the group name is apparent here. Just from the looks of the command, we can understand that the diagonal braces are being assigned a single angle. The alternative, which would be 25 TO 28 TA ST L150X150X13 would have required us to go to the graphical tools to get a sense of what members 25 to 28 are. UNIT KNS MMS CONSTANT E 200 ALL The Modulus of elasticity (E) is set to 200 kN/sq.mm for all members. The keyword CONSTANTS has to precede this data. UNIT KGS METER CONSTANT DENSITY 7800 ALL
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 214 of 493
POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 180 MEMB 21 22 Density and Poisson for all members is set using the above commands. The BETA angle for the channels along the left edge is set to 180 so their legs point toward the interior of the structure. SUPPORTS 1 5 9 13 PINNED The bottom ends of the columns of the platform are pinned supported. CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 30 The above command is a critical command if one wishes to override the default number of modes computed and used in a dynamic analysis. The default, which is 6, may not always be sufficient to capture a significant portion of the structural response in a response spectrum or time history analysis, and hence the need to override the default. This command is explained in Section 5.30 of the Technical Reference manual. UNIT METER DEFINE TIME HISTORY TYPE 1 ACCELERATION READ EQDATA.TXT ARRIVAL TIME 0.0 DAMPING 0.05 There are two stages in the command specification required for a time-history analysis. The first stage is defined above. Here, the parameters of the earthquake (ground acceleration) are provided. Each data set is individually identified by the number that follows the TYPE command. In this file, only one data set is defined, which is apparent from the fact that only one TYPE is defined. The word FORCE that follows the TYPE 1 command signifies that this data set is for a ground acceleration. (If one wishes to specify a forcing function, the keyword FORCE must be used instead.) Notice the expression "READ EQDATA.TXT". It means that we have chosen to specify the time vs. ground acceleration data in the file called EQDATA.TXT. That file must reside in the same folder as the one in which the data file for this structure resides. As explained in the small examples shown in Section 5.31.4 of the Technical Reference manual, the EQDATA.TXT file is a simple text file containing several pairs of time-acceleration data. A sample portion of that file is as shown below.
0.0000 0.0200 0.0400 0.0600 0.0800 0.1000 0.006300 0.003640 0.000990 0.004280 0.007580 0.010870
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 215 of 493
While it may not be apparent from the above numbers, it may also be noted that the geological data for the site the building sits on indicate that the above acceleration values are a fraction of "g", the acceleration due to gravity. Thus, for example, at 0.02 seconds, the acceleration is 0.00364 multiplied by 9.806 m/sec^2 (or 0.00364 multiplied by 32.2 ft/sec^2). Consequently, the burden of informing the program that the values need to be multiplied by "g" is upon us, and we shall be doing so at a later step. The arrival time value indicates the relative value of time at which the earthquake begins to act upon the structure. We have chosen 0.0, as there is no other dynamic load on the structure from the relative time standpoint. The modal damping ratio for all the modes is set to 0.05. LOAD 1 WEIGHT OF STRUCTURE ACTING STATICALLY SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 The above data describe a static load case. The selfweight of the structure is acting in the negative global Y direction.
LOAD 2 PLATFORM LEVEL LOAD ACTING STATICALLY FLOOR LOAD YRA 6.9 7.1 FLOAD -500
Load case 2 is also a static load case. At the Y=7.0m elevation, our structure has a floor slab. But, it is a non-structural entity which, though capable of carrying the loads acting on itself, is not meant to be an integral part of the framing system. It merely transmits the load to the beamcolumn grid. There are uniform area loads on the floor (think of the load as wooden pallets supporting boxes of paper). Since the slab is not part of the structural model, how do we tell the program to transmit the imposed load from the slab to the beams without manually converting them to distributed beam loads ourselves? That is where the floor load utility comes in handy. It is a facility where we specify the load as a pressure, and the program converts the pressure to individual beam loads. Thus, the input required from the user is very simple - load intensity in the form of pressure, and the region of the structure in terms of X, Y and Z coordinates in space, of the area over which the pressure acts. In the process of converting the pressure to beam loads, STAAD will consider the empty space between criss-crossing beams (in plan view) to be panels, similar to the squares of a chess board. The load on each panel is then tranferred to beams surrounding the panel, using a triangular or trapezoidal load distribution method. LOAD 3 DYNAMIC LOAD * MASSES SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 FLOOR LOAD YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GX YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GY YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GZ Load case 3 is the dynamic load case, the one which contains the second part of the instruction
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 216 of 493
set for a dynamic analysis to be performed. The data here are a. b. loads which will yield the mass values which will populate the mass matrix the directions of the loads, which will yield the degree of freedom numbers of the mass matrix for being populated.
Thus, the selfweight, as well as the imposed loads on the non-structural slab are to be considered as participating in the vibration along all the global directions. GROUND MOTION X 1 1 9.806 The above command too is part of load case 3. Here we say that the seismic force, whose characteristics are defined by the TYPE 1 time history input data, acting at arrival time 1, is to be applied along the X direction. We mentioned earlier that the acceleration input data was specified as a fraction of g. The number 9.806 indicates the value which the accleration data, as read from EQDATA.TXT are to be factored by before they are used. LOAD COMBINATION 11 (STATIC + POSITIVE OF DYNAMIC) 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 1.0 LOAD COMBINATION 12 (STATIC + NEGATIVE OF DYNAMIC) 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 -1.0 In a time history analysis, the member forces FX thru MZ each have a value for every time step. If there are a 1000 time steps, there will be 1000 values of FX, 1000 for FY etc. for that load case. Not all of them can be used in a further calculation like a steel or concrete design. However, the maximum from among those time steps is available. If we wish to do a design, one way to make sure that the structure is not under-designed is to create 2 load combination cases involving the dynamic case, a positive combination, and a negative combination. That is what is being done above. Load combination case no. 11 consists of the sum of the static load cases (1 & 2) with the positive direction of the dynamic load case (3). Load combination case no. 12 consists of the sum of the static load cases (1 & 2) with the negative direction of the dynamic load case (3). The user has discretion on what load factors to use with these combinations. We have chosen the factors to be 1.0. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above is the instruction to perform the analysis related calculations. That means, computing nodal displacements, support reactions, etc. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The above command is an instruction to the program to produce a report of the joint displacements, support reactions and member end forces in the output file. As mentioned earlier, for the dynamic case, these will be just the maximum values, not the ones generated for every time step. If the user wishes to see the results for each time step, he/she may do so by using STAAD's Post-processing facilities. LOAD LIST 11 12 PARAMETER CODE CANADA CHECK CODE ALL
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 217 of 493
A steel design - code check - is done according to the Canadian code for load cases 11 and 12. FINISH
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 218 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 219 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 220 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 221 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 222 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 223 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 224 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 225 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 226 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 227 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 228 of 493
Verification Problems(U.S.)
Problem No. 1
OBJECTIVE: To find the support reactions due to a joint load in a plane truss.
REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., 3rd edition, 1956, page 346, problem 3. PROBLEM: Determine the horizontal reaction at support 4 of the system.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 229 of 493
COMPARISON: Support Reaction, Kips Solution Theory STAAD Difference R4 8.77 8.77 None
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 230 of 493
Problem No. 2
OBJECTIVE: REFERENCE: PROBLEM: To find the period of free vibration for a beam supported on two springs with a point mass. Timoshenko, S., Young, D., and Weaver, W., Vibration Problems in Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 4th edition, 1974. page 11, problem 1.1-3. A simple beam is supported by two spring as shown in the figure. Neglecting the distributed mass of the beam, calculate the period of free vibration of the beam
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 231 of 493
subjected to a load of W.
GIVEN:
EI = 30000.0 ksi A = 7.0 ft B = 3.0 ft. K = 300.0 lb/in.
COMPARISON: Solution Theory STAAD Difference Period, sec 0.533 0.533 None
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 232 of 493
Problem No. 3
TYPE: Deflection and moments for plate-bending finite element. REFERENCE: Simple hand calculation by considering the entire structure as a cantilever beam. PROBLEM: A simple cantilever plate is divided into 12 4-noded finite elements. A uniform pressure
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 233 of 493
load is applied and the maximum deflection at the tip of the cantilever and the maximum bending at the support are calculated.
GIVEN: Plate thickness = 25mm, Uniform pressure= 5N/sq.mm HAND CALCULATION: 3 Max. deflection = WL /8EI, where 3 3 10 WL =(5x300x100) x (300) = 405x10 3 3 8EI=8x(210x10 N/sq.mm)x(100x25 /12) 7 = 21875x10 Deflection = 18.51mm Max. moment = WL/2 = (5x300x100)x300/2 6 = 22.5x10 N.mm = 22.5KN.m
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 234 of 493
Problem No. 4
OBJECTIVE: To find the support reactions due to a load at the free end of a cantilever plane bent with an intermediate support. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., 3rd edition, 1956, page 346, problem 2.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 235 of 493
PROBLEM:
Determine the reaction of the system as shown in the figure.
COMPARISON: Reaction, Kip Solution Theory STAAD Difference RX 1.5 1.5 None
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 236 of 493
Problem No. 5
OBJECTIVE: To find deflections and stress at the center of a locomotive axle. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S.,Strength of Materials, Part- 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., 3rd edition, 1956. page 97, problems 1, 2.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 237 of 493
PROBLEM:
Determine the maximum stress in a locomotive axle (as shown in the figure) as well as the deflection at the middle of the axle.
GIVEN: Diameter = 10 in., P = 26000 lb, E = 30E6 psi COMPARISON: Stress (s), psi, and Deflection (d), in Theory 3575.* 0.01040 STAAD 3575. 0.01037 Difference None None * The value is recalculated. Solution THEORY STAAD DIFFERENCE * The value is recalculated.
3575 * 3575 None
0.0104 0.01037 None
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 238 of 493
Problem No. 6
TYPE: To find the maximum moment due to a uniform load on the horizontal member in a 1x1 bay plane frame. REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition,
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 239 of 493
1975, page 383, example 22 - 5. PROBLEM: Determine the maximum moment in the frame.
GIVEN: E and I same for all members. SOLUTION COMPARISON:
THEORY STAAD DIFFERENCE
Max. Moment, ft-kip 44.40 44.44 Small
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 240 of 493
Problem No. 7
TYPE: To find the joint deflection due to joint loads in a plane truss. REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition, 1975, page 271, example 18 - 2. PROBLEM: Determine the vertical deflection at point 5 of the plane truss structure shown in the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 241 of 493
figure.
GIVEN: AX of members 1 to 4 = 1, 5 6 = 2, 7 8 = 1.5, 9 10 11 = 3., 12 13 = 4., E = 30E3 ksi SOLUTION COMPARISON: Deflection, inch 2.63 2.63 None
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 242 of 493
Problem No. 8
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 243 of 493
TYPE: To find the maximum moment due to a concentrated load on the horizontal member in a 1x1 bay plane frame. REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition, 1975, page 385, problem 22 - 6. PROBLEM: Determine the maximum moment in the structure.
GIVEN:
E and I same for all members.
SOLUTION COMPARISON:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 244 of 493
Problem No. 9
TYPE: To find the maximum moment due to lateral joint loads in a 1x2 bay plane frame.
REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition, 1975, page 388, example 22 - 7. PROBLEM: Determine the maximum moment in the frame.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 245 of 493
GIVEN: E and I same for all members. SOLUTION COMPARISON: Max. moment, ft-kip 176.40 178.01 0.91%
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 246 of 493
Problem No. 10
TYPE: To find the maximum axial force and moment due to load and moment applied at a joint in a space frame.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 247 of 493
REFERENCE: Weaver Jr., W., Computer Programs for Structural Analysis, page 146, problem 8. PROBLEM: Determine the maximum axial force and moment in the space structure.
GIVEN: E = 30E3 ksi, AX=11, IX=83, IY=56, IZ=56 inch unit. COMPARISON:
Solution Reference STAAD Difference FMax (kips) 1.47 1.47 None MY,Max (kipin) 84.04 84.04 None MZ,Max (kipin) 95.319 96.120 Small
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 248 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 249 of 493
Problem No. 11
TYPE: A rigid bar is suspended by two copper wires and one steel wire. Find the stresses in the wires due to a rise in temperature. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., 3rd edition, 1956, page 30, problem 9. PROBLEM: Assuming the horizontal member to be very rigid, determine the stresses in the copper and steel wires if the temperature rise is 10 F.
GIVEN:
E = 30E6 psi, E = 16E6 psi steel copper = 70E-7 in/in/F, = 92E-7 in/in/F steel copper A = 0.1 in2 X
MODELLING HINT: Assume a large moment of inertia for the horizontal rigid member and distribute of the concentrated load as uniform.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 250 of 493
COMPARISON: Stress (), psi

Solution Theory STAAD Difference
Steel 19695 19698 Small
Copper 10152 10151 Small
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 251 of 493
Problem No. 12
TYPE: To find the joint deflection and member stress due to a joint load in a plane truss.
REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., 3rd edition, 1956, page 10, problem 2. PROBLEM: Determine the vertical deflection at point A and the member stresses.
2 GIVEN: A = 0.5 in , E = 30E6 psi X COMPARISON: Stress (), psi and Deflection (), in.
A 10000.0 10000.0 None
A 0.12 0.12 None
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 252 of 493
Problem No. 13
TYPE: Steel Design.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 253 of 493
REFERENCE: Attached step by step hand calculation as per 1989 AISC code. Ninth Edition PROBLEM: Determine the allowable stresses (per 1989 AISC code) of the members of the structure as shown in figure. Also perform a code check for these members based on the results of the analysis.
Members 1, 2 = W12X26, Members 3, 4 = W14X43 Members 5, 6, 7 = W16X36, Memb 8= L40404, Memb 9 = L50506 SOLUTION COMPARISON:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 254 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 255 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 256 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 257 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 258 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 259 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 260 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 261 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 262 of 493
Problem No. 14
TYPE: Concrete design as per ACI code. REFERENCE: CRSI Handbook and Notes on ACI-318 from ACI PROBLEM: A plane frame is created with such loading as to create 138 Kip-Ft moment on beam and 574 Kip of axial load coupled with above moment on column.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 263 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 264 of 493
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 265 of 493
NOTES STAAD reports that it is unable to find a suitable bar arrangement to satisfy the reinforcement requirement for the negative moment at the two ends of beam 2. However, this does not mean that it is impossible to come up with a bar arrangement. When STAAD looks for a bar arrangement, it uses only bars of the same size. It begins with the bar size corresponding to the parameter MINMAIN. If an arrangement is not possible with that bar, it tries with the next larger bar size. If all the permissible bar sizes are exhausted, the program reports that it could not come up with a bar arrangement. However, the user may be able to satisfy the requirement by mixing bars of various diameters. For example, 3 # 11 bars and 2 # 10 bars may satisfy the requirement. The program is not equipped with facilities to come up with
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 266 of 493
such combinations of bar sizes.
Application Examples (U.K.)

Introduction
The tutorials in the Getting Started Manual mention 2 methods of creating the STAAD input data. a. Using the facilities of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) modelling mode b. Using the editor which comes built into the STAAD program Method (a) is explained in great detail in the various tutorials of that manual. The emphasis in this Examples manual is on creating the data using method (b). A number of examples, representing a wide variety of structural engineering problems, are presented. All the input needed is explained line by line to facilitate the understanding of the STAAD command language. These examples also illustrate how the various commands in the program are to be used together. Although a user can prepare the input through the STAAD GUI, it is quite useful to understand the language of the input for the following reasons: 1) STAAD is a large and comprehensive structural engineering software. Knowledge of the STAAD language can be very useful in utilizing the large number of facilities available in the program. The Graphical User Interface can be used to generate the input file for even the most complex of structures. However, the user can easily make changes to the input data if he/she has a good understanding of the command language and syntax of the input. 2) The input file represents the user's thought about what he/she wants to analyze or design. With the knowledge of the STAAD command language, the user or any other person can verify the accuracy of the work. The commands used in the input file are explained in Section 5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Users are urged to refer to that manual for a better understanding of the language. The procedure for creating the file using the built-in editor is explained further below in this section. Alternatively, any standard text editor such as Notepad or WordPad may also be used to create the command file. However, the STAAD.Pro command file editor offers the advantage of syntax checking as we type the commands. The STAAD.Pro keywords, numeric data, comments, etc. are displayed in distinct colors in the STAAD.Pr editor. A typical editor screen is shown below to illustrate its general appearance.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 267 of 493
To access the built-in editor, first start the program and follow the steps explained in Sections 1.3 and 1.4 of the Getting Started manual.
You will then encounter the dialog box shown in the following figure. In this dialog box, choose Open STAAD Editor.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 268 of 493
At this point, the editor screen will open as shown below.
Delete all the command lines displayed in the editor window and type the lines shown in bold in the various examples in this book (You dont have to delete the lines if you know which to keep and where to fill in the rest of the commands). The commands may be typed in upper or lower case letters. For your convenience, the data for all the examples presented in this manual are supplied to you along with the program CD. You will find them in the folder location X:\spro2005\staad\examp\uk where X: is the drive, and spro2005 is the name of the installation folder if you happened to go with the default during installation. The example files are named in accordance with the order they appear in this manual, namely, examp01.std for example 1, examp08.std for example 8, and so on.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 269 of 493
The second part of this book contains a set of verification problems which compares the analytical results from the program with standard publications on the subject. They too are installed along with the examples. To view their contents in the editor, open the file you are interested in. Then, click on the STAAD editor icon, or, go to the Edit menu, and choose Edit Input Command File, as shown below.
A new window will open up with the data listed as shown here:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 270 of 493
To exit the Editor, select the File | Exit menu option of the editor window (not the File | Exit menu of the main window behind the editor window).
PART I
APPLICATION EXAMPLES

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh4B1D.htm 02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 271 of 493
Description of Example Problems
1) Example problem No. 1 - Plane frame with steel design. After one analysis, member selection is requested. Since member sizes change during the member selection, another analysis is done followed by final code checking to verify that the final sizes meet the requirements of the code based on the latest analysis results. 2) Example problem No. 2 - A floor structure (bound by global X-Z axis) made up of steel beams is subjected to area load (i.e. load/area of floor). Load generation based on one-way distribution is illustrated in this example. 3) Example problem No. 3 - A portal frame type steel structure is sitting on a concrete footing. The soil is to be considered as an elastic foundation. 4) Example problem No. 4 - This example is a typical case of a load-dependent structure where the structural condition changes for different load cases. In this example, different bracing members are made inactive for different load cases. This is done to prevent these members from carrying any compressive forces. 5) Example problem No. 5 - This example demonstrates the application of support displacement load (commonly known as sinking support) on a space frame structure. 6) Example problem No. 6 - This is an example of prestress loading in a plane frame structure. It covers two situations: 1) The prestressing effect is transmitted from the member on which it is applied to the rest of the structure through the connecting members (known in the program as PRESTRESS load). 2) The prestressing effect is experienced by the member(s) alone and not transmitted to the rest of the structure (known in the program as POSTSTRESS load). 7) Example problem No. 7 - This example illustrates modelling of structures with OFFSET connections. Offset connections arise when the center lines of the connected members do not intersect at the connection point. The connection eccentricity is modeled through specification of MEMBER OFFSETS. 8) Example problem No. 8 - In this example, concrete design is performed on some members of a space frame structure. Design calculations consist of computation of reinforcement for beams and columns. Secondary moments on the columns are obtained through the means of a P-Delta analysis. 9) Example problem No. 9 - A space frame structure in this example consists of frame members and finite elements. The finite element part is used to model floor flat plates and a shear wall. Design of an element is performed. 10)Example problem No. 10 - A tank structure is modeled with four-noded plate elements. Water pressure from inside is used as loading for the tank. Reinforcement calculations have been done for some elements. 11)Example problem No. 11 - Dynamic analysis (Response Spectrum) is performed for a steel structure. Results of a static and dynamic analysis are combined. The combined results are then used for steel design. 12)Example problem No. 12 - This example demonstrates generation of load cases for the type of loading known as a moving load. This type of loading occurs classically when the load-
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 272 of 493
causing units move on the structure, as in the case of trucks on a bridge deck. The mobile loads are discretized into several individual immobile load cases at discrete positions. During this process, enormous number of load cases may be created resulting in plenty of output to be sorted. To avoid looking into a lot of output, the maximum force envelope is requested for a few specific members. 13)Example problem No. 13 - Calculation of displacements at intermediate points of members of a plane frame is demonstrated in this example. 14)Example problem No. 14 - A space frame is analyzed for seismic loads. The seismic loads are generated using the procedures of the 1994 UBC Code. A P-Delta analysis is peformed to obtain the secondary effects of the lateral and vertical loads acting simultaneously. 15)Example problem No. 15 - A space frame is analyzed for loads generated using the built-in wind and floor load generation facilities. 16)Example problem No. 16 - Dynamic Analysis (Time History) is performed for a 3 span beam with concentrated and distributed masses. The structure is subjected to "forcing function" and "ground motion" loading. The maxima of the joint displacements, member end forces and support reactions are determined. 17)Example problem No. 17 - The usage of User Provided Steel Tables is illustrated in this example for the analysis and design of a plane frame. 18)Example problem No. 18 - This is an example which demonstrates the calculation of principal stresses on a finite element. 19)Example problem No. 19 - This example demonstrates the usage of inclined supports. The word INCLINED refers to the fact that the restraints at a joint where such a support is specified are along a user-specified axis system instead of along the default directions of the global axis system. STAAD offers a few different methods for assigning inclined supports, and we examine those in this example. 20)Example problem No. 20 - This example generates the geometry of a cylindrical tank structure using the cylindrical coordinate system. 21)Example problem No. 21 - This example illustrates the modeling of tension-only members using the MEMBER TENSION command. 22)Example problem No. 22 - A space frame structure is subjected to a sinusoidal loading. The commands necessary to describe the sine function are demonstrated in this example. Time History analysis is performed on this model. 23)Example problem No. 23 - This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to automatically generate spring supports for a slab on grade. The slab is subjected to various types of loading and analysis of the structure is performed. 24)Example problem No. 24 - This is an example of the analysis of a structure modelled using SOLID finite elements. This example also illustrates the method for applying an enforced displacement on the structure. 25)Example problem No. 25 - This example demonstrates the usage of compression-only members. Since the structural condition is load dependent, the PERFORM ANALYSIS command is specified once for each primary load case. 26)Example problem No. 26 - The structure in this example is a building consisting of member
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 273 of 493
columns as well as floors made up of beam members and plate elements. Using the master-slave command, the floors are specified to be rigid diaphragms for inplane actions but flexible for bending actions. 27)Example problem No. 27 - This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to apply the compression only attribute to automatically generated spring supports for a slab on grade. The slab is subjected to pressure and overturning loading. A tension/compression only analysis of the structure is performed. 28) Example problem No. 28 - This example demonstrates the input required for obtaining the modes and frequencies of the skewed bridge. The structure consists of piers, pier-cap girders and a deck slab. 29) Example problem No. 29 - Analysis and design of a structure for seismic loads is demonstrated in this example. The elaborate dynamic analysis procedure called time history analysis is used.

Plane frame with steel design. After one analysis, member selection is requested. Since member sizes change during the member selection, another analysis is done followed by final code checking to verify that the final sizes meet the requirements of the code based on the latest analysis results.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 274 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE PROBLEM NO. 1 Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT METER KN Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 9 0 ; 3 0 6 ; 4 3 6 5 6 6 ; 6 9 6 ; 7 0 10.5 8 9 10.5 ; 9 2.25 10.5 ; 10 6.75 10.5 11 4.5 10.5 ; 12 1.5 11.4 ; 13 7.5 11.4 14 3 12.3 ; 15 6 12.3 ; 16 4.5 13.2 Joint number followed by X and Y coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to allow for input of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 3;2 3 7;3 2 6;4 6 8;5 3 4 6 4 5 ; 7 5 6 ; 8 7 12 ; 9 12 14 10 14 16 ; 11 15 16 ; 12 13 15 ; 13 8 13 14 9 12 ; 15 9 14 ; 16 11 14 ; 17 11 15 18 10 15 ; 19 10 13 ; 20 7 9 21 9 11 ; 22 10 11 ; 23 8 10 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 1 3 4 TA ST UC356X368X129 ; 2 TA ST UC254X254X73 5 6 7 TA ST UB533X210X82 ; 8 TO 13 TA ST UB457X152X52 14 TO 23 TA ST UA100X100X8 Member properties are from the British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. MEMB TRUSS 14 TO 23 The above command defines that members 14 through 23 are of type truss. This means that these members can carry only axial tension/compression and no moments. MEMB RELEASE 5 START MZ
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 275 of 493
Member 5 has local moment-z (MZ) released at the start joint. This means that the member cannot carry any moment-z (i.e. strong axis moment) at node 3. UNIT KN MMS CONSTANTS E 210. ALL DEN 76.977E-09 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 90.0 MEMB 3 4 UNIT METER The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), POISSON, etc. Length unit is changed from METER to MM to facilitate the input. The BETA command specifies that members 3 and 4 are rotated by 90 degrees around their own longitudinal axis. See section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual for the definition of the BETA angle. SUPPORT 1 FIXED ; 2 PINNED A fixed support is located at joint 1 and a pinned support at joint 2. PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION LIST 1 5 14 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTY LIST 1 2 5 8 14 The above PRINT commands are self-explanatory. The LIST option restricts the print output to the members listed. LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 One of the components of load case 1 is the selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction with a factor of -1.0. Since global Y is vertically upward, the factor of -1.0 indicates that this load will act downwards. JOINT LOAD 4 5 FY -65. ; 11 FY -155. Load 1 contains joint loads also. FY indicates that the load is a force in the global Y direction. MEMB LOAD 8 TO 13 UNI Y -13.5 ; 6 UNI GY -17.5 Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction while Y indicates local Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. Loads are applied on members 6, and 8 to 13. CALCULATE RAYLEIGH FREQUENCY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 276 of 493
The above command at the end of load case 1, is an instruction to perform a natural frequency calculation based on the Rayleigh method using the data in the above load case. LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT MEMBER LOAD 1 2 UNI GX 9.0 ; 8 TO 10 UNI Y -15.0 Load case 2 is initiated and contains several member loads. * 1/3 RD INCREASE IS ACCOMPLISHED BY 75% LOAD LOAD COMB 3 75 PERCENT DL LL WL 1 0.75 2 0.75 The above command identifies a combination load (case no. 3) with a title. The second line provides the load cases and their respective factors used for the load combination. Any line beginning with the * mark is treated as a comment line. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. LOAD LIST 1 3 The above command activates load cases 1 and 3 only for the commands to follow. This also means that load case 2 will be made inactive. PRINT MEMBER FORCES PRINT SUPPORT REACTION The above PRINT commands are self-explanatory. Also note that all the forces and reactions will be printed for load cases 1 and 3 only. PARAMETER CODE BRITISH NSF 0.85 ALL BEAM 1 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL The PARAMETER command is used to specify steel design parameters such as NSF, KY, etc. Information on these parameters can be obtained from the manual where the implementation of the code is explained. The BEAM parameter is specified to perform design at every 1/12 th point along the member length. The RATIO parameter specifies that the ratio of actual loading over section capacity should not exceed 0.9. SELECT ALL The above command instructs the program to select the most economic section for ALL the members based on the results of the analysis.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 277 of 493
GROUP MEMB GROUP MEMB GROUP MEMB GROUP MEMB
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 TO 13 14 TO 23
Although the program selects the most economical section for all members, it is not always practical to use many different sizes in one structure. GROUPing is a procedure by which the cross section which has the largest value for the specified attribute, which in this case is the default and hence the AREA, from among the associated member list, is assigned to all members in the list. Hence, the cross sections for members 1, 3 and 4 are replaced with the one with the largest area from among the three. PERFORM ANALYSIS As a result of the selection and grouping, the member sizes are no longer the same as the ones used in the original analysis. Hence, it is necessary to reanalyze the structure using the new properties to get new values of forces in the members. PARAMETER BEAM 1.0 ALL RATIO 1.0 ALL TRACK 1.0 ALL A new set of values are now provided for the above parameters. The actual load to member capacity RATIO has been redefined as 1.0. The TRACK parameter tells the program to print out the design results to the intermediate level of descriptivity. CHECK CODE ALL With the above command, the latest member sizes with the latest analysis results are checked to verify that they satisfy the CODE specifications. STEEL TAKE OFF This command instructs the program to list the length and weight of all the different member sizes. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE PROBLEM NO. 1 2. UNIT METER KN 3. JOINT COORDINATES 4. 1 0 0 ; 2 9 0 ; 3 0 6 ; 4 3 6 5. 5 6 6 ; 6 9 6 ; 7 0 10.5
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 278 of 493
6. 8 9 10.5 ; 9 2.25 10.5 ; 10 6.75 10.5 7. 11 4.5 10.5 ; 12 1.5 11.4 ; 13 7.5 11.4 8. 14 3 12.3 ; 15 6 12.3 ; 16 4.5 13.2 9. MEMBER INCIDENCE 10. 1 1 3 ; 2 3 7 ; 3 2 6 ; 4 6 8 ; 5 3 4 11. 6 4 5 ; 7 5 6 ; 8 7 12 ; 9 12 14 12. 10 14 16 ; 11 15 16 ; 12 13 15 ; 13 8 13 13. 14 9 12 ; 15 9 14 ; 16 11 14 ; 17 11 15 14. 18 10 15 ; 19 10 13 ; 20 7 9 15. 21 9 11 ; 22 10 11 ; 23 8 10 16. MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 17. 1 3 4 TA ST UC356X368X129 ; 2 TA ST UC254X254X73 18. 5 6 7 TA ST UB533X210X82 ; 8 TO 13 TA ST UB457X152X52 19. 14 TO 23 TA ST UA100X100X8 20. MEMB TRUSS 21. 14 TO 23 22. MEMB RELEASE 23. 5 START MZ 24. UNIT KN MMS 25. CONSTANTS 26. E 210. ALL 27. DEN 76.977E-09 ALL 28. POISSON STEEL ALL 29. BETA 90.0 MEMB 3 4 30. UNIT METER 31. SUPPORT 32. 1 FIXED ; 2 PINNED 33. PRINT MEMBER INFORMATION LIST 1 5 14 MEMBER INFORMATION -----------------MEMBER START END LENGTH BETA JOINT JOINT (METE) (DEG) RELEASES 1 5 14 1 3 9 3 4 12 6.000 0.00 3.000 0.00 1.172
000001000000 TRUSS
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************
34. PRINT MEMBER PROPERTY LIST 1 2 5 8 14 MEMBER PROPERTIES. UNIT - CM ----------------MEMB PROFILE AY 1 ST UC356X368X129 164.00 36.98 2 ST UC254X254X73 21.85 5 ST UB533X210X82 50.72 8 ST UB457X152X52 34.18 14 ST UA100X100X8 5.33 AX/ AZ IZ/ SZ IY/ SY IX/
40250.00 116.11 93.10 65.07 105.00 49.61 66.60 29.90 15.60 5.33
14610.00 152.61 2263.78 792.73 11410.00 3908.00 57.62 898.07 306.99 47540.00 2007.00 51.52 1799.74 192.24 21370.00 645.00 21.37 950.20 84.65 60.54 235.86 3.33 15.55 33.36
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 35. LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD 36. SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 37. JOINT LOAD 38. 4 5 FY -65. ; 11 FY -155. 39. MEMB LOAD 40. 8 TO 13 UNI Y -13.5 ; 6 UNI GY -17.5 41. CALCULATE RAYLEIGH FREQUENCY 42. LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT 43. MEMBER LOAD 44. 1 2 UNI GX 9.0 ; 8 TO 10 UNI Y -15.0 45. * 1/3 RD INCREASE IS ACCOMPLISHED BY 75% LOAD 46. LOAD COMB 3 75 PERCENT DL LL WL 47. 1 0.75 2 0.75 48. PERFORM ANALYSIS
PROBLEM STATISTICS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 279 of 493
----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 16/ 23/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 5/ 4/ 15 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38899.0 MB
43
ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 9 EQN.NO. 21 LOADS APPLIED OR DISTRIBUTED HERE FROM ELEMENTS WILL BE IGNORED. THIS MAY BE DUE TO ALL MEMBERS AT THIS JOINT BEING RELEASED OR EFFECTIVELY RELEASED IN THIS DIRECTION. ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 11 EQN.NO. 31 ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 10 EQN.NO. 37
********************************************************** * * * RAYLEIGH FREQUENCY FOR LOADING 1 = 3.48726 CPS * * MAX DEFLECTION = 2.54543 CM GLO X, AT JOINT 7 * * * **********************************************************
49. LOAD LIST 1 3 50. PRINT MEMBER FORCES MEMBER FORCES
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE MEMBER LOAD JT 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 1 3 6 1 3 7 1 3 8 1 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -72.75 26.06 334.51 57.37 MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 239.74 -7.78 0.00 3 -232.17 7.78 0.00 1 179.67 85.56 0.00 3 -173.99 -45.06 0.00 3 150.36 -22.47 0.00 7 -147.13 22.47 0.00 3 128.85 -0.17 0.00 7 -126.43 30.54 0.00 2 258.36 6 -250.79 2 244.54 6 -238.86 6 142.82 8 -137.14 6 141.66 8 -137.40 0.00 -7.78 0.00 7.78 0.00 -15.69 0.00 15.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -22.47 22.47 -60.92 60.92
0.00 -26.06 0.00 -75.07 0.00 -57.37 0.00 -11.73 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 46.69 0.00 0.00 0.00 94.13 0.00 71.00 0.00 30.13 0.00 140.15 0.00 133.97 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
3 -14.69 81.81 0.00 4 14.69 -79.39 0.00 3 -45.23 45.13 0.00 4 45.23 -43.32 0.00 4 -14.69 14.39 0.00 5 14.69 40.54 0.00 4 -45.23 -5.43 0.00 5 45.23 46.63 0.00 5 -14.69 6 14.69 5 -45.23 6 45.23
0.00 0.00 0.00 241.80 0.00 0.00 0.00 132.67 0.00 -241.80 0.00 202.57 0.00 -132.67 0.00 54.58
-105.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 -202.57 107.96 0.00 0.00 0.00 -117.69 -95.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 -54.58 97.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 -234.28 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 75.07 27.17 11.73 31.18
7 167.97 70.64 0.00 12 -167.51 -46.26 0.00 3 7 173.02 43.51 0.00 12 -172.68 -5.54 0.00 1
12 168.43 40.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 -27.17 14 -167.97 -15.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 75.96 3 12 168.07 34.97 0.00 0.00 0.00 -31.18 14 -167.72 2.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 59.15 1 14 188.13 -88.19 0.00 16 -187.67 112.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -75.96 0.00 -99.63
10
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 280 of 493
3 11 1
14 154.12 16 -153.77
-61.66 99.62
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
-59.15 -81.91
15 188.10 -88.23 0.00 0.00 0.00 -76.04 16 -187.64 112.61 0.00 0.00 0.00 -99.63 3 15 160.61 -70.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 -57.42 16 -160.27 88.80 0.00 0.00 0.00 -81.91 13 182.74 36.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 -33.73 15 -182.28 -11.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 76.04 3 13 123.15 38.72 0.00 0.00 0.00 -5.68 15 -122.81 -20.43 0.00 0.00 0.00 57.42 8 185.13 48.70 0.00 13 -184.66 -24.32 0.00 3 8 118.56 88.98 0.00 13 -118.21 -70.69 0.00 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 30.13 0.00 33.73 0.00 133.97 0.00 5.68 1
12
13
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE MEMBER LOAD JT 14 9 -6.13 12 6.24 3 9 29.87 12 -29.79 1 14 3 9 14 16 1 9 4.76 -4.54 -25.12 25.28 1 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM-Z
15
11 -107.60 0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 14 107.82 0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 11 -43.98 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 14 44.14 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 11 -94.67 0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 15 94.88 0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 11 -107.72 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 15 107.88 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 3 10 -10.59 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 15 10.81 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 10 26.60 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 15 -26.43 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
17
18
19
10 12.32 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 13 -12.21 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 10 -32.27 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 13 32.35 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 3 7 -85.22 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 9 85.22 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 7 -95.44 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 9 95.44 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.14 0.00 0.14 0.00 0.10 0.00 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
20
21
9 -90.97 11 90.97 3 9 -66.65 11 66.65 1 3
22
10 -99.25 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 11 99.25 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 10 -25.85 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 11 25.85 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00
23
8 -111.21 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 10 111.21 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 8 5.03 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 10 -5.03 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************
51. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION SUPPORT REACTION
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KN METE -----------------
STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 281 of 493
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 1 7.78 3 -85.56 2 1 -7.78 3 -15.69 239.74 179.67 258.36 244.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-X -72.75 334.51 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y
MOM Z
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 52. PARAMETER 53. CODE BRITISH 54. NSF 0.85 ALL 55. BEAM 1 ALL 56. KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 57. RATIO 0.9 ALL 58. SELECT ALL STAAD.Pro MEMBER SELECTION - (BSI ) ************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 179.67 C 0.00 334.51 2 ST UC203X203X46 PASS ANNEX I.1 150.36 C 0.00 75.07 3 ST UC305X305X97 PASS ANNEX I.1 244.54 C 94.13 0.00 4 ST UC305X305X97 PASS ANNEX I.1 141.66 C 140.15 0.00 5 ST UB406X178X67 PASS BS-4.3.6 14.69 T 0.00 241.80 6 ST UB406X178X67 PASS BS-4.3.6 14.69 T 0.00 247.44 7 ST UB406X178X67 PASS BS-4.3.6 45.23 T 0.00 234.28 8 ST UB356X127X33 PASS ANNEX I.1 167.97 C 0.00 75.07 9 ST UB356X127X33 PASS ANNEX I.1 168.43 C 0.00 75.96 10 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 188.13 C 0.00 99.63 11 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 188.10 C 0.00 99.63 12 ST UB356X127X33 PASS ANNEX I.1 182.74 C 0.00 76.04 13 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 118.56 C 0.00 133.97 14 ST UA50X50X4 PASS BS-4.7 (C) 29.87 C 0.00 0.00 15 ST UA40X40X3 PASS BS-4.7 (C) 4.76 C 0.00 0.00 16 ST UA45X45X6 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 107.82 T 0.00 0.00 17 ST UA45X45X6 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 107.88 T 0.00 0.00 18 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.7 (C) 26.60 C 0.00 0.00 19 ST UA40X40X3 PASS BS-4.7 (C) 12.32 C 0.00 0.00 20 ST UA40X40X6 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 95.44 T 0.00 0.00 0.770 0.00 0.721 0.637 0.781 0.855 3.00 0.875 0.75 0.829 3.00 0.625 0.632 0.583 1.75 0.583 1.75 0.642 0.784 0.00 0.799 0.00 0.754 0.00 0.887 2.34 0.888 2.34 0.774 0.00 0.816 0.00 0.888 0.00 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 3
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 21 ST UA45X45X5 90.97 T 22 ST UA50X50X5 99.25 T 23 ST UA65X50X5 111.21 T PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.00 0.00 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.00 0.00 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.00 0.00 0.882 0.00 0.865 0.00 0.857 0.00 1 1 1
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN ************** 59. GROUP MEMB 1 3 4
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 282 of 493
GROUPING BASED ON MEMBER 60. GROUP MEMB 5 6 7 GROUPING BASED ON MEMBER 61. GROUP MEMB 8 TO 13 GROUPING BASED ON MEMBER 62. GROUP MEMB 14 TO 23 GROUPING BASED ON MEMBER 63. PERFORM ANALYSIS
1 (ST UC305X305X118 ) LIST= 7 (ST UB406X178X67 13 (ST UB406X140X39 18 (ST UA60X60X5 ) LIST= ) LIST= ) LIST=
1.... 5.... 8.... 14....
** ALL CASES BEING MADE ACTIVE BEFORE RE-ANALYSIS. ** ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 9 EQN.NO. 21 LOADS APPLIED OR DISTRIBUTED HERE FROM ELEMENTS WILL BE IGNORED. THIS MAY BE DUE TO ALL MEMBERS AT THIS JOINT BEING RELEASED OR EFFECTIVELY RELEASED IN THIS DIRECTION. ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 11 EQN.NO. 31 ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 10 EQN.NO. 37 ********************************************************** * * * RAYLEIGH FREQUENCY FOR LOADING 1 = 2.52812 CPS * * MAX DEFLECTION = 4.93130 CM GLO X, AT JOINT 7 * * * **********************************************************
64. PARAMETER 65. BEAM 1.0 ALL 66. RATIO 1.0 ALL 67. TRACK 1.0 ALL 68. CHECK CODE ALL STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.809 3 178.64 C 0.00 351.85 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |MCZ= 518.9 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2.46E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 4347.0 PV= 6000.7| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 3.975000E+03 FX/PZ = 0.45 MRZ= 5163.6 MRY= 2342.8 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 2 ST UC203X203X46 PASS ANNEX I.1 0.680 1 147.21 C 0.00 70.97 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 2 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 2 |MCZ= 136.7 MCY= 62.7 PC= 8.70E+02 PT= 0.0 MB= 1057.1 PV= 2414.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.614250E+03 FX/PZ = 0.91 MRZ= 1339.4 MRY= 627.3 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 3 ST UC305X305X118 PASS ANNEX I.1 0.496 3 240.18 C 91.66 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 3 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |MCZ= 518.9 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2.04E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 4347.0 PV= 6000.7| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 3.975000E+03 FX/PZ = 0.60 MRZ= 5143.3 MRY= 2342.8 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 4 ST UC305X305X118 PASS ANNEX I.1 0.634 3 138.84 C 137.72 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 4 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |MCZ= 518.9 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2.67E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 4832.9 PV= 6000.7| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 3.975000E+03 FX/PZ = 0.35 MRZ= 5173.5 MRY= 2342.8 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 5 ST UB406X178X67 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.839 1 14.21 T 0.00 237.10 3.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 5 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |MCZ= 370.2 MCY= 63.0 PC= 1.19E+04 PT=19985.6 MB= 2826.5 PV= 5944.5| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.768168E+04 FX/PZ = 0.35 MRZ= 3701.3 MRY= 629.8 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 6 ST UB406X178X67 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.855 1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 283 of 493
14.21 T 0.00 241.77 0.75 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 6 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 370.2 MCY= 63.0 PC= 5.29E+04 PT=19985.6 MB= 2826.5 PV= 5944.5| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 7.865204E+04 FX/PZ = 0.35 MRZ= 3701.3 MRY= 629.8 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 7 ST UB406X178X67 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.812 3 44.36 T 0.00 229.38 3.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 7 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 370.2 MCY= 63.0 PC= 2.35E+05 PT=19985.6 MB= 2826.5 PV= 5944.5| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 3.498617E+05 FX/PZ = 0.35 MRZ= 3699.5 MRY= 629.8 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 8 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.415 1 163.71 C 0.00 70.97 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 8 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 199.1 MCY= 23.9 PC= 1.09E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 1709.4 PV= 4202.9| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.366750E+03 FX/PZ = 1.20 MRZ= 1952.9 MRY= 238.5 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 9 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.452 1 164.73 C 0.00 77.32 1.75 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 9 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 199.1 MCY= 23.9 PC= 1.09E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 1709.4 PV= 4202.9| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.366750E+03 FX/PZ = 1.21 MRZ= 1952.5 MRY= 238.5 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 10 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.565 1 186.58 C 0.00 96.64 1.75 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 10 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 199.1 MCY= 23.9 PC= 1.09E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 1709.4 PV= 4202.9| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.366750E+03 FX/PZ = 1.37 MRZ= 1941.6 MRY= 238.5 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 11 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.565 1 186.41 C 0.00 96.64 1.75 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 11 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 199.1 MCY= 23.9 PC= 1.09E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 1709.4 PV= 4202.9| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.366750E+03 FX/PZ = 1.36 MRZ= 1941.6 MRY= 238.5 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 12 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.455 1 175.44 C 0.00 77.83 1.75 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 12 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 199.1 MCY= 23.9 PC= 1.09E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 1709.4 PV= 4202.9| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.366750E+03 FX/PZ = 1.28 MRZ= 1947.3 MRY= 238.5 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 13 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.764 3 120.10 C 0.00 130.65 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 13 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 199.1 MCY= 23.9 PC= 1.09E+03 PT= 0.0 MB= 1709.4 PV= 4202.9| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.366750E+03 FX/PZ = 0.88 MRZ= 1970.5 MRY= 238.5 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 14 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.7 (C) 0.254 3 18.96 C 0.00 0.00 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 14 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 | |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 7.48E+01 PT= 1381.5 MB= 18.2 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.625250E+02 FX/PZ = 1.17 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 15 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.7 (C) 0.213 1 7.32 C 0.00 0.00 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 15 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 | |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 3.44E+01 PT= 1381.5 MB= 14.1 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.625250E+02 FX/PZ = 0.45 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 16 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.772 1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 284 of 493
106.66 T 0.00 0.00 2.34 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 16 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 | |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 1.53E+02 PT= 1381.5 MB= 13.7 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 7.229471E+02 FX/PZ = 0.45 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 17 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.755 3 104.25 T 0.00 0.00 2.34 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 17 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 6.80E+02 PT= 1381.5 MB= 13.7 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 3.215829E+03 FX/PZ = 0.45 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 18 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.7 (C) 0.677 3 23.28 C 0.00 0.00 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 18 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 3.44E+01 PT= 1381.5 MB= 16.7 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.625250E+02 FX/PZ = 1.43 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 19 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.204 3 28.12 T 0.00 0.00 1.17 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 19 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 7.48E+01 PT= 1381.5 MB= 17.0 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.625250E+02 FX/PZ = 1.73 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 20 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.587 3 81.10 T 0.00 0.00 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 20 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 3.33E+02 PT= 1381.5 MB= 13.1 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 7.229471E+02 FX/PZ = 1.73 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 21 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.645 1 89.17 T 0.00 0.00 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 21 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 1.48E+03 PT= 1381.5 MB= 14.0 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 3.215829E+03 FX/PZ = 1.73 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 22 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.697 1 96.33 T 0.00 0.00 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 22 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 6.58E+03 PT= 1381.5 MB= 14.7 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.430472E+04 FX/PZ = 1.73 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| 23 ST UA60X60X5 PASS BS-4.6 (T) 0.731 1 100.93 T 0.00 0.00 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 23 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 |MCZ= 0.0 MCY= 0.0 PC= 2.68E+01 PT= 1381.5 MB= 15.4 PV= 297.0| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT =10.00, mx =10.00, my =10.00, myx =10.00 | |PZ= 1.625250E+02 FX/PZ = 6.21 MRZ= 0.0 MRY= 0.0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| ************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
69. STEEL TAKE OFF STEEL TAKE-OFF -------------PROFILE ST ST ST ST LENGTH(METE) 16.50 4.50 9.00 10.50 WEIGHT(KN ) 19.052 2.033 5.923 4.015
UC305X305X118 UC203X203X46 UB406X178X67 UB406X140X39
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 285 of 493
ST UA60X60X5 PRISMATIC STEEL
19.93 0.907 0.00 0.000 ---------------TOTAL = 31.931
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 70. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@odandetech.com * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

A floor structure (bound by global X-Z axis) made up of steel beams is subjected to area load (i.e. load/area of floor). Load generation based on one-way distribution is illustrated in this example. In the case of loads such as joint loads and member loads, the magnitude and direction of the load at the applicable joints and members is directly known from the input. However, the area load is a different sort of load where a load intensity on the given area has to be converted to joint and member loads. The calculations required to perform this conversion are done only during the analysis. Consequently, the loads generated from the AREA LOAD command can be viewed only after the analysis is completed.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 286 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD FLOOR A FLOOR FRAME DESIGN WITH AREA LOAD Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word FLOOR signifies that the structure is a floor structure and the structure is in the x z plane. UNIT METER KNS Defines the UNITs. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 5 6 0 0 ; 7 1.5 0 3 8 3 0 3 ; 9 4 0 3 ; 10 4.5 0 3 ; 11 5 0 3 12 6 0 3 ; 13 0 0 7.5 ; 14 1.5 0. 7.5 15 3.5 0 7.5 16 5 0 7.5 ; 17 6 0 7.5 ; 18 0 0 8.5 19 6 0 8.5 ; 20 0 0 10.5 ; 21 6 0 10.5 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a floor structure, the Y coordinates are all the same, in this case zero. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to allow for input of multiple sets of data on one line. Joints between 1 and 5 (i.e. 2, 3, 4) are generated in the first line of input taking advantage of the equal spacing between the joints (see section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual for more information). MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 4 ; 5 7 8 9 ; 10 13 14 13 ; 14 18 19 15 20 21 ; 16 18 20 ; 17 13 18 ; 18 1 13 19 7 14 ; 20 2 7 ; 21 9 15
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 287 of 493
22 3 8 ; 23 11 16 ; 24 4 10 ; 25 19 21 26 17 19 ; 27 12 17 ; 28 5 12 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMB PROP BRITISH 1 TO 28 TABLE ST UB305X165X40 Member properties are specified from the British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. * MEMBERS WITH PINNED ENDS ARE RELEASED FOR MZ MEMB RELEASE 1 5 10 14 15 18 17 28 26 20 TO 24 START MZ 4 9 13 14 15 18 16 27 25 19 21 TO 24 END MZ The first set of members (1 5 10 etc) have local moment-z (MZ) released at the start joint. This means that these members cannot carry any moment-z (i.e. strong axis moment) at the start joint. The second set of members have MZ released at the end joints. Any line beginning with * mark is treated as a comment line. UNIT MMS CONSTANT E 210. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), POISSON, etc. E has been assigned as 210.0 KN/sq.mm. The built-in default for Poissons value for steel is used during the analysis. UNIT METER SUPPORT 1 5 13 17 20 21 FIXED A fixed support has been specified at the above joints. LOADING 1 14.5 KN/sq.m. DL+LL Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. AREA LOAD 1 TO 28 ALOAD -14.5 All the 28 members are subjected to an Area load of 14.5 KN/sq.m. The program converts area loads into individual member loads. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The PRINT LOAD DATA command is specified to obtain a listing of the member loads which were generated from the AREA LOAD.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 288 of 493
PARAMETERS CODE BRITISH BEAM 1 ALL DMAX 0.6 ALL DMIN 0.3 ALL UNL 0.3 ALL The PARAMETER command is used to specify steel design parameters (see the manual where code specification information is provided). The BEAM parameter is specified to perform design at every 1/12 th point along the member length. DMAX and DMIN specify maximum and minimum depth limitations to be used during member selection. UNL stands for unsupported length of the compression flange to be used for calculation of bending capacity. SELECT MEMB 2 6 11 14 15 16 18 19 21 23 24 27 The above command instructs the program to select the most economical section from the British steel table for the members listed. FINISH The FINISH command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD FLOOR A FLOOR FRAME DESIGN WITH AREA LOAD 2. UNIT METER KNS 3. JOINT COORDINATES 4. 1 0 0 0 5 6 0 0 ; 7 1.5 0 3 5. 8 3 0 3 ; 9 4 0 3 ; 10 4.5 0 3 ; 11 5 0 3 6. 12 6 0 3 ; 13 0 0 7.5 ; 14 1.5 0. 7.5 7. 15 3.5 0 7.5 8. 16 5 0 7.5 ; 17 6 0 7.5 ; 18 0 0 8.5 9. 19 6 0 8.5 ; 20 0 0 10.5 ; 21 6 0 10.5 10. MEMBER INCIDENCES 11. 1 1 2 4 ; 5 7 8 9 ; 10 13 14 13 ; 14 18 19 12. 15 20 21 ; 16 18 20 ; 17 13 18 ; 18 1 13 13. 19 7 14 ; 20 2 7 ; 21 9 15 14. 22 3 8 ; 23 11 16 ; 24 4 10 ; 25 19 21 15. 26 17 19 ; 27 12 17 ; 28 5 12 16. MEMB PROP BRITISH 17. 1 TO 28 TABLE ST UB305X165X40 18. * MEMBERS WITH PINNED ENDS ARE RELEASED FOR MZ 19. MEMB RELEASE 20. 1 5 10 14 15 18 17 28 26 20 TO 24 START MZ 21. 4 9 13 14 15 18 16 27 25 19 21 TO 24 END MZ 22. UNIT MMS 23. CONSTANT 24. E 210. ALL 25. POISSON STEEL ALL 26. UNIT METER 27. SUPPORT 28. 1 5 13 17 20 21 FIXED 29. LOADING 1 14.5 KN/SQ.M. DL+LL 30. AREA LOAD 31. 1 TO 28 ALOAD -14.5 *WARNING- MEMBER 1 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. *WARNING- MEMBER 2 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. *WARNING- MEMBER 3 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. *WARNING- MEMBER 4 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 289 of 493
*WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER *WARNING- MEMBER
5 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 6 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 7 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 8 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 9 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 16 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 17 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 25 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command. 26 was not loaded by the AREA LOAD command.
32. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 20/ 28/ 6 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 11/ 5/ 15 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 42 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38898.3 MB
LOADING 1 14.5 KN/SQ.M. DL+LL ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS METE MEMBER UDL 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 L1 L2 CON L LIN1 LIN2
-7.250 GY 0.00 -7.250 GY 0.00 -7.250 GY 0.00 -3.625 GY 0.00 -21.750 GY 0.00 -14.500 GY 0.00 -10.875 GY 0.00 -21.750 GY 0.00 -25.375 GY 0.00 -21.750 GY 0.00 -21.750 GY 0.00 -7.250 GY 0.00 -10.875 GY 0.00
1.50 2.00 1.50 1.00 6.00 6.00 7.50 -29.000 -25.375 GY 3.00 4.53 3.00 -14.500 -18.125 GY 3.00 4.50 3.00
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 33. PARAMETERS 34. CODE BRITISH 35. BEAM 1 ALL 36. DMAX 0.6 ALL 37. DMIN 0.3 ALL 38. UNL 0.3 ALL 39. SELECT MEMB 2 6 11 14 15 16 18 19 21 23 24 27 STAAD.Pro MEMBER SELECTION - (BSI ) ************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 2 ST UB406X140X39 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 182.20 0.00 6 ST UB356X127X33 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 132.39 1.00 11 ST UB406X140X46 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 215.85 1.33 14 ST UB305X102X28 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 97.87 3.00 15 ST UB305X102X25 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 65.25 3.00 16 ST UB305X102X25 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 43.50 0.00 18 ST UB305X102X25 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 76.46 3.75 19 ST UB457X152X52 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.00 0.00 290.07 0.00 21 ST UB305X102X25 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.915 0.887 0.884 0.883 0.694 0.463 0.813 0.962 0.691 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 290 of 493
0.00 0.00 65.02 2.26 23 ST UB305X102X25 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.439 0.00 0.00 41.29 2.25 24 ST UB305X102X25 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.260 0.00 0.00 24.47 1.50 27 ST UB406X140X46 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.919 0.00 0.00 224.41 0.00
1 1 1
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN ************** 40. FINISH
**************************************************************************** **WARNING** SOME MEMBER SIZES HAVE CHANGED SINCE LAST ANALYSIS. IN THE POST PROCESSOR, MEMBER QUERIES WILL USE THE LAST ANALYSIS FORCES WITH THE UPDATED MEMBER SIZES. TO CORRECT THIS INCONSISTENCY, PLEASE DO ONE MORE ANALYSIS. FROM THE UPPER MENU, PRESS RESULTS, UPDATE PROPERTIES, THEN FILE SAVE; THEN ANALYZE AGAIN WITHOUT THE GROUP OR SELECT COMMANDS. **************************************************************************** *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= **** ************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@odandetech.com * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

A portal frame type steel structure is sitting on concrete footings. The soil is to be considered as an elastic foundation. Value of soil subgrade reaction is known from which spring constants are calculated by multiplying the subgrade reaction by the tributary area of each modeled spring.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 291 of 493
NOTE: 1) All dimensions are in meters. Spring constant calculation Spring of joints 1, 5, 10 & 14 =
2.4 x 0.3 x 41666.67 = 30000 KN/m Spring of joints 2, 3, 4, 11, 12 & 13 = 2.4 x 0.6 x 41666.67 = 60000 KN/m 2) Soil Subgrade Reaction 41666.67 KN/m 3 Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE PORTAL ON FOOTING FOUNDATION Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 5 2.4 0.0 0.0 6 1.2 3.0 0.0 ; 7 1.2 6.0 0.0 8 7.2 6.0 0.0 ; 9 7.2 3.0 0.0 10 6.0 0.0 0.0 14 8.4 0.0 0.0 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates are given as all zeros. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to facilitate specification of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 292 of 493
1 1 2 5 3 6 7 7 8 9 8 9 11 10
4 ; 6 6 7 ; 8 6 9 ; 10 9 12 11 14
Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 1 4 11 14 PRIS YD 0.30 ZD 2.40 2 3 12 13 PRIS YD 0.60 ZD 2.40 5 6 9 10 TABLE ST JO254X203 7 8 TA ST UB305X165X40 First two lines define member properties as PRIS (prismatic) for which YD (depth) and ZD (width) values are provided. The program will calculate the properties necessary to do the analysis. Member properties for the remaining members are chosen from the British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. UNIT MMS CONSTANTS * E FOR STEEL IS 210 (KN/sq.mm.) AND FOR * CONCRETE 21 (KN/sq.mm.) E 210 MEMB 5 TO 10 E 21 MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14 DEN 76.977E-09 MEMB 5 TO 10 DEN 23.534E-09 MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14 POISSON STEEL MEMB 5 TO 10 The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Density and Poissons ratio. Length unit is changed from METER to MMS to facilitate the input. Any line beginning with an * mark is treated as a comment line. SUPPORTS 2 TO 4 11 TO 13 FIXED BUT MZ KFY 60 1 5 10 14 FIXED BUT MZ KFY 30 The supports for the structure are specified above. The first set of joints are supports restrained in all directions except MZ (which is global moment-z). Also, a spring having a spring constant of 60 KN/mm is provided in the global Y direction at these nodes. The second set is similar to the former except for a different value of the spring constant. UNIT METER LOADING 1 DEAD AND WIND LOAD COMBINED Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. SELF Y -1.0 The selfweight of the structure is specified as acting in the global Y direction with a -1.0 factor.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 293 of 493
Since global Y is vertically upwards, the -1.0 factor indicates that this load will act downwards. JOINT LOAD 6 7 FX 20.0 Load 1 contains joint loads also. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. MEMBER LOAD 7 8 UNI GY -45.0 Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load acts in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load, and is applied on members 7 and 8, acting downwards. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The above PRINT command instructs the program to print analysis results which include joint displacements, member forces and support reactions. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. STAAD PLANE PORTAL ON FOOTING FOUNDATION UNIT METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 5 2.4 0.0 0.0 6 1.2 3.0 0.0 ; 7 1.2 6.0 0.0 8 7.2 6.0 0.0 ; 9 7.2 3.0 0.0 10 6.0 0.0 0.0 14 8.4 0.0 0.0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 4 5 3 6 ; 6 6 7 7 7 8 ; 8 6 9 9 8 9 ; 10 9 12 11 10 11 14 MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 1 4 11 14 PRIS YD 0.30 ZD 2.40 2 3 12 13 PRIS YD 0.60 ZD 2.40 5 6 9 10 TABLE ST JO254X203 7 8 TA ST UB305X165X40 UNIT MMS CONSTANTS * E FOR STEEL IS 210 (KN/SQ.MM.) AND FOR * CONCRETE 21 (KN/SQ.MM.) E 210 MEMB 5 TO 10 E 21 MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14 DEN 76.977E-09 MEMB 5 TO 10 DEN 23.534E-09 MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 1 TO 4 11 TO 14
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 294 of 493
28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.
POISSON STEEL MEMB 5 TO 10 SUPPORTS 2 TO 4 11 TO 13 FIXED BUT MZ KFY 60 1 5 10 14 FIXED BUT MZ KFY 30 UNIT METER LOADING 1 DEAD AND WIND LOAD COMBINED SELF Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 6 7 FX 20.0 MEMBER LOAD 7 8 UNI GY -45.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S -----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 14/ 14/ ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 3/ 3/ 12 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38898.2 MB
10 32
40. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 LOAD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.5036 1.0712 1.0285 0.5240 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 RADIANS) STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE
Y-TRANS -0.1075 -0.1232 -0.1367 -0.1466 -0.1531 -0.1720 -0.1898 -0.2097 -0.1902 -0.0897 -0.1210 -0.1504 -0.1759 -0.1969
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
X-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN -0.0003 -0.0002 -0.0002 -0.0002 -0.0001 -0.0032 -0.0045 0.0022 -0.0003 -0.0005 -0.0005 -0.0005 -0.0004 -0.0003
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS ----------------JOINT 2 3 4 11 12 13 1 5 10 14 LOAD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORCE-X 0.00 0.09 0.00 0.00 -40.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
METE
FORCE-Y 73.95 82.01 87.96 72.58 90.25 105.55 32.25 45.92 26.90 59.06
FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 3 6
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 261.08 -258.66
32.25 -22.08 96.03 -75.69 -103.38 123.71 -35.75 45.92 -0.09 0.09
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 16.30 -16.30 67.82 -92.63 24.50 -24.50 0.00 24.81 -25.09
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 295 of 493
6 7 7 8 6 9 8 9 9 12
132.10 -129.67 76.74 -76.74 -36.65 36.65 142.70 -145.12 290.93 -293.35
-56.74 56.74 129.67 142.70 126.56 145.80 76.74 -76.74 40.09 -40.09
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-73.59 -96.63 96.63 -135.72 98.68 -156.40 135.72 94.50 61.90 58.38
10
11
10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
26.90 -16.73 89.32 -68.99 -134.12 154.45 -48.90 59.06
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 13.09 -13.09 60.58 -118.96 32.39 -32.39 0.00
12
13
14
41. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****

This example is a typical case of a load-dependent structure where the structural condition changes for different load cases. In this example, different bracing members are made inactive
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 296 of 493
for different load cases. This is done to prevent these members from carrying any compressive forces.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE * A PLANE FRAME STRUCTURE WITH TENSION BRACING Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the members which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command). JOINT COORDINATES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 297 of 493
1 0 0 0 3 12. 0. 0. 4 0 4.5 0 6 12. 4.5 0. 7 6. 9. 0. ; 8 12. 9. 0. Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates are given as all zeros. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators, to facilitate specification of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 4 2 ; 3 5 7 ; 4 3 6 ; 5 6 8 ; 6 4 5 7 8 7 8 ; 9 1 5 ; 10 2 4 ; 11 3 5 ; 12 2 6 13 6 7 ;14 5 8 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER TRUSS 9 TO 14 The above command defines that members 9 through 14 are of type truss. This means these members can only carry axial tension/compression and no moments. MEMBER PROP BRITISH 1 TO 5 TABLE ST UB305X165X40 6 7 8 TA ST UB457X152X52 9 TO 14 TA LD UA150X150X10 Properties for all members are assigned from the British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. The word LD stands for long leg back-to-back double angle. Since the spacing between the two angles of the double angle is not provided, it is assumed to be 0.0. UNIT MMS CONSTANTS E 210. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio, etc. Length unit is changed from METER to MMS. SUPPORT 1 2 3 PINNED PINNED supports are specified at Joints 1, 2 and 3. The word PINNED signifies that no moments will be carried by these supports. INACTIVE MEMBERS 9 TO 14 The above command makes the listed members inactive. The stiffness contribution of these members will not be considered in the analysis till they are made active again. UNIT METER LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 298 of 493
Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. The length UNIT is changed from MMS to METER for input values which follow. MEMBER LOAD 6 8 UNI GY -4.5 7 UNI GY -6.75 Load 1 contains member loads. GY indicates that the load acts in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. The load is applied on members 6, 7 and 8. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. It is worth noting that members 9 TO 14 will not be used in this analysis since they were declared inactive earlier. In other words, for dead and live load, the bracings are not used to carry any load. CHANGES The members inactivated earlier are restored using the CHANGE command. INACTIVE MEMBERS 10 11 13 A new set of members are made inactive. The stiffness contribution from these members will not be used in the analysis till they are made active again. They have been inactivated to prevent them from being subject to compressive forces for the next load case. LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT Load case 2 is initiated followed by a title. JOINT LOAD 4 FX 135 ; 7 FX 65 Load 2 contains joint loads. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. Nodes 4 and 7 are subjected to the loads. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The analysis will be performed for load case 2 only. CHANGE The above CHANGE command is an instruction to re-activate all inactive members. INACTIVE MEMBERS 9 12 14 Members 9, 12 and 14 are made inactive. The stiffness contribution of these members will not be used in the analysis till they are made active again. They have been inactivated to prevent them from being subject to compressive forces for the next load case.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 299 of 493
LOADING 3 WIND FROM RIGHT Load case 3 is initiated followed by a title. JOINT LOAD 6 FX -135 ; 8 FX -65 Load 3 contains joint loads at nodes 6 and 8. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. The negative numbers (-135 and -65) indicate that the load is acting along the negative global X direction. LOAD COMBINATION 4 1 0.75 2 0.75 LOAD COMBINATION 5 1 0.75 3 0.75 Load combination case 4 involves the algebraic summation of the results of load cases 1 and 2 after multiplying each by a factor of 0.75. For load combinations, the program simply gathers the results of the component primary cases, factors them appropriately, and combines them algebraically. Thus, an analysis in the real sense of the term (multiplying the inverted stiffness matrix by the load vector) is not carried out for load combination cases. Load combination case 5 combines the results of load cases 1 and 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. Only primary load case 3 will be considered for this analysis. (As explained earlier, a combination case is not truly analysed for, but handled using other means.) CHANGE The above CHANGE command will re-activate all inactive members. LOAD LIST ALL At the end of any analysis, only those load cases for which the analysis was done most recently, are recognized as the "active" load cases. The LOAD LIST ALL command enables all the load cases in the structure to be made active for further processing. PRINT MEMBER FORCES The above PRINT command is an instruction to produce a report, in the output file, of the member end forces. LOAD LIST 1 4 5 A LOAD LIST command is a means of instructing the program to use only the listed load cases for further processing. PARAMETER CODE BRITISH
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 300 of 493
BEAM 1 ALL UNL 1.8 ALL KY 0.5 ALL The PARAMETER command is used to specify the steel design parameters (information on these parameters can be obtained from the manual where the implementation of the code is explained). The BEAM parameter is specified to perform design at every 1/12 th point along the member length. UNL represents the unsupported length to be used for calculation of allowable bending stress. KY 0.5 ALL sets the effective length factor for column buckling about the local Y-axis to be 0.5 for ALL members. CHECK CODE ALL The above command instructs the program to perform a check to determine how the user defined member sizes along with the latest analysis results meet the code requirements. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE 2. * A PLANE FRAME STRUCTURE WITH TENSION BRACING 3. UNIT METER KNS 4. SET NL 3 5. JOINT COORDINATES 6. 1 0 0 0 3 12. 0. 0. 7. 4 0 4.5 0 6 12. 4.5 0. 8. 7 6. 9. 0. ; 8 12. 9. 0. 9. MEMBER INCIDENCE 10. 1 1 4 2 ; 3 5 7 ; 4 3 6 ; 5 6 8 ; 6 4 5 7 11. 8 7 8 ; 9 1 5 ; 10 2 4 ; 11 3 5 ; 12 2 6 12. 13 6 7 ;14 5 8 13. MEMBER TRUSS 14. 9 TO 14 15. MEMBER PROP BRITISH 16. 1 TO 5 TABLE ST UB305X165X40 17. 6 7 8 TA ST UB457X152X52 18. 9 TO 14 TA LD UA150X150X10 19. UNIT MMS 20. CONSTANTS 21. E 210. ALL 22. POISSON STEEL ALL 23. SUPPORT 24. 1 2 3 PINNED 25. INACTIVE MEMBERS 9 TO 14 26. UNIT METER 27. LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD 28. MEMBER LOAD 29. 6 8 UNI GY -4.5 30. 7 UNI GY -6.75 31. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 8/ 14/ 3 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 4/ 4/ 12 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 18 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38898.2 MB
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 301 of 493
32. CHANGES 33. INACTIVE MEMBERS 10 11 13 34. LOADING 2 WIND FROM LEFT 35. JOINT LOAD 36. 4 FX 135 ; 7 FX 65 37. PERFORM ANALYSIS 38. CHANGE 39. INACTIVE MEMBERS 9 12 14 40. LOADING 3 WIND FROM RIGHT 41. JOINT LOAD 42. 6 FX -135 ; 8 FX -65 43. LOAD COMBINATION 4 44. 1 0.75 2 0.75 45. LOAD COMBINATION 5 46. 1 0.75 3 0.75 47. PERFORM ANALYSIS 48. CHANGE 49. LOAD LIST ALL 50. PRINT MEMBER FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y 1 1 1 11.15 -0.90 0.00 4 -11.15 0.90 0.00 2 1 -1.07 0.77 0.00 4 1.07 -0.77 0.00 3 1 68.13 -0.68 0.00 4 -68.13 0.68 0.00 4 1 7.56 -0.10 0.00 4 -7.56 0.10 0.00 5 1 59.46 -1.18 0.00 4 -59.46 1.18 0.00 2 1 2 51.94 5 -51.94 2 2 46.14 5 -46.14 3 2 129.19 5 -129.19 4 2 73.56 5 -73.56 5 2 135.85 5 -135.85 -0.07 0.07 0.53 -0.53 -0.46 0.46 0.35 -0.35 -0.40 0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -4.06 0.00 3.47 0.00 -3.04 0.00 -0.44 0.00 -5.32 0.00 -0.32 0.00 2.40 0.00 -2.08 0.00 1.56 0.00 -1.80 -5.29 -8.01 3.47 3.02 -6.16 -4.81 -1.37 -3.75 -8.59 -9.62 MOM-Z
3 1 5 13.68 -2.96 0.00 7 -13.68 2.96 0.00 2 5 -0.99 1.44 0.00 7 0.99 -1.44 0.00 3 5 47.37 -2.44 0.00 7 -47.37 2.44 0.00 4 5 9.52 -1.14 0.00 7 -9.52 1.14 0.00 5 5 45.79 -4.04 0.00 7 -45.79 4.04 0.00 4 1 3 31.40 6 -31.40 2 3 103.80 6 -103.80 3 3 -48.61 6 48.61 4 3 101.40 6 -101.40 5 3 -12.91 6 12.91 0.97 -0.97 0.21 -0.21 -0.59 0.59 0.88 -0.88 0.29 -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 4.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 0.00 0.00 0.00 -2.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 3.98 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 6.39 6.91 2.85 2.91 -2.14 -2.91 6.93 7.36 3.19 3.00
5 1 6 13.32 2.96 0.00 8 -13.32 -2.96 0.00 2 6 47.70 1.28 0.00 8 -47.70 -1.28 0.00 3 6 -1.29 -1.12 0.00 8 1.29 1.12 0.00 4 6 45.76 3.18 0.00 8 -45.76 -3.18 0.00 5 6 9.02 1.38 0.00 8 -9.02 -1.38 0.00 6 1 4 0.90 11.15 5 -0.90 15.85 2 4 134.23 -1.07 5 -134.23 1.07
0.00 0.00 0.00 4.06 0.00 0.00 0.00 -18.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 -3.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 -2.94
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 302 of 493
3 4 89.60 5 -89.60 4 4 101.35 5 -101.35 5 4 67.88 5 -67.88
1.43 -1.43 7.56 12.69 9.44 10.81
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 3.04 0.00 5.54 0.00 0.44 0.00 -15.81 0.00 5.32 0.00 -9.45
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y 7 1 5 -1.98 22.41 0.00 6 1.98 18.09 0.00 2 5 72.24 -1.12 0.00 6 -72.24 1.12 0.00 3 5 196.98 1.25 0.00 6 -196.98 -1.25 0.00 4 5 52.69 15.97 0.00 6 -52.69 14.40 0.00 5 5 146.24 17.74 0.00 6 -146.24 12.63 0.00 8 1 7 2.96 8 -2.96 2 7 63.56 8 -63.56 3 7 63.88 8 -63.88 4 7 49.89 8 -49.89 5 7 50.13 8 -50.13 13.68 13.32 -0.99 0.99 1.29 -1.29 9.52 10.73 11.23 9.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 23.75 0.00 -10.77 0.00 -2.92 0.00 -3.77 0.00 2.70 0.00 4.79 0.00 15.62 0.00 -10.91 0.00 19.83 0.00 -4.49 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 8.01 -6.91 -3.02 -2.91 4.81 2.91 3.75 -7.36 9.62 -3.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Z
9 1 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 1 -156.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 156.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 1 -117.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 117.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 10 1 2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 2 -111.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 111.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 2 -83.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 83.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 11 1 3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 3 3 -136.68 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 136.68 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 3 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 3 -102.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 5 102.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 12 1 2 0.00 6 0.00 2 2 -91.64 6 91.64 3 2 0.00 6 0.00 4 2 -68.73 6 68.73 5 2 0.00 6 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y 13 1 6 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Z
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 303 of 493
7 2 6 7 3 6 7 4 6 7 5 6 7
0.00 0.00 0.00 -76.80 76.80 0.00 0.00 -57.60 57.60
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
14 1 5 0.00 8 0.00 2 5 -77.85 8 77.85 3 5 0.00 8 0.00 4 5 -58.39 8 58.39 5 5 0.00 8 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 51. LOAD LIST 1 4 5 52. PARAMETER 53. CODE BRITISH 54. BEAM 1 ALL 55. UNL 1.8 ALL 56. KY 0.5 ALL 57. CHECK CODE ALL STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST UB305X165X40 PASS 59.46 C 0.00 2 ST UB305X165X40 PASS 135.85 C 0.00 3 ST UB305X165X40 PASS 45.79 C 0.00 4 ST UB305X165X40 PASS 101.40 C 0.00 5 ST UB305X165X40 PASS 45.76 C 0.00 6 ST UB457X152X52 PASS 101.35 C 0.00 7 ST UB457X152X52 PASS 146.24 C 0.00 8 ST UB457X152X52 PASS 50.13 C 0.00 9 LD UA150X150X10 PASS 117.35 T 0.00 10 LD UA150X150X10 PASS 83.37 T 0.00 11 LD UA150X150X10 PASS 102.51 T 0.00 12 LD UA150X150X10 PASS 68.73 T 0.00 13 LD UA150X150X10 PASS 57.60 T 0.00 14 LD UA150X150X10 PASS 58.39 T 0.00 BS-4.7 (C) 0.052 -5.32 4.50 BS-4.7 (C) 0.118 -1.80 4.50 BS-4.3.6 0.059 9.62 4.50 BS-4.7 (C) 0.088 3.98 4.50 BS-4.3.6 0.045 7.36 4.50 BS-4.7 (C) 0.102 -15.81 6.00 BS-4.7 (C) 0.147 19.83 0.00 BS-4.7 (C) 0.050 9.62 0.00 BS-4.6 (T) 0.072 0.00 0.00 BS-4.6 (T) 0.051 0.00 0.00 BS-4.6 (T) 0.063 0.00 0.00 BS-4.6 (T) 0.042 0.00 0.00 BS-4.6 (T) 0.036 0.00 0.00 BS-4.6 (T) 0.036 0.00 0.00 5 5 5 4 4 4 5 5 4 5 5 4 5 4
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN ************** 58. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@odandetech.com * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 304 of 493
* SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

This example demonstrates the application of support displacement load (commonly known as sinking support) on a space frame structure.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE TEST FOR SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates. UNITS METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 305 of 493
JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 0.0 3.0 0.0 3 6.0 3.0 0.0 ; 4 6.0 0.0 0.0 5 6.0 3.0 6.0 ; 6 6.0 0.0. 6.0 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2 3 4 3 5 ; 5 5 6 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. UNIT MMS MEMB PROP
1 TO 5 PRIS AX 6450 IZ 1.249E+08 IY 1.249E+08 IX 4.162E+06
Member properties have been defined above using the PRISMATIC attribute. Values of AX (area), IZ (moment of inertia about major axis), IY (moment of inertia about minor axis) and IX (torsional constant) are provided in MMS unit. CONSTANT E 210. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are specified following the command CONSTANT. SUPPORT 1 4 6 FIXED Joints 1, 4 and 6 are fixed supports. LOADING 1 SINKING SUPPORT Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT LOAD 4 FY 15 Load 1 is a support displacement load which is also commonly known as a sinking support. FY signifies that the support settlement is in the global Y direction and the value of this settlement is 15mm downward. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 306 of 493
The above PRINT command instructs the program to print joint displacements, support reactions and member forces. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * ****************************************************
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
STAAD SPACE TEST FOR SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT UNITS METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 0.0 3.0 0.0 3 6.0 3.0 0.0 ; 4 6.0 0.0 0.0 5 6.0 3.0 6.0 ; 6 6.0 0.0 6.0 MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2 3 4 3 5 ; 5 5 6 UNIT MMS MEMB PROP 1 TO 5 PRIS AX 6450 IZ 1.249E+08 IY 1.249E+08 CONSTANT E 210. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL SUPPORT 1 4 6 FIXED LOADING 1 SINKING SUPPORT SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT LOAD 4 FY -15. PERFORM ANALYSIS
IX 4.162E+06
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 6/ 5/ ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 2/ 2/ 12 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.6 MB 3 18
22. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS ANALYSIS RESULTS
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 LOAD 1 1 1 1 1 1 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.2737 0.2735 0.0000 0.0323 0.0000
RADIANS)
STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
Y-TRANS 0.0000 -0.0012 -1.4975 -1.5000 -0.0012 0.0000
Z-TRANS 0.0000 -0.0323 -0.2735 0.0000 -0.2737 0.0000
X-ROTAN 0.0000 -0.0002 -0.0018 0.0000 -0.0019 0.0000
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0006 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0006 0.0000
Z-ROTAN 0.0000 -0.0019 -0.0018 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS ----------------JOINT 1 4 6 LOAD 1 1 1 FORCE-X 0.46 0.43 -0.90
MMS
FORCE-Y 5.63 -11.26 5.63
FORCE-Z 0.90 -0.43 -0.46
MOM-X 2780.50 15509.16 15492.89
MOM-Y -67.13 0.00 67.13
MOM Z 15492.89 15509.16 2780.50
MEMBER END FORCES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 307 of 493
----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS MEMBER 1 LOAD 1 JT 1 2 2 3 3 4 3 5 5 6
MMS SHEAR-Y -0.46 0.46 5.63 -5.63 -0.43 0.43 -5.63 5.63 0.90 -0.90 SHEAR-Z 0.90 -0.90 0.90 -0.90 0.43 -0.43 -0.90 0.90 0.46 -0.46 TORSION -67.13 67.13 94.34 -94.34 MOM-Y -2780.50 94.34 -67.13 -5305.18 MOM-Z 15492.89 -16878.26 16878.26 16904.28 -16809.94 15509.16 -16904.28 -16878.26 -94.34 2780.50
AXIAL 5.63 -5.63 0.46 -0.46 -11.26 11.26 0.46 -0.46 5.63 -5.63
0.00 -16809.94 0.00 15509.16 -94.34 94.34 5305.18 67.13
67.13 -16878.26 -67.13 15492.89
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 23. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****

This is an example of prestress loading in a plane frame structure. It covers two situations: 1) From the member on which it is applied, the prestressing effect is transmitted to the rest of the structure through the connecting members (known in the program as PRESTRESS load). 2) The prestressing effect is experienced by the member(s) alone and not transmitted to the rest of the structure (known in the program as POSTSTRESS load).
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 308 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE FRAME WITH PRESTRESSING LOAD Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORD 1 0. 0. ; 2 12. 0. ; 3 0. 6. ; 4 12. 6. 5 0. 10.5 ; 6 12. 10.5 ; 7 0. 15. ; 8 12. 15. Joint number followed by X and Y coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators, and that allows us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 3 ; 2 3 5 ; 3 5 7 ; 4 2 4 ; 5 4 6 6 6 8 ; 7 3 4 ; 8 5 6 ; 9 7 8 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. SUPPORT 1 2 FIXED
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 309 of 493
The supports at joints 1 and 2 are defined to be fixed supports. MEMB PROP 1 TO 9 PRI AX 0.2044 IZ 8.631E-03 Member properties are provided using the PRI (prismatic) attribute. Values of area (AX) and moment of inertia about the major axis (IZ) are provided. UNIT MMS CONSTANT E 21. ALL ; POISS CONC ALL CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio, etc. Length unit is changed from METER to MMS to facilitate the input. LOADING 1 PRESTRESSING LOAD MEMBER PRESTRESS 7 8 FORCE 1350. ES 75. EM -300. EE 75. Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. Load 1 contains PRESTRESS load. Members 7 and 8 have a cable force of 1350 KNs. The location of the cable at the start (ES) and end (EE) is 75 MMs above the centre of gravity while at the middle (EM) it is 300 MMs below the c.g. The assumptions and facts associated with this type of loading are explained in section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual. LOADING 2 POSTSTRESSING LOAD MEMBER POSTSTRESS 7 8 FORCE 1350. ES 75. EM -300. EE 75. Load case 2 is initiated followed by a title. Load 2 is a POSTSTRESS load. Members 7 and 8 have a cable force of 1350 KNs. The location of the cable is the same as in load case 1. For a difference between PRESTRESS loading and POSTSTRESS loading, as well as additional information about both types of loads, please refer to section 1 of the Technical Reference Manual. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to perform the analysis. UNIT METER PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The above command is an instruction to write joint displacements, support reactions and member forces in the output file. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE FRAME WITH PRESTRESSING LOAD
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 310 of 493
2. UNIT METER KNS 3. JOINT COORD 4. 1 0. 0. ; 2 12. 0. ; 3 0. 6. ; 4 12. 6. 5. 5 0. 10.5 ; 6 12. 10.5 ; 7 0. 15. ; 8 12. 15. 6. MEMBER INCIDENCE 7. 1 1 3 ; 2 3 5 ; 3 5 7 ; 4 2 4 ; 5 4 6 8. 6 6 8 ; 7 3 4 ; 8 5 6 ; 9 7 8 9. SUPPORT 10. 1 2 FIXED 11. MEMB PROP 12. 1 TO 9 PRI AX 0.2044 IZ 8.631E-03 13. UNIT MMS 14. CONSTANT 15. E 21. ALL ; POISS CONC ALL 16. LOADING 1 PRESTRESSING LOAD 17. MEMBER PRESTRESS 18. 7 8 FORCE 1350. ES 75. EM -300. EE 75. 19. LOADING 2 POSTSTRESSING LOAD 20. MEMBER POSTSTRESS 21. 7 8 FORCE 1350. ES 75. EM -300. EE 75. 22. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 8/ 9/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 2/ 2/ 9 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38898.1 MB 23. UNIT METER 24. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM RADIANS) -----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE
18
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.1917 0.0000 -0.1917 0.0000 0.1799 0.0000 -0.1799 0.0000 -0.0014 0.0000 0.0014 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0004 0.0000 -0.0004 0.0000 0.0008 0.0000 -0.0008 0.0000 0.0002 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS METE -----------------
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 2 1 2 1 2 -30.59 0.00 30.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-X 80.49 0.00 -80.49 0.00
MOM-Y
MOM Z
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 3 5 3 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
0.00 30.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 80.49 0.00 -30.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 103.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 62.59 0.00 0.00 -62.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 121.89 0.00 159.77 0.00 0.00
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 311 of 493
5 3 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 2 9 1 2 5 7 5 7 2 4 2 4 4 6 4 6 6 8 6 8
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00 50.98 -4.64 0.00 0.00
0.00 10.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -10.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 -30.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 -80.49 0.00 30.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 -103.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -62.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 -121.89 0.00 62.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 -159.77 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -10.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 10.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -168.75 0.00 -168.75 0.00 -168.75 0.00 -168.75 0.00 -168.75 0.00 -168.75 0.00 -168.75 0.00 -168.75 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -50.98 4.64 0.00 0.00
3 1371.41 4 -1371.41 3 1339.41 4 -1339.41 5 1287.12 6 -1287.12 5 1339.41 6 -1339.41
0.00 -326.21 0.00 326.21 0.00 -101.25 0.00 101.25 0.00 -312.00 0.00 312.00 0.00 -101.25 0.00 101.25 4.64 -4.64 0.00 0.00
7 -10.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 8 10.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 7 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 8 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 312 of 493
This example illustrates modelling of structures with OFFSET connections. OFFSET connections arise when the centre lines of the connected members do not intersect at the connection point. The connection eccentricity behaves as a rigid link and is modeled through specification of MEMBER OFFSETS.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE TEST FOR MEMBER OFFSETS Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORD 1 0. 0. ; 2 6. 0. ; 3 0. 4.5 4 6. 4.5 ; 5 0. 9. ; 6 6. 9. Joint number followed by X and Y coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. This allows us to provide multiple sets of data in one line. SUPPORT 1 2 PINNED
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 313 of 493
Pinned supports are specified at joints 1 and 2. The word PINNED signifies that no moments will be carried by these supports. MEMB INCI 1 1 3 2 ; 3 3 5 4 5 3 4 ; 6 5 6 ; 7 1 4 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMB PROP BRITISH 1 TO 4 TABLE ST UC356X368X129 5 6 TA ST UB305X165X40 7 TA LD UA200X150X12 All member properties are from British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. LD stands for long leg back-to-back double angle. UNIT MMS MEMB OFFSET 5 6 START 178. 0.0 0.0 5 6 END -178. 0.0 0.0 7 END -178.0 152.0 0.0 The above specification states that an OFFSET is located at the START/END joint of the members. The X, Y and Z global coordinates of the offset distance from the corresponding incident joint are also provided. These attributes are applied to members 5, 6 and 7. CONSTANT E 210. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are provided following the keyword CONSTANT. LOADING 1 WIND LOAD Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. JOINT LOAD 3 FX 225.0 ; 5 FX 112.5 Load 1 contains joint loads at nodes 3 and 5. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command is an instruction to perform the analysis. UNIT METER PRINT FORCES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 314 of 493
PRINT REACTIONS The above PRINT commands are instructions for writing the member forces and support reactions to the output file. FINISH This command terminates a STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. STAAD PLANE TEST FOR MEMBER OFFSETS UNIT METER KNS JOINT COORD 1 0. 0. ; 2 6. 0. ; 3 0. 4.5 4 6. 4.5 ; 5 0. 9. ; 6 6. 9. SUPPORT 1 2 PINNED MEMB INCI 1 1 3 2 ; 3 3 5 4 5 3 4 ; 6 5 6 ; 7 1 4 MEMB PROP BRITISH 1 TO 4 TABLE ST UC356X368X129 5 6 TA ST UB305X165X40 7 TA LD UA200X150X12 UNIT MMS MEMB OFFSET 5 6 START 178. 0.0 0.0 5 6 END -178. 0.0 0.0 7 END -178.0 -152.0 0.0 CONSTANT E 210. ALL POISSON STEEL ALL LOADING 1 WIND LOAD JOINT LOAD 3 FX 225.0 ; 5 FX 112.5 PERFORM ANALYSIS
27. UNIT METER 28. PRINT FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 3 2 4 3 5
-49.12 49.12 337.50 -337.50 -30.76 30.76
-20.25 20.25 -25.13 25.13 53.78 -53.78
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
4.59 -95.70 0.00 -113.07 151.00 91.03
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 315 of 493
4 6
30.76 -30.76
58.72 -58.72
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
170.71 93.52 -52.03 -51.62
3 299.03 -18.37 0.00 4 -299.03 18.37 0.00 MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z
TORSION
MOM-Y
MOM-Z
5 6 1 4
58.72 -58.72 -479.32 479.32
-30.76 30.76 -1.95 1.95
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-85.55 -88.04 -4.59 -9.61
29. PRINT REACTIONS
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS ----------------JOINT 1 2 LOAD 1 1 FORCE-X -362.63 25.13
METE
FORCE-Y -337.50 337.50
FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00
MOM-X 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@netcom.ca * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

In this example, concrete design is performed on some members of a space frame structure. Design calculations consist of computation of reinforcement for beams and columns. Secondary
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 316 of 493
moments on the columns are obtained through the means of a P-Delta analysis.
The above example represents a space frame, and the members are made of concrete. The input in the next page will show the dimensions of the members. Two load cases, namely one for dead plus live load and another with dead, live and wind load, are considered in the design. Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE FRAME WITH CONCRETE DESIGN Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATE 1 0 0 0 ; 2 5.4 0 0 ; 3 11.4 0. 0 4 0 0 7.2 ; 5 5.4 0 7.2 ; 6 11.4 0 7.2 7 0 3.6 0 ; 8 5.4 3.6 0 ; 9 11.4 3.6 0 10 0 3.6 7.2 ; 11 5.4 3.6 7.2 ; 12 11.4 3.6 7.2 13 5.4 7.2 0 ; 14 11.4 7.2 0 ; 15 5.4 7.2 7.2 16 11.4 7.2 7.2 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to facilitate input of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 7 ; 2 4 10 ; 3 2 8 ; 4 8 13
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 317 of 493
5 5 11 ; 6 11 15 ; 7 3 9 9 6 12 ; 10 12 16 ; 11 7 13 10 11 14 ; 15 13 14 ; 17 7 10 ; 18 8 11 ; 19 9 20 13 15 ; 21 14 16
; 8 9 14 8 12 16 15 16 12
Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. UNIT MMS MEMB PROP 1 2 PRISMATIC YD 300.0 IZ 2.119E08 IY 2.119E08 IX 4.237E08 3 TO 10 PR YD 300.0 ZD 300.0 IZ 3.596E08 IY 3.596E08 IX 5.324E08 11 TO 21 PR YD 535.0 ZD 380 IZ 2.409E09 IY 1.229E09 IX 2.704E09 All member properties are provided using the PRISMATIC option. YD and ZD stand for depth and width. If ZD is not provided, a circular shape with diameter = YD is assumed for that cross section. All properties required for the analysis, such as, Area, Moments of Inertia, etc. are calculated automatically from these dimensions unless these are explicitly defined. For this particular example, moments of inertia (IZ, IY) and torsional constant (IX) are provided, so these will not be re-calculated. The IX, IY, and IZ values provided in this example are only half the values of a full section to account for the fact that the full moments of inertia will not be effective due to cracking of concrete. CONSTANT E 21.0 ALL POISSON CONC ALL UNIT METER CONSTANT DEN 23.56 ALL The CONSTANT command initiates input for material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio, Density, etc. Length unit is changed from MM to METER to facilitate input for DENsity. The built-in value for Poissons ratio for concrete will be used in the analysis. SUPPORT 1 TO 6 FIXED Joints 1 to 6 are fixed supports. LOAD 1 (1.4DL + 1.7LL) Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. SELF Y -1.4 The selfweight of the structure is applied in the global Y direction with a -1.4 factor. Since global Y is vertically upward, the negative factor indicates that this load will act downwards.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 318 of 493
MEMB LOAD 11 TO 16 UNI Y -42.0 11 TO 16 UNI Y -76.5 Load 1 contains member loads also. Y indicates that the load is in the local Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. LOAD 2 .75 (1.4DL + 1.7LL + 1.7WL) Load case 2 is initiated followed by a title. REPEAT LOAD 1 0.75 The above command will gather the load data values from load case 1, multiply them with a factor of 0.75 and utilize the resulting values in load 2. JOINT LOAD 15 16 FZ 40.0 11 FZ 90.0 12 FZ 70.0 10 FZ 40.0 Load 2 contains some additional joint loads also. FZ indicates that the load is a force in the global Z direction. PDELTA ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The analysis type is PDELTA indicating that second-order effects are to be calculated. PRINT FORCES LIST 2 5 9 14 16 Member end forces are printed using the above PRINT commands. The LIST option restricts the print output to the members listed. START CONCRETE DESIGN The above command initiates a concrete design. CODE BRITISH TRACK 1.0 MEMB 14 TRACK 2.0 MEMB 16 MAXMAIN 40 ALL The values for the concrete design parameters are defined in the above commands. Design is performed per the BS 8110 Code. The TRACK value dictates the extent of design related information provided in the output. MAXMAIN indicates that the maximum size of main reinforcement is the 40 mm bar. These parameters are described in the manual where British concrete design related information is available.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 319 of 493
DESIGN BEAM 14 16 The above command instructs the program to design beams 14 and 16 for flexure, shear and torsion. DESIGN COLUMN 2 5 The above command instructs the program to design columns 2 and 5 for axial load and biaxial bending. END CONCRETE DESIGN This will end the concrete design. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE FRAME WITH CONCRETE DESIGN 2. UNIT METER KNS 3. JOINT COORDINATE 4. 1 0 0 0 ; 2 5.4 0 0 ; 3 11.4 0. 0 5. 4 0 0 7.2 ; 5 5.4 0 7.2 ; 6 11.4 0 7.2 6. 7 0 3.6 0 ; 8 5.4 3.6 0 ; 9 11.4 3.6 0 7. 10 0 3.6 7.2 ; 11 5.4 3.6 7.2 ; 12 11.4 3.6 7.2 8. 13 5.4 7.2 0 ; 14 11.4 7.2 0 ; 15 5.4 7.2 7.2 9. 16 11.4 7.2 7.2 10. MEMBER INCIDENCE 11. 1 1 7 ; 2 4 10 ; 3 2 8 ; 4 8 13 12. 5 5 11 ; 6 11 15 ; 7 3 9 ; 8 9 14 13. 9 6 12 ; 10 12 16 ; 11 7 8 12 14. 13 10 11 14 ; 15 13 14 ; 16 15 16 15. 17 7 10 ; 18 8 11 ; 19 9 12 16. 20 13 15 ; 21 14 16 17. UNIT MMS 18. MEMB PROP 19. 1 2 PRISMATIC YD 300.0 IZ 2.119E08 IY 2.119E08 20. IX 4.237E08 21. 3 TO 10 PR YD 300.0 ZD 300.0 IZ 3.596E08 IY 3.596E08 22. IX 5.324E08 23. 11 TO 21 PR YD 535.0 ZD 380 IZ 2.409E09 IY 1.229E09 24. IX 2.704E09 25. CONSTANT 26. E 21.0 ALL 27. POISSON CONC ALL 28. UNIT METER 29. CONSTANT 30. DEN 23.56 ALL 31. SUPPORT 32. 1 TO 6 FIXED 33. LOAD 1 (1.4DL + 1.7LL) 34. SELF Y -1.4 35. MEMB LOAD 36. 11 TO 16 UNI Y -42.0 37. 11 TO 16 UNI Y -76.5 38. LOAD 2 .75 (1.4DL + 1.7LL + 1.7WL) 39. REPEAT LOAD 40. 1 0.75
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 320 of 493
41. JOINT LOAD 42. 15 16 FZ 40.0 43. 11 FZ 90.0 44. 12 FZ 70.0 45. 10 FZ 40.0 46. PDELTA ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 16/ 21/ 6 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 6/ 5/ 30 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 2 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.1/ 38898.0 MB 47. PRINT FORCES LIST 2 5 9 14 16 MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT 2 1 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 0.00 0.00 1.32 -1.32 0.00 0.00 1.13 -1.13 3.42 -23.51 6.88 -42.65 57.70 -20.28 56.75 -34.54 3.57 -6.04 7.18 -4.23 122.65 -9.07 111.93 -7.63 MOM-Y MOM-Z
60
4 302.06 -18.38 -2.86 10 -293.67 18.38 2.86 2 4 243.86 -15.23 -31.79 10 -237.56 15.23 31.79 5 1289.48 11 -1278.80 2 5 1015.60 11 -1007.58 1 1 -2.85 -2.99 2.85 2.99 -4.64 -65.16 4.64 65.16
6 758.87 19.98 -2.77 12 -748.19 -19.98 2.77 2 6 620.14 12.66 -65.97 12 -612.13 -12.66 65.97 1
0.00 3.31 21.28 0.00 6.66 50.63 0.16 124.64 11.63 -0.16 112.84 33.93
14
11 -40.63 434.78 0.00 -0.26 -0.01 497.77 12 40.63 316.45 0.00 0.26 0.00 -142.77 2 11 -34.51 326.81 2.92 -1.03 -11.89 375.10 12 34.51 236.61 -2.92 1.03 -5.62 -104.51 15 61.00 378.46 0.00 0.03 0.00 141.62 16 -61.00 372.77 0.00 -0.03 0.00 -124.55 2 15 45.73 283.67 0.36 -0.13 -1.21 105.72 16 -45.73 279.76 -0.36 0.13 -0.95 -93.99 1
16
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 48. START CONCRETE DESIGN 49. CODE BRITISH 50. TRACK 1.0 MEMB 14 51. TRACK 2.0 MEMB 16 52. MAXMAIN 40 ALL 53. DESIGN BEAM 14 16 ==================================================================== B E A M N O. 14 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE
LEN - 6000. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 380. X 535. mm LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO mm mm mm STA END ------------------------------------------------------------------ANCHOR
1 35. 5- 20 MM 740. 6000. NO YES |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL POS MOMENT= 257.07 KN-M AT 3500. mm, LOAD 1| | REQD STEEL= 1353. mm2, ROW=0.0067, ROWMX=0.0400,ROWMN=0.0013 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 190./ 45./ 58. mm | |----------------------------------------------------------------| 487. 4- 32 MM 0. 1760. YES NO COMP. 3- 12 MM (REQD. STEEL= 338. SQ. MM) |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 497.75 KN-M AT 0. mm, LOAD 1| | REQD STEEL= 3155. mm2, ROW=0.0155, ROWMX=0.0400,ROWMN=0.0013 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 164./ 37./ 147. mm | |----------------------------------------------------------------| 3 497. 7- 12 MM 4740. 6000. NO YES 2
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 321 of 493
|----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL NEG MOMENT= 142.76 KN-M AT 6000. mm, LOAD 1| | REQD STEEL= 707. mm2, ROW=0.0035, ROWMX=0.0400,ROWMN=0.0013 | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 183./ 37./ 41. mm | |----------------------------------------------------------------|
B E A M N O.
14 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR
PROVIDE SHEAR LINKS AS FOLLOWS |----------------------------------------------------------------| | FROM - TO | MAX. SHEAR | LOAD | LINKS | NO. | SPACING C/C | |----------------|------------|------|-------|-----|-------------| | END 1 2000 mm | 434.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 26 | 79 mm | | 2000 3500 mm | 184.4 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 6 | 249 mm | | 3500 5000 mm | 191.2 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 6 | 249 mm | | 5000 END 2 | 316.4 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 9 | 124 mm | |----------------------------------------------------------------| ___ 11J____________________ 6000.X 380.X 535_____________________ 12J____ | ===============|| ||===================== 7No12 H 497.4740.TO|6000 | | 4No32 H 487.| |0.TO 1760 ||||||||| | 26*8 c/c 79 | | | | | | 9*8 c/c124| | | | ||||||| ||||||||| | 5No20 H |35.|740.TO 6000 ||||||||| | ==================================================================|| |___________________________________________________________________________| ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ | | | | | | | | | ooooooo | | OOOO | | OOOO | | | | | | 7T12 | | 4T32 | | 4T32 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 5T20 | | 5T20 | | 5T20 | | 5T20 | | | | ooooo | | ooooo | | ooooo | | ooooo | |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________|
==================================================================== B E A M N O. 16 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE
LEN - 6000. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 380. X 535. mm LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO mm mm mm STA END ------------------------------------------------------------------1 2 3 41. 497. 495. 4- 32 MM 7- 12 MM 4- 16 MM 0. 0. 5240. ANCHOR
6000. YES YES 760. YES NO 6000. NO YES
REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY : ------------------------------SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) ( MM ) (SQ. MM ) (KN-METER) 0. 500. 1000. 1500. 2000. 2500. 3000. 3500. 4000. 4500. 5000. 5500. 6000. 0.0/ 700.6 264.3/ 0.0 876.1/ 0.0 1527.2/ 0.0 2064.2/ 0.0 2432.0/ 0.0 2571.9/ 0.0 2454.9/ 0.0 2105.6/ 0.0 1581.4/ 0.0 938.8/ 0.0 264.3/ 0.0 0.0/ 611.1 0.00/ 141.61 31.96/ 0.00 174.23/ 0.00 285.21/ 0.00 364.88/ 0.00 413.25/ 0.00 430.32/ 0.00 416.09/ 0.00 370.57/ 0.00 293.74/ 0.00 185.61/ 0.00 46.18/ 0.00 0.00/ 124.54 0/ 1 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 1/ 0 0/ 1
LOAD(+VE/-VE)
B E A M N O.
16 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR
PROVIDE SHEAR LINKS AS FOLLOWS |----------------------------------------------------------------| | FROM - TO | MAX. SHEAR | LOAD | LINKS | NO. | SPACING C/C | |----------------|------------|------|-------|-----|-------------| | END 1 2000 mm | 378.5 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 26 | 79 mm | | 2000 3000 mm | 128.1 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 4 | 249 mm | | 3000 4000 mm | 122.4 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 4 | 249 mm | | 4000 END 2 | 372.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 26 | 79 mm | |----------------------------------------------------------------|
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 322 of 493
___ 15J____________________ 6000.X 380.X 535_____________________ 16J____ ||======== =========|| | 7No12 H 497. 0.TO 760 4No16 H 495.5240.TO|6000 | ||||| |||||| | 26*8 c/c 79 26*8 c/c 79| | | ||||| |||||| | 4No32 H 41. 0.TO 6000 |||||| ||=========================================================================|| |___________________________________________________________________________| ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ | ooooooo | | | | | | | | oooo | | 7T12 | | | | | | | | 4T16 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 4T32 | | 4T32 | | 4T32 | | 4T32 | | 4T32 | | OOOO | | OOOO | | OOOO | | OOOO | | OOOO | |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________| |___________| ********************END OF BEAM DESIGN************************** 54. DESIGN COLUMN 2 5 ==================================================================== C O L U M N N O. 2 DESIGN RESULTS
FY - 460. FC - 30. N/MM2 CIRC SIZE 300. MM DIAMETER AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 1586. SQ. MM. BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION ---------------------------------------------------8 16 MM 2.244 2 EACH END (ARRANGE COLUMN REINFORCEMENTS SYMMETRICALLY) ==================================================================== C O L U M N N O. 5 DESIGN RESULTS
FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM2 SQRE SIZE - 300. X 300. MM, AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 2499. SQ. MM. BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION ---------------------------------------------------8 20 MM 2.793 2 EACH END (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE) ********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN RESULTS******************** 55. END CONCRETE DESIGN 56. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 323 of 493

The space frame structure in this example consists of frame members and finite elements (plates). The finite element part is used to model floor slabs and a shear wall. Concrete design of an element is performed.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE

* EXAMPLE PROBLEM WITH FRAME MEMBERS AND FINITE ELEMENTS
Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The second line forms the title to identify this project. UNIT METER NEWTON The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORD 1000;2006 REP ALL 2 6 0 0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 324 of 493
7 0 4.5 0 11 0 4.5 6 12 1.5 4.5 0 14 4.5 4.5 0 15 1.5 4.5 6 17 4.5 4.5 6 18 6 4.5 0 22 6 4.5 6 23 7.5 4.5 0 25 10.5 4.5 0 26 7.5 4.5 6 28 10.5 4.5 6 29 12 4.5 0 33 12 4.5 6 34 6 1.125 0 36 6 3.375 0 37 6 1.125 6 39 6 3.375 6 The joint numbers and their coordinates are defined through the above set of commands. The automatic generation facility has been used several times in the above lines. Users may refer to section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual where the joint coordinate generation facilities are described. MEMBER INCI *COLUMNS 1 1 7 ; 2 2 11 3 3 34 ; 4 34 35 ; 5 35 36 ; 6 36 18 7 4 37 ; 8 37 38 ; 9 38 39 ; 10 39 22 11 5 29 ; 12 6 33 *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=0 13 7 8 16 *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=6.0 17 18 19 20 *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=12.0 21 29 30 24 *BEAMS IN X DIRECTION AT Z = 0 25 7 12 ; 26 12 13 ; 27 13 14 ; 28 14 18 29 18 23 ; 30 23 24 ; 31 24 25 ; 32 25 29 *BEAMS IN X DIRECTION AT Z = 12.0 33 11 15 ; 34 15 16 ; 35 16 17 ; 36 17 22 37 22 26 ; 38 26 27 ; 39 27 28 ; 40 28 33 The member incidences are defined through the above set of commands. For some members, the member number followed by the start and end joint numbers are defined. In other cases, STAAD's automatic generation facilities are utilized. Section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual describes these facilities in detail. DEFINE MESH A JOINT 7 B JOINT 11 C JOINT 22 D JOINT 18 E JOINT 33 F JOINT 29 G JOINT 3 H JOINT 4 The above lines define the nodes of super-elements. Super-elements are plate/shell surfaces from which a number of individual plate/shell elements can be generated. In this case, the points describe the outer corners of a slab and that of a shear wall. Our goal is to define the slab
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 325 of 493
and the wall as several plate/shell elements. GENERATE ELEMENT MESH ABCD 4 4 MESH DCEF 4 4 MESH DCHG 4 4 The above lines form the instructions to generate individual 4-noded elements from the superelement profiles. For example, the command MESH ABCD 4 4 means that STAAD has to generate 16 elements from the surface formed by the points A, B, C and D with 4 elements along the edges AB & CD and 4 elements along the edges BC & DA. UNIT MMS MEMB PROP 1 TO 40 PRIS YD 300 ZD 300 Members 1 to 40 are defined as a rectangular prismatic section with 300 mm depth and 300 mm width. ELEM PROP 41 TO 88 TH 150 Elements 41 to 88 are defined to be 150 mm thick. CONSTANT E 21000 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The modulus of elasticity and Poissons ratio are defined above for all the members and elements following the keyword CONSTANT. SUPPORT 1 TO 6 FIXED Joints 1 to 6 are defined as fixed supported. UNIT KNS METER LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD FROM FLOOR ELEMENT LOAD 41 TO 72 PRESSURE -10.0 Load 1 consists of a pressure load of 10 KNS/sq.m. intensity on elements 41 to 72. The negative sign (and the default value for the axis) indicates that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of the element local z-axis. LOAD 2 WIND LOAD JOINT LOAD 11 33 FZ -90. 22 FZ -450. Load 2 consists of joint loads in the Z direction at joints 11, 22 and 33.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 326 of 493
LOAD COMB 3 1 0.9 2 1.3 Load 3 is a combination of 0.9 times load case 1 and 1.3 times load case 2. PERFORM ANALYSIS The command to perform an elastic analysis is specified above. LOAD LIST 1 3 PRINT SUPP REAC PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 27 PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 47 Support reactions, members forces and element stresses are printed for load cases 1 and 3. START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE BRITISH DESIGN ELEMENT 47 END CONCRETE DESIGN The above set of command form the instructions to STAAD to perform a concrete design on element 47. Design is done according to the British code. Note that design will consist only of flexural reinforcement calculations in the longitudinal and transverse directions of the elements for the moments MX and MY. FINI The STAAD run is terminated.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE 2. * EXAMPLE PROBLEM WITH FRAME MEMBERS AND FINITE ELEMENTS 3. UNIT METER NEWTON 4. JOINT COORD 5. 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 0 6 6. REP ALL 2 6 0 0 7. 7 0 4.5 0 11 0 4.5 6 8. 12 1.5 4.5 0 14 4.5 4.5 0 9. 15 1.5 4.5 6 17 4.5 4.5 6 10. 18 6 4.5 0 22 6 4.5 6 11. 23 7.5 4.5 0 25 10.5 4.5 0 12. 26 7.5 4.5 6 28 10.5 4.5 6 13. 29 12 4.5 0 33 12 4.5 6 14. 34 6 1.125 0 36 6 3.375 0 15. 37 6 1.125 6 39 6 3.375 6 16. MEMBER INCI 17. *COLUMNS 18. 1 1 7 ; 2 2 11 19. 3 3 34 ; 4 34 35 ; 5 35 36 ; 6 36 18 20. 7 4 37 ; 8 37 38 ; 9 38 39 ; 10 39 22 21. 11 5 29 ; 12 6 33 22. *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=0 23. 13 7 8 16 24. *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=6.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 327 of 493
25. 17 18 19 20 26. *BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION AT X=12.0 27. 21 29 30 24 28. *BEAMS IN X DIRECTION AT Z = 0 29. 25 7 12 ; 26 12 13 ; 27 13 14 ; 28 14 18 30. 29 18 23 ; 30 23 24 ; 31 24 25 ; 32 25 29 31. *BEAMS IN X DIRECTION AT Z = 12.0 32. 33 11 15 ; 34 15 16 ; 35 16 17 ; 36 17 22 33. 37 22 26 ; 38 26 27 ; 39 27 28 ; 40 28 33 34. DEFINE MESH 35. A JOINT 7 36. B JOINT 11 37. C JOINT 22 38. D JOINT 18 39. E JOINT 33 40. F JOINT 29 41. G JOINT 3 42. H JOINT 4 43. GENERATE ELEMENT 44. MESH ABCD 4 4 45. MESH DCEF 4 4 46. MESH DCHG 4 4 47. UNIT MMS 48. MEMB PROP 49. 1 TO 40 PRIS YD 300 ZD 300 50. ELEM PROP 51. 41 TO 88 TH 150 52. CONSTANT 53. E 21000 ALL 54. POISSON CONCRETE ALL 55. SUPPORT 56. 1 TO 6 FIXED 57. UNIT KNS METER 58. LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD FROM FLOOR 59. ELEMENT LOAD 60. 41 TO 72 PRESSURE -10.0 61. LOAD 2 WIND LOAD 62. JOINT LOAD 63. 11 33 FZ -90. 64. 22 FZ -450. 65. LOAD COMB 3 66. 1 0.9 2 1.3 67. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 69/ 88/ 6 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 65/ 12/ 78 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 31 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.6/ 38897.9 MB 68. LOAD LIST 1 3 69. PRINT SUPP REAC SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS METE ----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE MOM-X MOM-Y MOM Z
390
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 8.18 74.29 7.47 68.32 8.18 74.29 7.29 65.42 0.00 211.43 0.00 791.68 0.00 211.43 0.00 -411.15 -8.18 74.29 -7.47 68.32 -8.18 74.29 -7.29 65.42 10.38 10.88 -10.38 -7.75 67.76 476.07 -67.76 336.67 10.38 10.88 -10.38 -7.75
15.47 0.00 -12.19 17.77 0.05 -11.04 -15.47 0.00 -12.19 -9.88 0.23 -10.99 -10.53 0.00 0.00 12.76 0.00 0.00 10.53 0.00 0.00 31.06 0.00 0.00 15.47 0.00 12.19 17.77 -0.05 11.04 -15.47 0.00 12.19 -9.88 -0.23 10.99
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 70. PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 27 MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 328 of 493
MEMBER LOAD JT 27 1
AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION -21.62 3.71 -19.51 3.65
MOM-Y
MOM-Z
13 0.67 -11.94 -0.06 6.77 0.05 14 -0.67 11.94 0.06 -6.77 0.05 3 13 22.11 -10.57 -0.72 6.29 0.53 14 -22.11 10.57 0.72 -6.29 0.55
71. PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 47 ELEMENT STRESSES FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KNS METE ---------------STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX SQY VONT VONB SX TRESCAT TRESCAB 47 1 MX SY MY SXY MXY
17.15 4.52 -10.44 -13.35 1.27 3310.85 3278.36 -11.85 -16.82 5.07 3705.87 3666.78 TOP : SMAX= -2666.32 SMIN= -3705.87 TMAX= 519.77 ANGLE= 20.7 BOTT: SMAX= 3666.78 SMIN= 2648.07 TMAX= 509.36 ANGLE= 20.4 3 14.96 4.17 -9.54 -11.99 0.99 3078.51 2876.09 -46.18 -59.92 180.34 3479.60 3149.22 TOP : SMAX= -2369.52 SMIN= -3479.60 TMAX= 555.04 ANGLE= 26.5 BOTT: SMAX= 3149.22 SMIN= 2487.70 TMAX= 330.76 ANGLE= 7.2 **** MAXIMUM STRESSES AMONG SELECTED PLATES AND CASES **** MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL SHEAR VONMISES TRESCA STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS
3.666784E+03 -3.705870E+03 5.550363E+02 3.310846E+03 3.705870E+03 PLATE NO. 47 47 47 47 47 CASE NO. 1 1 3 1 1 ********************END OF ELEMENT FORCES******************** 72. START CONCRETE DESIGN 73. CODE BRITISH 74. DESIGN ELEMENT 47 ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS ----------------------------------------MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS. PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS: FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF (mm2/m) (kN-m/m) (mm2/m) (kN-m/m) 47 TOP : BOTT: 195. 205. 0.00 / 0 -10.44 / 1 195. 301. 0.00 / 0 -13.35 / 1 MOM-Y /LOAD
***************************END OF ELEMENT DESIGN************************** 75. END CONCRETE DESIGN 76. FINI
*********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@netcom.ca * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 329 of 493
* GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

A tank structure is modeled with four-noded plate elements. Water pressure from inside is used as loading for the tank. Reinforcement calculations have been done for some elements. Tank Model
Deflected Shape
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 330 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE FINITE ELEMENT MODEL OF TANK * STRUCTURE Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame (3-D) structure. UNITS METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. 0. 5 0. 6. 0. REPEAT 4 1.5. 0. 0. REPEAT 4 0. 0. 1.5. REPEAT 4 -1.5. 0. 0. REPEAT 3 0. 0. 1.5. 81 1.5. 0. 1.5. 83 1.5. 0. 4.5. REPEAT 2 1.5. 0. 0. Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. The REPEAT command generates joint coordinates by repeating the pattern of the previous line of joint coordinates. The number following the REPEAT command is the number of repetitions to be carried out. This is followed by X, Y and Z coordinate increments. This is explained in section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 2 7 6 TO 4 1 1 REPEAT 14 4 5 61 76 77 2 1 TO 64 1 1 65 1 6 81 76 66 76 81 82 71 67 71 82 83 66 68 66 83 56 61 69 6 11 84 81 70 81 84 85 82 71 82 85 86 83 72 83 86 51 56 73 11 16 87 84 74 84 87 88 85 75 85 88 89 86 76 86 89 46 51 77 16 21 26 87 78 87 26 31 88 79 88 31 36 89 80 89 36 41 46 Element connectivities are input as above by providing the element number followed by joint numbers defining the element. The REPEAT command generates element incidences by repeating the pattern of the previous line of element nodes. The number following the REPEAT command is the number of repetitions to be carried out and that is followed by element and joint number increments. This is explained in detail in section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 331 of 493
UNIT MMS ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 80 TH 200.0 Element properties are provided by specifying that the elements are 200.0 mm THick. CONSTANTS E 21.0 ALL POISSON CONC ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are provided following the keyword CONSTANTS. SUPPORT 1 TO 76 BY 5 81 TO 89 PINNED Pinned supports are specified at the joints listed above. No moments will be carried by these supports. The expression 1 TO 76 BY 5 means 1, 6, 11, etc. up to 76. UNIT METER LOAD 1 ELEMENT LOAD 4 TO 64 BY 4 PR 50.0 3 TO 63 BY 4 PR 100.0 2 TO 62 BY 4 PR 150.0 1 TO 61 BY 4 PR 200.0 Load case 1 is initiated. It consists of element loads in the form of uniform PRessure acting along the local z-axis. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. UNIT MMS PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 5 25 45 65 PRINT ELEM FORCE LIST 9 TO 16 Joint displacements for a selected set of nodes and element corner forces for some elements are written in the output file as a result of the above commands. The forces printed are in the global directions at the nodes of the elements. The LIST option restricts the print output to that for the joints/elements listed. START CONCRETE DESIGN The above command initiates concrete design. CODE BRITISH DESIGN SLAB 9 12 Slabs (i.e. elements) 9 and 12 will be designed and the reinforcement requirements obtained. In STAAD, elements are typically designed for the moments MX and MY at the centroid of the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 332 of 493
element. END CONCRETE DESIGN Terminates the concrete design operation. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47.
STAAD SPACE FINITE ELEMENT MODEL OF TANK * STRUCTURE UNITS METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. 0. 5 0. 6. 0. REPEAT 4 1.5 0. 0. REPEAT 4 0. 0. 1.5 REPEAT 4 -1.5 0. 0. REPEAT 3 0. 0. -1.5 81 1.5 0. 1.5 83 1.5 0. 4.5 REPEAT 2 1.5 0. 0. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 2 7 6 TO 4 1 1 REPEAT 14 4 5 61 76 77 2 1 TO 64 1 1 65 1 6 81 76 66 76 81 82 71 67 71 82 83 66 68 66 83 56 61 69 6 11 84 81 70 81 84 85 82 71 82 85 86 83 72 83 86 51 56 73 11 16 87 84 74 84 87 88 85 75 85 88 89 86 76 86 89 46 51 77 16 21 26 87 78 87 26 31 88 79 88 31 36 89 80 89 36 41 46 UNIT MMS ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 80 TH 200.0 CONSTANTS E 21.0 ALL POISSON CONC ALL SUPPORT 1 TO 76 BY 5 81 TO 89 PINNED UNIT METER LOAD 1 ELEMENT LOAD 4 TO 64 BY 4 PR 50.0 3 TO 63 BY 4 PR 100.0 2 TO 62 BY 4 PR 150.0 1 TO 61 BY 4 PR 200.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 89/ 80/ ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 80/ 17/ 108 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 58 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS 25 534
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 333 of 493
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE
13.0/
38897.2 MB
48. UNIT MMS 49. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 5 25 45 65 LOAD 1 1 1 1 X-TRANS -0.0103 0.0103 0.0103 -0.0103 RADIANS)
25
45
65
Y-TRANS 0.0006 0.0006 0.0006 0.0006
Z-TRANS -0.0103 -0.0103 0.0103 0.0103
X-ROTAN 0.0002 0.0002 -0.0002 -0.0002
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN -0.0002 0.0002 0.0002 -0.0002
50. PRINT ELEM FORCE LIST 9 TO 16 ELEMENT FORCES -------------FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KNS MMS
GLOBAL CORNER FORCES JOINT FX FY
FZ
MX
MY
MZ
ELE.NO. 9 FOR LOAD CASE 11 -8.8359E+01 -5.3753E+01 1.8154E+02 12 -8.4106E+01 -6.1780E+00 -1.5632E+02 17 1.4404E+02 4.6568E+01 -1.6787E+02 16 2.8428E+01 1.3363E+01 1.4265E+02
1 1.3170E+05 -4.0959E+04 1.0868E+04 7.9661E+04 5.9853E+04 -1.7299E+04 1.2673E+05 -1.0931E+05 2.2151E+04 1.4820E+05 5.2581E+04 -1.5720E+04
ELE.NO. 10 FOR LOAD CASE 1 12 -1.8792E+02 6.1780E+00 -4.0552E+01 -7.9660E+04 1.0833E+05 4.7652E+04 13 -2.0044E+02 -3.6136E+01 -6.3740E+01 6.9905E+04 1.0284E+05 -5.8259E+04 18 2.3039E+02 -1.4028E+01 3.0854E+01 5.8249E+04 -5.3646E+04 6.1978E+04 17 1.5797E+02 4.3985E+01 7.3437E+01 8.3445E+02 -1.0826E+03 -5.1372E+04 ELE.NO. 11 FOR LOAD CASE 1 13 -2.1198E+02 3.6136E+01 -7.6885E+01 -6.9905E+04 1.2229E+05 5.7388E+04 14 -2.3157E+02 -1.4563E+01 -2.4018E+01 2.6342E+04 1.0499E+05 -6.4697E+04 19 2.0999E+02 -3.2387E+01 8.4179E+01 -1.5610E+04 -2.4207E+04 6.5236E+04 18 2.3355E+02 1.0814E+01 1.6725E+01 -3.1068E+04 -5.1714E+04 -5.7927E+04 ELE.NO. 12 FOR LOAD CASE 1 14 -1.7545E+02 1.4563E+01 -6.0357E+01 -2.6342E+04 1.0566E+05 4.3868E+04 15 -1.7875E+02 8.2356E-07 -2.8125E+01 -4.0310E-02 9.6044E+04 -4.9015E+04 20 1.6418E+02 -2.4213E+00 6.5563E+01 -2.8717E+04 -2.4535E+04 4.5288E+04 19 1.9002E+02 -1.2142E+01 2.2919E+01 -1.0980E+03 -4.4444E+04 -4.0140E+04 ELE.NO. 13 FOR LOAD CASE 1 16 -1.0527E+02 -8.1796E+01 -1.6646E+01 -1.3732E+04 2.6331E+04 1.5180E+04 17 -3.5139E+01 -6.7286E+01 -7.8110E+01 -7.8741E+03 -3.1163E+03 -2.4809E+04 22 1.8422E+02 2.6896E+01 8.1528E+01 -1.7008E+04 6.2736E+04 3.0020E+04 21 -4.3808E+01 1.2219E+02 1.3228E+01 3.3487E+04 5.6183E+04 -2.0392E+04 ELE.NO. 14 FOR LOAD CASE 1 17 -2.6686E+02 -2.3267E+01 -2.2121E+02 -1.1969E+05 18 -2.5280E+02 -5.3068E+00 -1.4951E+02 3.3215E+04 23 2.8137E+02 5.5470E+01 2.2661E+02 -8.0444E+04 22 2.3829E+02 -2.6896E+01 1.4411E+02 5.1267E+04 ELE.NO. 15 FOR LOAD CASE 1 18 -2.1115E+02 8.5202E+00 -1.7932E+02 -6.0396E+04 19 -2.3106E+02 2.8931E+01 -1.4843E+02 4.3665E+04 24 1.9361E+02 1.8019E+01 1.6502E+02 -7.1533E+04 23 2.4860E+02 -5.5470E+01 1.6273E+02 6.3390E+04 ELE.NO. 16 FOR LOAD CASE 1 19 -1.6895E+02 1.5597E+01 -1.2741E+02 -2.6957E+04 20 -1.6418E+02 2.4213E+00 -1.2181E+02 2.8717E+04 25 1.4616E+02 1.3697E-06 1.1804E+02 -5.5252E+04 24 1.8697E+02 -1.8019E+01 1.3119E+02 5.9154E+04 51. START CONCRETE DESIGN 52. CODE BRITISH 53. DESIGN SLAB 9
1.1350E+05 5.4029E+04 5.0983E+04 -5.3096E+04 2.0370E+05 6.3346E+04 1.8790E+05 -6.4279E+04
5.4377E+04 4.9044E+04 4.6709E+04 -5.2522E+04 1.9615E+05 4.9770E+04 1.9439E+05 -4.6292E+04
2.1943E+04 2.7426E+04 2.4535E+04 -4.5288E+04 1.6211E+05 5.5252E+04 1.6525E+05 -3.7391E+04
12
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS ----------------------------------------MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS. PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 334 of 493
FY=460, 6No.16mm FY=250, 4No.16mm ELEMENT
BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre MOM-X /LOAD (kN-m/m) TRANS. REINF (mm2/m) MOM-Y /LOAD (kN-m/m)
LONG. REINF (mm2/m)
9 TOP : BOTT:
260. 341.
0.00 / -24.50 /
0 1
387. 260.
25.20 / 0.00 /
1 0
12 TOP : BOTT:
260. 260.
0.00 / -0.43 /
0 1
1570. 260.
90.22 / 0.00 /
1 0
***************************END OF ELEMENT DESIGN************************** 54. END CONCRETE DESIGN 55. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****

Dynamic analysis (Response Spectrum) is performed for a steel structure. Results of a static and dynamic analysis are combined. The combined results are then used for steel design.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 335 of 493
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANALYSIS Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 6.0 0.0 0.0 3 0.0 3.0 0.0 ; 4 6.0 3.0 0.0 5 0.0 6.0 0.0 ; 6 6.0 6.0 0.0 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates are all the same, in this case, zeros. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators to allow for input of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3 ; 2 2 4 ; 3 3 5 ; 4 4 6 5 3 4 ; 6 5 6 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 336 of 493
MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 1 TO 4 TA ST UC254X254X73 5 TA ST UB305X165X54 6 TA ST UB203X133X30 Properties for all members are assigned from the British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. SUPPORTS 1 2 FIXED Fixed supports are specified at joints 1 and 2. UNIT MMS CONSTANTS E 210.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL DEN 76.977E-09 ALL Material constants such as E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio and DENsity are specified above. Length unit is changed from METER to MMS to facilitate the input. CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 2 The number of mode shapes to be considered in dynamic analysis is set to 2. Without the above command, this will be set to the default which can be found in section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual. * LOAD 1 WILL BE STATIC LOAD UNIT METER LOAD 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOADS Load case 1 is initiated followed by a title. Prior to this, the length unit is changed to METER for specifying distributed member loads. A line starting with an asterisk (*) mark indicates a comment line. SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 The above command indicates that the selfweight of the structure acting in the global Y direction is part of this load case. The factor of -1.0 is meant to indicate that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of global Y, hence downwards. MEMBER LOADS 5 CON GY -25.0 1.8 5 CON GY -37.5 3.0 5 CON GY -25.0 4.2 5 6 UNI Y -22.5 Load 1 contains member loads also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction while Y indicates local Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load while
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 337 of 493
CON stands for concentrated load. GY is followed by the value of the load and the distance at which it is applied. * NEXT LOAD WILL BE RESPONSE SPECTRUM LOAD * WITH MASSES PROVIDED IN TERMS OF LOAD. LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOADING The two lines which begin with the asterisk are comment lines which tell us the purpose of the next load case. Load case 2 is then initiated along with an optional title. This will be a dynamic load case. Permanent masses will be provided in the form of loads. These masses (in terms of loads) will be considered for the eigensolution. Internally, the program converts these loads to masses, hence it is best to specify them as absolute values (without a negative sign). Also, the direction (X, Y, Z etc.) of the loads will correspond to the dynamic degrees of freedom in which the masses are capable of vibrating. In a PLANE frame, only X and Y directions need to be considered. In a SPACE frame, masses (loads) should be provided in all three (X, Y and Z) directions if they are active along all three. The user has the freedom to restrict one or more directions. SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 The above commands indicate that the selfweight of the structure acting in the global X and Y directions with a factor of 1.0 is taken into consideration for the mass matrix. MEMBER LOADS 5 CON GX 25.0 5 CON GY 25.0 5 CON GX 37.5 5 CON GY 37.5 5 CON GX 25.0 5 CON GY 25.0 1.8 1.8 3.0 3.0 4.2 4.2
The mass matrix will also consist of terms derived from the above member loads. GX and GY indicate that the load, and hence the resulting mass, is capable of vibration along the global X and Y directions. The word CON stands for concentrated load. Concentrated forces of 25, 37.5, and 25 kNs are located at 1.8m, 3.0m and 4.2m from the start of member 5. SPECTRUM CQC X 1.0 ACC DAMP 0.05 SCALE 9.806 0.03 1.00 ; 0.05 1.35 0.1 1.95 ; 0.2 2.80 0.5 2.80 ; 1.0 1.60 The above SPECTRUM command specifies that the modal responses be combined using the CQC method (alternatives being the SRSS method, ABS method, etc.). The spectrum effect is in the global X direction with a factor of 1.0. Since this spectrum is in terms of ACCeleration (the other possibility being displacement), the spectrum data is given as period vs. acceleration. Damping ratio of 0.05 (5%) and a scale factor of 9.806 are used. The scale factor is the quantity by which spectral accelerations (and spectral displacements) must be multiplied by before they are used in the calculations. The values of periods and the corresponding accelerations are given in the last 3 lines. LOAD COMBINATION 3
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 338 of 493
1 0.75 2 0.75 LOAD COMBINATION 4 1 0.75 2 -0.75 In a response spectrum analysis, the sign of the forces cannot be determined, and hence are absolute numbers. Consequently, to account for the fact that the force could be positive or negative, it is necessary to create 2 load combination cases. That is what is being done above. Load combination case no. 3 consists of the sum of the static load case (1) with the positive direction of the dynamic load case (2). Load combination case no. 4 consists of the sum of the static load case (1) with the negative direction of the dynamic load case (2). In both cases, the result is factored by 0.75. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT MODE SHAPES This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. The PRINT command instructs the program to print mode shape values. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS Displacements, reactions and member forces are recorded in the output file using the above command. LOAD LIST 1 3 4 PARAMETER CODE BRITISH SELECT ALL A steel design in the form of a member selection is performed based on the rules of the British code. Only the member forces resulting from load cases 1, 3 and 4 will be considered for these calculations. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
STAAD PLANE RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANALYSIS UNIT METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 ; 2 6.0 0.0 0.0 3 0.0 3.0 0.0 ; 4 6.0 3.0 0.0 5 0.0 6.0 0.0 ; 6 6.0 6.0 0.0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3 ; 2 2 4 ; 3 3 5 ; 4 4 5 3 4 ; 6 5 6 MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 1 TO 4 TA ST UC254X254X73 5 TA ST UB305X165X54 6 TA ST UB203X133X30 SUPPORTS 1 2 FIXED
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 339 of 493
16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51.
UNIT MMS CONSTANTS E 210.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL DEN 76.977E-09 ALL CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 2 * LOAD 1 WILL BE STATIC LOAD UNIT METER LOAD 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOADS SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 MEMBER LOADS 5 CON GY -25.0 1.8 5 CON GY -37.5 3.0 5 CON GY -25.0 4.2 5 6 UNI Y -22.5 * NEXT LOAD WILL BE RESPONSE SPECTRUM LOAD * WITH MASSES PROVIDED IN TERMS OF LOAD. LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOADING SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 MEMBER LOADS 5 CON GX 25.0 1.8 5 CON GY 25.0 1.8 5 CON GX 37.5 3.0 5 CON GY 37.5 3.0 5 CON GX 25.0 4.2 5 CON GY 25.0 4.2 SPECTRUM CQC X 1.0 ACC DAMP 0.05 SCALE 9.806 0.03 1.00 ; 0.05 1.35 0.1 1.95 ; 0.2 2.80 0.5 2.80 ; 1.0 1.60 LOAD COMBINATION 3 1 0.75 2 0.75 LOAD COMBINATION 4 1 0.75 2 -0.75 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT MODE SHAPES P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S -----------------------------------
2 12
NUMBER OF MODES REQUESTED = NUMBER OF EXISTING MASSES IN THE MODEL = NUMBER OF MODES THAT WILL BE USED =
2 8 2 2 PERIOD(SEC) ACCURACY
CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE MODE FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC)
1 2
5.179 19.437
0.19308 0.05145
2.209E-10 6.482E-08
The following Frequencies are estimates that were calculated. These are for information only and will not be used. Remaining values are either above the cut off mode/freq values or are of low accuracy. To use these frequencies, rerun with a higher cutoff mode (or mode + freq) value. CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE 2 MODE FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC) PERIOD(SEC) ACCURACY
3 4
50.784 57.172
0.01969 0.01749
2.891E-10 3.977E-10
MODE SHAPES ----------JOINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 MODE 1 1 1 1 1 1 X-TRANS 0.00000 0.00000 0.58328 0.58328 1.00000 1.00000 Y-TRANS 0.00000 0.00000 0.00218 -0.00218 0.00251 -0.00251 Z-TRANS 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 X-ROTAN 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 Y-ROTAN 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 Z-ROTAN 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 -3.863E-03 -3.863E-03 -2.797E-03 -2.797E-03
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 340 of 493
MODE SHAPES ----------JOINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 MODE 2 2 2 2 2 2 X-TRANS 0.00000 0.00000 -0.07067 -0.07067 1.00000 1.00000 Y-TRANS 0.00000 0.00000 0.00282 -0.00282 0.00400 -0.00400 Z-TRANS 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 X-ROTAN 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 Y-ROTAN 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 Z-ROTAN 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 -2.798E-03 -2.798E-03 -9.742E-03 -9.742E-03
RESPONSE LOAD CASE
CQC MODAL COMBINATION METHOD USED. DYNAMIC WEIGHT X Y Z 9.889183E+01 9.889183E+01 MISSING WEIGHT X Y Z -3.077453E-04 -9.889183E+01 MODAL WEIGHT X Y Z 9.889152E+01 6.308759E-36
0.000000E+00 KNS 0.000000E+00 KNS 0.000000E+00 KNS
MODE ---1 2 PARTICIPATION FACTORS
ACCELERATION-G -------------2.74097 1.36730
DAMPING ------0.05000 0.05000
MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT -------------------------------------MODE 1 2 X 98.20 1.80 Y 0.00 0.00 Z 0.00 0.00 SUMM-X 98.197 100.000 SUMM-Y 0.000 0.000 TOTAL TOTAL TOTAL TOTAL SRSS 10PCT ABS CQC SUMM-Z 0.000 0.000 SHEAR SHEAR SHEAR SHEAR
BASE SHEAR IN KNS -----------------X Y Z
266.17 0.00 0.00 2.44 0.00 0.00 --------------------------266.18 0.00 0.00 266.18 0.00 0.00 268.61 0.00 0.00 266.18 0.00 0.00
52. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0042 2.4239 1.8148 -1.8210 0.0042 2.4239 1.8210 -1.8148 0.0163 4.1560 3.1292 -3.1048 -0.0163 4.1560 3.1048 -3.1292
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0283 0.0091 -0.0144 -0.0280 -0.0283 0.0091 -0.0144 -0.0280 -0.0390 0.0104 -0.0214 -0.0371 -0.0390 0.0104 -0.0214 -0.0371
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
X-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0017 0.0063 0.0035 -0.0060 0.0017 0.0063 0.0060 -0.0035 -0.0017 0.0046 0.0022 -0.0047 0.0017 0.0046 0.0047 -0.0022
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS -----------------
METE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 341 of 493
JOINT 1
LOAD 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
FORCE-X 23.48 133.09 117.43 -82.21 -23.48 133.09 82.21 -117.43
FORCE-Y 185.52 59.00 183.39 94.89 185.52 59.00 183.39 94.89
FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z -21.57 250.11 171.40 -203.76 21.57 250.11 203.76 -171.40
1 2 3 4
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
185.52 -183.37 59.00 59.00 183.39 -93.28 94.89 -181.78 185.52 -183.37 59.00 59.00 183.39 -93.28 94.89 -181.78 70.53 -68.38 9.07 9.07 59.70 -44.49 46.10 -58.09 70.53 -68.38 9.07 9.07 59.70 -44.49 46.10 -58.09 -20.16 20.16 0.00 0.00 -15.12 15.12 -15.12 15.12 43.63 -43.63 0.00 0.00 32.73 -32.73 32.73 -32.73
-23.48 23.48 133.09 133.09 82.21 117.43 -117.43 -82.21 23.48 -23.48 133.09 133.09 117.43 82.21 -82.21 -117.43 -43.63 43.63 8.95 8.95 -26.01 39.44 -39.44 26.01 43.63 -43.63 8.95 8.95 39.44 -26.01 26.01 -39.44 112.84 112.84 49.47 49.47 121.73 121.73 47.53 47.53 68.38 68.38 9.04 9.04 58.07 58.07 44.50 44.50
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-21.57 -48.85 250.11 149.17 171.40 75.24 -203.76 -148.52 21.57 48.85 250.11 149.17 203.76 148.52 -171.40 -75.24 -65.87 -65.03 3.88 27.13 -46.49 -28.42 -52.32 -69.12 65.87 65.03 3.88 27.13 52.32 69.12 46.49 28.42 114.73 -114.73 148.41 148.41 197.35 25.26 -25.26 -197.35 65.03 -65.03 27.13 27.13 69.12 -28.42 28.42 -69.12
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
53. 54. 55. 56.
LOAD LIST 1 PARAMETER CODE BRITISH SELECT ALL
STAAD.Pro MEMBER SELECTION - (BSI ) **************************
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 342 of 493
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE
METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST UC254X254X73 PASS 181.78 C 2 ST UC254X254X73 PASS 183.39 C 3 ST UC203X203X46 PASS 46.10 C 4 ST UC203X203X46 PASS 59.70 C 5 ST UB457X191X82 PASS 15.12 T 6 ST UB356X171X45 PASS 32.73 C ANNEX I.1 0.00 ANNEX I.1 0.00 BS-4.3.6 0.00 BS-4.3.6 0.00 BS-4.3.6 0.00 ANNEX I.1 0.00 0.767 203.76 0.767 203.76 0.551 69.12 0.551 69.12 0.898 197.35 0.979 69.12 4 3 4 0.00 3 0.00 3 0.00 4 -
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
57. FINISH
**************************************************************************** **WARNING** SOME MEMBER SIZES HAVE CHANGED SINCE LAST ANALYSIS. IN THE POST PROCESSOR, MEMBER QUERIES WILL USE THE LAST ANALYSIS FORCES WITH THE UPDATED MEMBER SIZES. TO CORRECT THIS INCONSISTENCY, PLEASE DO ONE MORE ANALYSIS. FROM THE UPPER MENU, PRESS RESULTS, UPDATE PROPERTIES, THEN FILE SAVE; THEN ANALYZE AGAIN WITHOUT THE GROUP OR SELECT COMMANDS. ****************************************************************************

This example demonstrates generation of load cases for the type of loading known as a moving load. This type of loading occurs classically when the load-causing units move on the structure, as in the case of trucks on a bridge deck. The mobile loads are discretized into several individual immobile load cases at discrete positions. During this process, enormous number of load cases may be created resulting in plenty of output to
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 343 of 493
be sorted. To avoid looking into a lot of output, the maximum force envelope is requested for a few specific members.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD FLOOR A SIMPLE BRIDGE DECK Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word FLOOR signifies that the structure is a floor structure and the geometry is defined through X and Z axis. UNITS METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 6 7.5 0 0 R 5 0 0 9.0 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Since this is a floor structure, the Y coordinates are all the same, in this case, zeros. The first line generates joints 1 through 6. With the repeat (R) command, the coordinates of the next 30 joints are generated by repeating the pattern of the coordinates of the first 6 joints 5 times with X, Y and Z increments of 0,0 & 9 respectively. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 7 6 7 1 2 11
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 344 of 493
R A 4 11 6 56 31 32 60 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. The fourth number indicates the final member number upto which they will be generated. Repeat all (abbreviated as R A) will create members by repeating the member incidence pattern of the previous 11 members. The number of repetitions to be carried out is provided after the R A command and the member increment and joint increment are defined as 11 and 6 respectively. The fifth line of input defines the member incidences for members 56 to 60. MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 1 TO 60 TA ST UB305X165X40 Properties for all members are assigned from the British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. SUPPORTS 1 TO 6 31 TO 36 PINNED Pinned supports are specified at the above joints. A pinned support is one which can resist only translational forces. UNITS MMS CONSTANTS E 210.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL DEN 76.977E-09 ALL UNIT METER KNS Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity), Poissons ratio and DENsity are specified above following a change in the units of length from METER to MMS. DEFINE MOVING LOAD TYPE 1 LOAD 90.0 90.0 45.0 DISTANCE 3.0 1.5 WIDTH 3.0 The characteristics of the vehicle are defined above in METER and KNS units. The above lines represent the first out of two sets of data required in moving load generation. The type number (1) is a label for identification of the load-causing unit, such as a truck. 3 axles (90 90 45) are specified with the LOAD command. The spacing between the axles in the direction of movement (longitudinal direction) is specified after the DISTANCE command. WIDTH is the spacing in the transverse direction, that is, it is the distance between the 2 prongs of an axle of the truck. LOAD 1 Load case 1 is initiated. SELF Y -1.0 Selfweight of the structure acting in the negative (due to the factor -1.0) global Y direction is
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 345 of 493
the only component of load case 1. LOAD GENERATION 10 TYPE 1 2.25 0. 0. ZI 3.0 This constitutes the second of the two sets of data required for moving load generation. 10 load cases are generated using the Type 1 vehicle whose characteristics were described earlier. For the first of these load cases, the X, Y and Z location of the reference load (see section 5.31.1 of the Technical Reference Manual) have been specified after the command TYPE 1. The Z Increment of 3.0m denotes that the vehicle moves along the Z direction and the individual positions which are 3.0m apart will be used to generate the remaining 9 load cases. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis and print the values and positions of all the generated load cases. PRINT MAXFORCE ENVELOP LIST 3 41 42 A maximum force envelope consisting of the highest forces for each degree of freedom on the listed members will be written into the output file. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. STAAD FLOOR A SIMPLE BRIDGE DECK UNITS METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 6 7.5 0 0 R 5 0 0 9.0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 7 6 7 1 2 11 R A 4 11 6 56 31 32 60 MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 1 TO 60 TA ST UB305X165X40 SUPPORTS 1 TO 6 31 TO 36 PINNED UNITS MMS CONSTANTS E 210.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL DEN 76.977E-09 ALL UNIT METER KNS DEFINE MOVING LOAD TYPE 1 LOAD 90.0 90.0 45.0 DISTANCE 3.0 1.5 WIDTH 3.0 LOAD 1 SELF Y -1.0 LOAD GENERATION 10 TYPE 1 2.25 0. 0. ZI 3.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S -----------------------------------
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 346 of 493
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 36/ 60/ ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 6/ 6/ 21 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 11, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 3 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.2/ 38897.1 MB LOADING 1 ----------SELFWEIGHT
12 96
-1.000 124.391 KNS
ACTUAL WEIGHT OF THE STRUCTURE =
LOADING 2 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 8 10 3 2 5 4 3 2 5 4 LOADING 3 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 3 2 5 4 3 2 5 4 3 2 5 4 UDL L1 UDL L1
METE L2 CON -90.000 -90.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -22.500 -22.500 -22.500 -22.500 GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY L 0.75 0.75 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 LIN1 LIN2
METE L2 CON -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -22.500 -22.500 -22.500 -22.500 GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY GY L 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 LIN1 LIN2
LOADING 4 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 3 2 5 4 19 21 14 13 16 15 UDL L1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 347 of 493
LOADING 6 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 14 13 16 15 14 13 16 15 14 13 16 15 LOADING 7 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 14 13 16 15 30 32 25 24 27 26 UDL L1 UDL L1
LOADING 9 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 25 24 27 26 25 24 27 26 25 24 27 26 UDL L1
LOADING 10 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 25 24 27 26 41 43 UDL L1
METE L2 CON -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -45.000 -90.000 -90.000 GY GY GY GY GY GY L 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 0.75 0.75 LIN1 LIN2
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 348 of 493
36 35 38 37 LOADING 11 ----------MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS MEMBER 41 43 36 35 38 37 36 35 38 37 UDL L1
-22.500 -22.500 -22.500 -22.500
GY GY GY GY
1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 29. PRINT MAXFORCE ENVELOP LIST 3 41 42
MEMBER FORCE ENVELOPE --------------------ALL UNITS ARE KNS METE
MAX AND MIN FORCE VALUES AMONGST ALL SECTION LOCATIONS MEMB FY/ FZ 81.16 0.00 -31.34 0.00 73.48 0.00 -18.36 0.00 0.30 0.00 -0.30 0.00 DIST DIST 0.00 0.00 9.00 9.00 0.00 0.00 1.50 1.50 0.00 0.00 1.50 1.50 LD LD 3 1 3 11 10 1 11 11 1 1 1 11 MZ/ MY 0.03 0.00 -504.76 0.00 9.18 0.00 -147.24 0.00 9.17 0.00 -134.84 0.00 DIST DIST 0.00 0.00 9.00 9.00 1.50 0.00 0.75 1.50 0.00 0.00 1.50 1.50 LD LD 4 1 5 11 5 1 10 11 5 1 10 11
FX
DIST
LD
3 MAX MIN
0.00 0.00
0.00 9.00
1 11
41 MAX MIN
0.00 0.00
0.00 1.50
1 11
42 MAX MIN
0.00 0.00
0.00 1.50
1 11
********** END OF FORCE ENVELOPE FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ********** 30. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 349 of 493

Calculation of displacements at intermediate points of members of a plane frame is demonstrated in this example.
The dashed line represents the deflected shape of the structure. The shape is generated on the basis of displacements at the ends plus several intermediate points of the members. Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE TEST FOR SECTION DISPLACEMENT Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame structure and the geometry is defined through X and Y axes. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 0. 4.5 ; 3 6 4.5 ; 4 6 0. Joint number followed by X and Y coordinates are provided above. Since this is a plane structure, the Z coordinates need not be provided. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators which allows us to provide multiple sets of data on one line.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 350 of 493
MEMBER INCIDENCE 1 1 2 ; 2 2 3 ; 3 3 4 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 1 3 TABLE ST UC203X203X46 2 TABLE ST UB305X165X40 Member properties are specified from the British steel table. The word ST stands for standard single section. UNIT MMS CONSTANTS E 210.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are provided after the length unit is changed from METER to MMS. SUPPORT 1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED A fixed support is specified at Joint 1 and a pinned support at Joint 4. UNIT METER LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE + WIND Load case 1 is initiated followed by an optional title. JOINT LOAD 2 FX 25.0 Load 1 contains a joint load of 25KN at node 2. FX indicates that the load is a force in the global X direction. MEMBER LOAD 2 UNI GY -45.0 Load 1 contains a member load also. GY indicates that the load is in the global Y direction. The word UNI stands for uniformly distributed load. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT MEMBER FORCES The above PRINT command is self-explanatory.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 351 of 493
* * FOLLOWING PRINT COMMAND WILL PRINT * DISPLACEMENTS OF THE MEMBERS * CONSIDERING EVERY TWELFTH INTERMEDIATE * POINT (THAT IS TOTAL OF 13 POINTS). THESE * DISPLACEMENTS ARE MEASURED IN GLOBAL X * Y Z COORDINATE SYSTEM AND THE VALUES * ARE FROM ORIGINAL COORDINATES (UNDEFLECTED * POSITION) OF CORRESPONDING TWELFTH * POINTS. * * MAX LOCAL DISPLACEMENT IS ALSO PRINTED. * THE LOCATION OF MAXIMUM INTERMEDIATE * DISPLACEMENT IS DETERMINED. THIS VALUE IS * MEASURED FROM ABOVE LOCATION TO THE * STRAIGHT LINE JOINING START AND END * JOINTS OF THE DEFLECTED MEMBER. * PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENT Above PRINT command is explained in the comment lines above. FINISH This command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE TEST FOR SECTION DISPLACEMENT 2. UNIT METER KNS 3. JOINT COORDINATES 4. 1 0 0 ; 2 0. 4.5 ; 3 6 4.5 ; 4 6 0. 5. MEMBER INCIDENCE 6. 1 1 2 ; 2 2 3 ; 3 3 4 7. MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 8. 1 3 TABLE ST UC203X203X46 9. 2 TABLE ST UB305X165X40 10. UNIT MMS 11. CONSTANTS 12. E 210.0 ALL 13. POISSON STEEL ALL 14. SUPPORT 15. 1 FIXED ; 4 PINNED 16. UNIT METER 17. LOADING 1 DEAD + LIVE + WIND 18. JOINT LOAD 19. 2 FX 25.0 20. MEMBER LOAD 21. 2 UNI GY -45.0 22. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF 4/ 3/ 2
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 352 of 493
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38896.7 MB 23. PRINT MEMBER FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT 1 2 3 1 1 1 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 33.55 0.00 -26.08 0.00 26.08 0.00 -105.03 0.00 0.00 105.03 0.00 MOM-Y
MOM-Z
1 121.84 1.66 0.00 2 -121.84 -1.66 0.00 2 23.34 121.84 0.00 3 -23.34 148.16 0.00 3 148.16 23.34 0.00 4 -148.16 -23.34 0.00
24. * 25. * FOLLOWING PRINT COMMAND WILL PRINT 26. * DISPLACEMENTS OF THE MEMBERS 27. * CONSIDERING EVERY TWELFTH INTERMEDIATE 28. * POINT (THAT IS TOTAL OF 13 POINTS). THESE 29. * DISPLACEMENTS ARE MEASURED IN GLOBAL X 30. * Y Z COORDINATE SYSTEM AND THE VALUES 31. * ARE FROM ORIGINAL COORDINATES (UNDEFLECTED 32. * POSITION) OF CORRESPONDING TWELFTH 33. * POINTS. 34. * 35. * MAX LOCAL DISPLACEMENT IS ALSO PRINTED. 36. * THE LOCATION OF MAXIMUM INTERMEDIATE 37. * DISPLACEMENT IS DETERMINED. THIS VALUE IS 38. * MEASURED FROM ABOVE LOCATION TO THE 39. * STRAIGHT LINE JOINING START AND END 40. * JOINTS OF THE DEFLECTED MEMBER. 41. * 42. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENT
MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS ---------------------------UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI SYSTEM MEMB LOAD 1 1 GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO END JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0250 0.2188 0.5983 1.1563 1.8855 2.7785 -0.0037 -0.0111 -0.0185 -0.0260 -0.0334 -0.0408 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1 L/DISP= 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1 L/DISP= 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1 L/DISP= 316 232 572
0.0000 0.0000 0.0982 -0.0074 0.3858 -0.0148 0.8555 -0.0222 1.5000 -0.0297 2.3120 -0.0371 3.2842 -0.0445
MAX LOCAL DISP = 2 1
0.78661 AT 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
225.00 LOAD 3.2831 -0.7367 3.2809 -1.9446 3.2787 -2.5847 3.2766 -2.4789 3.2744 -1.7006 3.2722 -0.5758 300.00 LOAD 3.5396 -0.0496 3.6659 -0.0405 3.3302 -0.0315 2.6353 -0.0225 1.6839 -0.0135 0.5784 -0.0045 187.50 LOAD
3.2842 -0.0445 3.2820 -1.3906 3.2798 -2.3527 3.2777 -2.6264 3.2755 -2.1593 3.2733 -1.1513 3.2712 -0.0541
MAX LOCAL DISP = 3 1
2.57708 AT 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
3.2712 -0.0541 3.6669 -0.0451 3.5494 -0.0360 3.0213 -0.0270 2.1853 -0.0180 1.1440 -0.0090 0.0000 0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP =
1.42206 AT
************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS ***********
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 353 of 493

A space frame is analyzed for seismic loads. The seismic loads are generated using the procedures of the 1994 UBC Code. A P-Delta analysis is peformed to obtain the secondary effects of the lateral and vertical loads acting simultaneously.
STAAD SPACE EXAMPLE PROBLEM FOR UBC LOAD Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 354 of 493
a space frame. UNIT METER KNS Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 4 10.5 0 0 REPEAT 3 0 0 3.5 REPEAT ALL 3 0 3.5 0 The X, Y and Z coordinates of the joints are specified here. First, coordinates of joints 1 through 4 are generated by taking advantage of the fact that they are equally spaced. Then, this pattern is REPEATed 3 times with a Z increment of 3.5 m for each repetition to generate joints 5 to 16. The REPEAT ALL command will then repeat 3 times, the pattern of joints 1 to 16 to generate joints 17 to 64. MEMBER INCIDENCES * beams in x direction 101 17 18 103 104 21 22 106 107 25 26 109 110 29 30 112 REPEAT ALL 2 12 16 * beams in z direction 201 17 21 204 205 21 25 208 209 25 29 212 REPEAT ALL 2 12 16 * columns 301 1 17 348 Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. Following the specification of incidences for members 101 to 112, the REPEAT ALL command command is used to repeat the pattern and generate incidences for members 113 through 136. A similar logic is used in specification of incidences of members 201 through 212 and generation of incidences for members 213 to 236. Finally, members incidences of columns 301 to 348 are specified. MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 PRIS YD 0.40 ZD 0.30 301 TO 348 TA ST UB457X152X52 The beam members have prismatic member property specification (YD & ZD) while the columns (members 301 to 348) have their properties called from the built-in BRITISH steel table. CONSTANT E STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 E CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 DENSITY STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 DENSITY CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 355 of 493
POISSON STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 In the specification of material constants, the default built-in values are used. The user may see these values with the help of the command PRINT MATERIAL PROPERTIES following the above commands. SUPPORT 1 TO 16 FIXED Indicates the joints where the supports are located as well as the type of support restraints. DEFINE UBC LOAD ZONE 0.2 I 1.0 RWX 9 RWZ 9 S 1.5 CT 0.032 SELFWEIGHT JOINT WEIGHT 17 TO 48 WEIGHT 7.0 49 TO 64 WEIGHT 3.5 There are two stages in the command specification of the UBC loads. The first stage is initiated with the command DEFINE UBC LOAD. Here we specify parameters such as Zone factor, Importance factor, site coefficient for soil characteristics etc. and, the vertical loads (weights) from which the base shear will be calculated. The vertical loads may be specified in the form of selfweight, joint weights and/or member weights. Member weights are not shown in this example. It is important to note that these vertical loads are used purely in the determination of the horizontal base shear only. In other words, the structure is not analysed for these vertical loads. LOAD 1 UBC LOAD X 0.75 SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOADS 17 TO 48 FY -7.0 49 TO 64 FY -3.5 This is the second stage in which the UBC load is applied with the help of a load case number, corresponding direction (X in the above case) and a factor by which the generated horizontal loads should be multiplied. Along with the UBC load, deadweight is also added to the same load case. Since we will be doing second-order (PDELTA) analysis, it is important that we include horizontal and vertical loads in the same load case. LOAD 2 UBC LOAD Z 0.75 SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOADS 17 TO 48 FY 7.0 49 TO 64 FY 3.5 In load case 2, the UBC load is being applied in the Z direction. Vertical loads too are part of this case.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 356 of 493
PDELTA ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA We are requesting a second-order analysis by specifying the command PDELTA ANALYSIS. PRINT LOAD DATA is used to obtain a report of all the applied and generated loadings. PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS FINISH The above commands are self-explanatory.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE EXAMPLE PROBLEM FOR UBC LOAD 2. UNIT METER KNS 3. JOINT COORDINATES 4. 1 0 0 0 4 10.5 0 0 5. REPEAT 3 0 0 3.5 6. REPEAT ALL 3 0 3.5 0 7. MEMBER INCIDENCES 8. * BEAMS IN X DIRECTION 9. 101 17 18 103 10. 104 21 22 106 11. 107 25 26 109 12. 110 29 30 112 13. REPEAT ALL 2 12 16 14. * BEAMS IN Z DIRECTION 15. 201 17 21 204 16. 205 21 25 208 17. 209 25 29 212 18. REPEAT ALL 2 12 16 19. * COLUMNS 20. 301 1 17 348 21. MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 22. 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 PRIS YD 0.40 ZD 0.30 23. 301 TO 348 TA ST UB457X152X52 24. CONSTANT 25. E STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 26. E CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 27. DENSITY STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 28. DENSITY CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 29. POISSON STEEL MEMB 301 TO 348 30. POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 101 TO 136 201 TO 236 31. SUPPORT 32. 1 TO 16 FIXED 33. DEFINE UBC LOAD 34. ZONE 0.2 I 1.0 RWX 9 RWZ 9 S 1.5 CT 0.032 35. SELFWEIGHT 36. JOINT WEIGHT 37. 17 TO 48 WEIGHT 7.0 38. 49 TO 64 WEIGHT 3.5 39. LOAD 1 40. UBC LOAD X 0.75 41. SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 42. JOINT LOADS 43. 17 TO 48 FY -7.0 44. 49 TO 64 FY -3.5 45. LOAD 2 46. UBC LOAD Z 0.75 47. SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 48. JOINT LOADS 49. 17 TO 48 FY -7.0 50. 49 TO 64 FY -3.5 51. PDELTA ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 16/ 14/ 78 DOF 64/ 120/ 16
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 357 of 493
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 23 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.4/ 38896.7 MB LOADING ----------1
288
SELFWEIGHT Y -1.000 ACTUAL WEIGHT OF THE STRUCTURE = JOINT LOAD - UNIT KNS METE JOINT FORCE-X FORCE-Y 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM-Z 798.454 KNS
LOADING -----------
SELFWEIGHT Y -1.000 ACTUAL WEIGHT OF THE STRUCTURE = JOINT LOAD - UNIT KNS METE JOINT FORCE-X FORCE-Y 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM-Z 798.454 KNS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 358 of 493
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -7.00 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50 -3.50
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
**WARNING: IF THIS UBC/IBC ANALYSIS HAS TENSION/COMPRESSION OR REPEAT LOAD OR RE-ANALYSIS OR SELECT OPTIMIZE, THEN EACH UBC/IBC CASE SHOULD BE FOLLOWED BY PERFORM ANALYSIS & CHANGE.
*********************************************************** * * * X DIRECTION : Ta = 0.455 Tb = 0.285 Tuser = 0.000 * * C = 2.7500, LOAD FACTOR = 0.750 * * UBC TYPE = 94 * * UBC FACTOR V = 0.0611 x 1078.45 = 65.91 KNS * * * ***********************************************************
*********************************************************** * * * Z DIRECTION : Ta = 0.455 Tb = 1.103 Tuser = 0.000 * * C = 2.7500, LOAD FACTOR = 0.750 * * UBC TYPE = 94 * * UBC FACTOR V = 0.0611 x 1078.45 = 65.91 KNS * * * *********************************************************** JOINT LATERAL TORSIONAL LOAD - 1 LOAD (KNS ) MOMENT (KNS -METE) FACTOR - 0.750 ------------------17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 FX 0.449 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.449 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.687 MY FX 0.687 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.687 MY FX 0.687 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.449 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.568 MY FX 0.449 MY --------------------TOTAL = 9.083 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 AT LEVEL 3.500 METE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 359 of 493
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
FX 0.898 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 0.898 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 1.373 MY FX 1.373 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 1.373 MY FX 1.373 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 0.898 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 1.135 MY FX 0.898 MY --------------------TOTAL = 18.166 FX 1.030 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.030 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.743 MY FX 1.743 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.743 MY FX 1.743 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.030 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.386 MY FX 1.030 MY --------------------TOTAL = 22.181
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 AT LEVEL 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 AT LEVEL 10.500 METE 7.000 METE
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
JOINT ----17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
LATERAL TORSIONAL LOAD - 2 LOAD (KNS ) MOMENT (KNS -METE) FACTOR - 0.750 --------------0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 AT LEVEL 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 AT LEVEL 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.000 METE 3.500 METE
FZ 0.449 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.449 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.687 MY FZ 0.687 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.687 MY FZ 0.687 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.449 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.568 MY FZ 0.449 MY --------------------TOTAL = 9.083 FZ 0.898 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 0.898 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 1.373 MY FZ 1.373 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 1.373 MY FZ 1.373 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 0.898 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 1.135 MY FZ 0.898 MY --------------------TOTAL = 18.166 FZ FZ FZ FZ 1.030 1.386 1.386 1.030 MY MY MY MY
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49 50 51 52
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 360 of 493
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
FZ 1.386 MY FZ 1.743 MY FZ 1.743 MY FZ 1.386 MY FZ 1.386 MY FZ 1.743 MY FZ 1.743 MY FZ 1.386 MY FZ 1.030 MY FZ 1.386 MY FZ 1.386 MY FZ 1.030 MY --------------------TOTAL = 22.181
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 AT LEVEL 10.500 METE
52. PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS METE ----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE MOM-X 5.75 -0.49 7.02 -0.02 7.06 0.02 6.73 0.49 5.96 -0.49 7.26 -0.02 7.29 0.02 6.94 0.49 5.96 -0.49 7.26 -0.02 7.29 0.02 6.94 0.49 5.75 -0.49 7.02 -0.02 7.06 0.02 6.73 0.49 MOM-Y MOM Z
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 -2.22 0.45 -3.40 0.01 -3.42 -0.01 -3.12 -0.45 -2.31 0.45 -3.51 0.01 -3.53 -0.01 -3.21 -0.45 -2.31 0.45 -3.51 0.01 -3.53 -0.01 -3.21 -0.45 -2.22 0.45 -3.40 0.01 -3.42 -0.01 -3.12 -0.45 43.36 41.43 65.55 56.12 64.35 56.12 57.12 41.43 62.76 73.81 85.18 88.52 83.95 88.52 76.95 73.81 62.76 65.90 85.18 80.60 83.95 80.60 76.95 65.90 43.36 59.06 65.55 73.79 64.35 73.79 57.12 59.06 0.06 -3.03 0.06 -3.00 0.06 -3.00 0.06 -3.03 -0.01 -3.14 -0.01 -3.11 -0.01 -3.11 -0.01 -3.14 0.01 -3.14 0.01 -3.11 0.01 -3.11 0.01 -3.14 -0.06 -3.11 -0.06 -3.08 -0.06 -3.08 -0.06 -3.11 0.07 -5.61 0.07 -5.62 0.07 -5.62 0.07 -5.61 -0.01 -5.82 -0.01 -5.83 -0.01 -5.83 -0.01 -5.82 0.01 -5.80 0.01 -5.81 0.01 -5.81 0.01 -5.80 -0.07 -5.75 -0.07 -5.76 -0.07 -5.76 -0.07 -5.75 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@netcom.ca * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 361 of 493
* * * North America support@reiusa.com * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

A space frame is analyzed for loads generated using the built-in wind and floor load generation facilities.
STAAD SPACE - WIND AND FLOOR LOAD GENERATION This is a SPACE frame analysis problem. Every STAAD input has to start with the command STAAD. The SPACE specification is used to denote a SPACE frame. UNIT METER KNS The UNIT specification is used to specify the length and/or force units to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1000 2400 3900 4004 5404 6008
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 362 of 493
7408 8908 REPEAT ALL 2 0 3.5 0 The JOINT COORDINATE specification is used to specify the X, Y and Z coordinates of the JOINTs. Note that the REPEAT ALL command has been used to generate JOINTs for the two upper storeys each with a Y increment of 3.5 m. MEMBER INCIDENCES * Columns 1 1 9 16 * Beams in the X direction 17 9 10 18 19 12 13 20 14 15 21 22 17 18 23 24 20 21 25 22 23 26 * Beams in the Z direction 27 9 12 ; 28 12 14 ; 29 10 13 ; 30 13 15 ; 31 11 16 32 17 20 ; 33 20 22 ; 34 18 21 ; 35 21 23 ; 36 19 24 The MEMBER INCIDENCE specification is used for specifying MEMBER connectivities. MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 1 TO 16 TA ST UB457X191X74 17 TO 26 TA ST UB457X152X52 27 TO 36 TA ST UB457X152X52 Properties for all members are specified from the built-in BRITISH steel table. Three different sections have been used. CONSTANT E STEEL ALL DENSITY STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL The CONSTANT specification is used to specify material properties. In this case, the built-in default values have been used. SUPPORT 1 TO 8 FIXED BUT MX MZ The SUPPORTs of the structure are defined through the SUPPORT specification. Here all the supports are FIXED with RELEASES specified in the MX (rotation about global X-axis) and MZ (rotation about global Z-axis) directions. DEFINE WIND LOAD TYPE 1 INTENSITY 1.0 1.5 HEIGHT 3.5 7.0 EXPOSURE 0.90 YRANGE 6.0 8.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 363 of 493
EXPOSURE 0.85 JOINT 9 12 14 When a structure has to be analysed for wind loading, the engineer is confronted with the task of first converting an abstract quantity like wind velocity or wind pressure into concentrated loads at joints, distributed loads on members, or pressure loads on plates. The large number of calculations involved in this conversion can be avoided by making use of STAADs wind load generation utility. This utility takes wind pressure at various heights as the input, and converts them to values that can then be used as concentrated forces known as joint loads in specific load cases. The input specification is done in two stages. The first stage is initiated above through the DEFINE WIND LOAD command. The basic parameters of the WIND loading are specified here. All values need to be provided in the current UNIT system. Each wind category is identified with a TYPE number (an identification mark) which is used later to specify load cases. In this example, two different wind intensities (1.0 KN/sq. m and 1.5 KN/sq. m) are specified for two different height zones (0 to 3.5m and 3.5 to 7.0m). The EXPOSURE specification is used to mitigate or magnify the effect at specific nodes due to special considerations like openings in the structure. In this case, two different exposure factors are specified. The first EXPOSURE specification specifies the exposure factor as 0.9 for all joints within the height range (defined as global Y-range) of 6.0m 8.0m. The second EXPOSURE specification specifies the exposure factor as 0.85 for joints 9, 12 and 14. In the EXPOSURE factor specification, the joints may be specified directly or through a vertical range specification. LOAD 1 WIND LOAD IN X-DIRECTION WIND LOAD X 1.2 TYPE 1 This is the second stage of input specification for the wind load generation. The term WIND LOAD and the direction term that follows are used to specify the WIND LOADING in a particular lateral direction. In this case, WIND loading TYPE 1, defined previously, is being applied in the global X-direction with a positive multiplication factor of 1.2 .
LOAD 2 FLOOR LOAD @ Y = 3.5M AND 7M FLOOR LOAD YRANGE 3.4 3.6 FLOAD 5.0 XRANGE 0.0 4.0 ZRANGE 0.0 8.0 YRANGE 3.4 3.6 FLOAD 2.5 XRANGE 4.0 9.0 ZRANGE 0.0 8.0 YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 2.5
In load case 2 in this problem, a floor load generation is performed. In a floor load generation, a pressure load (force per unit area) is converted by the program into specific points forces and distributed forces on the members located in that region. The YRANGE, XRANGE and ZRANGE specifications are used to define the area of the structure on which the pressure is acting. The FLOAD specification is used to specify the value of that pressure. All values need to be provided in the current UNIT system. For example, in the first line in the above FLOOR LOAD specification, the region is defined as being located within the bounds YRANGE of 3.4 3.6 m, XRANGE of 0.0 - 4.0 m and ZRANGE of 0.0 - 8.0 m. The 5.0 signifies that the pressure is 5.0 KN/sq.m. in the negative global Y direction. The program will identify the members lying within the specified region and derive MEMBER LOADS on these members based on two-way load distribution. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA We can view the values and position of the generated loads with the help of the PRINT LOAD
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 364 of 493
DATA command used above along with the PERFORM ANALYSIS command. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION FINISH Above commands are self-explanatory.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE - WIND AND FLOOR LOAD GENERATION 2. UNIT METER KNS 3. JOINT COORDINATES 4. 1 0 0 0 5. 2 4 0 0 6. 3 9 0 0 7. 4 0 0 4 8. 5 4 0 4 9. 6 0 0 8 10. 7 4 0 8 11. 8 9 0 8 12. REPEAT ALL 2 0 3.5 0 13. MEMBER INCIDENCES 14. * COLUMNS 15. 1 1 9 16 16. * BEAMS IN THE X DIRECTION 17. 17 9 10 18 18. 19 12 13 19. 20 14 15 21 20. 22 17 18 23 21. 24 20 21 22. 25 22 23 26 23. * BEAMS IN THE Z DIRECTION 24. 27 9 12 ; 28 12 14 ; 29 10 13 ; 30 13 15 ; 31 11 16 25. 32 17 20 ; 33 20 22 ; 34 18 21 ; 35 21 23 ; 36 19 24 26. MEMBER PROPERTIES BRITISH 27. 1 TO 16 TA ST UB457X191X74 28. 17 TO 26 TA ST UB457X152X52 29. 27 TO 36 TA ST UB457X152X52 30. CONSTANT 31. E STEEL ALL 32. DENSITY STEEL ALL 33. POISSON STEEL ALL 34. SUPPORT 35. 1 TO 8 FIXED BUT MX MZ 36. DEFINE WIND LOAD 37. TYPE 1 38. INTENSITY 1.0 1.5 HEIGHT 3.5 7.0 39. EXPOSURE 0.90 YRANGE 6.0 8.0 40. EXPOSURE 0.85 JOINT 9 12 14 41. LOAD 1 WIND LOAD IN X-DIRECTION 42. WIND LOAD X 1.2 TYPE 1 43. LOAD 2 FLOOR LOAD @ Y = 3.5M AND 7M 44. FLOOR LOAD 45. YRANGE 3.4 3.6 FLOAD -5.0 XRANGE 0.0 4.0 ZRANGE 0.0 8.0 46. YRANGE 3.4 3.6 FLOAD -2.5 XRANGE 4.0 9.0 ZRANGE 0.0 8.0 47. YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD -2.5 48. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 24/ 36/ 8 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 8/ 8/ 54 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 7 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.1/ 38897.5 MB
112
LOADING
1 WIND LOAD IN X-DIRECTION
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 365 of 493
----------JOINT LOAD - UNIT KNS METE JOINT FORCE-X FORCE-Y 1 4 6 9 12 14 17 20 22 4.20 8.40 4.20 8.93 17.85 8.93 5.67 11.34 5.67 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM-Z
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
LOADING -----------
2 FLOOR LOAD @ Y = 3.5M AND 7M
MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS METE MEMBER UDL L1 L2 CON L LIN1 LIN2
17 -0.156 GY 0.17 17 -0.469 GY 0.39 17 -0.781 GY 0.63 17 -1.094 GY 0.88 17 -1.406 GY 1.13 17 -1.719 GY 1.38 17 -2.031 GY 1.63 17 -2.344 GY 1.88 17 -2.344 GY 2.12 17 -2.031 GY 2.37 17 -1.719 GY 2.62 17 -1.406 GY 2.87 17 -1.094 GY 3.12 17 -0.781 GY 3.37 17 -0.469 GY 3.61 17 -0.156 GY 3.83 29 -0.156 GY 0.17 29 -0.469 GY 0.39 29 -0.781 GY 0.63 29 -1.094 GY 0.88 29 -1.406 GY 1.13 29 -1.719 GY 1.38 29 -2.031 GY 1.63 29 -2.344 GY 1.88 29 -2.344 GY 2.12 29 -2.031 GY 2.37 29 -1.719 GY 2.62 29 -1.406 GY 2.87 29 -1.094 GY 3.12 29 -0.781 GY 3.37 29 -0.469 GY 3.61 29 -0.156 GY 3.83 19 -0.156 GY 0.17 19 -0.469 GY 0.39 19 -0.781 GY 0.63 19 -1.094 GY 0.88 19 -1.406 GY 1.13 19 -1.719 GY 1.38 19 -2.031 GY 1.63 19 -2.344 GY 1.88 19 -2.344 GY 2.12 19 -2.031 GY 2.37 19 -1.719 GY 2.62 19 -1.406 GY 2.87 19 -1.094 GY 3.12 19 -0.781 GY 3.37 19 -0.469 GY 3.61 19 -0.156 GY 3.83 27 -0.156 GY 0.17 27 -0.469 GY 0.39 MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS METE MEMBER 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 UDL L1 L2 CON 0.63 0.88 1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.12 2.37 L LIN1 LIN2
-0.781 GY -1.094 GY -1.406 GY -1.719 GY -2.031 GY -2.344 GY -2.344 GY -2.031 GY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 366 of 493
27 -1.719 GY 2.62 27 -1.406 GY 2.87 27 -1.094 GY 3.12 27 -0.781 GY 3.37 27 -0.469 GY 3.61 27 -0.156 GY 3.83 19 -0.156 GY 0.17 19 -0.469 GY 0.39 19 -0.781 GY 0.63 19 -1.094 GY 0.88 19 -1.406 GY 1.13 19 -1.719 GY 1.38 19 -2.031 GY 1.63 19 -2.344 GY 1.88 19 -2.344 GY 2.12 19 -2.031 GY 2.37 19 -1.719 GY 2.62 19 -1.406 GY 2.87 19 -1.094 GY 3.12 19 -0.781 GY 3.37 19 -0.469 GY 3.61 19 -0.156 GY 3.83 30 -0.156 GY 0.17 30 -0.469 GY 0.39 30 -0.781 GY 0.63 30 -1.094 GY 0.88 30 -1.406 GY 1.13 30 -1.719 GY 1.38 30 -2.031 GY 1.63 30 -2.344 GY 1.88 30 -2.344 GY 2.12 30 -2.031 GY 2.37 30 -1.719 GY 2.62 30 -1.406 GY 2.87 30 -1.094 GY 3.12 30 -0.781 GY 3.37 30 -0.469 GY 3.61 30 -0.156 GY 3.83 20 -0.156 GY 0.17 20 -0.469 GY 0.39 20 -0.781 GY 0.63 20 -1.094 GY 0.88 20 -1.406 GY 1.13 20 -1.719 GY 1.38 20 -2.031 GY 1.63 20 -2.344 GY 1.88 20 -2.344 GY 2.12 20 -2.031 GY 2.37 20 -1.719 GY 2.62 20 -1.406 GY 2.87 20 -1.094 GY 3.12 20 -0.781 GY 3.37 20 -0.469 GY 3.61 20 -0.156 GY 3.83 28 -0.156 GY 0.17 28 -0.469 GY 0.39 28 -0.781 GY 0.63 28 -1.094 GY 0.88 28 -1.406 GY 1.13 28 -1.719 GY 1.38 28 -2.031 GY 1.63 28 -2.344 GY 1.88 28 -2.344 GY 2.12 28 -2.031 GY 2.37 28 -1.719 GY 2.62 MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS METE MEMBER 28 28 28 28 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 UDL L1 L2 CON 2.87 3.12 3.37 3.61 0.21 0.49 0.79 1.10 1.41 1.72 2.04 2.35 2.65 2.96 3.28 3.59 3.90 4.21 4.51 L LIN1 LIN2
-1.406 GY -1.094 GY -0.781 GY -0.469 GY -0.122 GY -0.366 GY -0.610 GY -0.854 GY -1.099 GY -1.343 GY -1.587 GY -1.831 GY -1.831 GY -1.587 GY -1.343 GY -1.099 GY -0.854 GY -0.610 GY -0.366 GY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 367 of 493
18 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
-0.122 GY -0.122 GY -0.366 GY -0.610 GY -0.854 GY -1.099 GY -1.343 GY -1.587 GY -1.831 GY -6.250 GY 2.50 5.50 -1.831 GY -1.587 GY -1.343 GY -1.099 GY -0.854 GY -0.610 GY -0.366 GY -0.122 GY -0.122 GY -0.366 GY -0.610 GY -0.854 GY -1.099 GY -1.343 GY -1.587 GY -1.831 GY -1.831 GY -1.587 GY -1.343 GY -1.099 GY -0.854 GY -0.610 GY -0.366 GY -0.122 GY -1.831 GY -1.587 GY -1.343 GY -1.099 GY -0.854 GY -0.610 GY -0.366 GY -0.122 GY -6.250 GY 0.00 1.50 -0.122 GY -0.366 GY -0.610 GY -0.854 GY -1.099 GY -1.343 GY -1.587 GY -1.831 GY -6.250 GY 2.50 4.00
4.79 0.21 0.49 0.79 1.10 1.41 1.72 2.04 2.35 5.65 5.96 6.28 6.59 6.90 7.21 7.51 7.79 0.21 0.49 0.79 1.10 1.41 1.72 2.04 2.35 2.65 2.96 3.28 3.59 3.90 4.21 4.51 4.79 1.65 1.96 2.28 2.59 2.90 3.21 3.51 3.79 0.21 0.49 0.79 1.10 1.41 1.72 2.04 2.35
MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS METE MEMBER 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 UDL L1 L2 CON 0.17 0.39 0.63 0.88 1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.62 2.87 3.12 3.37 3.61 3.83 0.17 0.39 0.63 0.88 1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.62 2.87 3.12 3.37 L LIN1 LIN2
-0.078 GY -0.234 GY -0.391 GY -0.547 GY -0.703 GY -0.859 GY -1.016 GY -1.172 GY -1.172 GY -1.016 GY -0.859 GY -0.703 GY -0.547 GY -0.391 GY -0.234 GY -0.078 GY -0.078 GY -0.234 GY -0.391 GY -0.547 GY -0.703 GY -0.859 GY -1.016 GY -1.172 GY -1.172 GY -1.016 GY -0.859 GY -0.703 GY -0.547 GY -0.391 GY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 368 of 493
34 -0.234 GY 3.61 34 -0.078 GY 3.83 24 -0.078 GY 0.17 24 -0.234 GY 0.39 24 -0.391 GY 0.63 24 -0.547 GY 0.88 24 -0.703 GY 1.13 24 -0.859 GY 1.38 24 -1.016 GY 1.63 24 -1.172 GY 1.88 24 -1.172 GY 2.12 24 -1.016 GY 2.37 24 -0.859 GY 2.62 24 -0.703 GY 2.87 24 -0.547 GY 3.12 24 -0.391 GY 3.37 24 -0.234 GY 3.61 24 -0.078 GY 3.83 32 -0.078 GY 0.17 32 -0.234 GY 0.39 32 -0.391 GY 0.63 32 -0.547 GY 0.88 32 -0.703 GY 1.13 32 -0.859 GY 1.38 32 -1.016 GY 1.63 32 -1.172 GY 1.88 32 -1.172 GY 2.12 32 -1.016 GY 2.37 32 -0.859 GY 2.62 32 -0.703 GY 2.87 32 -0.547 GY 3.12 32 -0.391 GY 3.37 32 -0.234 GY 3.61 32 -0.078 GY 3.83 23 -0.122 GY 0.21 23 -0.366 GY 0.49 23 -0.610 GY 0.79 23 -0.854 GY 1.10 23 -1.099 GY 1.41 23 -1.343 GY 1.72 23 -1.587 GY 2.04 23 -1.831 GY 2.35 23 -1.831 GY 2.65 MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS METE MEMBER 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 35 UDL L1 L2 CON 2.96 3.28 3.59 3.90 4.21 4.51 4.79 0.21 0.49 0.79 1.10 1.41 1.72 2.04 2.35 5.65 5.96 6.28 6.59 6.90 7.21 7.51 7.79 0.21 0.49 0.79 1.10 1.41 1.72 2.04 2.35 2.65 2.96 3.28 3.59 3.90 4.21 4.51 4.79 1.65 L LIN1 LIN2
-1.587 GY -1.343 GY -1.099 GY -0.854 GY -0.610 GY -0.366 GY -0.122 GY -0.122 GY -0.366 GY -0.610 GY -0.854 GY -1.099 GY -1.343 GY -1.587 GY -1.831 GY -6.250 GY 2.50 5.50 -1.831 GY -1.587 GY -1.343 GY -1.099 GY -0.854 GY -0.610 GY -0.366 GY -0.122 GY -0.122 GY -0.366 GY -0.610 GY -0.854 GY -1.099 GY -1.343 GY -1.587 GY -1.831 GY -1.831 GY -1.587 GY -1.343 GY -1.099 GY -0.854 GY -0.610 GY -0.366 GY -0.122 GY -1.831 GY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 369 of 493
35 -1.587 GY 1.96 35 -1.343 GY 2.28 35 -1.099 GY 2.59 35 -0.854 GY 2.90 35 -0.610 GY 3.21 35 -0.366 GY 3.51 35 -0.122 GY 3.79 35 -6.250 GY 0.00 1.50 34 -0.122 GY 0.21 34 -0.366 GY 0.49 34 -0.610 GY 0.79 34 -0.854 GY 1.10 34 -1.099 GY 1.41 34 -1.343 GY 1.72 34 -1.587 GY 2.04 34 -1.831 GY 2.35 34 -6.250 GY 2.50 4.00 24 -0.078 GY 0.17 24 -0.234 GY 0.39 24 -0.391 GY 0.63 24 -0.547 GY 0.88 24 -0.703 GY 1.13 24 -0.859 GY 1.38 24 -1.016 GY 1.63 24 -1.172 GY 1.88 24 -1.172 GY 2.12 24 -1.016 GY 2.37 24 -0.859 GY 2.62 24 -0.703 GY 2.87 24 -0.547 GY 3.12 24 -0.391 GY 3.37 24 -0.234 GY 3.61 MEMBER LOAD - UNIT KNS METE MEMBER 24 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 UDL L1 L2 CON 3.83 0.17 0.39 0.63 0.88 1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.62 2.87 3.12 3.37 3.61 3.83 0.17 0.39 0.63 0.88 1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.62 2.87 3.12 3.37 3.61 3.83 0.17 0.39 0.63 0.88 1.13 1.38 1.63 1.88 2.12 2.37 2.62 2.87 3.12 3.37 3.61 3.83 L LIN1 LIN2
-0.078 GY -0.078 GY -0.234 GY -0.391 GY -0.547 GY -0.703 GY -0.859 GY -1.016 GY -1.172 GY -1.172 GY -1.016 GY -0.859 GY -0.703 GY -0.547 GY -0.391 GY -0.234 GY -0.078 GY -0.078 GY -0.234 GY -0.391 GY -0.547 GY -0.703 GY -0.859 GY -1.016 GY -1.172 GY -1.172 GY -1.016 GY -0.859 GY -0.703 GY -0.547 GY -0.391 GY -0.234 GY -0.078 GY -0.078 GY -0.234 GY -0.391 GY -0.547 GY -0.703 GY -0.859 GY -1.016 GY -1.172 GY -1.172 GY -1.016 GY -0.859 GY -0.703 GY -0.547 GY -0.391 GY -0.234 GY -0.078 GY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 370 of 493
49. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS METE ----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 -9.58 0.80 -6.70 -0.15 -5.01 -0.71 -20.54 1.72 -12.05 -1.61 -9.58 0.80 -6.70 -0.15 -5.01 -0.71 -11.46 25.70 3.60 52.75 7.95 49.30 -28.14 66.85 27.97 117.68 -11.46 25.70 3.60 52.75 7.95 49.30
MOM-X
MOM-Y
MOM Z
-0.01 0.00 -0.01 0.00 0.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.01 0.00 -0.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.16 0.00 0.00 0.00

Dynamic Analysis (Time History) is performed for a 3 span beam with concentrated and distributed masses. The structure is subjected to forcing function and ground motion loading. The maxima of joint displacements, member end forces and support reactions are determined.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 371 of 493
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS Every input file has to start with the word STAAD. The word PLANE signifies that the structure is a plane frame. UNITS CMS KNS Specifies the units to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 2 0.0 120.0 0.0 3 0.0 240.0 0.0 4 0.0 360.0 0.0 Joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1123 Incidences of members 1 to 3 are specified above. MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 2 3 PRIS AX 100.0 IZ 833.33 All the members have "PRISMATIC" property specification. Since this is a PLANE frame, Area of cross section "AX", and Moment of Inertia "IZ" about the Z axis are adequate for the analysis.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 372 of 493
SUPPORTS 1 4 PINNED Pinned supports are located at nodes 1 and 4. CONSTANTS E 2850 ALL DENSITY 25E-6 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The material constants defined include Young's Modulus "E", density and Poissons ratio. UNIT NEWTON METER DEFINE TIME HISTORY TYPE 1 FORCE 0.0 20.0 0.5 100.0 1.0 200.0 1.5 500.0 2.0 800.0 2.5 500.0 3.0 70.0 TYPE 2 ACCELERATION 0.0 0.1 0.5 0.25 1.0 0.5 1.5 0.9 2.0 1.3 2.5 1.0 3.0 0.7 ARRIVAL TIMES 0.0 DAMPING 0.075 There are 2 stages in the command specification required for a time history analysis. The first stage is defined above. First the characteristics of the time varying load are provided. The loading type may be a forcing function (vibrating machinery) or ground motion (earthquake). The former is input in the form of time-force pairs while the latter is in the form of timeacceleration pairs. Following this data, all possible arrival times for these loads on the structure as well as the modal damping ratio are specified. In this example, the damping ratio is the same (7.5%) for all modes. LOAD 1 STATIC LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 2 3 UNI GX 500.0 Load case 1 above is a static load. A uniformly distributed force of 500 Newton/m acts along the global X direction on all 3 members. LOAD 2 TIME HISTORY LOAD SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 JOINT LOAD 2 3 FX 4000.0 TIME LOAD 2 3 FX 1 1 GROUND MOTION X 2 1 This is the second stage in the command specification for time history analysis. This involves the application of the time varying load on the structure. The masses that constitute the mass matrix of the structure are specified through the selfweight and joint load commands. The program will extract the lumped masses from these weights. Following that, both the "TIME LOAD" and "GROUND MOTION" are applied simultaneously. The user must note that this
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 373 of 493
example is only for illustration purposes and that it may be unlikely that a "TIME FUNCTION" and a "GROUND MOTION" both act on the structure at the same time. The Time load command is used to apply the Type 1 force, acting in the global X direction, at arrival time number 1, at nodes 2 and 3. The Ground motion, namely, the Type 2 time history loading, is also in the global X direction at arrival time 1. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command initiates the analysis process. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS During the analysis, the program calculates joint displacements for every time step. The absolute maximum value of the displacement for every joint is then extracted from this joint displacement history. So, the value printed using the above command is the absolute maximum value for each of the six degrees of freedom at each node. UNIT KNS METER PRINT MEMBER FORCES PRINT SUPPORT REACTION The member forces and support reactions too are calculated for every time step. For each degree of freedom, the maximum value of the member force and support reaction is extracted from these histories and reported in the output file using the above command. FINISH
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS 2. UNITS CMS KNS 3. JOINT COORDINATES 4. 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 5. 2 0.0 120.0 0.0 6. 3 0.0 240.0 0.0 7. 4 0.0 360.0 0.0 8. MEMBER INCIDENCES 9. 1 1 2 3 10. MEMBER PROPERTIES 11. 1 2 3 PRIS AX 100.0 IZ 833.33 12. SUPPORTS 13. 1 4 PINNED 14. CONSTANTS 15. E 2850 ALL 16. DENSITY 25E-6 ALL 17. POISSON CONCRETE ALL 18. UNIT NEWTON METER 19. DEFINE TIME HISTORY 20. TYPE 1 FORCE 21. 0.0 -20.0 0.5 100.0 1.0 200.0 1.5 500.0 2.0 800.0 2.5 500.0 3.0 70.0 22. TYPE 2 ACCELERATION 23. 0.0 0.1 0.5 -0.25 1.0 -0.5 1.5 -0.9 2.0 -1.3 2.5 -1.0 3.0 -0.7 24. ARRIVAL TIMES 25. 0.0 26. DAMPING 0.075 27. LOAD 1 STATIC LOAD 28. MEMBER LOAD 29. 1 2 3 UNI GX 500.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 374 of 493
30. LOAD 2 TIME HISTORY LOAD 31. SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 32. SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 33. JOINT LOAD 34. 2 3 FX 4000.0 35. TIME LOAD 36. 2 3 FX 1 1 37. GROUND MOTION X 2 1 38. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 4/ 3/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38897.4 MB MORE MODES WERE REQUESTED THAN THERE ARE FREE MASSES. NUMBER OF MODES REQUESTED = 6 NUMBER OF EXISTING MASSES IN THE MODEL = 4 NUMBER OF MODES THAT WILL BE USED = 4 CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE MODE 1 2 3 4 FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC) 3.087 11.955 443.457 768.090 0.32397 0.08365 0.00226 0.00130 2 ACCURACY
PERIOD(SEC) 3.022E-16 1.612E-16 4.798E-16 7.997E-16
MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT -------------------------------------MODE X Y Z SUMM-X SUMM-Y SUMM-Z
1 100.00 0.00 0.00 100.000 0.000 0.000 2 0.00 0.00 0.00 100.000 0.000 0.000 3 0.00100.00 0.00 100.000 100.000 0.000 4 0.00 0.00 0.00 100.000 100.000 0.000
TIME STEP USED IN TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS = 0.00139 SECONDS NUMBER OF MODES WHOSE CONTRIBUTION IS CONSIDERED = 2 WARNING-NUMBER OF MODES LIMITED TO A FREQUENCY OF 360.0 DUE TO THE DT VALUE ENTERED. TIME DURATION OF TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS = 2.999 SECONDS NUMBER OF TIME STEPS IN THE SOLUTION PROCESS = 2159
BASE SHEAR UNITS ARE -- NEWT METE MAXIMUM BASE SHEAR X= -2.777266E+03 Y= 0.000000E+00 Z= 0.000000E+00 AT TIMES 2.054167 0.000000 0.000000 39. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM RADIANS) -----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.4002 0.8420 0.4002 0.8420 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0041 -0.0084 -0.0020 -0.0042 0.0020 0.0042 0.0041 0.0084
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 375 of 493
40. UNIT KNS METER 41. PRINT MEMBER FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.72 0.00 1.67 -0.72 0.72 -1.67 1.67 -0.72 0.00 -1.67 0.00 MOM-Y MOM-Z
0.00 0.90 0.00 0.00 -0.30 0.00 0.00 1.39 0.00 0.00 -1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.30 0.00 0.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.30 0.00 0.90 0.00 -1.39 0.00 1.39 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 42. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS METE ----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM Z
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 1 2 4 1 2 -0.90 -1.39 -0.90 -1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 376 of 493
The usage of User Provided Steel Tables is illustrated in this example for the analysis and design of a plane frame. User provided tables allow one to specify property data for sections not found in the built-in steel section tables.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR USER TABLE Every input file has to start with the command STAAD. The PLANE command is used to designate the structure as a plane frame. UNIT METER KNS The UNIT command sets the length and force units to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 9 0 ; 3 0 6 0 6 9 6 0 7 0 10.5 ; 8 9 10.5 ; 9 2.25 10.5 ; 10 6.75 10.5 11 4.5 10.5 ; 12 1.5 11.4 ; 13 7.5 11.4 14 3.0 12.3 ; 15 6.0 12.3; 16 4.5 13.2
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 377 of 493
The above set of data is used to provide joint coordinates for the various joints of the structure. The cartesian system is being used here. The data consists of the joint number followed by global X and Y coordinates. Note that for a space frame, the Z coordinate(s) need to be provided also. In the above input, semicolon (;) signs are used as line separators. This allows the user to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 113;237;326;468;534 6 4 5 ; 7 5 6 ; 8 7 12 ; 9 12 14 10 14 16 ; 11 15 16 ; 12 13 15 ; 13 8 13 14 9 12 ; 15 9 14 ; 16 11 14 ; 17 11 15 18 10 15 ; 19 10 13 ; 20 7 9 21 9 11 ; 22 10 11 ; 23 8 10 The above data set contains the member incidence information or the joint connectivity data for each member. This completes the geometry of the structure. START USER TABLE This command is utilized to set up a User Provided steel table. All user provided steel tables must start with this command. TABLE 1 Each table needs an unique numerical identification. The above command starts setting up Table no. 1. Upto twenty tables may be specified per run. UNIT CM WIDE FLANGE This command is used to specify the section-type as WIDE FLANGE in this table. Note that several section-types such as WIDE FLANGE, CHANNEL, ANGLE, TEE etc. are available for specification (See section 5 of the Technical Reference Manual). BEAM250 32.2 25.5 0.6 10.2 0.85 3400 150 6.2 15.7 15.4 BEAM300 47.5 30.4 0.72 12.4 1.07 7160 335 14.3 21.9 23.8 BEAM350 64.6 35.6 0.73 17.2 1.15 14150 970 22.8 26.0 35.5 The above data set is used to specify the properties of three wide flange sections. The data for each section consists of two parts. In the first line, the section-name is provided. The user is allowed to provide any section name within twelve characters. The second line contains the section properties required for the particular section-type. Each section-type requires a certain number of data (area of cross-section, depth, moment of inertias etc.) provided in a certain order. For example, in this case, for wide flanges, ten different properties are required. For detailed information on the various properties required for the different section-types and their order of specification, refer to section 5.19 in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Without exception, all required properties for the particular section-type must be provided.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 378 of 493
TABLE 2 UNIT CM ANGLES L30305 3.0 3.0 0.5 0.58 1.0 1.0 L40405 4.0 4.0 0.5 0.78 1.33 1.33 L50505 5.0 5.0 0.5 0.98 1.67 1.67 The above command and data lines set up another user provided table consisting of angle sections. END This command signifies the end of the user provided table data set. All user provided table related input must be terminated with this command. MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 3 4 UPT 1 BEAM350 2 UPT 1 BEAM300 ; 5 6 7 UPT 1 BEAM250 8 TO 13 UPT 1 BEAM250 14 TO 19 UPT 2 L30305 20 TO 23 UPT 2 L40405 In the above command lines, the member properties are being assigned from the user provided tables created earlier. The word UPT signifies that the properties are from the user provided table. This is followed by the table number and then the section name as specified in the user provided table. The numbers 1 or 2 following the word UPT indicate the table from which section names are fetched. MEMBER TRUSS 14 TO 23 The above command is used to designate members 14 to 23 as truss members. MEMBER RELEASE 5 START MZ The MEMBER RELEASE command is used to release the MZ moment at the start joint of member no. 5. CONSTANTS E STEEL DENSITY STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 90.0 MEMB 3 4 The above command set is used to specify modulus of elasticity, density, Poissons ratio and beta angle values. Built-in default value of steel is used for the material constants. UNIT KNS METER
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 379 of 493
The force unit is reset to KNS, and length unit to METER using this command. SUPPORT 1 FIXED ; 2 PINNED The above command set is used to designate supports. Here, joint 1 is designated as a fixed support and joint 2 is designated as a pinned support. LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 4 5 FY -65. ; 11 FY -155. MEMB LOAD 8 TO 13 UNI Y 13.5 ; 6 UNI GY 17.5 The above command set is used to specify the loadings on the structure. In this case, dead and live loads are provided through load case 1. It consists of selfweight, concentrated loads at joints 4, 5 and 11, and distributed loads on some members. PERFORM ANALYSIS This command instructs the program to execute the analysis at this point. PARAMETER CODE BRITISH BEAM 1.0 ALL NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 The above commands are used to specify parameters for steel design. CHECK CODE MEMBER 3 19 SELECT MEMBER 20 This command will perform a code check on members 3 and 19 per the BRITISH steel design code. A member selection too is performed for member 20. For each member, the member selection will be performed from the table that was originally used for the specification of the member property. In this case, the selection will be from the respective user tables from which the properties were initially assigned. It may be noted that properties may be provided (and selection may be performed) from built-in steel tables and user provided tables in the same data file. FINISH This command terminates a STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * STAAD.Pro * Version Bld * Proprietary Program of * Research Engineers, Intl.
* * * * *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 380 of 493
* Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * ****************************************************
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59.
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR USER TABLE UNIT METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0. 0. ; 2 9 0 ; 3 0 6 0 6 9 6 0 7 0 10.5 ; 8 9 10.5 ; 9 2.25 10.5 ; 10 6.75 10.5 11 4.5 10.5 ; 12 1.5 11.4 ; 13 7.5 11.4 14 3.0 12.3 ; 15 6.0 12.3; 16 4.5 13.2 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3 ; 2 3 7 ; 3 2 6 ; 4 6 8 ; 5 3 4 6 4 5 ; 7 5 6 ; 8 7 12 ; 9 12 14 10 14 16 ; 11 15 16 ; 12 13 15 ; 13 8 13 14 9 12 ; 15 9 14 ; 16 11 14 ; 17 11 15 18 10 15 ; 19 10 13 ; 20 7 9 21 9 11 ; 22 10 11 ; 23 8 10 START USER TABLE TABLE 1 UNIT CM WIDE FLANGE BEAM250 32.2 25.5 0.6 10.2 0.85 3400 150 6.2 15.7 15.4 BEAM300 47.5 30.4 0.72 12.4 1.07 7160 335 14.3 21.9 23.8 BEAM350 64.6 35.6 0.73 17.2 1.15 14150 970 22.8 26.0 35.5 TABLE 2 UNIT CM ANGLES L30305 3.0 3.0 0.5 0.58 1.0 1.0 L40405 4.0 4.0 0.5 0.78 1.33 1.33 L50505 5.0 5.0 0.5 0.98 1.67 1.67 END MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 3 4 UPT 1 BEAM350 2 UPT 1 BEAM300 ; 5 6 7 UPT 1 BEAM250 8 TO 13 UPT 1 BEAM250 14 TO 19 UPT 2 L30305 20 TO 23 UPT 2 L40405 MEMBER TRUSS 14 TO 23 MEMBER RELEASE 5 START MZ CONSTANTS E STEEL ALL DENSITY STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 90.0 MEMB 3 4 UNIT KNS METER SUPPORT 1 FIXED ; 2 PINNED LOADING 1 DEAD AND LIVE LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 4 5 FY -65. ; 11 FY -155. MEMB LOAD 8 TO 13 UNI Y -13.5 ; 6 UNI GY -17.5 PERFORM ANALYSIS
ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 9 EQN.NO. 21 LOADS APPLIED OR DISTRIBUTED HERE FROM ELEMENTS WILL BE IGNORED. THIS MAY BE DUE TO ALL MEMBERS AT THIS JOINT BEING RELEASED OR EFFECTIVELY RELEASED IN THIS DIRECTION. ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 11 EQN.NO. 31 ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 10 EQN.NO. 37
60. PARAMETER
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 381 of 493
61. 62. 63. 64. 65.
CODE BRITISH BEAM 1.0 ALL NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 CHECK CODE MEMBER 3 19 STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) ***********************
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= * * 3 ST 19 ST BEAM350 L30305 FAIL 246.69 C FAIL 18.19 C BS-4.8.3.3.1 52.86 BS-4.7 (C) 0.00 2.472 0.00 1.654 0.00 1 1 0.00
66. SELECT MEMBER 20
STAAD.Pro MEMBER SELECTION - (BSI ) **************************
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 20 ST L30305 PASS 62.38 T BS-4.6 (T) 0.00 0.970 0.00 1 0.00
67. FINISH
**************************************************************************** **WARNING** SOME MEMBER SIZES HAVE CHANGED SINCE LAST ANALYSIS. IN THE POST PROCESSOR, MEMBER QUERIES WILL USE THE LAST ANALYSIS FORCES WITH THE UPDATED MEMBER SIZES. TO CORRECT THIS INCONSISTENCY, PLEASE DO ONE MORE ANALYSIS. FROM THE UPPER MENU, PRESS RESULTS, UPDATE PROPERTIES, THEN FILE SAVE; THEN ANALYZE AGAIN WITHOUT THE GROUP OR SELECT COMMANDS. ****************************************************************************
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 382 of 493

This is an example which demonstrates the calculation of principal stresses on a finite element.
Fixed Supports at Joints 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 13 Load intensity = 2000 Kn/sq.m in - Y direction Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE SAMPLE CALCULATION FOR * ELEMENT STRESSES Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame (3-D structure). UNIT METER KNS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 383 of 493
Specifies the unit to be used. JOINT COORDINATES 10004900 REPEAT 3 0 0 3 Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. The REPEAT command is used to generate coordinates of joints 5 to 16 based on the pattern of joints 1 to 4. ELEMENT INCIDENCE 1 1 5 6 2 TO 3 REPEAT 2 3 4 Element connectivities of elements 1 to 3 are defined first, based on which, the connectivities of elements 4 to 9 are generated. ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 9 THICK 0.25 Elements 1 to 9 have a thickness of 0.25 m. CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONC ALL Modulus of Elasticity and Poissons ratio of all the elements is that of the built-in default value for concrete. SUPPORT 1 TO 4 5 9 13 FIXED "Fixed support" conditions exist at the above mentioned joints. LOAD 1 ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 9 PRESSURE -2000.0 A uniform pressure of 2000 Kn/sq.m is applied on all the elements. In the absence of an explicit direction specification, the load is assumed to act along the local Z axis. The negative value indicates that the load acts opposite to the positive direction of the local Z. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION The above command is self-explanatory. UNIT MMS PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 4
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 384 of 493
Element stresses at the centroid of the element are printed using the above command. The output includes membrane stresses, shear stresses, bending moments per unit width and principal stresses. The change of length unit from metre to mms indicates that the values will be printed in KN and MMs units. FINISH
The STAAD run is terminated. **************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE SAMPLE CALCULATION FOR 2. * ELEMENT STRESSES 3. UNIT METER KNS 4. JOINT COORDINATES 5. 1 0 0 0 4 9 0 0 6. REPEAT 3 0 0 3 7. ELEMENT INCIDENCE 8. 1 1 5 6 2 TO 3 9. REPEAT 2 3 4 10. ELEMENT PROPERTIES 11. 1 TO 9 THICK 0.25 12. CONSTANTS 13. E CONCRETE ALL 14. POISSON CONC ALL 15. SUPPORT 16. 1 TO 4 5 9 13 FIXED 17. LOAD 1 18. ELEMENT LOAD 19. 1 TO 9 PRESSURE -2000.0 20. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 16/ 9/ 7 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 5/ 5/ 36 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 4 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.1/ 38896.7 MB
96
21. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS METE ----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE MOM-X MOM-Y MOM Z
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 2 3 4 5 9 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.00 -1219.61 0.00 8767.59 0.00 37675.70 0.00 35166.52 0.00 8767.59 0.00 37675.70 0.00 35166.52
0.00 -391.50 0.00 391.50 0.00 -26682.03 0.00 -524.21 0.00 -88168.02 0.00 2985.30 0.00 -66475.37 0.00 -24033.65 0.00 524.21 0.00 26682.03 0.00 -2985.30 0.00 88168.02 0.00 24033.65 0.00 66475.37
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 22. UNIT MMS 23. PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 4 ELEMENT STRESSES ---------------FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KNS MMS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 385 of 493
STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX SQY VONT VONB SX TRESCAT TRESCAB 4 1 MX SY MY SXY MXY
0.02 -0.02 2111.84 10726.22 4553.97 1.21 1.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.22 1.22 TOP : SMAX= 1.22 SMIN= 0.01 TMAX= 0.60 ANGLE= -23.3 BOTT: SMAX= -0.01 SMIN= -1.22 TMAX= 0.60 ANGLE= -23.3 **** MAXIMUM STRESSES AMONG SELECTED PLATES AND CASES **** MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL SHEAR VONMISES TRESCA STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS
1.217976E+00 -1.217976E+00 6.017490E-01 1.210802E+00 1.217976E+00 PLATE NO. 4 4 4 4 4 CASE NO. 1 1 1 1 1 ********************END OF ELEMENT FORCES******************** 24. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****
Calculation of principal stresses for element 4 Calculations are presented for the top surface only. SX = SY = SXY = MX = MY = MXY= S x= = 0.2027 kN/mm 2 0.0 kN/mm 2 0.0 kN/mm 2 0.0 kN/mm 2 2111.84 kN-mm/mm 10726.22kN-mm/mm 4553.97 kN-mm/mm
= 1/6t 2 = 1/6*250 2 = 10416.67mm 2 (Section Modulus)
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 386 of 493
y= = 1.0297 kN/mm 2 xy= = 0.4372 kN/mm 2
= 0.6018 kN/mm 2
SMAX= = = 1.218 kN/mm 2 SMIN= = = 0.0144 kN/mm 2 say 0.01 kN/ mm 2 say 1.22 kN/mm 2
= -23.3 o

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh4B1D.htm 02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 387 of 493

This example demonstrates the usage of inclined supports. The word INCLINED refers to the fact that the restraints at a joint where such a support is specified are along a user-specified axis system instead of along the default directions of the global axis system. STAAD offers a few different methods for assigning inclined supports, and we examine those in this example.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE INPUT WIDTH 79 Every input has to start with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame structure (3-D) and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z coordinates. UNIT METER KN Specifies the unit to be used for data to follow. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 5 0; 2 10 5 10; 3 20 5 20; 4 30 5 30; 5 5 0 5; 6 25 0 25; Joint number followed by X, Y and Z coordinates are provided above. Semicolon signs (;) are used as line separators. That enables us to provide multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 5 2; 5 6 3; Defines the members by the joints they are connected to. UNIT MMS KN MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 4 5 PRIS YD 800 1 TO 3 PRIS YD 750 ZD 500 Properties for all members of the model are provided using the PRISMATIC option. YD and ZD stand for depth and width. If ZD is not provided, a circular shape with diameter = YD is assumed for that cross section. All properties required for the analysis, such as, Area, Moments of Inertia, etc. are calculated automatically from these dimensions unless these are explicitly
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 388 of 493
defined. The values are provided in MMS unit. CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL DENSITY CONCRETE ALL Material constants like E (modulus of elasticity) and Poissons ratio are specified following the command CONSTANTS. UNIT METER KN SUPPORTS 5 INCLINED REF 10 5 10 FIXED BUT MX MY MZ KFX 30000 6 INCLINED REFJT 3 FIXED BUT MX MY MZ KFX 30000 1 PINNED 4 INCLINED 1 0 1 FIXED BUT FX MX MY MZ We assign supports (restraints) at 4 nodes - 5, 6, 1 and 4. For 3 of those, namely, 5, 6 and 4, the node number is followed by the keyword INCLINED, signifying that an INCLINED support is defined there. For the remaining one - node 1 - that keyword is missing. Hence, the support at node 1 is a global direction support. The most important aspect of inclined supports is their axis system. Each node where an inclined support is defined has its own distinct local X, local Y and local Z axes. In order to define the axis system, we first have to define a datum point. The support node and the datum point together help define the axis system. 3 different methods are shown in the above 3 instances for defining the datum point. At node 5, notice the keyword REF followed by the numbers (10,5,10). This means that the datum point associated with node 5 is one which has the global coordinates of (10m, 5m, 10m). Coincidentally, this happens to be node 2. At node 6, the keyword REFJT is used followed by the number 3. This means that the datum point for support node 6 is the joint number 3 of the model. The coordinates of the datum point are hence those of node 3, namely, (20m, 5m and 20m). At node 4, the word INCLINED is merely followed by 3 numbers (1,0,1). In the absence of the words REF and REFJT, the program sets the datum point to be the following. It takes the coordinates of node 4, which are (30m,5m,30m) and adds to them, the 3 numbers which comes after the word INCLINED. Thus, the datum point becomes (31m, 5m and 31m). Once the datum point is established, the local axis system is defined as follows. Local X is a straight line (vector) pointing from the support node towards the datum point. Local Z is the vector obtained by the cross product of local X and the global Y axis (unless the SET Z UP command is used in which case one would use global Z instead of global Y and that would yield local Y). Local Y is the vector resulting from the cross product of local Z and local X. The right hand rule must be used when performing these cross products. Notice the unique nature of these datum points. The one for node 5 tells us that a line connecting nodes 5 to 2 is the local X axis, and is hence along the axis of member 4. By defining a KFX spring at that one, we are saying that the lower end of member 4 can move
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 389 of 493
along its axis like the piston of a car engine. Think of a pile bored into rock with a certain amount of freedom to expand and contract axially. The same is true for the support at the bottom of member 5. The local X axis of that support is along the axis of member 5. That also happens to be the case for the supported end of member 3. The line going from node 4 to the datum point (31,5,31) happens to be coincident with the axis of the member, or the traffic direction. The expression FIXED BUT FX MX MY MZ for that support indicates that it is free to translate along local X, suggesting that it is an expansion joint - free to expand or contract along the axis of member 3. Since MX, MY and MZ are all released at these supports, no moment will be resisted by these supports. LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1.2 LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 TO 3 UNI GY -6 LOAD COMB 3 1 1.0 2 1.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK 3 load cases followed by the instruction for the type of analysis are specified. The PRINT STATICS CHECK option will instruct the program to produce a report consisting of total applied load versus total reactions from the supports for each primary load case. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION By default, support reactions are printed in the global axis directions. The above command is an instruction for such a report. SET INCLINED REACTION PRINT SUPPORT REACTION Just earlier, we saw how to obtain support reactions in the global axis system. What if we need them in the inclined axis system? The SET INCLINED REACTION is a switch for that purpose. It tells the program that reactions should be reported in the inclined axis system instead of the global axis system. This has to be followed by the PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS command. PRINT MEMBER FORCES PRINT JOINT DISP FINISH Member forces are reported in the local axis system of the members. Joint displacements at all joints are reported in the global axis system. Following this, the STAAD run is terminated.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 390 of 493
* Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. STAAD SPACE INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 5 0; 2 10 5 10; 3 20 5 20; 4 30 5 30; 5 5 0 5; 6 25 0 25 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 5 2; 5 6 3 UNIT MMS KN MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 4 5 PRIS YD 800 1 TO 3 PRIS YD 750 ZD 500 CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL DENSITY CONCRETE ALL UNIT METER KN SUPPORTS 5 INCLINED REF 10 5 10 FIXED BUT MX MY MZ KFX 30000 6 INCLINED REFJT 3 FIXED BUT MX MY MZ KFX 30000 1 PINNED 4 INCLINED 1 0 1 FIXED BUT FX MX MY MZ LOAD 1 DEAD LOAD SELFWEIGHT Y -1.2 LOAD 2 LIVE LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 TO 3 UNI GY -6 LOAD COMB 3 1 1.0 2 1.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. DEAD LOAD
***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD SUMMATION FORCE-X SUMMATION FORCE-Y SUMMATION FORCE-Z
( KN = = =
METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 0.00 -696.00 0.00
1 )
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= 10439.93 MY= 0.00 MZ=
-10439.93
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KN SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Y = SUMMATION FORCE-Z =
METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 0.00 696.00 0.00
1 )
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -10439.93 MY= 0.00 MZ=
10439.93
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = -7.99237E-01 5 Y = -2.49498E+00 3 Z = -7.99237E-01 5 RX= -2.66161E-03 4 RY= -9.86155E-16 4 RZ= 2.66161E-03 4
1)
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. LIVE LOAD
***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KN SUMMATION FORCE-X =
METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 0.00
2 )
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 391 of 493
SUMMATION FORCE-Y = SUMMATION FORCE-Z =
-254.56 0.00
-3818.38
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KN SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Y = SUMMATION FORCE-Z =
METE ) SUMMARY (LOADING 0.00 254.56 0.00
2 )
3818.38
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = -2.97411E-01 5 Y = -9.31566E-01 3 Z = -2.97411E-01 5 RX= -1.18888E-03 4 RY= -3.64127E-16 4 RZ= 1.18888E-03 4
2)
30. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KN ----------------JOINT LOAD FORCE-X
METE
FORCE-Y
FORCE-Z
MOM-X
MOM-Y
MOM Z
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
215.36 86.45 301.81 -212.20 -85.19 -297.39 -3.15 -1.27 -4.42 0.00 0.00 0.00
288.60 94.77 383.37 286.84 94.06 380.91 60.21 32.84 93.05 60.33 32.89 93.22
215.36 86.45 301.81 -212.20 -85.19 -297.39 -3.15 -1.27 -4.42 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
31. SET INCLINED REACTION 32. PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KN ----------------JOINT 5 LOAD 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 FORCE-X 415.30 154.54 569.83 410.64 152.67 563.31 -3.15 -1.27 -4.42 0.00 0.00 0.00
METE
FORCE-Y 59.81 6.79 66.60 60.94 7.25 68.19 60.21 32.84 93.05 60.33 32.89 93.22
FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -3.15 -1.27 -4.42 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
33. PRINT MEMBER FORCES
MEMBER END FORCES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 392 of 493
----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KN MEMBER LOAD JT
METE AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 5 2 5 2 5 2 6 3 6 3 6 3
-4.46 4.46 -1.79 1.79 -6.25 6.25 300.10 -300.10 120.47 -120.47 420.57 -420.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 415.30 -344.24 154.54 -154.54 569.83 -498.77 410.64 -339.58 152.67 -152.67 563.31 -492.25
60.21 89.73 32.84 52.01 93.05 141.75 75.79 74.15 42.75 42.10 118.55 116.25 89.61 60.33 51.96 32.89 141.58 93.22 59.81 40.69 6.79 -6.79 66.60 33.90 60.94 39.55 7.25 -7.25 68.19 32.30
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 -208.74 0.00 -135.58 0.00 -344.32 125.95 -114.37 76.77 -72.12 202.71 -186.49 207.02 0.00 134.89 0.00 341.90 0.00 0.00 82.79 0.00 58.81 0.00 141.61 0.00 92.64 0.00 62.77 0.00 155.41
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
34. PRINT JOINT DISP
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0005 0.0002 0.0008 -0.0363 -0.0146 -0.0509 -0.0363 -0.0146 -0.0509 -0.7992 -0.2974 -1.0966 0.7903 0.2938 1.0841
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -2.4510 -0.9139 -3.3649 -2.4950 -0.9316 -3.4265 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.7992 -0.2974 -1.0966 -0.7903 -0.2938 -1.0841
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0005 0.0002 0.0008 -0.0363 -0.0146 -0.0509 -0.0363 -0.0146 -0.0509 -0.7992 -0.2974 -1.0966 0.7903 0.2938 1.0841
X-ROTAN 0.0026 0.0012 0.0038 0.0007 0.0003 0.0011 -0.0007 -0.0003 -0.0011 -0.0027 -0.0012 -0.0039 0.0023 0.0007 0.0031 -0.0024 -0.0008 -0.0032
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN -0.0026 -0.0012 -0.0038 -0.0007 -0.0003 -0.0011 0.0007 0.0003 0.0011 0.0027 0.0012 0.0039 -0.0023 -0.0007 -0.0031 0.0024 0.0008 0.0032
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 393 of 493
* USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@odandetech.com * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

This example generates the geometry of a cylindrical tank structure using the cylindrical coordinate system. The tank lies on its side in this example.
In this example, a cylindrical tank is modeled using finite elements. The radial direction is in the XY plane and longitudinal direction is along the Z-axis. Hence, the coordinates in the XY plane are generated using the cylindrical coordinate system. STAAD SPACE UNIT METER KN The type of structure (SPACE frame) and length and force units for data to follow are specified.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 394 of 493
JOINT COORD CYLINDRICAL The above command instructs the program that the coordinate data that follows is in the cylindrical coordinate system (r,theta,z). 1 3.5 0 0 8 3.5 315 0 Joint 1 has an 'r' of 3.5 metres, theta of 0 degrees and Z of 0 ft. Joint 8 has an 'r' of 3.5 metres, theta of 315 degrees and Z of 0 ft. The 315 degrees angle is measured counter-clockwise from the +ve direction of the X-axis. Joints 2 to 7 are generated by equal incrementation of the coordinate values between joints 1 and 8. REPEAT 2 0 0 3.0 The REPEAT command is used to generate joints 9 through 24 by repeating twice, the pattern of joints 1 to 8 at Z-increments of 3.0 metres for each REPEAT. PRINT JOINT COORD The above command is used to produce a report consisting of the coordinates of all the joints in the cartesian coordinate system. Note that even though the input data was in the cylindrical coordinate system, the output is in the cartesian coordinate system. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 2 10 9 TO 7 1 1 8 8 1 9 16 REPEAT ALL 1 8 8 The above 4 lines identify the element incidences of all 16 elements. Incidences of element 1 is defined as 1 2 10 9. Incidences of element 2 is generated by incrementing the joint numbers of element 1 by 1, incidences of element 3 is generated by incrementing the incidences of element 2 by 1 and so on upto element 7. Incidences of element 8 has been defined above as 8 1 9 16. The REPEAT ALL command states that the pattern of ALL the elements defined by the previous 2 lines, namely elements 1 to 8, must be REPEATED once with an element number increment of 8 and a joint number increment of 8 to generate elements 9 through 16. PRINT ELEMENT INFO The above command is self-explanatory. FINISH
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE 2. UNIT METER KN
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 395 of 493
3. 4. 5. 6.
JOINT COORD CYLINDRICAL 1 3.5 0 0 8 3.5 315 0 REPEAT 2 0 0 3.0 PRINT JOINT COORD
JOINT COORDINATES ----------------COORDINATES ARE METE UNIT JOINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 X 3.500 2.475 0.000 -2.475 -3.500 -2.475 0.000 2.475 3.500 2.475 0.000 -2.475 -3.500 -2.475 0.000 2.475 3.500 2.475 0.000 -2.475 -3.500 -2.475 0.000 2.475 Y 0.000 2.475 3.500 2.475 0.000 -2.475 -3.500 -2.475 0.000 2.475 3.500 2.475 0.000 -2.475 -3.500 -2.475 0.000 2.475 3.500 2.475 0.000 -2.475 -3.500 -2.475 Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000
7. 8. 9. 10.
ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 2 10 9 TO 7 1 1 8 8 1 9 16 REPEAT ALL 1 8 8
11. PRINT ELEMENT INFO ELEMENT INFORMATION ------------------ELEMENT NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 INCIDENCES THICK (METE) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 POISS E G AREA
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 17
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364 8.0364
******************END OF ELEMENT INFO******************
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 396 of 493
* CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@netcom.ca * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

This example illustrates the modeling of tension-only members using the MEMBER TENSION command.
This example has been created to illustrate the command specification for a structure with certain members capable of carrying tensile force only. It is important to note that the analysis
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 397 of 493
can be done for only 1 load case at a time. This is because, the set of active members (and hence the stiffness matrix) is load case dependent. STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR TENSION-ONLY MEMBERS The input data is initiated with the word STAAD. This structure is a PLANE frame. UNIT METER KNS Units for the commands to follow are defined above. SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the members which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command). JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 ; 3 0 7.0 ; 4 5.25 7.0 ; 5 5.25 3.5 ; 6 5.25 0 Joint coordintes of joints 1 to 6 are defined above. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1125 6 1 5 ; 7 2 6 ; 8 2 4 ; 9 3 5 ; 10 2 5 Incidences of members 1 to 10 are defined. MEMBER TENSION 6 TO 9 Members 6 to 9 are defined as TENSION-only members. Hence for each load case, if during the analysis, any of the members 6 to 9 is found to be carrying a compressive force, it is disabled from the structure and the analysis is carried out again with the modified structure. MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 1 TO 10 TA ST UC152X152X30 All members have been assigned a UC section from the British table. CONSTANTS E STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Following the command CONSTANTS, material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity), and Poissons ratio are specified. In this case, the built-in default value of steel is assigned.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 398 of 493
SUPPORT 1 6 PINNED The supports are defined above. LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 70 3 FX 45 Load 1 is defined above and consists of joint loads at joints 2 and 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS An analysis is carried out for load case 1. CHANGE MEMBER TENSION 6 TO 9 One or more among the members 6 to 9 may have been inactivated in the previous analysis. The CHANGE command restores the original structure to prepare it for the analysis for the next primary load case. The members with the tension-only attribute are specified again. LOAD 2 JOINT LOAD 4 FX -45 5 FX -70 Load case 2 is described above. PERFORM ANALYSIS CHANGE The instruction to analyze the structure is specified again. Next, any tension-only members that become inactivated during the second analysis (due to the fact that they were subjected to compressive axial forces) are re-activated with the CHANGE command. Without re-activation, these members cannot be accessed for any further operations. LOAD 3 REPEAT LOAD 1 1.0 2 1.0 Load case 3 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases already specified earlier. We would like the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting simultaneously. In other words, the above instruction is the same as the following: LOAD 3 JOINT LOAD
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 399 of 493
2 FX 70 3 FX 45 4 FX -45 5 FX -70 PERFORM ANALYSIS The analysis is carried out for load case 3. CHANGE LOAD LIST 1 2 3 The members inactivated during the analysis of load 3 are re-activated for further processing. At the end of any analysis, only those load cases for which the analysis was done most recently, are recognized as the "active" load cases. The LOAD LIST command enables the above listed load cases to be made active for further processing. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS FINI The analysis results are printed and the run terminated.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR TENSION-ONLY MEMBERS UNIT METER KNS SET NL 3 JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 ; 3 0 7.0 ; 4 5.25 7.0 ; 5 5.25 3.5 ; 6 5.25 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 5 6 1 5 ; 7 2 6 ; 8 2 4 ; 9 3 5 ; 10 2 5 MEMBER TENSION 6 TO 9 MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 1 TO 10 TA ST UC152X152X30 CONSTANTS E STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL SUPPORT 1 6 PINNED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 70 3 FX 45 PERFORM ANALYSIS
**NOTE-Tension/Compression converged after
2 iterations, Case=
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 400 of 493
23. CHANGE 24. MEMBER TENSION 25. 6 TO 9 26. LOAD 2 27. JOINT LOAD 28. 4 FX -45 29. 5 FX -70 30. PERFORM ANALYSIS **START ITERATION NO.
2 2 iterations, Case= 2
31. CHANGE 32. LOAD 3 33. REPEAT LOAD 34. 1 1.0 2 1.0 35. PERFORM ANALYSIS **START ITERATION NO.
36. CHANGE 37. LOAD LIST 1 2 3 38. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.2412 -0.1648 0.0234 0.3722 -0.3423 0.0151 0.3423 -0.3722 -0.0151 0.1648 -0.2412 -0.0234 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0135 -0.0475 0.0000 0.0136 -0.0608 0.0000 -0.0608 0.0136 0.0000 -0.0475 0.0135 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
X-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN -0.0008 0.0005 -0.0001 -0.0004 0.0004 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0004 0.0000 -0.0004 0.0002 0.0000 -0.0004 0.0004 0.0000 -0.0005 0.0008 0.0001
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS ----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 1 2 3 FORCE-X -114.92 0.08 -0.05 -0.08 114.92 0.05
METE
FORCE-Y -106.67 106.67 0.00 106.67 -106.67 0.00
FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER 1 LOAD 1 2 3 JT 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 AXIAL -30.23 30.23 106.67 -106.67 0.00 0.00 -0.25 0.25 29.82 -29.82 0.00 0.00 SHEAR-Y 0.26 -0.26 -0.08 0.08 0.05 -0.05 0.21 -0.21 -0.44 0.44 -0.05 0.05 SHEAR-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Z 0.00 0.89 0.00 -0.29 0.00 0.16 0.20 0.55 -0.77 -0.76 -0.14 -0.04
1 2 3
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 401 of 493
1 2 3
3 4 3 4 3 4 4 5 4 5 4 5
44.79 -44.79 44.79 -44.79 45.05 -45.05 29.82 -29.82 -0.25 0.25 0.00 0.00
-0.25 0.25 0.25 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.44 -0.44 -0.21 0.21 0.05 -0.05
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.55 -0.76 0.76 0.55 0.04 -0.04 0.76 0.77 -0.55 -0.20 0.04 0.14
1 2 3
1 2 3
5 6 5 6 5 6 1 5 1 5 1 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 2 5 2 5 2 5
106.67 -106.67 -30.23 30.23 0.00 0.00 -137.81 137.81 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -137.81 137.81 0.00 0.00 -53.30 53.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -53.30 53.30 0.00 0.00 114.31 -114.31 114.31 -114.31 69.90 -69.90
0.08 -0.08 -0.26 0.26 -0.05 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.41 0.41 0.41 -0.41 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.29 0.00 -0.89 0.00 -0.16 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1.09 -1.06 1.06 1.09 -0.02 0.02
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
10
1 2 3
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 39. FINI *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@netcom.ca * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com * * JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 402 of 493
* Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************

A space frame structure is subjected to a sinusoidal (dynamic) loading. The commands necessary to describe the sine function are demonstrated in this example. Time History analysis is performed on this model.
STAAD SPACE *EXAMPLE FOR HARMONIC LOADING GENERATOR Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The comment line which begins with an asterisk is an optional title to identify this project. UNIT KNS METER
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 403 of 493
The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1000;2500;3505;4005 5 0 7 0 ; 6 2.5 7 0 ; 7 5 7 0 ; 8 5 7 2.5 9 5 7 5 ; 10 2.5 7 5 ; 11 0 7 5 12 0 7 2.5 ; 13 2.5 7 2.5 The joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. Semicolon characters (;) are used as line separators to facilitate input of multiple sets of data on one line. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 5 ; 2 2 7 ; 3 3 9 ; 4 4 11 ; 5 5 6 ; 6 6 7 7 7 8 ; 8 8 9 ; 9 9 10 ; 10 10 11 ; 11 11 12 ; 12 12 5 13 6 13 ; 14 13 10 ; 15 8 13 ; 16 13 12 The members are defined by the joints they are connected to. UNIT MMS MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 TO 4 PRIS YD 600 ZD 600 5 TO 16 PRIS YD 450 ZD 450 Members 1 to 16 are defined as PRISmatic sections with width and depth values provided using the YD and ZD options. The UNIT command is specified to change the units for length from METER to MMS. SUPPORTS 1 TO 4 PINNED Joints 1 to 4 are declared to be pinned-supported. CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL DENSITY CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The modulus of elasticity (E), density and Poissons ratio are specified following the command CONSTANTS. Built-in default values for concrete are used. DEFINE TIME HISTORY TYPE 1 FORCE
* FOLLOWING LINES FOR HARMONIC LOADING GENERATOR
FUNCTION SINE AMPLITUDE 30 FREQUENCY 60 CYCLES 100 * ARRIVAL TIMES 0.0 DAMPING 0.075 There are two stages in the command specification required for a time-history analysis. The first stage is defined above. Here, the parameters of the sinusoidal loading are provided.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 404 of 493
Each data set is individually identified by the number that follows the TYPE command. In this file, only one data set is defined, which is apparent from the fact that only one TYPE is defined. The word FORCE that follows the TYPE 1 command signifies that this data set is for a forcing function. (If one wishes to specify an earthquake motion, an ACCELERATION may be specified.) The command FUNCTION SINE indicates that instead of providing the data set as discrete TIME-FORCE pairs, a sinusoidal function, which describes the variation of force with time, is provided. The parameters of the sine function, such as FREQUENCY, AMPLITUDE, and number of CYCLES of application are then defined. STAAD internally generates discrete TIME-FORCE pairs of data from the sine function in steps of time defined by the default value (see section 5.31.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for more information). The arrival time value indicates the relative value of time at which the force begins to act upon the structure. The modal damping ratio for all the modes is set to 0.075. UNIT METER LOAD 1 MEMBER LOAD 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 UNI GY -10.0 The above data describe a static load case. A uniformly distributed load of 10 kN/m acting in the negative global Y direction is applied on some members. LOAD 2 SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 JOINT LOAD 8 12 FX 15.0 8 12 FY 15.0 8 12 FZ 15.0 TIME LOAD 8 12 FX 1 1 This is the second stage of command specification for time history analysis. The 2 sets of data specified here are a) the weights for generation of the mass matrix and b) the application of the time varying loads on the structure. The weights (from which the masses for the mass matrix are obtained) are specified in the form of selfweight and joint loads. Following that, the sinusoidal force is applied using the "TIME LOAD" command. The forcing function described by the TYPE 1 load is applied on joints 8 and 12 and it starts to act starting at a time defined by the 1st arrival time number. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS FINI
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 405 of 493
The above commands are self explanatory. The FINISH command terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE 2. *EXAMPLE FOR HARMONIC LOADING GENERATOR 3. UNIT KNS METER 4. JOINT COORDINATES 5. 1 0 0 0 ; 2 5 0 0 ; 3 5 0 5 ; 4 0 0 5 6. 5 0 7 0 ; 6 2.5 7 0 ; 7 5 7 0 ; 8 5 7 2.5 7. 9 5 7 5 ; 10 2.5 7 5 ; 11 0 7 5 8. 12 0 7 2.5 ; 13 2.5 7 2.5 9. MEMBER INCIDENCES 10. 1 1 5 ; 2 2 7 ; 3 3 9 ; 4 4 11 ; 5 5 6 ; 6 6 7 11. 7 7 8 ; 8 8 9 ; 9 9 10 ; 10 10 11 ; 11 11 12 ; 12 12 5 12. 13 6 13 ; 14 13 10 ; 15 8 13 ; 16 13 12 13. UNIT MMS 14. MEMBER PROPERTIES 15. 1 TO 4 PRIS YD 600 ZD 600 16. 5 TO 16 PRIS YD 450 ZD 450 17. SUPPORTS 18. 1 TO 4 PINNED 19. CONSTANTS 20. E CONCRETE ALL 21. DENSITY CONCRETE ALL 22. POISSON CONCRETE ALL 23. DEFINE TIME HISTORY 24. TYPE 1 FORCE 25. * FOLLOWING LINES FOR HARMONIC LOADING GENERATOR 26. FUNCTION SINE 27. AMPLITUDE 30 FREQUENCY 60 CYCLES 100 28. * 29. ARRIVAL TIMES 30. 0.0 31. DAMPING 0.075 32. UNIT METER 33. LOAD 1 34. MEMBER LOAD 35. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 UNI GY -10.0 36. LOAD 2 37. SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 38. SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 39. SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 40. JOINT LOAD 41. 8 12 FX 15.0 42. 8 12 FY 15.0 43. 8 12 FZ 15.0 44. TIME LOAD 45. 8 12 FX 1 1 46. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 13/ 16/ 4 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 7/ 4/ 27 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 2 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.1/ 38896.5 MB NUMBER OF MODES REQUESTED = 6 NUMBER OF EXISTING MASSES IN THE MODEL = 27 NUMBER OF MODES THAT WILL BE USED = 6
66
CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE MODE 1 2 3 FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC) 1.863 1.864 2.214 0.53664 0.53639 0.45158
2 ACCURACY
PERIOD(SEC) 2.198E-14 2.610E-14 2.481E-14
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 406 of 493
4 5 6
18.318 19.303 23.509
0.05459 0.05181 0.04254
1.770E-08 2.749E-09 1.729E-08
The following Frequencies are estimates that were calculated. These are for information only and will not be used. Remaining values are either above the cut off mode/freq values or are of low accuracy. To use these frequencies, rerun with a higher cutoff mode (or mode + freq) value. CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE 2 MODE 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC) 28.606 30.175 31.831 34.539 41.121 82.426 83.366 83.479 84.414 102.892 103.028 103.040 103.764 117.529 159.295 192.872 0.03496 0.03314 0.03142 0.02895 0.02432 0.01213 0.01200 0.01198 0.01185 0.00972 0.00971 0.00970 0.00964 0.00851 0.00628 0.00518 PERIOD(SEC) 9.752E-09 1.209E-06 3.453E-08 2.686E-06 8.200E-09 1.913E-05 4.538E-07 2.693E-05 2.768E-06 3.344E-05 8.109E-06 1.336E-05 1.334E-06 6.274E-05 3.622E-05 6.287E-05 ACCURACY
MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT -------------------------------------MODE X Y Z SUMM-X SUMM-Y SUMM-Z
1 100.00 0.00 0.00 99.996 0.000 0.000 2 0.00 0.00100.00 99.996 0.000 99.998 3 0.00 0.00 0.00 99.996 0.000 99.998 4 0.00 0.00 0.00 99.996 0.000 99.998 5 0.00 43.46 0.00 99.996 43.456 99.998 6 0.00 0.00 0.00 99.999 43.456 99.998
TIME STEP USED IN TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS = 0.00139 SECONDS NUMBER OF MODES WHOSE CONTRIBUTION IS CONSIDERED = 6 TIME DURATION OF TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS = 1.665 SECONDS NUMBER OF TIME STEPS IN THE SOLUTION PROCESS = 1199
BASE SHEAR UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MAXIMUM BASE SHEAR X= -1.669199E+00 Y= -2.384186E-07 Z= 9.313226E-10 AT TIMES 0.127778 0.088889 0.033333 47. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM RADIANS) -----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 -0.0045 0.0408 0.0001 0.0000 -0.0472 0.0408 0.0000 -0.0001 -0.0045 0.0408 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0472 0.0410 -0.0005 -0.0001 -0.0045 0.0408 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0472 0.0408 0.0000 0.0001 -0.0045 0.0408 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0002 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000 0.0000
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 407 of 493
12 13
1 0.0000 2 0.0410 1 0.0000 2 0.0410
-0.0472 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0005 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0583 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM Z
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS METE -----------------
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 1 2.15 -0.42 -2.15 -0.42 -2.15 -0.42 2.15 -0.42 50.00 2.15 -1.15 -0.02 50.00 2.15 1.15 0.02 50.00 -2.15 1.15 -0.02 50.00 -2.15 -1.15 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 0.00 -15.04 0.00 2.92 0.00 15.04 0.00 2.92 0.00 15.04 0.00 2.92 0.00 -15.04 0.00 2.92 MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 50.00 -2.15 2.15 0.00 0.00 5 -50.00 2.15 -2.15 0.00 -15.04 1 -1.15 0.42 -0.02 0.00 0.00 5 1.15 -0.42 0.02 0.00 0.12 2 50.00 2.15 2.15 7 -50.00 -2.15 -2.15 2 1.15 0.42 0.02 7 -1.15 -0.42 -0.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 -15.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.12
3 50.00 2.15 -2.15 0.00 0.00 9 -50.00 -2.15 2.15 0.00 15.04 3 1.15 0.42 -0.02 0.00 0.00 9 -1.15 -0.42 0.02 0.00 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 15.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.12
4 50.00 -2.15 -2.15 11 -50.00 2.15 2.15 2 4 -1.15 0.42 0.02 11 1.15 -0.42 -0.02
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER LOAD JT 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 2 9 1 5 2.09 6 -2.09 5 -0.10 6 0.10 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 25.00 0.06 1.32 -0.07 16.36 0.00 -0.06 -1.32 -0.07 14.89 -1.05 -0.06 -0.02 0.08 -2.54 1.05 0.06 0.02 0.06 -0.08 -1.32 1.32 -0.02 0.02 0.07 0.07 0.06 0.08 -14.89 -16.36 -0.08 -2.54 MOM-Y MOM-Z
6 2.09 0.00 -0.06 7 -2.09 25.00 0.06 6 0.10 -1.05 -0.06 7 -0.10 1.05 0.06
7 2.09 25.00 0.06 1.32 -0.07 16.36 8 -2.09 0.00 -0.06 -1.32 -0.07 14.89 7 -0.04 0.14 0.08 -0.38 -0.08 0.14 8 0.04 -0.14 -0.08 0.38 -0.12 0.21 8 2.09 0.00 -0.06 -1.32 9 -2.09 25.00 0.06 1.32 8 -0.04 -0.14 -0.08 0.38 9 0.04 0.14 0.08 -0.38 2.09 -2.09 0.10 -0.10 0.07 0.07 0.12 0.08 -14.89 -16.36 -0.21 -0.14 16.36 14.89 2.54 0.08
9 10 2 9 10 1
25.00 0.06 1.32 -0.07 0.00 -0.06 -1.32 -0.07 1.05 0.06 0.02 -0.08 -1.05 -0.06 -0.02 -0.06
10
10 2.09 0.00 -0.06 -1.32 0.07 -14.89 11 -2.09 25.00 0.06 1.32 0.07 -16.36 2 10 -0.10 1.05 0.06 0.02 -0.06 0.08 11 0.10 -1.05 -0.06 -0.02 -0.08 2.54 11 2.09 25.00 0.06 1.32 -0.07 16.36 12 -2.09 0.00 -0.06 -1.32 -0.07 14.89 2 11 0.04 -0.14 -0.08 0.38 0.08 -0.14 12 -0.04 0.14 0.08 -0.38 0.12 -0.21 1
11
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 408 of 493
12
1 2
12 2.09 0.00 -0.06 -1.32 0.07 -14.89 5 -2.09 25.00 0.06 1.32 0.07 -16.36 12 0.04 0.14 0.08 -0.38 -0.12 0.21 5 -0.04 -0.14 -0.08 0.38 -0.08 0.14 6 0.12 -0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.10 0.17 -0.12 0.00 -0.10 -0.17 -0.13 -2.64 2.64 0.00 0.00 -2.64 2.64 0.00 0.00 -2.64 2.64 0.76 -0.17 -2.64 2.64 -0.17 0.76
13
1 13 2 6 13
14
13 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 10 -0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 13 0.00 0.00 -0.10 -0.17 0.13 10 0.00 0.00 0.10 0.17 0.12 8 0.12 0.00 0.00 13 -0.12 0.00 0.00 2 8 -0.03 0.24 0.00 13 0.03 -0.24 0.00 1 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
15
16
13 0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 12 -0.12 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 13 0.03 0.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 12 -0.03 -0.24 0.00 0.00 0.00
48. FINI *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= TIME= ****

This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to automatically generate spring supports for a slab on grade. The slab is subjected to pressure loading and analysis of the structure is performed. The numbers shown in the diagram below are the element numbers.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 409 of 493
STAAD SPACE SLAB ON GRADE Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The remainder of the words form a title to identify this project. UNIT METER KNS The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 13.33 2 0.0 0.0 12.0 3 0.0 0.0 9.39 4 0.0 0.0 6.78 5 0.0 0.0 4.17 6 0.0 0.0 2.17 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT ALL 3 2.83 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 2.67 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 5 2 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 2.67 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 2.83 0.0 0.0 For joints 1 through 7, the joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. The coordinates of these joints is used as a basis for generating 21 more joints by incrementing the X coordinate of each of these 7 joints by 2.83 metres, 3 times. REPEAT commands are used to generate the remaining joints of the structure. The results of the generation may be visually verified using the STAAD graphical viewing facilities. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 8 9 2 TO 6 REPEAT 16 6 7 The incidences of element number 1 is defined and that data is used as a basis for generating the 2nd through the 6th element. The incidence pattern of the first 6 elements is then used to
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 410 of 493
generate the incidences of 96 (= 16 x 6) more elements using the REPEAT command. UNIT CM ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 102 TH 14.0 The thickness of elements 1 to 102 is specified as 14 cms following the command ELEMENT PROPERTIES. UNIT METER CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The modulus of elasticity (E) and Poissons Ratio are specified following the command CONSTANTS. The built-in default value for concrete is used. SUPPORTS 1 TO 126 ELASTIC MAT DIRECTION Y SUB 1570. The above command is used to instruct STAAD to generate supports with springs which are effective in the global Y direction. These springs are located at nodes 1 to 126. The subgrade modulus of the soil is specified as 1570 KN/cu.m. The program will determine the area under the influence of each joint and multiply the influence area by the subgrade reaction to arrive at the spring stiffness for the "FY" degree of freedom at the joint. Additional information on this feature may be found in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. PRINT SUPP INFO This command will enable us to obtain the details of the support conditions which were generated using the earlier commands. LOAD 1 WEIGHT OF MAT & EARTH ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 102 PR GY 74.2 The above data describe a static load case. A pressure load of 74.2 kN/sq.m. acting in the negative global Y direction is applied on all the 102 elements. LOAD 2 'COLUMN LOAD-DL+LL' JOINT LOADS 1 2 FY -965. 8 9 FY -485. 5 FY -1373. 6 FY -2746. 22 23 FY -1824. 29 30 FY -912. 26 FY -2414. 27 FY -4828. 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -1368. 47 54 82 FY -1175. 48 55 76 83 FY -2350. 92 93 FY -912.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 411 of 493
99 100 103 104 113 114 120 121 124 125
FY -1824. FY -2166. FY -4333. FY -485. FY -965. FY -1216. FY -2431.
Load case 2 consists of several joint loads acting in the negative global Y direction. LOADING COMBINATION 101 TOTAL LOAD 1 1. 2 1. A load combination case, identified with load case number 101, is specified above. It instructs STAAD to factor loads 1 and 2 by a value of 1.0 and then algebraically add the results. PERFORM ANALYSIS The analysis is initiated using the above command. UNIT CM LOAD LIST 101 PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 33 56 PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 34 67 Joint displacements for joints 33 and 56, and element stresses for elements 34 and 67, for load case 101, is obtained with the help of the above commands. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. STAAD SPACE SLAB ON GRADE UNIT METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 13.33 2 0.0 0.0 12.0 3 0.0 0.0 9.39 4 0.0 0.0 6.78 5 0.0 0.0 4.17 6 0.0 0.0 2.17 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT ALL 3 2.83 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 2.67 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 5 2 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 2.67 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 2.83 0.0 0.0 ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 8 9 2 TO 6 REPEAT 16 6 7 UNIT CM ELEMENT PROPERTIES
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 412 of 493
21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.
1 TO 102 TH 14.0 UNIT METER CONSTANTS E CONCRETE ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL SUPPORTS 1 TO 126 ELASTIC MAT DIRECTION Y SUB 1570. PRINT SUPP INFO
SUPPORT INFORMATION (1=FIXED, 0=RELEASED) ------------------UNITS FOR SPRING CONSTANTS ARE KNS METE DEGREES JOINT FORCE-X/ KFX 1 0.0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 JOINT 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-X/ KFX 1 0.0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 FORCE-Y/ KFY 0 1477.3 0 4376.5 0 5798.2 0 5798.2 0 5120.7 0 4631.9 0 2410.4 0 2954.7 0 8752.9 0 11596.5 0 11596.5 0 10241.3 0 9263.9 0 4820.8 FORCE-Y/ KFY 0 2954.7 0 8752.9 0 11596.5 0 11596.5 0 10241.3 0 9263.9 0 4820.8 0 2871.1 0 8505.5 0 11268.7 0 11268.7 0 9951.8 0 9002.0 0 4684.5 0 2787.6 0 8258.0 0 10940.9 0 10940.9 0 9662.3 0 FORCE-Z/ KFZ 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-Z/ KFZ 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0 0 0.0 1 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-X/ KMX 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 MOM-Y/ KMY 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-Z/ KMZ 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-X/ KMX 0 0.0 1 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-Y/ KMY 1 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-Z/ KMZ 0 0.0
15
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 413 of 493
0.0 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 JOINT 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-X/ KFX 1 0.0 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1
8740.1 0 4548.2 0 2787.6 0 8258.0 0 10940.9 0 10940.9 0 9662.3 0 8740.1 0 4548.2 0 2437.9 0 7221.9 0 9568.1 0 9568.1 0 8450.0 0 7643.5 0 3977.6 0 2088.1 0 6185.8 FORCE-Y/ KFY 0 8195.4 0 8195.4 0 7237.7 0 6546.9 0 3406.9 0 2088.1 0 6185.8 0 8195.4 0 8195.4 0 7237.7 0 6546.9 0 3406.9 0 2088.1 0 6185.8 0 8195.4 0 8195.4 0 7237.7 0 6546.9 0 3406.9 0 2088.1 0 6185.8 0 8195.4 0 8195.4 0 7237.7 0
0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-Z/ KFZ 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 MOM-X/ KMX 0 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1
0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-Y/ KMY 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MOM-Z/ KMZ 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
52
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 414 of 493
0.0 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 JOINT 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-X/ KFX 1 0.0 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1
6546.9 0 3406.9 0 2437.9 0 7221.9 0 9568.1 0 9568.1 0 8450.0 0 7643.5 0 3977.6 0 2787.6 0 8258.0 0 10940.9 0 10940.9 FORCE-Y/ KFY 0 9662.3 0 8740.1 0 4548.2 0 2787.6 0 8258.0 0 10940.9 0 10940.9 0 9662.3 0 8740.1 0 4548.2 0 2871.1 0 8505.5 0 11268.7 0 11268.7 0 9951.8 0 9002.0 0 4684.5 0 2954.7 0 8752.9 0 11596.5 0 11596.5 0 10241.4 0 9263.9 0 4820.8 0 2954.7 0 8752.9 0 11596.5 0 11596.5 0 10241.4 0
0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-Z/ KFZ 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 MOM-X/ KMX 0 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1
0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-Y/ KMY 1 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MOM-Z/ KMZ 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
89
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 415 of 493
0.0 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 JOINT 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-X/ KFX 1 0.0
9263.9 0 4820.8 0 1477.3 0 4376.5 0 5798.2 0 5798.2 0 5120.7 0 4631.9 FORCE-Y/ KFY 0 2410.4
0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 FORCE-Z/ KFZ 1 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 1 0.0 MOM-X/ KMX 0 0.0
0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 0 0.0 MOM-Y/ KMY 1 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MOM-Z/ KMZ 0 0.0
126
29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55.
LOAD 1 WEIGHT OF MAT & EARTH ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 102 PR GY -74.2 LOAD 2 'COLUMN LOAD-DL+LL' JOINT LOADS 1 2 FY -965. 8 9 FY -485. 5 FY -1373. 6 FY -2746. 22 23 FY -1824. 29 30 FY -912. 26 FY -2414. 27 FY -4828. 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -1368. 47 54 82 FY -1175. 48 55 76 83 FY -2350. 92 93 FY -912. 99 100 FY -1824. 103 FY -2166. 104 FY -4333. 113 114 FY -485. 120 121 FY -965. 124 FY -1216. 125 FY -2431. LOADING COMBINATION 101 TOTAL LOAD 1 1. 2 1. PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 126/ 102/ 126 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 8/ 8/ 54 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 756 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 41 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 13.0/ 38896.3 MB
56. UNIT CM 57. LOAD LIST 101 58. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 33 56
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 33 56 LOAD 101 101 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS -10.5859 -12.2476
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000
X-ROTAN -0.0256 0.0647
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN 0.0543 0.0282
59. PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 34 67 ELEMENT STRESSES ---------------FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KNS CM
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 416 of 493
STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX VONT TRESCAT SQY VONB TRESCAB MX SX MY SY MXY SXY
34
101
TOP : BOTT: 67
SMAX= SMAX=
-0.02 2.22 2.54 1.58 0.96 0.28 4.97 5.44 4.31 1.13
-0.03 2.22 2.54 SMIN= SMIN= 0.03 4.97 5.44 SMIN= SMIN=
2.43 0.00 -0.96 -1.58 TMAX= TMAX=
18.01 0.00 1.27 1.27 40.28 0.00 2.72 2.72 ANGLE= ANGLE=
40.71 0.00 ANGLE= -39.6 ANGLE= -39.6 88.13 0.00 41.2 41.2
101
63.64 0.00 -1.13 -4.31 TMAX= TMAX=
TOP : BOTT:
SMAX= SMAX=
**** MAXIMUM STRESSES AMONG SELECTED PLATES AND CASES **** MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL SHEAR VONMISES TRESCA STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS 4.312085E+00 -4.312085E+00 PLATE NO. 67 67 CASE NO. 101 101 2.721572E+00 67 101 4.974997E+00 67 101 5.443144E+00 67 101
********************END OF ELEMENT FORCES********************

This is an example of the analysis of a structure modelled using SOLID finite elements. This example also illustrates the method for applying an enforced displacement on the structure.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 417 of 493
STAAD SPACE *EXAMPLE PROBLEM USING SOLID ELEMENTS Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The comment line which begins with an asterisk is an optional title to identify this project. UNIT KNS MET The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 2.0 4 0.0 3.0 2.0 5 1.0 0.0 2.0 8 1.0 3.0 2.0 9 2.0 0.0 2.0 12 2.0 3.0 2.0 21 0.0 0.0 1.0 24 0.0 3.0 1.0 25 1.0 0.0 1.0 28 1.0 3.0 1.0 29 2.0 0.0 1.0 32 2.0 3.0 1.0 41 0.0 0.0 0.0 44 0.0 3.0 0.0 45 1.0 0.0 0.0 48 1.0 3.0 0.0 49 2.0 0.0 0.0 52 2.0 3.0 0.0 The joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. The coordinates of some of those nodes are generated utilizing the fact that they are equally spaced between the extremities. ELEMENT INCIDENCES SOLID
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 418 of 493
1 1 5 6 2 21 25 26 22 TO 3 4 21 25 26 22 41 45 46 42 TO 6 1 1 7 5 9 10 6 25 29 30 26 TO 9 1 1 10 25 29 30 26 45 49 50 46 TO 12 1 1 The incidences of solid elements are defined above. The word SOLID is used to signify that these are 8-noded solid elements as opposed to 3-noded or 4-noded plate elements. Each line contains the data for generating 3 elements. For example, element number 1 is first defined by all of its 8 nodes. Then, increments of 1 to the joint number and 1 to the element number (the defaults) are used for generating incidences for elements 2 and 3. Similarly, incidences of elements 4, 7 and 10 are defined while those of 5, 6, 8, 9, 11 and 12 are generated. CONSTANTS E 2.1E7 ALL POIS 0.25 ALL DENSITY 7.5 ALL Following the command CONSTANTS above, the material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity), Poisson's Ratio, and Density are specified. PRINT ELEMENT INFO SOLID LIST 1 TO 5 This command will enable us to obtain, in a tabular form, the details of the incidences and material property values of elements 1 to 5. SUPPORTS 1 5 21 25 29 41 45 49 PINNED 9 ENFORCED The above lines contain the data for supports for the model. The ENFORCED support condition is used to declare a point at which an enforced displacement load is applied later (see load case 3). LOAD 1 SELF Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 28 FY -1000.0 The above data describe a static load case. It consists of selfweight loading and a joint load, both in the negative global Y direction. LOAD 2 JOINT LOADS 2 TO 4 22 TO 24 42 TO 44 FX 100.0 Load case 2 consists of several joint loads acting in the positive global X direction. LOAD 3 SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT 9 FX 0.0011 Load case 3 consists of an enforced displacement along the global X direction at node 9. The displacement in the other enforced support degrees of freedom will default to zero.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 419 of 493
UNIT POUND FEET LOAD 4 ELEMENT LOAD SOLIDS 3 6 9 12 FACE 4 PRE GY -500.0 In Load case 4, a pressure load of 500 pounds/sq.ft is applied on Face # 4 of solid elements 3, 6, 9 and 12. Face 4 is defined as shown in the following table : FACE NUMBER 1 front 2 bottom 3 left 4 top 5 right 6 back SURFACE JOINTS f2 f3 Jt 4 Jt 3 Jt 2 Jt 6 Jt 5 Jt 8 Jt 8 Jt 7 Jt 3 Jt 7 Jt 6 Jt 7
f1 Jt 1 Jt 1 Jt 1 Jt 4 Jt 2 Jt 5
f4 Jt 2 Jt 5 Jt 4 Jt 3 Jt 6 Jt 8
The above table, and other details of this type of loading can be found in section 5.32.3.2 of the STAAD.Pro 2003 Technical Reference manual.
UNIT KNS MMS LOAD 5
REPEAT LOAD 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 1.0 4 1.0 Load case 5 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases already specified earlier. We would like the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 through 4 acting simultaneously. In other words, the above instruction is the same as the following: LOAD 5 SELF Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 28 FY -1000.0 2 TO 4 22 TO 24 42 TO 44 FX 100.0 SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT 9 FX .0011 ELEMENT LOAD SOLIDS 3 6 9 12 FACE 4 PRE GY -500.0
LOAD COMB 10
1 1.0 2 1.0 Load case 10 is a combination load case, which combines the effects of cases 1 & 2. While the syntax of this might look very similar to that of the REPEAT LOAD case shown in case 5, there
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 420 of 493
is a fundamental difference. In a REPEAT LOAD case, the program computes the displacements by multiplying the inverted stiffness matrix by the load vector built for the REPEAT LOAD case. But in solving load combination cases, the program merely calculates the end results (displacements, forces, reactions) by gathering up the corresponding values from the individual components of the combination case, factoring them, and then algebraically summing them up. This difference in approach is quite important in that non-linear problems such as PDELTA ANALYSIS, MEMBER TENSION and MEMBER COMPRESSION situations, changes in support conditions etc. should be handled using REPEAT LOAD cases, not load combination cases. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK A static equilibrium report, consisting of total applied loading and total support reactions from each primary load case is requested along with the instructions to carry out a linear static analysis. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 8 9 Global displacements at nodes 8 and 9 are obtained using the above command. UNIT KNS METER PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS Reactions at the supports are obtained using the above command.
UNIT NEWTON MMS PRINT ELEMENT JOINT STRESS SOLID LIST 4 6
This command requests the program to provide the element stress results at the nodes of elements 4 and 6. The results will be printed for all the load cases. The word SOLID is used to signify that these are solid elements as opposed to plate or shell elements. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
STAAD SPACE *EXAMPLE PROBLEM USING SOLID ELEMENTS UNIT KNS MET JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 2.0 4 0.0 3.0 2.0 5 1.0 0.0 2.0 8 1.0 3.0 2.0 9 2.0 0.0 2.0 12 2.0 3.0 2.0 21 0.0 0.0 1.0 24 0.0 3.0 1.0 25 1.0 0.0 1.0 28 1.0 3.0 1.0 29 2.0 0.0 1.0 32 2.0 3.0 1.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 421 of 493
11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
41 0.0 0.0 0.0 44 0.0 3.0 45 1.0 0.0 0.0 48 1.0 3.0 49 2.0 0.0 0.0 52 2.0 3.0 ELEMENT INCIDENCES SOLID 1 1 5 6 2 21 25 26 4 21 25 26 22 41 45 46 7 5 9 10 6 25 29 30 10 25 29 30 26 45 49 50 CONSTANTS E 2.1E7 ALL POIS 0.25 ALL DENSITY 7.5 ALL PRINT ELEMENT INFO SOLID LIST 1 NODE-2 NODE-3 NODE-4
0.0 0.0 0.0 22 42 26 46 TO TO TO TO 3 6 1 1 9 1 1 12 1 1
TO 5 NODE-5 NODE-6 NODE-7 NODE-8
ELEMENT NODE-1
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 21 22
5 6 7 25 26
6 7 8 26 27
2 3 4 22 23
21 22 23 41 42
25 26 27 45 46
26 27 28 46 47
22 23 24 42 43
MATERIAL PROPERTIES. -------------------ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET ELEMENT YOUNG'S MODULUS MODULUS OF RIGIDITY DENSITY ALPHA
1 2.1000002E+07 0.0000000E+00 2 2.1000002E+07 0.0000000E+00 3 2.1000002E+07 0.0000000E+00 4 2.1000002E+07 0.0000000E+00 5 2.1000002E+07 0.0000000E+00 24. SUPPORTS 25. 1 5 21 25 29 41 45 49 PINNED 26. 9 ENFORCED 27. LOAD 1 28. SELF Y -1.0 29. JOINT LOAD 30. 28 FY -1000.0 31. LOAD 2 32. JOINT LOADS 33. 2 TO 4 22 TO 24 42 TO 44 FX 100.0 34. LOAD 3 35. SUPPORT DISPLACEMENT 36. 9 FX 0.0011 37. UNIT POUND FEET 38. LOAD 4 39. ELEMENT LOAD SOLIDS 40. 3 6 9 12 FACE 4 PRE GY -500.0 41. UNIT KNS MMS 42. LOAD 5 43. REPEAT LOAD 44. 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 1.0 4 1.0 45. LOAD COMB 10 46. 1 1.0 2 1.0 47. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
7.5000E+00 7.5000E+00 7.5000E+00 7.5000E+00 7.5000E+00
0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00 0.0000E+00
ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 4 AT JOINT 9 EQN.NO. 22 LOADS APPLIED OR DISTRIBUTED HERE FROM ELEMENTS WILL BE IGNORED. THIS MAY BE DUE TO ALL MEMBERS AT THIS JOINT BEING RELEASED OR EFFECTIVELY RELEASED IN THIS DIRECTION. Note - Some or all of the rotational zero stiffness warnings may be due to solid elements in the model. Solids do not have rotational stiffnesses at nodes. ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 5 AT JOINT 9 EQN.NO. 23 ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 9 EQN.NO. 24
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO.
***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KNS
MMS
) SUMMARY (LOADING
1 )
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 422 of 493
SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Y = SUMMATION FORCE-Z =
0.00 -1090.00 0.00
-1089999.98
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KNS MMS ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 1090.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -1090000.00 MY= 0.00 MZ=
1 )
1090000.00
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( MAXIMUMS AT X = -1.12983E-03 Y = -1.01204E-02 Z = 1.12983E-03 RX= 0.00000E+00 RY= 0.00000E+00 RZ= 0.00000E+00
CM /RADIANS) (LOADING NODE 23 28 7 0 0 0
1)
( KNS = = =
MMS ) SUMMARY (LOADING 900.00 0.00 0.00
2 )
-1799999.93
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KNS MMS ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = -900.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -0.01 MY= -899999.97 MZ=
2 )
1799999.92
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 2.22892E-02 4 Y = 7.83934E-03 4 Z = 9.49033E-04 10 RX= 0.00000E+00 0 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= 0.00000E+00 0
2)
( KNS = = =
3 )
0.00
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KNS SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Y = SUMMATION FORCE-Z =
3 )
0.00
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 1.10000E-01 9 Y = -1.21497E-02 6 Z = 1.61372E-02 24 RX= 0.00000E+00 0
3)
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 423 of 493
RY= RZ=
0.00000E+00 0.00000E+00
0 0
( KNS = = =
MMS ) SUMMARY (LOADING 0.00 -95.76 0.00
4 )
-95760.52
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KNS SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Y = SUMMATION FORCE-Z =
4 )
95760.52
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( MAXIMUMS AT X = 3.17652E-05 Y = -3.35288E-04 Z = -3.17652E-05 RX= 0.00000E+00 RY= 0.00000E+00 RZ= 0.00000E+00
CM /RADIANS) (LOADING NODE 50 28 50 0 0 0
4)
( KNS MMS ) SUMMARY (LOADING = 900.00 = -1185.76 = 0.00
5 )
-2985760.43
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KNS MMS ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = -900.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 1185.76 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -1185760.50 MY= -899999.92 MZ=
5 )
2985760.50
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( CM /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 1.10000E-01 9 Y = -1.66887E-02 12 Z = 1.62734E-02 4 RX= 0.00000E+00 0 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= 0.00000E+00 0
5)
48. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 8 9
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT LOAD X-TRANS
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS
Z-TRANS
X-ROTAN
Y-ROTAN
Z-ROTAN
1 2 3 4 5
0.0000 0.0200 0.0193 0.0000 0.0393
-0.0010 0.0001 -0.0049 -0.0003 -0.0062
-0.0008 0.0000 0.0089 0.0000 0.0081
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 424 of 493
10 1 2 3 4 5 10
0.0200 0.0000 0.0000 0.1100 0.0000 0.1100 0.0000
-0.0009 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
-0.0009 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
49. UNIT KNS METER 50. PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS ----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 FORCE-X 16.05 -72.24 -202.27 1.52 -256.94 -56.19 0.00 -62.32 -1641.00 0.00 -1703.32 -62.32 31.85 -159.92 -334.17 2.98 -459.26 -128.07 0.00 -138.00 -1919.80 0.00 -2057.79 -138.00 -31.85 -170.27 390.27 -2.98 185.18 -202.12 16.05 -72.24 -89.12 1.52 -143.78 -56.19 0.00 -62.32 -43.04 0.00 -105.36 -62.32 -16.05 -81.35 -77.83 -1.52 -176.75 -97.40 -16.05 -81.35 3916.95 -1.52 3818.02 -97.40
METE
FORCE-Y 74.37 -232.67 -30.20 6.63 -181.87 -158.30 135.25 11.42 743.48 11.97 902.13 146.68 135.25 -450.84 -292.36 11.97 -595.97 -315.58 251.52 9.51 524.87 21.34 807.24 261.03 135.25 431.34 51.20 11.97 629.77 566.59 74.37 -232.67 -273.99 6.63 -425.66 -158.30 135.25 11.42 -75.25 11.97 83.40 146.68 74.37 226.24 207.38 6.63 514.62 300.61 74.37 226.24 -855.13 6.63 -547.89 300.61
FORCE-Z -16.05 42.18 -119.24 -1.52 -94.63 26.13 -31.85 -0.05 -228.79 -2.98 -263.67 -31.90 0.00 0.00 -187.70 0.00 -187.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 -1097.52 0.00 -1097.52 0.00 0.00 0.00 384.26 0.00 384.26 0.00 16.05 -42.18 -159.85 1.52 -184.46 -26.13 31.85 0.05 -23.76 2.98 11.12 31.90 16.05 45.03 119.24 1.52 181.84 61.08 -16.05 -45.03 1313.37 -1.52 1250.77 -61.08
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
21
25
29
41
45
49
51. UNIT NEWTON MMS 52. PRINT ELEMENT JOINT STRESS SOLID LIST 4 6 ELEMENT STRESSES UNITS= NEWTMMS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 425 of 493
------------------------------------------------------------------------------NODE/ NORMAL STRESSES SHEAR STRESSES ELEMENT LOAD CENTER SXX SYY SZZ SXY SYZ SZX -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
21 25 26 22 41 45 46 42
-0.088 -0.076 -0.008 -0.011 -0.095 -0.098 -0.002 0.011 -0.046 -0.041 0.707 0.176 0.154 -0.028 -0.054 0.189 0.162 -0.225 -0.247 0.016 0.606 0.372 0.090 -0.089 0.525 0.538 0.215 0.228 -0.133 -0.313 0.132 0.703 0.425 -0.008 -0.008 0.001 0.001 -0.008 -0.008 0.001 0.001 -0.004 -0.003 0.705 0.170 -0.019 0.490 0.474
-0.280 -0.204 -0.214 -0.280 -0.311 -0.280 -0.280 -0.301
-0.098 -0.076 -0.008 -0.002 -0.095 -0.088 -0.011 0.011
0.001 -0.003 0.004 0.009 -0.008 -0.003 -0.011 -0.016
-0.003 -0.003 0.004 -0.011 -0.008 0.001 0.009 -0.016
0.000 0.005 0.005 0.009 -0.005 0.000 0.009 0.014 0.005 0.223 0.707 0.005 -0.029 -0.002 -0.036 0.029 -0.005 -0.026 -0.060 -0.015 0.617 0.994 0.040 -0.123 0.327 0.165 0.123 -0.040 0.244 0.082 0.102 0.760 -0.586 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.021 0.707 0.045 -0.147 0.330 0.138
1 CENTER S1= DC= 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 21 25 26 22 41 45 46 42
-0.269 -0.046 S2= -0.051 S3= -0.021 0.707 1.021 -0.006 0.053 1.031 1.034 -0.006 -0.016 0.976 0.284 0.022 -0.015 0.103 0.321 0.054 -0.051 0.071
-0.003 -0.003 -0.269 SE= -0.707 0.000 0.217 0.251 0.253 0.219 0.258 0.223 0.221 0.255 0.237 -0.082 -0.106 0.499 0.661 0.565 0.403 0.011 -0.152 -0.056 0.107 0.014 0.014 0.016 0.012 0.038 -0.010 -0.008 0.036 0.014 SE= 0.027 0.506 0.143 0.047 0.602 0.589 0.060 -0.036 0.685
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 CENTER S1= DC= 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 25 26 22 41 45 46 42
0.511 0.099 S2= 0.101 S3= 0.928 0.014 0.518 -0.574 -0.328 0.597 0.951 0.435 0.355 0.705 0.188 -0.129 0.365 0.183 0.255 0.129 0.298 -0.076
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
3 CENTER S1= DC= 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 21 25 26 22 41 45 46 42
0.332 0.152 S2= 0.041 S3= 0.744 0.516 -0.024 -0.022 -0.022 -0.024 -0.026 -0.024 -0.024 -0.026 -0.008 -0.008 0.001 0.001 -0.008 -0.008 0.001 0.001
0.255 0.324 -0.128 SE= 0.809 -0.055 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001 -0.001
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 CENTER S1= DC= 5 5 5 5 21 25 26 22
-0.024 -0.004 S2= -0.004 S3= -0.070 0.705 1.235 -0.806 -0.512 1.324 0.366 -0.191 0.343 0.285
-0.001 -0.001 -0.024 SE= -0.707 0.000 0.716 0.908 0.822 0.630 0.515 0.153 0.066 0.602
4 4 4 4
ELEMENT STRESSES UNITS= NEWTMMS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------NODE/ NORMAL STRESSES SHEAR STRESSES ELEMENT LOAD CENTER SXX SYY SZZ SXY SYZ SZX ------------------------------------------------------------------------------4 5 41 0.300 1.649 0.472 0.259 0.618 0.147 4 5 45 0.283 0.125 0.087 0.067 0.050 -0.045 4 5 46 -0.360 0.035 0.238 0.153 -0.036 0.228 4 5 42 -0.548 1.354 0.007 0.345 0.704 0.036 4 5 CENTER S1= DC= 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 21 25 26 22 41 45 46 42 0.099 1.000 0.469 0.088 0.078 -0.036 -0.065 0.093 0.064 -0.227 -0.236 0.551 0.201 S2= 0.093 S3= 0.795 0.386 0.741 -0.210 -0.161 0.751 0.724 -0.286 -0.296 0.675 0.186 -0.054 -0.022 0.102 0.225 -0.034 -0.062 0.082 0.487 0.334 -0.243 SE= -0.452 -0.160 0.218 0.247 0.257 0.228 0.249 0.220 0.210 0.240 0.011 0.011 0.020 0.001 0.030 -0.009 0.001 0.020 0.092 1.114 0.878 0.005 -0.024 0.003 -0.027 0.024 -0.005 -0.016 -0.046
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 426 of 493
10 CENTER S1= DC= 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 23 27 28 24 43 47 48 44
-0.030 0.376 0.498 0.317 -0.082 -0.670 -0.160 -0.108 0.402 0.146 -0.253 -0.051 0.032 0.619 -0.032 -0.001 -0.096 -0.085 -0.152 -0.140 -0.496 -0.464 -0.183 0.081 0.314 -0.274 -0.314 0.182 0.190 0.064 0.072 -0.014 -0.053 -0.018 0.014 -0.484
0.242 0.053 S2= 0.054 S3= 0.867 0.012 0.428 -1.708 -1.819 0.428 -0.163 0.428 0.428 -0.052 0.402 -0.082 -0.670 0.146 -0.108 0.317 -0.160 -0.253
0.234 -0.165 -0.064 -0.043 -0.098 -0.552 -0.497 -0.181 -0.126 0.329 0.273
0.011 SE= 0.023 -0.126 -0.098 -0.552 0.329 -0.181 -0.043 -0.497 0.273
-0.011 0.472 0.998 -0.060 -0.005 -0.005 0.051 -0.115 -0.060 0.051 0.106 -0.005 0.341 0.707 0.016 -0.027 -0.035 -0.078 -0.005 -0.049 -0.014 -0.057 -0.031 0.263 0.971 0.041 -0.056 0.021 -0.076 0.056 -0.041 0.006 -0.091 -0.017 0.051 -0.316
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1 CENTER S1= DC= 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 23 27 28 24 43 47 48 44
-0.254 -0.051 S2= -0.046 S3= -0.484 0.619 0.112 -0.025 -0.003 0.177 0.158 -0.041 -0.105 0.136 -0.001 -0.046 -0.065 0.109 0.052 -0.013 -0.119 0.076
-0.112 -0.112 -0.341 SE= -0.707 0.000 0.030 0.073 0.083 0.040 0.136 0.092 0.082 0.125 -0.002 -0.013 -0.003 -0.012 -0.023 0.008 0.019 -0.033
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
2 CENTER S1= DC= 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 23 27 28 24 43 47 48 44
0.051 -0.001 S2= -0.001 S3= 0.928 -0.202 -0.053 -0.056 0.057 0.028 -0.048 0.094 0.013 -0.160 -0.004 -0.102 0.061 0.065 0.069 0.019 -0.012 -0.056
0.083 -0.007 -0.213 SE= -0.060 0.232 -0.033 0.064 0.040 -0.057 -0.003 -0.100 -0.076 0.021 -0.047 0.030 0.006 -0.023 -0.031 0.014 -0.010 -0.007
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
3 CENTER S1= DC=
-0.016 0.005 S2= -0.001 S3= 0.038 0.874
-0.018 -0.009 -0.042 SE= -0.507 0.802
ELEMENT STRESSES UNITS= NEWTMMS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------NODE/ NORMAL STRESSES SHEAR STRESSES ELEMENT LOAD CENTER SXX SYY SZZ SXY SYZ SZX ------------------------------------------------------------------------------6 4 23 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 27 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 28 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 24 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 43 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 47 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 48 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 44 0.000 -0.024 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6 4 CENTER S1= DC= 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 23 27 28 24 43 47 48 44 0.000 0.000 -0.707 0.010 -0.397 -0.585 -0.055 -0.196 0.334 -0.363 -0.770 -0.253 0.019 -0.102 0.285 -0.083 -0.766 -0.245 -0.259 0.262 -0.350 -0.717 -0.234 0.015 -0.070 -0.024 0.000 S2= 0.000 S3= 0.000 0.707 0.463 -1.813 -1.789 0.609 -0.077 0.458 0.312 -0.101 0.397 -0.230 -0.674 0.320 0.014 0.323 -0.291 -0.233 0.000 0.000 -0.024 SE= 0.707 -0.002 -0.046 0.039 -0.429 -0.514 -0.049 -0.134 0.335 0.420 -0.174 -0.081 -0.550 0.294 -0.236 -0.020 -0.489 0.233 0.000 0.024 0.707 -0.003 -0.088 -0.018 -0.103 -0.064 -0.149 0.043 -0.042 -0.053 0.323 -0.165 -0.044 -0.032 -0.039 -0.028 -0.120 -0.108 0.037 0.049 -0.036 0.278 -0.217
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
5 CENTER S1= DC= 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 23 27 28 24 43 47 48 44
-0.242 -0.047 S2= -0.210 S3= -0.422 0.901 0.540 -1.733 -1.822 0.605 -0.005 0.388 0.323 0.084 0.401 -0.129 -0.735 0.255 -0.055 0.304 -0.279 -0.177
-0.047 -0.128 -0.351 SE= 0.819 -0.550 -0.013 -0.025 -0.469 -0.457 -0.046 -0.034 0.411 0.399 -0.128 -0.111 -0.555 0.317 -0.204 -0.034 -0.479 0.240
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
10 CENTER S1= DC=
-0.203 -0.052 S2= -0.206 S3= -0.472 0.879
-0.029 -0.119 -0.298 SE= 0.822 -0.526
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 427 of 493
53. FINISH

This example demonstrates the usage of compression-only members. Since the structural condition is load dependent, the PERFORM ANALYSIS command is specified once for each primary load case.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 428 of 493
This example has been created to illustrate the command specification for a structure with certain members capable of carrying compressive force only. It is important to note that the analysis can be done for only 1 load case at a time. This is because, the set of active members (and hence the stiffness matrix) is load case dependent. STAAD PLANE * EXAMPLE FOR COMPRESSION-ONLY MEMBERS The input data is initiated with the word STAAD. This structure is a PLANE frame. The second line is an optional comment line. UNIT METER KNS Units for the commands to follow are specified above. SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the members which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 429 of 493
called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command). JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 ; 3 0 7.0 ; 4 5.25 7.0 ; 5 5.25 3.5 ; 6 5.25 0 Joint coordinates of joints 1 to 6 are defined above. MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 5 ; 6 1 5 ; 7 2 6 ; 8 2 4 ; 9 3 5 ; 10 2 5 The members 1 to 10 are defined along with the joints they are connected to. MEMBER COMPRESSION 6 TO 9 Members 6 to 9 are defined as COMPRESSION-only members. Hence for each load case, if during the analysis, any of the members 6 to 9 is found to be carrying a tensile force, it is disabled from the structure and the analysis is carried out again with the modified structure. MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 1 TO 10 TA ST UC152X152X30 Members 1 to 10 are assigned the UC152X152X30 section from the British steel table. CONSTANTS E STEEL ALL DEN STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL Following the command CONSTANTS, material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity), density and Poissons ratio are specified. In this case, the built-in default value of steel is assigned. SUPPORT 1 6 PINNED Joints 1 and 6 are declared as pinned-supported. LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 70 3 FX 45 Load 1 is defined above and consists of joint loads in the global X direction at joints 2 and 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above structure is analyzed for load case 1. CHANGE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 430 of 493
MEMBER COMPRESSION 6 TO 9 One or more among the members 6 to 9 may have been in-activated in the previous analysis. The CHANGE command restores the original structure to prepare it for the analysis for the next primary load case. The members with the compression-only attribute are specified again. LOAD 2 JOINT LOAD 4 FX -45 5 FX -70 In load case 2, joint loads are applied in the negative global X direction at joints 4 and 5. PERFORM ANALYSIS CHANGE The instruction to analyze the structure is specified again. Next, any compression-only members that were inactivated during the second analysis (due to the fact that they were subjected to tensile axial forces) are re-activated with the CHANGE command. Without the reactivation, these members cannot be accessed for further processing. LOAD 3 REPEAT LOAD 1 1.0 2 1.0 Load case 3 illustrates the technique employed to instruct STAAD to create a load case which consists of data to be assembled from other load cases already specified earlier. We would like the program to analyze the structure for loads from cases 1 and 2 acting simultaneously. In other words, the above instruction is the same as the following: LOAD 3 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 70 3 FX 45 4 FX -45 5 FX -70 PERFORM ANALYSIS The analysis is carried out for load case 3. CHANGE The members inactivated during the analysis of load case 3 are re-activated for further processing. LOAD LIST ALL At the end of any analysis, only those load cases for which the analysis was done most recently, are recognized as the "active" load cases. The LOAD LIST ALL command enables all the load
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 431 of 493
cases in the structure to be made active for further processing. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The program is instructed to write the joint displacements, support reactions and member forces to the output file. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
STAAD PLANE * EXAMPLE FOR COMPRESSION-ONLY MEMBERS UNIT METER KNS SET NL 3 JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 ; 3 0 7.0 ; 4 5.25 7.0 ; 5 5.25 3.5 ; 6 5.25 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 5 ; 6 1 5 ; 7 2 6 ; 8 2 4 ; 9 3 5 ; 10 2 5 MEMBER COMPRESSION 6 TO 9 MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH 1 TO 10 TA ST UC152X152X30 CONSTANTS E STEEL ALL DEN STEEL ALL POISSON STEEL ALL SUPPORT 1 6 PINNED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 70 3 FX 45 PERFORM ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S -----------------------------------
2 14
2 iterations, Case=
24. CHANGE 25. MEMBER COMPRESSION 26. 6 TO 9 27. LOAD 2 28. JOINT LOAD 29. 4 FX -45 30. 5 FX -70 31. PERFORM ANALYSIS **START ITERATION NO.
32. 33. 34. 35.
CHANGE LOAD 3 REPEAT LOAD 1 1.0 2 1.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 432 of 493
36. PERFORM ANALYSIS **NOTE-Tension/Compression converged after 1 iterations, Case= 3
37. CHANGE 38. LOAD LIST ALL 39. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.1648 -0.1946 0.0141 0.2960 -0.2959 0.0093 0.2959 -0.2960 -0.0093 0.1946 -0.1648 -0.0141 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0475 -0.0135 0.0031 0.0609 -0.0135 0.0082 -0.0135 0.0609 0.0082 -0.0135 0.0475 0.0031 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
X-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN -0.0005 0.0007 -0.0001 -0.0003 0.0003 0.0000 -0.0003 0.0002 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0003 0.0000 -0.0003 0.0003 0.0000 -0.0007 0.0005 0.0001
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KNS ----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 1 2 3 FORCE-X -0.13 114.87 10.38 -114.87 0.13 -10.38
METE
FORCE-Y -106.67 106.67 0.00 106.67 -106.67 0.00
FORCE-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE MEMBER 1 LOAD 1 2 3 JT 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 AXIAL -106.67 106.67 30.22 -30.22 -6.94 6.94 -29.91 29.91 0.15 -0.15 -11.49 11.49 0.12 -0.12 0.12 -0.12 27.79 -27.79 0.15 -0.15 -29.91 29.91 -11.49 11.49 SHEAR-Y 0.13 -0.13 -0.21 0.21 0.03 -0.03 0.24 -0.24 -0.12 0.12 -0.03 0.03 -0.15 0.15 0.15 -0.15 0.00 0.00 0.12 -0.12 -0.24 0.24 0.03 -0.03 SHEAR-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Z 0.00 0.45 0.00 -0.73 0.00 0.09 0.38 0.45 -0.08 -0.33 -0.08 -0.03 -0.45 -0.33 0.33 0.45 0.03 -0.03 0.33 0.08 -0.45 -0.38 0.03 0.08
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KNS METE
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 433 of 493
MEMBER 5
LOAD 1 2 3
JT 5 6 5 6 5 6 1 5 1 5 1 5 2 6 2 6 2 6 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 5 3 5 3 5 2 5 2 5 2 5
AXIAL 30.22 -30.22 -106.67 106.67 -6.94 6.94 0.00 0.00 137.81 -137.81 12.51 -12.51 137.81 -137.81 0.00 0.00 12.51 -12.51 0.00 0.00 53.66 -53.66 20.72 -20.72 53.66 -53.66 0.00 0.00 20.72 -20.72 -44.55 44.55 -44.55 44.55 42.29 -42.29
SHEAR-Y 0.21 -0.21 -0.13 0.13 -0.03 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.31 0.31 0.31 -0.31 0.00 0.00
SHEAR-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Z 0.73 0.00 -0.45 0.00 -0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.82 -0.81 0.81 0.82 -0.01 0.01
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
10
1 2 3

The structure in this example is a building consisting of member columns as well as floors
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 434 of 493
made up of beam members and plate elements. Using the master-slave command, the floors are specified to be rigid diaphragms for inplane actions but flexible for bending actions.
STAAD SPACE
*MODELING RIGID DIAPHRAGMS USING MASTER SLAVE
Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The second line is an optional title to identify this project. UNITS KIP FT Specify units for the following data. JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 4 0 48 0 REPEAT 3 24 0 0 REPEAT ALL 3 0 0 24 DELETE JOINT 21 25 37 41 The joint numbers and coordinates are specified above. The unwanted joints, created during the generation process used above, are then deleted. MEMBER INCI 1 1 2 3 ; 4 5 6 6 ; 7 9 10 9 ; 10 13 14 12 13 17 18 15 ; 22 29 30 24 ; 25 33 34 27 34 45 46 36 ; 37 49 50 39 ; 40 53 54 42 43 57 58 45 ; 46 61 62 48 ; 49 2 6 51 52 6 10 54 ; 55 10 14 57 ; 58 18 22 60 61 22 26 63 ; 64 26 30 66 ; 67 34 38 69 70 38 42 72 ; 73 42 46 75 ; 76 50 54 78 79 54 58 81 ; 82 58 62 84 ; 85 18 2 87 88 22 6 90 ; 91 26 10 93 ; 94 30 14 96 97 34 18 99 ; 100 38 22 102 ; 103 42 26 105 106 46 30 108 ; 109 50 34 111 ; 112 54 38 114 115 58 42 117 ; 118 62 46 120
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 435 of 493
The MEMBER INCIDENCE specification is used for specifying MEMBER connectivities. ELEMENT INCI 152 50 34 38 54 TO 154 155 54 38 42 58 TO 157 158 58 42 46 62 TO 160 161 34 18 22 38 TO 163 164 38 22 26 42 TO 166 167 42 26 30 46 TO 169 170 18 2 6 22 TO 172 173 22 6 10 26 TO 175 176 26 10 14 30 TO 178 The ELEMENT INCIDENCE specification is used for specifying plate element connectivities. MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 48 TA ST W14X90 49 TO 120 TABLE ST W27X84 All members are WIDE FLANGE sections whose properties are obtained from the built in American steel table. ELEMENT PROP 152 TO 178 THICK 0.75 The thickness of the plate elements is specified above. CONSTANTS E STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 DENSITY STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 POISSON STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 BETA 90.0 MEMB 13 14 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 39 E CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 DENSITY CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 Following the command CONSTANTS above, the material constants such as E (Modulus of Elasticity), Poisson's Ratio, and Density are specified. Built-in default values for steel and concrete for these quantities are assigned. The orientation of some of the members is set using the BETA angle command. SUPPORTS 1 TO 17 BY 4 29 33 45 TO 61 BY 4 FIXED The supports at the above mentioned joints are declared as fixed. SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 22 JOINTS YR 15.0 17.0 SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 23 JOINTS YR 31.0 33.0 SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 24 JOINTS YR 47.0 49.0 The 3 floors of the structure are specified to act as rigid diaphragms in the ZX plane with the
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 436 of 493
corresponding master joint specified. The associated slave joints in a floor are specified by the YRANGE parameter. The floors may still resist out-of-plane bending actions flexibly. LOADING 1 LATERAL LOADS JOINT LOADS 2 3 4 14 15 16 50 51 52 62 63 64 FZ 10.0 6 7 8 10 11 12 18 19 20 30 31 32 FZ 20.0 34 35 36 46 47 48 54 55 56 58 59 60 FZ 20.0 22 23 24 26 27 28 38 39 40 42 43 44 FZ 40.0 The above data describe a static load case. It consists of joint loads in the global Z direction. LOADING 2 TORSIONAL LOADS JOINT LOADS 2 3 4 50 51 52 FZ 5.0 14 15 16 62 63 64 FZ 15.0 6 7 8 18 19 20 FZ 10.0 10 11 12 30 31 32 FZ 30.0 34 35 36 54 55 56 FZ 10.0 46 47 48 58 59 60 FZ 30.0 22 23 24 38 39 40 FZ 20.0 26 27 28 42 43 44 FZ 60.0 The above data describe a static load case. It consists of joint loads that create a torsional loading on the structure. LOADING 3 DEAD LOAD ELEMENT LOAD 152 TO 178 PRESS GY -1.0 The above data describe a static load case. It consists of plate element pressure on a floor in the negative global Y direction. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above command instructs the program to proceed with the analysis. PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 4 TO 60 BY 8 PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 116 115 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS LIST 9 57 Print displacements at selected joints, then print member forces for two members, then print support reactions at selected joints. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 437 of 493
* Time= * * * * USER ID: * ****************************************************
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69.
STAAD SPACE *MODELING RIGID DIAPHRAGMS USING MASTER SLAVE UNITS KIP FT JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 4 0 48 0 REPEAT 3 24 0 0 REPEAT ALL 3 0 0 24 DELETE JOINT 21 25 37 41 MEMBER INCI 1 1 2 3 ; 4 5 6 6 ; 7 9 10 9 ; 10 13 14 12 13 17 18 15 ; 22 29 30 24 ; 25 33 34 27 34 45 46 36 ; 37 49 50 39 ; 40 53 54 42 43 57 58 45 ; 46 61 62 48 ; 49 2 6 51 52 6 10 54 ; 55 10 14 57 ; 58 18 22 60 61 22 26 63 ; 64 26 30 66 ; 67 34 38 69 70 38 42 72 ; 73 42 46 75 ; 76 50 54 78 79 54 58 81 ; 82 58 62 84 ; 85 18 2 87 88 22 6 90 ; 91 26 10 93 ; 94 30 14 96 97 34 18 99 ; 100 38 22 102 ; 103 42 26 105 106 46 30 108 ; 109 50 34 111 ; 112 54 38 114 115 58 42 117 ; 118 62 46 120 ELEMENT INCI 152 50 34 38 54 TO 154 155 54 38 42 58 TO 157 158 58 42 46 62 TO 160 161 34 18 22 38 TO 163 164 38 22 26 42 TO 166 167 42 26 30 46 TO 169 170 18 2 6 22 TO 172 173 22 6 10 26 TO 175 176 26 10 14 30 TO 178 MEMBER PROPERTIES AMERICAN 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 48 TA ST W14X90 49 TO 120 TABLE ST W27X84 ELEMENT PROP 152 TO 178 THICK 0.75 CONSTANTS E STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 DENSITY STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 POISSON STEEL MEMB 1 TO 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 120 BETA 90.0 MEMB 13 14 15 22 TO 27 34 TO 39 E CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 DENSITY CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 POISSON CONCRETE MEMB 152 TO 178 SUPPORTS 1 TO 17 BY 4 29 33 45 TO 61 BY 4 FIXED SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 22 JOINTS YR 15.0 17.0 SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 23 JOINTS YR 31.0 33.0 SLAVE DIA ZX MASTER 24 JOINTS YR 47.0 49.0 LOADING 1 LATERAL LOADS JOINT LOADS 2 3 4 14 15 16 50 51 52 62 63 64 FZ 10.0 6 7 8 10 11 12 18 19 20 30 31 32 FZ 20.0 34 35 36 46 47 48 54 55 56 58 59 60 FZ 20.0 22 23 24 26 27 28 38 39 40 42 43 44 FZ 40.0 LOADING 2 TORSIONAL LOADS JOINT LOADS 2 3 4 50 51 52 FZ 5.0 14 15 16 62 63 64 FZ 15.0 6 7 8 18 19 20 FZ 10.0 10 11 12 30 31 32 FZ 30.0 34 35 36 54 55 56 FZ 10.0 46 47 48 58 59 60 FZ 30.0 22 23 24 38 39 40 FZ 20.0 26 27 28 42 43 44 FZ 60.0 LOADING 3 DEAD LOAD ELEMENT LOAD 152 TO 178 PRESS GY -1.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 438 of 493
70. PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 4 TO 60 BY 8
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (INCH RADIANS) -----------------JOINT 4 LOAD 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 X-TRANS Y-TRANS
Z-TRANS 8.13263 6.87442 -0.32921 8.45739 8.96702 -0.09027 8.13263 6.87442 -0.32921 8.45739 8.96702 -0.09027 8.13263 6.87442 -0.32921 8.45739 8.96702 -0.09027 8.13263 6.87442 -0.32921 8.45739 8.96702 -0.09027
X-ROTAN 0.00108 0.00090 0.00792 0.00159 0.00166 0.07454 0.00120 0.00103 0.00452 -0.00058 -0.00059 0.04716 0.00102 0.00088 -0.00503 -0.00057 -0.00059 -0.04712 0.00245 0.00207 -0.00649 0.00162 0.00167 -0.07468
Y-ROTAN -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041 -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041 -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041 -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041 -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041 -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041 -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041 -0.00056 -0.00363 -0.00041
Z-ROTAN -0.00008 -0.00046 -0.00625 0.00014 0.00000 0.00495 -0.00025 -0.00031 -0.07454 0.00024 0.00028 0.04703 0.00030 0.00036 -0.07452 -0.00028 -0.00031 0.04704 -0.00002 0.00017 -0.00791 -0.00014 0.00001 0.00504
12
20
28
36
44
52
60
0.23216 0.04609 1.49676 0.04919 0.02679 -0.19716 0.23216 0.02166 1.49676 0.02716 0.02679 -0.86713 0.06978 -0.00054 0.45046 0.00140 -0.09268 -0.88242 0.06978 -0.07792 0.45046 -0.07823 -0.09268 -21.50252 -0.09261 0.02065 -0.59584 0.01536 -0.21215 -0.86781 -0.09261 0.08468 -0.59584 0.08128 -0.21215 -21.51350 -0.25499 -0.06556 -1.64214 -0.06312 -0.33161 -0.19363 -0.25499 -0.02115 -1.64214 -0.02678 -0.33161 -0.86677
71. PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 116 115
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KIP FEET MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
116
1 2 3
59 43 59 43 59 43 58 42 58 42 58 42
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
4.73 -4.73 5.10 -5.10 129.34 -129.34 7.70 -7.70 8.32 -8.32 125.39 -125.39
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00 -0.01 0.01 0.32 -0.32 -0.01 0.01 -0.01 0.01 0.34 -0.34
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
198.84 -85.38 208.23 -85.83 1407.27 1696.94 322.14 -137.41 336.88 -137.13 1173.82 1835.58
115
1 2 3
72. PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS LIST 9 57
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KIP ----------------JOINT LOAD FORCE-X
FEET
FORCE-Y
FORCE-Z
MOM-X
MOM-Y
MOM Z
57
1 2 3 1 2 3
-6.98 -28.54 -14.10 7.65 31.74 -11.82
-54.60 -69.17 1732.37 53.36 68.14 1731.53
-54.87 -58.55 92.25 -54.76 -58.52 -91.91
-470.13 -500.63 487.26 -469.56 -500.47 -483.96
0.01 0.03 0.00 0.01 0.03 0.00
50.69 231.31 70.68 -55.90 -257.51 51.09
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 73. FINISH *********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN ***********
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 439 of 493
**** DATE=
TIME=
****

This example illustrates the usage of commands necessary to apply the compression only attribute to spring supports for a slab on grade. The spring supports themselves are generated utilizing the built-in support generation facility. The slab is subjected to pressure and overturning loading. A tension/compression only analysis of the structure is performed. The numbers shown in the diagram below are the element numbers.
STAAD SPACE SLAB ON GRADE * SPRING COMPRESSION EXAMPLE Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. An optional title to identify this project is provided in the second line. SET NL 3 This structure has to be analysed for 3 primary load cases. Consequently, the modeling of our
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 440 of 493
problem requires us to define 3 sets of data, with each set containing a load case and an associated analysis command. Also, the supports which get switched off in the analysis for any load case have to be restored for the analysis for the subsequent load case. To accommodate these requirements, it is necessary to have 2 commands, one called SET NL and the other called CHANGE. The SET NL command is used above to indicate the total number of primary load cases that the file contains. The CHANGE command will come in later (after the PERFORM ANALYSIS command). UNIT FEET KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0.0 0.0 40.0 2 0.0 0.0 36.0 3 0.0 0.0 28.167 4 0.0 0.0 20.333 5 0.0 0.0 12.5 6 0.0 0.0 6.5 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT ALL 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 5 6.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 REPEAT 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 For joints 1 through 7, the joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified above. The coordinates of these joints is used as a basis for generating 21 more joints by incrementing the X coordinate of each of these 7 joints by 8.5 feet, 3 times. REPEAT commands are used to generate the remaining joints of the structure. The results of the generation may be visually verified using the STAAD graphical viewing facilities. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 1 1 8 9 2 TO 6 REPEAT 16 6 7 The incidences of element number 1 is defined and that data is used as a basis for generating the 2nd through the 6th element. The incidence pattern of the first 6 elements is then used to generate the incidences of 96 more elements using the REPEAT command. UNIT INCH ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 102 TH 8.0 The thickness of elements 1 to 102 is specified as 8.0 inches following the command ELEMENT PROPERTIES. CONSTANTS E 4000.0 ALL POISSON 0.12 ALL The modulus of elasticity (E) and density are specified following the command CONSTANTS. SPRING COMPRESSION 1 TO 126 KFY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 441 of 493
The above two lines declare the spring supports at nodes 1 to 126 as having the compressiononly attribute. The supports themselves are being generated later (see the ELASTIC MAT command which appears later). UNIT FEET SUPPORTS
1 TO 126 ELASTIC MAT DIRECTION Y SUBGRADE 12.0
The above command is used to instruct STAAD to generate supports with compression-only springs which are effective in the global Y direction. These springs are located at nodes 1 to 126. The subgrade reaction of the soil is specified as 12 kip/cu.ft. The program will determine the area under the influence of each joint and multiply the influence area by the subgrade reaction to arrive at the spring stiffness for the "FY" degree of freedom at the joint. Units for length are changed to FEET to facilitate the input of subgrade reaction of soil. Additional information on this feature may be found in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. LOAD 1 'WEIGHT OF MAT & EARTH' ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 102 PR GY -1.50 The above data describe a static load case. A pressure load of 1.50 kip/ft acting in the negative global Y direction is applied on all the elements. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK CHANGE Tension/compression cases must each be followed by PERFORM ANALYSIS and CHANGE commands. The CHANGE command restores the original structure to prepare it for the analysis for the next primary load case. LOAD 2 'COLUMN LOAD-DL+LL' JOINT LOADS 1 2 FY -217. 8 9 FY -109. 5 FY -308.7 6 FY -617.4 22 23 FY -410. 29 30 FY -205. 26 FY -542.7 27 FY -1085.4 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -307.5 47 54 82 FY -264.2 48 55 76 83 FY -528.3 92 93 FY -205.0 99 100 FY -410.0 103 FY -487.0 104 FY -974.0 113 114 FY -109.0 120 121 FY -217.0 124 FY -273.3 FY -546.6 125
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 442 of 493
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK CHANGE Load case 2 consists of several joint loads acting in the negative global Y direction. This is followed by another ANALYSIS command. The CHANGE command restores the original structure once again for the forthcoming load case. LOAD 3 'COLUMN OVERTURNING LOAD' ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 102 PR GY -1.50 JOINT LOADS 1 2 FY -100. 8 9 FY -50. 5 FY -150.7 6 FY -310.4 22 23 FY -205. 29 30 FY -102. 26 FY -271.7 27 FY -542.4 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -153.5 47 54 82 FY -132.2 48 55 76 83 FY -264.3 92 93 FY 102.0 99 100 FY 205.0 103 FY 243.0 104 FY 487.0 113 114 FY 54.0 120 121 FY 108.0 124 FY 136.3 125 FY 273.6 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK Load case 3 consists of several joint loads acting in the upward direction at one end and downward on the other end to apply an overturning moment that will lift off one end. The CHANGE command is not needed after the last analysis. LOAD LIST 3 PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 113 114 120 121 PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 34 67 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS LIST 5 6 12 13 A list of joint displacements, element stresses for elements 34 and 67, and support reactions at a list of joints for load case 3, are obtained with the help of the above commands. FINISH The STAAD run is terminated.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 443 of 493
* Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE SLAB ON GRADE 2. * SPRING COMPRESSION EXAMPLE 3. SET NL 3 4. UNIT FEET KIP 5. JOINT COORDINATES 6. 1 0.0 0.0 40.0 7. 2 0.0 0.0 36.0 8. 3 0.0 0.0 28.167 9. 4 0.0 0.0 20.333 10. 5 0.0 0.0 12.5 11. 6 0.0 0.0 6.5 12. 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 13. REPEAT ALL 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 14. REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 15. REPEAT 5 6.0 0.0 0.0 16. REPEAT 3 8.0 0.0 0.0 17. REPEAT 3 8.5 0.0 0.0 18. ELEMENT INCIDENCES 19. 1 1 8 9 2 TO 6 20. REPEAT 16 6 7 21. UNIT INCH 22. ELEMENT PROPERTIES 23. 1 TO 102 TH 8.0 24. CONSTANTS 25. E 4000.0 ALL 26. POISSON 0.12 ALL 27. SPRING COMPRESSION 28. 1 TO 126 KFY 29. UNIT FEET 30. SUPPORTS 31. 1 TO 126 ELASTIC MAT DIRECTION Y SUBGRADE 12.0 32. LOAD 1 'WEIGHT OF MAT & EARTH' 33. ELEMENT LOAD 34. 1 TO 102 PR GY -1.50 35. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 126/ 102/ 126 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 8/ 8/ 54 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 756 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 41 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 13.0/ 38895.6 MB **NOTE-Tension/Compression converged after 1 iterations, Case= 1 1
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 'WEIGHT OF MAT & EARTH' ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -7740.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= 154800.01 MY= 0.00 MZ= -499230.03 1)
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 7740.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -154800.01 MY= 0.00 MZ= 499230.02 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 0.00000E+00 0 Y = -1.50000E+00 1 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX= 9.51342E-10 121 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= -4.19726E-10 80 1)
1)
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 444 of 493
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 36. CHANGE 37. LOAD 2 'COLUMN LOAD-DL+LL' 38. JOINT LOADS 39. 1 2 FY -217. 40. 8 9 FY -109. 41. 5 FY -308.7 42. 6 FY -617.4 43. 22 23 FY -410. 44. 29 30 FY -205. 45. 26 FY -542.7 46. 27 FY -1085.4 47. 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -307.5 48. 47 54 82 FY -264.2 49. 48 55 76 83 FY -528.3 50. 92 93 FY -205.0 51. 99 100 FY -410.0 52. 103 FY -487.0 53. 104 FY -974.0 54. 113 114 FY -109.0 55. 120 121 FY -217.0 56. 124 FY -273.3 57. 125 FY -546.6 58. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK **NOTE-Tension/Compression converged after 1 iterations, Case= 2
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 'COLUMN LOAD-DL+LL' ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -13964.90 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= 301253.66 MY= 0.00 MZ= -884991.47 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 13964.90 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -301253.66 MY= 0.00 MZ= 884991.47 2) 2)
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 0.00000E+00 0 Y = -1.09725E+01 120 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX= 7.89606E-02 99 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= 9.69957E-02 6
2)
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 59. CHANGE 60. LOAD 3 'COLUMN OVERTURNING LOAD' 61. ELEMENT LOAD 62. 1 TO 102 PR GY -1.50 63. JOINT LOADS 64. 1 2 FY -100. 65. 8 9 FY -50. 66. 5 FY -150.7 67. 6 FY -310.4 68. 22 23 FY -205. 69. 29 30 FY -102. 70. 26 FY -271.7 71. 27 FY -542.4 72. 43 44 50 51 71 72 78 79 FY -153.5 73. 47 54 82 FY -132.2 74. 48 55 76 83 FY -264.3 75. 92 93 FY 102.0 76. 99 100 FY 205.0 77. 103 FY 243.0 78. 104 FY 487.0 79. 113 114 FY 54.0 80. 120 121 FY 108.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 445 of 493
81. 124 FY 136.3 82. 125 FY 273.6 83. PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK **START ITERATION NO. 2 **START ITERATION NO. 3 **START ITERATION NO. 4 **START ITERATION NO. 5 **NOTE-Tension/Compression converged after 5 iterations, Case= 3 3
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. 'COLUMN OVERTURNING LOAD' ***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -10533.10 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= 213519.36 MY= 0.00 MZ= -478687.78 ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING SUMMATION FORCE-X = 0.00 SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 10533.10 SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 0.00 SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -213519.36 MY= 0.00 MZ= 478687.78 MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 0.00000E+00 0 Y = 2.83669E+01 120 Z = 0.00000E+00 0 RX= -1.22268E-01 120 RY= 0.00000E+00 0 RZ= 1.09786E-01 125 3) 3) 3)
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 84. LOAD LIST 3 85. PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS LIST 113 114 120 121 JOINT DISPLACEMENT (INCH RADIANS) -----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN 113 114 120 121 3 3 3 3 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 19.17264 14.53915 28.36691 22.49737 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -0.09579 -0.09437 -0.12227 -0.11615 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.06945 0.06506 0.10056 0.08912
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 86. PRINT ELEMENT STRESSES LIST 34 67 ELEMENT STRESSES ---------------FORCE,LENGTH UNITS= KIP FEET
STRESS = FORCE/UNIT WIDTH/THICK, MOMENT = FORCE-LENGTH/UNIT WIDTH ELEMENT LOAD SQX SQY VONT VONB SX TRESCAT TRESCAB 34 3 MX SY MY SXY MXY
-4.50 -6.74 2.45 7.99 6.96 188.81 188.81 0.00 0.00 0.00 202.25 202.25 TOP : SMAX= 171.62 SMIN= -30.64 TMAX= 101.13 ANGLE= -34.2 BOTT: SMAX= 30.64 SMIN= -171.62 TMAX= 101.13 ANGLE= -34.2 3 6.21 -57.38 5.58 43.51 1303.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 1449.91 375.29 SMIN= -1074.62 TMAX= 724.96 ANGLE= -27.1 1074.62 SMIN= -375.29 TMAX= 724.96 ANGLE= -27.1
67
37.83 1303.44 1449.91 TOP : SMAX= BOTT: SMAX=
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 446 of 493
**** MAXIMUM STRESSES AMONG SELECTED PLATES AND CASES **** MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL SHEAR VONMISES TRESCA STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS STRESS 1.074621E+03 -1.074621E+03 7.249564E+02 1.303438E+03 1.449913E+03 PLATE NO. 67 67 67 67 67 CASE NO. 3 3 3 3 3 ********************END OF ELEMENT FORCES******************** 87. PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS LIST 5 6 12 13 SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KIP FEET ----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM Z
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 5 3 6 3 12 3 13 3 0.00 148.06 0.00 168.10 0.00 149.08 0.00 153.60 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

This example demonstrates the input required for obtaining the modes and frequencies of the skewed bridge shown in the figure below. The structure consists of piers, piercap girders and a deck slab.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 447 of 493
STAAD SPACE FREQUENCIES OF VIBRATION OF A SKEWED BRIDGE Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The remainder of the words forms a title to identify this project. IGNORE LIST Further below in this file, we will call element lists in which some element numbers may not actually be present in the structure. We do so because it minimizes the effort involved in fetching the desired elements and reduces the size of the respective commands. To prevent the program from treating that condition (referring to elements which do not exist) as an error, the above command is required. UNIT METER KN The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0; 3 6.5 0 0; 4 9 0 0; 5 11.5 0 0; 6 15.5 0 0; 11 -1 10 0 25 16.5 10 0 REPEAT ALL 3 4 0 14 For joints 1 through 6, the joint number followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates are specified first. Next, using the coordinates of joints 11 and 25 as the basis, joints 12 through 24 are generated using linear interpolation. Following this, using the data of these 21 joints (1 through 6 and 11 through 25), 63 new joints are generated. To achieve this, the X coordinate of these 21 joints is incremented by 4 meters and the Z coordinate is incremented by 14 meters, in 3 successive operations. The REPEAT ALL command is used for the generation. Details of this command is available in Section 5.11 of the Technical Reference manual. The results of the generation may be visually verified using STAAD.Pro's graphical viewing facilities. MEMBER INCI 1 1 13 ; 2 2 15 ; 3 3 17 ; 4 4 19 ; 5 5 21 ; 6 6 23 26 26 34 ; 27 27 36 ; 28 28 38 ; 29 29 40 ; 30 30 42 ; 31 31 44
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 448 of 493
47 47 55 ; 48 48 57 ; 49 49 59 ; 50 50 61 ; 51 51 63 ; 52 52 65 68 68 76 ; 69 69 78 ; 70 70 80 ; 71 71 82 ; 72 72 84 ; 73 73 86 The member connectivity data (joint numbers between which members are connected) is specified for the 24 columns for the structure. The above method, where the member number is followed by the 2 node numbers, is the explicit definition method. No generation is involved here. 101 11 12 114 202 32 33 215 303 53 54 316 404 74 75 417 The member connectivity data is specified for the pier cap beams for the structure. The above method is a combination of explicit definition and generation. For example, member 101 is defined as connected between 11 & 12. Then, by incrementing those nodes by 1 unit at a time (which is the default increment), the incidences of members 102 to 114 are generated. Similarly, we create members 202 to 215, 303 to 316, and, 404 to 417. DEFINE MESH A JOINT 11 B JOINT 25 C JOINT 46 D JOINT 32 E JOINT 67 F JOINT 53 G JOINT 88 H JOINT 74 The next step is to generate the deck slab which will be modeled using plate elements. For this, we use a technique called mesh generation. Mesh generation is a process of generating several "child" elements from a "parent" or "super" element. The above set of commands defines the corner nodes of the super-element. Details of the above can be found in Section 5.14 of the Technical Reference manual. Note that instead of elaborately defining the coordinates of the corner nodes of the super-elements, we have taken advantage of the fact that the coordinates of these joints (A through H) have already been defined or generated earlier. Thus, A is the same as joint 11 while D is the same as joint 32. Alternatively, we could have defined the super-element nodes as A -1 10 0 ; B 16.5 10 0 ; C 20.5 10 14 ; D 3 10 14 ; etc. GENERATE ELEMENT MESH ABCD 14 12 MESH DCEF 14 12 MESH FEGH 14 12 The above lines are the instructions for generating the child elements from the superelements. For example, from the super-element bound by the corners A, B, C and D (which in turn are nodes 11, 25, 46 and 32), we generate a total of 14X12=168 elements, with 14 divisions along the edges AB and CD, and 12 along the edges BC and DA. These are the elements which make up the first span.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 449 of 493
Similarly, 168 elements are created for the 2nd span, and another 168 for the 3rd span. It may be noted here that we have taken great care to ensure that the resulting elements and the piercap beams form a perfect fit. In other words, there is no overlap between the two in a manner that nodes of the beams are at a different point in space than nodes of elements. At every node along their common boundary, plates and beams are properly connected. This is absolutely essential to ensure proper transfer of load and stiffness from beams to plates and vice versa. The tools of the graphical user interface may be used to confirm that beam-plate connectivity is proper for this model. START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _GIRDERS 101 TO 114 202 TO 215 303 TO 316 404 TO 417 _PIERS 1 TO 6 26 TO 31 47 TO 52 68 TO 73 ELEMENT _P1 447 TO 450 454 TO 457 461 TO 464 468 TO 471 _P2 531 TO 534 538 TO 541 545 TO 548 552 TO 555 _P3 615 TO 618 622 TO 625 629 TO 632 636 TO 639 _P4 713 TO 716 720 TO 723 727 TO 730 734 TO 737 _P5 783 TO 786 790 TO 793 797 TO 800 804 TO 807 _P6 881 TO 884 888 TO 891 895 TO 898 902 TO 905 END GROUP DEFINITION The above block of data is referred to as formation of groups. Group names are a mechanism by which a single moniker can be used to refer to a cluster of entities, such as members. For our structure, the piercap beams are being grouped to a name called GIRDERS, the pier columns are assigned the name PIERS, and so on. For the deck, a few selected elements are chosen into a few selective groups. The reason is that these elements happen to be right beneath wheels of vehicles whose weight will be used in the frequency calculation. MEMBER PROPERTY _GIRDERS PRIS YD 0.6 ZD 0.6 _PIERS PRIS YD 1.0 Member properties are assigned as prismatic rectangular sections for the girders, and prismatic circular sections for the columns. ELEMENT PROPERTY YRA 9 11 TH 0.375 The plate elements of the deck slab, which happen to be at a Y elevation of 10 metres (between a YRANGE of 9 metres and 11 metres) are assigned a thickness of 375 mms. UNIT NEWTON MMS CONSTANTS E 21000 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL The Modulus of elasticity (E) is set to 21000 N/sq.mm for all members. The keyword
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 450 of 493
CONSTANTS has to precede this data. Built-in default value for Poisson's ratio for concrete is also assigned to ALL members and elements. UNIT KNS METER CONSTANTS DENSITY 24 ALL Following a change of units, density of concrete is specified. SUPPORTS 1 TO 6 26 TO 31 47 TO 52 68 TO 73 FIXED The base nodes of the piers are fully restrained (FIXED supports). CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 65 Theoretically, a structure has as many modes of vibration as the number of degrees of freedom in the model. However, the limitations of the mathematical process used in extracting modes may limit the number of modes that can actually be extracted. In a large structure, the extraction process can also be very time consuming. Further, not all modes are of equal importance. (One measure of the importance of modes is the participation factor of that mode.) In many cases, the first few modes may be sufficient to obtain a significant portion of the total dynamic response. Due to these reasons, in the absence of any explicit instruction, STAAD calculates only the first 6 modes. This is like saying that the command CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 6 has been specified. (Versions of STAAD prior to STAAD.Pro 2000 calculated only 3 modes by default). If the inspection of the first 6 modes reveals that the overall vibration pattern of the structure has not been obtained, one may ask STAAD to compute a larger (or smaller) number of modes with the help of this command. The number that follows this command is the number of modes being requested. In our example, we are asking for 65 modes by specifying CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 65. UNIT KGS METER LOAD 1 FREQUENCY CALCULATION SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 * PERMANENT WEIGHTS ON DECK ELEMENT LOAD YRA 9 11 PR GX 200 YRA 9 11 PR GY 200 YRA 9 11 PR GZ 200 * VEHICLES ON SPANS - ONLY Y & Z EFFECT CONSIDERED ELEMENT LOAD _P1 PR GY 700 _P2 PR GY 700
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 451 of 493
_P3 PR GY 700 _P4 PR GY 700 _P5 PR GY 700 _P6 PR GY 700 _P1 PR GZ 700 _P2 PR GZ 700 _P3 PR GZ 700 _P4 PR GZ 700 _P5 PR GZ 700 _P6 PR GZ 700 The mathematical method that STAAD uses is called the eigen extraction method. Some information on this is available in Section 1.18.3 of the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual. The method involves 2 matrices - the stiffness matrix, and the mass matrix. The stiffness matrix, usually called the [K] matrix, is assembled using data such as member and element lengths, member and element properties, modulus of elasticty, Poisson's ratio, member and element releases, member offsets, support information, etc. For assembling the mass matrix, called the [M] matrix, STAAD uses the load data specified in the load case in which the MODAL CAL REQ command is specified. So, some of the important aspects to bear in mind are : 1. 2. The input you specify is weights, not masses. Internally, STAAD will convert weights to masses by dividing the input by "g", the acceleration due to gravity. If the structure is declared as a PLANE frame, there are 2 possible directions of vibration - global X, and global Y. If the structure is declared as a SPACE frame, there are 3 possible directions - global X, global Y and global Z. However, this does not guarantee that STAAD will automatically consider the masses for vibration in all the available directions. You have control over and are responsible for specifying the directions in which the masses ought to vibrate. In other words, if a weight is not specified along a certain direction, the corresponding degrees of freedom (such as for example, global X at node 34 hypothetically) will not receive a contribution in the mass matrix. The mass matrix is assembled using only the masses from the weights and directions specified by the user. In our example, notice that we are specifying the selfweight along global X, Y and Z directions. Similarly, a 200 kg/sq.m pressure load is also specified along all 3 directions on the deck. But for the truck loads, we choose to apply it on just a few elements in the global Y and Z directions only. The reasoning is something like - for the X direction, the mass is not capable of vibrating because the tires allow the truck to roll along X. Remember, this is just a demonstration example, not necessarily what you may wish to do. The point we wish to illustrate is that if a user wishes to restrict a certain weight to certain directions only, all he/she has to do is not provide the directions in which
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 452 of 493
those weights cannot vibrate in. 3. As much as possible, provide absolute values for the weights. STAAD is programmed to algebraically add the weights at nodes. So, if some weights are specified as positive numbers and others as negative, the total weight at a given node is the algebraic summation of all the weights in the global directions at that node and the mass is then derived from this algebraic resultant.
MODAL CALCULATION REQUESTED This is the command which tells the program that frequencies and modes should be calculated. It is specified inside a load case. In other words, this command accompanies the loads that are to be used in generating the mass matrix. Frequencies and modes have to be calculated also when dynamic analysis such as response spectrum or time history analysis is carried out. But in such analyses, the MODAL CALCULATION REQUESTED command is not explicitly required. When STAAD encounters the commands for response spectrum (see example 11) and time history (see examples 16 and 22), it automatically will carry out a frequency extraction without the help of the MODAL .. command. PERFORM ANALYSIS This initiates the processes which are required to obtain the frequencies. Frequencies, periods and participation factors are automatically reported in the output file when the operation is completed. FINISH This terminates the STAAD run.
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. STAAD SPACE FREQUENCIES OF VIBRATION OF A SKEWED BRIDGE IGNORE LIST UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0; 3 6.5 0 0; 4 9 0 0; 5 11.5 0 0; 6 15.5 0 0 11 -1 10 0 25 16.5 10 0 REPEAT ALL 3 4 0 14 MEMBER INCI 1 1 13 ; 2 2 15 ; 3 3 17 ; 4 4 19 ; 5 5 21 ; 6 6 23 26 26 34 ; 27 27 36 ; 28 28 38 ; 29 29 40 ; 30 30 42 ; 31 31 44 47 47 55 ; 48 48 57 ; 49 49 59 ; 50 50 61 ; 51 51 63 ; 52 52 65 68 68 76 ; 69 69 78 ; 70 70 80 ; 71 71 82 ; 72 72 84 ; 73 73 86 101 11 12 114 202 32 33 215 303 53 54 316 404 74 75 417 DEFINE MESH A JOINT 11 B JOINT 25 C JOINT 46 D JOINT 32 E JOINT 67
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 453 of 493
23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85.
F JOINT 53 G JOINT 88 H JOINT 74 GENERATE ELEMENT MESH ABCD 14 12 MESH DCEF 14 12 MESH FEGH 14 12 START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _GIRDERS 101 TO 114 202 TO 215 303 TO 316 404 TO 417 _PIERS 1 TO 6 26 TO 31 47 TO 52 68 TO 73 ELEMENT _P1 447 TO 450 454 TO 457 461 TO 464 468 TO 471 _P2 531 TO 534 538 TO 541 545 TO 548 552 TO 555 _P3 615 TO 618 622 TO 625 629 TO 632 636 TO 639 _P4 713 TO 716 720 TO 723 727 TO 730 734 TO 737 _P5 783 TO 786 790 TO 793 797 TO 800 804 TO 807 _P6 881 TO 884 888 TO 891 895 TO 898 902 TO 905 END GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER PROPERTY _GIRDERS PRIS YD 0.6 ZD 0.6 _PIERS PRIS YD 1.0 ELEMENT PROPERTY YRA 9 11 TH 0.375 UNIT NEWTON MMS CONSTANTS E 21000 ALL POISSON CONCRETE ALL UNIT KNS METER CONSTANTS DENSITY 24 ALL SUPPORTS 1 TO 6 26 TO 31 47 TO 52 68 TO 73 FIXED CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 65 UNIT KGS METER LOAD 1 FREQUENCY CALCULATION SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 * PERMANENT WEIGHTS ON DECK ELEMENT LOAD YRA 9 11 PR GX 200 YRA 9 11 PR GY 200 YRA 9 11 PR GZ 200 * VEHICLES ON SPANS - ONLY Y & Z EFFECT CONSIDERED ELEMENT LOAD _P1 PR GY 700 _P2 PR GY 700 _P3 PR GY 700 _P4 PR GY 700 _P5 PR GY 700 _P6 PR GY 700 _P1 PR GZ 700 _P2 PR GZ 700 _P3 PR GZ 700 _P4 PR GZ 700 _P5 PR GZ 700 _P6 PR GZ 700 MODAL CALCULATION REQUESTED PERFORM ANALYSIS
** WARNING: PRESSURE LOADS ON ELEMENTS OTHER THAN PLATE ELEMENTS ARE IGNORED. ELEM.NO. 101 ** WARNING: PRESSURE LOADS ON ELEMENTS OTHER THAN PLATE ELEMENTS ARE IGNORED. ELEM.NO. 101 ** WARNING: PRESSURE LOADS ON ELEMENTS OTHER THAN PLATE ELEMENTS ARE IGNORED. ELEM.NO. 101 NUMBER OF MODES REQUESTED = 65 NUMBER OF EXISTING MASSES IN THE MODEL = 1665 NUMBER OF MODES THAT WILL BE USED = 65 CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE 1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 454 of 493
MODE
FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC)
PERIOD(SEC)
ACCURACY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 MODE
1.636 2.602 2.882 3.754 4.076 4.373 4.519 4.683 5.028 7.189 7.238 7.363 10.341 10.734 11.160 11.275 11.577 11.829 11.921 12.085 12.488 13.677 FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC)
0.61111 0.38433 0.34695 0.26636 0.24532 0.22869 0.22130 0.21355 0.19889 0.13911 0.13815 0.13582 0.09671 0.09316 0.08961 0.08869 0.08638 0.08454 0.08388 0.08275 0.08007 0.07311 PERIOD(SEC)
2.689E-16 4.254E-16 5.200E-16 6.129E-16 6.932E-16 0.000E+00 4.231E-16 2.626E-16 2.278E-16 6.687E-16 6.596E-16 0.000E+00 2.155E-16 3.999E-16 1.850E-16 3.624E-16 5.157E-16 1.646E-16 3.242E-16 3.155E-16 4.431E-16 7.389E-16 ACCURACY
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
14.654 14.762 15.125 17.308 17.478 17.747 19.725 19.921 20.536 20.618 20.845 21.146 21.426 21.801 22.070 23.153 23.518 23.985 24.655 25.469 26.002 26.422 26.808 27.305 27.776 28.972 29.550 29.804 30.992 31.501 31.690 32.009 32.574 32.863 34.101 34.923 35.162 35.411 35.928 36.529 38.585 38.826 39.494
0.06824 0.06774 0.06612 0.05778 0.05721 0.05635 0.05070 0.05020 0.04869 0.04850 0.04797 0.04729 0.04667 0.04587 0.04531 0.04319 0.04252 0.04169 0.04056 0.03926 0.03846 0.03785 0.03730 0.03662 0.03600 0.03452 0.03384 0.03355 0.03227 0.03174 0.03156 0.03124 0.03070 0.03043 0.02932 0.02863 0.02844 0.02824 0.02783 0.02738 0.02592 0.02576 0.02532
0.000E+00 6.343E-16 0.000E+00 4.614E-16 3.017E-16 1.463E-16 5.921E-16 3.483E-16 4.370E-16 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 4.122E-16 1.004E-15 5.817E-16 1.892E-16 3.438E-16 4.998E-16 4.805E-16 4.548E-16 2.841E-16 1.227E-15 1.003E-14 2.180E-15 8.034E-15 3.034E-14 1.320E-13 6.205E-14 2.276E-13 3.946E-12 7.134E-12 1.366E-11 3.470E-12 1.186E-10 6.803E-11 1.277E-10 3.012E-09 2.272E-09 9.878E-09 1.082E-08 4.701E-09 2.902E-07 6.399E-07 2.540E-07
The following Frequencies are estimates that were calculated. These are for information only and will not be used. Remaining values are either above the cut off mode/freq values or are of low accuracy. To use these frequencies, rerun with a higher cutoff mode (or mode + freq) value.
CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE
MODE
FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC)
PERIOD(SEC)
ACCURACY
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 455 of 493
66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
40.013 40.518 40.924 41.523 42.110 42.318 42.701 42.891 44.395 45.025 45.134
0.02499 0.02468 0.02444 0.02408 0.02375 0.02363 0.02342 0.02331 0.02253 0.02221 0.02216
4.013E-06 3.403E-06 6.088E-06 6.986E-06 9.985E-06 2.559E-07 1.154E-05 1.442E-05 4.132E-05 7.723E-05 6.369E-05
MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT --------------------------------------
MODE
SUMM-X
SUMM-Y
SUMM-Z
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
0.01 0.00 99.04 99.14 0.00 0.02 0.00 0.23 0.00 0.00 3.27 0.00 0.00 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.02 0.00 26.42 0.00 0.00 25.59 0.00 0.53 0.15 0.19 0.00 0.13 0.00 0.00 0.06 0.00 0.00 0.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.56 0.00 0.01 0.01 0.00 0.37 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.02 0.00 0.18 0.00 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.00 1.09 0.00 0.06 0.53 0.00 0.00 3.53 0.00 0.02 0.01 0.00 0.00 3.48 0.00 0.00 0.09 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.42 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.19 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.15 0.00 0.00 4.79 0.00 0.00 0.07 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.11 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.06 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.04 0.00 0.00 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.26 0.00 0.00 0.06 0.00 0.00 0.30 0.00 0.00 0.15 0.00
0.012 99.151 99.151 99.151 99.151 99.202 99.204 99.204 99.735 99.736 99.736 99.736 99.740 99.740 99.740 99.740 99.741 99.753 99.753 99.754 99.754 99.765 99.766 99.766 99.767 99.767 99.768 99.768 99.829 99.832 99.852 99.854 99.854 99.855 99.856 99.856 99.856 99.856 99.856 99.856 99.856 99.856 99.857 99.857 99.857 99.857 99.858 99.858 99.858 99.858 99.858 99.858 99.858 99.859 99.859 99.859 99.859 99.860 99.860 99.861 99.865 99.868 99.868 99.868 99.869
0.000 0.000 0.229 3.496 3.536 3.575 30.000 55.587 55.740 55.871 55.927 55.969 55.969 55.979 56.349 56.354 56.354 56.355 56.358 56.364 56.364 56.364 56.368 56.383 56.384 56.562 56.591 57.676 58.205 61.732 61.737 65.214 65.308 65.319 65.736 65.736 67.926 67.932 67.967 67.969 68.116 72.905 72.980 73.033 73.057 73.226 73.226 73.610 73.611 73.611 73.622 73.623 73.730 73.736 73.758 73.823 73.831 73.968 73.970 74.006 74.144 74.407 74.467 74.764 74.911
99.042 99.061 99.062 99.062 99.112 99.135 99.135 99.136 99.326 99.326 99.326 99.326 99.889 99.898 99.909 99.923 99.923 99.937 99.937 99.939 99.940 99.940 99.947 99.948 99.965 99.965 99.965 99.965 99.970 99.971 99.971 99.971 99.971 99.972 99.972 99.972 99.972 99.972 99.972 99.972 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.973 99.974 99.974 99.974 99.974 99.974 99.974 99.975 99.976 99.981 99.984 99.985 99.985 99.985 99.986
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 456 of 493
86. FINISH
Understanding the output: After the analysis is complete, look at the output file. (This file can be viewed from File - View - Output File - STAAD output). (i) Mode number and corresponding frequencies and periods Since we asked for 65 modes, we obtain a report, a portion of which is as shown:
CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE 1 MODE FREQUENCY (CYCLES/SEC) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1.636 2.602 2.882 3.754 4.076 4.373 4.519 4.683 5.028 7.189 7.238 7.363 PERIOD (SEC) 0.61111 0.38433 0.34695 0.26636 0.24532 0.22870 0.22130 0.21355 0.19889 0.13911 0.13815 0.13582 1.344E-16 0.000E+00 8.666E-16 0.000E+00 3.466E-16 6.025E-16 5.641E-16 5.253E-16 0.000E+00 8.916E-16 0.000E+00 0.000E+00 ACCURACY
(ii) Participation factors in Percentage

MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 457 of 493
MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X 0.01
Y 0.00 0.00 0.23 3.27 0.04 0.04
Z 99.04 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.19 0.00 0.00 0.00
SUMM-X SUMM-Y SUMM-Z 0.012 99.151 99.151 99.151 99.151 99.202 99.204 99.204 99.735 99.736 99.736 99.736 0.000 0.000 0.229 3.496 3.536 3.575 30.000 55.587 55.740 55.871 55.927 55.969 99.042 99.061 99.062 99.062 99.112 99.135 99.135 99.136 99.326 99.326 99.326 99.326
99.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.05
0.00 26.42 0.00 25.59 0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.15 0.13 0.06 0.04
In the explanation earlier for the CUT OFF MODE command, we said that one measure of the importance of a mode is the participation factor of that mode. We can see from the above report that for vibration along Z direction, the first mode has a 99.04 percent participation. It is also apparent that the 7th mode is primarily a Y direction mode with a 26.42 % participation along Y and 0 in X and Z. The SUMM-X, SUMM-Y and SUMM-Z columns show the cumulative value of the participation of all the modes upto and including a given mode. One can infer from those terms that if one is interested in 95% participation along X, the first 2 modes are sufficient. But for the Y direction, even with 10 modes, we barely obtained 60%. The reason for this can be understood by an examination of the nature of the structure. The deck slab is capable of vibrating in several low energy and primarily vertical direction modes. The outof-plane flexible nature of the slab enables it to vibrate in a manner resembling a series of wave like curves. Masses on either side of the equilibrium point have opposing eigenvector values leading to a lot of cancellation of the contribution from the respective masses. Localized modes, where small pockets in the structure undergo flutter due to their relative weak stiffness compared to the rest of the model, also result in small participation factors. (iii) Viewing the mode shapes After the analysis is completed, select Post-processing from the mode menu. This screen contains facilities for graphically examining the shape of the mode in static and animated views. The Dynamics page on the left side of the screen is available for viewing the shape of the mode statically. The Animation option of the Results menu can be used for animating the mode. The mode number can be selected from the Loads and Results tab of the Diagrams dialog box which comes up when the Animation option is chosen. The size to which the mode is drawn is controlled using the Scales tab of the Diagrams dialog box.

02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 458 of 493
Analysis and design of a structure for seismic loads is demonstrated in this example. The elaborate dynamic analysis procedure called time history analysis is used. In this model, static load cases are solved along with the seismic load case. For the seismic case, the maximum values of displacements, forces and reactions are obtained. The results of the dynamic case are combined with those of the static cases and steel design is performed on the combined cases.
Actual input is shown in bold lettering followed by explanation. STAAD SPACE DYNAMIC ANALYSIS FOR SEISMIC LOADS Every STAAD input file has to begin with the word STAAD. The word SPACE signifies that the structure is a space frame and the geometry is defined through X, Y and Z axes. The remainder of the words form a title to identify this project. UNIT METER KNS The units for the data that follows are specified above. JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 0 ; 3 0 5.3 0 ; 4 0 7 0 REPEAT ALL 1 9.5 0 0 REPEAT ALL 1 0 0 3 17 1.8 7 0 ; 18 4.6 7 0 ; 19 7.6 7 0 REPEAT ALL 1 0 0 3 For joints 1 through 4, the joint number is followed by the X, Y and Z coordinates as specified above. The coordinates of these joints are used as a basis for generating 12 more joints by incrementing the X & Z coordinates by specific amounts. REPEAT ALL commands are used for the generation. Details of these commands are available in Section 5.11 of the Technical Reference manual. Following this, another round of explicit definition (joints 17, 18 & 19) and generation (20, 21 & 22) is carried out. The results of the generation may be visually verified using STAAD.Pro's graphical viewing facilities.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 459 of 493
MEMBER INCIDENCES 1123 REPEAT 1 3 4 7 9 10 9 10 13 14 12 13 4 17; 14 17 18; 15 18 19; 16 19 8 17 12 20; 18 20 21; 19 21 22; 20 22 16 21 2 10; 22 4 12; 23 6 14 24 8 16; 25 3 17; 26 7 19; 27 11 20; 28 15 22; 29 18 21 A mixture of explicit definition and generation of member connectivity data (joint numbers between which members are connected) is used to generate 29 members for the structure. START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _VERTICAL 1 TO 12 _XBEAM 13 TO 20 _ZBEAM 21 TO 24 29 _BRACE 25 TO 28 END GROUP DEFINITION The above block of data is referred to as formation of groups. Group names are a mechanism by which a single moniker can be used to refer to a cluster of entities, such as members. For our structure, the columns are being grouped to a name called VERTICAL, the beams running along the X direction are assigned the name XBEAM, and so on. MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN _VERTICAL TA ST W310X97 _XBEAM TA ST W250X39 _ZBEAM TA ST C200X17 _BRACE TA ST L150X150X13 Member properties are assigned from the Canadian steel table. The members which receive these properties are those embedded within the respective group names. The benefit of using the group name is apparent here. Just from the looks of the command, we can understand that the diagonal braces are being assigned a single angle. The alternative, which would be 25 TO 28 TA ST L150X150X13 would have required us to go to the graphical tools to get a sense of what members 25 to 28 are. UNIT KNS MMS CONSTANT E 200 ALL The Modulus of elasticity (E) is set to 200 kN/sq.mm for all members. The keyword CONSTANTS has to precede this data. UNIT KGS METER CONSTANT DENSITY 7800 ALL
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 460 of 493
POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 180 MEMB 21 22 Density and Poisson for all members is set using the above commands. The BETA angle for the channels along the left edge is set to 180 so their legs point toward the interior of the structure. SUPPORTS 1 5 9 13 PINNED The bottom ends of the columns of the platform are pinned supported. CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 30 The above command is a critical command if one wishes to override the default number of modes computed and used in a dynamic analysis. The default, which is 6, may not always be sufficient to capture a significant portion of the structural response in a response spectrum or time history analysis, and hence the need to override the default. This command is explained in Section 5.30 of the Technical Reference manual. UNIT METER DEFINE TIME HISTORY TYPE 1 ACCELERATION READ EQDATA.TXT ARRIVAL TIME 0.0 DAMPING 0.05 There are two stages in the command specification required for a time-history analysis. The first stage is defined above. Here, the parameters of the earthquake (ground acceleration) are provided. Each data set is individually identified by the number that follows the TYPE command. In this file, only one data set is defined, which is apparent from the fact that only one TYPE is defined. The word FORCE that follows the TYPE 1 command signifies that this data set is for a ground acceleration. (If one wishes to specify a forcing function, the keyword FORCE must be used instead.) Notice the expression "READ EQDATA.TXT". It means that we have chosen to specify the time vs. ground acceleration data in the file called EQDATA.TXT. That file must reside in the same folder as the one in which the data file for this structure resides. As explained in the small examples shown in Section 5.31.4 of the Technical Reference manual, the EQDATA.TXT file is a simple text file containing several pairs of time-acceleration data. A sample portion of that file is as shown below.
0.0000 0.0200 0.0400 0.0600 0.0800 0.1000 0.006300 0.003640 0.000990 0.004280 0.007580 0.010870
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 461 of 493
While it may not be apparent from the above numbers, it may also be noted that the geological data for the site the building sits on indicate that the above acceleration values are a fraction of "g", the acceleration due to gravity. Thus, for example, at 0.02 seconds, the acceleration is 0.00364 multiplied by 9.806 m/sec^2 (or 0.00364 multiplied by 32.2 ft/sec^2). Consequently, the burden of informing the program that the values need to be multiplied by "g" is upon us, and we shall be doing so at a later step. The arrival time value indicates the relative value of time at which the earthquake begins to act upon the structure. We have chosen 0.0, as there is no other dynamic load on the structure from the relative time standpoint. The modal damping ratio for all the modes is set to 0.05. LOAD 1 WEIGHT OF STRUCTURE ACTING STATICALLY SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 The above data describe a static load case. The selfweight of the structure is acting in the negative global Y direction.
LOAD 2 PLATFORM LEVEL LOAD ACTING STATICALLY FLOOR LOAD YRA 6.9 7.1 FLOAD -500
Load case 2 is also a static load case. At the Y=7.0m elevation, our structure has a floor slab. But, it is a non-structural entity which, though capable of carrying the loads acting on itself, is not meant to be an integral part of the framing system. It merely transmits the load to the beamcolumn grid. There are uniform area loads on the floor (think of the load as wooden pallets supporting boxes of paper). Since the slab is not part of the structural model, how do we tell the program to transmit the imposed load from the slab to the beams without manually converting them to distributed beam loads ourselves? That is where the floor load utility comes in handy. It is a facility where we specify the load as a pressure, and the program converts the pressure to individual beam loads. Thus, the input required from the user is very simple - load intensity in the form of pressure, and the region of the structure in terms of X, Y and Z coordinates in space, of the area over which the pressure acts. In the process of converting the pressure to beam loads, STAAD will consider the empty space between criss-crossing beams (in plan view) to be panels, similar to the squares of a chess board. The load on each panel is then tranferred to beams surrounding the panel, using a triangular or trapezoidal load distribution method. LOAD 3 DYNAMIC LOAD * MASSES SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 FLOOR LOAD YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GX YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GY YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GZ Load case 3 is the dynamic load case, the one which contains the second part of the instruction set for a dynamic analysis to be performed. The data here are
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 462 of 493
a. b.
loads which will yield the mass values which will populate the mass matrix the directions of the loads, which will yield the degree of freedom numbers of the mass matrix for being populated.
Thus, the selfweight, as well as the imposed loads on the non-structural slab are to be considered as participating in the vibration along all the global directions. GROUND MOTION X 1 1 9.806 The above command too is part of load case 3. Here we say that the seismic force, whose characteristics are defined by the TYPE 1 time history input data, acting at arrival time 1, is to be applied along the X direction. We mentioned earlier that the acceleration input data was specified as a fraction of g. The number 9.806 indicates the value which the accleration data, as read from EQDATA.TXT are to be factored by before they are used. LOAD COMBINATION 11 (STATIC + POSITIVE OF DYNAMIC) 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 1.0 LOAD COMBINATION 12 (STATIC + NEGATIVE OF DYNAMIC) 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 -1.0 In a time history analysis, the member forces FX thru MZ each have a value for every time step. If there are a 1000 time steps, there will be 1000 values of FX, 1000 for FY etc. for that load case. Not all of them can be used in a further calculation like a steel or concrete design. However, the maximum from among those time steps is available. If we wish to do a design, one way to make sure that the structure is not under-designed is to create 2 load combination cases involving the dynamic case, a positive combination, and a negative combination. That is what is being done above. Load combination case no. 11 consists of the sum of the static load cases (1 & 2) with the positive direction of the dynamic load case (3). Load combination case no. 12 consists of the sum of the static load cases (1 & 2) with the negative direction of the dynamic load case (3). The user has discretion on what load factors to use with these combinations. We have chosen the factors to be 1.0. PERFORM ANALYSIS The above is the instruction to perform the analysis related calculations. That means, computing nodal displacements, support reactions, etc. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS The above command is an instruction to the program to produce a report of the joint displacements, support reactions and member end forces in the output file. As mentioned earlier, for the dynamic case, these will be just the maximum values, not the ones generated for every time step. If the user wishes to see the results for each time step, he/she may do so by using STAAD's Post-processing facilities.
LOAD LIST 11 12 PARAMETER CODE CANADA CHECK CODE ALL
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 463 of 493
A steel design - code check - is done according to the Canadian code for load cases 11 and 12. FINISH
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. STAAD SPACE DYNAMIC ANALYSIS FOR SEISMIC LOADS UNIT METER KNS JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 ; 2 0 3.5 0 ; 3 0 5.3 0 ; 4 0 7 0 REPEAT ALL 1 9.5 0 0 REPEAT ALL 1 0 0 3 17 1.8 7 0 ; 18 4.6 7 0 ; 19 7.6 7 0 REPEAT ALL 1 0 0 3 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 3 REPEAT 1 3 4 7 9 10 9 10 13 14 12 13 4 17; 14 17 18; 15 18 19; 16 19 8 17 12 20; 18 20 21; 19 21 22; 20 22 16 21 2 10; 22 4 12; 23 6 14 24 8 16; 25 3 17; 26 7 19; 27 11 20; 28 15 22; 29 18 21 START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _VERTICAL 1 TO 12 _XBEAM 13 TO 20 _ZBEAM 21 TO 24 29 _BRACE 25 TO 28 END GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN _VERTICAL TA ST W310X97 _XBEAM TA ST W250X39 _ZBEAM TA ST C200X17 _BRACE TA ST L150X150X13 UNIT KNS MMS CONSTANT E 200 ALL UNIT KGS METER CONSTANT DENSITY 7800 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL BETA 180 MEMB 21 22 SUPPORTS 1 5 9 13 PINNED CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 30 UNIT METER DEFINE TIME HISTORY TYPE 1 ACCELERATION READ EQDATA.TXT ARRIVAL TIME 0.0 DAMPING 0.05 LOAD 1 WEIGHT OF STRUCTURE ACTING STATICALLY SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 LOAD 2 PLATFORM LEVEL LOAD ACTING STATICALLY FLOOR LOAD YRA 6.9 7.1 FLOAD -500 LOAD 3 DYNAMIC LOAD * MASSES SELFWEIGHT X 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Y 1.0 SELFWEIGHT Z 1.0 FLOOR LOAD YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GX YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GY
61. YRANGE 6.9 7.1 FLOAD 500 GZ 62. GROUND MOTION X 1 1 9.806 63. LOAD COMBINATION 11 (STATIC + POSITIVE OF DYNAMIC)
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 464 of 493
64. 65. 66. 67.
1 1.0 2 1.0 3 1.0 LOAD COMBINATION 12 (STATIC + NEGATIVE OF DYNAMIC) 1 1.0 2 1.0 3 -1.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S -----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 22/ 29/ ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 14/ 4/ 27 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 3, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 4 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.1/ 38892.6 MB NUMBER OF MODES REQUESTED = NUMBER OF EXISTING MASSES IN THE MODEL = NUMBER OF MODES THAT WILL BE USED = 30 54 30
4 120
3 PERIOD(SEC) ACCURACY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
0.694 1.216 1.368 1.566 2.080 3.032 4.198 4.270 5.540 5.545 5.711 12.753 12.761 15.185 15.242 16.375 16.383 45.553 45.576 49.032 49.060 52.125 52.272 55.107 55.996 56.011 65.692 65.856 88.019 88.023
1.44193 0.82255 0.73101 0.63847 0.48072 0.32978 0.23820 0.23420 0.18051 0.18033 0.17510 0.07841 0.07836 0.06585 0.06561 0.06107 0.06104 0.02195 0.02194 0.02039 0.02038 0.01918 0.01913 0.01815 0.01786 0.01785 0.01522 0.01518 0.01136 0.01136
1.871E-16 1.461E-15 5.771E-16 1.174E-15 1.165E-15 3.132E-16 9.804E-16 1.106E-15 1.501E-15 1.873E-16 5.298E-16 2.408E-15 9.903E-16 5.995E-16 2.182E-15 6.873E-16 7.039E-15 5.329E-16 1.506E-10 6.133E-16 4.650E-10 2.713E-16 1.214E-15 3.204E-14 2.234E-15 3.360E-10 1.076E-14 2.923E-11 1.446E-14 2.664E-14
The following Frequencies are estimates that were calculated. These are for Remaining values are either above the cut off mode/freq values or are of low accuracy. To use these frequencies, rerun with a higher cutoff mode (or mode + freq) value.
information only and will not be used.
3 PERIOD(SEC) ACCURACY
31 32 33 34 MODE
88.295 89.146 89.364 89.419 FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC)
0.01133 0.01122 0.01119 0.01118 PERIOD(SEC)
1.242E-08 8.720E-14 6.296E-14 6.152E-07 ACCURACY
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
93.731 93.757 151.020 151.026 158.220 158.227 165.740 165.742 183.026 183.036 185.748 185.759
0.01067 0.01067 0.00662 0.00662 0.00632 0.00632 0.00603 0.00603 0.00546 0.00546 0.00538 0.00538
5.728E-13 4.678E-08 4.389E-11 1.152E-09 1.101E-11 1.303E-07 1.952E-12 2.209E-12 8.844E-11 4.522E-09 1.035E-11 1.794E-07
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 465 of 493
47 48 49
350.604 350.804 351.834
0.00285 0.00285 0.00284
2.201E-09 2.130E-11 6.575E-10
MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT -------------------------------------MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 X Y Z SUMM-X 0.000 98.023 98.023 98.023 98.023 98.023 98.023 98.023 98.023 98.023 98.023 99.728 99.728 99.728 99.728 99.758 99.758 99.760 99.760 99.991 99.991 99.991 99.991 99.991 99.991 99.991 99.991 99.991 99.996 99.996 SUMM-Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 51.816 51.816 51.816 52.068 52.068 52.068 52.068 59.122 59.122 69.591 69.591 69.652 69.652 69.652 69.652 69.652 72.038 72.038 72.038 72.038 81.653 81.653 SUMM-Z 85.319 85.319 85.324 85.353 98.815 98.815 98.815 98.826 98.826 98.828 99.061 99.061 99.061 99.455 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.977 99.989 100.000 100.000 100.000
0.00 0.00 85.32 98.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.03 0.00 0.00 13.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 51.82 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.23 1.71 0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.39 0.00 0.00 0.52 0.03 7.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 10.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.23 0.06 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.00 9.61 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
TIME STEP USED IN TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS = 0.00139 SECONDS NUMBER OF MODES WHOSE CONTRIBUTION IS CONSIDERED = 30 TIME DURATION OF TIME HISTORY ANALYSIS = 31.160 SECONDS NUMBER OF TIME STEPS IN THE SOLUTION PROCESS = 22435
BASE SHEAR UNITS ARE -- KGS
METE
MAXIMUM BASE SHEAR AT TIMES
X=
-9.452958E+03 5.809722
Y=
-5.310748E+01 2.445833
Z=
2.304014E-06 2.745833
68. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 X-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0284 -0.4150 5.7142 5.2707 -6.1576 -0.0245 -0.3585 7.9290 7.5460 -8.3119 -0.0030 -0.0453 9.3414 9.2932 -9.3897 0.0000 0.0000
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0011 -0.0050 0.0046 -0.0015 -0.0107 -0.0015 -0.0075 0.0070 -0.0021 -0.0160 -0.0016 -0.0075 0.0023 -0.0068 -0.0115 0.0000 0.0000
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0004 0.0000 -0.0005 -0.0005 -0.0002 -0.0123 0.0000 -0.0124 -0.0124 0.0000 0.0004 0.0000 0.0004 0.0004 0.0000 0.0000
X-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 -0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0002 0.0000 0.0002 0.0002 0.0000 0.0000
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 -0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN 0.0001 0.0015 -0.0173 -0.0156 0.0189 0.0000 0.0004 -0.0141 -0.0137 0.0145 -0.0001 -0.0012 -0.0100 -0.0113 0.0088 -0.0001 -0.0020 -0.0083 -0.0104 0.0061 -0.0001 -0.0014
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 466 of 493
10
11
12
13
3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0256 0.3726 5.7306 6.1288 -5.3323 0.0202 0.2943 7.9428 8.2573 -7.6284 -0.0027 -0.0399 9.3428 9.3002 -9.3853 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0284 -0.4150 5.7142 5.2707 -6.1576 -0.0245 -0.3585 7.9290 7.5460 -8.3119 -0.0030 -0.0453 9.3414 9.2932 -9.3897 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0011 -0.0050 -0.0046 -0.0107 -0.0015 -0.0015 -0.0075 -0.0069 -0.0160 -0.0021 -0.0016 -0.0077 -0.0025 -0.0118 -0.0068 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0011 -0.0050 0.0046 -0.0015 -0.0107 -0.0015 -0.0075 0.0070 -0.0021 -0.0160 -0.0016 -0.0075 0.0023 -0.0068 -0.0115 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0004 0.0000 -0.0005 -0.0005 -0.0002 -0.0123 0.0000 -0.0124 -0.0124 0.0000 0.0004 0.0000 0.0004 0.0004 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0004 0.0000 0.0005 0.0005 0.0002 0.0123 0.0000 0.0124 0.0124 0.0000 -0.0004 0.0000 -0.0004 -0.0004 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 -0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0002 0.0000 0.0002 0.0002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000 -0.0002 -0.0002 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
-0.0173 -0.0189 0.0158 0.0000 -0.0002 -0.0141 -0.0144 0.0139 0.0001 0.0013 -0.0100 -0.0086 0.0114 0.0001 0.0021 -0.0082 -0.0059 0.0105 0.0001 0.0015 -0.0173 -0.0156 0.0189 0.0000 0.0004 -0.0141 -0.0137 0.0145 -0.0001 -0.0012 -0.0100 -0.0113 0.0088 -0.0001 -0.0020 -0.0083 -0.0104 0.0061 -0.0001 -0.0014 -0.0173 -0.0189 0.0158
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 14 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 X-TRANS 0.0256 0.3726 5.7306 6.1288 -5.3323 0.0202 0.2943 7.9428 8.2573 -7.6284 -0.0027 -0.0399 9.3428 9.3002 -9.3853 -0.0027 -0.0402 9.3245 9.2817 -9.3673 -0.0028 -0.0426 9.3265 9.2811 -9.3720 -0.0030 -0.0452 9.3246 9.2763 -9.3728 -0.0027 -0.0402 9.3245 9.2817 -9.3673 -0.0028 -0.0426 9.3265
RADIANS)
Y-TRANS -0.0011 -0.0050 -0.0046 -0.0107 -0.0015 -0.0015 -0.0075 -0.0069 -0.0160 -0.0021 -0.0016 -0.0077 -0.0025 -0.0118 -0.0068 -0.0262 -0.3688 -1.3996 -1.7947 1.0046 -0.0632 -0.9657 -0.0733 -1.1022 -0.9556 -0.0291 -0.4118 1.4625 1.0216 -1.9033 -0.0262 -0.3688 -1.3996 -1.7947 1.0046 -0.0632 -0.9657 -0.0733
Z-TRANS 0.0000 0.0004 0.0000 0.0005 0.0005 0.0002 0.0123 0.0000 0.0124 0.0124 0.0000 -0.0004 0.0000 -0.0004 -0.0004 0.0000 0.0008 0.0000 0.0008 0.0008 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0009 0.0000 0.0009 0.0009 0.0000 -0.0008 0.0000 -0.0008 -0.0008 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
X-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0002 0.0000 -0.0002 -0.0002 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0038 0.0000 0.0039 0.0039 0.0000 0.0001 0.0000 0.0001 0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 -0.0001 -0.0001 -0.0038 0.0000
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 -0.0001 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN 0.0000 -0.0002 -0.0141 -0.0144 0.0139 0.0001 0.0013 -0.0100 -0.0086 0.0114 0.0001 0.0021 -0.0082 -0.0059 0.0105 -0.0002 -0.0025 -0.0033 -0.0059 0.0006 0.0000 -0.0003 0.0086 0.0083 -0.0089 0.0002 0.0025 -0.0031 -0.0004 0.0057 -0.0002 -0.0025 -0.0033 -0.0059 0.0006 0.0000 -0.0003 0.0086
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 467 of 493
22
11 12 1 2 3 11 12
9.2811 -9.3720 -0.0030 -0.0452 9.3246 9.2763 -9.3728
-1.1022 -0.9556 -0.0291 -0.4118 1.4625 1.0216 -1.9033
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0009 0.0000 -0.0009 -0.0009
-0.0039 -0.0039 0.0000 -0.0001 0.0000 -0.0001 -0.0001
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
0.0083 -0.0089 0.0002 0.0025 -0.0031 -0.0004 0.0057
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KGS ----------------JOINT 1 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 1 2 3 11 12 FORCE-X 60.21 873.02 -2345.38 -1412.14 3278.62 -60.21 -873.02 -2381.10 -3314.34 1447.86 60.21 873.02 -2345.38 -1412.14 3278.62 -60.21 -873.02 -2381.10 -3314.34 1447.86
METE
FORCE-Y 991.51 3562.50 -3296.63 1257.38 7850.64 991.66 3562.50 3293.86 7848.02 1260.30 991.51 3562.50 -3296.63 1257.38 7850.64 991.66 3562.50 3293.86 7848.02 1260.30
FORCE-Z 0.96 -19.70 0.00 -18.74 -18.74 0.96 -19.70 0.00 -18.74 -18.74 -0.96 19.70 0.00 18.74 18.74 -0.96 19.70 0.00 18.74 18.74
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
13
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS METE MEMBER 1 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 JT 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 AXIAL 991.51 -655.10 3562.50 -3562.50 -3296.63 3296.63 1257.38 -920.98 7850.64 -7514.23 629.59 -456.58 3562.50 -3562.50 -3296.62 3296.62 895.47 -722.47 7488.71 -7315.70 SHEAR-Y -60.21 60.21 -873.02 873.02 2345.38 -2345.38 1412.14 -1412.14 -3278.62 3278.62 -60.21 60.21 -873.02 873.02 2244.28 -2244.28 1311.04 -1311.04 -3177.52 3177.52 SHEAR-Z 0.96 -0.96 -19.70 19.70 0.00 0.00 -18.74 18.74 -18.74 18.74 5.88 -5.88 112.18 -112.18 0.00 0.00 118.06 -118.06 118.06 -118.06 5.87 -5.87 111.53 -111.53 0.00 0.00 117.40 -117.40 117.40 -117.40 0.96 -0.96 -19.70 19.70 0.00 0.00 -18.74 18.74 -18.74 18.74 TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 -0.01 0.24 -0.24 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.24 0.24 -0.24 -0.01 0.01 -0.35 0.35 0.00 0.00 -0.36 0.36 -0.36 0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y 0.00 -3.37 0.00 68.97 0.00 0.00 0.00 65.59 0.00 65.59 -8.90 -1.69 -79.32 -122.60 0.00 0.00 -88.22 -124.30 -88.22 -124.30 1.68 -11.66 121.90 -311.50 0.00 0.00 123.58 -323.16 123.58 -323.16 0.00 -3.38 0.00 68.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 65.58 0.00 65.58 MOM-Z 0.00 -210.74 0.00 -3055.59 0.00 8208.83 0.00 4942.50 0.00 -11475.16 210.74 -319.13 3055.59 -4627.03 -8208.83 12248.53 -4942.50 7302.37 11475.16 -17194.69 304.11 7.31 4573.31 248.00 -12280.23 -2794.30 -7402.81 -2539.00 17157.66 3049.61 0.00 210.74 0.00 3055.59 0.00 8333.85 0.00 11600.18 0.00 -5067.52
1 2 3 11 12
1 2 3 11 12
188.28 183.19 -24.88 -183.19 38.88 2836.07 -38.88 -2836.07 6869.23 -8867.28 -6869.23 8867.28 7096.39 -5848.03 -6932.99 5848.03 -6642.08 11886.54 6805.47 -11886.54 991.66 -655.25 3562.50 -3562.50 3293.86 -3293.86 7848.02 -7511.61 1260.30 -923.89 60.21 -60.21 873.02 -873.02 2381.10 -2381.10 3314.34 -3314.34 -1447.86 1447.86
1 2 3 11 12
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 468 of 493
1 2 3 11 12
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
629.74 -456.73 3562.50 -3562.50 3293.74 -3293.74 7485.98 -7312.97 898.50 -725.49
60.21 -60.21 873.02 -873.02 2279.15 -2279.15 3212.39 -3212.39 -1345.92 1345.92
5.88 -5.88 112.15 -112.15 0.00 0.00 118.03 -118.03 118.03 -118.03
-0.01 0.01 -0.23 0.23 0.00 0.00 -0.23 0.23 -0.23 0.23
-8.89 -1.69 -79.31 -122.55 0.00 0.00 -88.21 -124.24 -88.21 -124.24
-210.74 319.13 -3055.59 4627.03 -8333.85 12436.32 -11600.18 17382.48 5067.52 -7490.17
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS METE MEMBER 6 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 JT 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 10 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 14 15 14 15 14 15 14 15 14 15 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z 5.87 -5.87 111.52 -111.52 0.00 0.00 117.39 -117.39 117.39 -117.39 -0.96 0.96 19.70 -19.70 0.00 0.00 18.74 -18.74 18.74 -18.74 -5.88 5.88 -112.18 112.18 0.00 0.00 -118.06 118.06 -118.06 118.06 -5.87 5.87 -111.53 111.53 0.00 0.00 -117.40 117.40 -117.40 117.40 -0.96 0.96 19.70 -19.70 0.00 0.00 18.74 -18.74 18.74 -18.74 -5.88 5.88 -112.15 112.15 0.00 0.00 -118.03 118.03 -118.03 118.03 TORSION 0.01 -0.01 0.33 -0.33 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.34 0.34 -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.01 0.01 -0.24 0.24 0.00 0.00 -0.24 0.24 -0.24 0.24 0.01 -0.01 0.35 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.36 -0.36 0.36 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 -0.01 0.23 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.23 -0.23 0.23 -0.23 MOM-Y 1.68 -11.66 121.92 -311.50 0.00 0.00 123.59 -323.16 123.59 -323.16 0.00 3.37 0.00 -68.97 0.00 0.00 0.00 -65.59 0.00 -65.59 8.90 1.69 79.32 122.60 0.00 0.00 88.22 124.30 88.22 124.30 -1.68 11.66 -121.90 311.50 0.00 0.00 -123.58 323.16 -123.58 323.16 0.00 3.38 0.00 -68.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 -65.58 0.00 -65.58 8.89 1.69 79.31 122.55 0.00 0.00 88.21 124.24 88.21 124.24 MOM-Z -302.90 -2.19 -4569.20 -178.97 -12468.99 -2889.20 -17341.09 -3070.36 7596.89 2708.05 0.00 -210.74 0.00 -3055.59 0.00 8208.83 0.00 4942.50 0.00 -11475.16 210.74 -319.13 3055.59 -4627.03 -8208.83 12248.53 -4942.50 7302.38 11475.16 -17194.69 304.11 7.31 4573.31 248.00 -12280.23 -2794.30 -7402.81 -2539.00 17157.66 3049.61 0.00 210.74 0.00 3055.59 0.00 8333.85 0.00 11600.18 0.00 -5067.52 -210.74 319.13 -3055.59 4627.03 -8333.85 12436.33 -11600.18 17382.48 5067.52 -7490.17
202.37 -179.47 -38.97 179.47 254.77 -2793.04 -254.77 2793.04 -6517.47 -9034.07 6517.47 9034.07 -6060.33 -12006.58 6223.73 12006.58 6974.61 6061.57 -6811.21 -6061.57 991.51 -655.10 3562.50 -3562.50 -3296.63 3296.63 1257.38 -920.98 7850.64 -7514.23 629.59 -456.58 3562.50 -3562.50 -3296.62 3296.62 895.47 -722.47 7488.71 -7315.70 -60.21 60.21 -873.02 873.02 2345.38 -2345.38 1412.14 -1412.14 -3278.62 3278.62 -60.21 60.21 -873.02 873.02 2244.28 -2244.28 1311.04 -1311.04 -3177.52 3177.52
1 2 3 11 12
1 2 3 11 12
1 2 3 11 12
188.28 183.19 -24.88 -183.19 38.88 2836.07 -38.88 -2836.07 6869.23 -8867.28 -6869.23 8867.28 7096.39 -5848.03 -6932.99 5848.03 -6642.08 11886.54 6805.47 -11886.54 991.66 -655.25 3562.50 -3562.50 3293.86 -3293.86 7848.02 -7511.61 1260.30 -923.89 629.74 -456.73 3562.50 -3562.50 3293.74 -3293.74 7485.98 -7312.97 898.50 -725.49 60.21 -60.21 873.02 -873.02 2381.10 -2381.10 3314.34 -3314.34 -1447.86 1447.86 60.21 -60.21 873.02 -873.02 2279.15 -2279.15 3212.39 -3212.39 -1345.92 1345.92
10
1 2 3 11 12
11
1 2 3 11 12
MEMBER END FORCES -----------------
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 469 of 493
ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS MEMBER 12 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 JT 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16
METE SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z -5.87 5.87 -111.52 111.52 0.00 0.00 -117.39 117.39 -117.39 117.39 -0.01 0.01 -0.67 0.67 0.00 0.00 -0.68 0.68 -0.68 0.68 0.00 0.00 -0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 -0.02 0.02 -0.02 0.02 0.00 0.00 0.01 -0.01 0.00 0.00 0.01 -0.01 0.01 -0.01 0.01 -0.01 0.64 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.64 -0.64 0.64 -0.64 0.01 -0.01 0.67 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.68 0.68 -0.68 TORSION -0.01 0.01 -0.33 0.33 0.00 0.00 -0.34 0.34 -0.34 0.34 0.00 0.00 0.09 -0.09 0.00 0.00 0.09 -0.09 0.09 -0.09 -0.03 0.03 -1.73 1.73 0.00 0.00 -1.76 1.76 -1.76 1.76 0.03 -0.03 1.61 -1.61 0.00 0.00 1.64 -1.64 1.64 -1.64 0.00 0.00 -0.08 0.08 0.00 0.00 -0.09 0.09 -0.09 0.09 0.00 0.00 -0.09 0.09 0.00 0.00 -0.09 0.09 -0.09 0.09 MOM-Y -1.68 11.66 -121.92 311.50 0.00 0.00 -123.59 323.16 -123.59 323.16 -0.01 0.03 -0.29 1.50 0.00 0.00 -0.30 1.53 -0.30 1.53 0.01 -0.01 0.27 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.27 -0.23 0.27 -0.23 0.01 -0.01 0.23 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.23 -0.27 0.23 -0.27 -0.03 0.01 -1.48 0.27 0.00 0.00 -1.51 0.28 -1.51 0.28 0.01 -0.03 0.29 -1.50 0.00 0.00 0.30 -1.53 0.30 -1.53 MOM-Z -302.90 -2.19 -4569.20 -178.97 -12468.99 -2889.20 -17341.09 -3070.36 7596.89 2708.05 -7.31 -55.87 -248.00 -1178.27 2794.30 9569.89 2539.00 8335.75 -3049.61 -10804.03 66.53 138.18 1194.92 2341.33 -9962.71 394.09 -8701.25 2873.59 11224.16 2085.42 -138.18 -52.20 -2341.33 -977.42 -394.09 -9886.59 -2873.59 -10916.21 -2085.42 8856.97 41.36 2.19 971.97 178.97 9494.79 2889.20 10508.12 3070.36 -8481.46 -2708.05 -7.31 -55.87 -248.00 -1178.27 2794.30 9569.89 2539.00 8335.75 -3049.61 -10804.03
AXIAL
202.37 -179.47 -38.97 179.47 254.77 -2793.04 -254.77 2793.04 -6517.47 -9034.07 6517.47 9034.07 -6060.33 -12006.58 6223.73 12006.58 6974.61 6061.57 -6811.22 -6061.57 -0.63 69.57 -523.62 1311.12 6869.00 -6869.00 6344.74 -5488.31 -7393.25 8249.69 126.72 -19.50 2212.50 -675.00 -3417.65 3417.65 -1078.42 2723.15 5756.87 -4112.15 -6.02 120.90 -450.00 2137.50 -3426.70 3426.70 -3882.71 5685.10 2970.68 -1168.30 59.30 13.46 1170.23 -307.73 6517.89 -6517.89 7747.42 -6812.16 -5288.35 6223.62 -0.63 69.57 -523.62 1311.12 6869.00 -6869.00 6344.74 -5488.31 -7393.25 8249.69
13
1 2 3 11 12
14
1 2 3 11 12
4 -183.19 17 183.19 4 -2836.07 17 2836.07 4 9407.30 17 -9407.30 4 6388.04 17 -6388.04 4 -12426.55 17 12426.55 17 60.21 18 -60.21 17 873.02 18 -873.02 17 -723.30 18 723.30 17 209.94 18 -209.94 17 1656.54 18 -1656.54 18 19 18 19 18 19 18 19 18 19 60.21 -60.21 873.02 -873.02 665.45 -665.45 1598.69 -1598.69 267.79 -267.79
15
1 2 3 11 12
16
1 2 3 11 12
19 -179.47 8 179.47 19 -2793.04 8 2793.04 19 -9591.49 8 9591.49 19 -12563.99 8 12563.99 19 6618.98 8 -6618.98 12 -183.19 20 183.19 12 -2836.07 20 2836.07 12 9407.30 20 -9407.30 12 6388.04 20 -6388.04 12 -12426.55 20 12426.55
17
1 2 3 11 12
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS METE MEMBER 18 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 JT 20 21 20 21 20 21 20 21 20 21 AXIAL 60.21 -60.21 873.02 -873.02 -723.30 723.30 209.94 -209.94 1656.54 -1656.54 SHEAR-Y 126.72 -19.50 2212.50 -675.00 -3417.65 3417.65 -1078.42 2723.15 5756.87 -4112.15 SHEAR-Z 0.00 0.00 0.01 -0.01 0.00 0.00 0.02 -0.02 0.02 -0.02 TORSION 0.03 -0.03 1.73 -1.73 0.00 0.00 1.76 -1.76 1.76 -1.76 MOM-Y -0.01 0.01 -0.27 0.23 0.00 0.00 -0.27 0.23 -0.27 0.23 MOM-Z 66.53 138.18 1194.92 2341.33 -9962.71 394.09 -8701.25 2873.59 11224.16 2085.42
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 470 of 493
19
1 2 3 11 12
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
60.21 -60.21 873.02 -873.02 665.45 -665.45 1598.69 -1598.69 267.79 -267.79
-6.02 120.90 -450.00 2137.50 -3426.70 3426.70 -3882.71 5685.10 2970.68 -1168.30 59.30 13.46 1170.23 -307.73 6517.89 -6517.89 7747.42 -6812.16 -5288.35 6223.62 -25.51 -25.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -25.51 -25.51 -25.51 -25.51 -25.51 -25.51 -562.50 -562.50 0.00 0.00 -588.01 -588.01 -588.01 -588.01 25.51 25.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 25.51 25.51 25.51 25.51
0.00 0.00 -0.01 0.01 0.00 0.00 -0.01 0.01 -0.01 0.01 -0.01 0.01 -0.64 0.64 0.00 0.00 -0.64 0.64 -0.64 0.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.03 0.03 -1.61 1.61 0.00 0.00 -1.64 1.64 -1.64 1.64 0.00 0.00 0.08 -0.08 0.00 0.00 0.09 -0.09 0.09 -0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.01 0.01 -0.23 0.26 0.00 0.00 -0.23 0.27 -0.23 0.27 0.03 -0.01 1.48 -0.27 0.00 0.00 1.51 -0.28 1.51 -0.28 0.01 -0.01 0.24 -0.24 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.24 0.24 -0.24 0.00 0.00 0.06 -0.06 0.00 0.00 0.06 -0.06 0.06 -0.06 0.01 -0.01 0.23 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.23 -0.23 0.23 -0.23
-138.18 -52.20 -2341.33 -977.42 -394.09 -9886.59 -2873.59 -10916.21 -2085.42 8856.97 41.36 2.19 971.97 178.97 9494.79 2889.20 10508.12 3070.36 -8481.46 -2708.05 -12.27 12.27 -10.36 10.36 0.00 0.00 -22.63 22.63 -22.63 22.63 -11.66 11.66 -311.59 311.59 0.00 0.00 -323.25 323.25 -323.25 323.25 12.27 -12.27 10.36 -10.36 0.00 0.00 22.63 -22.63 22.63 -22.63
20
1 2 3 11 12
22 -179.47 16 179.47 22 -2793.04 16 2793.04 22 -9591.49 16 9591.49 22 -12563.99 16 12563.99 22 6618.98 16 -6618.98 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 2 10 4 12 4 12 4 12 4 12 4 12 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 14 6 14 -4.92 4.92 -131.89 131.89 0.00 0.00 -136.80 136.80 -136.80 136.80 5.88 -5.88 112.20 -112.20 0.00 0.00 118.08 -118.08 118.08 -118.08 -4.92 4.92 -131.85 131.85 0.00 0.00 -136.76 136.76 -136.76 136.76
21
1 2 3 11 12
22
1 2 3 11 12
23
1 2 3 11 12
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS METE MEMBER 24 LOAD 1 2 3 11 12 JT 8 16 8 16 8 16 8 16 8 16 AXIAL 5.88 -5.88 112.16 -112.16 0.00 0.00 118.04 -118.04 118.04 -118.04 SHEAR-Y 25.51 25.51 562.50 562.50 0.00 0.00 588.01 588.01 588.01 588.01 27.93 24.42 14.97 -14.97 171.47 -171.47 214.38 -162.02 -128.57 180.92 29.75 25.52 20.54 SHEAR-Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.01 -0.01 0.66 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.66 0.66 -0.66 -0.01 0.01 -0.62 TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.11 0.11 0.00 0.00 -0.11 0.11 -0.11 0.11 0.00 0.00 0.10 MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.06 -0.06 0.00 0.00 0.06 -0.06 0.06 -0.06 0.02 -0.05 0.91 -2.53 0.00 0.00 0.93 -2.58 0.93 -2.58 -0.02 0.05 -0.84 MOM-Z 11.66 -11.66 311.59 -311.59 0.00 0.00 323.25 -323.25 323.25 -323.25 15.01 -10.66 53.72 -16.65 31.79 392.82 100.52 365.50 36.94 -420.13 16.22 -10.84 57.83
25
1 2 3 11 12
3 361.18 17 -311.73 3 5115.96 17 -5115.96 3 -14986.46 17 14986.46 3 -9509.32 17 9558.77 3 20463.60 17 -20414.16 7 19 7 348.22 -298.78 4937.68
26
1 2
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 471 of 493
3 11 12 27 1 2 3 11 12
19 7 19 7 19 7 19 11 20 11 20 11 20 11 20 11 20
-4937.68 14898.31 -14898.31 20184.22 -20134.77 -9612.41 9661.86 361.18 -311.73 5115.96 -5115.96 -14986.46 14986.46 -9509.32 9558.77 20463.61 -20414.16
-20.54 -166.52 166.52 -116.23 171.49 216.81 -161.54 27.93 24.42 14.97 -14.97 171.47 -171.47 214.38 -162.02 -128.57 180.92 29.75 25.52 20.54 -20.54 -166.52 166.52 -116.23 171.49 216.81 -161.54 25.51 25.51 1125.00 1125.00 0.00 0.00 1150.51 1150.51 1150.51 1150.51
0.62 0.00 0.00 -0.63 0.63 -0.63 0.63 -0.01 0.01 -0.66 0.66 0.00 0.00 -0.66 0.66 -0.66 0.66 0.01 -0.01 0.62 -0.62 0.00 0.00 0.63 -0.63 0.63 -0.63 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-0.10 0.00 0.00 0.10 -0.10 0.10 -0.10 0.00 0.00 0.11 -0.11 0.00 0.00 0.11 -0.11 0.11 -0.11 0.00 0.00 -0.10 0.10 0.00 0.00 -0.10 0.10 -0.10 0.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
2.43 0.00 0.00 -0.86 2.47 -0.86 2.47 -0.02 0.05 -0.91 2.53 0.00 0.00 -0.93 2.58 -0.93 2.58 0.02 -0.05 0.84 -2.43 0.00 0.00 0.86 -2.47 0.86 -2.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-5.46 -32.92 -391.80 41.14 -408.09 106.97 375.51 15.01 -10.66 53.72 -16.65 31.79 392.82 100.52 365.50 36.94 -420.13 16.22 -10.84 57.83 -5.46 -32.92 -391.80 41.14 -408.09 106.97 375.51 0.06 -0.06 3.34 -3.34 0.00 0.00 3.40 -3.40 3.40 -3.40
28
1 2 3 11 12
15 348.22 22 -298.78 15 4937.68 22 -4937.68 15 14898.31 22 -14898.31 15 20184.22 22 -20134.77 15 -9612.41 22 9661.86 18 21 18 21 18 21 18 21 18 21 0.00 0.00 -0.03 0.03 0.00 0.00 -0.03 0.03 -0.03 0.03
29
1 2 3 11 12
69. 70. 71. 72.
LOAD LIST 11 12 PARAMETER CODE CANADA CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01 ) ********************************************
MET
(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W310X97 PASS 73.69 C 2 ST W310X97 PASS 71.74 C 3 ST W310X97 PASS 65.14 T 4 ST W310X97 PASS 73.66 C 5 ST W310X97 PASS 71.72 C 6 ST W310X97 PASS 59.43 T 7 ST W310X97 PASS 73.69 C 8 ST W310X97 PASS 71.74 C 9 ST W310X97 PASS (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B -0.64 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B 1.22 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A 1.21 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B -0.64 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B 1.22 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A 1.21 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B 0.64 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B -1.22 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A SECTIONS) 0.320 112.53 SECTIONS) 0.465 168.62 SECTIONS) 0.462 168.26 SECTIONS) 0.324 -113.76 SECTIONS) 0.470 -170.46 SECTIONS) 0.465 -170.06 SECTIONS) 0.320 112.53 SECTIONS) 0.465 168.62 SECTIONS) 0.462
12 3.50 12 1.80 12 0.00 11 3.50 11 1.80 11 0.00 12 3.50 12 1.80 12
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 472 of 493
65.14 T 10 ST W310X97 PASS 73.66 C 11 ST W310X97 PASS 71.72 C 12 ST W310X97 PASS 59.43 T 13 ST W250X39 PASS 121.86 T 14 ST W250X39 PASS 16.25 C 15 ST W250X39 PASS 15.68 C 16 ST W250X39 PASS 123.21 T 17 ST W250X39 PASS 121.86 T 18 ST W250X39 PASS 16.25 C 19 ST W250X39 PASS 15.68 C ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE MET
-1.21 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B 0.64 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B -1.22 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A -1.21 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A -0.01 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.2+ 0.00 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.2+ 0.00 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A -0.01 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A 0.01 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.2+ 0.00 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.2+ 0.00
168.26 SECTIONS) 0.324 -113.76 SECTIONS) 0.470 -170.46 SECTIONS) 0.465 -170.06 SECTIONS) 0.860 105.95 SECTIONS) 0.850 110.07 SECTIONS) 0.850 107.05 SECTIONS) 0.840 103.05 SECTIONS) 0.860 105.95 SECTIONS) 0.850 110.07 SECTIONS) 0.850 107.05
0.00 11 3.50 11 1.80 11 0.00 12 1.80 12 0.00 11 3.00 11 0.00 12 1.80 12 0.00 11 3.00
(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 20 ST W250X39 PASS 123.21 T 21 ST C200X17 PASS 1.34 T 22 ST C200X17 PASS 1.16 C 23 ST C200X17 PASS 1.34 T 24 ST C200X17 PASS 1.16 C L150X150X13 PASS 200.19 C L150X150X13 PASS 197.45 C L150X150X13 PASS 200.19 C L150X150X13 PASS 197.45 C C200X17 PASS 0.00 C (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A 0.01 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A 0.00 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3C 0.00 (CANADIAN CSA-13.9.A 0.00 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3C 0.00 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B 0.03 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B -0.02 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B -0.03 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3B 0.02 (CANADIAN CSA-13.8.3C 0.00 SECTIONS) 0.840 103.05 SECTIONS) 0.009 -0.22 SECTIONS) 0.143 -3.17 SECTIONS) 0.009 0.22 SECTIONS) 0.143 3.17 SECTIONS) 0.539 4.12 SECTIONS) 0.538 4.00 SECTIONS) 0.539 4.12 SECTIONS) 0.538 4.00 SECTIONS) 0.492 -11.19
11 0.00 11 0.00 11 0.00 11 0.00 11 0.00 12 2.48 11 2.55 12 2.48 11 2.55 11 1.50
25 ST
26 ST
27 ST
28 ST
29 ST
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Research Engineers Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Email * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 support@reiusa.com * * CANADA +1 (905)632-4771 detech@netcom.ca * * UK +44(1454)207-000 support@reel.co.uk * * FRANCE +33(0)1 64551084 support@reel.co.uk * * GERMANY +49/931/40468-71 info@reig.de * * NORWAY +47 67 57 21 30 support@reel.co.uk * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6015/16 support@reiasia.net * * INDIA +91(033)2357-3575 support@calcutta.reiusa.com *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 473 of 493
* JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 eng-eye@crc.co.jp * * CHINA +86(411)363-1983 support@reiasia.net * * * * North America support@reiusa.com * * Europe support@reel.co.uk * * Asia support@reiasia.net * ************************************************************
Verification Problems(U.K.)
Problem No. 1
OBJECTIVE: To find the support reactions due to a joint load in a plane truss. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., 3rd edition, 1956, page 346, problem 3. PROBLEM: Determine the horizontal reaction at support 4 of the system.
COMPARISON: Support Reaction, Kips Solution Theory STAAD Difference R4 8.77 8.77 None
****************************************************
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 474 of 493
* * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD TRUSS VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO. 1 2. * 3. * REFERENCE `STRENGTH OF MATERIALS' PART-1 BY S. TIMOSHENKO 4. * PAGE 346 PROBLEM NO. 3. THE ANSWER IS REACTION = 0.877P. 5. * THEREFORE IF P=10, REACTION = 8.77 6. * 7. UNITS INCH KIP 8. JOINT COORD 9. 1 0. 0. ; 2 150. 100. ; 3 150. 50. ; 4 300. 0. 10. MEMBER INCI 11. 1 1 2 ; 2 1 3 ; 3 2 3 ; 4 2 4 ; 5 3 4 12. MEMB PROP 13. 1 4 PRIS AX 5.0 ; 2 5 PRIS AX 3.0 ; 3 PRIS AX 2 14. CONSTANT 15. E 30000. ALL 16. POISSON STEEL ALL 17. SUPPORT ; 1 4 PINNED 18. LOADING 1 19. JOINT LOAD ; 2 FY -10. 20. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 4/ 5/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 2/ 2/ 4 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.6 MB 21. PRINT REACTION SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KIP INCH ----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = TRUSS MOM-X 0.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM Z
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 4 1 1 8.77 -8.77 5.00 5.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 22. FINISH
Problem No. 2
OBJECTIVE: To find the period of free vibration for a beam supported on two springs with a point mass. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Young, D., and Weaver, W., Vibration Problems in Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, 4th edition, 1974. page 11, problem 1.1-3. PROBLEM: A simple beam is supported by two spring as shown in the figure. Neglecting the distributed mass of the beam, calculate the period of free vibration of the beam subjected to a load of W.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 475 of 493
GIVEN:
EI = 30000.0 ksi A = 7.0 ft B = 3.0 ft. K = 300.0 lb/in.
COMPARISON: Solution Theory STAAD Difference Period, sec 0.533 0.533 None
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO 2 2. * 3. * REFERENCE 'VIBRATION PROBLEMS IN ENGINEERING' BY 4. * TIMOSHENKO,YOUNG,WEAVER. (4TH EDITION, PAGE 11, PROB 1.1-3) 5. * THE ANSWER IN THE BOOK IS T = 0.533 SEC., VIZ., F = 1.876 CPS 6. * 7. UNIT POUND FEET 8. JOINT COORD ; 1 0. 0. ; 2 7. 0. ; 3 10. 0. 9. MEMB INCI ; 1 1 2 2 10. UNIT INCH 11. SUPPORT 12. 1 3 FIXED BUT MZ KFY 300. 13. MEMB PROP ; 1 2 PRIS AX 1. IZ 1. 14. CONSTANT 15. E 30E6 ALL 16. POISSON STEEL ALL 17. CUT OFF MODE SHAPE 1 18. LOADING 1 1000 LB LOAD AT JOINT 2 19. JOINT LOAD ; 2 FY -1000. 20. MODAL CALCULATION 21. PERFORM ANALYS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 3/ 2/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.5 MB NUMBER OF MODES REQUESTED = 1
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 476 of 493
NUMBER OF EXISTING MASSES IN THE MODEL = 1 NUMBER OF MODES THAT WILL BE USED = 1 CALCULATED FREQUENCIES FOR LOAD CASE MODE 1 FREQUENCY(CYCLES/SEC) 1.876 0.53317 1 ACCURACY
PERIOD(SEC) 2.047E-16
MASS PARTICIPATION FACTORS IN PERCENT -------------------------------------MODE 1 X Y Z SUMM-X SUMM-Y SUMM-Z 0.000 100.000 0.000
0.00100.00 0.00
22. FINISH
Problem No. 3
TYPE: REFERENCE: PROBLEM: Deflection and moments for plate-bending finite element. Simple hand calculation by considering the entire structure as a cantilever beam.
A simple cantilever plate is divided into 12 4-noded finite elements. A uniform pressure load is applied and the maximum deflection at the tip of the cantilever and the maximum bending at the support are calculated.
GIVEN:
Plate thickness = 25mm, Uniform pressure= 5N/sq.mm
HAND CALCULATION:
3 Max. deflection = WL /8EI, where 10 3 3 WL =(5x300x100) x (300) = 405x10 3 3 8EI=8x(210x107 N/sq.mm)x(100x25 /12) 21875 10
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 477 of 493
Deflection = 18.51mm Max. moment = WL/2 = (5x300x100)x300/2 6 = 22.5x10 N.mm = 22.5KN.m
SOLUTION COMPARISON: Max. Defl. 18.51 mm 18.20 mm Max Moment 22.50 kNm 22.50 kNm
Hand calculation STAAD
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. STAAD SPACE FINITE ELEMENT VERIFICATION UNIT MM KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 7 300 0 0 REPEAT 2 0 50 0 ELEMENT INCIDENCE 1 1 2 9 8 TO 6 REPEAT 1 6 7 ELEMENT PROP 1 TO 12 THICK 25.0 CONSTANT E 210.0 ALL POISSON STEEL ALL SUPPORT 1 8 15 FIXED UNIT NEWTON LOAD 1 5N/SQ.MM. UNIFORM LOAD ELEMENT LOAD 1 TO 12 PRESSURE 5.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 21/ 12/ ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 8/ 5/ 36 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 126 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 21. PRINT DISPLACEMENT LIST 14 JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT ROTAN 14 0.0000 LOAD X-TRANS RADIANS) STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE 5 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS 12.1/ 38892.5 MB 3
Y-TRANS
Z-TRANS
X-ROTAN
Y-ROTAN
Z-
0.0000
0.0000
1.8159
0.0000
-0.0813
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 478 of 493
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 22. UNIT KN METER 23. PRINT REACTION SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KN ----------------JOINT MOM Z 1 0.00 8 0.00 15 0.00 1 0.00 0.00 -18.91 1.54 5.47 1 0.00 0.00 -112.19 0.00 11.56 LOAD FORCE-X METE STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
FORCE-Y
FORCE-Z
MOM-X
MOM-Y
0.00
0.00
-18.91
-1.54
5.47
Problem No. 4
OBJECTIVE: To find the support reactions due to a load at the free end of a cantilever plane bent with an intermediate support. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., 3rd edition, 1956, page 346, problem 2. PROBLEM: Determine the reaction of the system as shown in the figure.
COMPARISON: Reaction, Kip Solution Theory STAAD RX 1.5 1.5
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 479 of 493
Difference
None
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO. 4 2. * 3. * REFERENCE 'STRENGTH OF MATERIALS' PART-1 BY S. TIMOSHENKO 4. * PAGE 346 PROBLEM NO. 2. THE ANSWER IN THE BOOK AFTER 5. * RECALCULATION = 1.5 6. * 7. UNIT INCH KIP 8. JOINT COORD 9. 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 10. ; 3 0. 20. ; 4 10. 20. 10. MEMB INCI 11. 1 1 2 3 12. MEMB PROP ; 1 2 3 PRIS AX 10. IZ 100. 13. CONSTANT 14. E 3000. ALL 15. POISSON CONCRETE ALL 16. SUPPORT 17. 1 FIXED ; 2 FIXED BUT FY MZ 18. LOADING 1 19. JOINT LOAD ; 4 FY -1. 20. PERFORM ANALYS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 4/ 3/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.5 MB 21. PRINT REACTION
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KIP INCH -----------------
STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE MOM-X -5.00 0.00 MOM-Y MOM Z
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 1 2 1 1 1.50 -1.50 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 22. FINI
Problem No. 5
OBJECTIVE: To find deflections and stress at the center of a locomotive axle.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 480 of 493
REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S.,Strength of Materials, Part- 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., 3rd edition, 1956. page 97, problems 1, 2. PROBLEM: Determine the maximum stress in a locomotive axle (as shown in the figure) as well as the deflection at the middle of the axle.
GIVEN: Diameter = 10 in., P = 26000 lb, E = 30E6 psi COMPARISON: Stress (), psi, and Deflection (), in Solution Theory STAAD Difference * The value is recalculated. 3575.* 3575. None 0.01040 0.01037 None
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO. 5 2. * 3. * REFERENCE 'STRENGTH OF MATERIALS' PART-1 BY S. TIMOSHENKO 4. * PAGE 97 PROBLEM NO. 1 AND 2. ANSWERS ARE 3580 FOR MAX. STRESS 5. * AND 0.104 INCH FOR MAX. DEFLECTION. 6. * 7. UNIT INCH POUND 8. JOINT COORD 9. 1 0. 0. ; 2 13.5 0. ; 3 43. 0. ; 4 72.5 0. ; 5 86. 0. 10. MEMB INCI ; 1 1 2 4 11. MEMB PROP ; 1 TO 4 TABLE ST PIPE OD 10. ID 0. 12. CONSTANT 13. E 30E6 ALL 14. POISSON STEEL ALL 15. SUPPORT ; 2 4 PINNED 16. LOADING 1 17. JOINT LOAD ; 1 5 FY -26000. 18. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS =
5/
4/
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 481 of 493
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 4 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.4 MB 19. PRINT MEMBER STRESSES MEMBER STRESSES --------------ALL UNITS ARE POUN/SQ INCH MEMB LD SECT 1 2 3 4 1 .0 1.00 1 .0 1.00 1 .0 1.00 1 .0 1.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 AXIAL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 BEND-Y 0.0 3575.3 3575.3 3575.3 3575.3 3575.3 3575.3 0.0
11
BEND-Z COMBINED SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z
0.0 441.4 0.0 3575.3 441.4 0.0 3575.3 3575.3 3575.3 3575.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
3575.3 441.4 0.0 0.0 441.4 0.0
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 20. PRINT DISPLACEMENTS JOINT DISPLACEMENT (INCH RADIANS) STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE -----------------JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN 1 1 0.00000 -0.01138 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00086 2 1 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00070 3 1 0.00000 0.01037 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 4 1 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00070 5 1 0.00000 -0.01138 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00086 ************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 21. FINISH
Problem No. 6
OBJECTIVE: To find the maximum moment due to a uniform load on the horizontal member in a 1x1 bay plane frame. REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition, 1975, page 383, example 22 - 5. PROBLEM: Determine the maximum moment in the frame.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 482 of 493
GIVEN: E and I same for all members. COMPARISON: Moment, Kip-ft Solution Theory STAAD Difference MMax 44.40 44.44 Small
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO. 6 2. * 3. * REFERENCE 'STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS' BY JACK C. MCCORMACK, 4. * PAGE 383 EXAMPLE 22-5, PLANE FRAME WITH NO SIDESWAY 5. * ANSWER - MAX BENDING = 44.4 FT-KIP 6. * 7. UNIT FT KIP 8. JOINT COORD 9. 1 0. 0. ; 2 0. 20. ; 3 20. 20. ; 4 20. 0. 10. MEMB INCI ; 1 1 2 3 11. MEMB PROP ; 1 2 3 PRIS AX 1. IZ 0.05 12. CONSTANT 13. E 4132E3 ALL 14. POISSON STEEL ALL 15. SUPPORT ; 1 4 FIXED 16. LOADING 1 ; MEMB LOAD ; 2 UNI Y -2.0 17. PERFORM ANAL PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 4/ 3/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38893.4 MB
18. PRINT FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KIP FEET MEMBER LOAD JT 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 20.00 2 -20.00 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION -3.33 0.00 3.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -22.21 0.00 -44.44 0.00 44.44 0.00 -44.44 0.00 0.00 44.44 22.21 MOM-Y MOM-Z
2 3.33 20.00 0.00 3 -3.33 20.00 0.00 3 20.00 3.33 0.00 4 -20.00 -3.33 0.00
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 483 of 493
Problem No. 7
OBJECTIVE: To find the joint deflection due to joint loads in a plane truss. REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition, 1975, page 271, example 18 - 2. PROBLEM: Determine the vertical deflection at point 5 of the plane truss structure shown in the figure.
GIVEN:
AX 1-4 = 1 in2, AX 5-6 = 2 in2, AX 7-8 =1.5 in2, AX 9-11 = 3 in2, AX 12-13 = 4 in2, E = 30E3 ksi
COMPARISON: Deflection, in. Solution Theory STAAD Difference 5 2.63 2.63 None
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 484 of 493
* Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD TRUSS VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO. 7 2. * 3. * REFERENCE 'STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS' BY JACK MCCORMACK, PAGE 4. * 271 EXAMPLE 18-2. ANSWER - Y-DISP AT JOINT 5 = 2.63 INCH 5. * 6. UNIT FT KIP 7. JOINT COORD 8. 1 0 0 0 5 60 0 0 9. 6 15. 7.5 ; 7 30. 15. ; 8 45. 7.5 10. MEMB INCI 11. 1 2 6 ; 2 3 4 ; 3 4 8 ; 4 4 5 ; 5 1 2 12. 6 2 3 ; 7 3 6 ; 8 3 8 ; 9 3 7 13. 10 1 6 ; 11 5 8 ; 12 6 7 13 14. UNIT INCH 15. MEMB PROP 16. 1 TO 4 PRI AX 1.0 17. 5 6 PRIS AX 2. 18. 7 8 PRI AX 1.5 19. 9 10 11 PRI AX 3. 20. 12 13 PRI AX 4. 21. CONSTANT 22. E 30E3 ALL 23. POISSON STEEL ALL 24. SUPPORT 25. 1 PINNED ; 3 FIXED BUT FX MZ 26. LOAD 1 VERTICAL LOAD 27. JOINT LOAD 28. 2 4 5 FY -20.0 29. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 8/ 13/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 5/ 5/ 11 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38893.4 MB 30. PRINT DISPLACEMENTS JOINT DISPLACEMENT (INCH RADIANS) -----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = TRUSS
13
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.00000 -0.12000 -0.24000 -0.48000 -0.72000 -0.00820 0.29758 0.06578 0.00000 0.18000 0.00000 -0.89516 -2.63033 0.24000 -0.12000 -0.83516 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
Problem No. 8
OBJECTIVE: To find the maximum moment due to a concentrated load on the horizontal member in a 1x1 bay plane frame. REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition, 1975, page 385, problem 22 - 6.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 485 of 493
PROBLEM:
Determine the maximum moment in the structure.
GIVEN: E and I same for all members COMPARISON: Moment, Kip-ft Solution Theory STAAD Difference MMax 69.40 69.44 Small
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO. 8 2. * 3. * PLANE FRAME WITH SIDESWAY. REFERENCE 'STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS' 4. * BY JACK MCCORMACK. PAGE 385 PROB 22-6. 5. * ANSWER - MAX BENDING IN MEMB 1 = 69.4 KIP-FT 6. * 7. UNIT FT KIP 8. JOINT COORD 9. 1 0. 10. ; 2 0 30 ; 3 30 30 ; 4 30 0 10. MEMB INCI 11. 1 1 2 3 12. MEMB PROP AMERICAN 13. 1 2 3 TAB ST W12X26 14. CONSTANT 15. E 4176E3 16. POISSON STEEL ALL 17. SUPPORT ; 1 4 FIXED 18. LOAD 1 VERTICAL LOAD 19. MEMBER LOAD 20. 2 CON Y -30. 10. 21. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 4/ 3/ 2
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 486 of 493
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.9 MB
22. PRINT FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KIP FEET MEMBER LOAD JT 1 2 3 1 1 3 1 1 20.09 2 -20.09 2 3.74 -3.74 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION -3.74 0.00 3.74 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -5.34 0.00 -69.44 MOM-Y MOM-Z
20.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 69.44 9.91 0.00 0.00 0.00 -66.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 66.66 45.51
3 9.91 3.74 0.00 4 -9.91 -3.74 0.00
Problem No. 9
OBJECTIVE: To find the maximum moment due to lateral joint loads in a 1x2 bay plane frame.
REFERENCE: McCormack, J. C., Structural Analysis, Intext Educational Publishers, 3rd edition, 1975, page 388, example 22 - 7. PROBLEM: Determine the maximum moment in the frame.
GIVEN: E and I same for all members. COMPARISON: Moment, Kip-ft
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 487 of 493
MMax 176.40 178.01 0.91%
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE VERIFICATION PROB NO. 9 2. * 3. * MULTIPLE LEVEL PLANE FRAME WITH HORIZONTAL LOAD. 4. * REFERENCE 'STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS' BY JACK MCCORMACK, 5. * PAGE 388, PROB 22-7. ANSWER - MAX MOM IN MEMB 1 = 176.4 K-F 6. * 7. UNIT FT KIP 8. JOINT COORD 9. 1 0 0 0 5 0 40 0 2 ; 2 20 0 0 6 20 40 0 2 10. MEMB INCI 11. 1 1 3 2 ; 3 3 5 4 ; 5 3 4 ; 6 5 6 12. MEMB PROP 13. 1 TO 6 PRI AX .2 IZ .1 14. CONSTANT 15. E 4176E3 16. POISSON STEEL ALL 17. SUPPORT ; 1 2 FIXED 18. LOAD 1 HORIZONTAL LOAD 19. JOINT LOAD 20. 3 FX 20 ; 5 FX 10 21. PERFORM ANALYS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 6/ 6/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 3/ 3/ 9 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.4 MB 22. PRINT FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = PLANE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KIP FEET MEMBER LOAD JT 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 6 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 178.01 0.00 123.16 0.00 176.73 0.00 122.10 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 34.49 64.93 35.34 65.24 MOM-Y MOM-Z
12
1 -22.26 15.06 0.00 3 22.26 -15.06 0.00 2 22.26 14.94 0.00 4 -22.26 -14.94 0.00 3 -6.51 4.97 0.00 6.51 -4.97 0.00
4 6.51 5.03 0.00 6 -6.51 -5.03 0.00 3 9.91 -15.75 0.00 4 -9.91 15.75 0.00 5 5.03 -5.03 -6.51 0.00 6.51 0.00
0.00 -157.65 0.00 -157.44 0.00 -64.93 0.00 -65.24
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 488 of 493
23. FINISH
Problem No. 10
OBJECTIVE: To find the maximum axial force and moment due to load and moment applied at a joint in a space frame. REFERENCE: PROBLEM: Weaver Jr., W., Computer Programs for Structural Analysis, page 146, problem 8. Determine the maximum axial force and moment in the space structure.
GIVEN:
E = 30E3 ksi, AX = 11 in2 IX = 83 in4 IY = 56 in4 IZ = 56 in4
COMPARISON:
Solution
FMax (kips) MY,Max (kip-in) MZ,Max (kipin) Reference 1.47 84.04 95.319 STAAD 1.47 84.04 96.120 Difference None None Small
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION PROB NO. 10 2. * 3. * REFERENCE 'COMPUTER PROGRAMS FOR STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS' 4. * BY WILLIAM WEAVER JR. PAGE 146 STRUCTURE NO. 8.
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 489 of 493
5. * ANSWER - MAX AXIAL FORCE= 1.47 (MEMB 3) 6. * MAX BEND-Y= 84.04, MAX BEND-Z= 95.319 (BOTH MEMB 3) 7. * 8. UNIT INCH KIP 9. JOINT COORD 10. 1 0 120 0 ; 2 240 120 0 11. 3 0 0 0 ; 4 360 0 120 12. MEMB INCI 13. 1 1 2 ; 2 3 1 ; 3 2 4 14. MEMB PROP 15. 1 2 3 PRIS AX 11. IX 83. IY 56. IZ 56 16. CONSTANT ; E 30000. ALL 17. POISS .25 ALL 18. SUPPORT 19. 3 4 FIXED 20. LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 21. JOINT LOAD 22. 1 FX 2. ; 2 FY -1. ; 2 MZ -120. 23. PERFORM ANAL PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 4/ 3/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 2/ 2/ 12 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 12 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS 12.0/ 38892.4 MB
24. PRINT ANALYSIS RESULT JOINT DISPLACEMENT (INCH RADIANS) -----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN ZROTAN 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 0.22267 0.22202 0.00000 0.00000 0.00016 -0.48119 0.00000 0.00000 -0.17182 -0.70161 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00255 -0.00802 0.00000 0.00000 0.00217 0.00101 0.00000 0.00000 -0.00213 -0.00435 0.00000 0.00000
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KIP INCH -----------------
STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE MOM-X 96.12 -11.72 MOM-Y MOM Z
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z 3 4 1 1 -1.10 -0.90 -0.43 1.43 0.22 -0.22 48.78 -17.97 123.08 47.25
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KIP INCH MEMBER LOAD JT MOM-Z 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 0.90 2 -0.90 3 1 AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y
-0.43 0.22 22.71 -17.97 -36.37 0.43 -0.22 -22.71 -34.18 -67.36 96.12 36.37
-0.43 1.10 0.22 -17.97 -48.78 0.43 -1.10 -0.22 17.97 22.71
2 1.47 4 -1.47
-0.71 -0.48 -37.02 15.69 -53.28 0.71 0.48 37.02 84.04 -95.32
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 490 of 493
Problem No. 11
OBJECTIVE: A rigid bar is suspended by two copper wires and one steel wire. Find the stresses in the wires due to a rise in temperature. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., 3rd edition, 1956, page 30, problem 9. PROBLEM: Assuming the horizontal member to be very rigid, determine the stresses in the copper and steel wires if the temperature rise is 10 F.
GIVEN:
steel = 70E-7 in/in/F, copper = 92E-7 in/in/F AX = 0.1 in2 MODELLING HINT: Assume a large moment of inertia for the horizontal rigid member and distribute of the concentrated load as uniform. COMPARISON: Stress (), psi Solution Theory STAAD Difference Steel 19695 19698 Small Copper 10152 10151 Small
Esteel = 30E6 psi, Ecopper = 16E6 psi
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= *
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 491 of 493
* * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD PLANE VERIFICATION PROB NO 11 2. * 3. * THIS EXAMPLE IS TAKEN FROM 'STRENGTH OF MATERIALS' BY 4. * TIMOSHENKO (PART 1), PAGE 30, PROB 9. 5. * THE ANSWERS ARE 19700 PSI AND 10200 PSI. 6. * 7. UNIT INCH POUND 8. JOINT COORD 9. 1 0. 20. ; 2 5. 20. ; 3 10. 20. 10. 4 0. 0. ; 5 5. 0. ; 6 10. 0. 11. MEMB INCI 12. 1 1 4 3 ; 4 4 5 5 13. MEMB PROP 14. 1 2 3 PRI AX 0.1 ; 4 5 PRI AX 1. IZ 100. 15. CONSTANT ; E 30E6 MEMB 2 4 5 16. E 16E6 MEMB 1 3 17. POISSON 0.15 ALL 18. ALPHA 92E-7 MEMB 1 3 ; ALPHA 70E-7 MEMB 2 19. MEMB TRUSS ; 1 2 3 20. SUPPORT ; 1 2 3 PINNED 21. LOADING 1 VERT LOAD + TEMP LOAD 22. MEMB LOAD ;4 5 UNI Y -400. 23. TEMP LOAD ; 1 2 3 TEMP 10. 24. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 6/ 5/ 3 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 3/ 3/ 10 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.7 MB ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 1 EQN.NO. 1
12
LOADS APPLIED OR DISTRIBUTED HERE FROM ELEMENTS WILL BE IGNORED. THIS MAY BE DUE TO ALL MEMBERS AT THIS JOINT BEING RELEASED OR EFFECTIVELY RELEASED IN THIS DIRECTION. ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 2 EQN.NO. 2 ZERO STIFFNESS IN DIRECTION 6 AT JOINT 3 EQN.NO. 3 ***WARNING - INSTABILITY AT JOINT 6 DIRECTION = FX PROBABLE CAUSE SINGULAR-ADDING WEAK SPRING K-MATRIX DIAG= 6.0000004E+03 L-MATRIX DIAG= 0.0000000E+00 EQN NO ***NOTE - VERY WEAK SPRING ADDED FOR STABILITY
10
**NOTE** STAAD DETECTS INSTABILITIES AS EXCESSIVE LOSS OF SIGNIFICANT DIGITS DURING DECOMPOSITION. WHEN A DECOMPOSED DIAGONAL IS LESS THAN THE BUILT-IN REDUCTION FACTOR TIMES THE ORIGINAL STIFFNESS MATRIX DIAGONAL, STAAD PRINTS A SINGULARITY NOTICE. THE BUILT-IN REDUCTION FACTOR IS 1.000E-09 THE ABOVE CONDITIONS COULD ALSO BE CAUSED BY VERY STIFF OR VERY WEAK ELEMENTS AS WELL AS TRUE SINGULARITIES.
25. PRINT STRESSES MEMBER STRESSES --------------ALL UNITS ARE POUN/SQ INCH MEMB LD SECT 1 2 3 4 5 AXIAL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.8 3.8 0.0 BEND-Y BEND-Z COMBINED SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 .0 10150.8 T 1.00 10150.8 T 1 .0 19698.3 T 1.00 19698.3 T 1 .0 10150.8 T 1.00 10150.8 T 1 .0 1.00 1 .0 1.00 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 10150.8 0.0 10150.8 0.0 19698.3 0.0 19698.3 0.0 10150.8 0.0 10150.8 0.0 1522.6 3.8 1477.4 3.8 1477.4 0.0 1522.6
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 492 of 493
Problem No. 12
OBJECTIVE: To find the joint deflection and member stress due to a joint load in a plane truss. REFERENCE: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Part 1, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc., 3rd edition, 1956, page 10, problem 2. PROBLEM: Determine the vertical deflection at point A and the member stresses.
GIVEN: AX = 0.5 in2, E = 30E6 psi COMPARISON: Stress (), psi and Deflection (), in. Solution Theory STAAD Difference A 10000. 10000. None A 0.12 0.12 None
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD TRUSS VERIFICATION PROBLEM NO 12 2. * 3. * THIS EXAMPLE IS TAKEN FROM 'STRENGTH OF MATERIALS'
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 493 of 493
4. * (PART 1) BY TIMOSHENKO, PAGE 10 PROB 2. 5. * THE ANSWER IN THE BOOK , DEFLECTION = 0.12 INCH 6. * AND STRESS =10000 PSI 7. * 8. UNIT INCH POUND 9. JOINT COORD 10. 1 0. 0. ; 2 155.88457 -90. ; 3 311.76914 0. 11. MEMB INCI ; 1 1 2 2 12. MEMB PROP 13. 1 2 PRIS AX 0.5 14. CONSTANT 15. E 30E6 16. POISSON 0.15 ALL 17. SUPPORT ; 1 3 PINNED 18. LOAD 1 VERT LOAD 19. JOINT LOAD ; 2 FY -5000. 20. PERFORM ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 3/ 2/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 2 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 0 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 38892.5 MB 21. PRINT DISPLACEMENTS JOINT DISPLACEMENT (INCH RADIANS) -----------------STRUCTURE TYPE = TRUSS
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-ROTAN Z-ROTAN 1 2 3 1 1 1 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -0.12000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 22. PRINT STRESSES MEMBER STRESSES --------------ALL UNITS ARE POUN/SQ INCH MEMB LD SECT 1 2 AXIAL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 BEND-Y BEND-Z COMBINED SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 .0 10000.0 T 1.00 10000.0 T 1 .0 10000.0 T 1.00 10000.0 T
0.0 10000.0 0.0 10000.0 0.0 10000.0 0.0 10000.0
02/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 1 of 391
International Codes
This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the various international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as additional codes by Research Engineers. In other words, they do not come with the standard package. Hence, information on only some of the codes presented in this document may be actually pertinent to the individual user's package. This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference Manual and the STAAD Examples Manual. Effort has been made to provide some basic information about the analysis considerations and the logic used in the design approach. A brief outline of the factors affecting the design along with references to the corresponding clauses in the codes is also provided. Examples are provided at the appropriate places to facilitate ease of understanding of the usage of the commands and design parameters. Users are urged to refer to the Examples Manual for solved problems that use the commands and features of STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains references to the clauses in the code that govern the design, users are urged to consult the documentation of the code of that country for additional details on the design criteria.
International Codes
1A.1 Design Operations
Australian Codes - Concrete Design Per AS3600

STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design based on the Australian code AS3600-2001 Australian Standard-Concrete Structures.
International Codes

1A.2 Section Types for Concrete Design
The Following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed. For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
International Codes
1A.3 Member Dimensions
Concrete members which will be designed by the program must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. The following example shows the required input:
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
International Codes
1A.4 Design Parameters
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh7A1C.htm
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 2 of 391
The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 1A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
International Codes
1A.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration
Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated. One option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design moments. STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The PDELTA ANALYSIS will accommodate the requirements of the second- order analysis described by AS 3600, except for the effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads is negligible in a normal structural configuration. Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must be realized that the evaluation of slenderness effects is also by an approximate method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway. Considering all of the above information, a PDELTA ANALYSIS, as performed by STAAD may be used for the design of concrete members. However the user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
International Codes
1A.6 Beam Design
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13( e.g. 0.,.1,.2,.25,.3,.4,.5,.6,.7,.75,.8,.9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes. Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections are designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per AS 3600. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
Design for Flexure
Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design is performed at 13 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 3 of 391
International Codes
1A.7 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by AS 3600 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD.
International Codes
1A.8 Slab/Wall Design

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2, and Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, MAXMAIN, MINMAIN and CLEAR listed in Table 1A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 1A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 4 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 5 of 391
International Codes
Australian Codes - Steel Design Per AS 4100-1998
1B.1 General This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the specifications recommended by Standards Australia for structural steel design (AS 4100) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and limit state method of design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of AS 4100. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document. Analysis Methodology Member Property Specifications Built-in Steel Section Library Section Classification
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 6 of 391
Member Resistances Design Parameters Code Checking Member Selection Tabulated Results Of Steel Design
International Codes
1B.2 Analysis Methodology Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
International Codes
1B.3 Member Property Specifications For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
International Codes
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 7 of 391
UB Shapes These shapes are designated in the following way.
UC Shapes The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
Welded Beams Welded Beams are designated in the following way.
Welded Columns Welded Columns are designated in the following way.
Parallel Flange Channels Shown below is the syntax for assigning names of channel sections.
Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back to back double channel PFC230 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels. Angles Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 8 of 391
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness of 6 mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
Double Angles Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by means of input of the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections) Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube is as shown below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is available in the steel table. In these examples, members 1 to 5 consist of a 2X2X0.5 inch size tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of 10X5X0.1875 inch size tube section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10 times the width, and 16 times the thickness.
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections specified in this latter manner. Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections) Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe is as shown below. This method is meant for pipes whose property name is available in the steel table.
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this latter manner.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 9 of 391
International Codes
1B.5 Section Classification The AS 4100 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as compact, non-compact or slender depending upon their local buckling characteristics. This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes. Design is performed for all three categories of section as mentioned above.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 10 of 391
International Codes
1B.6 Member Resistances The member resistance is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in AS 4100. This depends on several factors such as members unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, support condition and so on. The procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistance is explained here. Axial Tension The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. Limit State of yielding of the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 1B.1) may specify the net section area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limit states per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2 respectively of AS 4100. Parameters FYLD, FU, Kt and NSF are applicable for these calculations. Axial Compression The compressive strength of members is determined based on Clause 6.1 of the code. It is taken as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity. Nominal section capacity is a function of form factor (Cl.6.2.2), net area of the cross section and yield stress of the material. The user through the use of the parameter NSC (see Table 1B.1) may specify the net section area. Note here, that this parameter is different from that corresponding to tension. The program automatically calculates form factor. Nominal member capacity is a function of nominal section capacity and member slenderness reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). Here user is required to supply the value of ab (Cl.6.3.3). Table 1B.1 gives the default value of this parameter (named ALB). The effective length for the calculation of compressive strength may be provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ, LY and LZ (see Table 1B.1). Bending The allowable bending moment of members is determined as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity (ref. Cl.5.1). The nominal section moment capacity is the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and is expressed as the product of yield stress of material and effective section modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The effective section modulus is a function of section type i.e. compact, non-compact or slender. The nominal member capacity depends on overall flexural-torsional buckling of the member (ref.Cl.5.3). Interaction of axial force and bending The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Here also the adequacy of a member is examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and member capacity (ref.Cl.8.4.5). If the summation of the left hand side of the equations, addressed by the above clauses, exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition. Shear Shear capacity of cross section is taken as the shear yield capacity. User may refer to Cl.5.11 in this context. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z-axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 11 of 391
International Codes
1B.7 Design Parameters The design parameters outlined in Table 1B.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 12 of 391
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 13 of 391
1B.8 Code Checking The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per AS 4100 requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at every twelfth point along the beam. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter.
Code checking can not be performed on composite and prismatic sections.
International Codes
1B.9 Member Selection The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Composite and prismatic sections cannot be selected.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 14 of 391
1B.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AS 4100 specification which governs the design.
International Codes
British Codes - Concrete Design Per BS8110
2A.1 Design Operations It is strongly recommended that the user should perform new concrete design using the RC Designer Module. The following is provided to allow old STAAD files to be run. STAAD has the capability of performing design of concrete beams, columns and slabs according to BS8110. The 1997 revision of the code is currently implemented. Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcement to resist the forces and moments.
International Codes
2A.2 Design Parameters The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to BS8110. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 2A.1 British Concrete Design-BS8110-Parameters
Parameter Name FYMAIN FYSEC FC MINMAIN MINSEC CLEAR MAXMAIN SFACE
Default
Description Value Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For slabs, it is for reinforcement in both directions) Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a. Applicable to shear bars in beams Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to shear reinforcement in beams Clearance of reinforcement measured from concrete surface to closest bar perimeter. Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above. Face of support location at start of beam. (Only applicable for shear use MEMBER OFFSET for
*460 N/mm2 *460N/mm2 * 30N/mm2 8mm 8mm * 20mm 50mm *0.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 15 of 391
EFACE
*0.0
TRACK
0.0
MMAG
1.0
bending ) Face of support location at end of beam. (NOTE : Both SFACE & EFACE must be positive numbers.) 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. Column design gives no detailed results. 1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0 List of design sag/hog moments and corresponding required steel area at each section of member Factor by which column design moments are magnified
Table 2A.1 - British Concrete Design-BS8110-Parameters
Parameter Default Name NSECTION WIDTH DEPTH BRACE
Description Value 10 *ZD *YD 0.0 Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moment for beam design. The upper limit is 20. Width of concrete member. This value default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. Depth of concrete member. This value default is as provided as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. 0.0 = Column braced in both directions. 1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z direction only 2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y direction only 3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z directions Member length factor about local Y direction for column design. Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy -slabs only -500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate WOOD & ARMER moments for design. A= Skew angle considered in WOOD & ARMER equations where A is the angle in degrees. 0.0 = No serviceability check performed. 1.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were continuous. 2.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were simply supported. 3.0 = Perform serviceability
ELY ELZ SRA
1.0 1.0 0.0
SERV
0.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 16 of 391
* Provided in current unit system
check for beams as if they were cantilever beams.
International Codes
2A.3 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effects in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In this section, the code recognises that additional moments induced by deflection are present and states that these 'secondary' moments are accounted for by the design formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the method used in the design for concrete in STAAD. Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects of these second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the design. In a PDELTA analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the structure, the additional moments induced in the structure are calculated. These can be compared to those calculated using the formulation of BS8110.
International Codes
2A.4 Member Dimensions Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required input: UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES *RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300mm WIDE X 450mm DEEP 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300. *CIRCULAR COLUMN 300mm diameter 11 13 PR YD 300. * T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB) * - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP) 14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas ( AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition above.
International Codes
2A.5 Beam Design Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and locate the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is ten, unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed with cut-off lengths calculated to include required development length. Shear design as per BS8110 clause 3.4.5 has been followed and the procedure includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The program will scan from each end of the member and provide a total of two shear regions at each, depending on the change of shear distribution along the beam. If torsion is present, the program will also
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 17 of 391
consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4. A table of shear and/or combined torsion is then provided with critical shear. Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. Table 2A.2 shows a sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD. The following annotations apply to Table 2A.2 1) LEVEL 2) HEIGHT 3) BAR INFO 4) FROM 5) TO 6) ANCHOR (STA,END) Serial number of the bar centre which may contain one or more bar groups. Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its local y axis. Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and their size. Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcing bar. Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcing bar. States whether anchorage, either a hook or continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END). TABLE 2A.2- ACTUAL DESIGN OUTPUT BEAM N O. 2 DESIGN R E S U L T S - FLEXURE
LEN - 3854. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 300. X 600. mm LEVEL HEIGHT mm BAR INFO FROM mm TO mm ANCHOR STA END
1 29. 6- 8 MM 0. 3854. YES YES CRITICAL POS MOMENT = 55.31 KN-M AT 1927. mm, LOAD 3 REQD STEEL = 261.mm2, ROW = 0.0014, ROWMX= 0.0400, ROWMN = 0.0013 MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING = 189./ 33./ 40. mm 2 565. 6- 8 MM 0. 3854. YES YES CRITICAL NEG MOMENT = 55.31 KN-M AT 1927. mm, LOAD 4 2, ROW = 0.0014, ROWMX= 0.0400, ROWMN = 0.0013 REQD STEEL = 261.mm MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING = 189./ 33./ 40. mm BEAM N O. 2 DESIGN R E S U L T S - SHEAR
PROVIDE SHEAR AND TORSIONAL LINKS AS FOLLOWS FROM - TO SHEAR TORSN LOAD LINK NO. SPACING mm C/C mm kN kNm S T SIZE S T S+T S T S+T END 1 1156 84.4 12 4 2 8 mm 3 5 9 335 199 116 2697 END 2 86.6 12 3 2 8 mm 3 5 9 335 199 116 EXTRA PERIPHERAL LONGITUDINAL TORSION STEEL: 402 mm2 EVENLY DISTRIBUTED * TORSIONAL RIGIDITY SHOULD CONFORM TO CL.2.4.3 - BS8110 *
International Codes
2A.6 Column Design Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load and is displayed. The requirements of BS8110 Part 1 - section 3.8 are followed, with the user having control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as described in table 2A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is short or slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial bending, the recommendations of 3.8.4.5 of the code are considered. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative result in certain cases. Table 2A.3 shows typical column design results. Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load case.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 18 of 391
TABLE 2A.3 -COLUMN DESIGN OUTPUT COLUMN No. 1 DESIGN RESULTS FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM2 RECT SIZE - 300. X 600. MM, AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 875. SQ. MM. BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION EACH END 8 12 MM 0.486 3 (ARRANGE COLUMN REINFORCEMENTS SYMMETRICALLY)
International Codes
BRACED /SHORT in z E.L.z = 4500 mm ( 3.8.1.3 & 5 ) BRACED /SLENDER in y E.L.y = 4500 mm ( 3.8.1.3 & 5 ) END MOMS. MZ1 = 1 MZ2 = 25 MY1 = 53 MY2 = 40 SLENDERNESS MOMTS. KNM: MOMZ = 0 MOMY = 2 DESIGN LOADS KN METER: MOM. = 64 AXIAL LOAD = 84 DESIGNED CAP. KN METER: MOM. = 64 AXIAL CAP.= 187
2A.7 Slab Design Slabs are designed to BS8110 specifications. To design a slab, it must first be modelled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with section 5.51.3 of the Technical Reference Manual. A typical example of element design output is shown in Table 2A.4. The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement ( Fig. 4.1 ). The following parameters are those applicable to slab design: 1. FYMAIN 2. FC 3. CLEAR 4. SRA - Yield stress for all reinforcing steel - Concrete grade - Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on both surfaces. - Parameter which denotes the angle of the required transverse reinforcement relative to the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of WOOD & ARMER design moments.
Other parameters, as shown in Table 2A.1 are not applicable. WOOD & ARMER equations. Ref: R H WOOD CONCRETE 1968 (FEBRUARY) If the default value of zero is used for the parameter SRA, the design will be based on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce WOOD & ARMER moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the element local x-axis to the reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior face. Typical output is as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 19 of 391
TABLE 2A.4 -ELEMENT DESIGN OUTPUT ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS. PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS: FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD (mm2/m) (kN-m/m) (mm2/m) (kN-m/m) WOOD & ARMER RESOLVED MOMENTS FOR ELEMENT: 13 UNITS: METER KN LOAD MX MY MXY MX* MY*/Ma* ANGLE 1 0.619 0.249 0.000 2.226 1.855 30.000 TOP 1 0.619 0.249 0.000 0.000 0.000 30.000 BOTT 3 0.437 0.184 -0.007 1.586 1.358 30.000 TOP 3 0.437 0.184 -0.007 0.000 0.000 30.000 BOTT 13 TOP : 195. 2.23 / 1 195. 1.86 / 1 BOTT : 195. 0.00 / 3 195. 0.00 / 3
International Codes
2A.7 Shear Wall Design Purpose Design of shear walls in accordance with BS 8110 has been added to the features of the program. Description The program implements the provisions of BS 8110 for the design of shear walls. It performs in-plane shear, compression, as well as in-plane and out-of-plane bending design of reinforcing. The shear wall is modeled by a single or a combination of Surface elements. The use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information. The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for user specified number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is 10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) reinforcing and the link required due to out-of-plane shear. General format: START SHEARWALL DESIGN CODE BRITISH FYMAIN f1 FC f2 HMIN f3 HMAX f4 VMIN f5 VMAX f6 EMIN f7 EMAX f8
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 20 of 391
LMIN f9 LMAX f10 CLEAR f11 TWOLAYERED f12 KSLENDER f13 DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list END The following table explains parameters used in the shear wall design command block above.
The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the shear wall design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 21 of 391
Notes 1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation. 2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command. 3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the line 2 TO 5 GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 22 of 391
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively. 5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For British code the parameter is BRITISH. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear wall components. Technical Overview The program implements provisions of section 3.9 of BS 8110:Part 1:1997 and relevant provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The wall is designed as unbraced reinforced wall. The following steps are performed for each of the horizontal sections of the wall set using the SURFACE DIVISION command (see Description above). Checking of slenderness limit The slenderness checking is done for out-of-plane direction. For out-of-plane direction, the wall is assumed to be simply supported. Hence, the provisions of clause 3.9.3.2.2 and 3.9.4.2 are applicable. The default effective height is 1.5 times the clear height. User can change the effective height. The limit for slenderness is as per table 3.23 for unbraced wall, which is taken as 30. Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall force output) Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and carrying loads to the foundation. Extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension (concentrated) reinforcement distance, d, is taken as 0.8 horizontal length of the wall. Flexural design of the wall is carried out in accordance with the provisions of clause no. 3.4.4. The flexural (concentrated vertical ) reinforcing is located at both ends (edges) of the length of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal length on each side. This length is inclusive of the thickness of the wall. Minimum reinforcements are according to table 3.25. Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output) Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2. Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8. The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into consideration the effect of axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and checked against the minimum area as per clause no. 3.12.7.4. Design for compression and out-of-plane vertical bending (denoted by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force output) The wall panel is designed as simply supported (at top and bottom), axially loaded with out-of-plane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections occurring at mid-height. Design is done as per clause no. 3.8.4 for axially loaded column with uni-axial bending. The minimum reinforcement percentage is as per table 3.25. The maximum reinforcement percentage of vertical reinforcement is as per clause no. 3.12.6.3. Links if necessary are calculated as per the provisions of clause 3.12.7.5. Design for out-of-plane shear (denoted by Qy in the shear wall force output) The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The design shear stress is calculated as per 3.4.5.2 and shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per table 3.8 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7 and the provisions of clause 3.12.7.5. Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall force output)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 23 of 391
The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane shear are checked against the whole section subjected to out-of-plane bending and axial load. The axial load in this case is the in-plane shear. The section is again designed as axially loaded column under uni-axial bending as per the provisions of clause 3.8.4. Extra reinforcement in the form of horizontal bars, if necessary, is reported. Shear Wall Design With Opening The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are available for user selected locations. Description Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall panels. 1. Shear wall set-up Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of four edges of the opening(s).
where:
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-to-node segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the SET DIVISION command). Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
where: xd yd Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface where output is requested. - number of divisions along X axis, - number of divisions along Y axis.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 24 of 391
The output is provided for sections located between division segments. For example, if the number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the center of the edge). 2. Stress/force output printing Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall. The general format of the command is as follows:
where :
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered. Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If command AT is omitted, output is provided for all sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number of sections will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. If the BETWEEN command is omitted, the output is generated based on full cross-section width. 3. Definition of wall panels Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:
where: i j ptype x1 y1 z1 (...) - ordinal surface number, - ordinal panel number, - panel type, one of: WALL, COLUMN, BEAM - coordinates of the corners of the panel
4. Shear wall design The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 25 of 391
Parameter TRACK specifies how detailed the design output should be: 0 - indicates a basic set of results data (default), 1 - full design output will be generated. Note: If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted bars. b. Panels have been defined.
Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section located at a distance c from the start of the panel.
International Codes
British Codes - Steel Design Per BS5950:2000

2B.1 General The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of limit state design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit state are recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built into the program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual design process. See section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these sections. In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees, composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes and angles, there is a provision for user provided tables. STAAD.Pro 2006, has introduced the additional option to design tapered I shaped (wide flange) beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See section 2B.13 for a complete description. Single Angle Sections Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 we must consider four
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 26 of 391
axes; two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. In a TRACK 2.0 design output, the Buckling Calculations displays results for the v-v, a-a and b-b axes. The effective length for the v-v axis, L vv , is taken as the LVV parameter or LY * KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see section 2B6.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY * KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ * KZ. The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or RA specification and is connected by its longer leg, i.e. a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg.
International Codes
2B.2 Analysis Methodology Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
International Codes

2B.3 Member Property Specifications For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
International Codes
2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 27 of 391
Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the builtin steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available: Universal Beams, Columns And Piles All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following examples illustrate the designation scheme. 20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54 33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287 100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186 Rolled Steel Joists Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with the weight omitted. In those cases where two joists have the same specifications but different weights, the lighter section should be specified with an "A" at the end. 10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127 1 2 TA ST JO127X114A Channel Sections All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may be used with the weight omitted. 10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102 55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76 Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter "D" in front of the section name will specify a double channel, e.g. D CH102X51, D CH203X89 etc. 51 52 53 TA D CH152X89 70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5. (specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units) Tee Sections Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the universal beam shapes from which they are cut. For example, 54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22 (tee cut from UB254X102X22) Angles All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or reversed angle, RA specification. Note, however, that only angles specified with an RA specification can be designed. The standard angle section is specified as follows: 15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18 This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V axis specified in the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 28 of 391
steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used. 35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18 Double Angles Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example, 14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5 23 27 TASDUA80X60X6 "SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle sections. Note that if the section is defined from a Double Angle User Table, then the section properties must be defined with an 11 th value which defines the radius of gyration about an individual sections principal v-v axis (See Technical Reference Manual, 5.19 User Steel Table Specification) Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections) To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP followed by the numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation. 10 15 TA ST PIP213.2 (specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness) Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example, 1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 (specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units) Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used. Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections) Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:
Example: 15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0 Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by any table designations. 6 TA ST TUBE DT8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 (a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units) Note that only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections specified this way.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 29 of 391
International Codes

2B.5 Member Capacities The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic moment of the section. This is a significant departure from the standard practice followed in BS449, in which the limiting condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme fibres of a given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as the basic measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to the influence of local buckling on moment capacity. To assist this, sections are classified as either Class 1, plastic, Class 2, compact, Class 3, semi-compact or Class 4, slender, which governs the decision whether to use the plastic or the elastic moment capacity. The section classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for both hot rolled and built up sections. In addition, for slender sections, BS5950 recommends the use of a 'stress reduction factor' to reduce the design strength. This factor is again a function of the geometry of the section and is automatically determined by STAAD for use in the design process. Axial Tension In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the effective area as outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member per this procedure, based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1 ), proceeding with member selection or code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness limitations for tension members. Compression Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the member is greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is determined according to the compressive strength, which is a function of the slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behaviour. Based on data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Annex C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson constant ( representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength. A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members are no longer required to be checked for slenderness limitations, however, this option can be included by specifying a MAIN parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still applied on double angles checked as battened struts as per clause 4.7.9. Axially Loaded Members With Moments In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the member must be calculated about both principal axes and all axial forces must be taken into account. If the section is plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities will constitute the basic moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. For semi-compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact sections with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 30 of 391
accommodate the shear loads. The STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates the procedure outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate moment capacities of the section. For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity. For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction formulae must be satisfied Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the Member Buckling Resistance check (4.8.3.3 ). Three types of approach for the member buckling resistance check have been outlined in BS5950:2000 - the simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2) and Annex I1 for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the more appropriate criteria can be used. Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m x m y and m yx , can be specified by the user or calculated by the program. Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial forces are checked using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also carries out cross checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic sections may be more critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the presence of moments. Shear Load A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the section is greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the procedure outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if appropriate, considering the appropriate shear area for the section specified. Lateral Torsional Buckling Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used in BS5950, members are likely to experience relatively large deflections. This effect, coupled with lateral torsional buckling, may result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence, lateral torsional buckling must be considered carefully. The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has been incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this procedure, for a member subjected to moments about the major axis, the 'equivalent uniform moment' on the section must be less than the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance moment, the procedure outlined in Annex B.2 has been implemented for all sections with the exception of angles. In Annex B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function of the elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent slenderness, which are calculated within the program; and the equivalent moment factor, m LT , which is determined as a function of the loading configuration and the nature of the load ( stabilizing, destabilizing, etc ). R. H. S Sections - Additional Provisions Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I. recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In such cases, the following expressions are used to calculate the reduced plastic moduli: Srx = (A*A/4(B-t))(1-n) [ 2D(B-t)/A + n-1 ] for n>= 2t(D-2t)/A Sry = (A*A/4(D-t))(1-n) [ 2B(D-t)/A + n-1 ] for n>= 2t(B-2t)/A
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 31 of 391
International Codes
2B.6 Design Parameters Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5950 are listed in table 2B.1 along with their default values. The following items should be noted with respect to their use. 1. (PY Steel Design Strength ) The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for an entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for a particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and particular element considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and the program should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate value. 2. (UNL, LY and LZ - Relevant Effective Length) The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ (which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even though they are often the same values. The former relates to compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for compression checks. 3. (TRACK - Control of Output Formats ) When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0 or 2.0, member capacities will be printed in design related output (code check or member selection) in kilonewtons per square metre. TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a different load list to the main code check. The members that are to be checked must have the parameters, DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 set. An example of each TRACK setting follows:TRACK 0.0 OUTPUT --------------------------STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) ******************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS METR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ================================================================= 1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS 86.72 C BS-4.8.3.2 0.00 0.036 -22.02 3 4.50 TABLE
--------------------------------TRACK 1.0 OUTPUT --------------------------STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) ******************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS METR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ================================================================= 1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3
TABLE
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 32 of 391
86.72 C
0.00
-22.02
4.50
CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 MCZ= 1141.9 MCY= 120.4 PC= 3451.5 PT= 5739.9 MB= 1084.1 PV= 1597.5 BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS m AND n : m = 1.000 n = 1.000 PZ= 5739.90 FX/PZ = 0.02 MRZ= 1141.9 MRY= 120.4
TRACK 2.0 OUTPUT --------------------------MEMBER TABLE
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) *************************** RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ FX MY BS-4.3.6 0.00 RATIO/ MZ 0.902 585.41 LOADING/ LOCATION 100 0.00
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
=================================================================== 1 ST UB533X210X92 PASS 0.00 MATERIAL DATA Grade of steel Modulus of elasticity Design Strength (py) = S 275 = 205 kN/mm2 = 275 N/mm2
===================================================================
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm) Member Length = 325.00 Net Area = 117.00 Major axis Moment of inertia Plastic modulus Elastic modulus Shear Area : : : : 55229.996 2360.000 2072.031 58.771 Minor axis 2389.000 356.000 228.285 53.843 Gross Area = 117.00
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950-1/2000 Section Class : PLASTIC Major axis Moment Capacity Shear Capacity : : 649.0 649.0 969.7 Reduced Moment Capacity : Minor axis 94.2 97.9 888.4
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m) (axis nomenclature as per design code) LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m): 649.00, LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm): mLT = 1.00 : mx = 1.00 : my = 1.00 : myx = 1.00 Mlt = 585.41 : Mx = 585.41 : My = 0.00 : My = 0.00 CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m): CLAUSE BS-4.2.3-(Y) BS-4.3.6 BS-4.8.3.2 BS-4.8.3.3.1 BS-4.8.3.3.2 Annex I.1 RATIO 0.329 0.902 0.814 1.027 0.902 0.902 LOAD 100 100 100 100 100 100 FX 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 VY 292.3 292.3 68.0 VZ 0.0 MZ 585.4 585.4 585.4 585.4 585.4 MY 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.001
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 33 of 391
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
_________________________ 4. (MX, MY, MYX and MLT Equivalent Moment Factors) The values for the equivalent moment factors can either be specified directly by the user as a positive value between 0.4 and 1.0 for MX, MY and MYX and 0.44 and 1.0 for MLT. The program can be used to calculate the values for the equivalent moment factors by defining the design member with a GROUP command (see the Technical Reference Manual section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by Specification of GROUPS). The nodes along the beam can then be defined as the location of restraint points with J settings. Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the upper flange restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower flange restrained (negative local Y) with a L setting. For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single continuous member as shown below:
To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called MainBeam: START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _MainBeam 11 2 38 12 3 END GROUP DEFINITION Note that this can be done in the GUI by selecting the beams and clicking on the menu option: Tools | Create New Group& Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that:Joint Joint Joint Joint Joint Joint 1 2 3 4 5 6 = = = = = = Node Node Node Node Node Node 3 1 33 14 7 2
a) Consider MX, MY and MYX
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 34 of 391
Say that this member has been restrained in its major axis (local Y) only at the ends. In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the ends and also at node number 33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling, it has only been retrained at its ends. Hence:For the major axis, local Y axis:MX _MainBeam J1 J6 For the minor axis, local Z axis:MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6 For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis:MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6 b) Consider MLT Say that this member has been restrained at its ends against lateral torsional buckling and the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and only the lower flange at node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6 To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L y at joint 14:MY _groupname J1 J4 J6 5. (LEG - Table 25 BS5950 for Fastener Control) The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member. To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member. The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950 connection definition:Clause (a) - 2 bolts short leg 4.7.10.2 Single Angle long leg (b) - 1 bolt short leg long leg 4.7.10.3 Double Angle (a) - 2 bolts short leg long leg (b) - 1 bolt short leg long leg (c) - 2 bolts long leg short leg (d) - 1 bolt long leg short leg (a) - 2 or more rows of bolts (b) - 1 row of bolts (a) - 2 or more rows of LEG 1.0 3.0 0.0 2.0 3.0 7.0 2.0 6.0 1.0 5.0 0.0 4.0 1.0 0.0 1.0
4.7.10.4 Channels
4.7.10.5
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 35 of 391
Tee Sections
bolts (b) - 1 row of bolts
0.0
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:La = KY * KY Lb = KZ * LZ The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength p c for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength p c for the stronger principal axis. Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used. For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh value, r vv , should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair. 6. (SWAY Sway Loadcase) This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway load case in the context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to represent the k amp M s mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add the forces from this load case to the forces of the other load case it is designed for. Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a separate load case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:SWAY (load case number) ALL MEMBER (member list) _(group name)
e.g. SWAY 5 MEM 1 to 10 SWAY 6 _MainBeams
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 36 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 37 of 391
* current units must be considered. **For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles. (note there was an NT parameter in STAAD.Pro 2005 build 1003 which is now automatically calculated during the design as it is load case dependant) NOTES: 1) "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. Note that the "Deflection Length" for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be "1" and DJ2 should be "4". EXAMPLE : PARAMETERS DFF 300. ALL DJ1 1 ALL DJ2 4 ALL 2) If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 38 of 391
3) The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel design.
International Codes

2B.7 Design Operations STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as individual components of an analysed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are: Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load cases. Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with the list of members. These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements.
International Codes

2B.8 Code Checking The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per BS5950. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking. When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code (like any of the BS5950 specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition occurs). Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual or any of the user defined sections in section 5.19 with two exception GENERAL and ISECTION. In BS5950, these will not be considered for design along with PRISMATIC sections, which are also not acceptable.
International Codes

2B.9 Member Selection STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as defined in section 2B.8 - CODE CHECKING. Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 39 of 391
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic or as above limitations for code checking.
International Codes

2B.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) MEMBER TABLE refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. CRITICAL COND design. RATIO LOADING refers to the section of the BS5950 code which governs the
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. provides the load case number, which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern. TRACK If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will print the allowable bending capacities in compression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in compression (PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design results as shown in section 2B.9.
h) i)
International Codes

2B.11 Plate Girders Sections will be considered for the Plate Girder checks (BS 5950 Section 4.4) if d/t > 70 e for rolled sections or d/t >62 e for welded sections. The parameter SBLT should be used to identify sections as rolled or welded; see the parameter list for more information. If the plate girder has intermediate stiffeners, the spacing is set with the PNL parameter. These are then used to check against the code clauses 4.4.3.2 - Minimum web thickness for serviceability and 4.4.3.3 - Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange buckling. The following printout is then included if a TRACK 2.0 output is selected:Shear Buckling check is required: Vb = 1070 kN : qw d = 900 mm : t = 10 mm : a = = 118 N/mm2 200 mm : pyf = 275 N/mm2
BS-4.4.3.2 status = PASS
: BS-4.4.3.3 status = PASS
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause 4.4.5.2 - Simplified
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 40 of 391
method and the result is included in the ratio checks.
International Codes

2B.12 Composite Sections Sections that have been defined as acting compositely with a concrete flange either from a standard database section using the CM option, or from a modified user WIDE FLANGE database with the additional composite parameters, cannot be designed with BS5950:2000.
International Codes
2B.13 Design of Tapered Beams Design Procedure Sections will be checked as tapered members provided that are defined either as a Tapered I section, e.g.
UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTY 1 TO 5 TAPERED 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4
or from a USER table, e.g.

START USER TABLE TABLE 1 UNIT CM ISECTION 1000mm_TAPER 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4 0 0 0 750mm_TAPER 75 2.5 50 25 4 25 4 0 0 0 END
The user must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange using the parameter UNL. The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter. The beam is designed is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional Buckling check which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check. Design Equations
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 41 of 391
A beam defined with tapered properties as defined above will be checked as a regular wide flange (e.g. UB or UC), except that the following is used in place of clause 4.3.6, the lateral torsional buckling check. Check Moment for Taper Members as per clause G.2.2 The following criterion is checked at each defined check position in the length of the member defined by the BEAM parameter.
Where Fc is the longitudinal compression at the check location; M bi is the buckling resistance moment M b from 4.3.6 for an equivalent slenderness l TB , see G.2.4.2, based on the appropriate modulus S, S eff , Z or Z eff of the cross-section at the point i considered; is the moment about the major axis acting at the point i considered; M xi Pc is the compression resistance from 4.7.4 for a slenderness TC, see G.2.3, based on the properties of the minimum depth of cross-section within the segment length Ly. G.2.3 Slenderness lTC lTC = yl In which:
= Ly/ry Where a hs Ly ry x is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint, is the distance between the shear centers of the flanges; is the length of the segment; is the radius of gyration for buckling about the minor axis; torsional index
G.2.4.2 Equivalent slenderness lTB for Taper members lTB = cntntl In which for a two-flange haunch:
Where
is the taper factor, see G.2.5;
G.2.5 Taper factor For an I-section with D 1.2B and x 20 the taper factor c should be obtained as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 42 of 391
c=1+ D max is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure G.3; Dmin is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure G.3; x is the torsional index of the minimum depth cross-section, see 4.3.6.8 Otherwise c is taken as 1.0
International Codes
British Codes - Steel Design Per BS5950
2B1.1 General This code has been withdrawn by the British Standards, but has been retained in STAAD.Pro for comparative purposes only. The design philosophy embodied in BS5950 is built around the concept of limit state design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit state are recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation of BS5950, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built into the program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual design process. See section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these sections. In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees, composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes and angles, there is a provision for user provided tables.
International Codes
2B1.2 Analysis Methodology Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
International Codes
2B1.3 Member Property Specifications For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 43 of 391
International Codes
2B1.4 Built-In Steel Section Library The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the builtin steel section library may be obtained by using the command MEMBER PROPERTY BRITISH just before the definition of the member properties and the command PRINT ENTIRE TABLE following the definition of all the member properties. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available: Universal Beams, Columns And Piles All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following examples illustrate the designation scheme. 20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54 33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287 100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186 Rolled Steel Joists Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with the weight omitted. In those cases where two joists have the same specifications but different weights, the lighter section should be specified with an "A" at the end. 10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127 1 2 TA ST JO127X114A Channel Sections All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may be used with the weight omitted. 10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102 55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76 Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter "D" in front o the section name will specify a double channel, e.g. D CH102X51, D CH203X89 etc. 51 52 53 TA D CH152X89 70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5. (specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units) Tee Sections
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 44 of 391
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the universal beam shapes from which they are cut. For example, 54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22 Angles All equal and unequal angles are available for input. Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows: 15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18 This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V axis specified in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used. 35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18 Double Angles Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example, 14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5 23 27 TASDUA80X60X6 "SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle sections. Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections) To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP followed by the numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation. 10 15 TA ST PIP213.2 (specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness) (tee cut from UB254X102X22)
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example, 1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 (specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units) Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used. Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections) Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:
Example: 15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0 Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by any table designations. 6 TA ST TUBE DT8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 45 of 391
0.5 length units. Note that only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections specified this way.
International Codes
2B1.5 Member Capacities The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic moment of the section. This is a significant departure from the standard practice followed in BS449, in which the limiting condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme fibres of a given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as the basic measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to the influence of local buckling on moment capacity. To assist this, sections are classified as either plastic, compact, semicompact or slender, which governs the decision whether to use the plastic or the elastic moment capacity. The section classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for both hot rolled and built up sections. In addition, for slender sections, BS5950 recommends the use of a 'stress reduction factor' to reduce the design strength. This factor is again a function of the geometry of the section and is automatically determined by STAAD for use in the design process. Axial Tension In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the effective area as outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member per this procedure, based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1 ), proceeding with member selection or code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness limitations for tension members. Compression Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the member is greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is determined according to the compressive strength which is a function of the slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behaviour. Based on data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Appendix C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson constant ( representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength. In addition to the compression resistance criteria, compression members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of the use of the member ( main load resisting component, bracing member etc). In both the member selection and the code checking process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with the other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member. Axially Loaded Members With Moments In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the member must be calculated about both axes and all axial forces must be taken into account. If the section is plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities will constitute the basic moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. For semi-compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact sections with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to accommodate the shear loads. The STAAD implementation of
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 46 of 391
BS5950 incorporates the procedure outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate moment capacities of the section. For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity. For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction formulae must be satisfied local capacity check (4.8.3.2) and overall buckling check (section 4.8.3.3 ). Two types of approach for the overall buckling check have been outlined in BS5950 - the simplified approach and the more exact approach. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the more appropriate criteria be used. Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial forces are checked using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also carries out cross checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic sections may be more critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the presence of moments. Shear Load A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the section is greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the procedure outlined in section 4.2.3 and considering the appropriate shear area for the section specified. Lateral Torsional Buckling Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used in BS5950, members are likely to experience relatively large deflections. This effect, coupled with lateral torsional buckling, may result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence, lateral torsional buckling must be considered carefully. The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has been incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this procedure, for a member subjected to moments about the major axis, the 'equivalent uniform moment' on the section must be less than the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance moment, the procedure outlined in Appendix B.2 has been implemented for all sections with the exception of angles. In Appendix B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function of the elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent slenderness, which are calculated within the program; and the equivalent moment factor, m, and slenderness correction factor, n, which are determined as a function of the loading configuration and the nature of the load ( stabilizing, destabilizing, etc ). The user is allowed to control these values through the parameters CMM & CMN. If CMM is set to -1, the program automatically calculates the coefficient 'm'. Similarly parameter CMN may be used for the calculation of coefficient 'n'. BS5950 recommends the use of tables 15 & 16 for the calculation of coefficient 'n'. The parameter CMN may be set to -1 or -2 to instruct the program to obtain coefficient 'n' from table 15 or 16 respectively. If a positive value is provided for either CMN or CMM, the program will use this value directly in calculations. The default value for each of these parameters is 1.0 as shown in table 2B.1 of this document. It may be noted that BS5950 recommends the use of either 'm' or 'n' in lateral torsional buckling calculations. If both 'm' and 'n' are set to values less than 1 in error, the program will always reset CMN to 1 and over-ride the provided value. The following table illustrates the use of parameters 'm' and 'n'. PARAMETER VALUE CMM ANY POSITIVE VALUE -1 -2 STAAD ACTION Direct use of this value in calculations. Program calculates 'm' per BS5950 Calculate m for both axes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 47 of 391
CMN
ANY POSITIVE Direct use of this value in VALUE calculations. -1 Program calculates 'n' per BS5950 - Table 15 -2 Program calculates 'n' per BS5950 - Table 16
IMPORTANT NOTE: Note that if negative value options are chosen, lateral restraints should be modelled by nodes and the section command incorporated to find Mo. Failure to use the SECTION 0.5 command will cause the program to reset CMN to 1.0 and over-ride any value that may have been provided. In requesting 'n' to be calculated by the program by using a negative CMN value, the member properties must be British ( or British combined with user table sections). If other profiles such as European are being used then 'n' values are reset conservatively to 1.0 by the program. In the case of angles, section 4.3.8 of the code is followed. R. H. S Sections - Additional Provisions Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I. recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In such cases, the following expressions are used to calculate the reduced plastic moduli: Srx = (A*A/4(B-t))(1-n) [ 2D(B-t)/A + n-1 ] for n>= 2t(D-2t)/A Sry = (A*A/4(D-t))(1-n) [ 2B(D-t)/A + n-1 ] for n>= 2t(B-2t)/A
International Codes
2B1.6 Design Parameters Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5950 are listed in table 2B.1 along with their default values. The following items should be noted with respect to their use. 1. (PY - STEEL DESIGN STRENGTH ) The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for an entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 7 in which the design strength is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for a particular steel grade and particular element considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and the program should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate value. 2. (UNL, LY and LZ - relevant EFFECTIVE LENGTHS) The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY KZ ( which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even though they are often the same values. The former relates to compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for compression checks. 3. (CMN and CMM - Lateral torsional buckling coefficients) As per section 2B.7 of this manual CMM and CMN should not both be used in a given design. In such a case the program will reset CMN to 1.0 4. (TRACK - control of output formats ) When the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 or 2.0, member capacities will be printed in design related output
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 48 of 391
( code check or member selection ) in kilonewtons per square metre. An example of each follows. TRACK 0.0 OUTPUT --------------------------STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) ******************************
--------------------------------TRACK 1.0 OUTPUT --------------------------STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) ******************************
CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 4 MCZ= 1141.9 MCY= 120.4 PC= 3451.5 PT= 5739.9 MB= 1084.1 PV= 1597.5 BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS m AND n : m = 1.000 n = 1.000 PZ= 5739.90 FX/PZ = 0.02 MRZ= 1141.9 MRY= 120.4 TRACK 2.0 OUTPUT STAAD CODE CHECKING - (BSI ) --------------------------****************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS METR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ================================================================= 1 ST UB686X254X170 PASS BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3 86.72 C 0.00 -22.02 4.50 ================================================================= MATERIAL DATA Grade of steel = 43 Modulus of elasticity = 205 kN/mm2 Design Strength (py) = 265 N/mm2 Reduced = 232N/mm2 SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm) Member Length = 450.00 Gross Area = 216.60 Net Area = 216.60 z-axis y-axis Moment of inertia : 170147.000 6621.000 Plastic modulus : 5624.000 810.000 Elastic modulus : 4911.156 517.670 Shear Area : 109.122 100.470 Radius of gyration : 28.027 5.529 Effective Length : 450.000 450.000 DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950/1990 Section Class : SLENDER Squash Load : 5739.90 Axial force/Squash load : 0.015 z-axis
y-axis
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 49 of 391
Slenderness ratio (KL/r) Compression Capacity Tension Capacity Moment Capacity Reduced Moment Capacity Shear Capacity
: :
: : : :
16.1 5036.2 5739.9 1141.9 1141.9 1561.5
81.4 3451.5 5739.9 120.4 120.4 1597.5
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m) Lateral Torsional Buckling Moment (MB = 1084.1) co-efficients m & n : m =1.00 n =1.00, Effective Length =4.500 CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m): CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ BS-4.7 (C) 0.025 3 86.7 3.2 0.0 -22.0 BS-4.8.3.2 0.036 3 86.7 3.2 0.0 -22.0 BS-4.8.3.3.1 0.047 1 83.3 7.4 0.0 -27.6 BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.026 1 83.3 7.4 0.0 -27.6 BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.005 1 83.3 7.4 0.0 -27.6 BS-4.3 (LTB) 0.020 4 -86.7 3.2 0.0 22.0 Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design
MY 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
5. ( LEG - table 24/28 BS5950 for fastner control ) The LEG parameter follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table concerns the fastner restraint conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and channels for slenderness. The following values are available: Clause 4.7.10.2 (a) Single Angle, short leg (b) Single Angle, short leg (a) Single Angle, long leg (b) Single Angle, long leg (a) Double angle, short leg (b) Double angle, short leg (c) Double angle, long leg (d) Double angle, long leg (a) Double angle, long leg (b) Double angle, long leg (c) Double angle, short leg (d) Double angle, short leg (a) Channels, 2 or more rows (b) Channels, 1 row (a) Tee sections, 2 or more rows (b) Tee sections, 1 row 1.0 0.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 7.0 6.0 5.0 4.0 1.0 0.0 1.0 0.0
Clause 4.7.10.3
Clause 4.7.10.4 Clause 4.7.10.5
When defining member properties for single angles, the spec (manual ref: 5.20.1) should be provided as RA and not ST. See fig 1.6 of the Technical Reference Manual. Table 28 may be by-passed in favour of table 24 by using: 10 = Table 24 for equal angles or long legs of unequal angles 11 = Table 24 for short legs of unequal angles For single angles, LY and KY parameters should be provided relative to the raa axis while LZ and KZ are related to rbb. Lvv will be considered as the minimum of the KY*LY and KZ*LZ values. For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 table 28. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
Table 2B1.1 - British Steel Design BS5950:1990 - Parameters Description Parameter Default
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 50 of 391
Name KY KZ LY * LZ * UNF
UNL *
PY * NSF SGR
SBLT MAIN
CMM ! CMN ! TRACK
DMIN *
DMAX * RATIO
BEAM
K factor value in local y - axis. Usually, this is the minor axis. 1.0 K factor value in local z - axis. Usually, this is the major axis. Member Length Length in local y - axis (current units) to calculate (KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness ratio. Member Length Length in local z - axis (current units) to calculate (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness ratio. 1.0 Factor applied to unsupported length for Lateral Torsional Buckling effective length per section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950. Member Length Unsupported Length for calculating Lateral Torsional Buckling resistance moment section 4.3.7.5 of BS5950. Set according to steel Design Strength of steel grade (SGR) 1.0 Net section factor for tension members. 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360 0.0 = Grade 43 1.0 = Grade 50 2.0 = Grade 55 3.0 = As per GB 1591 16 Mn 0.0 0.0 = Rolled Section 1.0 = Built up Section 1.0 As per BS5950 4.7.3 1.0 = Main structural member (180) 2.0 = Secondary member. (250) 3.0 = Bracing etc (350) 1.0 Coefficient m for lateral torsional buckling. (see section 2B.5) 1.0 Coefficient n for lateral torsional buckling. (see section 2B.5) 0.0 = Suppress all member 0.0 capacity info. 1.0 = Print all member capacities. 2.0 = Print detailed design sheet. 4.0 = Deflection Check (separate check to main select / check code) 100.0cm Maximum allowable depth 0.0cm Minimum allowable depth 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual capacities. 0.0 = Design only for end 0.0 moments or those locations specified by the SECTION command. 1.0 = Calculate moments at 12th points along the member and use the maximum Mz value for design. Clause checks at one location 2.0 = Same as BEAM = 1.0 but additional checks are carried out for each end. 3.0 = Calculate moments at 12th points along the member. Clause checks at each location including
Value 1.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 51 of 391
the ends of the member. Design Code to follow. See section 5.47.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. 0.0 Values range from 0 - 12. See LEG section 2B.6.5 for details. The values correspond to table 24/28 of BS5950 for fastner conditions. Maximum of Lyy and Used in conjunction with LEG for LVV * Lzz Lvv as per BS5950 table 28 for (Lyy is a term used double angles, note 5. by BS5950) CB 1.0 = BS5950 per clause B.2.5 1.0 (continuous) to calculate Mb. 2.0 = To calculate Mbs (simple) as per Clause 4.7.7 as opposed to Mb. DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm. (Mandatory for allowable local deflection deflection check) Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point DJ1 of member for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note 1) DJ2 End Joint of member Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note 1) Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2 ESTIFF 0.0 1.0 = Pass if member passes EITHER clause. 1.0 = Pass if member passes BOTH clauses. 1.0 closed Weld Type, see AISC steel design WELD 1.0 = Welding on one side only 2.0 open (except for webs of wide flange and tee sections) 2.0 = Welding on both sides (except pipes and tubes) 0.0 2.0 = Elastic stress analysis TB 3.0 = Plastic stress analysis PNL * 0.0 Transverse stiffener spacing (a in Appendix H1) 0.0 = Infinity Any other value used in the calculations. Controls the sections to try during 0.0 SAME ** a SELECT process. 0.0 = Try every section of the same type as original 1.0 = Try only those sections with a similar name as original, e.g. if the original is an HEA 100, then only HEA sections will be selected, even if there are HEMs in the same table. ! CMN & CMM cannot both be provided. * current units must be considered. **For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles. CODE BS5950 NOTE:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 52 of 391
1) "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. Note that the "Deflection Length" for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be "1" and DJ2 should be "4". EXAMPLE : PARAMETERS DFF 300. ALL DJ1 1 ALL DJ2 4 ALL 2) If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local deflections will be measured from original member line. 3) The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel design.
International Codes
2B1.7 Design Operations STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as individual components of an analysed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are: Specify the load cases to be considered in the design. Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with the list of members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements.
International Codes
2B1.8 Code Checking The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per BS5950. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking. When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code (like any of the BS5950 specifications for compression, tension , shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition occurs). Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual or any of the user defined sections in section 5.19 with two exceptions ; GENERAL and ISECTION. In BS5950, these will not be considered for design along with PRISMATIC sections which are also not acceptable.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 53 of 391
International Codes
2B1.9 Member Selection STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as defined in section 2B.8 - CODE CHECKING. Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection can not be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic or as above limitations for code checking.
International Codes
2B1.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) MEMBER TABLE refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
refers to steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. refers to the section of the BS5950 code which governs the design.
CRITICAL COND RATIO LOADING
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. provides the load case number which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local zaxis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. LOCATION TRACK specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern. If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will print the allowable bending capacities in compression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in compression (PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design results as shown in section 2B.9.
h) i)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 54 of 391
International Codes
2B1.11 Plate Girders Plate girders may be considered for design in BS5950. The "py" used in the calculation of compressive strength is reduced by 20N/mm2 as per the code if parameter SBLT is set to 1.0. The code requires that for d/t >63E, the interaction checks be modified in order to check for shear buckling of the web. This is considered in STAAD ( versions 15.0 and over) following clause 4.4.4.2a and 4.4.4.3 of the code. The shear capacity is found from table 21 of the code and used in clause 4.4.5.3. For plate girders, clauses 4.4.2.2a and 4.4.2.3a are also considered. In order to account for these checks, the output has been modified to show these variations from the more common critical checks. An example is as follows, using TRACK 2.0, showing the bottom part of the output having been modified as follows: BS5950 Table 7<note 2>: d/t > 63E Web Is Checked For Shear Buckling d/t =101.7 qcr=191.9 N/mm2 d*t=14639 mm2 (4.4.5.3)Vcr= 2809.4 kN Flange =COMPACT Pyf=344 N/mm2 4.4.2.2 a=PASS 4.4.2.3 a=PASS Flange Ratio 4.4.4.2 (a) =0.20 L= 1 Web Ratio =0.05 L= 1 CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m): CLAUSE BS-4.8.3.3.2 BS-4.2.3-(Y) BS-4.3 (LTB) BS-4.4.5.3 BS-4.4.4.2 a RATIO LOAD 0.177 1 0.049 1 0.151 1 0.053 1 0.203 1 FX 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 VY VZ -150.0 0.0 150.0 0.0 -150.0 0.0 150.0 0.0 -150.0 0.0 MZ MY -1125.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0 -1125.0 0.0
International Codes
2B1.12 Composite Sections The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the standard sections definition - section 5.20.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. This is purely for analysis and for obtaining the right section properties. It uses the American requirement of 18 times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For more control with British sections two new options are available in user provided tables. 1. WIDE FLANGE COMPOSITE: Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE, 4 additional values can now be provided. The first is the width of concrete to the left of centre of the steel web (b1). The second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular ratio. The above values are accepted in the program by adding a '-' at the first position on the first line of data. The program now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described above. If (-) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2 breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate. 2. ISECTION: The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table. 3. EXAMPLE INPUT: UNIT CM WIDE FLANGE C45752 -66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223 150 150 30 10 ISECTION
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 55 of 391
PG9144 -92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730 40 40 12 1 The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and are available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite design IS NOT available in this portion of STAAD.
International Codes
British Codes - Design Per BS5400
2C.1 General Comments BS5400 is an additional code available from Research Engineers. It does not come as standard with British versions. The British Standard, BS5400 adopts the limit state design philosophy and is applicable to steel, concrete and composite construction. The code is in 10 parts covering various aspects of bridge design. The implementation of part 3, Code of practice for design of steel bridges, in STAAD is restricted in its scope to simply supported spans. It is assumed that the depth remains constant and both construction and composite stages of steel I-Sections can be checked. The following sections describe in more detail features of the design process currently available in STAAD.
International Codes
2C.2 Shape Limitations The capacity of sections could be limited by local buckling if the ratio of flange outstand to thickness is large. In order to prevent this, the code sets limits to the ratio as per clause 9.3.2. In the event of exceeding these limits, the design process will terminate with reference to the clause.
International Codes
2C.3 Section Class Sections are further defined as compact or non-compact. In the case of compact sections, the full plastic moment capacity can be attained. In the case of non compact sections, local buckling of elements may occur prior to reaching the full moment capacity and for this reason the extreme fibre stresses are limited to first yield. In STAAD, section types are determined as per clause 9.3.7 and the checks that follow will relate to the type of section considered.
International Codes
2C.4 Moment Capacity Lateral torsional buckling may occur if a member has unrestrained elements in compression. The code deals with this effect by limiting the compressive stress to a value depending on the slenderness parameter which is a modified form of the ratio Le/Ry. Le is the effective length governed by the provision of lateral restraints satisfying the requirements of clause 9.12.1. Once the allowable compressive stress is determined then the moment capacity appropriate to the section type can be calculated. STAAD takes the effective length as that provided by the user, defaulting to the length of the member during construction stage and as zero, assuming full restraint throughout, for the composite stage. The program then proceeds to calculate the allowable compressive stress based on appendix G7 from which the moment capacity is then determined.
International Codes
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh7A1C.htm 03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 56 of 391
2C.5 Shear Capacity The shear capacity, as outlined in clause is a function of the limiting shear strength, l, which is dependant on the slenderness ratio. STAAD follows the iterative procedure of appendix G8 to determine the limiting shear strength of the web panel. The shear capacity is then calculated based on the formula given under clause 9.9.2.2.
International Codes
2C.6 Design Parameters Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5400 are listed in table 2C.1. Depending on the value assigned to the 'WET' parameter, the users can determine the stage under consideration. For a composite design check, taking into consideration the construction stage, two separate analyses are required. In the first, member properties are non-composite and the WET parameter is set to 1.0 . In the second, member properties should be changed to composite and the WET parameter set to 2.0. Member properties for composite or non-composite sections should be specified from user provided tables (refer to section 5.19 of the manual for specification of user tables). Rolled sections, composite or non-composite, come under WIDE FLANGE section-type and built-up sections under ISECTION. When specifying composite properties the first parameter is assigned a negative value and four additional parameters provided giving details of the concrete section. See user table examples provided.
Table 2C.1 - BS5400 Design Parameters
Parameter Name UNL* PY* NSF SGR*
Default
Description Unsupported Length for calculating allowable compressive bending stress. Set according to Design Strength of steel SGR Net section factor for tension members. Steel Grade per BS4360 0.0 = Grade 43 1.0 = Grade 50 2.0 = Grade 55 0.0 = Rolled Section 1.0 = Built up Section 1.0 = Grade of concrete 30 N/mm2 2.0 = Grade of concrete 40 N/mm2 3.0 = Grade of concrete 50 N/mm2 0.0 = Wet stage with no data saved for composite stage. 1.0 = Wet stage with data saved for composite stage. 2.0 = Composite and wet stage combined. 3.0 = Composite stage only. 1.0 = Print all member capacities. 0.0 = suppress all member capacities. MUST BE CHANGED TO 1.0 FOR ALL RUNS Length to calculate slenderness
Value Member Length
1.0 0.0
SBLT MAIN
0.0 1.0
WET
0.0
TRACK BEAM LY*
1.0 0.0 Member Length
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 57 of 391
LZ* KY KZ STIFF
Member Length 1.0 1.0 1.0
ratio for bending about Y-axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for bending about Z-axis. K value for bending about Y-axis. Usually this is minor axis. K value for bending about Z-axis. Usually this is major axis. Factor of length for panel length in the shear calculation.
* Provided in current unit systems.
International Codes
2C.7 Composite Sections The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the standard sections definition - section 5.20.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. This is purely for analysis and for obtaining the right section properties. It uses the American requirement of 18 times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For more control with British sections two new options are available in user provided tables. 1. WIDE FLANGE COMPOSITE: Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE, 4 additional values can now be provided. The first is the width of concrete to the left of centre of the steel web (b1). The second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular ratio. The above values are accepted in the program by adding a '-' at the first position on the first line of data. The program now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described above. If (-) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2 breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate. 2. ISECTION: The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table. 3. EXAMPLE INPUT: UNIT CM WIDE FLANGE C45752 -66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223 150 150 30 10 ISECTION PG9144 -92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730 40 40 12 1 The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and are available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite design IS NOT available in this portion of STAAD.
International Codes
2D.1 General Comments BS8007 is an additional code available from Research Engineers. It does not come as standard with British versions.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 58 of 391
STAAD has the capability of performing concrete slab design according to BS8007. BS8007 provides recommendations for the design of reinforced concrete structures containing aqueous liquids. It is recommended that the design of the structure is carried out according to BS8110, unless modified by the recommendations given in BS8007. Please use the following in conjunction with Section 2A of this Manual - BS8110.
International Codes
2D.2 Design Process The design process is carried out in three stages. 1) Ultimate Limit States The program is structured so that ultimate design is first carried out in accordance with recommendations given in BS8110. All active design load cases are considered in turn and a tabulated output is printed showing possible reinforcement arrangements. 12, 16 and 20 mm bars are considered with possible spacings from 100,125,150,175 and 200 mm. Within these spacings, the layout providing the closest area of steel is printed under each bar size. Longitudinal and transverse moments together with critical load cases for both hogging and sagging moments are also printed. Minimum reinforcement is in any case checked and provided in each direction. WOOD & ARMER moments may also be included in the design. 2) Serviceability Limit States In the second stage, flexural crack widths under serviceability load cases are calculated. The FIRST and EVERY OTHER OCCURING design load case is considered as a serviceability load case and crack widths are calculated based on bar sizes and spacings proposed at the ultimate limit state check. Crack widths due to longitudinal and transverse moments are calculated directly under bars, midway between and at corners. A tabulated output indicating critical serviceability load cases and moments for top and bottom of the slab is then produced. 3) Thermal crack widths Finally thermal, crack width calculations are carried out. Through available parameters, the user is able to provide information on the type of slab, temperature range and crack width limits. Surface zone depths are determined based on the type of slab and critical areas of reinforcements are calculated and printed in a tabulated form. Four bar sizes are considered and for each, max crack spacing, Smax and crack widths are calculated for the critical reinforcements and printed under each bar size. Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is also printed under each bar size.
International Codes
2D.3 Design Parameters The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to BS8007. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used values for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2D.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 59 of 391
International Codes
2D.4 Structural Model Structural slabs that are to be designed to BS8007 must be modelled using finite elements. The manual provides information on the sign convention used in the program for defining elements, (See main manual section 2-6). It is recommended to connect elements in such a way that the positive local z axis points outwards away, from the centre of the container. In this manner the "Top" of elements will consistently fall on the outer surface and internal pressure loads will act in the positive direction of the local z axis. An example of a rectangular tank is provided to demonstrate the above procedure. Element properties are based on the thickness given under ELEMENT PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required input for a 300 mm slab modelled with 10 elements.
UNIT MM ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 10 THI 300.0
International Codes
2D.5 Wood & Armer Moments This is controlled by the SRA parameter. If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce WOOD & ARMER moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is given in degrees, measured between the local element x axis anticlockwise ( positive ). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format.
Table 2D.1 - BS8007 Design Parameters
Parameter Name FYMAIN *

FC CLEAR
Default
Description Value Yield for all reinforcing steel Concrete grade. Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on both surfaces. Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy - slabs on -500. orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate WOOD &ARMER moments for design. A* Skew angle considered in WOOD & ARMER EQUATIONS. A* is any angle in degrees. Parameter which indicates the type of slab ee. ground or suspended as defined in BS8007
* 460 N/mm2 * 30 N/mm2 * 20 mm
SRA
0.0
SCON
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 60 of 391
TEMP
30C
0.2 mm CRACK * * Provided in current unit systems
1 = Suspended Slab 2 = Ground Slab Temperature range to be considered in thermal crack width calculations Limiting thermal crack width
International Codes
British Codes - Design Per British Cold Formed Steel Code
2E.1 General
Provisions of BS 5950-5:1998,have been implemented. The program allows design of single (noncomposite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as an option.
International Codes
2E.2 Cross-Sectional Properties

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the The Steel Construction Institute, (Design of Structures using Cold Formed Steel Sections). The Tables are currently available for the following shapes: Channel with Lips Channel without Lips Z with Lips Pipe Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file. The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
International Codes
2E.3 Design Procedure

The following two design modes are available: 1. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with BS 5950-5:1998. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in the output
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 61 of 391
data by setting the TRACK parameter. 2. Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (BS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not. The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Section 4 of the subject code. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with Clause 6.2.2, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression Clause 4.2, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
International Codes
2E.4 Design Equations

Tensile Strength The allowable tensile strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 7 is described below. The tensile strength, P t of the member should be determined from clause 7.2.1 Where Ae py is the net area An determined in accordance with cl.3.5.4 is the design strength
Combined bending and tension As per clause 7.3 of BS 5950-5:1998 members subjected to both axial tension and bending should be proportioned such that the following relationships are satisfied at the ultimate limit state
And
and 1 Where Ft is the applies tensile strength is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause 7.2.1 of the subject code Pt M z ,M y ,M cz ,M cy are as defined in clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 62 of 391
Compressive Strength The allowable Compressive strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 6 is described below. For sections symmetrical about both principal axes orclosed cross-sections which are not subjected to torsionalflexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following equation as per clause 6.2.3 of the subject code
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses. Torsional flexural buckling Design of the memberswhich have at least one axis of symmetry, and which are subject to torsional flexural buckling should be done according to the stipulations of the clause 6.3.2 using factored slenderness ratio aL E /r in place of actual slenderness ratio while reading Table 10 for the value of Compressive strength(p c ). Where
= 1 , otherwise Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause. Combined bending and compression Members subjected to both axial compression and bending should be checked for local capacity and overall buckling Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
Overall buckling check as per clause 6.4.3 of the subject code For Beams not subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 63 of 391
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc P cs Mz My M cz
is the applied axial load is the short strut capacity as per clause 6.2.3 is the applied bending moment about z axis is the applied bending moment about y axis is the moment capacity in bending about the local Z axis in the absence of F c and M y , as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6 M cy is the moment capacity in bending about the local Y axis, in the absence of F c and M z ,as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
Mb is the lateral buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2 is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Z axis P Ez is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Y axis P Ey C bz ,C by are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user The Mcz, Mcy and Mb are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in the manner described hereinbelow. Calculation of moment capacities For restrained beams, the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater then the bending moment resistance of the section, M c Mcz = SzzX po Mcy = Syy X po
Where is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis M cz M cz is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis po is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient and should not greater then design strength p y For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater than the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M c , and the buckling resistance moment of the beam, Mb Then buckling resistance moment, M b may be calculated as follows
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 64 of 391
is the yield moment of the section , product of design strength p y and elastic modules of the gross section with respect to the compression flange Zc ME is the elastic lateral buckling resistance as per clause 5.6.2.2 is the Perry coefficient
MY
Please refer clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 of the subject code for a detailed discussion regarding the parameters used in the abovementioned equations. Shear Strength The maximum shear stress should not be greater then 0.7 p y as per clause 5.4.2
The average shear stress should not exceed the lesser of the shear yield strength, p v or the shear buckling strength, q cr as stipulated in clause 5.4.3 of the subject code. The parameters are calculated as follows :pv = 0.6 X p y
Pv= A*Min(pv,qcr) Where Pv py t D is the shear capacity in N/mm^2 is the design strength in N/mm^2 is the web thickness in mm is the web depth in mm
Combined bending and Shear For beam webs subjected to both bending and shear stresses the member should be designed to satisfy the following relationship as per the stipulations of clause 5.5.2 of the subject code
Where Fv M Mc is the shear force is the bending moment acting at the same section as Fv is the moment capacity determined in accordance with 5.2.2
The next table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 65 of 391
selection of design options.
BRITISH COLD FORMED STEEL DESIGN PARAMETERS Parameter Name Default Value Description
BEAM
1.0
CMZ
1.0
CMY
1.0
CWY
1.0
When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the adequacy of the member is determined by checking a total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location check is not conducted, and instead, checking is done only at the locations specified by the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for details. For TRUSS members only start and end locations are designed. Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending Cb. See BS:59505:1998,5.6. Used for Combined axial load and bending design. Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending Cb. See BS:59505:1998,5.6. Used for Combined axial load and bending design. Specifies whether the cold work of forming strengthening effect should be included
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 66 of 391
FLX
FU
FYLD KX
250 MPa 1.0
in resistance computation. See BS:5950-5:1998,3.4 Values: 0 effect should not be included 1 effect should be included 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling restraint is provided or is not necessary for the member. See BS:5950-5:1998, 5.6 Values: 0 Section not subject to torsional flexural buckling 1 Section subject to torsional flexural buckling 430 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. Yield strength of steel in current units. Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall buckling about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression.
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LX
Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the length current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 67 of 391
LY
LZ
MAIN NSF DMAX RATIO TRACK
Member Effective length for overall buckling in the local Ylength axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Member Effective length for overall buckling in the local Zlength axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. 0 0 Check slenderness ratio 0 Do not check slenderness ratio 1.0 Net section factor for tension members 2540.0 Maximum allowable depth. It is input in the current cm. units of length. 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable stresses 0 This parameter is used to control the level of detail in which the design output is reported in the output file. The allowable values are: 0 - Prints only the member number, section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL status. 1 - Prints the design summary in addition to that printed by TRACK 1 2 - Prints member and material properties in addition to that printed by TRACK 2.
International Codes
2E.5 Verification Problem

In the next few pages are included a verification example for reference purposes. Verification Problem-1 In this problem, we have assigned Channel sections with lips to different members.Member numbers 28 to 31 have been assigned section 230CLHS66X16,member numbers 3 TO 6 and 15 TO 19 have been assigned the section 230CLMIL70X30 and member numbers 1, 2, 7 TO 14 have been assigned the section 170CLHS56X18. These members have been designed as per BS 5950 Part 5. Other sections have been assigned from the AISI shapes database (American cold-formed steel) and designed in accordance with that code. The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are given herein below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 68 of 391
1) Bending Check As per Clause 5.2.2.2 of BS 5950 Part 5 the limiting compressive stress(p o ) for stiffened webs is given by the minimum of
And p o = Py where Py = Min ( FYLD, 0.84XFU) = 361.2 N/mm 2 So that
= 332.727 N/mm 2 The limiting compressive moments in local Y and Z axes will be given by M cz = S zz X p o = 27632.4 X 332.727 = 9.19 X 10 6 N-mm M cy = S yy X p o = 27632.4 X 5427.50 = 3.46 X 10 6 N-mm Maximum bending moment about local Z = 2159 N-m at node 7 Maximum bending moment about local Y = 19.755 N-m at node 7 Bending Ratio Z = 2.15 X10 6 / 9.19 X10 6 = 0.235 hence verified
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 69 of 391
Bending Ratio Y = 19755.3/ 3.46 X10 6 = 0.0057 hence verified Buckling resistance moment M b As per section 5.6.2, The buckling resistance moment
Where, The Yield moment(M Y ) of section is given by M Y = S zz X p o = 9.19 X 10 6 N-mm The elastic buckling resistance moment(M E ) as per clause 5.6.2.2 is calculated to be 4.649 X10 6 N-mm
And,
so that
= 2.325 X 10 10 Which gives
2)
Compression Check
The Axial force induced in member# 1 is 3436.75N The elastic flexural buckling load P E = 1.185 X 10 6 N The short strut capacity (Pcs ) is given by A eff X py= 457.698 * 344 = 157448 N Perry Coefficient () = 0.02074
Buckling resistance
= 153782 N
For Channel section(being singly symmetric) as per clause 6.2.4
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 70 of 391
Buckling resistance Where The limiting compressive moment(M c ) in the relevant direction = 9.19 X 10 6 N-mm,as calculated above And the distance(e s ) of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section and that of the effective cross section = 38.24 m So that,
Compression ratio = 3)
hence verified
Axial Compression and Bending
Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2
= 0.26 Over all buckling check : 6.4.3
= 0.2773 4)
hence verified Shear Check as per clause 5.4.2 and 5.4.3
pv = 0.6 X p y = 0.6 X 379.212 = 227.52 N/mm 2
P v = A*Min(p v ,q cr ) = 112.11 N/mm 2 Shear resistance Y = 33579.4 N Shear resistance Z = 21148.6 N
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 71 of 391
Shear Ratio Y =
hence verified
Shear Ratio Z =
hence verified
5)
Shear Check with Bending as per clause 5.5.2
Shear with bending on Z =
= 0.08327
hence verified
Shear with bending on Y = = = 0.000.426 Input File: STAAD SPACE SET ECHO OFF INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT FEET KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 5 0; 2 0 5 10; 3 10 5 0; 4 10 5 10; 5 55 0; 6 5 5 10; 7 0 5 2; 8 0 5 4; 9 0 5 6; 10 0 5 8; 11 10 5 2; 12 10 5 4; 13 10 5 6; 14 10 5 8; 15 5 5 2; 16 5 5 4; 17 5 56; 18 5 5 8; 19 10 0 0; 20 10 0 10; 21 0 0 10; 22 0 00; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 7; 2 3 11; 3 1 5; 4 2 6; 5 5 3; 6 6 4; 7 78; 8 8 9; 9 9 10; 10 10 2; 11 11 12; 12 12 13; 13 13 14; 14 14 4; 15 5 15; 16 15 16; 17 16 17; 18 17 18; 19 18 6; 20 7 15; 21 15 11; 22 8 16; 23 16 12; 24 9 17; 25 17 13; 26 10 18; 27 18 14; 28 1 22; 29 2 21; 30 3 19; 31 4 20; 32 1 21; 33 21 4; 34 4 19; 35 19 1; 36 2 20; 37 20 3; 38 3 22; 39 22 2; MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED AMERICAN 32 TO 39 TABLE ST 3LU3X060 20 TO 27 TABLE ST 3HU3X075 MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED BRITISH 28 TO 31 TABLE ST 230CLHS66X16 3 TO 6 15 TO 19 TABLE ST 230CLMIL70X30 1 2 7 TO 14 TABLE ST 170CLHS56X18 UNIT MMS PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES LIST 32 20 28 3 1 SUPPORTS 19 TO 22 PINNED UNIT FEET DEFINE MATERIAL START
hence verified
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 72 of 391
ISOTROPIC STEEL E 4.176e+006 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 0.489024 ALPHA 6.5e-006 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL CONSTANTS BETA 90 MEMB 20 TO 27 MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 39 MEMBER TENSION 32 TO 39 UNIT FEET KIP LOAD 1 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL MEMBER LOAD 3 TO 6 20 TO 27 UNI GY -0.3 0 5 JOINT LOAD 1 2 FX 0.6 2 4 FZ -0.6 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK UNIT KGS CM PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 1 4 16 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 3 24 28 UNIT KIP INCH PARAMETER 1 CODE AISI FYLD 55 ALL CWY 1 ALL BEAM 1 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21 PARAMETER 2 CODE BS5950 COLD TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 19 28 TO 31 CHECK CODE MEMB 1 2 FINISH Output File:
****************************************************** ********** * *
* STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE 2. SET ECHO OFF MEMBER PROPERTIES.UNIT - CM ----------------MEMB PROFILE AX/ AY 32 20 28 ST ST ST 3LU3X060 3HU3X075 230CLHS66X16 2.26 1.51 4.91 1.24 8.78
IZ/ AZ 21.81 1.51 63.15 2.40 663.30
IY/ SZ 5.17 4.05 40.66 10.63 42.82
IX/ SY 0.02 1.93 0.06 9.59 0.18
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 73 of 391
5.40 3 ST 230CLMIL70X30 11.40 6.72 5.23 3.00
2.94 868.90 3.84 224.50 1.89
60.93 66.93 80.13 20.49 27.96
9.29 0.36 14.15 0.06 5.43
ST
170CLHS56X18
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ **START ITERATION NO. 2 2 iterations, Case= 1 1
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE NO. VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
( KIP = = =
FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING 1.20 -18.00 -1.20
1 )
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= 84.00 MY= 12.00 MZ= ***TOTAL REACTION LOAD(KIP SUMMATION FORCE-X = SUMMATION FORCE-Y = SUMMATION FORCE-Z = FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING -1.20 18.00 1.20
-96.00 1 )
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGINMX= -84.00 MY= -12.00 MZ= MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING MAXIMUMS AT NODE X = 1.56266E-02 1 Y = -4.80071E-01 16 Z = -1.74873E-02 4 RX= -8.28375E-03 6 RY= -2.10910E-05 14 RZ= -8.31623E-03 7 1)
96.00
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM -----------------JOINT 1 4 16 LOAD 1 1 1 X-TRANS 0.0397 0.0305 0.0352 RADIANS) STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
Y-TRANS -0.0184 -0.0185 -1.2194
Z-TRANS -0.0339 -0.0444 -0.0392
X-ROTAN 0.0074 -0.0074 0.0025
Y-ROTAN 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Z-ROTAN -0.0027 0.0025 0.0000
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KGS ----------------JOINT 19 20 21 22 LOAD 1 1 1 1 FORCE-X -447.32 -447.10 174.26 175.85 FORCE-Y 2312.64 2041.85 1768.33 2041.85 CM STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
FORCE-Z 85.08 186.39 187.79 85.05
MOM-X 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM-Y 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
MOM Z 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS CM (LOCAL ) MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 5 9 17 1 22
669.42 -669.42 -0.63 0.63 2155.98 -2155.98
1448.06 -767.67 -0.06 0.06 -404.11 404.11
2.70 -2.70 -285.30 -395.09 -85.05 85.05
-1.68 1.68 -0.04 0.04 0.00 0.00
-215.75 -196.10 -0.08 -8366.18 12961.01 0.00
61582.12 107256.50 1.04 -9.62 -61586.40 0.00
24
28
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 74 of 391
STAAD.ProCODE CHECKING - (AISI) *********************** UNITS ARE: IN, KIP, KIP-IN, KSI
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | MEMBER# 20 SECTION: 3HU3X075 LEN: 60.00 GOV.LOC: 60.00 | | STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.285 GOV.MODE: Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD: 1 | | | | RESISTANCES: AX.TENS: 0.00 ECC.TENS: 0.00 COMPRESS: 7.51 | | BEND. Z: 28.21 BEND. Y: 30.98 SHEAR Z: 11.76 SHEAR Y: 5.88 | | | | FYLD: 55.00 COLDWORK FYLD: 55.71 FU: 58.00 A: 0.76 AE: 0.76 | | IZ: 1.5173E+00 IZE: 1.5173E+00 IY: 9.7684E-01 IYE: 9.7684E-01 | | SZE_T: 6.4841E-01 SZE_C: 6.4841E-01 SYE_T: 5.8539E-01 SYE_C: 7.3374E-01 | |-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | MEMBER# 21 SECTION: 3HU3X075 LEN: 60.00 GOV.LOC: 0.00 | | STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.285 GOV.MODE: Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD: 1 | | | | RESISTANCES: AX.TENS: 0.00 ECC.TENS: 0.00 COMPRESS: 7.51 | | BEND. Z: 28.21 BEND. Y: 30.98 SHEAR Z: 11.76 SHEAR Y: 5.88 | | | | FYLD: 55.00 COLDWORK FYLD: 55.71 FU: 58.00 A: 0.76 AE: 0.76 | | IZ: 1.5173E+00 IZE: 1.5173E+00 IY: 9.7684E-01 IYE: 9.7684E-01 | | SZE_T: 1.0115E+00 SZE_C: 1.0115E+00 SYE_T: 7.3374E-01 SYE_C: 5.8539E-01 | |-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD/Pro CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-5-v1.0) ***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA ------------------------------------------------------------------------------| MEMBER# 1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN: 609.60 LOCATION: 609.60 | | STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.277GOV.MODE: Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD: 1 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
MATERIAL DATA: Yield strength of steel: 379.21 N/mm2 Ultimate tensile strength: 430.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm) Section Name: 170CLHS56X18 Member Length: 60.96 Gross Area(Ag): 5.46 Net Area (Ae): 4.58 z-z axis y-y axis Moment of inertia (I) : 237.68 21.99 Moment of inertia (Ie): 236.04 19.44 Elastic modulus (Zet): 27.91 5.21 Elastic modulus (Zec): 27.63 10.41
DESIGN DATA: Tension Capacity (Pt): Compression Capacity (Pc): Moment Capacity (Mc): Shear Capacity (Pc): z-z axis 0.00 93.79 9.19 21.15 y-y axis
3.46 33.58
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD : CLAUSE BS-6.3 BS-6.4 BS-5.1 BS-5.1 COMBINATION Compression ratio - Axial Bend-Compression ratio Bending Ratio - Z Bending Ratio - Y RATIO 0.037 0.277 0.235 0.006
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 75 of 391
BS-5.1 BS-5.4 BS-5.4 BS-5.5.2 BS-5.5.2
Biaxial Bending Ratio Shear Ratio - Z Shear Ratio - Y Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio
0.241 0.168 0.003 0.083 0.000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------| MEMBER# 2 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN: 609.60 LOCATION: 609.60 | | STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.282GOV.MODE: Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD: 1 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
MATERIAL DATA: Yield strength of steel: 379.21 N/mm2 Ultimate tensile strength: 430.00 N/mm2 SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm) Section Name: 170CLHS56X18 Member Length: 60.96 Gross Area(Ag): 5.46 Net Area (Ae): 4.58 z-z axis y-y axis Moment of inertia (I) : 237.68 21.99 Moment of inertia (Ie): 236.04 21.99 Elastic modulus (Zet): 27.91 14.20 Elastic modulus (Zec): 27.63 5.43
DESIGN DATA: Tension Capacity (Pt): Compression Capacity (Pc): Moment Capacity (Mc): Shear Capacity (Pc): z-z axis 0.00 93.79 9.19 21.15 y-y axis
1.81 33.58
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD : CLAUSE BS-6.3 BS-6.4 BS-5.1 BS-5.1 BS-5.1 BS-5.4 BS-5.4 BS-5.5.2 BS-5.5.2 COMBINATION Compression ratio - Axial Bend-Compression ratio Bending Ratio - Z Bending Ratio - Y Biaxial Bending Ratio Shear Ratio - Z Shear Ratio - Y Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio RATIO 0.037 0.282 0.235 0.010 0.245 0.168 0.003 0.083 0.000
*********** END OF THE STAAD.ProRUN ***********
International Codes
Canadian Codes - Concrete Design Per CSA Standard A23.3-94

STAAD can perform design of concrete beams, columns and slabs according to CSA STANDARD A23.394. Given the dimensions of a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcement necessary to resist the various input loads.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 76 of 391
International Codes

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed. For Beams For Columns For Slabs Prismatic (Rectangular, Square & Tee) Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular) 4-noded Plate Elements
International Codes

Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required input:
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and 300mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300mm diameter.
International Codes
3A.4 Slenderness Effects And Analysis Considerations

STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in CSA STANDARD A23.3-94 Clause 10.13. STAAD accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. After solving for the joint displacements of the structure, the program calculates the additional moments induced in the structure due to the P-Delta effect. Therefore, by performing a PDELTA ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will require no user modification before beginning member design. The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is through user supplied moment magnification factors (see the parameter MMAG in Table 3A.1). Here the user approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 77 of 391
beginning member design. This second procedure allows slenderness to be considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code. It should be noted that STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete design. All the proper factored loads must be provided by the user before the ANALYSIS specification. While performing a PDELTA ANALYSIS, all load cases must be defined as primary load cases. If the effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be done either by using the REPEAT LOAD command or by specifying the load information of these individual loading cases under one single load case. Usage of the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield incorrect results for PDELTA ANALYSIS.
International Codes

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design per CSA STANDARD A23.3-94. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, which are commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 3A.1 contains a list of available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 78 of 391
International Codes
3A.6 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen (start, end and 11 intermediate), unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. Design for Flexure Design for flexure is performed per the rules of Chapter 2 of CSA Standard A23.3-94. Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the thirteen sections. Each of these sections are designed to resist the critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per CSA Standard A23.3-94. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (which finally will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account other practical considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared. The following annotations apply to the output for Beam Design.
Design for Shear and Torsion Design for shear and torsion is performed per the rules of Chapter 4 of CSA Standard A23.3-94. Shear
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 79 of 391
reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design is performed at the start and end sections. The location along the member span for design is chosen as the effective depth + SFACE at the start, and effective depth + EFACE at the end. The load case which gives rise to the highest stirrup area for shear & torsion is chosen as the critical one. The calculations are performed assuming 2-legged stirrups will be provided. The additional longitudinal steel area required for torsion is reported. The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subjected to torsion.
International Codes
3A.7 Column Design

Column design is performed per the rules of Chapters 7 & 8 of the CSA Standard A23.3-94. Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 80 of 391
International Codes

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The commands for specifying elements are in accordance with the relevant sections of the Technical Reference Manual. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same principles as those for beams in flexure. The width of the beam is assumed to be unity for this purpose. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see the relevant sections of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The effective depth is calculated assuming #10 bars are provided. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLT and CLB listed in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 3A.1 are not applicable to slab design. The output consists only of area of steel required. Actual bar arrangement is not calculated because an element most likely represents just a fraction of the total slab area.
International Codes
Canadian Codes - Steel Design per the Canadian Standard S16-01
3B.1 General Comments
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 81 of 391
The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification CAN/CSA S16-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures is now implemented. This code supercedes the previous edition of the code CAN/CSA S16.1-94. The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of CAN/CSAS16-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document. Analysis Methodology Member Property Specifications Built-in Steel Section Library Section Classification Member Resistances Design Parameters Code Checking Member Selection Tabulated Results of Steel Design
International Codes
3B.2 Analysis Methodology

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 82 of 391
International Codes
3B.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
International Codes
3B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following is the description of the different types of sections available: Welded Wide Flanges (WW shapes) Welded wide flange shapes listed in the CSA steel tables can be designated using the same scheme used by CSA. The following example illustrates the specification of welded wide flange shapes.
Wide Flanges (W shapes) Designation of wide flanges in STAAD is the same as that in CSA tables. For example,
S, M, HP shapes In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped sections like S, M and HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is identical to that listed in the CSA tables. While specifying the sections, it should be remembered that the portion after the decimal point should be omitted. Thus, M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and S180X22.8 should be specified as S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes are provided below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 83 of 391
Channel Sections (C & MC shapes) C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example. As in S,M and HP sections, the portion after the decimal point must be omitted in section designations. Thus, MC250X42.4 should be designated as MC250X42.
Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified by preceding the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back to back double channel section C200X28 without any spacing in between should be specified as:
If a spacing of 2.5 length units is used, the specification should be as follows:
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing. The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit. Angles To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200 angle with a 25mm thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this specification, the local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y-Y axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual. Double Angles
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 84 of 391
To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for long leg back to back) or SD (short leg back to back). For equal angles, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit) after section designation.
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 125X75X6 angles with a spacing of 2.5 length units. Tees Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
will describe a T section cut from a W200X42 section. Rectangular Hollow Sections These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the CSA tables may be specified as follows.
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width), and TH(for thickness) specifications. For example:
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5 inches. Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit. Circular Hollow Sections Sections listed in the CSA tables may be provided as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 85 of 391
In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside diameter of 9.0 length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current length unit. Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 86 of 391
International Codes
3B.5 Section Classification

The CSA specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic (Class 1), compact (Class 2), non compact (Class 3) or slender element (Class 4) sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and Table 1 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes. Design is performed for sections that fall into the category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only. Class 4 sections are not designed by STAAD.
International Codes
3B.6 Member Resistances

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as members unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances. Axial Tension The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Cl.13.2 of CAN/CSA-S16-01. Parameters FYLD, FU and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 87 of 391
Axial Compression The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations are : 1) For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this. 2) For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or truss members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling and local buckling of thin legs is calculated using the rules of the AISC-LRFD code, 2nd ed., 1994. The reason for this is that the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this. 3) The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling into account. The rules of Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-S16-01 are used for this purpose. Parameters KX and LX may be used to provide the effective length factor and effective length value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles. 4) The variable n in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34 for all other shapes. 5) While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.) Bending The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the joints of the member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are : 1) The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as For Class 1 & 2 sections, Phi*Py*Fy For Class 3 sections, Phi*Sy*Fy where Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9 Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis Fy = Yield stress of steel 2) For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the principal axes. The specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed., are used for this purpose because the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 88 of 391
3) For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such as Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31, that a rational method, such as that given in SSRCs Guide to Stability Design Criteria of Metal Structures, be used. Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed. Axial compression and bending The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these equations, the additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition. Axial tension and bending Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The actual RATIO is determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical equation. Shear The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). Checks for safety in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.
International Codes
3B.7 Design Parameters

The design parameters outlined in Table 3B.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allows the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 89 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 90 of 391
International Codes
3B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CAN/CSA-S16-01 requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and end forces only. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter.
International Codes
3B.9 Member Selection

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC. Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:
UNIT NEWTON METER PARAMETER FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4 NSF 0.85 ALL
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 91 of 391
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 UNL 15 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL SELECT MEMB 3 4
International Codes
3B.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CAN/CSA-S16-01 specification which governed the design. If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, factored member resistances will be printed. Following is a description of some of the items printed. CR = Factored compressive resistance TR = Factored tensile resistance VR = Factored shear resistance MRZ= Factored moment resistance (about z-axis) MRY= Factored moment resistance (about y-axis) Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. Verification Problems In the next few pages are included 3 verification examples for reference purposes. Since the S16-01 code is similar in many respects to the previous edition of the code (CAN/CSA S16.1-94), the solved examples of the 1994 edition of the CISC Handbook have been used as reference material for these examples. Verification Problem No. 1 TITLE TYPE Steel beam with uniform load, wide flange section. Static analysis, 3D beam element.
REFERENCE: CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Example 1 PAGE 5_91. PROBLEM: Find the interaction ratio, beam resistance and beam deflection.
GIVEN: E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 92 of 391
Fy = 300 Mpa CSA G40.21-M Beam has a 8.0 m span; Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, unsupported length 1.0 m Allowable Live Load deflection, L/300 = 8000/300 = 27 mm Factored Uniform Load IS 7 kN/m DEAD, 15 kN/m LIVE. Section to code check is W410X54. SOLUTION COMPARISON: CAN/CSA - S16 Interaction Ratio REFERENCE STAAD.Pro 0.88 0.883 Beam Beam Resistance Deflection (kN*m) 284 283.20 (mm) 21 20.81
********************************************************************
* * * * * *
Version Bld Proprietary Program of Research Engineers, Intl. Date= Time=
* *
* *
STAAD.Pro
* * *
* * *
********************************************************************
USER ID:
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91 3. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN, CSA-S16.1-94 4. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD 5. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300 7. UNIT MMS KN 8. JOINT COORDINATES 9. 1 0 0 0; 2 8000 0 0 10. MEMBER INCIDENCES 11. 1 1 2 13. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN 14. 1 TABLE ST W410X54 16. CONSTANTS 17. E STEEL ALL 18. POISSON 0.3 ALL 20. SUPPORTS 21. 1 PINNED 22. 2 FIXED BUT MY MZ 24. UNIT METER KN 25. LOAD 1 DEAD 26. MEMBER LOAD 27. 1 UNI GY -7 29. LOAD 2 LIVE 30. MEMBER LOAD 31. 1 UNI GY -15 33. LOAD COMB 3 1.25DL + 1.5 LL 34. 1 1.25 2 1.5 36. PERFORM ANALYSIS
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 93 of 391
PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.6 MB 37. LOAD LIST 2 38. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS ---------------------------UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI SYSTEM MEMB LOAD 1 2 GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO END JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471 -1.4824 -2.0120 -2.0120 -1.4824 -0.5471 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 2 L/DISP= 384
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 -2.0812 0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP =
2.08115 AT
400.00 LOAD
************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS *********** 40. LOAD LIST 3 41. PARAMETER 42. CODE CANADIAN 43. TRACK 2 ALL 44. UNL 1 ALL 45. FYLD 300000 ALL 46. BEAM 1 ALL 47. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01) ****************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W410X54 PASS 0.00 C (CANADIAN SECTIONS) CSA-13.8.2+ 0.883 3 0.00 -250.00 4.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 6.84E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 8.00E+02 IZ = 1.86E+04 SZ = 9.26E+02 PZ = 1.05E+03 IY = 1.02E+03 SY = 1.15E+02 PY = 1.77E+02
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 94 of 391
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CR1 = 1.846E+03 CR2 = 2.732E+02 CRZ = 1.570E+03 CTORFLX = 2.732E+02 TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.805E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 2.732E+02 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 4.778E+01 MRZ = 2.832E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.379E+02 VRZ = 4.604E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000 KL/RY = 207.170 KL/RZ = 48.447 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 1.000 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01 48. STEEL TAKE OFF ALL STEEL TAKE-OFF -------------PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no density. ST W410X54 8.00 4.203 PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000 ---------------TOTAL = 4.203
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 49. FINISH
Verification Problem No. 2 TITLE: TYPE: Steel beam/column, wide flange section. Static Analysis, 3D beam element.
REFERENCE: CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook Example, page 4_108.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 95 of 391
PROBLEM:
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
GIVEN:
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL). Fy = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M Beam/Column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0 factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of 200 kN*m and 300 kN*m Steel section is W 310X129
SOLUTION COMPARISON: CAN/CSA-S16 Interaction Beam Resistance Ratio REFERENCE STAAD.Pro 0.96 0.98 (kN*m) 583 584 Column Resistance (kN) 3800 3820
**************************************************** * * STAAD.Pro *
* * * * * * Version Bld * Proprietary Program of * Research Engineers, Intl. * Date= * Time= * *
USER ID: * ****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-106
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 96 of 391
2. * 3. * COMPRESSION + MAJOR AXIS BENDING 4. * 5. UNIT METER KN 6. JOINT COORDINATES 7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0 8. * 9. MEMBER INCIDENCES 10. 1 1 2 11. * 12. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN 13. 1 TABLE ST W310X129 14. * 15. CONSTANTS 16. E STEEL ALL 17. POISSON STEEL ALL 18. * 19. SUPPORTS 20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ 21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MY MZ 22. * 23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD 24. JOINT LOAD 25. 2 FY -2000 26. 2 MZ 200 27. 1 MZ 300 28. * 29. PDELTA 3 ANALYSIS PROBLEM STATISTICS ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.2 MB ++ Adjusting Displacements ++ Adjusting Displacements ++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35 8:54:35 8:54:35
31. PRINT MEMBER FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 97 of 391
1 0.00 200.00
1 1 2000.00 135.14 0.00 300.00 2 -2000.00 -135.14 0.00
0.00 0.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT ************** 33. PARAMETER 34. CODE CANADIAN 35. TRACK 2 ALL 36. FYLD 300000 ALL 37. LY 3.7 ALL 38. LZ 3.7 ALL 39. CHECK CODE ALL STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING (CAN/CSA-S16-01) ****************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W310X129 PASS 2000.00 C (CANADIAN SECTIONS) CSA-13.8.2C 0.980 1 0.00 300.00 0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.65E+02 MEMBER LENGTH = 3.70E+02 IZ = 3.08E+04 SZ = 1.94E+03 PZ = 2.16E+03 IY = 1.00E+04 SY = 6.51E+02 PY = 9.90E+02 MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CR1 = 4.459E+03 CR2 = 3.820E+03 CRZ = 4.296E+03 CTORFLX = 3.820E+03 TENSILE CAPACITY = 4.359E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 3.820E+03 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 2.672E+02 MRZ = 5.840E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 7.419E+02 VRZ = 1.505E+03
--------------------------
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000 KL/RY = 47.477 KL/RZ = 27.094 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 2.12E+01
40. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL STEEL TAKE-OFF
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 98 of 391
-------------PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no density. ST W310X129 PRISMATIC STEEL 3.70 4.694 0.00 0.000 ---------------TOTAL = 4.694 LENGTH (KN ) 3.70 WEIGHT 4.694
MEMBER 1
PROFILE (METE)
ST W310X129
42. FINISH
Verification Problem No. 3 TITLE: TYPE: Steel beam/column, wide flange section. Static Analysis, 3D beam element.
REFERENCE: CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook example page 4_108. PROBLEM: Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
GIVEN:
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 99 of 391
Fy = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M Beam/Column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, Lu = 3.7 m factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of 200 kN*m and 300 kN*m in the strong axis and 100 kN*m at each end in the weak axis. Steel section is W310X143. SOLUTION COMPARISON: CAN/CSA-S16 Interaction Beam Resistance Ratio weak REFERENCE STAAD.Pro 0.998 1.00 300 299 653 650 (kN*m) strong Column Resistance (kN) 4200 4222
****************************************************
* * * * * * * * * STAAD.Pro Version Bld Proprietary Program of Research Engineers, Intl. Date= Time= USER ID: * * * * * * * * *
**************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-108 2. * 3. * ( COMPRESSION + BIAXIAL BENDING ) 4. * 5. UNIT METER KN 6. JOINT COORDINATES 7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0 8. * 9. MEMBER INCIDENCES 10. 1 1 2 11. * 12. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN 13. 1 TABLE ST W310X143 14. * 15. CONSTANTS 16. E STEEL ALL 17. POISSON STEEL ALL 18. * 19. SUPPORTS 20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ 21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ 22. * 23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD 24. JOINT LOAD 25. 2 FY -2000 26. 2 MZ 200 27. 2 MX 100
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 100 of 391
28. 1 MZ 300 29. 1 MX 100 30. * 31. PERFORM ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S

2 6
----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.2 MB
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN 35. CMY 2 ALL 36. CMZ 2 ALL 37. CB 1 ALL 38. TRACK 2 ALL 39. FYLD 300000 ALL 40. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01) ****************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= * 1 ST W310X143 FAIL 2000.00 C MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.82E+02 IZ = 3.47E+04 SZ = 2.15E+03 IY = 1.12E+04 SY = 7.28E+02 MEMBER LENGTH = PZ = 2.41E+03 PY = 1.11E+03 3.70E+02 (CANADIAN SECTIONS) CSA-13.8.2A 1.000 -100.00 300.00
1 0.00
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CR1 = 4.912E+03 CR2 = 4.222E+03 CRZ = 4.737E+03 CTORFLX = 4.222E+03 TENSILE CAPACITY = 4.802E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 4.912E+03 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 2.987E+02 MRZ = 6.504E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 8.037E+02 VRZ = 1.678E+03
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 101 of 391
KL/RY = 47.077 KL/RZ = 26.802 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 0.40 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 0.40 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02 Z AXIS = 5.405E+01 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 1.98E+01
41. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL STEEL TAKE-OFF

-------------PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no density. ST W310X143 3.70 5.171 PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000 ---------------TOTAL = 5.171
MEMBER
PROFILE
LENGTH (METE) 3.70
WEIGHT (KN ) 5.171
ST
W310X143
42. FINISH
International Codes
Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code
3C.1 General
Provisions of CSA S136-94, including revisions dated May, 1995, have been implemented. The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. For laterally supported members in bending, the Initiation of Yielding method has been used. Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as an option.
International Codes
3C.1 Cross-Sectional Properties
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 102 of 391
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with CSA 136. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter. 2. Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (AISI standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, present design results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not. The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clauses 5.6.2.1 through 3 and 5.6.2.6 through 8. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with Clause 5.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression Clause 5.4, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression Clause 5.5, Maximum Section Depths. The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows: a. Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as applicable.
b. Members in tension Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.3.1 and 6.3.2. c. Members in bending and shear
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses: a. 6.4.1 General, b. 6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress based on Initiation of Yielding, c. 6.4.3 Laterally Unsupported Members, d. 6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened Flanges - additional limitations, e. 6.4.5 Shear in Webs, f. 6.4.6 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs. a. Members in compression
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses: a. 6.6.1.1, 6.6.1.2 (a) and (d), and 6.6.1.3 General, b. 6.6.2 Sections Not Subject to Torsional-Flexural Buckling, c. 6.6.3 Singly Symmetric Sections, d. 6.6.4 Point-Symmetric Sections, e. 6.6.5 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 103 of 391
b.
Members in compression and bending
Resistance calculations are based on Clause 6.7.1, Singly and Doubly Symmetric Sections. Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided by the user. The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and selection of design options.
CANADIAN COLD FORMED STEEL DESIGN PARAMETERS Parameter Default Value Name Description
BEAM
CMZ
CMY
CWY
DMAX
DMIN
FLX
FU FYLD
When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the adequacy of the member is determined by checking a total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location check is not conducted, and instead, checking is done only at the locations specified by the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for details). If neither the BEAM parameter nor any SECTION command is specified, STAAD will terminate the run and ask the user to provide one of those 2 commands. This rule is not enforced for TRUSS members. 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending wz. See CSA 136, 6.7.2. Used for Combined axial load and bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. 0.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending wy. See CSA 136, 6.7.2. Used for Combined axial load and bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. 0 Specifies whether the cold work of forming strengthening effect should be included in resistance computation. See CSA 136, 5.2. Values: 0 effect should not be included 1 effect should be included 1000.0 Maximum depth permissible for the section during member selection. This value must be provided in the current units. 0.0 Minimum depth required for the section during member selection. This value must be provided in the current units. 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling restraint is provided or is not necessary for the member. See CSA 136, 6.6.2 Values: 0 Section subject to torsional flexural buckling and restraint not provided 1 restraint provided or unnecessary 450 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units.
1.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 104 of 391
KT
KY
KZ
LT
LY
LZ
NSF STIFF
350 MPa Yield strength of steel in current units. 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression. 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in length the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression. Member Effective length for overall column buckling length in the local Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Member Effective length for overall column buckling length in the local Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. 1.0 Net section factor for tension members, See CSA 136, 6.3.1. Member Spacing in the longitudinal direction of length shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs. It is input in the current units of length. See section CSA 136, 6.4.5
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 105 of 391
TRACK
This parameter is used to control the level of detail in which the design output is reported in the output file. The allowable values are: 0 - Prints only the member number, section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL status. 1 - Prints the design summary in addition to that printed by TRACK 1 2 - Prints member and material properties in addition to that printed by TRACK 2. Specifies whether bearing and intermediate transverse stiffeners satisfy the requirements of CSA 136, 6.5. If true, the program uses the more liberal set of interaction equations in 6.4.6. Values: 0 stiffeners do not comply with 6.5 1 stiffeners comply with 6.5
TSA
International Codes
3C.3 Design Procedure

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the "Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition. The Tables are currently available for the following shapes: Channel with Lips Channel without Lips Angle with Lips Angle without Lips Z with Lips Z without Lips Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file. Details of the latter are available in Section AD.2002.4.1.1 of this document. The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
International Codes
Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-086-01
3D.1 General Comments
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 106 of 391
The Canadian Wood Design facility in STAAD is based on CSA086-01. A timber section library consisting of Sawn and Glulam timber is available for member property specification. The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for the entire structure under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, the code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of CSA086-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document. Analysis Methodology Member Property Specifications Built-in Section Library Member Resistances Design Parameters Code Checking Member Selection Tabulated Results of Timber Design Verification Examples
International Codes
3D.2 Analysis Methodology Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
International Codes
3D.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, for Sawn timber the timber section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in timber table. For Glulam timber, member properties can be specified using the YD(depth) and ZD(width) specifications and selecting Combination and Species specifications from the built-in table. The assigment is done with the help of the PRISMATIC option which is explained in STAADs Technical Reference Manual.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 107 of 391
3D.4 Built-in Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in timber tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Following are the description of the different types of species combination available: Douglas Fir-Larch The following example illustrates the specification of Douglas Fir-Larch species combination.
Hem-Fir Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
Northern Species Designation of Northern species combination in STAAD is as follows.
Spruce-Pine-Fir Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
Glu Laminated timber Designation of Glu-lam timber in STAAD involves defining the material, specifying the dimensions, and associating the material with the member through the CONSTANTS command. UNIT CM KN DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC GLT_D.Fir-L-24f-EX E 51611.7 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 2.5e-005 ALPHA 1.2e-011 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 108 of 391
1 PRIS YD 12 ZD 6 CONSTANTS MATERIAL GLT_D.Fir-L-24f-EX MEMB 1
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER UNIT FEET POUND JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 12 0 0; 4 18 0 0; 5 24 0 0; 6 6 3 0; 7 12 6 0; 8 18 3 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 4 5; 5 1 6; 6 6 7; 7 7 8; 8 8 5; 9 2 6; 10 3 7; 11 4 8; 12 6 3; 13 3 8; UNIT FEET POUND DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM E 1224 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 25 ALPHA 5.5e-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY tim can 1 TO 4 9 TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM 5 TO 8 12 13 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM CONSTANTS MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 1 TO 4 9 TO 11 MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 5 TO 8 12 13 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES FINISH
International Codes
3D.5 Member Resistance The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 5 (for sawn lumber) and 6(for Glulam) of CSA086-01. These depend on several adjustment factors as follows KD = Load duration factor (Clause 4.3.2.2-CSA086-01, Table 4.3.2.2) KH = System factor (Clause 5.4.4 and 6.4.3 and Table 5.4.4 -CSA086-01) K_T = Treatment factor (Clause 5.4.3 and 6.4.4 -CSA086-01) KSB = Service condition factor applicable to Bending at extreme fibre (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) 5. KSV = Service condition factor applicable to longitudinal shear (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) 6. KSC = Service condition factor applicable to Compression parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 1. 2. 3. 4.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 109 of 391
CSA086-01) 7. K_SCP = Service condition factor applicable to Compression perpendicular to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) 8. KSE = Service condition factor applicable to modulus of elasticity (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA08601) 9. KST = Service condition factor applicable to tension parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) 10. KZB = Size factor applicable to bending (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01) 11. KZV = size factor applicable to shear(Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01) 12. KZT = size factor applicable to tension parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01) 13. KZCP = size factor applicable to compression perpendicular to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 CSA086-01) 14. K_ZC = size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 CSA086-01) 15. CHIX = Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01) 16. CV = shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01) 17. KN = Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01) The user has to give all these factors as input according to the classification of timber and stress grade. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances. Axial Tension i) For Sawn timber The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on one limit state. The limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on this limit state per Clause 5.5.9 of CSA086-01. ii) For Glulam timber The design of glulam tension members differs from sawn timber since CSA 086-01 assigns different specified strength for gross and net section. The specified strength at net section is slightly higher than the strength of the gross section. Therefore, Glulam tension members are designed based on two limit states. The first one is the limit state of yielding in the gross section. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net-section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Clause.6.5.11 of CSA086-01. Axial Compression The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause.5.5.6 and Clause.6.5.8.4 of CSA086-01. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (Kc). The effective length for the calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Bending The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of CSA086-01 and for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of CSA086-01. The allowable stress in bending is multiplied by Lateral stability factor, KL to take in account whether lateral support is provided at points of bearing to prevent lateral displacement and rotation Axial compression and bending The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uni-axial or biaxial bending is
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 110 of 391
obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and 6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition. Axial tension and bending The member strength for sections subjected to axial tension and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and 6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition. Shear The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 5.5.5 and 6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear.
International Codes
3D.6 Design Parameters
The design parameters outlined in Table below may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allows the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Canadian Timber design parameters Parameter Default Description Name Value Nsf KX 1.0 1.0
Net section factor for tension members K value for flexural torsional buckling
KY
1.0 1.0
KZ
K value in local Y-axis, usually minor axis K value in local Z-axis, usually major axis
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 111 of 391
LX
LY
LZ
KD
KH
K_T
KSB
Length for Member flexural torsional length buckling Length in local Y Member axis for length slenderness value KL/r Length in local Z Member axis for length slenderness value KL/r Load Duration Factor 1.0 [Clause.4.3.2, Table 4.3.2] System Factor [Clause 1.0 5.4.4/6.4.3, Table 5.4.4] Treatment Factor 1.0 [Clause 5.4.3/6.4.4] Service Condition Factor for Bending at 1.0 Extreme Fibre
Applicable for bending at extreme fibre [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 112 of 391
KSV
1.0
Service Condition Factor for Shear,

Applicable for longitudinal shear [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSC
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0
Service Condition Factor for Compression, Applicable for compression parallel to grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
Service Condition Factor for Modulus of Elasticity, Applicable for modulus of elasticty [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2] Service Condition Factor for Tension, Applicable for tension parallel to grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2] Size Factor for Bending,
KSE
KST
KZB
Applicable for bending [Clause.5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZV
KZT
1.0
Size Factor for Shear [Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5] Size Factor for Tension,
Applicable for tension parallel to grain [Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5] Size Factor for Compression, Applicable for compression perpendicular to grain [Clause .5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZCP
1.0 1.0
K_ZC
Size Factor for Compression,

Applicable for compression parallel to grain [Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
CV
1.0
Shear Load Coefficient [Table 6.5.7.4A]
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 113 of 391
KN
1.0 1.0
Notch Factor [Clause 5.4.7.2.2]
K_SCP
Service Condition Factor for Compression,

Applicable for compression perpendicular to grain [Clause 5.4.2 and Table 6.4.2]
CHIX
1.0
RATIO
1.0
Curvature Factor for Compression [Clause 6.5.6.5.2] Permissible Ratio of Actual to Allowable Value
International Codes
3D.7 Code Checking The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CSA086-01 requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
PARAMETER CODE TIMBER CAN KD 0.99 ALL KH 0.99 ALL K_T 0.99 ALL KSB 0.99 ALL KSV 0.99 ALL KSC 0.99 ALL KSE 0.99 ALL KST 0.99 ALL KZB 0.99 ALL KZV 0.99 ALL KZT 0.99 ALL KZCP 0.99 ALL K_ZC 0.99 ALL CV 0.99 ALL KN 0.99 ALL K_SCP 0.99 ALL CHIX 0.99 ALL
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 114 of 391
RATIO 0.99 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
International Codes
3D.8 Member Selection

Member selection based CSA086-2001 is not available.
International Codes
3D.9 Tabulated Results of Timber Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CSA086-01 specification, which governed the design. Pu = Actual Load in Compression Tu = Actual Load in Tension Muy = Ultimate moment in y direction Muz = Ultimate moment in z direction V = Ultimate shear force SLENDERNESS_Y = Actual Slenderness ratio in y direction SLENDERNESS_Z = Actual Slenderness ratio in z direction PY = Factored Compressive capacity in y direction PZ = Factored Compressive capacity in z direction T = Factored tensile capacity MY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction MZ = Factored moment of resistance in z direction V = Factored shear resistance SLENDERNESS = Allowable slenderness ratio
International Codes
3D.10 Verification Problems In the next few pages are included 6 verification examples for reference purposes.
Verification Problem: 1
Objective: - To determine the Canadian Glulam section column in axial compression. Column is effectively pinned at both ends and braced at mid-height in all direction.. Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01) Comparison: -
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 115 of 391

Input: -
Design Strength (kN) 295 293.739 -0.427 %
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR GLULAM DESIGN INPUT FILE: GLULAMCOLUMN.STD START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 10-JUN-05 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 9 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; UNIT INCHES KIP DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E E 9.7 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 1.44676e-005 ALPHA 5.5e-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT FEET POUND MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN 1 PRIS YD 0.748031 ZD 0.574147 UNIT INCHES KIP CONSTANTS MATERIAL GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E MEMB 1 SUPPORTS 1 PINNED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FY -214 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE TIMBER CANADIAN KY 0.5 ALL KZ 0.5 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Relevant portion of Output:-
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 175.00X228.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.728 1 214.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm | | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) 1
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 116 of 391
| Pu = 214.000 | Tu = 0.000 | Muy = 0.000 | Muz = 0.000 | V = 0.000 | SLENDERNESS_Y = 19.737 | SLENDERNESS_Z = 25.714 | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | PY = 413.943 | PZ = 293.793 | T = 0.000 | MY = 0.000 | MZ = 0.000 | V = 0.000 | SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------37. FINISH
Objective: - To determine the bending capacity of a Canadian Glulam section single span floor beam. The compression edge assumed fully supported. Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01) Reference: - Example 2, page 59, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001 Given: - Length =7500mm, Beam Spacing = 5000mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition, Untreated Comparison: Solution Design Strength in bending (kNm) Theory 208 STAAD 208.323 Difference 0.155 % Input: STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR GLULAM DESIGN INPUT FILE: glulamBEAM.STD START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 10-JUN-05 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 7.5 0 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 112 UNIT INCHES KIP DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E E 9.7 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 1.44676E-005 ALPHA 5.5E-006 ISOTROPIC GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E
Design Strength in shear (kN) 101 100.776 -0.221 %
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 117 of 391
E 12.4 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 1.44676E-005 ALPHA 5.5E-006 ISOTROPIC CONCRETE E 3150 POISSON 0.17 DENSITY 8.68E-005 ALPHA 5.5E-006 DAMP 0.05 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT FEET POUND MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN 1 PRIS YD 2.11942 ZD 0.426508 UNIT INCHES KIP CONSTANTS MATERIAL GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E MEMB 1 SUPPORTS 1 2 PINNED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -27.1 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE TIMBER CANADIAN CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086)

*********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 130.00X646.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5. 1.008 1 0.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | LEZ = 7500.000 LEY = 7500.000 LUZ = 7500.000 LUY = 7500.000mm | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | Pu = 0.000 | Tu = 0.000 | Muy = 0.000 | Muz = 0.000 | V = 101.625 | SLENDERNESS_Y = 16.932 | SLENDERNESS_Z = 1.529 | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | PY = 0.000 | PZ = 0.000 | T = 0.000 | MY = 41.923 | MZ = 208.323 | V = 100.776 | SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------46. FINISH
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 118 of 391
Objective: - To determine the capacity of a Canadian Glulam section in axial tension. Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01) Reference: - Example 3, page 158, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001 Given: - Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: Solution Design Strength in Tension (kN) Theory 257 STAAD 256.636 Difference -0.141 % Input: STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR GLULAM DESIGN INPUT FILE: glulamTENSION.STD START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 10-JUN-05 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 9 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 112 UNIT INCHES KIP DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E E 10.7 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 1.44676E-005 ALPHA 5.5E-006 ISOTROPIC CONCRETE E 3150 POISSON 0.17 DENSITY 8.68E-005 ALPHA 5.5E-006 DAMP 0.05 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT FEET POUND MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN 1 PRIS YD 0.872702 ZD 0.262467 UNIT INCHES KIP CONSTANTS MATERIAL GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E MEMB 1 SUPPORTS 1 PINNED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FY 250 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK PARAMETER
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 119 of 391
CODE TIMBER CANADIAN KY 0.5 ALL KZ 0.5 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Relevant portion of Output:STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) ********************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 80.00X266.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.974 1 250.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|------------------------------------------------------------------------| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000| | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | Pu = 0.000 | Tu = -250.000 | Muy = 0.000 | Muz = 0.000 | V = 0.000 | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | PY = 0.000 | PZ = 0.000 | T = 256.636 | MY = 0.000 | MZ = 0.000 | V = 0.000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Verification Problem: 4 Objective: - To determine the Canadian Sawn section column in axial compression. Column is effectively pinned at both ends. Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01) Reference: - Example 2, page 113, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001 Given: - Unbraced Length = 5000mm
Comparison: Solution Theory STAAD Difference Input: STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER INPUT FILE: sawn_ lumber_ COLUMN.STD START JOB INFORMATION
Design Strength (kN) 130 129.223 -0.597 %
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 120 of 391
ENGINEER DATE 08-JUN-05 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT FEET POUND JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 16.4042 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 112 DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC DFL_NO2_8X8_POST E 1.368E+006 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 25 ALPHA 5.5E-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL DFL_NO2_8X8_POST MEMB 1 UNIT FEET POUND MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN 1 TABLE ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST SUPPORTS 1 PINNED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 DEAD+LIVE LOAD JOINT LOAD 2 FY -114 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK PARAMETER CODE TIMBER CANADIAN KSC 0.91 ALL K_ZC 1.05 ALL CHECK CODE FINISH
***********************
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086)
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.882 114.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000 1
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm | | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | KSC = 0.910 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.050 CHIX = 1.000 | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | Pu = 114.000 | Tu = 0.000 | Muy = 0.000 | Muz = 0.000 | V = 0.000 | SLENDERNESS_Y = 26.178 | SLENDERNESS_Z = 26.178 | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | PY = 129.223 | PZ = 129.223 | T = 0.000 | MY = 0.000 | MZ = 0.000 | V = 0.000 | SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 121 of 391
Verification Problem: 5 Objective: - To determine the bending capacity of a Canadian sawn section single span floor beam. Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01) Reference: - Example 1, page 58, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001 Given: - Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: Solution Design Strength in Design Strength bending (kN-m) in shear (kN) Theory 79.8 46.1 STAAD 79.732 46.170 Difference -0.085 % No
Input: STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER: SAWN_LUMBER_BEAM.STD START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 08-JUN-05 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 3 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3; 2 3 2; UNIT FEET POUND DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_10X16_BM E 1.728e+006 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 25 ALPHA 5.5e-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL DFL_NO1_10X16_BM MEMB 1 2 UNIT FEET POUND MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN 1 2 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM SUPPORTS 1 2 FIXED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 DEAD+LIVE LOAD MEMBER LOAD 1 2 UNI GY -16.4 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE TIMBER CANADIAN KD 1.0 ALL K_T 1.0 ALL KSB 1.0 ALL
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 122 of 391
KZB 0.90 ALL KZV 0.90 ALL K_ZC 1.05 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Relevant portion of Output:ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 2 ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5.6 1.066 1 0.00 T 0.00 49.20 3.0000 |------------------------------------------------------------------------| LEZ = 3000.000 LEY = 3000.000 LUZ = 3000.000 LUY = 3000.000mm | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 0.900 | KZV = 0.900 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.050 CHIX = 1.000 | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | Pu = 0.000 | Tu = 0.000 | Muy = 0.000 | Muz = 49.200 | V = -49.200 | SLENDERNESS_Y = 4.511 | SLENDERNESS_Z = 2.158 | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | PY = 0.000 | PZ = 0.000 | T = 0.000 | MY = 79.800 | MZ = 79.732 | V = 46.170
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |------------------------------------------------------------------------Verification Problem: 6
Objective: - To determine the capacity of a Canadian Sawn section in axial tension. Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01) Reference: - Example 2, page 158, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001 Given: - Dry service condition, Untreated Comparison: Solution Design Strength in Tension (kN) Theory 185 STAAD 184.338 Difference -0.357% Input: -
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER SAWN_LUMBER_TENSION.STD START JOB INFORMATION
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 123 of 391
ENGINEER DATE 08-JUN-05 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT FEET POUND JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 16.4042 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_6X8_BM E 1.728e+006 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 25 ALPHA 5.5e-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT METER KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL DFL_NO1_6X8_BM MEMB 1 UNIT FEET POUND MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN 1 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM SUPPORTS 1 PINNED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 DEAD+LIVE LOAD JOINT LOAD 2 FY 144
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 124 of 391
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK PARAMETER CODE TIMBER CANADIAN KH 1.1 ALL KSC 0.91 ALL K_ZC 1.05 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Relevant portion of Output:STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086)

***********************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.781 144.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000 1
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.100 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | KSC = 0.910 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.050 CHIX = 1.000 | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | Pu = 0.000 | Tu = -144.000 | Muy = 0.000 | Muz = 0.000 | V = 0.000 | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | PY = 0.000 | PZ = 0.000 | T = 184.338 | MY = 0.000 | MZ = 0.000 | V = 0.000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------
International Codes
Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GB50010-2002

STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design per GB50010-2002. It can calculate the reinforcement needed for sections assigned through the PRISMATIC attribute. The concrete design calculations are based on the limit state method of GB50010-2002.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 125 of 391
International Codes
Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GB50010-2002

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed. For Beams For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, Tee and Trapezoidal) Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
International Codes
Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GBJ 10-89

will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set numbers in the above example represents a T-shape with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.
International Codes

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design as per GB500102002. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 9A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design. Please note as per GB50010-2002, STAAD supports Characteristic Values of Concrete Strength and Design Value of Strength of Steel Bar only as per Table 4.1.4 and Table 4.2.3-1 respectively.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 126 of 391
International Codes
4A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13( e.g. 0.,.1,.2,.25,.3,.4,.5,.6,.7,.75,.8,.9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes. Design for Flexure Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections are designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section, doubly reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section are designed only as singly reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural design of beams are performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account of the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the reinforcement detailing as per GB50010-2002 Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which the final detail drawing can be prepared. Design for Shear Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD program. Twolegged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. Beam Design Output The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced (0,.25,.5,.75 and 1.) sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with the default output option (TRACK 0.0) is presented below:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 127 of 391
International Codes
4A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the sections under biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 4A.1). Depending upon the member lengths, section dimensions and effective length coefficients specified by the user STAAD automatically determine the criterion (short or long) of the column design. All major
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 128 of 391
criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by GB50010-2002 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. Column Design Output Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced to obtain the details of section capacity calculations. All design output is given in SI units. An example of a long column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 129 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 130 of 391
International Codes
Chinese Codes - Steel Design Per GBJ 17-88
4B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation in STAAD of the National Standard of the Peoples Republic of China specifications for Design of Steel Structures (GBJ 17-88). The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of limit state design method. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the capacities. The most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like flange buckling, web crippling etc. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design: 1) Specify the geometry and factored loads. Perform the analysis. 2) Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values. 3) Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection. Analysis Methodology Member Property Specifications Built-in Chinese Steel Section Library Member Capacities
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 131 of 391
Combined Loading Design Parameters Code Checking Member Selection
International Codes

Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis, PDelta analysis or Non-linear analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results. Please note that STAAD does not automatically factor any loads. The responsibility of creating load combinations with factored loads is entirely upon the user.
International Codes

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Program Technical Reference manual.
International Codes
4B.4 Built-In Chinese Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members. An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections. B Shapes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 132 of 391
These shapes are designated in the following way.
Channels Channels are specified in the following way.
Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back to back double channel CH22B with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel CH40C with a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels. Angles Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 25mm and 16mm and a leg thickness of 3 mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
Double Angles Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by means of input of the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections) Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube is as shown below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is available in the steel table. In these examples,
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 133 of 391
members 1 to 5 consist of a 2X2X0.5 inch size tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of 10X5X0.1875 inch size tube section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10 times the width, and 16 times the thickness.
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections specified in this latter manner. Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections) Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe is as shown below. This method is meant for pipes whose property name is available in the steel table.
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this latter manner.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 134 of 391
International Codes
4B.5 Member Capacities

The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities. Allowable stress for Axial Tension In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of allowable tensile stresses provided in Table 3.2.1-2 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member per this allowable stress value and a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 1) and proceeds with member selection or code checking.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 135 of 391
Allowable stress for Axial Compression The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to Table 3.2.1-2. Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. The provisions of Section 5 are used to check the adequacy of sections in compression. Allowable stress for Bending and Shear Sections subjected to bending moments and shear forces are to be designed according to the provisions of section 5. The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such factors as outstanding legs and thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. Shear capacities are calculated according to Table 3.2.1-2 and Section 5 and are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0 or 2.0 for the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear capacities.
International Codes
4B.6 Combined Loading

For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending and shear), applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for all modeled loading situations. The procedure of Section 5 is implemented for combined axial load and bending.
International Codes

The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 1 of this chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
International Codes
4B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked per the GBJ 17-88 requirements.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 136 of 391
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
International Codes

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 137 of 391
International Codes
European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2

STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of concrete structures. In general, all the available codes, including EC2, follow the same procedure for the design of the concrete members. The main steps in performing a design operation are:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 138 of 391
These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design requirements. The parameters referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members considered in the design operation.
International Codes
5A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2)

Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures, Part 1, General rules and rules for buildings, provides design rules applicable to plain, reinforced or prestressed concrete used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the limit state philosophy common to modern standards. The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of factors to both the applied loads and the material properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global method of analysis to be used for calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD provides a number of methods for analysis, allowing Geometric Nonlinearity as well as P-Delta effects to be considered.
International Codes
5A.3 National Application Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Application Documents to be used with EC2. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC2. The current version of EC2 implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided in EC2 and has not been modified by any National Application Documents.
International Codes
5A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors

Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strengths, as given in table 2.3 of EC2, by the material partial safety factors gc for concrete and gs for reinforcements. The magnitude in STAAD is 1.5 for concrete and 1.15 for reinforcements. Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by user's numerical values provided in the input file.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 139 of 391
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on F, the partial safety factor for the action under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
International Codes
5A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the ends of the member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being designed that load case is ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message given to that affect. All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are assumed symmetrically arranged in the cross section. The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been considered is then reported as the critical required area of reinforcement. Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make due allowance for the additional moment that has to be considered in the design. Please note that sway type structures are not directly covered in the current implementation of EC2. This effect, however, can be catered for by the P-DELTA analysis option.
International Codes
5A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load cases are scanned to create appropriate envelopes for the design process. Maximum torsional moment is also identified and incorporated in the design. Design for flexure Reinforcement for both positive and negative moments is calculated on the basis of the section properties provided by the user. If the required reinforcement exceeds the maximum allowable then the section size is inadequate and a massage to that effect is given in the output. Parabolic-rectangular stress distribution for the concrete section is adopted and as moment redistribution is not available in STAAD analysis, the limit for N.A to depth ratio is set according to clause 2.5.3.4.2 (5) of the code. If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to satisfy the above limits. It is important to know that beams are designed for the flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the design at all. Design for Shear Shear reinforcement design is based on the standard method mentioned in clause 4.3.2.4.3 where it is assumed the notional strut inclination is constant. Depending on the shear distribution within the member it may be possible that nominal shear reinforcement will be sufficient to cater for the design shear forces. If
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 140 of 391
this is not the case an attempt is made to identify regions where nominal reinforcement is insufficient and appropriate reinforcement is then calculated to cover the excess design shear force. The maximum shear force that can be carried without crushing the concrete is also checked and if exceeded, a message to revise the section size is given in the output file. Design for Torsion Torsional moments arising as a result of equilibrium requirements need to be designed for at the ultimate limit state. Reinforcement for torsional moments consists of stirrups combined with longitudinal bars. The combined magnitude of shear stress arising from shear forces and torsional moments are checked in order to establish whether the section size is adequate. If section size is inadequate a massage is given in the output file, otherwise, full design is carried out and both shear links and longitudinal bars required are calculated and, where necessary, links are combined with the shear force links and printed in a tabulated manner in the output file.
International Codes
5A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the model of the structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for flexure except that shear forces are assumed to be resisted without the provision of shear reinforcements. In cases where this may not be the case users must ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The output for the slab design refers to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the local x direction of the element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local y direction of the element. Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which relates to the element's 'TOP' and 'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of the element. This may not coincide with the slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, users must ensure this through the numbering scheme of the elements (see figure 1.13 in the STAAD Technical Reference Manual). The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior faces.
International Codes

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active "unit" specification. Table 5A.1 lists all the relevant EC2 parameters together with description and default values.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 141 of 391
5A.9 Parameter Definition Table
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 142 of 391
International Codes
European Codes - Steel Design Per Eurocode EC3
5B.1 General Description

Introduction STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of steel structures. In the main, all the available codes, including EC3, follow the same procedure to either code-check or select suitable members of an analyzed structure. The main steps in performing a design operation are: 1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the design process. 2. Providing appropriate parameter values if different from the default values. 3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection. These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design requirements. The parameters referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members considered in the design operation. Eurocode (EC3) Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings (EC3) provides design rules applicable to structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the ultimate limit states philosophy common to modern standards. The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 143 of 391
factors to both the applied loads and the material properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global method of analysis to be used for calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3. These are Simple, Continuous, and Semicontinuous which reflect the ability of the joints in developing moments. In STAAD only Simple and Continuous joint types can be assumed when carrying out global analysis. Axes convention in STAAD and EC3 By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as zz and the minor axis as yy. A special case where zz is the minor axis and yy is the major axis is available if the SET Z UP command is used and is discussed in the Technical Reference Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as x and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction. EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below. Users must bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
National Application Documents Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Application Documents to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC3. The current version of EC3 implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided in EC3 and has not been modified by any National Application Documents. Section Classification The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section prevents the development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to establish this possibility prior to determining the section capacities. Cross sections are classified in accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the design process, STAAD determines the section class and calculates the capacities accordingly. Material Properties and Load Factors Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strength, as given in table 3.1, by the material partial safety factor gm. The magnitude of gm in STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to all section types.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 144 of 391
Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by users numerical values provided in the input file.
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on gf, the partial safety factor for the action under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the factors and their use in various load combinations. Axially Loaded Members For members subject to tension loads only, tension capacity is calculated based on yield strength, material factor gm and cross-sectional area of the member with possible reduction due to bolt holes. When bolt holes need to be considered in the capacity calculations the value used for gm is 1.2 and the yield strength is replaced with the ultimate tensile strength of the material. The tension capacity is then taken as the smaller of the full section capacity and the reduced one. For members subject to compression only, cross-section resistance as well as buckling resistance must be checked. The latter is often more critical as it is influenced by a number of factors including the section type and member unbraced length. Beams The main requirement for a beam is to have sufficient cross-section resistance to the applied bending moment and shear force. Also the possibility of lateral-torsional buckling must be taken into consideration when the full length of the member is not laterally restrained. The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material yield strength. There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can both attain full capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain sufficient rotation required for plastic analysis of the model. Class 3 sections, due to local buckling, cannot develop plastic moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to the extreme compression fiber of the section. The elastic section modulus is used to determine the moment capacity. Class 4 sections do suffer from local buckling and explicit allowance must be made for the reduction in section properties before the moment capacity can be determined. Further, because of interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however, does not occur unless the value of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of the section. In such cases the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section. The plastic shear capacity is calculated using the appropriate shear area for the section and the yield strength in shear, taken as / . y As mentioned earlier lateral-torsional buckling must also be considered whenever the full length of the member is not laterally restrained. The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the unrestrained length, restraint conditions and type of applied loading. Axially Loaded Members With Moments The bending resistance of members subject to coexistent axial load is reduced by the presence of the axial f
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 145 of 391
load. The presence of large shear, as mentioned above, can also reduce the bending resistance of the section under consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction in bending resistance, then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into account before calculating the effect of the axial load on the bending resistance of the section. Generally, EC3 requires to check cross-section resistance for local capacity and also check the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fiber stress and calculating an effective applied moment for the section. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling resistance of the section.
International Codes

Introduction Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active unit specification. Table 5B.1 lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and default values.
Parameter Definition Table
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 146 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 147 of 391
Notes: 1. LEG - Table 25 BS5950 for Fastener Control The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member. To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member. The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950 connection definition:-
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 148 of 391
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as the weak vv axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:La = KY * KY Lb = KZ * LZ The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength pc for the stronger principal axis. Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used. For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair. 2. BEAM Ensure that the BEAM parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing code checking for members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 149 of 391
Notes
International Codes
5B.3 Worked Examples
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 150 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 151 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 152 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 153 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 154 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 155 of 391
Maximum design moment = 157.2 KNm < 307.0 KNm Therefore buckling resistance moment is satisfactory.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 156 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 157 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 158 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 159 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 160 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 161 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 162 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 163 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 164 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 165 of 391
International Codes
5B.4 Users Examples

Example 1 The following input file is for the single beam in example 1. Only code check related output is enclosed.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 166 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 167 of 391
Example 2 The following input file is for the beam in example 2. Only code check related output is enclosed.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 168 of 391
Example 3 The following input file is for the simple column in example 3. Only code check related output is enclosed.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 169 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 170 of 391
Example 4 The following input file is for the column in example 4. Only code check related output is enclosed.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 171 of 391
International Codes
European Codes - Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1. (BS EN 1995-1-1:2004)
5C.1 General Comments

The Timber Design facility as per EC5 in STAAD is based on the European Standard Eurocode 5: Design of Timber Structures - Part 1-1 - General - Common rules and rules for buildings. Principles of Limit States Design of Timber Structures are adopted as specified in the code. The application is limited to the PRISMATIC rectangular shapes only. There is no Eurocode-specific timber section database / library consisting of pre-defined shapes for analysis or for design. The feature of member selection is thus not applicable to this code. The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 172 of 391
designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all timber structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of EC 5. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document. Axes convention in STAAD and EC5 STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as zz and the minor axis as yy. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as x and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction. EC5, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure 1 below:
STAAD
EC5
Figure 1 Axes convention in STAAD and EC5
Determination of Factors (A) Kmod Modification factor taking into account of Load-duration (LDC) and Moisture-content (Service Class - SCL). Reference Table 3.1 of EC-5-2004. For Solid Timber, the values are incorporated in the program. (B) gm Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-2004. For Solid Timber, the value of gm (= 1.3) is incorporated in the program. (C) Kh Size Factor. For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less than the reference width in tension the characteristic strength in tension (ft0k) is to be increased by the factor Kh.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 173 of 391
For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth in bending, the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by the factor Kh. As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a characteristic timber density r k 700 kg/m 3 the reference depth in bending or the reference width (maximum cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm. The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is incorporated in the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the value of K h for Glued laminated timber and Laminated veener lumber respectively. (D) KC90 Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and degree of compressive deformation. For members, subjected to compression, perpendicular to the direction of grain alignment, this factor should be taken into account. Default value of 1 is used in STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.5 of EC-5-2004 in this regard. (E) Km Factor considering re-distribution of bending stress in cross section. For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress checking. For rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is incorporated in STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.6 of EC-5-2004 in this regard. (F) Kshape Factor depending on shape of cross section. For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be less than equal design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This factor is determined by STAAd.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause 6.1.8 of EC-5-2004 .
International Codes
5C.2 Analysis Methodology Symbols Description S t0d S t90d S c0d S c90d S mzd S myd S vd S tor d Design tensile stress parallel (at zero degree) to grain alignment. Design tensile stress perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to grain alignment. Design compressive stress parallel to grain alignment. Design compressive stress perpendicular to grain alignment. Design bending stress about zz axis. Design bending stress about yy axis. Design shear stress. Design torsional stress.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 174 of 391
F t0d F t90d F c0d F c90d F mzd F myd F vd RATIO
Design tensile strength - parallel to the grain alignment. Design tensile strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment. Design compressive strength - parallel to the grain alignment. Design compressive strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment. Design bending strength - about zz-axis. Design bending strength - about yy-axis. Design shear strength about yy axis. Permissible ratio of stresses as provided by the user. The default value is 1.
l z ,l rel,z l y ,l rel,y E 0,05 G 0,05 Iz Iy I tor f mk b, h
Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about zz axis. Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about yy axis. Fifth percentile value of modulus of elasticity parallel to grain. Fifth percentile value of shear modulus parallel to grain. Second moment of area about the strong z-axis. Second moment of area about the weak y-axis. Torsional moment of inertia. Characteristic bending strength. Width and depth of beam.
Equations for Characteristic Values of Timber Species as per Annex-A of EN 338:2003 The following equations were used to determine the characteristic values: Basic Inputs: For a particular Timber Strength Class (TSC), the following characteristic strength values are required to compute the other related characteristic values. 1. 2. 3. Bending Strength f m,k Mean Modulus of Elasticity in bending E 0, mean Density - r k Wood Type Softwood Hardwood (D) (C) 0.6 * f m,k
Sl. No. 1.
Property Tensile Strength parallel to grain
Symbol f t,0,k
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 175 of 391
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
Tensile Strength perpendicular to grain Compressive Strength parallel to grain Compressive Strength perpendicular to grain Shear Strength
f t,90,k f c,0,k
Minimum of {0.6 and (0.0015*r k )} 5 * (f m,k ) 0.45 0.007*r k 0.0015*r k
f c,90,k f v,k
7. 8. 9.
Modulus of Elasticity parallel to E 0,05 0.67* E 0,mean 0.84* E 0,mean grain Mean Modulus of Elasticity E 90,mean E 0,mean /30 E 0,mean /15 perpendicular to grain Mean Shear E 0,mean /16 G mean Modulus Shear Modulus G 0,05 E 0,05 /16
Minimum of {3.8 and (0.2*f m,k 0.8 )}
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations, may differ with the tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all such cases, the values obtained from the provided equations are treated as actual and is used by the program, as the values of Table-1 are based on these equations. Finding the Design values of Characteristic Strength As per clause 2.4.1, Design values of a strength property shall be calculated as:
Where X d is design value of strength property, X k characteristic value of strength property and g m is partial factor for material properties. The member resistance in timber structure, is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in EC5. This depends on several factors such as cross sectional properties, different load and material factors, timber strength class, load duration class, service class and so on. The methodology adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistance is explained here. Check for Tension stresses If the direction of applied axial tension is parallel to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked: .(cf : Equation 6.1 of EC-5-2004) If the direction of applied axial tension is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 176 of 391
Check for Compression stresses If the direction of applied axial compression is parallel to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked: .(cf:Equation 6.2 of EC-5-2004) If the direction of applied axial compression is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked: (cf:Equation 6.3 of EC-5-2004) Check for Bending stresses If members are under bending stresses, the following conditions should be satisfied.Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
.(cf:Equation 6.11 of EC-5-2004)
.(cf:Equation 6.12 of EC-5-2004) Check for Shear stresses Horizontal stresses are calculated and checked against allowable values: .( cf:Equation 6.13 of EC-5-2004) Check for Torsional stresses Members subjected to torsional stress should satisfy the following equation:
.( cf:Equation 6.14 of EC-5-2004) Check for combined Bending and Axial tension Members subjected to combined action of bending and axial tension stress should satisfy the following conditions. Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
(cf:Equation 6.17 of EC-5-2004)
( cf:Equation 6.18 of EC-5-2004)
Check for combined Bending and axial Compression
If members are subjected to bending and axial compression stress, following equations should be satisfied.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 177 of 391
Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
( cf:Equation 6.19 of EC-5-2004) . ( cf:Equation 6.20 of EC-5-2004)
Stability check (A) Column Stability check The relative slenderness ratios should be calculated as follows. Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
.( Equation 6.21 of EC-5-2004) .( Equation 6.22 of EC-5-2004) If both l rel,z and l rel,y are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions should be satisfied:
In other cases, the following conditions should be satisfied. Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
... ( cf:Equation 6.24 of EC-5-2004) Where the symbols Kcz and Kcy are defined as follows. Please note that in STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis:
...( Equation 6.25 of EC-5-2004)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 178 of 391
( Equation 6.26 of EC-5-2004) ( Equation 6.27 of EC-5-2004) .( Equation 6.28 of EC-5-2004) The value of b c incorporated in the software is the one for solid timber ,i.e. 0.2. (B) Beam Stability check If members are subjected to only a moment about the strong axis z, the stresses should satisfy the following equation:
.( cf:Equation 6.33 of EC-5-2004) Where a combination of moment about the strong z-axis and compressive force exists, the stresses should satisfy the following equation:
Where,
..
( Equation 6.34 of EC-5-2004)
..( Equation 6.30 of EC-5-2004) For hardwood:
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 179 of 391
5C.3 Design Parameters

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active unit specification. Parameter Name Default Value 3 Description Service Class (Ref. Cl.2.3.1.3) 1 = Class 1, Moisture content <= 12% 2 = Class 2, Moisture content <= 20% 3 = Class 3, Moisture content > 20% Load Duration Class (Ref. Cl.2.3.1.2), required to get the K-MOD value from Table 3.1. 1 - Permanent action 2 - Long term action 3 - Medium term action 4 - Short term action 5 - Instantaneous action Timber Strength Class (Ref. Reference EN338 2003) Softwood: 1 = C14, 2 = C16, 3 = C18, 4 = C20, 5 = C22, 6 = C24, 7 = C27, 8 = C30, 9 = C35, 10 = C40, 11 = C45, 12 = C50. Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14 = D35, 15 = D40, 16 = D50, 17 = D60, 18 = D70. This TSC definition will calculate the corresponding characteristic strength values using the equations as given in BS-EN338, Annex - A. Angle of inclination of load to the grain alignment. (Ref. Cl.6.1.1, Cl.6.1.2, Cl.6.1.3, Cl.6.1.4) 0.0 = Load parallel to grain, 90.0 = Load Perpendicular to grain Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and degree of compressive deformation. (Ref. Cl.6.1.5-(2)) Range: 1.0 KC90 4.0
SCL
LDC
TSC
6 (C24)
ALPHA
0.0
KC90
1.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 180 of 391
MTYP
Other than the default value, user may specify any value within the range, depending on load-position, loaddispersion, contact length at support locations etc. Member Type: Beam/Column. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2, Cl.6.3.3) 0 Not defined by the user checks both clauses (Default). 1 Beam Member 2 Column Member This information is required to find which stability check will be performed as per the Cl 6.3 according to the Member Type. Effective Length Factor to check Lateral Torsional Buckling. (Ref. Table 6.1) Span of the beam depending on the support conditions and load configurations. The user will put the appropriate value from the Table 6.1.
KLEF
1.0 (Member Length)
KLY
KLZ TRACK RATIO SERV
Required only for MTYP has a value of 1 (Beam). 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Local-y-axis. (Member (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the computation of the relative slenderness ratios. Length) 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Local-z-axis. (Member (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the computation of the relative slenderness ratios. Length) 0 Degree/Level of Details of design output results. Available options: 0 / 1 / 2 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable value. No Default Defines the load case numbers those are to be considered for serviceability Value (deflection) check. The list of this parameter must contain only the valid load-case numbers. Deflection checks will be performed only on those load-case results. If this parameter is not provided, then in-spite of the presence of the parameter DFF the deflection check will NOT be performed. No Default Deflection Length / Max. Allowable Net Final Local Deflection. Value In this case, deflection check will be performed, if both the parameters SERV and DFF are present with specific values.
DFF
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 181 of 391
DJ1 DJ2
For appropriate range of values, please refer Cl.7.2 (Table 7.2) Start node number for a physical member under consideration for Deflection Check. End node number for a physical member under consideration for Deflection Check.
International Codes
5C.4 Verification Problems

In the next few pages are included 2 verification examples for reference purposes. Verification Problem No. 1 A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is subjected to an axial compressive force of 50.0 kN. Design of the member - ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE Material properties: Timber class: C24 Service classes: Class 2, moisture content <= 20% Load duration classes: Medium-term Cross section properties: Length of the member is 1 m. Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm, Effective cross sectional area A = 14454 mm, Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r y = 21 mm, Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r z = 57 mm, Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W z = 4.770x10 5 mm Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W y = 1.759x10 5 mm Characteristic material properties for timber: Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 from table 3.1 Material factors g m = 1.30 from table 2.3 f c0k = 21.00 N/mm, F c0d = (Kmod.f c0k )/g m = (0.80x21.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm[Cl 2.4.1(1)P] Cross section loads: F x = 50.000 kN Compression parallel to the grain: S c0d = (1000xF x )/A = (1000x50.000)/14454 = 3.46N/mm < 12.92N/mm (F c0d ) The ratio of actual compressive stress to allowable compressive strength:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 182 of 391
= 3.46 / 12.92 = 0.268 < 1.0 Check for Slenderness: Slenderness ratios:
[Cl. 6.1.4.(1)P]
l z = (1000/57) = 17.54 and l y = (1000/21) = 47.62
E 0,mean = 1.1031 kN/m 2 As timber grade is C24, i.e, Soft Wood, E 0,05 = 0.67 * E 0,mean [Annex A,EN 338:2003] = 0.809 = 0.298 Since, l rel,y is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied:
[Cl. 6.3.2.(3)] [Cl. 6.3.2.(3)] = 0.878 = 0.541 = 0.82 = 1.0 For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. The member is subjected to Compression only, so actual bending stress is zero.
Hence the critical ratio is 0.326 < 1.0 and the section is safe. The Input File:
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 183 of 391
1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC WOOD E 1.10316e+007 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 0.00231749 ALPHA 5.5e-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL CONSTANTS MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1 MEMBER PROPERTY 1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073 SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -50 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE TIMBER EC5 ALPHA 0 ALL LDC 3 ALL SCL 2 ALL TSC 6 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
The member checking part of the output file:
Verification Problem No. 2: A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is subjected to an axial compressive force of 5.0 kN and moments of 2.0 kN.m and 1.0 kN.m about its major and minor axes respectively. Design of the member - ULTIMATE LIMIT STATE Material properties: Timber Strength Class: C24
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 184 of 391
Service classes: Class 2, moisture content <=20% Load duration: Medium-term Cross section properties: Length of the member is 1 m. Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm, Effective cross sectional area A = 14454 mm, Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r y = 21 mm, Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r z = 57 mm, Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W z = 4.770x10 5 mm Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W y = 1.759x10 5 mm Characteristic material properties for timber: Modification factor, Material factor Kmod = 0.80 g m = 1.30
= 21.00 N/mm, E 0,05 = 7370 N/mm 2 , f Fc0k = Kmod.f c0k /g m = (0.80x21.00)/1.30 = 12.92N/mm c0d f myk = 24.00 N/mm, F myd = Kmod.f myk /g m = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm f mzk = 24.00 N/mm, F mzd = Kmod.f mzk /g m = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm Cross section loads: F x = 5.000 kN, M z = 2.000 kN.m, M y = 1.000 kN.m Check for Slenderness: Slenderness ratios: l z = (1000/57) = 17.54 and l y = (1000/21) = 47.62 = 0.809 = 0.298 Since, l rel,y is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied:
[Cl. 6.3.2.(3)] [Cl. 6.3.2.(3)] = 0.878 = 0.541 = 0.82 = 1.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 185 of 391
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70 S c0d = (1000F x /A) = (1000x5.000)/14454 = 0.35 N/mm S mzd = (10 6 xM z )/W z = (10 6 x2.000)/(4.770x10 5 ) = 4.19 N/mm S myd = (10 6 xM y )/W y = (10 6 x1.000)/(1.759x10 5 ) = 5.69 N/mm
Hence the critical ratio is 0.616 < 1.0 and the section is safe. The Input File:
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 08-Jun-05 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC WOOD E 1.10316e+007 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 0.00231749 ALPHA 5.5e-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL CONSTANTS MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1 MEMBER PROPERTY 1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073 SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FY -5.0 MX 1.0 MZ 2.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE TIMBER EC5 ALPHA 0 ALL LDC 3 ALL SCL 2 ALL TSC 6 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
The member checking part of the output file:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 186 of 391
International Codes
French Codes - Concrete Design Per B.A.E.L.
6A. Design Operations

STAAD has the capabilities for performing design of concrete beams, columns and slabs according to B.A.E.L. - 1983. Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcing to resist the various input loads.
International Codes

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design per B.A.E.L. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, of commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 5A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters and their default values.
International Codes
6A.3 Slender Effects And Analysis Consideration

STAAD provides the user two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is a procedure which takes into account second order effects. Here STAAD accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. STAAD, after solving for the joint displacements of the structure, calculates the additional moments induced in the structure. Therefore, by using PDELTA ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will require no user modification before beginning member design. The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is through user
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 187 of 391
supplied moment magnification factors. Here the user approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before beginning member design.
International Codes

Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required input:
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 300 mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear areas (AY & AZ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not provided, the program will calculate values from YD and ZD.
International Codes
6A.5 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total number of sections considered is twelve, unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed, with cut-off lengths calculated to include required development length. Shear design includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 188 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 189 of 391
International Codes
6A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases.
International Codes

Slab and walls are designed per BAEL 1983 specifications. To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter II, section 6.40.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 190 of 391
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLEAR listed in Table 5A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 5A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
International Codes
French Codes - Steel Design Per The French Code

STAAD implementation of French Steel Design is based on Centre Technique Industrial de la Construction Metallique publication entitled "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork." The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned according to the limit states of which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-states are recognized: ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability; that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria, as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other related parameters. The code checking portion of the program verifies that code requirements for each selected section are met and also identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of STAAD implementation of "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork." A detailed description of the design process, along with its underlying concepts and assumptions, is available in the specification document.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 191 of 391
Basis of Methodology Member Capacities Combined Axial Force And Bending Design Parameters Code Checking And Member Selection Tabulated Results Of Steel Design Buit-in French Steel Section Library
International Codes
6B.2 Basis of Methodology

The "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork (Revision 80)" permits the usage of elastic analysis. Thus, in STAAD, linear elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments in the members. However, strength and stability considerations are based on the principles of plastic behaviour. Axial compression buckling and lateral torsional buckling are taken into consideration for calculation of axial compression resistance and flexural resistance of members. Slenderness calculations are made and overall geometric stability is checked for all members.
International Codes

The member strengths are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 4 of this specification. Note that the program automatically considers co-existence of axial force, shear and bending in calculating section capacities. For axial tension capacity, procedures of section 4.2 are followed. For axial compression capacity, formulas of section 5.3 are used. Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections 4.5 and 4.6. Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate twisting moment per section 5.22 of the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 6B.1) must be used to specify the unsupported length of the compression flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note that this length is also referred to as twisting length.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 192 of 391
6B.4 Combined Axial Force And Bending

The procedures of sections 4.55 and 5.32 are implemented for interaction of axial forces and bending. Appropriate interaction equations are used and the governing criteria is determined.
International Codes

The design parameters outlined in Table 6B.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program, thus allowing the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected as frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
International Codes
6B.6 Code Checking And Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in STAAD implementation of CM 66 (Revn. 80). For general information on these options, refer to Chapter II, sections 3.4 and 3.5. For information on specification of these commands, refer to Chapter II, and section 6.46.
International Codes
6B.7 Tabulated Results Of Steel Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in the output file in a tabular format. Please note the following: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66 (Revn. 80) specification which governed the design. If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed. The following is a detailed description of printed items:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 193 of 391
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are: Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection. Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values. These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements. Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle, double angle, channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams and code checking of prismatic properties.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 194 of 391
International Codes
6B.8 Built-In French Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members. An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections. IPE Shapes These shapes are designated in the following way.
HE shapes HE shapes are specified as follows.
IPN Shapes The designation for the IPN shapes is similar to that for the IPE shapes.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 195 of 391
T Shapes Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
U Channels Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
Double U Channels Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back to back double channel UAP150 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels. Angles Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness of 2.7mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) should be used instead of ST.
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4 appears in the section
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 196 of 391
name, the decimal part is not part of the section name. Double Angles Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by means of input of the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections) Section names of tubes, just like angles, consist of the depth, width and wall thickness as shown below.
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall thickness of 2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width of 100mm and a wall thickness of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is part of the section name. Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations. For example,
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections specified in this way. Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections) To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal portion of the value provided for the diameter. The following example illustrates the designation.
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm. Members 3, 64 and 78 are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 12.5mm. Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 197 of 391
International Codes
German Codes - Concrete Design Per DIN 1045
7A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 198 of 391
sections considered is 13 (e.g. 0.,.1,.2,.25,.3,.4,.5,.6,.7,.75,.8,.9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes. Design for Flexure Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexural design is performed again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per the DIN code. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared. Design for Shear and Torsion Shear design in STAAD conforms to the specifications of section 17.5 of DIN 1045. Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear and torsional design is performed at the start and end sections of the member at a distance "d" away from the node of the member where "d" is the effective depth calculated from flexural design. The maximum shear forces from amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments are used in the design. The capacity of the concrete in shear and torsion is determined at the location of design and the balance, if any, is carried by reinforcement. It is assumed that no bent-up bars are available from the flexural reinforcement to carry and "balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
International Codes
7A.6 Column Design
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 199 of 391
Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. The requirements of DIN 1045-figure 13, for calculating the equilibrium equations for rectangular and circular sections from first principles, is implemented in the design. The user has control of the effective length (sk) in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as described on Table 6A.1. This means that the slenderness will be evaluated along with e/d to meet the requirements of DIN 1045 section 17.4.3 and 17.4.4. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. Square and rectangular columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on all four sides equally. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. The TRACK parameter may be used to obtain the design details in various levels of descriptivity.
International Codes

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on the DIN 1045 - November 1989. Slab design is also available but this follows the requirements of Baumann, Munich, which is the basis for Eurocode 2. Design for a member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are also reported in the output.
International Codes

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 7A.1 of
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 200 of 391
this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 201 of 391
International Codes

In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
International Codes
7A.2 Section Types For Concrete Design

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed. For Beams - Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) For Columns - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 202 of 391
International Codes
7A.7 Slab Design

To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite elements and analysed. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual. Slabs are designed to specifications as described by BAUMANN of MUNICH which is the basis for Eurocode 2. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The following parameters are those applicable to slab design:
The other parameters shown in Table 7A.1 are not applicable to slab design. BAUMANN equations. If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on Mx and My forces which are obtained from the STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce resolved BAUMANN forces into the design replacing the pure Mx and My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section, resolved as an axial force. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. If SRA is set to -500, an orthogonal layout will be assumed. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is given in degrees measured from the local element X axis anticlockwise (positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 10mm in the longitudinal direction and 8mm in the transverse. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the slab exterior face.
International Codes
7A.4 Slenderness Effects And Analysis Considerations

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in DIN 1045 17.4.3/17.4.4 which is used as the basis for commonly used design charts considering e/d and sk/d for conditions where the slenderness
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 203 of 391
moment exceeds 70. This method has been adopted in the column design in STAAD per the DIN code. The second option is to compute the secondary moments through an analysis. Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The column is designed for the total moment which is the sum of the primary and secondary forces. The secondary moments can be compared to those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
International Codes
German Codes - Steel Design Per DIN 18800
7B.1 General This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the DIN code of practice for structural steel design (DIN 18800 and DIN 4114) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design: 1) Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis. 2) Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values. 3) Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
International Codes

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 204 of 391
performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
International Codes
7B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members during the analysis. An example of member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections. IPE Shapes These shapes are designated in the following way:
HE Shapes The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
I Shapes I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example illustrates the designation.
T Shapes Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
U Channels The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections. The former (U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter (U260) has a depth of 260mm.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 205 of 391
Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel, e.g. D U180. The spacing between the double channels is provided following the expression SP.
Angles Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 20mm and a leg thickness of 2.5mm. The above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
Double Angles Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by using the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between the angles is provided by using the word SP and the spacing value following the section name.
Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections) To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 206 of 391
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used. Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections) Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mmX60mm and the wall thickness of 3.6mm. Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) instead of by their table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current length units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for TUBE sections specified this way.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 207 of 391
International Codes
7B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is checked per the DIN requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 208 of 391
For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending and shear), applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for all modeled loading situations. Members subjected to axial force and bending are checked using the criteria of DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 6.1.6. In addition, for members with compression and bending, the criteria of DIN 4114 (Part 1) - Section 10 is used. Similarly, for members with axial tension and bending, the criteria of DIN 4114 (Part 1) - Section 15 is used.
International Codes

The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 7B.1 of this chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 209 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 210 of 391
International Codes

The allowable stresses used in the implementation are based on DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 7. The procedures of DIN 4114 are used for stability analysis. The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities. Allowable stress for Axial Tension In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 6B.1) and proceeds with member selection or code checking. Allowable stress for Axial Compression The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to the procedure of DIN 4114
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 211 of 391
(Part 1) - Section 7. Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. Allowable stress for Bending and Shear The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0 or 2.0 for the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear capacities.
International Codes

For specification of member properties of standard German steel sections, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Program User's manual.
International Codes

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 212 of 391
Indian Codes - Concrete Design Per IS456

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on limit state method of IS:456 (2000).
International Codes

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed. For Beams For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), T-Beams and L-shapes Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
International Codes

will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set numbers in the above example represents a T-shape with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design
International Codes
The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design as per IS:456(2000). Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newtonbefore performing the concrete design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 213 of 391
Table 8A.1 Indian Concrete Design IS456 Parameters Parameter Default Description Value Name FYMAIN Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel. 415 N/mm2 2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel. FYSEC 415 N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress. FC 30 N/mm 25 mm For beam members. CLEAR 40 mm For column members 10 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size. MINMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size. MAXMAIN 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. MINSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar size. MAXSEC BRACING 0.0
BEAM DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the effect of axial force will be taken into account for beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the column is unbraced about major axis. A value of 2.0 means the column is unbraced about minor axis. A value of 3.0 means the column is unbraced about both axis. Maximum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement in columns. A value of 4.0 means longitudinal reinforcement in column is arranged equally along 4 faces. A value of 2.0 invokes 2 faced distribution about major axis. A value of 3.0 invokes 2 faced distribution about minor axis. Width to be used for design. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. Total depth to be used for design. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. BEAM DESIGN: For TRACK = 0.0, output consists of reinforcement details at START, MIDDLE and END. For TRACK = 1.0, critical moments are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output. For TRACK = 2.0, required steel for intermediate sections defined by NSECTION are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output. COLUMN DESIGN: With TRACK = 0.0, reinforcement details are printed. With TRACK = 1.0, column interaction analysis results are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output. With TRACK = 2.0, a schematic interaction diagram and intermediate interaction values are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output. With TRACK = 9.0, the details of section
RATIO RFACE
4.0 4.0
WIDTH DEPTH TRACK
ZD YD 0.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 214 of 391
REINF ELZ ELZ ULY ULZ TORSION
0.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
capacity calculations are printed. Tied column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral reinforcement. Ratio of effective length to actual length of column about major axis. Ratio of effective length to actual length of column about major axis. Ratio of unsupported length to actual length of column about minor axis. Ratio of unsupportd length to actual length of column about major axis. A value of 0.0 means torsion to be considered in beam design. A value of 1.0 means torsion to be neglected in beam design. Minimum clear distance between main reinforcing bars in beam and column. For column centre to centre distance between main bars cannot exceed 300mm. Face of support location at start of beam. It is used to check against shear at the face of the support in beam design. The parameter can also be used to check against shear at any point from the start of the member. Face of support location at end of beam. The parameter can also be used to check against shear at any point from the end of the member. (Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are input as positive numbers). Perform shear check against enhanced shear strength as per Cl. 40.5 of IS456:2000. ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary shear check to be performed ( no enhancement of shear strength at sections close to support) For ENSH = a positive value(say x ), shear strength will be enhanced upto a distance x from the start of the member. This is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. (Refer note ) For ENSH = a negative value(say y), shear strength will be enhanced upto a distance y from the end of the member. This is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts.(Refer note) If default value (0.0) is used the program will calculate Length to Overall Depth ratio. If this ratio is greater than 2.5, shear strength will be enhanced at sections (<2d) close to support otherwise ordinary shear check will be performed.
SPSMAIN
25 mm
SFACE
0.0
EFACE
0.0
ENSH
0.0
RENSH
Distance of the start or end point of the member from its nearest support. This parameter is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. (Refer note) Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 8A.8 for details.
0.0
Note: Value of ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when the span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition is aroused RENSH parameter is also to be used.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 215 of 391
Example:
Consider a single span beam that has been defined with four beam segments thus:-
The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L metre. The shear strength will be enhanced upto X metre from both supports. The input should be the following: Steps: ENSH L MEMB 1 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the member 1, positive sign indicates length measured from start of the member Shear strength will be enhanced upto a length (X-L) of the member 2, length measured from the start of the member Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the member 4, negative sign indicates length measured from end of the member
ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 =>
ENSH L MEMB 4 =>
ENSH (X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced upto a length (X-L) of the member 3, length measured from the end of the member RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from both the members 2 and 3.
DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4 => This will enhance the shear strength upto length X from both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and gives spacing accordingly. At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1 At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4 where tc,enhanced = 2dtc/av At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become infinity. However for any section shear stress cannot exceed tc,max. Hence enhanced shear strength is limited to a maximum value of tc,max.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 216 of 391
8A.5 Slenderness Effects And Analysis Consideration

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. The IS:456 code specifies two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated (Clause 39.7). One option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design moments. STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first options. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The PDELTA ANALYSIS will accommodate all requirements of the second- order analysis described by IS:456, except for the effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads is negligible in a normal structural configuration. Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must be realized that the approximate evaluation of slenderness effects is also an approximate method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway (Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS: 456 - 2000). Considering all these information, a PDELTA ANALYSIS, as performed by STAAD may be used for the design of concrete members. However the user must note, to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
International Codes
8A.6 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13( e.g. 0.,.1,.2,.25,.3,.4,.5,.6,.7,.75,.8,.9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes. Design for Flexure Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections are designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section, doubly reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section are designed only as singly reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural design of beams are performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account of the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 217 of 391
made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per IS:456-2000 (Clause 26.2.3). Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which the final detail drawing can be prepared. Design for Shear Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD program. Twolegged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d where d is the effective depth) close to support has been enhanced, subjected to a maximum value of . cmax Beam Design Output The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced (0,.25,.5,.75 and 1.) sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with the default output option (TRACK 0.0) is presented below:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 218 of 391
International Codes
8A.7 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load case are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the sections under biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 8A.1). Depending upon the member lengths, section dimensions and effective length coefficients specified by the user STAAD automatically determine the criterion (short or long) of the column design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. Default clear spacing between main reinforcing bars is taken to be 25 mm while arrangement of longitudinal bars.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 219 of 391
Column Design Output Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced to obtain the details of section capacity calculations. All design output is given in SI units. An example of a long column design (Ref.Example9 of SP:16, Design Aids For Reinforced Concrete to IS:456-1978) output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
International Codes
8A.8 Bar Combination

Initially, the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. Now, two bar diameters can be specified to calculate a combination of each bar to be provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below. START BAR COMBINATION MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> MD2 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> END BAR COMBINATION
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 220 of 391
MD2 bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter. The typical output for bar combination is shown below:
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
International Codes
8A.9 Wall Design in accordance with IS 456-2000
Design of walls in accordance with IS 456-2000 is available in STAAD.Pro. Design is performed for in-plane shear, in-plane and out-of-plane bending and out-of-plane shear. The wall has to be modeled using STAADsSurface elements. The use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information. The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for user specified number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is 10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) edge reinforcing and the link required for out-of-plane shear. General format: START SHEARWALL DESIGN CODE INDIAN FYMAIN f1 FC f2 HMIN f3 HMAX f4 VMIN f5 VMAX f6 EMIN f7 EMAX f8 LMIN f9 LMAX f10 CLEAR f11 TWOLAYERED f12 KSLENDER f13 DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list END
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 221 of 391
The following table explains the parameters used in the shear wall design. SHEAR WALL DESIGN PARAMETERS Parameter Name FYMAIN
Default Value Description
415 Mpa Yield strength of steel, in current units. FC 30 Mpa Compressive strength of concrete, in current units. HMIN 8 Minimum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 36 Maximum size of horizontal HMAX reinforcing bars (range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 8 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing VMIN bars (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing VMAX bars (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 8 Minimum size of vertical reinforcing EMIN bars located in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 36 Maximum size of vertical reinforcing EMAX bars located in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 6 Minimum size of links (range 6mm LMIN 16mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 16 Maximum size of links (range 6mm LMAX 16mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in current CLEAR units. 0 Reinforcement placement mode: TWOLAYERED 0 - single layer, each direction 1 - two layers, each direction 1.0 Slenderness factor for finding KSLENDER effective height.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 222 of 391
Table 6 The following example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and design of the wall. Example . . SET DIVISION 12 SURFACE INCIDENCES 2 5 37 34 SUR 1 19 16 65 68 SUR2 11 15 186 165 SUR3 10 6 138 159 SUR4 . . . SURFACE PROPERTY 1 TO 4 THI 18 SUPPORTS 1 7 14 20 PINNED 2 to 5 gen pin 6 to 10 gen pin 11 to 15 gen pin 19 to 16 gen pin . . . SURFACE CONSTANTS E 2.17185e+007 POISSON 0.17 DENSITY 23.5616 ALPHA 1e-005 . . START SHEARWALL DES CODE INDIAN UNITNEWMMS FC 25 FYMAIN 415 TWO 1 VMIN 12 HMIN 12 EMIN 12 DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4 END Notes 1. 2. 3. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the line 2 to 5 gen pin assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command,
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 223 of 391
there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints. 4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively. 5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For Indian code the parameter is INDIAN. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear wall components. Technical Overview The program implements provisions of section 32 of IS 456-2000 and relevant provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The following steps are performed for each of the horizontal sections of the wall. Checking of slenderness limit The slenderness checking is done as per clause no. 32.2.3. The default effective height is the height of the wall. User can change the effective height. The limit for slenderness is taken as 30. Design for in-plane bending and vertical load (denoted by Mz & Fy in the shear wall force output) Walls when subjected to combined in-plane horizontal and vertical forces produce in-plane bending in conjunction with vertical load. According to clause no. 32.3.1, in-plane bending may be neglected in case a horizontal cross section of the wall is always under compression due combined effect of horizontal and vertical loads. Otherwise, the section is checked for combined vertical load and in-plane moment as column with axial load and uni-axial bending. For this purpose, the depth is taken as 0.8 x horizontal length of wall and breadth is the thickness of the wall. The reinforcement is concentrated at both ends (edges) of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 timeshorizontal length on each side. Minimum reinforcements are according to clause no. 32.5.(a). Maximum 4% reinforcement is allowed. Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output) By default, the program does not design only at the critical section but at all the horizontal sections. By suitable use of the surface division command, design at critical section as per clause no. 32.4.1 can be performed. The design for in-plane shear is done as per clause no. 32.4. The nominal shear stress is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.2 and it is checked with the maximum allowable shear stress as per clause no. 32.4.2.1. The design shear strength of concrete is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.3. Design of shear reinforcement is done as per clause no. 32.4.4. Minimum reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5. Design for vertical load and out-of-plane vertical bending (denoted by Fyand My respectively in the shear wall force output) Apart from the in-plane bending and horizontal shear force, the wall is also subjected to out-ofplane bending in the vertical and horizontal directions. The part of the wall which is not having edge reinforcements (i.e. a zone of depth 0.6 x Length of the wall), is designed again as column under axial load (i.e. vertical load) and out-of-plane vertical bending. The minimum reinforcements and maximum allowable spacings of reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5 Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall force output)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 224 of 391
The horizontal reinforcement which is already provided for in-plane shear is checked against outof-plane horizontal bending. The wall is assumed as a slab for this purpose. Design for out-of-plane shears (denoted by Qx and Qy in the shear wall force output) The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The nominal shear stresses are calculated as per clause no. 40.1. Maximum allowable shear stresses are as per table 20. For shear force in the vertical direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per section 4.1 of SP 16 :1980 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Similarly, for shear force in the horizontal direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated considering horizontal reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per the provisions of clause no. 40.4. Shear Wall Design With Opening The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are available for user selected locations. Description Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall panels. 1. Shear wall set-up
Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of four edges of the opening(s).
SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., niSURFACE s DIVISION sd1, ..., sdj RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION od1, ..., odk
where: - node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall, - surface ordinal number, - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node distance on the surface perimeter, x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the opening, od1, ...,odk - divisions along edges of the opening. Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-to-node segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the SET DIVISION command). Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
n1, ...,ni s sd1, ...,sdj
where: xd yd - number of divisions along X axis, - number of divisions along Y axis.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 225 of 391
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface where output is requested. The output is provided for sections located between division segments. For example, if the number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the center of the edge). 2. Stress/force output printing
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall. The general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG x) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, ...,si
where: x a d1, d2 s1, ...,si - local axis of the surface element (X or Y), - distance along the x axis from start of the member to the full cross-section of the wall, - coordinates in the direction orthogonal to x , delineating a fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is desired. ** - list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered. Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If command AT is omitted, output is provided for all sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number of sections will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. If the BETWEEN command is omitted, the output is generated based on full cross-section width. 3. Definition of wall panels
Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:

START PANEL DEFINITION SURFACE iPANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 END PANEL DEFINITION
where: i j ptype x1 y1 z1 (...) 4. - ordinal surface number, - ordinal panel number, - panel type, one of: WALL, COLUMN, BEAM coordinates of the corners of the panel,
Shear wall design
The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows:
START SHEARWALL DESIGN (...) DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT c) LIST s END SHEARWALL DESIGN
Note:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 226 of 391
If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted bars. b. Panels have been defined. Only wall panel design is supported in Indian code.
International Codes
8A1.1 Design Operations

Earthquake motion often induces force large enough to cause inelastic deformations in the structure. If the structure is brittle, sudden failure could occur. But if the structure is made to behave ductile, it will be able to sustain the earthquake effects better with some deflection larger than the yield deflection by absorption of energy. Therefore ductility is also required as an essential element for safety from sudden collapse during severe shocks. STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design as per IS 13920. While designing it satisfies all provisions of IS 456 2000 and IS 13920 for beams and columns.
International Codes
8A1.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed. For Beams For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) & T-shape Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
International Codes
8A1.3 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters that are needed to perform design as per IS 13920. It accepts all parameters that are needed to perform design as per IS:456. Over and above it has some other parameters that are required only when designed is performed as per IS:13920. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A1.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 227 of 391
and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
International Codes
8A1.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect of the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13. All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes. For design to be performed as per IS:13920 the width of the member shall not be less than 200mm(Clause 6.1.3). Also the member shall preferably have a width-to depth ratio of more than 0.3 (Clause 6.1.2). The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck (Clause 6.1.1) for all active load cases. If it exceeds allowable axial stress no design will be performed. Design for Flexure Design procedure is same as that for IS 456. However while designing following criteria are satisfied as per IS-13920: 1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2) 2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3) 3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by
The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by = 0.025 (Clause 6.2.2) max 4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the negative steel at that face. (Clause 6.2.3) 5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at least be equal to onefourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided at the face of either joint. (Clause 6.2.4)
Design for Shear The shear force to be resisted by vertical hoops is guided by the Clause 6.3.3 of IS 13920:1993 revision. Elastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance of the beam section at ends are considered while calculating shear force. Plastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance can also be considered for shear design if PLASTIC parameter is mentioned in the input file. (Refer Table 8A1.1) Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Procedure is same as that of IS 456. The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for shear as per Cl. 6.3.5 of IS-13920: The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of the beam shall not exceed
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 228 of 391
a) d/4 b) 8 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars In no case this spacing is less than 100 mm. The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated from IS 456 consideration is provided. Beam Design Output The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with the default output option (TRACK 1.0) is presented below:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 229 of 391
International Codes
8A1.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments per IS 456:2000. Columns are also designed for shear forces as per Clause 7.3.4. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. However following clauses have been satisfied to incorporate provisions of IS 13920: 1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2) 2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3) 3. The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm. For columns whose unsupported length exceed 4m, the shortest dimension of column shall not exceed 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2) 4. The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular dimension shall preferably be not less than 0.4. (Clause 7.1.3) 5. The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the column, except where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause 7.3.3) 6. Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length lo from each joint face, towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where flexural yielding may occur. The length lo shall not be less than a) larger lateral dimension of the member at the section where yielding occurs, b) 1/6 of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm. (Clause 7.4.1) 7. The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not exceed of minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm nor more than 100 mm. (Clause 7.4.6) 8. The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the provisions for minimum area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular, circular or spiral hoops, to be used as special confining reinforcement. (Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 230 of 391
Column Design Output Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced to obtain the details of section capacity calculations. All design output is given in SI units. An example of a column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 231 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 232 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 233 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 234 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 235 of 391
* EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination. ** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These commands are ignored for members forming physical member. *** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following: 1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-beams this parameter will combine them into one member. It can also be used to combine members to form one continuous beam spanning over more than two supports.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 236 of 391
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic moments will be calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate nodes (if any) this calculation will be ignored. Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle to the beam. Inclined column support is ignored. 3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the combined member. 4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all active load cases during design. Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is issued. The following lines should be satisfied during combination of members: 1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single span between two column supports of a continuous beam are subdivided into several members. 2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha, density and beta angle) 3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line. 4. Members to be combined should be continuous. 5. Vertical members (i.e. columns) cannot be combined. 6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different combined members. 7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is 299. Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only be available when all the members combined are successfully designed in both flexure and shear. ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary) even if physical member has been formed. The following lines shows a standard example for design to be performed in IS 13920.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 237 of 391
International Codes
8A1.6 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. Now two bar diameters can be specified to calculate a combination of each bar to be provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> MD2 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> END BAR COMBINATION
MD2 bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter. The typical output for bar combination is shown below: OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 238 of 391
---------------------------------------------------------------------------| MAIN REINFORCEMENT | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION | 0.0- 2166.7 | 2166.7- 6500.0 | 6500.0- 8666.7 | mm | mm | mm | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------TOP | 6-20 + 1-25 | 2-20 + 1-25 | 2-20 | | in 2 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | Ast Reqd| 2330.22 | 1029.90 | 582.55 | Prov| 2376.79 | 1119.64 | 628.57 | Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------BOTTOM | 4-20 | 2-20 | 2-20 | | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | Ast Reqd| 1165.11 | 582.55 | 582.55 | Prov| 1257.14 | 628.57 | 628.57 | Ld (mm) | 940.2 | 940.2 | 940.2 | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section. Sample example showing calculation of design shear force as per Clause 6.3.3.
For Beam No. 1 and 2 Section Characteristic Strength of Steel fy Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck Clear Cover Bar Diameter Effective Depth d Eudl w Length L Ast_Top_A Ast_Bot_A Ast_Top_B Ast_Bot_B Width b Depth D 250 mm 500 mm 415 N/sq. mm 20 N/sq. mm 25 mm 12 mm 469 mm 6.5 N/sq. mm 4000 mm 339.29 sq. mm 226.19 sq. mm 226.19 sq. mm 339.29 sq. mm
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 239 of 391
Steps
Calculation of Simple Shear Simple shear Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 from gravity load on span =
= 15600N
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided Sagging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * = Of Resistance of d * 36768130.05 End A Mu,as = ( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * N d * fck) Hogging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * Of Resistance of d * End A Mu,ah = ( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck) = 54003057.45 N
Sagging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * = Of Resistance of d * 54003057.45 End A Mu,bs = ( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * N d * fck) Hogging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * Of Resistance of d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_B* fy / End A Mu,bh = b * d * fck) = 36768130.05 N
Calculation of Shear Force Due To Formation Of Plastic Hinge At Both Ends Of The Beam Plus The Factored Gravity Load On Span
FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT

Vur,a = Vur,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -10137.69104 N 41337.69104 N
FIG2: SWAY TO LEFT Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / 53402.14022
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 240 of 391
L] = Vul,b =
Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = 22202.14022 N
Design Shear Force Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) = For Beam No. 3 Section Characteristic Strength of Steel fy Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck Clear Cover Bar Diameter Effective Depth d Eudl w Length L Ast_Top_A Ast_Bot_A Ast_Top_B Ast_Bot_B Width b Depth D 300 mm 450 mm 415 N/sq. mm 20 N/sq. mm 25 mm 12 mm 419 mm 6.5 N/sq. mm 3000 mm 226.19 sq. mm 339.29 sq. mm 452.39 sq. mm 226.19 sq. mm 11.56 N 53402.14022 N -6.44 N 41337.69104 N
Calculation of Simple Shear Simple shear Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 from gravity load on span =
= 11700N
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided Sagging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * = 48452983 N Of Resistance of d * End A Mu,as = ( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck) Hogging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * = 32940364.5
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 241 of 391
Of Resistance of d * N End A Mu,ah = ( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck) Sagging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * = 32940364.5 Of Resistance of d * N End A Mu,bs = ( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck) Hogging Moment 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * = 63326721.3 Of Resistance of d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_B* fy / N End A Mu,bh = b * d * fck) Calculation of Shear Force Due To Formation Of Plastic Hinge At Both Ends Of The Beam Plus The Factored Gravity Load On Span
FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT

Vur,a = Vur,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -40463.862 N 63863.862 N
Vul,a = Vul,b =
Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] 42444.3402 N = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] -15144.34 N =
Design Shear Force Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) =
-10.31 N
42444.3402 N
-23.81 N
63863.862 N
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 242 of 391
International Codes
Indian Codes - Steel Design Per IS800
8B.1 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:

Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection. Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values. Specify whether to perform member selection by optimization.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported. Section 8B.13 describes the specification of steel sections.
International Codes

This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of Indian Standard code of practice (IS:800-1984) for structural steel design in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical loading condition and the governing code criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects such as flange buckling and web crippling.
International Codes
8B.3 Allowable Stresses

The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design method as per IS:800 (1984). It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. It would not be possible to describe every aspect of IS:800 in this manual. This section, however, will discuss the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:800 and implemented in STAAD. Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during the discussion of various types of allowable stresses.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 243 of 391
International Codes
8B.3.1 Axial Stress

Tensile Stress The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:800 is described below. The permissible stress in axial tension, s in MPa on the net effective area of the sections shall not at exceed
Where, fy = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa Compressive Stress Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members shall not exceed 0.6fy nor the permissible stress sac calculated based on the following formula: (Clause: 5.1.1)
International Codes
8B.3.2 Bending Stress

The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is calculated based on the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.1)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 244 of 391
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum strength (z-z axis), the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the effective section shall not exceed the values of maximum permissible bending compressive stress. The maximum permissible bending compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.2)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 245 of 391
International Codes
8B.3.3 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 6.4 of IS:800. For shear on the web, the gross section taken into consideration consist of the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear parallel to the flanges, the gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange area.
International Codes
8B.3.4 Combined Stress

Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are proportioned accordingly to section 7 of IS:800. All members subject to bending and axial compression are required to satisfy the equation of Section 7.1.1.(a) for intermediate points, and equation of Section 7.1.1.(b) for support points. For combined axial tension and bending the equation of Section 7.1.2. is required to be satisfied. Cm coefficients are calculated according to the specifications of Section 7.1.3. information regarding
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 246 of 391
occurance of sidesway can be provided through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. In the absence of any user provided information, sidesway will be assumed.
International Codes

In STAAD implementation of IS:800, the user is allowed complete control of the design process through the use of design parameters. Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with IS:800 are listed in Table 7B.1 of this section alongwith their default values and applicable restrictions. Users should note that when the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 and use in conjunction with this code, allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ), tension (FTY & FTZ), and allowable shear stress (FV) will be printed out in Member Selection and Code Check output in Mpa. When TRACK is set to 2.0, detailed design output will be provided.
International Codes
8B.5 Stability Requirements

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the appropriate maximum values. Section 3.7 of IS:800 summarizes the maximum slenderness ratios for different types of members. In STAAD implementation of IS:800, appropriate maximum slenderness ratio can be provided for each member. If no maximum slenderness ratio is provided, compression members will be checked against a maximum value of 180 and tension members will be checked against a maximum value of 400.
International Codes
8B.6 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only axial forces. So in design no time is wasted in calculating bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
International Codes
8B.7 Deflection Check

This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in the CODE CHECK and MEMBER SELECTION processes. The deflection check may be controlled using three parameters which are described in Table 7B.1. Note that deflection is used in addition to other strength and stability related criteria. The local deflection calculation is
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 247 of 391
based on the latest analysis results.
International Codes
8B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:800 (1984) requirements. Forces and moments at specified sections of the members are utilized for the code checking calculations. Sections may be specified using the BEAM parameter or the SECTION command. If no sections are specified, the code checking is based on forces and moments at the member ends. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition (applicable IS:800 clause no.), governing load case, location (distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed out.
International Codes

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, that is the lightest section, which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section selected will be of the same type (I-Section, Channel etc.) as originally specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all types of steel sections listed in Section 7B.13 and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user provided table. Member selection can not be performed on members whose cross sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC. The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table 8B.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each one.
International Codes
8B.10 Member Selection By Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The user may start without a specifically designated section. However, the section profile type (BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, ANGLE etc.) must be specified using the ASSIGN command (see Chapter 6). The optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions. An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design iterations. This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be used with caution.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 248 of 391
International Codes
8B.11 Tabulated Results Of Steel Design

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the result in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: a) MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is performed. b) TABLE refers to the INDIAN steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. c) RESULT prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark in front of the member number. d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the IS:800 code which governs the design. e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. f) LOADING provides the load case number which governs the design. g) FX, MY and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local y-axis and moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX,MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern. i) If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will blockout part of the table and will print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV). When the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0 for all members parameter code values as shown in Fig 8B.1.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 249 of 391
International Codes
8B.12 Indian Steel Table

This is an important feature of the program since the program will read section properties of a steel member directly from the latest ISI steel tables (as published in ISI-800). These properties are stored in memory corresponding to the section designation (e.g. ISMB250, etc.). If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built in to these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members. Almost all ISI steel tables are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 250 of 391
Following are the descriptions of all the types of sections available: Rolled Steel Beams (ISJB, ISLB, ISMB and ISHB). All rolled steel beam sections are available the way they are designated in the ISI handbook., e.g. ISJB225, ISWB400, etc.
NOTE: In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an A on the end., e.g. ISHB400 A, etc.
Rolled Steel Channels (ISJC, ISLCand ISMC) All these shapes are available as listed in ISI section handbook. Designation of the channels are per the scheme used by ISI.
Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel, e.g. D ISJC125, D ISMC75 etc.
Rolled Steel Angles Both rolled steel equal angles and unequal angles are available for use in the STAAD implementation of ISI steel tables. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure:
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle section. The standard section has local axis system as illustrated in Fig.2.4 of this manual. The standard angle is specified as:
This specification has the local z-axis ( i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-V axis specified in the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other programs in which the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 251 of 391
local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD provides for this convention by accepting the command:
Double Angles Short leg back to back or long leg back to back double angles can be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
Rolled Tees (ISHT, ISST, ISLT and ISJT) All the rolled tee sections are available for input as they are specified in the ISI handbook. Following example illustrates the designated method.
Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections) To designate circular hollow sections from ISI tables, use PIP followed by the numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter. Following example will illustrate the designation.
Circular pipe sections can also be specified by providing the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used. Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections) Designation of tubes from the ISI steel table is illustrated below.
Example:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 252 of 391
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by any table designations.
Note that only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections specified this way. Plate And Angle Girders (With Flange Plates) All plate and angle grinders (with flange plates) are available as listed in ISI section handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.
SINGLE JOIST WITH CHANNELS AND PLATES ON THE FLANGES TO BE USED AS GIRDERS All single joist with channel and plates on the flanges to be used as girders are available as listed in ISI section handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 253 of 391
NOTE: The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is more efficient.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 254 of 391
NOTE: 1) "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. Note that the "Deflection Length" for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be "1" and DJ2 should be "4".
2) If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local deflections will be measured from original member line. 3) The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel design.
International Codes
8B.13 Column With Lacings And Battens

For columns with large loads it is desirable to build rolled sections at a distance and inter-connect them. The joining of element sections is done by two ways: a) Lacing and b) Batten Double channel sections (back-to-back and face-to-face) can be joined either by lacing or by batten plates having rivetted or welded connection. Table 8B.2 gives the parameters that are required for Lacing or batten design. These parameters will have to be provided in unit NEW MMS along with parameters defined in Table 8B.1.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 255 of 391
International Codes

This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of Indian Standard code of practice (IS:802-1995 Part 1) for structural steel design for overhead transmission line towers in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical loading condition and the governing code
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 256 of 391
criteria.
International Codes
8C.2 Allowable Stresses

The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design method as per IS:802 (1995). It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. This section discusses the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:802 and implemented in STAAD.
International Codes
8C.2.1 Axial Stress

Tensile Stress The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:802 is described below. The estimated tensile stresses on the net effective sectional area in various members, multiplied by the appropiate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material. Thus, the permissible stress in axial tension, sat in MPa on the net effective area of the sections shall not exceed.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 257 of 391
International Codes
8C.3 Stability Requirements

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the appropriate maximum values. Following are the default values used in STAAD: Compression Members:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 258 of 391
Slendernes ratios of compression members are determined as follows:
If ELA number given in the input for any particular member is such that condition for L/r ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the usual way of finding slenderness ratio using K*L/r formula. Tension Members: Slenderness ratio KL/r of a member carrying axial tension only, shall not exceed 400.
International Codes
8C.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement

As per Clause7.1 of IS: 802-1995 minimum thickness of different tower members shall be as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 259 of 391
International Codes
8C.5 Code Checking The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:802 (1995) requirements. Axial forces at two ends of the members are utilized for the code checking calculations. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing forces are also printed out. Using TRACK 9 option calculation steps are also printed.
International Codes
8C.5.1 Design Steps

The following are the steps followed in member design. Step 1 Thickness of the member (maximum of web and flange thicknesses) is checked against minimum allowable thickness, depending upon whether the member is painted or galvanised. Step 2 If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program determines whether the member is under compression or tension for the loadcase under consideration. Depending upon whether the member is under tension or compression the slenderness ratio of the member is calculated. This calculated ratio is checked against allowable slenderness ratio. Step 3 If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is performed. Allowable axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is under tension and there is no user defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is calculated by the program itself (Refer Section 8C.10). Actual axial stress in the member is calculated. The ratio for actual stress to allowable stress, if less than 1.0 or user defined value, the member has passed the check. Step 4 Number of bolts required for the critical loadcase is calculated.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 260 of 391
8C.6 Member Selection

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, that is the lightest section, which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section selected will be of the same type (either angle or channel) as originally specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all angle or channel sections and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user provided table. The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table 8B.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each one.
International Codes
8C.7 Member Selection by Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization method utilizes a stateof-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions. An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design iterations. This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be used with caution.
International Codes
8C.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 261 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 262 of 391
International Codes
8C.9 Parameter Table for IS 802
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 263 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 264 of 391
International Codes
8C.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 265 of 391
For channel section net section factor is taken to be 1.0.
International Codes
8C.11 Example Problem No. 28

A transmission line tower is subjected to different loading conditions. Design some members as per IS-802 and show detailed calculation steps for the critical loading condition.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 266 of 391
Given: End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the unsupported panel for values of L/r upto and including 120 Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm Net Section Factor is to be calculated. STAAD TRUSS INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 3 0 3; 2 1.2 27 1.2; 3 2.8 3 2.8; 4 2.6 6 2.6; 5 2.4 9 2.4; 6 2.2 12 2.2; 7 2 15 2; 8 1.8 18 1.8; 9 1.6 21 1.6; 10 1.4 24 1.4; 11 -3 0 3; 12 -1.2 27 1.2; 13 -2.8 3 2.8; 14 -2.6 6 2.6; 15 -2.4 9 2.4; 16 -2.2 12 2.2; 17 -2 15 2; 18 -1.8 18 1.8; 19 -1.6 21 1.6; 20 -1.4 24 1.4; 21 3 0 -3; 22 1.2 27 -1.2; 23 2.8 3 -2.8; 24 2.6 6 -2.6; 25 2.4 9 -2.4; 26 2.2 12 -2.2; 27 2 15 -2; 28 1.8 18 -1.8; 29 1.6 21 -1.6; 30 1.4 24 -1.4; 31 -3 0 -3; 32 -1.2 27 -1.2; 33 -2.8 3 -2.8; 34 -2.6 6 -2.6; 35 -2.4 9 -2.4; 36 -2.2 12 -2.2; 37 -2 15 -2; 38 -1.8 18 -1.8; 39 -1.6 21 -1.6; 40 -1.4 24 -1.4; 41 1.2 30 1.2; 42 -1.2 30 1.2; 43 1.2 30 -1.2; 44 -1.2 30 -1.2; 45 4.2 27 1.2; 46 7.2 27 1.2; 47 4.2 30 1.2; 48 4.2 27 -1.2; 49 7.2 27 -1.2; 50 4.2 30 -1.2; 51 -4.2 27 1.2; 52 -7.2 27 1.2; 53 -4.2 30 1.2; 54 -4.2 27 -1.2; 55 -7.2 27 -1.2; 56 -4.2 30 -1.2; 57 1.2 33 1.2; 58 -1.2 33 1.2; 59 1.2 33 -1.2; 60 -1.2 33 -1.2; 61 0 35 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3; 2 3 4; 3 4 5; 4 5 6; 5 6 7; 6 7 8; 7 8 9; 8 9 10; 9 10 2; 10 11 13; 11 13 14; 12 14 15; 13 15 16; 14 16 17; 15 17 18; 16 18 19; 17 19 20; 18 20 12; 19 13 3; 20 14 4; 21 15 5; 22 16 6; 23 17 7; 24 18 8; 25 19 9; 26 20 10; 27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34 15 6; 35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42 19 10; 43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25 26; 50 26 27; 51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5 25; 58 6 26; 59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3; 66 3 24; 67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74 7 28; 75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30; 82 31 33; 83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39 40; 90 40 32; 91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29 39; 98 30 40; 99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35; 105 25 34;
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 267 of 391
106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37; 112 28 39; 113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13; 119 34 14; 120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20; 126 32 12; 127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14; 133 35 16; 134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19; 140 39 18; 141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42; 147 2 41; 148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41; 154 42 2; 155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42; 161 41 47; 162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50; 168 50 48; 169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49; 175 45 48; 176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47; 182 22 45; 183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53; 189 53 51; 190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54; 196 54 32; 197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54; 203 42 56; 204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51; 210 12 54; 211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58; 217 41 57; 218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58; 224 42 60; 225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59; 231 60 57; 232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240 15 25; 241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247 39 9; 248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41; 254 43 42; 255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61; MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN 1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD ISA200X150X18 SP 0.01 19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144 155 156 159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10 27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228 231 232 251 252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6 CONSTANTS E 2.05e+008 ALL POISSON 0.3 ALL DENSITY 76.8195 ALL ALPHA 6.5e-006 ALL SUPPORTS 1 11 21 31 FIXED UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 VERT SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 732 46 49 52 55 FX 153 61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160 46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968 2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968 LOAD 2 GWBC SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 549 46 49 52 55 FX 1148 61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342 46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906 2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953 LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 549 46 49 52 55 FX 1148
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 268 of 391
61 FX 960 FY -762 46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906 52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293 2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953 LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 549 46 49 52 55 FX 1148 61 FX 960 FY -762 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906 46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293 2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953 PERFORM ANALYSIS UNIT NEW MMS PARAMETER CODE IS802 LY 2800 MEMB 28 LZ 2800 MEMB 28 MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1 ELA 4 MEMB 1 CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28 DBL 16 ALL GUSSET 8 ALL TRACK 9 ALL CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28 FINISH
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 269 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 270 of 391
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 32
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 271 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 272 of 391
International Codes
Indian Codes - Design Per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
8D.1 General
Provisions of IS:801-1975, including revisions dated May, 1988, have been implemented. The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as an option.
International Codes
8D.2 Cross-Sectional Properties

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables from IS:811-1987(Specification for cold formed light gauge structural steel sections). The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:

Channel with Lips Channel without Lips Angle without Lips
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 273 of 391
Z with Lips Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file. The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
International Codes
8D.3 Design Procedure

The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with IS:8011975. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter. 2. Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (IS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not. The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clause 5.2.1.1. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with Clause 6.6.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression Clause 5.2.3, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression Clause 5.2.4, Maximum Section Depths. The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows: Members in tension Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.1 Members in bending and shear Resistance calculations are based on Clauses: a) b) c) 6.4.1 Shear stress in webs, 6.4.2 Bending stress in webs 6.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 274 of 391
Members in compression Resistance calculations are based on Clauses: a) b) c) 6.2 Compression on flat unstiffened element, 6.6.1.1 Shapes not subject to torsional-flexural buckling, 6.6.1.2 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes of open cross section or intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q = 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling, 6.6.1.3 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes or intermittently fastened singlysymmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q < 1.0 which may be subject to torsionalflexural buckling, 6.8 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
d)
e)
Members in compression and bending Resistance calculations are based on Clauses: a) All clauses for members in compression & b) c) d) e) 6.3 Laterally Unsupported Members, 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected to torsional or torsional-flexural buckling 6.7.2. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric components of builtup shapes having Q=1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural buckling 6.7.3. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric components of builtup shapes having Q<1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural buckling.
Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided by the user. The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and selection of design options.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 275 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 276 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 277 of 391
International Codes
Japanese Codes - Concrete Design Per AIJ

STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on the AIJ standard for structural calculation of Reinforced Concrete Structures (1985 edition). Design for a member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are also reported in the output.
International Codes

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed. For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 278 of 391
International Codes

In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
International Codes
9A.4 Slenderness Effects And Analysis Consideration

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. Slenderness effects result in additional forces being exerted on the column over and above those obtained from the elastic analysis. There are two options by which the slenderness effects can be accommodated. The first option is to compute the secondary moments through an exact analysis. Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated. The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic analysis and design the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the magnified moment is equivalent to the total moment comprised of the sum of primary and secondary moments. STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To utilize the first method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The second method mentioned above is utilized by providing the magnification factor as a concrete design parameter (See the parameter MMAG in Table 9A.1). The column is designed for the axial load and total of primary and secondary biaxial moments if the first method is used and for the axial load and magnified biaxial moments if the second method is used.
International Codes
Introduction
Page 279 of 391
9A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. Program considers 12 equally spaced sections of the beam member. However this number can be redefined by NSECTION parameter. All these sections are designed for flexure, shear and torsion for all the load cases and print out the design results for most critical load case. Design for Flexure Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of section properties provided by the user. Program first try to design the section for g=0 and pt = balanced reinforcement ratio. If allowable moment is lower than the actual moment program increases g value for same pt and checks the satisfactory conditions. If conditions are not satisfied this procedure continues until g reaches to 1.0 and then pt value is increased keeping g = 1.0. This procedure continues until pt reaches to its maximum value( 2 % ). But if the allowable moment for pt = maximum value and g = 1.0 is lower than the actual moment the program gives message that the section fails. This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design the section. It arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the effective depth and redesign the sections for this effective depth. Please note, Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in flexure design MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for flexure design. STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and considering the fact that Japan is a high seismic zone area. Design for Shear Shear design of beam is done for Qy value. The update effective depth is used for allowable shear stress calculation. Allowable shear stress of concrete is automatically calculated from design load type (permanent or temporary) and given density of concrete. Program calculates required Bar size and spacing of stirrups. Pw is calculated for design Bar size and spacing and all the necessary checking is done. For seismic load it is needed to increase shear force 1.5 times the actual value and this can be done utilizing SMAG parameter. Please note, SMAG parameter can be used if its needed to increase the Design Shear Force without changing Design Moment. Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged Governing density to determine Light weight or Normal Weight Concrete is 2.3 kg/sq. cm
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 280 of 391
Design for Torsion Torsion design for beam is optional. If TORSION parameter value is 1.0, program design that beam for torsion. Program first checks whether extra reinforcement is needed for torsion or not. If additional reinforcement is needed, this additional pt is added to flexure pt and additional Pw is added to shear design Pw.
International Codes
9A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force, MZ moment, MY moment and shear force. Both the ends of the members are designed for all the load cases and the loading which produces largest amount of reinforcement is called as critical load. If Track 0 or Track 1 is used, design results will be printed for critical load only. But if Track 2 is used user can get details design results of that member. Pt needed for minimum axial force, maximum axial force, maximum MZ, maximum MY among all the load cases for both the ends will be printed. If MMAG parameter is used, the column moments will be multiplied by that value. If SMAG parameter is used, column shear force will be multiplied by that value. Column design is done for Rectangular,Square and Circular sections. For rectangular and square sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY, while for circular sections Pg value is calculated for MZ and MY separately. Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If BIAXIAL parameter value 1.0, program will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column design is always uniaxial type. Steps involved : 1) Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 . 2) If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by increasing Pt and checking allowable load for that known Pt and known actual eccentricity of the column. 3) If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt and checking is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than the actual moment, program increases Pt and this procedure continues until the column design conditions are satisfied or the column fails as the required Pt is higher than Pt maximum value.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 281 of 391
4) If the column is in tension, design is done by considering allowable tensile stress of steel only. 5) If biaxial design is requested program solve the following interaction equation
6) If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and calculates Pcap, Mycap and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again and this process continues until the eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds its maximum limit. 7) If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation is satisfied ( if uniaxial design is performed successfully ). 8) If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and calculates no. of bars and details output is written.
International Codes

To design a slab or a wall, it must first be modelled using finite elements and analysed. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reiforcement. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the exterior face of the slab or wall. The following parameters are those applicable to slab and wall design:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 282 of 391
The other parameters shown in Table 9A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall design.
International Codes

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 9A.1 contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as centimeters and Kilograms before performing the concrete design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 283 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 284 of 391
International Codes
Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per AIJ
9B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the Architectural Institute of Japan (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design (1986 edition) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design: 1) Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis. 2) Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values. 3) Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 285 of 391
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
International Codes

For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
International Codes
9B.4 Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members during the analysis. An example of member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections. I shapes I shapes are specified in the following way.
Note : While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be excluded.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 286 of 391
H shapes H shapes are specified as follows.
Note : While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be excluded.
T shapes T shapes are specified as follows.
Note : While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be excluded
Channels Channel sections are specified as follows.
Double Channels Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing in between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name is used to specify a double channel.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 287 of 391
In the above commands, members 17 to 27 are a back to back double channel C300X90X10 with no spacing in between. Members 45 to 76 are a double channel C250X90X11 with a spacing of 2 length units. Angles Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle specification is as follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the legs and then the thickness of the leg, all in millimetres. The word ST signifies that the section is a STandard angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 1 of Section 1.5.2 of the User's Manual.
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of the User's Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as shown below.
Double angles Short leg back to back and long leg back to back double angles may be specified by using the words SD or LD in front of the angle size. In the case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. The spacing between the angles may be specified by using the word SP after the angle size followed by the value of the spacing.
The first example indicates a short legs back to back double angle comprised of 100X65X7 angles separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back to back double angle comprised of 300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units. Tubes Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be performed on TUBE sections. Pipes (Circular Hollow sections)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 288 of 391
Circular hollow sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and an inside diameter of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, can be performed on PIPE sections.
International Codes

As mentioned before, member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design method. It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. The basic
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 289 of 391
measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities. Design Capabilities All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE, TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will automatically adopt the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested. STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used for member property. Methodology For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps. 1) Calculation of sectional properties Program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using appropriate formula. For calculation of i ( radius of gyration needed for bending ), program calculates moment of inertia ( Ii )and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses following formula:
Please note, that the above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape, H shape and Channel sections. 2) Calculation of actual and allowable stresses Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods: i) Axial Stress : Actual tensile stresses ( FT ) = Force / ( A NSF ), NSF = Net Section Factor for tension Actual compressive stress ( FC ) = Force / A Allowable tensile stress ( ft ) = F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case) = F ( For Temporary Case )
ii) Bending Stress : Actual bending stress for My for compression ( Fbcy) = My / Zcy Actual bending stress for Mz for compression ( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz Actual bending stress for My for tension ( Fbty) = My / Zcy Actual bending stress for Mz for tension ( Fbtz) = Mz / Zcz where, Zcy , Zcz are section modulus for compression and
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 290 of 391
Zty , Ztz are section modulus for tension
iii) Shear Stress Actual shear stresses are calculated by following formula : qy = Qy / Aww, Where, Aww = web shear area = product of depth and web thickness qz = Qz / Aff , Where, Aff = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange areas 3) Checking design requirements : User provided RATIO value ( default 1.0 ) is used for checking design requirements ing conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that the section fails. Conditions: i) Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft ii) Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc iii) Comboned compression & bending ratio = FC/fc+Fbz/fbz+Fby/fby iv) Comboned compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty-FC) / ft v) Combined tension & bending ratio = FT/ft +Fbz/fbz+Fby/fby vi) Comboned tension & bending ratio = (Fbcz+Fbcy-FT) / fbcz vii) Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs viii) Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs New Output Format ( TRACK -- 3 ) One new output format has been introduced which provides details step by step information of Steel Design for guiding load case only. If Section command is used before Parameter command this output will provide details information for all the sections specified by Section Command. Please note, that this output format is available only when Beam parameter value is 0 and Track parameter value is 3. If section command is not used design information will be printed for two ends only. If Member Truss option is used no Shear Design information will be printed.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 291 of 391
Allowable stress for Axial Tension Allowable axial stress in tension is calculated per section 5.1 (1) of the AIJ code. In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and proceeds with member selection or code checking. Allowable stress for Axial Compression The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to the procedure of section 5.1 (3). Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. In the absence of user provided values for effective length, the actual member length will be used. The slenderness ratios are checked against the permissible values specified in Chapter 11 of the AIJ code. Allowable stress for Bending The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. The allowable stresses in bending (compressive and tensile) are calculated as per the criteria of Clause 5.1 (4) of the code. Allowable stress for Shear Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. The allowable stresses in shear are computed according to Clause 5.1 (2) of the code.
International Codes

For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending and shear), applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for all modelled loading situations. Members subjected to axial tension and bending are checked using the criteria of clause 6.2. For members with axial compression and bending, the criteria of clause 6.1 is used.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 292 of 391
International Codes

The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 9B.1 of this chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
NOTE: 1) "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. For example, refer to the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 293 of 391
figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. Note that the "Deflection Length" for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Also the straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be "1" and DJ2 should be "4".
International Codes
9B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is checked per the AIJ requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on the forces at the start and end joints of the member. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
International Codes

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments obtained from the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 294 of 391
International Codes
Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987

STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design. It will calculate the reinforcement needed for the specified concrete section. All the concrete design calculations are based on the current: Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Concrete Structures Nov. 1987. (Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para Diseo y construccin de Estructuras de Concreto) of the Mexican Construction Code for the Federal District Aug. 1993 (Reglamento de Construcciones para el Distrito Federal).
International Codes

The following types of cross sections can be defined for concrete design. For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular) For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), Trapezoidal and T-shapes For Slabs Finite element with a specified thickness
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 295 of 391
10A.3 Member Dimensions Concrete members which will be designed by the program must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. The following example shows the required input:
UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTY 13 TO 79 PRISM YD 40. ZD 20. IZ 53333 IY 13333 11 13 PR YD 20. 14 TO 16 PRIS YD 24. ZD 48.YB 18.ZB 12. 17 TO 19 PR YD 24. ZD 18.ZB 12.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20 cm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these members. For concrete design, this property must not be provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the above example the IZ and IY values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using YD and ZD. This is a conventional practice which takes into consideration revised section parameters due to cracking of section. Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent a T-shape and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.) provided, the program will determine whether the section is rectangular, trapezoidal or T-shaped and the BEAM design will be done accordingly.
International Codes
The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design by the Mexican code. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 3.1 is a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. The manual describes the commands required to provide these parameters in the input file. For example, the values of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used in shear design), the distances of the face of supports from the end nodes of a beam, are assigned values of zero by default but may be changed depending on the actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns are designed for moments directly obtained from the analyses without any magnification. The factors MMAGx and MMAGy may be used for magnification of column moments. For beams, the user may generate load cases which contain loads magnified by the appropriate load factors. Table 10A.1 Mexican Concrete Design Parameters Default Parameter Description Value Name FYMAIN 4200Kg/cm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel FYSTIRR 4200Kg/cm2 Yield Stress for stirrup reinforcing steel FC 200Kg/cm2 Compressive Strength of Concrete clear_cover_top 3cm Clear cover for top reinforcement clear_cover_bottom 3cm Clear cover for bottom reinforcement clear_cover_side 3cm Clear cover for side reinforcement Minimum main reinforcement bar size MINMAIN** No 2.5 bar (Number 2 -18) Minimum secondary reinforcement bar MINSEC** No 2.5 bar size (Number 2 -18)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 296 of 391
MAXMAIN**
SFACE
EFACE
REINF AMAGx AMAGy WIDTH
DEPTH
NSECTION
Maximum main reinforcement bar size No 12 bar (Number 2 -18) Face to support location of start of beam. If specified, for shear force at 0 start is computed at a distance of SFACE+d from the start joint of the member. Positive number Face to support location of end of beam. If specified, for shear force at 0 start is computed at a distance of EFACE+d from the start joint of the member. Positive number. Tied Column. A value of 1 will mean 0 spiral. A factor by which the column design 1 moments will be magnified Width of concrete member. This value *ZD defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES Depth of concrete member. This value *YD defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES Number of equally-spaced sections to 12 be considered in finding critical moments for beam design Beam Design 0 = Critical Moment will not be printed out with beam design report. 1 = will mean a print out. 2 = will print out required steel areas for all intermediate sections specified by NSECTION.
TRACK
Column Design 0 = will print out detailed design results. 1 = will mean a print out column interation analysis results in addition to TRACK 0 output. 2 = will print out a schematic interaction diagram and intermediate interaction values in addition to all of the above. 0: IMPERIAL (No 3 to 18) 1: METRIC (4.2 to 60mm) 2: MEXICAN (No 2 to 18) TRUE:Precautions are taken to assure dimensions FALSE: Not
BARTYPE
DIM_PRECAUTION TRUE
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 297 of 391
precautions taken - Section reduction to section 1.5 NTC Concrete EXPOSED_SOIL_ FALSE Exposition to soil or weather to define WEATHER cover and min Steel reinforcement CONC_CLAS 1 Concrete class according to 1.4.1d) to define Modulus of Elasticity LIGHT_CONC FALSE Light Concrete to define development multipliers according to table 3.1 NTC COLD_FORM_BAR FALSE Cold formed Bar to define development multipliers according to table 3.1 NTC DUCTILE_SEISMIC TRUE DUCTILE FRAMES ACCORDING TO _DESIGN SECTION 5. Some design conditions are considered (not including, for the time being, geometric or confinment ones) DIAM_AG *2 cm MAXIMUM DIAM AGGREGATE BEARED_PERIM TRUE Slab beared perimeter. To calculate min steel required according to 2.1.2 DIRECT_COMP TRUE Beam Loads and reactions in direct compression Cl-2.1.5.a.I 2nd paragraph PHI 90 degrees Stirrups angle with the axis of the element TORSIONAL_ FALSE Beam needed for torsional equilibrium EQUILIBRIUM Cl.2.1.6a) 2nd paragraph Pfact 1.0 Part of the longitudinal steel considered to reduce shear. 0(zero) is on the safe side. Value between 1 and 0. ZB 0.0 IDEM ACI YB 0.0 IDEM ACI EIT *198000 CONCRETE MODULUS OF Kg/cm2 ELASTICITY
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used. ** When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters in actual mm units instead of the bar number. The following metric bar sizes are available: 4.2mm, 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm.
International Codes
10A.5 Beam Design Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to locate the possible critical sections. The total number of sections considered is 12 (twelve) unless this number is redefined with an NSECTION parameter. All of these equally spaced sections are scanned to determine moment and shear envelopes. Design for Flexure
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 298 of 391
Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of the section properties provided by the user. If the section dimensions are inadequate to carry the applied load, that is if the required reinforcement is greater than the maximum allowable for the cross section, the program reports that beam fails in maximum reinforcement. Rectangular sections are also designed with compression reinforcement. Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of main reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar sizes for the stirrups and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections 1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC Concrete are utilized to obtain the actual amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and ROWMN in the output and can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 10A.1). In addition, the maximum, minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed. It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the flexural design. Design for Shear Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear forces are calculated at a distance (d+SFACE) and (d+EFACE) away from the end nodes of the beam. SFACE and EFACE have default values of zero unless provided under parameters (see Table 10A.1). Note that the value of the effective depth "d" used for this purpose is the update value and accounts for the actual c.g. of the main reinforcement calculated under flexural design. Clauses 2.1.5-6 and 5.2.4 of NTC Concrete are used to calculate the reinforcement for shear forces and torsional moments. Based on the total stirrup reinforcement required, the size of bars, the spacing, the number of bars and the distance over which they are provided are calculated. Stirrups due to geometric conditions are assumed to be 2-legged, due to design conditions could be 2 or 4-legged. Design for Anchorage In the output for flexural design, the anchorage details are also provided. At any particular level, the START and END coordinates of the layout of the main reinforcement is described along with the information whether anchorage in the form of a hook or continuation is required or not at these START and END points. Note that the coordinates of these START and END points are obtained after taking into account the anchorage requirements. Anchorage length is calculated on the basis of the Clauses described in Section 3.1 of NTC concrete. In case the program selects 2 different diameters for the main or compression reinforcement, only the anchorage for the largest diameter is analyzed.
Output
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 299 of 391
ACTUAL OUTPUT FROM DESIGN ===================================================================== BEAM NO. 1 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE PER CODE NTC FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES,DDF LEN 525.00(cm) FY - 4200. FC - 250. SIZE 30.00 X 80.00(cm) LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR (cm) (cm) (cm) STA END _____________________________________________________________________ 1 4. 8 - -NUM, 5 0. 39. YES NO 1 4. 1 - -NUM, 4 0. 39. 2 8. 3 - -NUM, 5 0. 39. YES NO |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL MOMENT=5978000.50 Kg cm AT 0.00 (cm)LOAD 1| | REQD STEEL= 24.41 (cm2)ROW=0.0109 ROWMX=0.0190 ROWMN=0.0026 | | REQD COMP STEEL= 0.00 (cm2) | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 24.14/ 3.18/ 3.45 (cm) | | COMP MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 0.00/ 0.00/ 0.00 (cm) | | BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 40.07/ 39.08(cm) | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Izat above location = 1015658.4 cm^4 3 77. 10 - -NUM, 4 0. 45. YES NO 4 73. 9 - -NUM, 4 0. 45. YES NO |----------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL MOMENT=5978000.50 Kg cm AT 0.00 (cm)LOAD 1| | REQD STEEL= 24.17 (cm2)ROW=0.0107 ROWMX=0.0190 ROWMN=0.0026 | | REQD COMP STEEL= 0.00 (cm2) | | MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 24.46/ 2.54/ 2.72 (cm) | | COMP MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 0.00/ 0.00/ 0.00 (cm) | | BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 32.00/ 44.81(cm) | |----------------------------------------------------------------| Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 1008728.7 cm^4 REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY : ------------------------------SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) LOAD(+VE/-VE) ( CM ) (SQ. CM ) (KG -CM ) 0.00 24.67/ 24.67 5978000./ 5978000.50 0/ 0 525.00 24.67/ 24.67 5978000./ 5978000.50 0/ 0 B E A M N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S SHEAR AT START SUPPORT - Vu=41850.00 Kg Vc= 6074.49 Kg Vs=44719.39 Kg Tu= 0.00 Kg cm Tc= 0.00 Kg cm Ts= 0.00 Kg cm LOAD 0 NO STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION. REINFORCEMENT IS REQUIRED FOR SHEAR. PROVIDE NUM. 2.5 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 7.(cm) C/C FOR 176.(cm) ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE = 0.00 (cm2) AT END SUPPORT - Vu=37450.00 Kg Vc= 6074.49 Kg Vs=39219.39 Kg Tu= 0.00 Kg cm Tc= 0.00 Kg cm Ts= 0.00 Kg cm LOAD 0 NO STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION. REINFORCEMENT IS REQUIRED FOR SHEAR. PROVIDE NUM. 2.5 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 8.(cm) C/C FOR 176.(cm) ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL RESISTANCE = 0.00 (cm2)
International Codes
10A.6 Column Design

Columns design in STAAD per the Mexican code is performed for axial force and uniaxialas well as biaxial moments. All active loadings are checked to compute reinforcement. The loading which produces the largest amount of reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and circular sections, reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on all faces. This means that the total number of bars for these sections will always be a multiple of four (4). If the MMAGx & -MMAGy parameters are specified, the column moments are multiplied by the corresponding MMAG value to arrive at the ultimate moments on the column. Minimum eccentricity conditions to be satisfied according to section 2.1.3.a are checked. Method used: Bresler Load Contour Method Known Values: Pu, Muy, Muz, B, D, Clear cover, Fc, Fy Ultimate Strain for concrete : 0.003 Steps involved : 1. Assume some reinforcement. Minimum reinforcement (1% for ductile design or according to section 4.2.2 ) is a good amount to start with.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 300 of 391
2. 3.
Find an approximate arrangement of bars for the assumed reinforcement. Calculate PNMAX = Po, where Po is the maximum axial load capacity of the section. Ensure that the actual nominal load on the column does not exceed PNMAX. If PNMAX is less than the axial force Pu/FR, (FR is the strength reduction factor) increase the reinforcement and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the reinforcement exceeds 6% (or 4% for ductile design), the column cannot be designed with its current dimensions. 4. For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load, find the uniaxialmoment capacities of the column for the Y and the Z axes, independently. These values are referred to as MYCAP and MZCAP respectively. 5. Solve the Interaction Bresler equation:
Where a= 1.24. If the column is subjected to uniaxialmoment: a =1 If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement with available bar sizes, find the uniaxial capacities and solve the interaction equation again. If the equation is satisfied now, the reinforcement details are written to the output file. 7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed reinforcement is increased (ensuring that it is under 6% or 4% respectively) and steps 2 to 6 are repeated. By the moment to check shear and torsion for columns the sections have to be checked as beams and the most strict of both shear and torsion reinforcement adopted. 6.
International Codes
10A.7 Column Interaction The column interaction values may be obtained by using the design parameter TRACK 1.0 or TRACK 2.0 for the column member. If a value of 2.0 is used for the TRACK parameter, 12 different Pn-Mn pairs, each representing a different point on the Pn-Mn curve areprinted. Each of these points represents one of the several Pn-Mncombinations that this column is capable of carrying about the given axis, for the actual reinforcement that the column has been designed for. In the case of circular columns, the values are for any of the radial axes. The values printed for the TRACK 1.0 output are: P0 = Maximum allowable pure axial load on the column (moment zero). Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column. P_bal = Axial load capacity of balanced strain condition. M_bal = Uniaxial moment capacity of balanced strain condition. E_bal = M_bal / P_bal = Eccentricity of balanced strain condition. M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load. P_tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column. Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the axial load for the critical load case. Des.Mnx = Mux*MMAGx/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Mu is the bending moment for appropriate axis for the critical load case.
e/h
= (Mn/Pn)/h
where h is the length of the column
International Codes
Introduction
Page 301 of 391
10A.8 Column Design Output

The next table illustrates different levels of the column design output. The output is generated without any TRACK specification:
International Codes
10A.9 Slab Design

Slab are designed per Mexican NTC specifications. To design a slab, it must be modeled using finite elements.
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY atthe center of the element. Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is not performed at any other point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked with Q.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist Mymoment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLEAR, DIM_PRECAUTION, and EXPOSED_SOIL_WEATHER listed in Table 3.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned are not used in slab design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 302 of 391
International Codes
Mexican Codes - Steel Design
10B.1 General
The program is based in: Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures Dec. 1987. (Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para Diseo y construccin de Estructuras Metlicas) of the Mexican Construction Code for the Federal District Aug. 1993 (Reglamento de Construcciones para el Distrito Federal). The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance Method or Limit States Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD). Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, and stability. It allows to checkdeformation to verify serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that main code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as implemented in STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental concepts is presented here.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 303 of 391
International Codes
10B.2 Limit States Design Fundamentals

The primary objective of the Limit States Design Specification is to provide a uniform reliability for all steel structures under various loading conditions. The Limit States Design Method uses separate factors for each load and resistance. Because the different factors reflect the degree of uncertainty of different loads and combinations of loads and of the accuracy of predicted strength, a more uniform reliability is possible. The method may be summarized by the inequality Yi Qi < Rn FR On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the various load effects, Qi, multiplied by their respective load factors, yi. The design strength, on the right side, is the nominal strength or resistance, Rn, multiplied by a resistance factor, FR. In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the user will use appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary for analysis. The design portion of the program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and moments) obtained from analysis. In calculation of resistances of various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically considered.
International Codes
10B.3 Member End Forces and Moments

Member end forces and moments in the member result from loads applied to the structure. These forces are in the local member coordinate system. the following figures show the member end actions with their directions.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 304 of 391
International Codes
10B.4 Section Classification

The Limit States Design specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as compact (type 2), noncompact (type 3), or slender element(type 4), sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics, besides sections type 1 are able for plastic design. This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the standard shapes anddesign accordingly.
International Codes
10B.5 Member in Axial Tension

The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 10B.1), that always refers to the gross section. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or code check accordingly. In addition to the tension resistance criterion, the user defines if tension members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 305 of 391
10B.6 Axial Compression

The column strength equations take into account inelastic deformation and other recent research in column behavior. Two equations governing column strength are available, one for inelastic buckling and the other for elastic or Euler buckling. Both equations include the effects of residual stresses and initial outof-straightness. Compression strength for a particular member is calculated by STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Section 3.2 of the NTC. For slender elements, the procedure described in Section 2.3.6.NTC is also used. The procedures of Section 3.2 of the Commentaries, design helps and examples of the Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures (de los Comentarios, ayudas de diseo y ejemplos de las Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para el Diseo y Construccin de Estructuras Metlicas, DDF (Comentarios - Julio 1993) were implemented for the determination of design strength for these limit states. Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, LZ. If not provided, the entire member length will be taken into consideration. In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
International Codes
10B.7 Flexural Design Strength In the Limit States Design Method, the flexural design strength of a member is determined mainly by the limit state of lateral torsionalbuckling. Inelastic bending is allowed and the basic measure of flexural capacity is the plastic moment capacity of the section. The flexural resistance is a function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally unbraced length, limiting laterally unbracedlength, buckling moment and the bending coefficient. The limiting laterally unbraced length Lu and flexural resistance Mr are functions of the section geometry and are calculated as per the procedure of Section 3.3.2 of the NTC. The purpose of bending coefficient Cb is to account for the influence of the moment gradient on lateraltorsionalbuckling. This coefficient can be specified by the user through the use of parameter CB or CBy (see Table 10B.1) or may be calculated by the program (according to LRDF USA specification) if CB is specified as 0.0. In the absence of the parameter CB, a default value of 1.0 will be used. To specify laterally unsupported length, either of the parameters UNL and UNF (see Table 10B.1) can be used. It is taken into account the reduction of flexural resistance due to slender web according to section 4.5.8 of the NTC For the sections where the web and flange are slender the LRDF USA specification was used. Stress areas due to bending about y axis (MY)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 306 of 391
Notes: the local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards; the shaded area indicates area under compression; the area not shaded indicates area under tension. Stress areas due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
International Codes
10B.8 Design for Shear

The procedure of Sect. 3.3.3 of the NTC is used in STAAD to design for shear forces in members. Besides combined bending and shear is checked according to section 3.3.4 of the NTC, considering also the limits for stiffeners of the web according to sections 4.5.6/7 of the NTC. Shear in wide flanges and channel sections is resisted by the area of the web/s.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 307 of 391
10B.9 Combined Compression Axial Force and Bending

The interaction of flexure and axial forces in singly and doubly symmetric shapes is governed by formulas of the Section 3.4 of the NTC. These interaction formulas cover the general case of biaxial bending combined with axial force. They are also valid for uniaxial bending and axial force. It is considered that the frames are part of structures that have shear walls or rigid elements so that the lateral displacements of a floor could be disregarded. The program has included formulas to include structures with lateral displacements in the future considering for B2 the columns individually and not the complete floor analysis. It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are angularly restrained.
International Codes
10B.10 Combined Tension Axial Forc and Bending Based on Section 3.5 4 of the NTC.
International Codes

Design per Mexican Standards is requested by using the CODE. Other applicable parameters are summarized in Table 10B.1. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure. The parameters DMAX and DMIN may only be used for member selection only. TABLA 10B.1. DESIGN PARAMETERS ACCORDING TO MEXICAN STANDARS STEEL Parameter Default Description Name Value KX 1.0 K value for flexural-torsional buckling KY 1.0 K value in local Y axis- Usually minor axis KZ 1.0 K value in local Z axis- Usually major axis LX Member length Length for flexural-torsional buckling LY Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis. LZ Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Z axis. FYLD 2530 kg/cm2 Minimum Yield strength of steel FU 4230 Kg/cm2 Ultimate tensile strength of steel NSF 1 Net section factor for tension members UNT Member length Unsupported length (L) of the top* flange for calculating flexural strength . Will be used only if compression is in
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 308 of 391
UNB STIFF Cb y Cby
Member length Member length 1
TRACK
DMAX DMIN RATIO BEAM
114 cm 0.0 cm 1.0 0
Rigid_to_H_Loads TRUE
IRREG
I_NO_OXIG
IMAIN_MEM Ccomb
0 1
the top flange. Unsupported length (L) of the bottom* flange for calculating flexural strength . Will be used only if compression is in the bottom flange. Spacing of stiffeners for beams for shear design Coefficient C defined per section 3.3.2.2. If Cb is set to 0.0 it will be calculated by the program according to LRFD USA (CbMex=1/CbUSA). Any other value will be directly used in the design. 0 = Supress all design strengths 1 = Print all design strengths 2 = Print expanded design output Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Permissible ratio of actual load effect and design strength 0: Design at ends and those locations specified by SECTION command. 1: Design at ends and at every y cada 1/12th point along member length Defines if the structure has elements to bear the wind load ( shear walls, wind trusses or bracing rigid elements ) that restrict lateral displacements and allow to disregard slenderness effects. Variable defined for the whole structure indicating if it is regular or irregular according to section 3.4 of the NTC. IRREG=1 for columns being part of irregular structures. Defined for I shapes or tubes Curve Definition according to NTC.3.2.2.1a) I_NO_OXIG.= 0 implies n=1.4 laminated I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plates obtained from wider plates cuts with oxygen. I_NO_OXIG.= 1 implies n=1 I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plates n is defined by the program IMAIN_MEM=0 MAIN MEMBER IMAIN_MEM=1 Secondary and wind trusses Cfactor for combined forces when there are tranverse loads in the members. Section 3.4.3.3.ii NTC Ccomb=1 If members ends are restricted angularly. Ccomb=0.85 If members ends are not restricted angularly. DUCTILE FRAMES ACCORDING TO SECTION 11. Main design conditions are considered (not including, at the moment, geometric ones)
DUCTILE_SEISMIC _DESIGN
TRUE
* Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local Z axis if SET Z UP is used.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 309 of 391
Note: For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 from Table 2.1 may be used. All requirements remain the same.
International Codes
10B.12 Code Checking and Member Selection Both code checking and member selection options are available in STAAD Mexican Standards implementation.
International Codes
10B.13 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the Mexican NTC which governed the design. If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be printed out.
International Codes
Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per Russian Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*)
11A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* Plain concrete and concrete structures is based on the method of limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* defines two groups of limit states. Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the following phenomena: brittle, plastic or other type of failure, loss by structure of stable form or position, fatigue failure, failure due to the action of load actions and unfavourable environmental effects.
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the following phenomena: excessive and longterm opening of cracks if they are allowed according to service conditions, excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of the maximum (design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second group of limit states is made in accordance with the operational (normative) loads and actions. Ratio between design and normative loads is called reliability coefficient for loads which is determined according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 Loads and actions. Reliability coefficient gn for destination according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 shall be considered in determination of loads and their combinations. Program STAAD/Pro makes it possible to calculate reinforcement for concrete members according to codes of many countries round the World and Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* inclusive. Algorithms for calculation of reinforcement of concrete linear (beams, columns) and 2D (two dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells) members are incorporated in program STAAD/Pro. Not only Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* but also the Guide for design of plain concrete and reinforced concrete structures from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to SNiP 2.03.01-84) have been used in creation of these algorithms. It is possible using program STAAD/Pro to calculate reinforcement for beams of rectangular or T section
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 310 of 391
and for columns of rectangular or circular section (Fig.1).
Figure 1 - Notation of dimensions for rectangular, circular and T sections Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle BETA=0 0 , or at the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180 0 .
International Codes
11A.2 Input Data

Entry of data of cross-sections of beams and columns is made by the use of MEMBER PROPERTIES command, and thicknesses of 2D members are entered by ELEMENT PROPERTY command.
Example:
UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES * Columns of rectangular cross-section 1 TO 16 PRI YD 350. ZD 350. * Columns of circular cross-section 17 TO 22 PRI YD 350. * Beams of T cross-section 23 TO 40 PRI YD 450. ZD 550. YB 230. ZB 200. UNIT METER ELEMENT PROPERTY 41 TO 100 THICKNESS 0.14 101 TO 252 THICKNESS 0.16 * Flange of T beams is located at the bottom zone of cross-section BETA 180. MEMB 23 TO 40
Commands for calculation of reinforcement are located in the input data file after the command of analysis and as a rule, after output commands to print results of calculation. Example:
* Command of analysis PERFORM ANALYSIS . .* Output command to print results of calculation (according to users judgment) . * Command of loading and their combinations considered in design LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9 * Command to start reinforcement calculation procedure START CONCRETE DESIGN
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 311 of 391
CODE RUSSIAN .* List of parameters being used in reinforcement calculation . . BCL 20. MEMB 17 TO 22 CL1 0.04 MEMB 1 TO 40 DD2 10. MEMB 23 TO 40 CRA 0.036 MEMB 41 TO 252 . . . * Command of beam reinforcement calculation DESIGN BEAM 23 TO 40 * Command of column reinforcement calculation DESIGN COLUMN 1 TO 22 * Command of calculation 2D elements (slabs, walls, shells) DESIGN ELEMENT 41 TO 252 * Command of interruption reinforcement calculation END CONCRETE DESIGN
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of reinforcement for beams, columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is presented. Values of parameters do not depend on UNIT command. In the file of input data only such parameters have to be taken, the values of which differ from determined in the program. Table 1- Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code 2.03.01-84* for beams
No. 1 Parameter name NLT Default Description value 1 Number of long-term loading case Class of longitudinal reinforcement: RCL = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I; RCL = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II; RCL = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-III; RCL = 33, if class of reinforcement is A-IIIb; RCL = 4, if class of reinforcement is A-IV; RCL = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V; 3 RCL = 6, if class of reinforcement is A-VI; RCL = 7, if class of reinforcement is A-VII; RCL = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7; RCL = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II; RCL = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-II; RCL = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-I; RCL = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19 Total product of service conditions coefficients for 1. longitudinal reinforcement (g s ) 0.9 16. 16. 15. 1. 0. Specific service conditions coefficient for concrete (g b2 ) Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars in beam tension zone Diameter of shear reinforcement bars for beam; Compression class of concrete Product of service conditions coefficients for concrete, except UB2 (g b ) Parameter of concrete hardening conditions: TEM=0, for natural hardening conditions;
RCL
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
USM UB2 DD1 DD2 BCL UBM TEM
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 312 of 391
10 11 12 13
CL1 CL2 WST WLT
0.05 0.05 0.4 0.3
14
SSE
15
RSH
16
FWT
ZD
17
FWB
ZB
18 19 20 21
DEP SFA EFA NSE
YD 0. 0. 13
TEM=1, for steam hardening conditions Distance from top/bottom fiber of beam cross section to the center of longitudinal reinforcement bar; Distance from left/right side of beam cross section to the center of longitudinal reinforcement bar Ultimate width of short-term crack Ultimate width of long-term crack Limit state parameter for beam design SSE=0, if calculation of reinforcement amount must be carried out according to the requirements of load carrying capacity (the first limit state); SSE=1, if calculation of reinforcement amount must be carried out according to the cracking requirements (the second limit state) Class of shear reinforcement: RSH = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I; RSH = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II; RSH = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-III; RSH = 33, if class of reinforcement is A-IIIb; RSH = 4, if class of reinforcement is A-IV; RSH = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V; RSH = 6, if class of reinforcement is A-VI; RSH = 7, if class of reinforcement is A-VII; RSH = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7; RSH = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II; RSH = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-II; RSH = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-I; RSH = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19 Design width of beam top flange. Use for beam design only with default value provided as ZD in member properties. Design width of beam bottom flange. Use for beam design only with default value provided as ZB in member properties. Design depth of beam section. Use for beam design only with default value provided as YD in member properties. Face of support location at the start of the beam. Use for beam design only. Face of support location at the end of the beam. Use for beam design only. Number of equally-spaced sections for beam design. Use for beam design only. Upper limit is equal to 20.
Table 2 - Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code 2.03.01-84* for columns No. 1 Parameter name NLT Default Description value 1 Number of long-term loading case Class of longitudinal reinforcement: RCL = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I; RCL = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II; RCL = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-III;
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 313 of 391
RCL
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
USM UB2 DD1 DD2 BCL UBM TEM CL1 ELY ELZ
1. 0.9 16. 16. 15. 1. 0. 0.05 1. 1.
RCL = 33, if class of reinforcement is A-IIIb; RCL = 4, if class of reinforcement is A-IV; RCL = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V; RCL = 6, if class of reinforcement is A-VI; RCL = 7, if class of reinforcement is A-VII; RCL = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7; RCL = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II; RCL = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-II; RCL = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-I; RCL = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19 Total product of service conditions coefficients for longitudinal reinforcement (g s ) Specific service conditions coefficient for concrete (g b2 ) Minimum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars for column Maximum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars for column Compression class of concrete Product of service conditions coefficients for concrete, except UB2 (g b ) Parameter of concrete hardening conditions: TEM=0, for natural hardening conditions; TEM=1, for steam hardening conditions Distance from edge of column cross section to the center of longitudinal reinforcement bar Column's length coefficient to evaluate slenderness effect in local Y axis Column's length coefficient to evaluate slenderness effect in local Z axis
able 3 - Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*) for slabs and/or walls
No. 1 Parameter name NLT Default Description value 1 Number of long-term loading case Class of longitudinal reinforcement: RCL = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I; RCL = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II; RCL = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-III; RCL = 33, if class of reinforcement is A-IIIb; RCL = 4, if class of reinforcement is A-IV; RCL = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V; 3 RCL = 6, if class of reinforcement is A-VI; RCL = 7, if class of reinforcement is A-VII; RCL = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7; RCL = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II; RCL = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-II; RCL = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-I; RCL = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19 Total product of service conditions coefficients for 1. longitudinal reinforcement (g s ) 0.9 16. Specific service conditions coefficient for concrete (g b2 ) Diameter of reinforcing bars located in the first
RCL
3 4 5
USM UB2 SDX
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 314 of 391
6 7 8 9
SDY BCL UBM TEM
16. 15. 1. 0.
local (X) direction of slab/wall Diameter of reinforcing bars located in the second local (Y) direction of slab/wall Compression class of concrete Product of service conditions coefficients for concrete, except UB2 (g b ) Parameter of concrete hardening conditions: TEM=0, for natural hardening conditions; TEM=1, for steam hardening conditions Distance from top/bottom face of slab/wall element to the center of longitudinal reinforcing bars located in first local (X) direction. (Main thickness of top/bottom concrete cover for slab/wall element) Distance from top/bottom face of slab/wall element to the center of transverse reinforcing bars located in second local (Y) direction (Secondary thickness of top/bottom concrete cover for slab/wall) Ultimate width of short-term crack Ultimate width of long-term crack Parameter of limit state for slab/wall design: STA=0, if calculation of nonsymmetrical reinforcement must be carried out according to the requirements of load carrying capacity (the first limit state); STA=1, if calculation of symmetrical reinforcement must be carried out according to the requirements of load carrying capacity (the first limit state); STA=2, if calculation of nonsymmetrical reinforcement must be carried according to the cracking requirements (the second limit state); STA=3, if calculation of symmetrical reinforcement must be carried according to the cracking requirements (the second limit state) Design length of wall member to evaluate slenderness effect in local X axis Design length of wall member to evaluate slenderness effect in local Y axis Design parameter of slab/wall reinforcement: MMA=0, if reinforcement calculation must be applied by stresses in local axis; MMA=1, if reinforcement calculation must be applied by principal stresses Design parameter of slab/wall reinforcement: MMB=0, if the effect of additional eccentricity is not taken into account; MMB=1, if the effect of additional eccentricity is taken into account
10
CL
0.05
11 12 13
CRA WST WLT
0.05 0.4 0.3
14
STA
15 16
SELX SELY
0. 0.
17
MMA
18
MMB
International Codes
11A.3 Beams
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 315 of 391
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In calculation of longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis and torsional moments are considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axis is ignored. In and torsional moments are calculation of transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis taken into account. Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or from conditions of open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE). Parameters SFA and FA are considered only in calculation of transverse reinforcement. In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times according to strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width limitation. In reinforcement calculations from conditions of strength design values of load have to be taken and in calculations from conditions of crack width limitation characteristic (normative) load values are used. Both calculations can be carried out in one session with the use multiple analysis possibility of the program STAAD.Pro. In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a part of loadings. In such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers of loads considered in calculation are indicated. Number of permanent and long-term loads equal to parameter NLT must be included into the list of considered loads. It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not only on the width of opened crack but also in some cases, on design and normative reinforcement resistances. Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class given in SNiP 2.03.0184* and to any intermediate value as well. It should be remembered, that accuracy of results of calculation of transverse reinforcement increases with the value of parameter NSE. Parameters SFA and FA are considered only in calculations of transverse reinforcement. Beam 1 is shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of which are: at the start of the beam 0.3m and at the end 0.2m. In modeling of the beam the following command can be used.
MEMBER OFFSET 1 START 0.3 0 0 1 END -0.2 0 0
Figure 2 - Diagram of a beam with rigid intervals When command MEMBER OFFSET is used forces corresponding to the beam the length of which is equal to the distance between points a and b are calculated and then used in calculation of reinforcement. In such case it is necessary to take into account default values of parameters SFA and FA equal to zero. When command MEMBER OFFSET is not used forces corresponding to the beam the length of which is equal to the distance between points 10 and 11 are calculated and then used in calculation of reinforcement. In this case it is necessary to consider values of parameters SFA=0.3 and FA=0,2 in
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 316 of 391
reinforcement calculation. In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same. Calculated quantity of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater. For beam the following output is generated: beam number; method of calculation (according to conditions of strength or limitations of opened crack width); length and cross-sectional dimensions; distance from resultant of forces acting in bottom/top reinforcement to bottom/top edge of the section; distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the centroid of longitudinal bars located at this edge; concrete class; class of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement; assumed in calculations bar diameters of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement; calculation results of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement (in two tables). In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented: Section distance of the section from the start of the beam, Ascross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the bottom zone of crosssection of the beam, if angle BETA=0, or in the top zone, if BETA=180 , sq.cm As+ cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the top zone of crosssection of the beam , if angle BETA=0, or in the top zone, if BETA=180 , sq.cm Moments (-/+) values of bending moments, determining cross-sectional areas of longitudinal reinforcement As- and As+ , kNm Load. N. (-/+) numbers of loading versions, determining cross-sectional areas of longitudinal reinforcement Acrc1 short-term opened crack width*, mm Acrc2 long-term opened crack width*, mm
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed according to conditions limiting opened crack width. In ten columns of second table the following results are presented: Section Qsw Asw Q T Load N. distance of the section from the start of the beam, mm intensity of transverse reinforcement, kN/m cross-sectional area of transverse bars, sq.cm, if their step is 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 cm value of shear force parallel to the local axis, kN value of torsional moment, kNm number of loading version, determining intensity of transverse reinforcement
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 317 of 391
An example of output of calculation results is presented below. BEAM NO. 23 DESIGN RESULTS (by limitation of crack width) Length - 6000 mm. Section: BF1= 550 mm, B= 200 mm, HF1=220 mm, H=450 mm. Distance from top/bottom surface of beam to center of longitudinal reinforcement - 40 mm. Distance from side surface of beam to center of longitudinal reinforcement - 30 mm. Concrete class - 25.0 (Rb=13.05 MPa; Rbt=0.94 MPa; Gb2=0.9). Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 MPa; Rsc=365.0 MPa). Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars D=16 mm. Class of shear reinforcement - -I (Rsw=175.0 MPa). Diameter of shear reinforcement bars Dw=10 mm. LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT Section mm 0. 500. 1.13 1000. 1.13 1500. 1.13 2000. 1.13 11.53 2500. 1.19 12.16 3000. 1.41 10.86 3500. 1.63 4000. 4500. 5000. 0.74 5500. 16.89 6000. SHEAR REINFORCEMENT Section mm Qsw kN/m Asw, cm^2, if Sw= 15cm 20cm 25cm Q 30cm kN T kNm Load N. 0.41 -226. / 0. 5 / 0 0.155 0.078 0.41 -124. / 0. 5 / 0 0.271 0.142 1.95 3.23 4.54 0.58 -27. / -39. / 56. 9. 4 5 / / 6 0.299 3 0.293 0.157 8.28 -24. / 103. 4 / 6 0.296 0.129 0.093 -21. / 132. 4 / 6 0.277 0.130 -18. / 144. 4 / 6 0.263 0.127 -14. / 139. 4 / 6 0.271 0.134 9.24 -11. / 115. 4 / 6 0.298 0.149 6.41 -8. / 75. 4 / 6 0.295 0.147 1.13 -5. / 17. 4 / 6 0.000 0.000 As- As+ Moments(-/+) sq.cm kNm 10.92 4.74 0.41 0.41 -152. / -60. / 2. 0. Load.N.(-/+) 6 5 / / 4 0.237 0 0.294 0.157 Acrc1 mm 0.121 Acrc2 mm
10cm
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 318 of 391
0. 500. 1000.
251.3 251.3
1.44 2.15 2.87 1.44 2.15 2.87 1.50 1.99 0.55 0.73 Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum 0.82 1.09 2.08 2.77 2.59 3.46 2.59 3.46
3.59 3.59 2.49
4.31 -203.9 4.31 -168.9 2.99 -133.9
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1.00 174.5 1500. 63.9 0.36 2000. requirements ! 2500. requirements ! 3000. requirements ! 3500. requirements ! 4000. requirements ! 4500. 95.0 0.55 5000. 1.39 242.5 5500. 1.73 302.5 6000. 1.73 302.5
0.91 1.09 -98.9 detailing -63.9 detailing -28.9 detailing detailing detailing 1.37 3.46 4.32 4.32 1.64 4.16 5.19 5.19 12.7 47.7 82.7 117.7 152.7 187.7 216.1
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required according to calculation.
International Codes
11A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be calculated. Flexibility of columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of usual analysis (command PERFORM ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by parameters ELY and ELZ, values of which should conform with recommendation of the Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according to deformed diagram) or NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of parameters ELY and ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01. Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only from condition of strength. Longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axes and are taken into account in longitudinal reinforcement
calculations.
For rectangular columns the following output is generated:

column number; column length and cross-sectional dimensions; distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the cross-section; concrete class; longitudinal reinforcement class; range of longitudinal reinforcement bar diameters assumed in calculation; diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained in calculation; total quantity of longitudinal bars;
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 319 of 391
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis
; .
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the following output is presented: Section Astot Asy distance of the section from the start of the column, mm total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm
cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section, directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section, directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm
Asz
Percent Nx, Mz, My
reinforcement percentage in the section

respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to the local axes and , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement
Load.N.
number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below. COLUMN NO. 97 DESIGN RESULTS (rectangular section) Length - 4000 mm. Section: B= 350 mm, H=350 mm. Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal reinforcement bar - 40 mm. Concrete class - 25.0 (Rb=13.05 Pa; Gb2=0.9). Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 Pa; Rsc=365.0 Pa). Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars: Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation d=20 mm. Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot=6. Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the local Y axis Nyy =2. Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the local Z axis Nzz =3. LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT Section m 0. 4000. Astot Asy sq.cm sq.cm 16.42 15.35 3.01 3.01 Asz sq.cm Per cent % 6.20 5.67 Nx kN Mz kNm 285.5 397.3 My kNm 81.9 95.3 Load N. 0.0 0.0 6 5
1.34 1.25
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 320 of 391
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section obtained from calculation should be considered as recommendation. In this case arrangement of reinforcement in the section depends on the orientation of the local axes and is as follows: or
Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table and they may differ from recommended on the lower side. When it is not possible according to detailing provisions to arrange in the column longitudinal reinforcement determined from calculation additional message is derived. For columns of circular section the following output is generated: column number; column length and diameter of cross-section; distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar to the edge of cross-section; longitudinal reinforcement class; assumed in calculation range of diameters of longitudinal reinforcement bars; diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained from calculation; quantity of longitudinal bars. In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the following results are presented:

Section Astot Per cent Nx, Mz, My
distance of the section from the start of the column, mm total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq cm percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to local axis and , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement
Load. N.
number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is presented below. COLUMN NO. 80 DESIGN RESULTS (circular section)
Length - 4000 mm. Diameter: D= 350 mm. Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal reinforcement bar - 50 mm. Concrete class - 20.0 (Rb=10.35 Pa; Gb2=0.9). Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 Pa; Rsc=365.0 Pa). Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars: Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation D=20 mm. Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot =7.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 321 of 391
LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT Section mm 0. 4000. Astot sq.cm 17.96 21.86 Per cent % 1.87 2.27 Nx kN 195.1 195.1 Mz kNm 59.8 80.2 My kNm 0.0 0.0 5 5 Load. N.
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section should be considered as recommendation. Arrangement of reinforcement in section in this case is shown below:
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ from recommended on the lower side. When according to detailing provisions it is not possible to arrange in the column longitudinal reinforcement obtained from calculation additional message is derived.
International Codes

11A.5 2D (two dimensional) element (slabs, walls, shells) In general case calculation of reinforcement for 2D members is carried out two times according to conditions of strength and conditions of limiting opened width of cracks. If reinforcement is calculated according to conditions of strength, design values of loads have to be used, and for conditions of limiting crack width characteristic (normative) loads are employed. Both calculations can be made in one session taking advantage of multiple analysis possibility of the program STAAD.Pro. Symmetric or nonsymmetric reinforcement of 2D members is calculated according to conditions of strength or according to conditions of limiting opened crack width (see for example STA). In reinforcement calculation for 2D members it is necessary to pay attention to arrangement of local axes of member and direction of reinforcement (see for example CL and CRA).
An example of output of calculation results is presented bellow.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 322 of 391
SLAB/WALL DESIGN RESULTS (by stresses in local axes for limitation of crack width)
Element Asx sq.cm/m Mx Nx kNm/m kN/m Load. N. Asy (X) sq.cm/m My Ny Load N. kNm/m kN/m (Y)
60 TOP BOT 61 TOP BOT 62 TOP BOT
0.00 3.53 0.00 3.87 0.00 4.10
- 4.9 - 9.9 - 5.3 - 10.7 - 5.6 - 11.2
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 3 1 3 1 3
0.00 3.46 0.00 3.65 0.00 3.77
- 4.5 - 8.9 - 4.7 - 9.4 - 4.8 - 9.6
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 3 1 3 1 3
Here: Element number of finite element, TOP - top zone of member, BOT - bottom zone of member (top zone of member is determined by positive direction of local axis - see Fig.2) intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the local axis ), sq.cm/m distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis , kNm/m distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the axis , kNm/m number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in the first direction intensity of reinforcing in the second direction (parallel to the local axis ), sq.cm/m distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis kNm/m distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the local axis kN/m number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in the second direction
Asx Mx Nx Load N.(X) Asy
My Ny Load N.(Y)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 323 of 391
Figure 2 - Local coordinate system of 2D member and notation of forces
International Codes
Russian Codes - Steel Design Per Russian Code SNIP 2.23-81* (EDITION 1990)
11B.1 General Design Code SNiP Steel Structures as majority of modern codes is based on the method of limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code. The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability, failure, qualitative changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-allowable residual deformations, displacements, yielding of materials or opening of cracks. The second group is concerned with states of structures making worse normal their service or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections, deviations, settlements, vibrations, etc.
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum (design) loads and actions, which can cause failure of structures. Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service (normative) loads and actions. Relation between design and normative loads is refered to as coefficient of load reliability, which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions. Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 shall be taken in to account determining loads or their combinations. In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed assortment sections and also from compound such as double angles of T-type sections, double channels are presented. Design of other members of compound section will be presented in other versions of the program. Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio (RATIO) s/R y y c presented in calculation results. A section is economical when said ratio equals to 0,9 0,95.
International Codes
11B.2 Axial tension members
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 324 of 391
Stress in a section of axial tension member shall not exceed design strength R y of selected steel multiplied by coefficient of service conditions g c (KY and KZ), table 6 of SNiP 2.01.07.-81*. Slenderness of tension member (CMM) shall not exceed slenderness limit indicated in table 20 of SNiP2.01.07.- 81* (default value l u =200, but another value can be defined). Net section factor (ratio A net /A gross (NSF)) is used for tension member to allow for reduction of design cross-section area.
International Codes
11B.3 Axial compression members

All axial compression members are calculated as long bars, i.e., with allowance for slenderness (l=l0/imin). calculation is performed in accordance with the clause 5.3 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, buckling coefficient j is determined by formula 8-10. effective bar lengths (within and out of plane) taking in to account role and location of the bar in the structure, as well as fixation of ends (l0=ml), are determined according to requirements of chapter 6 or addition 6 to SNiP2.01.07.- 81* and are set by specification of members. Slenderness of compression members (CMN) shall not exceed limit values given in table 19 of SNiP 2.01.07.-81*. Value of coefficient a being used in table 19 is taken within limits from 0,5 to 1,0. limit slenderness value depends on stress acting in the member, section area, buckling coefficient and design resistance of steel. Since slenderness can be different in various planes the greatest slenderness is assumed in calculations.
International Codes
11B.4 Flexural members Members subjected to the action of bending moments and shear forces are called flexural members. Calculation of flexural members consists of verification of strength, stability and deflection. Normal and tangential stresses are verified by strength calculation of members. Normal stresses are calculated in the outermost section fibres. Tangential stresses are verified in the neutral axis zone of the same section. If normal stresses do not exceed design steel strength and tangential stresses do not exceed design value of steel shear strength R s g s then according to clause 5.14 of SniP 2.01.07.- 81* principal stresses are checked. General stability of member subjected to bending in one plane are calculated in accordance with clause 5.15 of SNiP2.01.07.- 81*, and subjected to bending in two planes in accordance with Guide to design of steel structures (to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*). Coefficient j b value is determined according to appendix 7 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Additional data about load (concentrated or distributed), numbers of bracing restrains of compression flanges, location of applied load are required. For closed sections it is assumed that coefficient j b =1,0. Simply supported (non-continuous) beams can be calculated in elastic as well as in elastic-plastic state according to requirements of clause 5.18 of SniP 2.01.07.- 81*. Calculation can be selected by specification of structure in input data. Stiffness of flexural members is verified comparing input value of deflection limit (through parameter DFF) with maximum displacement of a section of flexural member allowing for load reliability coefficient, which is specified, in input data. Limit values of deflection are determined in accordance with SniP2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions. Addition chapter 10.deflections and displacements. Verification of deflection is performed only in the case of review (CHECK) problem.
International Codes
Introduction
Page 325 of 391
11B.5 Eccentrical compression/tension members Eccentrial compression or tension members are subjected to simultaneous action of axial force and bending moment. Bending moment appears due to eccentrical application of longitudinal force or due to transverse force. Stress in eccentrical compression/tension members is obtained as a sum of stresses due to axial force and bending. Following the requirements of clause 5.25 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* resistance of eccentrical compression/tension member taking into consideration condition Ry<530 MPa, <0,5Rs and N/(AnRy) >0,1 is calculated by formula 49, and in other cases-by formula 50. Calculations of stability verification are performed according to requirements of clauses 5.27, 5.30, 5.32 or 5.34. Calculation for strength of eccentrial tension members is made according to formula 50 of SNiP 2.01.07.81*. When reduced relative eccentricity mef>20 eccentrical compression members are calculated as flexural members (N=0), when mef<20 strength by formula 49 is not verified (clause 5.24).
International Codes
11B.6 Input Data Program STAAD.Pro gives opportunity to verify sections of steel structures by codes of many countries including and Russian Code SniP 2.01.07.- 81*. Algorithms for selection and review of sections for steel members according to assortments and databases of the main rolled steel producers from given countries and according to international standards as well are included in STAAD/Pro program. In this program version only assortment sections can be utilized.
Typical sections of members being checked and selected according to SniP 2.01.07.- 81* are presented in tables 1 and 2. Table 1. No. typical sections Section Section type Designation form ST I12 ST B1-10 ST SH1-23 ST K1-20 ST C14
1 I-beam (GOST 8239-89) 2 Regular I-beam (GOST 26020-83) Broad-flanged I-beam 3 (GOST 26020-83) Column I-beam (GOST 4 26020-83)
5 Channel (GOST 8240-89)
Equal legs angle (GOST 8509-89)
ST L100x100x7 RA L100x100x7
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 326 of 391
Unequal legs angle (GOST 8510-89)
ST L125x80x10 RA L125x80x10
Pipes (welded and for gas piping)
ST PIP102x5.5 or ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055 ST TUB160x120x3 or ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
Roll-formed square and 9 rectangular tubes
Table 2. No.
Compound sections Section Section type Designation form D C14 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between channel walls) LD L100x100x7 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between angle walls) LD L125x80x10 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between angle walls) SD L125x80x10 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between angle walls) T I12 T B1-10 T SH1-23 T K1-20
1 Double channels
2 Double equal legs angles
Double unequal legs angles 5 with long legs back to back
Double unequal legs angles 6 with short legs back to back
7 Tee with flange at the top
Flange of Tee beams is at the top part of cross-section if angle BETA = 0, or at the bottom part if BETA = 180. For entry of cross-sectional dimensions command MEMBER PROPERTIES RUSSIAN is used.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 327 of 391
Example:
UNITS METER MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN * I-beam 1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10 * Channel 7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14 * Unequal legs angle 12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125x80x10 * Round assortment pipe 31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102x5.5 * round pipe of cross-sectional dimensions defined by client 47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055 * Square tube from assortment 61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120x120x3 * Rectangular tube of cross-sectional dimension defined by client 69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16 * Double channel (distance between walls 10 ) 96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01 * Double unequal legs angles with short legs back to back (distance between walls 10 ) 104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125x80x10 SP 0.01 * member of Tee section 106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23 * Flange of T-beams at the bottom of cross-section BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126 * Orientation of the local angle axes in relation to the global axes of the structure BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30
Commands of output data for check and selection of sections are located after commands of analysis and, as a rule, after output command to print results of calculation. Example:
* Command of analysis PERFORM ANALYSIS * Command of loadings and their combinations considered in design LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9 * Command to start design according to Russian Code PARAMETER CODE RUSSIAN * List of parameters used in checking and selecting . BEAM 1. ALL (obligatory parameter) . LY 4. MEMB 1 TO 4 LZ 4. MEM 1 TO 4 MAIN 1. ALL SGR 3. ALL SBLT 0 ALL * Parameter of output amount of information on calculation results TRACK 2. ALL . * Command to start section check procedure CHECK CODE ALL * Command to start section selection procedure SELECT ALL
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 328 of 391
. * Command of output to print content of assortment tables PRINT ENTIRE TABLE * Command of output to print summary of steel according to sections STEEL TAKE OFF * Command of output to print summary of steel according to members and sections STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
Information on parameters, data used for check and selection of sections in design of steel structures according to Russian Code is presented in table 3. In this version of calculation according to requirements of SniP2.01.07.- 81* there is common database of equal legs angles and unequal legs angles, therefore solution of section selection problem may give equal legs angle as well as unequal legs angle irrespective of set at the beginning. The same is and with rectangular and square tubes. Values of parameters do not depend on command UNIT. Only these values of parameters, which differ from, defined in the program need to be included in the input data file. Review of sections (command CHECK) can be performed according to the first and the second group of limit states. Selection of section (command SELECT) can be performed only according to the first group of limit states with subsequent recalculation and verification of selected section with allowance for deflection. Calculation for the first group of limit states involves selection of members according to strength and stability. Parameters CMN and CMM give opportunity to set slenderness limit for compression and tension members respectively for their stability calculation, or refuse consideration of slenderness by setting default parameters. In this case selection of sections will be performed with consideration only of strength check. Check for deflection performed by setting parameter DFF (maximum allowable relative deflection value) different from set in the program. In the case of application of steel not defined by SniP and/or GOST it is necessary to set their design strength by parameters UNL and PY. In determination of steel parameters SBLT and MAIN shall be approved (see table 4). Table 3. Names of parameters for Steel design according to Russian Code (SNiPII 23 81*, edition 1990) Parameter No. Description name Coefficient of effective length in 1 KY respect to local axis Y (in plane XZ) Coefficient of effective length in 2 KZ respect to local axis Z (in plane XY) Effective length in respect to LY local axis Y (in plane XZ) 3 [m] Default is selected member's length Effective length in respect to LZ local axis Z (in plane XY) 4 [m] Default is selected member's length
Default value 1.0 1.0 Member length Member length
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 329 of 391
SBLT
NSF
MAIN
DFF
Number of lateral bracing restraints along the span: SBLT = 0, if beam not fixed; SBLT = 1, one restraint in the middle of the span; SBLT = 2, 3, etc. number of uniformly spaced lateral supports along the span Net section factor for tension members or web section area weakening factor for bending members Standard of steel grade (GOST): MAIN = 1, if Standard of steel grade is GOST2777288; MAIN = 2, if Standard of steel grade is GOST1070580; MAIN = 3, if Standard of steel grade is GOST1070676; MAIN = 4, if Standard of steel grade is GOST873187; MAIN = 5, if Standard of steel grade is TY14-3-56776 Allowable limit of relative local deflection (Member length/Deflection Ratio): Default value 0 is valid if design is applied without deflection limitation. Set for deflection check only Steel grade (STAL): SGR = 1, if Steel grade is C235; SGR = 2, if Steel grade is C245; SGR = 3, if Steel grade is C255; SGR = 4, if Steel grade is C275; SGR = 5, if Steel grade is C285; SGR = 6, if Steel grade is C345; SGR = 7, if Steel grade is C345K; SGR = 8, if Steel grade is C375; SGR = 9, if Steel grade is C390; SGR = 10, if Steel grade is C390K;
1.0
0.
SGR
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 330 of 391
10
MM
SGR = 11, if Steel grade is C440; SGR = 12, if Steel grade is C590; SGR = 13, if Steel grade is C590K; SGR = 14, if Steel grade is BCT3KP; SGR = 15, if Steel grade is BCT3PC; SGR = 16, if Steel grade is BCT3CP; SGR = 17, if Steel grade is 20; SGR = 18, if Steel grade is 16G2AF Slenderness limit value for tension members: MM = 0, if slenderness is suppressed; MM = 2, if ultimate slenderness value is "150"; MM = 2, if ultimate slenderness value is "200"; MM = 3, if ultimate slenderness value is "250"; MM = 4, if ultimate slenderness value is "300"; MM = 5, if ultimate slenderness value is "350"; MM = 6, if ultimate slenderness value is "400 Set slenderness limit value not equal to "0" for design with evaluation of buckling effect Slenderness limit value for compression members: MN = 0, if slenderness is suppressed; MN = 1, if slenderness limit value is "120"; MN = 2, if slenderness limit value is "210-60a"; MN = 3, if slenderness limit value is "220-40a"; MN = 4, if
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 331 of 391
11
CMN
12
LEG
13
CB
14
TRACK
slenderness limit value is "220"; MN = 5, if slenderness limit value is "180-60a"; MN = 6, if slenderness limit value is "210-60a"; MN = 7, if slenderness limit value is "210-60a"; MN = 8, if slenderness limit value is "200"; MN = 9, if slenderness limit value is "150"; Set slenderness limit value not equal to "0" for design with evaluation of buckling effect Type and position of loading on beam: LEG = 1, for loading concentrated in the middle span; LEG = 2, for loading concentrated in the quarter of the span; LEG = 3, for loading concentrated at the end of bracket; LEG = 4, for loading uniformly distributed on beam; LEG = 5, for loading uniformly distributed on bracket Place of loading on beam: CB = 1, for loading on top flange; CB = 2, for loading on bottom flange Output parameter: TRACK = 0, for suppressed output information; TRACK = 1, for extended output information; TRACK = 2, for advanced output information Indication of elastic or elasticplastic calculation: TB = 0, for elastic calculation TB = 1, for elastic-plastic
15
TB
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 332 of 391
16 17 18
RATIO DMAX [m] DMIN [m]
calculation Set for members under bending or non-axial compression/tension only. Ratio between design and characteristic loads values Maximum allowable section depth Minimum allowable section depth Member design parameter: BEAM = 0, Design members for forces at their ends or at the sections defined by SECTION command; BEAM = 1, Calculate the major axis moment Mz at 13 points along the beam and design beam at the location of maximum Mz; BEAM = 2, Same as BEAM=1, but additional checks are carried out at beam ends and at critical inter mediate section; BEAM = 3, Calculate forces at 13 points and perform design checks at all locations including the ends Specific service condition coefficient for buckling design Specific service condition coefficient for strength design Design steel strength (yield strength): If parameters MAIN according to Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by SGR according to Steel grade (STAL) are not defined Design steel strength (ultimate strength): If parameters MAIN according to Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by SGR according to Steel grade (STAL) are not defined
1.0 1. 0.
19
BEAM
20 21
GAMC1 GAMC2
1.0 1.0
22
PY [MPa]
23
UNL [MPa]
Table 4. Steel types for design of steel structures according to SniP 2.01.07.- 81* (table 51 and 51a) Parameter SGR Steel Parameter MAIN GOST GOST For members *
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 333 of 391
27772-88 GOST 14 BSt3kp 2 10705-80* GOST 2 10705-80* 15 BSt3ps 3 GOST 10706-76* GOST 2 10705-80* 16 BSt3sp 3 GOST 10706-76* GOST 873117 20 4 87 TY 14-318 16G2F 5 567-76 *Gt members from sheet and roll-formed tubes F rolled section steel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
C235 C245 C255 C275 C285 C345 C345K C375 C390 C390K C440 C590 C590
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F F F F F F Tube Tube
Tube Tube Tube
International Codes
11B.7 Section selection and check results Output of selection and check results are given in suppressed, extended and advanced forms. Form of output results depends on value of parameter TRACK. Results are presented in tables. Three versions of output results are possible: suppressed results according the critical strength condition (TRACK=0), extended - results according to all check conditions (TRACK=1) and advanced complete information on results of member design (TRACK=2). In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated: (TRACK=2). In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated: number of member; type and number of cross-section;
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 334 of 391
result obtained (ACCEPTED requirements are met, FAILURE are not met); abbreviated name of normative document (code, standard) (SNiP); number of check clause; safety of strength (ratio between design and normative values); number of the most unfavorable loading; value of longitudinal force acting in the member with subscript indicating its direction (C compression, P tension); bending moments in relation to local member axes Z and Y; distance to section, in which the most unfavorable combination of forces acts. In suppressed form (TRACK=0) results are presented according to the critical check for given member with indication of SniPclause number, according to which strength safety of the member is minimum. Example of output with TRACK=0 of calculation results of a member is given below.
In extended form (TRACK=1) results are presented on the basis of all required by SniP checks for given stress state. Example of output with TRACK=1 of calculation results of a member is given below.
In advanced form (TRACK=2) in addition to tabled results supplementary information is presented. Material characteristics: Steel; Design resistance; Elasticity modulus; Section characteristics: Length of member; Section area; Net area; Inertia moment (second moment of area) (I); Section modulus (W);
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 335 of 391
First moment of area (S); Radius of gyration; Effective length; Slenderness; Results are presented in two columns, Z and Y respectively. Design forces: Longitudinal force; Moments; Shear force. Signs + and - indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments and shear forces in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD. Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate parameters by formulas in analytical and numerical expression with indication of SNiP clause. Example of output with TRACK=2 of calculation results of a member is given in the next page.
Conventional notations assumed in presentation of results: +, -, /, *,**, SQRT, their respective meanings addition, subtraction, division, multiplication, raising to the second power (squared) and square root. Conventional notations of stresses, coefficients and characteristics of steel resistance comply with accepted in SNiP, only Greek letters are changed by their names (e.g. , g -GAMAC; a-ALFA; b-BETA, h-ETA, j-FI, etc.).
International Codes
South African Codes - Concrete Design Per SABS 0100-1
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 336 of 391

STAAD has the capability for performing design of concrete beams and columns according to the South African code SABS 0100-1. The 2000 revision of the code is currently implemented. Design can be performed for beams (flexure, shear and torsion) and columns (axial load + biaxial bending). Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcement.
International Codes
The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to SABS 0100-1. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 12A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 12A.1 South African Concrete Design-SABS 0100-1 -Parameters Parameter Default Description Name Value Yield Stress for main reinforcement FYMAIN *450 N/mm2 FYSEC FC MINMAIN *450N/mm2 * 30N/mm2 8mm Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a. Applicable to shear bars in beams Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 28 32 36 40 50 60 Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to shear reinforcement in beams Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above. Clear Cover for outermost top reinforcement Clear Cover for outermost bottom reinforcement Clear Cover for outermost side reinforcement 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. Column design gives no detailed results. 1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0 List of design sag/hog moments and corresponding required steel area at each section of member Width of concrete member. This value default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. Depth of concrete member. This value default is as provided as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. 0.0 = Column braced in both directions. 1.0 = Column braced about local Y direction only
MINSEC MAXMAIN CLT CLB CLS TRACK
8mm 50mm 20mm 20mm 20mm 0.0
WIDTH
*ZD
DEPTH
*YD
BRACE
0.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 337 of 391
ELY ELZ
1.0 1.0
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Z direction only 3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z directions Member length factor about local Y direction for column design. Member length factor about local Z direction for column design.
* Provided in current unit system
International Codes
12A.3 Member Dimensions Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required input:
UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES *RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300mm WIDE X 450mm DEEP 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300. *CIRCULAR COLUMN 300mm diameter 11 13 PR YD 300. * T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB) * - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP) 14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000.YB 350.ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas ( AY& AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition above.
International Codes
12A.4 Beam Design Beam design includes flexure, shear and torsion. For all types of beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and locate the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed. Design for flexure is carried out as per clause no. 4.3.3.4. Shear design as per SABS 0100 clause 4.3.4 has been followed and the procedure includes computation of critical shear values. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. If torsion is present, the program will also consider the provisions of SABS 0100 clause 4.3.5. Torsional reinforcement is separately reported. A TRACK 2 design output is presented below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 338 of 391
International Codes
12A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load and is displayed. The requirements of SABS 0100-1 clause 4.7 are followed, with the user having control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as described in table 12A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is short or slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial bending, the recommendations of 4.7.4.4 of the code are considered. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative results in certain cases. Table 12A.3 shows typical column design results. Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load case. TABLE 12A.3 -COLUMN DESIGN OUTPUT
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 339 of 391
======================================================================= C O L U M N N O. M20 1 DESIGN RESULTS Fe450 (Sec.)
Fe450 (Main)
LENGTH: 3660.0 mm CROSSSECTION: 750.0 mm X 460.0 mm COVER:40.0mm ** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 4 END JOINT: 1 SHORT COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET) ----------------------DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu)
: 915.6
About Z AboutY INITIAL MOMENTS : 0.00 0.00 MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 18.31 SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 7.96 ADDITION MOMENTS (Maddz and Maddy) : TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 555.13 4.88 0.00
18.31 0.00
21.91
REQD. STEEL AREA : 3349.20 Sq.mm. REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 114451.62 Sq.mm. MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 32 - 12 dia. (1.05%, 3619.20 Sq.mm.) (Equally Distributed) TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 140 mm c/c SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET) ---------------------------------------------------------Puz : 2160.42 Muz1 : 570.23 Muy1 : 563.74
International Codes
Design Per American Aluminum Code
13.1 General
STAAD is currently equipped with the facilities to perform design based on the specifications for Aluminum Structures. The requirements of the Allowable Stress Design, Sixth edition, October 1994, have been implemented. The various issues related to the implementation of this code in STAAD are explained below. Member Properties Design Procedure Design Parameters Code Checking Member Selection
International Codes
13.2 Member Properties

In order to do this design in STAAD, the members in the structure must have their properties specified from Section VI of the above-mentioned manual. The section names are mentioned in Tables 5 through 28 of that manual. All of those tables except Table 10 (Wing Channels) and Table 20 (Bulb Angles) are available in STAAD.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 340 of 391
Described below is the command specification for various sections: Standard single section
Double channel back-to-back
Double channel front-to-front
Double angle long leg back-to-back
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 341 of 391
Double angle short leg back-to-back
International Codes
13.3 Design Procedure

The design is done according to the rules specified in Sections 4.1, 4.2 and 4.4 on pages I-A-41 and I-A42 of the Aluminum code. The allowable stresses for the various sections are computed according to the equations shown in Section 3.4.1 through 3.4.21 on pages I-A-27 through I-A-40. The adequacy of the member is checked by calculating the value of the left-hand side of equations 4.1.1-1, 4.1.1-2, 4.1.1-3, 4.1.2-1, 4.4-1 and 4.4-2. This left-hand side value is termed as RATIO. If the highest RATIO among these equations turns out to be less than or equal to 1.0, the member is declared as having PASSed. If it exceeds 1.0, the member has FAILed the design requirements. The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently not done.
International Codes
13.4 Design Parameters The following are the parameters for specifying the values for variables associated with the design.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 342 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 343 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 344 of 391
International Codes
13.5 Code Checking The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the initially specified member properties are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to the member due to the loads on the structure. Code checking is done at the locations specified by either the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter described above. It is done with the aid of the command CHECK CODE described in the main STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Examples Manual for STAAD provides an example on the usage of the CHECK CODE command.
International Codes
13.6 Member Selection The member selection process involves the determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. It is done with the aid of the command SELECT MEMBER described in the main STAAD Technical Reference Manual. Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Examples Manual for STAAD provides an example on the usage of the SELECT MEMBER command.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 345 of 391
Table 13.2 - ALLOY PARAMETER :
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 346 of 391
International Codes
American Codes - Steel Design Per ASCE 10-97
14A.1 General Comments

The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specifications of ASCE Standard 10-97 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures is now implemented. This code is meant to supercede the older edition of the code, available under the name ASCE Publication 52. However, in the interests of backward compatibility, both codes are currently accessible in STAAD.Pro. To access the ASCE 52 code, use the commands PARAMETER CODE ASCE 52 To access the ASCE 10-97 code, use the commands PARAMETER CODE ASCE In general, the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the basic concepts of steel design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic. This section specifically addresses the implementation of steel design based on ASCE 10-97. Design is available for all standard sections listed in the AISC ASD 9th edition manual, namely, Wide Flanges, S, M, HP, Tees, Channels, Single Angles, Double Angles, Tubes and Pipes. Design of HSS sections (those listed in the 3rd edition AISC LRFD manual) and Composite beams (I shapes with concrete slab on top) is not suppported. Allowable Stresses Per ASCE (Pub. 52) Design Parameters Code Checking And Member Selection Parameter Definition Table
International Codes
14A.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE 10-97

Member selection and code checking operations in the STAAD implementation of ASCE 10-97 are done to resist loads at stresses approaching yielding, buckling, fracture and other limiting conditions specified in the standard. Those stresses are referred to in the standard as Design Stresses. The appropriate sections of the ASCE standard where the procedure for calculating the design stresses are explained are as
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 347 of 391
follows. Design Axial Tensile Stress Design tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in section 3.10. The NSF parameter (see the Parameters table shown later in this section) may be used if the section area needs to be reduced to account for bolt holes. Design Axial Compressive Stress Design compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 3.6 through 3.9. For angle members under compression, the procedure of sections 3.7 and 3.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may control the effective lengths for buckling using the LT, LY, LZ and/or KT, KY, KZ parameters (see the Parameters table shown later in this section). Design Bending Compressive Stress Calculations for design bending compressive stress about the major axis and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 3.14. Procedures outlined in sections 3.14.1 through 3.14.6 have been implemented. Design Bending Tensile Stress Calculations for design bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 3.14.2. Design Shear Stress Calculation of the design shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section 3.15 of the ASCE 1097. The procedure of section 3.15.2 is followed for angles and the procedure of section 3.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
International Codes
14A.3 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status These are Clause 3.4 for slenderness limits, Clause 3.12 for Axial Compression and Bending, Clause 3.13 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 3.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 3.15 for Shear.
International Codes

Design per ASCE (10-97) must be initiated by using the command CODE ASCE. This command should be the first command after the PARAMETER statement. Other applicable parameters are summarized in the table shown later in this section. These parameters may be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 348 of 391
14A.5 Code Checking And Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE 10-97 implementation. For general information on these options, refer to sections 2 and 5 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 349 of 391
International Codes
American Codes - Steel Design Per ASCE Manuals And Reports

This document presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 52 Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers, Second Edition. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking is based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features regarding the process of calculation of the relevant allowable stresses and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economical section is selected based on the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness requirements and the width-thickness requirements. It is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like provision of stiffeners and check the local
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 350 of 391
effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc. It general, it may be noted that the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to Section 3 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic. This document specifically addresses the implementation of steel design based on ASCE Pub. 52. Allowable Stresses Per ASCE (Pub. 52) Design Parameters Code Checking And Member Selection Parameter Definition Table
International Codes
14B.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE (Pub. 52)

The member design and code checking in the STAAD implementation of ASCE (Pub. 52) is based upon the allowable stress design method. Appropriate sections of this publication are referenced below. Allowable Axial Tensile Stress Allowable tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in section 4.10. The NSF parameter (Table 1.1) may be used if the net section area needs to be used. Allowable Axial Compressive Stress Allowable compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 4.6 through 4.9. For angle members under compression, the procedure of sections 4.7 and 4.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may control the effective lengths for buckling using the LX, LY, LZ and/or KX, KY, KZ parameters (Table 1.1). Allowable Bending Compressive Stress Calculations for allowable bending compressive stress about the major axis and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 4.14. Procedures outlined in sections 4.14.1 through 4.14.6 have been implemented. Allowable Bending Tensile Stress Calculations for allowable bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 4.14.2. Allowable Shear Stress Calculation of the allowable shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section 4.15 of the ASCE Pub. 52. The procedure of section 4.15.2 is followed for angles and the procedure of section 4.15.1 is followed for all other sections. Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status These are Clause 4.4 for slenderness limits, Equation 4.12-1 for Axial Compression and Bending, Equation 4.13-1 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 4.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 4.15 for Shear.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 351 of 391
International Codes

Design per ASCE (Pub. 52) must be initiated by using the command CODE ASCE. This command should be the first command after the PARAMETER statement. Other applicable parameters are summarized in Table 1.1. These parameters may be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design.
International Codes
14B.4 Code Checking And Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE Pub. 52 implementation. For general information on these options, refer to section 3 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. For information on specification of these commands, refer to section 6.
International Codes
14B.5 Parameter Definition Table
Table 14B.1 - Steel Design Parameters for ASCE (PUB. 52) Based Design Parameter Default Description Value Name
KY
KZ KT LY LZ LT FYLD NSF UNL

UNF
TRACK DMAX DMIN RATIO
BEAM
Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis) 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about the Z-axis (major axis) 1.0 Effective length coefficient for warping restraint (clause 4.14.4, pg 36) Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling Length about the Y-axis (minor axis) Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling Length about the Z-axis (major axis) Member Effective length for warping. Length 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel 1.0 Net section factor for tension members Member Unsupported length of member for calculation of Length allowable bending stress 1.0 Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of the member length 0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable stresses 0.0 1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth for member selection 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for member selection Permissible ratio that determines the cut off point for 1.0 pass/fail status. A value below this quantity indicates PASS while a value greater than this quantity indicates FAILURE. 0.0 = Perform design using the section locations 0.0
1.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 352 of 391
MAIN
specified according to the SECTION command 1.0 = Perform design at the ends and eleven intermediate sections of the beam Parameter that indicates the member type for the purpo of calculating the KL/R ratio (SEE CLAUSE 4.4, PAGE 25) = = = = = 10 : DO NOT PERFORM THE KL/R CHECK 1 : LEG MEMBER KL/R <= 150 2 : COMPRESSION MEMBER KL/R <= 200 3 : TENSION MEMBER KL/R <= 500 4 : HANGAR MEMBERS KL/R <= 375 (Clause 4C.4, page 43) = 5 : REDUNDANT MEMBERS KL/R <= 250
ELA
Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used From among Equations 4.7-4 thru 4.7-7 to determine th the KL/R ratio. ELA=1 : EQN.4.7-4, Page 26 (VALID FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY) ELA=2 : EQN.4.7-5, Page 27 ELA=3 : EQN.4.7-6, Page 27 ELA=4 : EQN.4.7-7, Page 27 Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used From among Equations. 4.7-8 thru 4.7-10 to determine the KL/R ratio. ELB=1 : EQN.4.7-8, Page 27, EQN.4.7-12, Page 28 ELB=2 : EQN.4.7-9, Page 27, EQN.4.7-13, Page 28 ELB=3 : EQN.4.7-10, Page 27, EQN.4.7-14,Page28 This parameter is meant for plain angles. = indicates that the angle is connected by both legs and allowable stress in axial tension is 1.0FYLD. 1.0 = indicates that the angle is connected only by the shorter leg and allowable tensile stress is computed per clause 4.10.2 as 0.9FYLD. 2.0 = indicates that the angle is connected by the longer leg. Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts required and the net section factor. Yield strength of bolt. Shear strength of bolt. Number of bolt holes on the cross section that should be used to determine the net section factor for tension capacity. 0.0
ELB
LEG
0.0
DBL FYB FVB NHL
0.75 in. 36 KSI 30 KSI 0
Notes: All values must be provided in the current unit system.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 353 of 391
International Codes
American Codes - Steel Design Per A.P.I
15.1 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:

Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design; Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection; Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and Specify design parameters to carry out punching shear checks.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements, but care should be taken when coupled with manipulation of the punching shear LEG parameter. The basic process is:a. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading and analysis. b. Define the API code parameters with LEG 1.0. c. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file and give preliminary design results. d. Check and modify the Geometry file as necessary. e. Reset the LEG parameter to 2.0 and re-run the analysis to read the modified Geometry file for the final design results.
International Codes
15.2 Allowables Per API Code

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by the American Petroleum Institute (API-RP2A) Code. The 20th edition of API Code, as published in 1993, is used as the basis of this design (except for tension stress).
International Codes
15.2.1 Tension Stress
International Codes
15.2.2 Shear Stress
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 354 of 391
International Codes
15.3 Stress Due to Compression
International Codes
15.4 Bending Stress

The allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a symmetrical member loaded in the plane of its minor axis, as given in Section 3.2.3 is:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 355 of 391
International Codes
15.5 Combinned Compression And Bending

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy API formula 3.3.1-1 and 3.3.1-2 when is greater than 0.15, otherwise formula 3.3.1-3 applies. It should be noted that during code exceeds unity, the program does not compute the second 3.3.1-1/2.
checking or member selection, if
International Codes
15.6 Design Parameters

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in Table 12.1. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. (Also see section 5.44.1). The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, wile in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0. Note: The parameter names DMAX and DMIN are only used for member selection.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 356 of 391
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 357 of 391
International Codes
15.7 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate as per API. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking. When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of API code (like any of the API specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.), the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the number of forces in the member) where the critical condition occurs. Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2.2, American Steel Design, of the Technical Reference manual.
International Codes
15.8 Member Selection

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e. the lightest section which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections. Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic.
International Codes
15.9 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only axial force. So in design, no time is wasted calculating the allowable bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
International Codes
15.10 Punching Shear

For tubular members, punching shear may be checked in accordance with the American Petroleum
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 358 of 391
Institute (API) RP 2A 20th Edition Section 4. The parameter PUNCH is used to identify joint types for each end of the member where the punching shear check is required. The PUNCH parameter is only read in from the external geometry file. The external geometry file is described in section 12.13. The PUNCH parameter is not specified within the STAAD input file (the file with the .std extension).
Note: A value representing joint type and geometry must be provided for parameter PUNCH, in the external file. On the first run where no external table is present, LEG must equal 1.0.
International Codes
15.11 Generation Of The Geometry File

Automatic selection of the chord and brace members are performed with the parameter LEG 1.0. Two tubular members are used by the program to identify the chord member. The chord members must be collinear (5 degree tolerance). The chord member must have a greater diameter and thickness than the brace member being considered. The punching shear check is performed on the joint treating it as a T/Y joint. The yield stress of the brace is used. In the 50% strength check the brace and chord yield are assumed to be the same. The major moment axis Mz is taken as In Plane Bending (IPB). To change this, the parameter SWAP 1 should be used in the external geometry file. Note: The in-plane/out-of-plane correspondence can be set by using the BETA angle. If the punching shear cannot be performed at the joint for the member being considered, a message is written to the output file <filename>.ANL. If a punching shear check is performed with the parameter LEG 1.0 used, then the geometry data used to perform the check is written to the default external output file APIPUN. The default external output/input file name can be changed by using the command line:CODE API <filename>. This external output data file can be edited and used as an external input file to re-perform the check using the parameter PUNCH 1.0 to 5.0. This external input file allows can/stub geometry data to be specified and chords to be assigned geometry where they could not be identified in the Automatic selection. The parameter LEG 2.0 must be used to read an external input file where the default name is APIPUN.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 359 of 391
The yield strength of the brace is used in the punching shear check. This can be changed in the external geometry file. The user should ensure that the correct cord member has been selected for the check.
International Codes
15.12 Chord Selection and Qf Parameter

Qf is a factor to account for the presence of nominal longitudinal stress in the chord. When calculating Qf for the joints, the moments used in the chord stress calculation will be from the computer node results and not the representative moments underneath the brace. If the moment varies significantly along the chord, it is more accurate to use the actual chord moment in the middle of the brace foot print. The tests reported in Reference I were performed with a constant moment along the chord. Thus for a local joint check, the local chord moment (under the brace) should be used. STAAD calculates Qf based on the moment at the chord member. The chord member can be selected automatically by initial screening by the program (based on geometry and independent of loading) or specified by the user in the External file. In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5 degree tolerance) are used to identify the chord. The chord is then selected from one of the two members based on the larger diameter then thickness or then by the minimum framing angle; for T joints the first member modeled will be selected as the chord. The user should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the program or the user is representative of the local chord moment for the brace in question. Ref I: Boone, TJ, Yura, JA and Hoadley, PW, Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints Chord Stress Effects, OTC 4828, 1984
International Codes
15.13 External Geometry File

An example of the external geometry file is shown below:
The parameters used in the external file are defined as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 360 of 391
Notes:
For overlap K-joints, the through brace is assumed to be the same diameter as the brace being checked. If any of the parameters for diameter and thickness specified in the external file are less than that for members being checked, then the member properties specified in the STAAD file shall be used. The member diameter and thickness should be used in API equation (4.1-1); in this check it has been assumed that the yield strength of the chord and brace members are the same. The geometry file name is currently limited to eight characters (4 if an extension as .txt is used).
The overall process of performing punching shear checks consists of two steps. These steps are explained in section 12.16.
International Codes
15.14 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear checks. It can be used in initial runs for member selection. No classification of the joint is performed using the loading. No hydrostatic checks are performed.
International Codes
15.15 Tabulated Results Of Steel Design

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: a) b) Member refers to the member number for which the design is performed. TABLE refers to AISC steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has been
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 361 of 391
selected. c) RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. d) CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AISC code which governs the design. e) RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. f) LOADING provides the load case number which governed the design. g) FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. h) LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern. i) If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV).
International Codes
15.16 The Two-Step Process

The overall procedure for performing the code check per the API code is as follows: Step 1 Creating the geometry data file. This is done by specifying the name of the geometry data file alongside the command line CODE API. If a file name is not specified, STAAD automatically assigns the file name APIPUN to the geometry data file. The parameter instructions in the .std file should contain the LEG parameter and it should be assigned the value 1.0.
After ensuring that your STAAD input file contains the above data, run the analysis. Once the analysis is completed, you will find that a file by the name GEOM1 has been created and is located in the same folder as the one where your .std file is located. (In case you did not specify a file name - GEOM1 shown in the earlier example - STAAD will create the file named APIPUN. Step 2 The geometry data file (GEOM 1 or otherwise) should be inspected and modified as required such as changing the PUNCH values and local section properties for the punching shear checks. Modify the .std file so it reruns the code check process by reading the instructions of the GEOM file. This message is conveyed by changing the value of the LEG parameter to 2.0. After making this change, a reanalysis will result in the program using the information in the geometry data file (GEOM1, APIPUN, or
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 362 of 391
otherwise) for performing the code check.
International Codes American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Code
ASME NF -3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code ASME NF -3000 - 1989 Code ASME NF -3000 - 1998 Code
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
General Comments Design Process Slenderness Tension Compression Bending Stress Combined Interaction Check Shear Stress Member Property Specification Design Parameters Code Checking and Member Selection Example
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1989 Code
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 363 of 391
16A.1 General Comments

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 1974 Code is used as the basis of this design. From design point of view, there are no major differences between NF-3000 1974 and NF-3000 1977 version of codes. A brief description of some of the major allowable stresses is described herein.
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
16A.2 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks 1. Slenderness 2. Tension 3. Compression 4. Bending Stress 5. Combined Interaction Check 6. Shear Stress Each one of the checks are described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
16A.2.1
Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
International Codes 16A.2.2 Tension
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 364 of 391
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*Fy), but not more than (0.5*Fu) on the Net area. The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of NF-3000 1974, and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
16A.2.3
Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-2213 of NF-3000 1974. (a) Gross Sections of Columns: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) is less than Cc,
where,
2. When (Kl/r) is greater than Cc,
3. When (Kl/r) exceeds 120,
Member elements other than columns: (1) For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60*Fy (2) For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75*Fy The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the subsections of clause XVII-2224 of NF-3000 1974. If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied, (a) For un-stiffened compression element, A reduction factor Qs is introduced. Detailed values of Qs for different shapes are given in the clause XVII-2225.2 of NF-3000 1974.
(b)
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 365 of 391
(b)
For stiffened compression element, A reduced effective width be is introduced. 1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
2. For other uniformly compressed elements:
Consequently, a reduction factor Qs is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
where,
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
16A.2.4
Bending Stress
Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in XVII-2214 of NF-3000 1974 is: a. Along Major Axis: 1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress: Fb = 0.66*Fy If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of un-stiffened projecting elements of the compression
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 366 of 391
flange shall not exceed 52.2/Fy. b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/Fy. c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (412/Fy)[1 2.33(Fa/Fy)] except that it need not be less than 257/Fy. d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76bf/Fy nor 20000/ (d/Af)Fy. 2. For non-compact and slender elements, clause XVII-2214.2 and XVII-2214.5 of NF3000 1974 are followed respectively. 3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: Fb = 0.60*Fy b. Along Minor Axis: For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of XVII-2214.1(a) and (b) of NF-3000 1974, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = 0.75*Fy
International Codes 16A.2.5
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
Combined Interaction Check
Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy
and
when fa/Fa is greater than 0.15, otherwise,
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if fa/Fa exceeds unity, the program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 - 0.4*(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway. Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 367 of 391
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
16A.2.6
Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. XVII-2263.2 of NF-3000 1974] is calculated as
where, Cv = (45000k)/[Fy(h/t)2], when Cv is less than 0.8 = [190/(h/t)]k/Fy , when Cv is more than 0.8 k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a/h)2], when a/h is less than 1.0 = 5.34 + [4.00/(a/h)2], when a/h is more than 1.0 For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
16A.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel Section Library of STAAD may be used namely I-shaped section, Channel, Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, Double Channel section. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General and Prismatic member. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
International Codes 16A.4
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
Design Parameters
The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 368 of 391
1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0
Parameter Default Value Name CODE CODE NF3000 1974 OR CODE NF3000 1977 KY KZ LY LZ FYLD FU NSF UNT 1.0 1.0 Member Length Member Length 36 KSI 60 KSI 1.0 Member Length K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis. Same as above except in z-axis (major). Yield strength of steel in current units. Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. Net Section Factor for tension member. Unsupported length of the top* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the top flange. Unsupported length of the bottom* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the bottom flange. Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient 0.0 = CB is calculated itself Any other user-defined value is accepted. CMY CMZ MAIN TMAIN 0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway 0.0 240 for main member 300 for Truss member PROFILE None CAN 0 Used in MEMBER SELECTION. See section 5.47.1 for details. Used for Deflection Check only. 0 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection occurs within the span between DJ1 and DJ2. 1 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection is of the cantilever type STIFF Member length or depth whichever is greater 0.0 Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design Cm value in local y & z axes Description Specified design code is followed for code checking purpose.
UNB
Member Length
CB
1.0
0.0 = check for slenderness 1.0 = suppress slenderness check Slenderness limit under tension
TRACK
Controls the levels of detail to which results are reported. 0 = Minimum detail 1 = Intermediate detail level 2 = Maximum detail
DMAX DMIN
45 inch 0.0 inch
Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 369 of 391
RATIO DFF
1.0 None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member
Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection
DJ1 DJ2
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length"
Notes 1. All values are entered in the current units 2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
International Codes 16A.5
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
Code Checking and Member Selection
Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-3000 1974 and ASME NF-3000 1977 codes. For general information on these options, refer to section 3 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. For information on specification of these commands, refer to section 6.
International Codes
ASME NF-3000 - 1974 & 1977 Code
16A.6
Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and 5 kip lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1974. The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-Jun-08 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT INCHES KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0;
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 370 of 391
MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 29000 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2e-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST W24X104 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -5 FY -5 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT SUPPORT REACTION PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS PRINT MEMBER FORCES PARAMETER 1 CODE NF3000 1974 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 0.9 ALL KZ 0.9 ALL NSF 0.85 ALL CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown as below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 371 of 391
International Codes
ASME NF-3000-1989 Code
Slenderness Tension Compression Bending Stress Combined Interaction Check Shear Stress
Member Property Specification Design Parameters General Comments Design Process
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 372 of 391
Code Checking and Member Selection Example
International Codes
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 1989 Code is used as the basis of this design. A brief description of some of the major allowable stresses is described herein.
International Codes
16B.2 Design Process
The design process follows the following design checks. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Slenderness Tension Compression Bending Stress Combined Interaction Check Shear Stress
Each one of the checks are described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
International Codes
16B.2.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 373 of 391
16B.2.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*Fy), but not more than (0.5*Fu) on the Effective Net area. The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1) (d)),
Ae = Ct * An
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75. The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3). The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
International Codes
16B.2.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) is less than Cc,
where,
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 374 of 391
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel: 1. When (Kl/r) is less than or equal to 120,
2. When (Kl/r) is greater than 120,
c. Member elements other than columns: 1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60*Fy 2. For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75*Fy
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d). If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
a.
For un-stiffened compression element,
A reduction factor Qs is introduced. Detailed values of Qs for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2) (a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d). b. For stiffened compression element,
A reduced effective width be is introduced. 1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
2.
For other uniformly compressed elements:
Consequently, a reduction factor Qa is introduced.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 375 of 391
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed
where,
International Codes
16B.2.4 Bending Stress
Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in NF-3322.1(d) is:
a. Along Major Axis: 1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress: Fb = 0.66*Fy If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 65/Fy. b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/Fy. c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (640/Fy)[1 3.74(fa/Fy)] d/t = 257/Fy when fa/Fy > 0.16 when fa/Fy <=0.16
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76bf/Fy nor 20000/(d/Af)Fy. 2. For non-compact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively. 3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: Fb = 0.60*Fy
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 376 of 391
b. Along Minor Axis: 1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = 0.75*Fy 2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where bf/2tf exceeds 65/Fy but is less than 95/Fy, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = Fy[1.075 0.005(bf/2tf)Fy]
International Codes
16B.2.5 Combined Interaction Check
and
when fa/Fa is greater than 0.15,

otherwise
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if fa/Fa exceeds unity, the program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 - 0.4*(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway. Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
International Codes
Introduction
Page 377 of 391

16B.2.6 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. NF-3322.6(e)(2)] is calculated as
where,
2 Cv = (45000k)/[Fy(h/t) ], when Cv is less than 0.8 = [190/(h/t)]k/Fy , when Cv is more than 0.8 k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a/h)2], when a/h is less than 1.0 = 5.34 + [4.00/(a/h)2], when a/h is more than 1.0
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
International Codes
16B.3 Member Property Specification
International Codes
The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 378 of 391
are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.

Parameter Name CODE KY KZ LY LZ FYLD FU NSF CT STYPE UNT Default Value CODE NF3000 1989 1.0 1.0 Member Length Member Length 36 KSI 60 KSI 1.0 0.75 0.0 Member Length Description Specified design code is followed for code checking purpose. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis. Same as above except in z-axis (major). Yield strength of steel in current units. Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. Net Section Factor for tension member. Reduction Coefficient in computing effective net area of an axially loaded tension member. [Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)] 0.0 = Normal Steel 1.0 = Austenitic Stainless Steel Unsupported length of the top* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the top flange. Unsupported length of the bottom* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the bottom flange. Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient 0.0 = CB is calculated itself Any other user-defined value is accepted. CMY CMZ MAIN TMAIN 0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway 0.0 240 for main member 300 for Truss member PROFILE CAN None 0 Used in MEMBER SELECTION. See section 5.47.1 for details. Used for Deflection Check only. 0 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection occurs within the span between DJ1 and DJ2. 1 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection is of the cantilever type STIFF Member length or depth whichever is greater 0.0 Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design Cm value in local y & z axes
UNB
Member Length
CB
1.0
TRACK
DMAX DMIN RATIO
45 inch 0.0 inch 1.0
Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 379 of 391
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member
"Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection
DJ1 DJ2
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length"
Notes 1. All values are entered in the current units. 2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
International Codes
16B.5 Code Checking and Member Selection
Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-3000 1989 code. For general information on these options, refer to section 3 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. For information on specification of these commands, refer to section 6.
International Codes
16B.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and a uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole span. The beam is assigned with B571806 steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1989. The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-Jun-08 END JOB INFORMATION JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 360 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 29000 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2e-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 380 of 391
1 TABLE ST B571806 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -5 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT SUPPORT REACTION PARAMETER 1 CODE NF3000 1989 STYPE 1 ALL FYLD 36 ALL KY 0.75 ALL KZ 0.75 ALL FU 58 ALL NSF 0.9 ALL CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 381 of 391
International Codes
General Comments Design Process
Slenderness Tension Compression Bending Stress Combined Interaction Check
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 382 of 391
Shear Stress
Member Property Specification Design Parameters Code Checking and Member Selection Example
International Codes
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 1998 Code is used as the basis of this design. A brief description of some of the major allowable stresses is described herein.
International Codes
16C.2 Design Process
The design process follows the following design checks.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Slenderness Tension Compression Bending Stress Combined Interaction Check Shear Stress
Each one of the checks are described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
International Codes
16C.2.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
International Codes
Introduction
Page 383 of 391

16C.2.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*Fy), but not more than (0.5*Fu) on the Effective Net area. The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1) (d)), Ae = Ct * An Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75. The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3). The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
International Codes
16C.2.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) is less than Cc,
where,
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 384 of 391
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel: 1. When (Kl/r) is less than or equal to 120,
2. When (Kl/r) is greater than 120,
c. Member elements other than columns: 1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60*Fy 2. For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75*Fy
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d). If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
a.
For un-stiffened compression element,
A reduction factor Qs is introduced. Detailed values of Qs for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2) (a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d). In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting elements of compression flanges of girder,
b.
For stiffened compression element,
A reduced effective width be is introduced. 1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 385 of 391
2.
For other uniformly compressed elements:
Consequently, a reduction factor Qa is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed
where,
International Codes
16C.2.4 Bending Stress
Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in NF-3322.1(d) is:
a. Along Major Axis: 1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress: Fb = 0.66*Fy If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 65/Fy. b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/Fy.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 386 of 391
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (640/Fy)[1 3.74(fa/Fy)] d/t = 257/Fy when fa/Fy > 0.16 when fa/Fy <=0.16
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76bf/Fy nor 20000/(d/Af)Fy. 2. For non-compact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively. 3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: Fb = 0.60*Fy b. Along Minor Axis: 1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = 0.75*Fy 2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where bf/2tf exceeds 65/Fy but is less than 95/Fy, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = Fy[1.075 0.005(bf/2tf)Fy]
International Codes
16C.2.5 Combined Interaction Check
and
when fa/Fa is greater than 0.15,

otherwise
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if fa/Fa exceeds unity, the program does not
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 387 of 391
compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 - 0.4*(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway. Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
International Codes
16C.2.6 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. NF-3322.6(e)(2)] is calculated as
where,
2 Cv = (45000k)/[Fy(h/t) ], when Cv is less than 0.8 = [190/(h/t)]k/Fy , when Cv is more than 0.8 k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a/h)2], when a/h is less than 1.0 = 5.34 + [4.00/(a/h)2], when a/h is more than 1.0
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
International Codes
16C.3 Member Property Specification
International Codes
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 388 of 391
16C.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Parameter Default Value Name CODE KY KZ LY LZ FYLD FU NSF CT CODE NF3000 1998 1.0 1.0 Member Length Member Length 36 KSI 60 KSI 1.0 0.75 Description Specified design code is followed for code checking purpose. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis. Same as above except in z-axis (major). Yield strength of steel in current units. Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. Net Section Factor for tension member. Reduction Coefficient in computing effective net area of an axially loaded tension member. [Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)] 0.0 = Normal Steel 1.0 = Austenitic Stainless Steel UNT Member Length Unsupported length of the top* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the top flange. Unsupported length of the bottom* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the bottom flange. Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient 0.0 = CB is calculated itself Any other user-defined value is accepted. CMY CMZ MAIN TMAIN 0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway 0.0 240 for main member 300 for Truss member PROFILE CAN None 0 Used in MEMBER SELECTION. See section 5.47.1 for details. Used for Deflection Check only. Cm value in local y & z axes
STYPE
0.0
UNB
Member Length
CB
1.0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 389 of 391
0 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection occurs within the span between DJ1 and DJ2. 1 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection is of the cantilever type STIFF Member length or depth whichever is greater 0.0 Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design
TRACK
DMAX DMIN RATIO DFF
45 inch 0.0 inch 1.0 None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member
Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length"
DJ1 DJ2
Notes 1. All values are entered in the current units. 2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
International Codes
16C.5 Code Checking and Member Selection
Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-3000 1998 code. For general information on these options, refer to section 3 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual. For information on specification of these commands, refer to section 6.
International Codes
16C.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and a uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole span. The beam is assigned with B571806 steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1998.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 390 of 391
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-Jun-08 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT INCHES KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 29000 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2e-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST B571806 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -5 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER 1 CODE NF3000 1998 STYPE 1 ALL FYLD 36 ALL KY 0.75 ALL KZ 0.75 ALL FU 58 ALL NSF 0.9 ALL CT 0.85 ALL CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 391 of 391
03/Apr/2009
STAAD File I/O Functions
Page 1 of 5

SelectSTAADFile
VB Syntax
integer SelectSTAADFile (string STAADFile)

Parameters
STAADFile A string providing the file name and path of the STAAD file to be accessed by subsequent OpenSTAAD functions. This string must be enclosed in quotes.
Remarks
The SelectSTAADFile function is used to specify the STAAD output file to be used by succeeding functions. This function must precede any functions that act upon or retrieve information from the STAAD output file. It will normally be one of the first functions you will use in your application. You can open more than one STAAD file at a time by creating a second instance of the OpenSTAAD library from within your application. It is highly recommended that before you conclude your application, you close any STAAD files you opened with this command. The CloseSTAADFile function is provided for this purpose.
Example
Dim objOpenSTAAD As Output 'Run an instance of OpenSTAAD Set objOpenSTAAD = CreateObject("OpenSTAAD.Output.1") 'Open a STAAD file objOpenSTAAD.SelectSTAADFile "C:\SPRO2003\STAAD\Examp\US\examp08.std"
See also
CloseSTAADFile AreResultsAvailable
CloseSTAADFile
VB Syntax
integer CloseSTAADFile ()
Parameters
(none)
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh9808.htm
03/Apr/2009
Page 2 of 5
Remarks
This function closes a STAAD file that was opened with the SelectSTAADFile function. This function should always be used to close the STAAD file before exiting the macro, in order to free system resources and avoid conflicts with other processes.
Example
objOpenSTAAD.CloseSTAADFile
See also
SelectSTAADFile AreResultsAvailable
AreResultsAvailable
VB Syntax
integer AreResultsAvailable (string lpszFileName, integer pnResult)

Parameters
lpszFileName A string passed to the function specifying the filename and path of an existing STAAD input file. pnResult An integer variable name passed to the function for the function to use in storing the results it retrieves. pnResult = 0 if no; pnResult = 1 if yes.
Remarks
This function checks whether the analysis has been run and an analysis results file (*.ANL file) is available for an existing STAAD input file. The filename and path of an existing STAAD input file is passed to the function as the first parameter, lpszFileName. A second parameter, pnResult, specifying an integer variable name for storing the results is also passed to the function. The function then determines whether a corresponding analysis results file exists in the same directory as the specified STAAD input file. If the function determines that the results file exists, it stores a value of 1 in the pnResult integer variable. If the function determines that the results file does not exist, it stores a value of 0 in the pnResult integer variable.
Example
Sub Test4Results() 'Declare OpenSTAAD object variable. Dim objOpenSTAAD As Output 'Declare an integer variable for storing the function output. Dim pnResult as Integer
03/Apr/2009
Page 3 of 5
'Run an instance of OpenSTAAD. Set objOpenSTAAD = CreateObject("OpenSTAAD.Output.1") 'Determine whether examp01.std file exists in same directory as examp01.std 'and store the results in the pnResult integer variable. 'Note the use of the VB line continuation character, a space followed by an 'underscore in the following code, allowing a single code statement to 'be written on multiple lines. objOpenSTAAD.AreResultsAvailable _ "C:\SPRO2003\STAAD\Examp\US\examp01.std", pnResult 'Close the STAAD file and release the handles to the OpenSTAAD library. ObjOpenSTAAD.CloseSTAADFile Set objOpenSTAAD = Nothing End Sub
See Also
SelectSTAADFile CloseSTAADfile
AnalyzeStructure
VB Syntax
AnalyzeStructure (string lpszDesignCode)

Parameters
lpszDesignCode A string passed to the function specifying the countrys steel and/or concrete design code(s) to be used in the current analysis run. The possible values are: 1) AUSTRALIAN 2) BRITISH (5400-8007) 3) BRITISH (5950.1990-8110) 4) BRITISH (5950.2000-8110) 5) CANADIAN 6) CHINA 7) DANISH 8) DUTCH 9) EUROCODE 10) FINNISH 11) FRENCH 12) GERMAN 13) INDIAN 14) JAPANESE 15) NORWAY 19) RUSSIAN 20) SINGAPORE 21) SPANISH 22) SWEDISH 23) US
03/Apr/2009
Page 4 of 5
Remarks
This function will run the STAAD file loaded using the function SelectSTAADFile. The actual STAAD engine will instantiate and produce a valid set of results in the same directory as the STAAD file. If there are errors in the input file, STAAD will generate an ANL file (with the same name) listing all the various errors.
Example
Sub RunEngine() 'Declare OpenSTAAD object variable. Dim objOpenSTAAD As Output 'Declare an integer variable for storing the function output. Dim pnResult as Integer 'Run an instance of OpenSTAAD. Set objOpenSTAAD = CreateObject("OpenSTAAD.Output.1") 'Determine whether the results of examp01.std file exists in same directory as examp01.std and store 'the results in the pnResult integer variable. 'Note the use of the VB line continuation character, a space followed by an 'underscore in the following code, allowing a single code statement to 'be written on multiple lines. objOpenSTAAD.AreResultsAvailable _ "C:\SPRO2003\STAAD\Examp\US\examp01.std", pnResult If (pnResult == 0) then 'No results, so run the STAAD file objOpenSTAAD.AnalyzeStructure US End If 'Close the STAAD file and release the handles to the OpenSTAAD library. ObjOpenSTAAD.CloseSTAADFile Set objOpenSTAAD = Nothing End Sub
See Also
SelectSTAADFile CloseSTAADfile
03/Apr/2009
Page 5 of 5
CloseAnalysisLink
VB Syntax
integer CloseAnalysisLink()
Parameters
(none)
Remarks
This function closes the link to the analysis results, thereby making post-processing results unavailable.
Example
objOpenSTAAD.CloseAnalysisLink
See Also
RemapAnalysisLink
RemapAnalysisLink
VB Syntax
integer RemapAnalysisLink (string strFileName)

Parameters
strFileName A string passed to the function specifying the filename and path of an existing STAAD input file.
Remarks
This function remaps the link to the analysis results for a given STAAD input file, making postprocessing results available after the function is called.
Example
objOpenSTAAD.RemapAnalysisLink "C:\SPRO2004\STAAD\Examp\US\EXAMP01.std"
See Also
CloseAnalysisLink
03/Apr/2009
1.1 Definition of Pushover Analysis
Page 1 of 22
Pushover Anlysis
1.1 Definition of Pushover Analysis As per FEMA 356 : 2000 and ATC 40, Pushover analysis is a static, nonlinear procedure using simplified nonlinear technique to estimate seismic structural deformations. It is an incremental static analysis used to determine the force-displacement relationship, or the capacity curve, for a structure or structural element. The analysis involves applying horizontal loads, in a prescribed pattern, to the structure incrementally, i.e. pushing the structure and plotting the total applied shear force and associated lateral displacement at each increment, until the structure or collapse condition.
Pushover Anlysis
1.2 Purpose of Pushover Analysis It is expected that most buildings rehabilitated in accordance with a standard, would perform within the desired levels when subjected to the design earthquakes. Structures designed according to the existing seismic codes provide minimum safety to preserve life and in a major earthquake, they assure at least gravity-load-bearing elements of non-essential facilities will still function and provide some margin of safety. However, compliance with the standard does not guarantee such performance. They typically do not address performance of non-structural components neither provide differences in performance between different structural systems. This is because it cannot accurately estimate the inelastic strength and deformation of each member due to linear elastic analysis. Although an elastic analysis gives a good indication of elastic capacity of structures and indicates where first yielding will occur, it cannot predict failure mechanisms and account for redistribution of forces during progressive yielding. To overcome this disadvantages different nonlinear static analysis method is used to estimate the inelastic seismic performance of structures, and as the result, the structural safety can be secured against an earthquake. Inelastic analysis procedures help demonstrate how buildings really work by identifying modes of failure and the potential for progressive collapse. The use of inelastic procedures for design and evaluation helps engineers to understand how structures will behave when subjected to major earthquakes, where it is assumed that the elastic capacity of the structure will be exceeded. This resolves some of the uncertainaties associated with code and elastic procedures. The overall capacity of a structure depends on the strength and deformation capacities of the individual components of the structure. In order to
determine capacities beyond the elastic limit some form of nonlinear analysis, like Pushover Analysis, is required.
Pushover Anlysis
1.3 Objective of Pushover Analysis Pushover analysis is a performance-based analysis that refers to a methodology in which structural criteria are expressed in terms of achieving a performance objective. A performance level describes a limiting damage condition which may be considered satisfactory for a giving building and a given ground motion. The limiting condition is described by the physical damage within the building, the threat to life safety of the buildings occupants created by the damage, and the post earthquake serviceability of the building. The basic approach is to improve the probable seismic performance of the building or to
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh6FDA.htm
03/Apr/2009
Page 2 of 22
otherwise reduce the existing risk to an acceptable level. According to ATC 40, there are two key elements of a performance-based design procedure - demand and capacity. Demand is the representation of earthquake ground motion or shaking that the building is subjected to. In nonlinear static analysis procedures, demand is represented by an estimation of the displacements or deformations that the structure is expected to undergo. Capacity is a representation of the structures ability to resist the seismic demand. The performance is dependent on the manner that the capacity is able to handle the demand. In other words, the structure must have the capacity to resist demands of the earthquake such that the performance of the structure is compatible with the objectives of the design. Performance objective is to obtain a desired level of seismic performance of the building, generally described by specifying maximum allowable (or acceptable) structural or nonstructural damage, for a specified level of seismic hazard. There are two nonlinear procedures using pushover methods : a) Capacity Spectrum Method, b) Displacement Coefficient Method. In STAAD Displacement Coefficient method has been followed. 1.3.1 Displacement Coefficient Method Objective of Displacement Coefficient Method is to find target displacement which is the maximum displacement that the structure is likely to be experienced during the design earthquake. It provides a numerical process for estimating the displacement demand on the structure, by using a bilinear representation of capacity curve and a series of modification factors, or coefficients, to calculate a target displacement. 1.3.1.1 Target Displacement t Refer Section 3.3.3.3.2 of FEMA 356: 2000 for detailed description of calculation of target displacement.
Pushover Anlysis
1.4 Types of non-linearity Both geometric and material non-linearities are considered in this static nonlinear pushover analysis. 1.4.1 Geometric non-linearity This is a type of non-linearity where the structure is still elastic, but the effects of large deflections cause the geometry of the structure to change, so that linear elastic theory breaks down. Typical problems that lie in this category are the elastic instability of structures, such as in the Euler bulking of struts and the large deflection analysis of a beam-column member. In general, it can be said that for geometrical nonlinearity, an axially applied compressive force in a member decreases its bending stiffness, but an axially applied tensile force increases its bending stiffness. In addttion, P-Delta effect is also included in this concept. 1.4.2 Material non-linearity
03/Apr/2009
Page 3 of 22
In this type of non-linearity, material undergoes plastic deformation. Material non-linearity can be modeled as discrete hinges at a number of locations along the length of a frame (beam or column) element and a discrete hinge for a brace element as discrete material fibers distributed over the crosssection of the element, or as a series of material points throughout the element.
Pushover Anlysis
1.5 Force controlled and deformation controlled actions
According to ATC 40, force-controlled refers to components, elements, actions, or systems which are not permitted to exceed their elastic limits. This category of elements, generally referred to as brittle or nonductile, experiences significant degradation after only limited post-yield deformation. Deformation-controlled refers to components, elements, actions, or systems which can, and are permitted to, exceed their elastic limit in a ductile manner. Force or stress levels for these components are of lesser importance than the amount of deformation beyond the yield point.
Ductile (Deformation controlled)
Semi-Ductile
Brittle (Force controlled)
Figure1.5 Component force versus Deformation curves Refer Section 2.4.4.3.1 of FEMA 356 : 2000 for detailed information on these curves.
Pushover Anlysis
1.6 Frame element hinge properties
Discrete hinge properties for frame elements are based on FEMA-356 criteria as per Section 5.5.2.2.2.
Figure1.6 Generalized Force-Deformation Relationship for Components
03/Apr/2009
Page 4 of 22
Point A is the origin Point B represents yielding. No deformation occurs in the hinge up to point B, regardless of the deformation value specified for point B. The displacement (rotation or axial elongation as the case may be) will be subtracted from the displacements at points C, D and E. Only plastic deformation beyond point B will be exhibited by hinge. Point C represents ultimate capacity of plastic hinge. At this point hinge strength degradation begins (hinge starts shedding load) until it reaches point D. Point D represents the residual strength of the plastic hinge. Beyond point D the component responds with substantially strength to point E. Point E represnts total failure. At deformation greater than point E the plastic hinge will drop load to zero.
This diagram represent for those component actions which are ductile (e.g. Hinge formation for bending moment about local z axis of beam). For force-controlled action, Type 3 curve is followed. Refer Table C2-1 of FEMA 356 : 2000 for examples of possible dformation-controlled and force-controlled actions.
Pushover Anlysis
1.7 Elements Major horizontal or vertical portions of the buildings structural systems that act to resist lateral forces or support vertical gravity loads such as frames, shear walls, frame-walls, diaphragms, and foundations. 1.7.1 Primary Elements These are structural components or elements that provide a significant portion of the structures lateral force resisting stiffness and strength at the performance point. These are the elements that are needed to resist lateral loads after several cycles of inelastic response to the earthquake ground motion. 1.7.2 Secondary Elements These are structural components or elements that are not, or are not needed to be, primary elements of the lateral load resisting system. However, secondaty elements may be needed to support vertical gravity loads and may resist some lateral loads.
Pushover Anlysis
1.8 Lateral Load Distribution as per Section 3.3.3.2.3 Chapter 3 FEMA 356
Lateral load can be applied by following three methods. Method 1 The vertical distribution of the base shear shall be as specified in this section for all buildings. The lateral load applied at any floor level x shall be determined in accordance with equation (1-8-1) and equation (1-8-2): Fx = CvxV where wxhkx . (1-8-1)
03/Apr/2009
Page 5 of 22
Cvx = -------------------- . (1-8-2) n
wihki
i=1 Method 2 A vertical distribution proportional to the shape of the fundamental mode in the direction under consideration is performed. Use of this distribution shall be permitted only when more than 75% of the total mass participates in the fundamental mode in the direction under consideration, and the uniform distribution is also used. wx x Fx = --------------- V
n
wi i
i=1
Method 3 A vertical distribution is performed consisting of lateral forces at each level proportional to the total mass at each level . wx Fx = --------- V
n
wi
i=1
where, Cvx k = Vertical distribution factor = 2.0 for T 2.5 seconds = 1.0 for T 0.5 seconds Linear interpolation shall be used to calculate values of for intermediate values of k for intermediate values of T. = User defined base shear = Portion of the total building weight W located on or assigned to floor level i = Portion of the total building weight W located on or assigned to floor level x = Height (in ft) from the base to floor level i = Height (in ft) from the base to floor level x = Amplitude of mode a floor level x
V wi wx hi hx x
Pushover Anlysis
2.0 Performing Pushover Analysis in STAAD
STAAD Pushover analysis in STAAD is a static, non-linear procedure in accordance with FEMA 356 specification. Basically, in this method, the magnitude of the lateral push load is increased progressively according to a predefined loading pattern until either loading or the deflection reaches the described level. Pushover analysis, currently implemented in STAAD, is limited in application to buildings that are
03/Apr/2009
Page 6 of 22
regular and do not have adverse torsional or multimode effects. The capacity curve is generally constructed to represent the first mode response of the structure based on the assumption that the fundamental mode of vibration is the predominant response of the structure. Steps to be followed for performing Pushover Analysis in STAAD are described in the following pages.
Pushover Anlysis
2.1 Define Steel Moment and Braced Frames According to FEMA 356:2000, steel moment frames are those frames that develop their seismic resistance through bending of steel beams and columns and moment resisting beam-column connections. Steel braced frames are those frames that develop their seismic resistance primarily through axial forces in the components. User must specify whether the structure is a moment frame or braced frame. By default the program considers it as moment frame. Currently only fully restraint (FR) moment frame and CBF (Concentric Braced frame) frame are considered.
Pushover Anlysis
2.2 Define Gravity Loading Gravity loads include dead loads and likely live loads. Dead load can be taken as the calculated structure self-weight without load factors, plus realistic estimates of flooring, ceiling, partition and other structural and nonstructural components. Live loads should be evaluated for each structure; consideration should be given to current and expected future occupancies.
Pushover Anlysis
2.3 Define Lateral (Push) Loading The mathematical model directly incorporating the nonlinear load-deformation characteristics of individual components and elements of the building shall be subjected to monotonically increasing lateral loads representing inertia forces in an earthquake until a target displacement is exceeded. Static nonlinear pushover analysis usually requires multiple analyses cases. The first pushover load case is gravity load applied to the structure. The rest of the load cases may apply different lateral loads in terms of push load increments whatever the case may be. A pushover case may start from zero initial conditions or it may start from the results at the end of a previous pushover cases. The gravity load case starts from zero initial conditions. The first lateral load case will start from the end of the gravity load case, the second lateral load case will start from the end of the first lateral load case and so on. While defining incremental push load user must make its value smaller since wth larger value of incremental loading the analysis will face trouble in converging. The lateral loads shall be applied in both positive and negatives directions since it may lead to difference
03/Apr/2009
Page 7 of 22
in results for unsymmetric type of structures. 2.3.1 Lateral Loading Pattern Lateral loads should be applied in predetermined patterns that represent predominant distributions of lateral inertial loads during earthquake response. Distribution of lateral load must be applied to the structure when performing a pushover analysis. Typically push load is defined in any one of the following: a) User defined static load pattern . b) User defined base shear to be distributed vertically . Incremental push load is calculated by using any of the following two methods:
User defines Push load i.e. user specifies the incremental push load pattern on the structure by defining lateral load at nodes. Or, User defines base shear which is distributed laterally as per methods described in Section 1.4.1. The lateral load at each floor is again divided by thye number of load step increment to get actual push load incremental load. Thus, = V/N, where, V = Lateral load distributed from user defined base shear. N = Total number of load step The actual load acting on the structure at any load step i = where Spi = Stiffness Parameter at ith iteration = * Spi
= Slope of the capacity curve at (i-1)th iteration / Initial slope of the capacity curve
During linear stage i.e. all members in the structure are linear, stiffness parameter is 1.0. Whenever any member becomes nonlinear the stiffness parameter decreases since slope of the capacity curve becomes less than that during elastic stage. Thus, actual lateral load acting on the nonlinear structure at any load increment stage is less that that during linear stage. Currently one must define gravity load case as primary loading. First lateral load case starts from the end of the gravity load case. The lateral load is applied only in positive global X and Z directions. Eventhough it is necessary to apply load in negative global X and Z directions since the result will vary for unsymmetric structure, this facility is yet to be implemented.
Pushover Anlysis
2.4 Define Primary elements
03/Apr/2009
Page 8 of 22
Elements and components that provide the capacity of the structure to resist collapse under seismic forces induced by ground motion in any direction shall be classified as primary. Other elements and components shall be classified as secondary. In a typical building, nearly all elements, including many nonstructural components, will contribute to the building;s overall stiffness, mass and damping, and consequently its response to the earthquake ground motion. However, not all these elements are critical to the ability of the structure to resist collapse when subjected to strong ground shaking. The secondary designation will be used when a component or element does not contribute significantly or reliably in resisting earthquake effects because of low lateral stiffness, strength or deformation capacity. Currently all elements are considered as primary elements.
Pushover Anlysis
2.5 Define Pushover Hinges Properties and Acceptance Criteria At the beginning of the analysis user needs to define hinge properties and acceptance criteria for all pushover hinges. The program includes several built-in default hinge properties that are based on FEMA 356 (Table 5-6 Pg 5-40 of FEMA 356 and Table 5-7 Pg 5-44 of FEMA 356) for steel structures. Please note that while generating in-built hinge properties in STAAD following components are not considered: Column panel zones Fully restrained moment connections Partially restrained moment connection EBF Steel plate shear walls
If any member has releases, the effect in member nonlinear stiffness is considered to be same as that for linear member stiffness. 2.5.1 Define Acceptance criteria The performance of a structure and its components is defined by the acceptance criteria to provide desirable information for evaluation or retrofit. It refers to the specific limiting values for the deformations and loadings, for deformation-controlled and force-controlled components respectively, which constitute for acceptable seismic performance. Following three criteria are there: Immediate Occupancy (IO) The post earthquake structural damage state in which only very limited structural damage has occurred. The basic vertical and lateral force resisting systems of the building retain nearly all of their pre-earthquake characteristics and capacities. The risk of life-threatening injury from the structural failure is negligible Life Safety (LS) The post earthquake damage state in which significant damage to the structure may have occurred but in which some margin against either total or partial structural collapse remains.
03/Apr/2009
Page 9 of 22
Collapse Prevention (CP) The post earthquake structural damage state in which the buildings structural system is on the verge of experiencing partial or total collapse. Currently the program considers only moment hinge for beam and column for steel structures. If user does not define hinge properties, the program will consider built-in default hinge properties based on FEMA 356.These in-build hinge properties include both moment and axial hinge.
Pushover Anlysis
2.6 Define Pushover Analysis Solution Control Pushover analysis will continue until any of the following three conditions is satisfied: a) Cummulative base shear is less than or equal to the base shear defined by the user User needs to define base shear uptill which pushover analysis will be performed since design base shear (specific to particular seismic code) excludes non-linear effect. When the structure is subjected to strong earthquake the actual base shear may be very high compared to the design base shear. Under this condition there is no guarantee that the structure will maintain desired performance level. This option is choosen when the magnitude of base shear is known and the structure will be able to support that load. b) Displacement at the control joint in the specified direction exceeds specified displacement This option is choosen when the amount of displacement is known i.e. how far the structure will move but the amount of base shear that the structure will be subjected to is not known. While defining this option please make sure that the displacement component choosen at the control joint increases monotonically during loading. The control node shall be located at the centre of mass at the roof of the building. c) The structure becomes unstable This happens whenever hinge formation is such that it renders the structure on the verge of collapse. If neither base shear nor displacement at control joint is known, define a higher value for both these options. During analysis instability will arise due to collapse of different members and make the structure unstable.
Pushover Anlysis
2.7 Define Input for Demand Spectrum Demand Spectrum is generated according to the method described in Section 1.6.1.5 of FEMA 356 : 2000. The program generates Demand Spectrum for the purpose of finding Ts and Sa (corresponding to Te for the purpose of calculating target displacement).
Pushover Anlysis
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh6FDA.htm 03/Apr/2009
Page 10 of 22
2.8 Define Any Other Input There are several other inputs which may be required for pushover analysis. For details please refer to Pushover input parameters section.
Pushover Anlysis
2.9 Performance Performance check can be done by Displacement Coefficient Method which calculates the target displacement for the structure.
Pushover Anlysis
3.1 Location of Plastic Hinges For each load increment, member sectional forces are checked with section capacity in order to check formation of hinge. If sectional force exceeds section capacity, hinge formation starts. This implies member lies on or beyond point B on the load deformation curve. The point B in the load deformation curve denotes the yield point of the hinge. The hinge is assumed to be rigid bwtween points A and B until it yields. When the hinge reaches the deformation denoted by point C, it begins to lose load carrying capacity. When it reaches the deformation point E, the hinge loses all of its load carrying capacity. Total numbers of 13 sections along the length of member are scanned for Mz and My moments. Maximum moment is located and checked with section capacity. If the sectional force exceeds section capacity the material starts yielding at that particular location and the hinge at this particular position lies on point B on load deformation curve.
Figure 1.8 If bending moment diagram is like figure 1.8 (this happens at initial stage of load increment when push load is much low as compared to dead load) the chance of forming moment hinge is at two ends and at span of the member (as shown by red dots).
03/Apr/2009
Page 11 of 22
Figure 1.9 If bending moment diagram is like figure 1.9 (this happens when push load is much high as compared to dead load) the chance of forming moment hinge is only at sections at or nearer to two ends of the member (as shown by red dots).
Pushover Anlysis
3.2 Method of Hinge Unloading When a hinge unloads the program must find a way to remove the load that the hinge was carrying and redistribute it to the rest of the structure. Hinge unloading occurs whenever force-deformation or moment-rotation curve shows a drop in capacity, from point C to point D. The hinge unloads elastically without any plastic deformation i.e. parallel to slope A-B. When the hinge force reaches point C, entire structure is unloaded i.e. the program reverses the load on the whole structure until the hinge is unloaded up to the point D. When the hinge reaches point D, the load is again reversed. Other parts may now pick up the load that was removed from the unloading hinge.
Pushover Anlysis
4.1 Beginning of Pushover Data All Pushover analysis related data are to be entered after entering this command. Command: DEFINE PUSHOVER DATA
Pushover Anlysis
4.2 Define Input 4.2.1 Type of Frame FEMA recognizes only 3 types of frames, concentric braced frame (CBF), eccentric braced frame (EBF), and moment frame. Only two types of frame are dealt with CBF and moment frame. Command: FRAME n1 n1 = 1 Concentric Braced frame
03/Apr/2009
Page 12 of 22
n1 = 2 Moment frame (default) 4.2.2 Expected Yield Stress Expected yield stress may be specified. Command: FYE f1 MEMBER <list> / ALL f1 = User defined expected yield stress (default = 50 ksi) <list> = List of members associated with the user defined yield stress
4.2.3 Effective Length Factor of Member Effective length factor of any member can be defined using following syntax. This value is used in finding Euler Buckling load of a member. Minimum of these values two will be taken in calculation. Command: KY f1 MEMBER <list> / ALL KZ f2 MEMBER <list> / ALL f1 = User defined K value in local y-axis (default = 1.0) f2 = User defined K value in local z-axis (default = 1.0) <list> = List of members associated with the user defined yield stress 4.2.4 Consideration of Geometric Nonlinearity Effect Command: GNONL n1 n1 = 0 : Include the effect of large displacements (Default) 1 : Ignore the effect of large displacements 4.2.4.1 Test for convergence for Geometric Nonlinearity For convergence check user can specify any or both these inputs. However, these inputs are optional. Command: DISPTOL n1 n1 = Convergence displacement tolerance for convergence of Geometric Nonlinearity. The default value is the maximum span of the structure divided by 120. This default value is same as that used during NONLINEAR ANALYSIS in STAAD. The member end
03/Apr/2009
Page 13 of 22
forces are evaluated by performing a convergence check on the joint displacements. In each step, the displacements are compared with those of the previous iteration in order to check whether convergence is attained. Please refer SET DISPLACEMENT command in STAAD for more details. If any displacement on any iteration exceeds DISPTOL limit the solution is diverging and is terminated. GEOCYCLE n1 n1 = Number of iterations to be performed for convergence of Geometric Nonlinearity. Default value is 1. If the number of nonlinear iterations exceeds GEOCYCLE limit the analysis is terminated. Please refer NONLINEAR ANALYSIS in STAAD for more details. However, maximum allowable iteration is 50. If the number of iterations exceeds 50 the analysis is terminated. 4.2.5 KG Matrix Iteration Command: IKGITER n1 n1 = The number of iterations to be performed for KG matrix iterations. If no value is defined it will assume the value of GEOCYCLE. If the value is 1 program will continue iteration until the solution converges. However, maximum allowable iteration is 50. If the number of iterations exceeds 50 the analysis is terminated. 4.2.6 Maximum number of Analysis cycle Whenever there is load increment on the structure, a new analysis cycle starts. This consists of one analysis cycle for gravity loading and the rest consists of sum total of number of cycles required in linear stage plus number of cycles required to pass the structure from linear to nonlinear and strain hardening stage plus number of cycles required in strength degraded stage. Strength degraded stage consists of both analysis cycles during load increment and load decrement stage. User can specify a lower number of analysis cycles to be considered during strain hardening stage for load increment stage only, which will be considered after pushover analysis enters into nonlinear stage. Command: MAXCYCLE n1 n1 = number of analysis cycles Please note that the sum total of number of cycles specified by user plus number of analysis cycles required in load decrement stage plus number of cycles required in linear stage including analysis cycle for gravity loading will be limited to 10001 cycles. 4.2.7 Print Output Result Only the final state is saved for nonlinear static analysis. User may ask to print analysis result (joint displacements, member end forces and support reactions) for the final state of nonlinear static analysis in
03/Apr/2009
Page 14 of 22
the output file. Command: PRINT RESULT User may ask to print either joint displacements or member end forces or support reactions) for the final state of nonlinear static analysis in the output file. Command: PRINT RESULT OUTPUT f1 f1 = 1 : Joint displacements = 2 : Member end forces = 3 : Support reactions
4.2.8 Saving Output Results for Multiple Steps By default intermediate analysis results are saved for positive increments only at 0.1-inch incremental value of displacement at roof or at control joint. However user can save results at specific intermediate steps. This will create binary post-processing files to dump load step results at user-defined points. Command: SAVE LOADSTEP RESULT DISP / BSHEAR / f1 f1 = If DISP is defined, incremental value of displacement at roof or at control joint in current unit system. If no value is given 0.1 inch is taken as default. = If BSHEAR is defined, incremental value of base shear in current unit. If no value is given 5.0 kip is taken as default
If the value of base shear defined is B and incremental value of BSHEAR is f, the number of intermediate results that can be saved in B / f. The maximum allowable value is 500. Similarly, if the value of allowable displacement at control joint is D and incremental value of DISP is n, the number of intermediate results that can be saved in D / n. The maximum allowable value is 500. Besides saving user defined intermediate results, the other cases where intermediate results will be saved are as follows: A frame hinge is formed A frame hinge is trying to unload A frame hinge has failed
Pushover Anlysis
4.3 Define Loading Pattern
03/Apr/2009
Page 15 of 22
The pattern of the push load distribution on the nodes of the structure to be entered. Command: LOADING PATTERN n1 n1 = 0 STAAD calculates internally the push load based on the specific gravity load and the first modal displacement in the direction of push load (Default) =1 User defined push load pattern
4.3.1 User Defined Push Load Distribution Pattern By this command, user can define the Push load pattern explicitly. This command is valid if LOADING PATTERN is 1. The external push load is defined as primary loadcase. Refer Section 4.8. 4.3.2 Program Defined Push Load Distribution Pattern If LOADING PATTERN is 0 i.e. STAAD internally calculates the lateral push load, user is required to define following two inputs. For all analyses, at least two vertical distributions of lateral load shall be applied. One pattern shall be selected from each of the following two groups. Group 1 Method 1 A vertical distribution proportional to the value of Cvx given in Equation (3-12) of FEMA 356 : 2000 is performed. Use of this distribution shall be permitted only when more than 75% of the total mass participates in the fundamental mode in the direction under consideration, and the uniform distribution is also used. Method 2 A vertical distribution proportional to the shape of the fundamental mode in the direction under consideration is performed. Use of this distribution shall be permitted only when more than 75% of the total mass participates in the fundamental mode in the direction under consideration, and the uniform distribution is also used. Group 2 Method 3 A vertical distribution is performed consisting of lateral forces at each level proportional to the total mass at each level. Command:
03/Apr/2009
Page 16 of 22
VDB f1 f1 = 1 for method 1 = 2 for method 2 = 3 for method 3 (Default) Two different input files are to be generated. One analysis is to be performed by selecting any one method from Group 1. Another separate analysis is to be performed by selecting Method 3 from Group 2. 4.3.3 Total Base Shear to be Distributed By this command, user can define base shear that will be distributed vertically along the height of the structure at each floor level. Command: DISTRIBUTE BASE SHEAR X or Z f1 f1 = Total base shear to be distributed in current force unit If base shear to be distributed is not defined, the program distributes 10 percent of gravity loading as lateral load. 4.3.4 Number of Push Load Steps By this command, user can specify number of steps for the push load. The default is 100. Command: LDSTEP n1 n1 = Number of load steps The lateral load at each floor divided by the number of load steps gives the push load increment at that floor level.
Pushover Anlysis
4.4 Define Solution Control 4.4.1 Push Up to Defined Base Shear Pushover Analysis will continue until the cumulative base shear is less than or equal to the base shear specified by this command or the structure has additional strength. Command:
03/Apr/2009
Page 17 of 22
BASE SHEAR X or Z DEFINED f1 f1 = Explicitly defined base shear in current force unit 4.4.2 Push Up to Defined Displacement at Control Joint Pushover Analysis will continue until the displacement at the specified joint at the specified direction exceeds specified displacement. Command: DISP X or Z f1 JOINT f2 f1 = Explicitly defined joint displacement value in current length unit f2 = Joint number
Pushover Anlysis
4.5 Define Hinge Property 4.5.1 User Defined Hinge Property Several hinge property may be specified with specific type identifier. User may later refer this type identifier while assigning specific hinge properties to members (see section 4.9). If hinge property is not specified, STAAD assumes the FEMA specified hinge properties. To specify uncoupled moment hinge property of the member following input is required. Command: HINGE PROPERTY MOMENT TYPE n1 A xa1ya1 B xb1 yb1 C xc1 yc1 D xd1 yd1 E xe1 ye1 YM f11 YR f21 IO f31 LS f41 CP f51 TYPE ni A xaiyai B xbi ybi C xci yci D xdi ydi E xei yei YM f1i YR f2i IO f3i LS f4i CP f52 n1,..., ni = Type identifier (Hinge property number) A, B, C, D, E = Points on the load deformation curve at points A, B, C, D and E as specified in FEMA xa1 ya1 . xe1 ye1,, xai yai . xei yei = Coordinates of A, B, C, D, E respectively xa1, , xe1,, xai,., xei = Deformation Ratio ya1 ., ye1,, yai,.,yei = Moment Ratio f11,,f1i = Yield moment in current force unit
03/Apr/2009
Page 18 of 22
f21,,f2i = Yield rotation in radian f31,,f3i = Immediate occupancy in deformation ratio f41, ,f4i = Life safety in deformation ratio f51, ,f5i = Collapse prevention in deformation ratio The coordinates of point A should be always (0, 0) and that of point B is (1.0, 1.0). Both the coordinates of point C must be greater than 1.0. The X coordinate of point D must be same as that of point C and Y coordinate must be less than 1.0. The X coordinate of point E must be greater than that of point D and Y coordinate should be same as that of point D. Please note that the hinge property will be applied to hinge formed due to moment about local z-axis for beam. For column, hinge formation will be considered either about local y-axis or about local z-axis depending upon whichever moment is dominating and also the orientation of the column with respect to the push load direction. The hinge property will be applied to the hinge formed due to this moment. 4.5.2 Assignment of Hinge Property to the Members a) Once HINGE PROPERTIES are specified (section 4.8), user can assign these to the members. Command: HINGE TYPE n1 MEMBER <list> / ALL n1 <list> = Hinge type identifier = List of members associated to hinge type n1
b) User can assign in-built FEMA 356 hinge property to the members. Command: HINGE FEMA MEMBER <list> / ALL <list> = List of members associated to hinge FEMA
If no assignment of hinge property is done, the program will assign in-built FEMA 356 hinge property to the members. If user defined hinge property is assigned to some members, the program will consider hinge formation in these members only. Thus, if user defined hinge property is assigned to some members, FEMA hinge property must be assigned to other members. One has to make sure to assign hinge property to all members if hinge formation is to be considered in all members. HINGE FEMA command must be written after HINGE TYPE command is written in the input. c) User can ignore hinge formation in some members. HINGE IGNORE MEMBER <list> <list> = List of members associated to hinge FEMA
03/Apr/2009
Page 19 of 22
Pushover Anlysis
4.6 Define Spectral Parameters The parameters of this section are used to construct the response spectrum according to FEMA 356:2000. Command: SPECTRUM PARAMETERS DAMPING f1 f2 f4 SC f5 SS f6 S1 f7 f1 = Percentage of critical damping for the 1st response spectrum (Default 5%) f2 = Percentage of critical damping for the 2nd response spectrum f3 = Percentage of critical damping for the 3rd response spectrum f4 = Percentage of critical damping for the 2nd response spectrum f5 = 1 for site class A = 2 for site class B = 3 for site class C = 4 for site class D (Default) = 5 for site class E f6 = Spectral acceleration at short-period f7 = Spectral acceleration at one-second period
Pushover Anlysis
4.7 End Pushover Data All Pushover data are to be entered before this command Command: END PUSHOVER DATA
Pushover Anlysis
4.8 Pushover Loading Input Only two types of loading are accepted in pushover analysis.
03/Apr/2009
Page 20 of 22
1. Gravity load 2. Push Load (for user defined lateral load pattern) Syntax for gravity loading is as follows: LOAD ln LOADTYPE GRAVITY where ln = gravity loading number Syntax for push loading (user defined external incremental push loading pattern on the structure) is as follows: LOAD ln LOADTYPE PUSH where ln = user defined push loading number Please note that for user defined incremental push load, the loading has to be applied only in global X or Z directions. Combinations of X and Z directions is not accepted. Also, the lateral load in either global X or Z directions is to be applied in form of joint loads.
Pushover Anlysis
4.9 Validation of Commands other than Input Parameters 1. LOADTYPE is compulsory and the type accepted is only GRAVITY and PUSH. 2. There can be more than one gravity load case. STAAD internally combines all gravity load cases into one. Analysis deals with this combined gravity loading only. 3. Mass vector for eigen solution is formed from this combined gravity loading. There is no need to provide mass modeling by the user. 4. Currently only one push load case (either in the form of user defined external push load or generated by the program) is allowed. The direction of loading is either global X or global Z. Combination of these directions are not allowed. For user defined incremental push load pattern only JOINT LOAD in FX or FZ directions are allowed only. 5. Following inputs are not allowed in Pushover Analysis. PERFORM PUSHOVER ANALYSIS cannot be repeated more than once. PERFORM PUSHOVER ANALYSIS PRINT.. is not accepted. CHANGE command is not accepted. LOAD COMBINATION command is not accepted. SET Z UP command is not accepted. SET RESTART 1 command will not work i.e. <filename>.L17 file will not form. SURFACE element is not accepted.
03/Apr/2009
Page 21 of 22
Material concrete is not considered. Non-prismatic section is not considered. Curved beam is not considered. Cable member is not considered. Plate and solid elements is not considered. Beta angle other than 0 and 90 degree is not accepted.
Pushover Anlysis
5.0 Modeling Rules for Pushover Analysis in STAAD
Pushover analysis takes time. Each nonlinear problem is different. Since it is a step-wise linear analysis, analysis time and results is very much dependent on the incremental push load defined in the input file. Small changes in properties or loading can cause large change in nonlinear response. Hence it is important to consider different loading cases and to perform sensitivity studies on the effect of varying the properties of different structural elements. Analysis results depends on the selection of control node, the selection of lateral load patterns and the determination of fundamental period. It is better to start with simple analytical model. The analytical model of the building should represent all new and existing components that influence the mass, strength, stiffness, and deformability of the structure at or near performance point. Elements and components shown not to significantly influence the building assessment need not be modeled. The model should perform as expected under linear static loads and modal analysis. The control node shall be located at the centre of mass at the roof of a building. It should be selected in such a way that the displacement component in the direction of lateral load monotonically increases as push load increases. Separate mathematical models representing the framing along two orthogonal axes of the building shall be developed for two-dimensional analysis. A mathematical model representing the framing along two orthogonal axes of the building shall be developed for three-dimensional analysis. Independent analysis must be done while using different methods of lateral load distribution.
Pushover Anlysis
6.0 Scope of Pushover Analysis in STAAD
Pushover Analysis in STAAD will be able to give result only when following conditions are satisfied: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Buildings are regular and do not have adverse torsional or multimode effects. The capacity curve is generally constructed to represent the first mode response of the structure based on the assumption that the fundamental mode of vibration is the predominant response of the structure. Fully rigid moment frame and concentric braced frame are considered. If any member release is defined, its effect will be same as that for linear analysis. Only steel structure is considered. Only straight beam and column members are considered. All members of a structure are considered as primary element. No secondary elements are considered. For in-built FEMA hinge formation, out of six degrees of freedom, hinge formation is considered for bending moment about local z axis of beam. For column, hinge formation is considered for bending moment about local z axis of column or for bending moment about local y axis of
03/Apr/2009
Page 22 of 22
column, whichever moment becomes the guiding factor. Depending upon the guiding criteria given in FEMA 356:2000, hinge formation in beam is deformation-controlled and that in column can be deformation-controlled or force-controlled. For braced (i.e. truss) member, axial hinge is considered. Beside moment and axial hinge, no other types of hinge formation (e.g. hinge formation due to shear or hinge formation due to coupled effect of axial force and bi-axial bending moment) are considered. 7. In-built hinge properties and acceptance criteria for beam and columns given in table 5-6 and 5-7 of FEMA 356:2000 for beams, columns and braces are considered. 8. User defined hinge properties are considered for beam and column for hinge formation for bending moment only. For column, only deformation-controlled action is considered as no axial force is considered for checking force-controlled action in column. 9. Out of five methods for lateral load distribution, three methods have been implemented as per Section 3.3.3.2.3 of FEMA 356:2000. The methods implemented are 1.1, 1.2 and 2.1 of this section. 10. The lateral load is applied only in positive global X and Z directions. There is no scope of generating lateral loads in negative direction. 11. Performance point of a structure is calculated based on Displacement Coefficient method to find target displacement.
Pushover Anlysis
7.0 References
This document was prepared taking help from the following manuals and books. 1. 2. FEMA 356, 2000 ATC 40, Volume 1, 1996
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 1 of 8
Section 5. Examples
5.1 Example 1
5.1. Example 1
This example uses the STAAD.Pro model defined in the Examples folder UK\EXAMP09.STD:The following outlines the steps to create three designs:BS 8110 Beam Example BS 8110 Column Example BS 8110 Slab Example Before carrying out any specific design, first perform the following steps which are general to all the designs:1. Load the STAAD Model The first stage is to open the example file in STAAD.Pro and run the STAAD analysis to obtain a set of analysis results. 2. Transfer to RC Designer Transfer the model into RC Designer by clicking on the Concrete Design tab of the Mode bar:-
3. Add Job Information This launches the RC Designer which starts in the Job Information Page of the Design Layer Mode. Job information can be added into the Job Information dialog box, which whilst not necessary for the design, can be included in any User Reports that can be printed later. 4. Create the Envelope used in a Beam Design. Click on the Envelopes Page tab on the left of the screen. On this page, click on the button, 'New Env.' at the bottom of the Envelopes Table to create a defined envelope of load cases and combinations. Enter the name 'Envelope 1' in the small New Envelopes dialog box, then click on the OK button. This opens the Define Envelopes dialog which allows the setting of which load cases and combinations are to be considered for Envelope 1. The dialog shows a list of defined combinations (C3 in this case) as the option is set 'Show Combinations Only'. In order to define an envelope that includes all load cases and combinations, remove the tick to 'Show Combinations Only' and use the button '>>' to move all the load cases and combinations L1, L2 and C3 into the envelope E1. Click on the OK button to accept this definition. We will be using this envelope in the beam design later. 5. Create the Design Members Click on the Members Page tab on the left of the screen. On this page, use the Elements Cursor to drag a box around the entire model or in the Select menu, click on Select All. Use the program to create design members from this by clicking on the menu option, Members>AutoForm Members. The horizontal beams and corner columns have been created correctly, but the centre columns have been formed into small segments (M8, M9, M10, M11 and M12, M13, M14, M15). To convert these into two single design members, change to use the Select Members Cursor, select them and click on the Delete key on the keyboard. Change back to the Select Elements Cursor and select the four elements that make up the column on one side and click on the menu item, Members>Form Member. This should create a new single member M8. Repeat the same for the four elements that form the column on the other side to form member M9. 6. Create a floor slab Click on the Slabs Page tab on the left of the screen. On this page, click on the Side View toolbar icon to get an elevational view of the model. Using the Select Plates cursor, drag a window to select all the plates that form the top floor (being careful not to select the plates that form the top of the shear wall. To form the slab, click on the menu option, Slabs>Form Slab. Note the details of the slab in the Slab table on the right and confirm that it has been created with 32 plates and has no holes. If it has use the Select Slab Cursor to select the slab and then click on the Delete key on the keyboard to remove it and re-try this step until the correct slab is created.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhFE01.htm
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 2 of 8
7. Create a BS 8110 Beam Design Brief Click on the Groups/Briefs Page on the left of the screen. On this page layout, click on the New Brief button at the bottom of the Design Briefs table. Name the brief 'BS8110 Beam Brief', and select BS8110 Beam from the drop list. To set the parameters, double click on the reference label for this new design brief, B1. Change the concrete grade to C40 and on the Main reinforcement bars, set the Minimum size of Top Bars to 16. Then click on OK to accept the new parameters. 8. Create a BS 8110 Column Design Brief Return to the Design Brief table and click on New Brief, this time set the name to 'BS8110 Column Brief' and select BS8110 Column from the drop list. To set the parameters, double click on the reference label for this new design brief, B2. Change the concrete grade to C40, set the minimum main bar size to 16 and on the Member Loadcases sheet, move all 3 sets of results into the Selected column by clicking on the >> button. Then click on OK to accept the new parameters. 9. Create a BS 8110 Slab Design Brief Return to the Design Brief table and click on New Brief, this time set the name to 'BS8110 Slab Brief' and select BS8110 Slab from the drop list. To set the parameters, double click on the reference label for this new design brief, B3. Change the concrete grade to C40 on the General sheet. Then click on OK to accept the new parameters. 10. Create a Beam Design Group Using the members cursor, select the 5 members that form the perimeter of the slab, plus the member that lies along the top of the shear wall in the centre of the model (M1, M2, M3,M4 and M5). On the Design Groups table, click on the New Design Group button and name the Design Group, BS8110 Beam Group. Make sure that the selected brief is BS 8110 Beam, then click on OK. To confirm that the design group contains the correct list of design members, double click on reference G1 in the Design Group table. 11. Create a Column Design Group Using the members cursor, select the 6 members that form the columns of the slab, including the two internal columns that edge the internal shear wall (M6, M7, M8,M9, M16 and M17). On the Design Groups table, click on the New Design Group button and name the Design Group, BS8110 Column Group. Make sure that the selected brief is BS 8110 Column, then click on OK. To confirm that the design group contains the correct list of design members, double click on reference G2 in the Design Group table. 12. Create a Slab Design object On the Design Groups table, click on the Slabs tab at the top, then on the New Design Slab button. Set the name to BS8110 Slab and ensure that the selected brief is the BS8110 Slab brief and the selected slab is slab number 1. The model is now ready for performing the specific beam, designs.
5.1.1. BS8110 Beam Design

Following the steps outlined in 5.1, the model is ready for the beams in Design Group 1, G1: BS8110 Beam to be designed. 1. Enter the Concrete Member Mode Click on the Mode tab Concrete Member on the left of the screen to enter the Concrete Member Mode. This enters the mode and displays the Summary Page. Ensure that the current design group is G1: BS8110 Beam and if not, select it from the drop list on the toolbar. Note how Members M4 and M5 are identified as 2 spans. This is controlled on the Beam Spans table and by changing supports definition of the nodes. 2. Design the Beam Members Click on the Design Page on the left of the screen. This will open the Design Options dialog box and display the members in the current design group that can be designed. Click on the Design button to design all 5 members. All 5 members should be displayed in green and the Summary table shows the status for parts of all 5 beams as OK. 3. View the Reinforcement Layout for Member 4 Click on the Main Layout Page and select Member 4 from the drop list. In order to see the full extent of the beam, drag the separator bar below the elevation view of the beam up until it looks like the following:-
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 3 of 8
Note that the cross section shown can be moved graphically by dragging the section marker on the elevation view or moment envelope, or by setting the value in the section itself. 4. View the Calculations From the File Menu, select BS8110 Report Setup. In the Items sheet of this dialog, highlight 'Design Detail' and move it to the Selected list by clicking on the > button. On the Members sheet of this dialog, click on the << to un-select all the members, highlight Member 4 and click on the > button to move it to the selected side. Click on OK to accept this Report Setup. To view the resulting report, click on the menu item 'File>Print Preview. The detail calculations will be displayed approximately on page 5 on a report of 14 pages:-
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 4 of 8
5.1.2. BS8110 Column Design

Following the steps outlined in 5.1, the model is ready for the columns in Design Group 2, G2: BS8110 Column to be designed. 1. Enter the Concrete Member Mode Click on the Mode tab Concrete Member on the left of the screen to enter the Concrete Member Mode. This enters the mode and displays the Summary Page. Ensure that the current design group is G2: BS8110 Column and if not, select it from the drop list on the toolbar. 2. Design the Column Members Click on the Design Page on the left of the screen. This will open the Design Options dialog box and display the members in the current design group that can be designed. Click on the Design button to design all 6 members. Note however, that this loading is not substantial and thus results in a set of design messages which suggest that though these are axially loaded members, they are subject to greater bending moments and should be considered as beams. However, they will suffice for our example. All 6 members should be displayed in green and the Summary table shows the status for parts of all 6 columns as OK. 3. View the Reinforcement Layout for Member 6 Click on the Main Layout Page and select Member 6 from the drop list
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 5 of 8
. 4. Modify the Design The initial design produced an arrangement with the 9 T16 bars in the locations shown in the diagram above. It is possible change the layout so that we can check an arrangement of bars. To replace each of the 4 bars in the centre of each face of the column with 2 smaller T8 bars, right click over the cross section of the column and select Edit Bar from the pop up menu. Set the distance for the Top and Side bars to 3.0cm, reduce the size to T8s and click on apply.
This will result in the following arrangement:-
To finally check this arrangement, click on the menu item 'Design>Design Now', and whilst the same warnings appear about the small amount of axial load, the design shows that the arrangement is adequate. 5. View the Calculations From the File Menu, select BS8110 Report Setup. In the Items sheet of this dialog, highlight 'Design Detail' and move it to the Selected list by clicking on the > button. On the Members sheet of this dialog, click on the << to un-select all the members, highlight Member 6 and click on the > button to move it to the selected side. Click on OK to accept this Report Setup. To view the resulting report, click on the menu item 'File>Print Preview. The detail calculations will be displayed on approximately on page 2 on a report of 3 pages:-
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 6 of 8
5.1.3. BS8110 Slab Design

Following the steps outlined in 5.1, the model is ready for the slab SD1: BS8110 Slab to be designed. 1. Enter the Concrete Slab Mode Click on the Mode tab Concrete Slab on the left of the screen to enter the Concrete Slab Mode. This enters the mode and displays the Summary Page. This model only contains a single slab, however, if it contained more than one, then the required slab should be selected from the toolbar drop list. 2. View Displacement Pattern Click on the Displacements Page. To set up the results line, first set the direction to be Unconstrained from the Result Line menu. Then click at the top centre of the slab followed by the bottom centre to get the following:_
3. Define Regions Click on the Regions Page. The slab defaults to a single boundary. To split it into two regions, click on the menu item, Regions>Draw Boundaries. Connect up the two centre nodes as shown.
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 7 of 8
The Regions Table indicated the details for each region, including the orientation. To rotate the axes of region 1 as shown above, change the orientation to 90 degrees. Note the orientation is anti-clockwise. 4. Design Slab Click on the Design Page. The design options dialog box opens. Click on the Design button to perform the design. Change the settings in the toolbar to view the results in the Bottom:Y direction and the Reqd Steel. This will show a contour line pattern. To view the pattern as a filled image, click on the menu item, View>Diagram. On the Design Contour sheet, set the option Style to filled and click on OK. The following image should be displayed.
5. Print a User Report To print a report, first the required items need to be defined. Click on the menu item File>BS8110 Report Setup... and confirm that the report contains the items:Job Information Slab Brief Detail Slab Information Region Information Design Information The report can then be viewed using the menu item File>Print Preview. The report is fitted on approximately two pages, the second page being:-
03/Apr/2009
Section 5. Examples
Page 8 of 8
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 1 of 59
STAAD.Pro 2006 Build 1001 Release Report

Introduction
The Software Release Report for STAAD.Pro 2006 Build 1001 contains detailed information on additions and changes that have been implemented since the final build of STAAD.Pro 2005. This document should be read in conjunction with all other STAAD.Pro manuals.

AD.2006.1 Features affecting the Pre-Processor
Several new features have been added and existing features have been modified in the pre-processor section of the program. They are explained in the following pages.

AD.2006.1.1 Physical Member Interface
Purpose STAAD will allow grouping analytical predefined members into physical members using a special member group PMEMBER. PMEMBER defines a group of analytical collinear members, with same cross section and material property. To model using PMEMBER, one needs to model regular analytical members and the start grouping those together. While creating a PMEMBER, the following are the pre-requisites, 1. Existence of the analytical members in the member-list. 2. Selected members should be interconnected. 3. The selected individual members are collinear. 4. Local axis of the individual members comprising the physical member should be identical (i.e. x, y and z are respectively parallel and in same sense). 5. A member in one Physical Member Group should not occur in any other Physical Member Group. Description PMEMBER can be created either in modeling mode or Steel-Designer mode. Modeling mode and SteelDesigner mode PMEMBER-s will be labeled as M and D respectively. Modeling mode PMEMBER will allow variable cross-sections. Steel-Designer mode will allow importing PMEMBER-s created in modeling mode. Following STAAD commands related to PMEMBER will be implemented.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh6FF5.htm
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 2 of 59
DEFINE PMEMBER PMEMBER PROPERTY PMEMBER CONSTANT PMEMBER LOAD PRINT PMEMBER FORCE
To define a Physical Member, the following command is used after the MEMBER INCIDENCE Command: DEFINE PMEMBER {Member list} PMEMBER (pmember-no) Example:
JOINT COORDINATE 1 0 0 0 6 10.0 0 0 MEMBER INCIDENCE 1125 DEFINE PMEMBER 1 TO 5 PMEMB 1
To define the member property of a Physical Member, the following command is used:
PMEMBER PROPERTY {Pmember-list} PRIS
The Physical Member supports all types of member properties available in STAAD. If multiple definitions of member properties for a particular analytical member is encountered (e.g. analytical member properties is defined twice, once via PMEMBER PROP command and again via MEMBER PROP command, then MEMBER PROP command will override PMEMBER PROP definition. To define the Material constants of a Physical Member, the following command is used:
PMEMBER CONSTANT E CONCRETE pmember-list DEN CONCRETE pmember-list
Any member, which is a part of any PMEMNER is not allowed to be assigned constants explicitly. At present, a Physical Member can be loaded with Uniformly Distributed Load and Moment, Concentrated Load and Moment, and Trapezoidal Load. The command syntax is as follows:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 3 of 59
PMEMBER LOAD {Pmember List} UNI / CON / UMOM / UCON / TRAP f1 f2 f3 f4
After the analysis, the Post Analysis results of a PMEMBER can be seen by using the following command:
PRINT PMEMBER FORCE
This command will produce member forces for all the analytical members in the group. Graphical User Interface for Physical Member: The following steps are to be followed for creation of a Physical Member: Creation of a Physical Member: 1. 2. Make a frame model in STAAD.Pro, comprising of few consecutive beams. A new toolbar Physical Member Toolbar is seen with icons containing Toggle Physical Member Mode, Select Physical Member Cursor and Form Member, as highlighted in the picture below. Select few analytical members which are Collinear and interconnected, as shown in the picture. Refer the pre-requisites of the analytical members in the previous section to form a Physical Member. Now, either by clicking the Form Member button on the Physical Member Toolbar, or by clicking Form Member from the context menu, the Physical Member can be created.
3.
4.
Figure 1
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 4 of 59
5.
The details of the formed Physical Member can be seen in the General Physical Member page at the right pane of the window as shown in the figure.
Figure 2 Assigning Member Property to a Physical Member: 1. To assign Member Property to the Physical Member, at first we need to create some Physical Member properties, which are different from Analytical Member Properties
To create a Physical Member Property, we should be in the Physical Member Mode by clicking on the Toggle Physical Member Mode button and go to the General Property page. 2. Create a new Property, and this new member property will be assigned as a Physical Member Property, as shown below, marked as Physical. Only the Physical Member properties can be assigned to a physical member, and no analytical member property can be assigned to a physical member.
Figure 3 3. Assign this member property to the selected Physical Member.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 5 of 59
Note: For a Physical Member, whose physical member property is already assigned, the individual analytical members in that Physical member will adopt the same member property that of the physical member. However, in case, where the analytical member property is assigned to any member in that physical member, then this analytical member property will supersede physical member property. Assigning Member Specifications to a Physical Member: 1. To create a Physical Member Specification, we should be in the Physical Member Mode by clicking on the Toggle Physical Member Mode button and go to the General Property page. Go to the General Specification page and click on the Beam specification. Only the Release, Offset and Truss member specifications are available for the physical member.
2. 3.
Figure 4 4. Create the physical member specifications, and add to the list. The Release and Offset specifications will be marked as Physical and the Truss specification will be marked as PMEMBER Assign the physical member specifications to the physical members only.
5.
Note: For a Physical Member, whose physical member specification is already assigned, the individual analytical members in that Physical member will adopt the same member specification that of the physical member. However, in case, where the analytical member specification is assigned to any member in that physical member, then this analytical member specification will supersede physical member specification. Assigning Loads to a Physical Member: 1. To assign a load on a physical member, go to the General Load page and create a new load case, or select an existing load case, under which the physical member load will be
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 6 of 59
placed. 2. Under the tab of Load Items, click on the Physical Member Load, as shown in the figure below. Currently, Uniform Force, Uniform Moment, Concentrated Force, Concentrated Moment and Trapezoidal member loads are supported.
Figure 5 3. The created loads are marked as physical member load.
Figure 6 4. Assign these loads to the physical members only.
Note: For a Physical Member, whose physical member Load is already assigned, the individual analytical members in that Physical member will adopt the member loads internally depending on the physical member load. However, in case, where the analytical member Load is assigned to any member in that physical member, then this analytical member Load will superimpose on the physical member Load. Post Processing Features related to Physical Member: In the post processing results, to view the Shear Force diagram, Bending Moment Diagram and Deflected shape, use the member query dialog box. Select a Physical Member by using the Physical Member cursor, and double-click on that to view the member query dialog box.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 7 of 59
Figure 7a
Figure 7b
Design of Physical Members: In the current version of STAAD.Pro, the design of a Physical Member is not handled.

AD.2006.1.2 Load Envelope
Purpose Load page will allow creation of Envelopes that can be saved as part of the STAAD input file. The user will be able to define multiple load envelopes each consisting of groups of predefined load cases. These envelopes can latter be used for post-processing. For example post analysis results may be viewed for a selected load envelope. As far as the STAAD engine is concerned, ENVELOP command will translate in to a LOAD LIST command. The envelope can be tagged with optional key words to specify qualitative nature of the load or load combination cases included in the envelop definition. Based on the nature of the load cases in the envelope, the users can define appropriate design parameters for each envelope. For example, for design under wind load condition, most of the design codes allow increase of allowable stresses. Design routine can increase the allowable stress used in interaction equation, when it does the design for the envelope. Another application of this feature can be to specify separate load groups for serviceability check, working stress and limit state checks. Description The option for defining Load Envelopes appear within the Load dialog box in the General | Load page as shown in the next figure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 8 of 59
Figure 8 To define an envelope, select the Load Envelopes and click on the Add button and the Add New : Load Envelopes dialog box will come up as shown in the next figure.
Figure 9 The Envelope will be identified by the number that appears in the Envelope edit box. One can select an appropriate type for the load envelope like stress, serviceability etc. depending on the nature of the loads selected for the envelope. All the predefined primary load cases and combination cases will appear inside the Available window. One can now select one or more of these cases, bring them to the Selected window on the right hand side and click on the Add button to create the envelope. Once an envelope is created, it will be displayed in the Load dialog box as shown in the next figure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 9 of 59
Figure 10 In the post processing mode, the Results Setup dialog box will include option for selecting Defined Envelopes for the purpose of displaying results as shown in the next figure. Once an envelope is selected the corresponding loads can be seen within the Selected window.
Figure 11 The load envelope commands are written in the STAAD input file as shown below.
DEFINE ENVELOP 1 2 ENVELOP 1 TYPE SERVICEABILITY 3 5 ENVELOP 2 TYPE STRESS END DEFINE ENVELOP
The first line within DEFINE ENVELOPE command means that load cases numbered 1 and 2
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 10 of 59
make up the serviceability type load envelope 1. Similarly load cases 3 and 5 define the stress type load envelope 2. To print out the support reactions corresponding to load envelope 1, that includes load cases 1 and 2, the following commands will be defined in the input file
LOAD LIST ENV 1 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS
If ENV keyword is encountered, the list will be interpreted as list of envelopes rather than a list of load cases. Please refer to the example file Load_envelopes.std, which is available under the different country folders.

AD.2006.1.3 Persistency of Parametric Mesh Model in STAAD Input File
Purpose In the past, once the parametric mesh model was merged with the base model, no information about the parametric mesh was retained by STAAD. So, if any modification was required at a later stage, the parametric mesh had to be created afresh. Parametric model feature has now been enhanced and multiple parametric mesh models can now be saved as part of the STAAD model. This would allow the users the flexibility to come back to the saved mesh models at any time and make modifications to it like adding an opening or adding a density line. Description The parametric mesh model data is now saved as part of the STAAD input file. Special tag based commands has been introduced to support saving of parametric mesh models as part of the STAAD input file as shown below.
2072 1114 1113 1160; 2073 1045 1160 1113; ELEMENT PROPERTY 810 TO 1779 1821 TO 2073 THICKNESS 1 <! STAAD PRO GENERATED DATA DO NOT MODIFY!!! PARAMETRIC MODEL SLAB MESH PARAM 0 3 MESH ORG 3 5 8 BOUNDARY 10 11 1 93 1 94 1 95 1 83 1 71 1 70 1 69 1 41 1 26 1 OPENING CIRC 72 360 96 43.2666 12 OPENING POLY 5 216 360 67.2 1 270 360 33.6 2 324 360 67.2 2 270 360 100.8 2 216 360 100.8 2 DENSITY POINTS 2
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 11 of 59
180 360 168 1 360 360 168 1 DENSITY LINE 0 360 168 100 180 360 168 200 DENSITY LINE 180 360 168 1 360 360 168 1 DENSITY LINE 360 360 168 1 540 360 168 1 DENSITY LINE 180 360 0 1 180 360 168 1 DENSITY LINE 180 360 168 1 180 360 336 1 DENSITY LINE 360 360 0 1 360 360 168 1 DENSITY LINE 360 360 168 1 360 360 336 1 DENSITY LINE 54 360 302.4 1 162 360 201.6 1 DENSITY LINE 216 360 201.6 1 324 360 235.2 1 GENERATED PLATES ALL END <! STAAD PRO GENERATED DATA DO NOT MODIFY!!! PARAMETRIC MODEL FIRST_FLOOR_SLAB MESH PARAM 60 3 MESH ORG 2 3 5 BOUNDARY 6 36 1 65 1 66 1 53 1 52 1 51 1 GENERATED PLATES ALL END !> END GENERATED DATA BLOCK !> END GENERATED DATA BLOCK DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL
Go to Geometry | Parametric Models page and the saved parametric mesh models will appear within the Parametric Models dialog box as shown in the next figure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 12 of 59
Figure 13 There are two parametric mesh models named second_floor and roof inside the Parametric Models dialog box as shown in the previous figure. Please refer to the example file parametric_models.std, which is available under various country folders.

AD.2006.1.4 Persistency of Parameters User to Generate ASCE Wind Load in STAAD Input File
Purpose In the past, once the wind load as per the ASCE-7 code was generated automatically using the wind load generator, no information about the parameters was retained by STAAD. So, there was no way to check the parameters, based on which the generation was done. Moreover, if any modification was required at a later stage, all the parameters had to be defined afresh. Automatic wind load generation feature has now been enhanced and the parameters can now be saved as part of the STAAD.Pro model. Description Special tag based commands has now been introduced to support saving of ASCE parameters as part of the STAAD input file as shown below.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 13 of 59
DEFINE WIND LOAD TYPE 1 INT 0.017517 0.017517 0.0176388 0.017754 0.0178632 -0.0179672 0.0180665 0.0181615 0.0182526 0.0183402 0.018506 -0.0184246 0.0185846 0.0186607 0.0187345 HEIG 0 15 16.1539 17.3077 18.4615 19.6154 20.7692 21.9231 -23.0769 24.2308 25.3846 26.5385 27.6 28.8462 30 <! STAAD PRO GENERATED DATA DO NOT MODIFY !!! ASCE-7-2002:PARAMS 85.000 MPH 0 2 2 0 0.000 FT 0.000 FT -0.000 FT 1 1 30.000 FT 80.000 FT 60 FT 2.000 0.010 0 0 0 0 0 0.982 1.000 1.150 0.850 0 0 0 0 0.631 0.800 0.550 !> END GENERATED DATA BLOCK
When a user goes back to the Load page and goes to Definitions | Wind Definitions and double clicks on the Intensity as shown in the next figure,
Figure 14 the intensity versus height data shows up as shown below.
Figure 15 One can now click on the Calculate as per ASCE-7 button and the parameters that were initially defined are going to appear in the resulting dialog boxes. Please refer to the example file ASCE_WIND_load_generation.std, which is available under various country folders.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 14 of 59

AD.2006.1.5 Enhancement of Z UP System
Purpose Earlier, when geometry created using a CAD software that used Z axis as the vertical axis, had to be imported into STAAD.Pro, the users had to reorient the model to make the Y axis the vertical axis before getting the model into STAAD.Pro. This was necessary because a number of STAAD.Pro load generation commands did not work when the Z axis was defined as the vertical axis. In STAAD.Pro 2006 these limitations has been addressed. All the load generations are going to work with the Z axis up coordinate system. Description The default coordinate system for a model can be set by going to File | Configure as shown in the next figure. The Configure option is only available when no STAAD model is open. If a STAAD model is open, one has to click on File | Close to close the file first.
Figure 16 The Configure Program dialog box comes up as shown in the next figure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 15 of 59
Figure 17 The Z up option can then be selected and applied to the model. This would set the Z axis to be the vertical axis instead of the default Y axis. Subsequently all modeling, analysis and postprocessing items would be based on this coordinate system.

AD.2006.1.6 Specification of Member Orientation Using Reference Vector
Purpose At one point of time, the only option the user had to orient members correctly was through specification of beta angles. Some of the users wanted a more simplified way for orienting members and the method of defining orientation by use of reference points was introduced. Since the reference point required specification of coordinates in terms of the global coordinate system, we received further request asking if the reference point could be specified with respect to the local coordinate system of the member which led to the introduction of this new feature. This feature will allow users to orient members by specifying a direction vector. Beta angles will be calculated by the software by itself based on the direction vector specification. The new reference vector will be defined with respect to the local coordinates of the member. This is going to make the task of orienting members much easier.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 16 of 59
Description To access the feature go to Commands | Geometric Constants | Member Reference Point as shown in the next figure
Figure 18 The Reference Point dialog box comes up where the vector for the reference axis can be specified as shown in the following figure. The local Y axis for the member is going to oriented along the vector. This X, Y, Z values are going to be based on the local axis system of the member.
Figure 19 The feature is explained in the next section with an example. Let us consider the beam shown in the next figure. The requirement is to rotate the cross section about the axis of the member in the direction as shown, such that the angle of rotation is governed by a slope of 1 horizontal to 2 vertical.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 17 of 59
Figure 20 Go to Commands | Geometric Constants | Member Reference Point and the following dialog box comes up. Choose the Vector option and specify the reference vector so that it is oriented as per the required slope.
Figure 21 Click on OK. Observe the rotation of the member as shown in the next figure.
Figure 22 The member gets oriented correctly without the user having to take the trouble of calculating the beta angle. In the STAAD input file, the following command lines get written. CONSTANTS REFVECTOR 0 2 1 ALL
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 18 of 59
Beta angle for the member can be easily figured out by simply double clicking on the member that brings up the Beam dialog box as shown next. The correct beta angle of 26.5651 is automatically calculated by STAAD.Pro based on the reference vector specification.
Figure 23

AD.2006.1.7 Single File Archive to Save All STAAD Input / Ouput Files
Purpose User likes to have single model file to store all input/output files. Current STAAD.Pro archive feature is enhanced to support this feature. Description Based on user configurations, file open and save dialogs will allow user to select .stz (std archive) files. The archive will be expanded to TEMP folder or user configurable working folder. All input/output will be created at that location.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 19 of 59
Figure 24 While exiting the program/session, all of those files will be archived again under same name and copied to original source folder. Archive related commands can be found in the File option in the top menu bar as shown in the next figure.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 20 of 59
Figure 25

AD.2006.1.8 Auto Calculation of Effective Length Factors of Members as per AISC Code
Purpose STAAD.Pro has a new feature to auto-calculate the Effective Length Factors (KY, KZ etc), for the members to be designed as per AISC-ASD Code. Description To make use of this feature, the user needs to go to the Design Tab, and then to Steel tab. Select the Country Code as AISC ASD. Select the member for which the Effective Length Factors are to be calculated. Click on the Define Parameters button and select the parameter KY or KZ. The following dialog box will appear.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 21 of 59
Figure 26 The only difference from the previous version of STAAD.Pro is the addition of the Calculate button as marked in the figure. On clicking the Calculate button, the program will ask, whether the braced or un-braced effective length of the selected member is required, through the message box shown below.
Figure 27 After getting confirmation from the user, the program will calculate and display the value of the Effective Length Factor in the Edit box. Now, click on the Assign button to associate this value of the respective Effective Length Factor with the selected member. The calculation of the effective length factors are done as per a paper titled Compression Members presented by George Tsiatas

AD.2006.2 Features affecting the Post-Processor (Results Mode)
Several new features have been added and existing features have been modified in the post-
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 22 of 59
processor section of the program. They are explained in the following pages.

AD.2006.2.1 Generation of Transfer Force Report for Connection Design
Several new features have been added and existing features have been modified in the postprocessor section of the program. They are explained in the following pages. Purpose STAAD.Pro can now calculate the Transfer force or pass through force that can be used for connection design. This feature is based on a paper on the subject by Dr. William. A. Thornton. Refer to the next figure which shows beams and bracing members connected to either side of the column.
Figure 28 Transfer force is simply the maximum net horizontal force that gets transferred from the one side of the column to the other through the connection. So STAAD.Pro checks the forces in the members framing into each side of the column and finds out the resultant horizontal force for either side. Typically the resultant forces on the two sides would not be equal as some amount of force will be taken up by the column in shear. The greater of the two resultants is reported by STAAD.Pro as the transfer force. The option to determine transfer force automatically, will save engineers considerable time and effort as in most cases, they have to report the transfer forces in the design drawings. The same concept can be applied to floor bracing in horizontal plane.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 23 of 59
Description Go to the Post processing mode by going to Mode | Postprocessing or by clicking on the Postprocessing tab above the graphics window. Select all the members that frame into any connection as shown in the previous figure. Go to Report | Column Transfer Force as shown in the next figure.
Figure 29 A dialog box titled Transfer Force for Selected Members comes up as shown in the next figure. The Loads box displays the load cases that has been considered to calculate the transfer force. By default all load cases are considered but one can exclude a few of them by simply clicking on the load case within the Loads box. The boxes Left Beams and Right Beams list all the members on the respective sides of the column along with their incidences. The boxes Left TF and Right TF shows the resultant horizontal force from either side. Max TF reports the transfer force.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 24 of 59
Figure 30 Click on the Insert to Table button and a table will be generated containing all the transfer force information as shown in the next figure.
Figure 31 The transfer force information can also be included as part of a report by going to File | Report Setup or by clicking on the report setup icon Setup dialog box as shown in the next figure. which will bring up the Report
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 25 of 59
Figure 32 By default, the Transfer Force Report appears in the selected list of items within the dialog box. A report with the transfer force data can then be generated as shown next.
Figure 33 Please refer to the example file TrasnferForces.std, which is available under various country folders.

AD.2006.2.2 Customizable Color to Display Unity Check / Utilization Ratio
Purpose View steel design results. Description Default color for display of passed members was black. It has now been changed to green. The colors representing the various ranges for utilization ratios can be set by the user.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 26 of 59
Figure 34

AD.2006.2.3 Enhancement to Steel Designer BS 5950 Calculation Sheets
Purpose The design calculation sheets of a steel section that has been designed with a BS 5950-1:2000 design brief has been modified with the following enhancements. Description 1) The terminology for elastic and plastic sections updated to use same terminology as in the design code. 2) A summary has been added at the end of the calculation sheet. 3) The section classification summary has been improved. 4) The reported dimensions of the section in the Compression Flange Buckling Check have been improved. 5) The status for various checks has been re-titled. 6) Details of check to 4.8.3.3.1 added when required. 7) There are improved details of the clauses 4.8.2., 4.8.3. and Annex I1 calculations. 8) The 4.3.6. Lateral Torsional Buckling Check has been enhanced. 9) Additional detailed calculations for axially loaded members have been added to the document. 10) A number of spelling issues have been addressed.

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hh6FF5.htm 03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 27 of 59
AD.2006.3 Features affecting Analysis and Design

Several new features have been added and existing features have been modified in the analysis and design section of the program. They are explained in the following pages.

AD.2006.3.1 Pushover Analysis
Purpose This is a set of procedures to implement a Pushover Analysis as defined in the document FEMA 356:2000. STAAD Pushover analysis in STAAD is a static, non-linear procedure in accordance with FEMA 356 specification. Basically, in this method, the magnitude of the lateral push load is increased progressively according to a predefined loading pattern until either loading or the deflection reaches the described level. Description There are three stages to utilizing this new feature, firstly the model must be correctly defined with the appropriate commands in the Modeling Mode. The second stage is then to analyze the structure to generate a set of results. The final, third stage is to see the resulting data in the Results Mode. The steps can be summarized thus:A) Modeling Mode 1) Create a suitable STAAD.Pro model using any existing STAAD modeling techniques. The model should contain the geometry, properties and any required specifications that would result in the successful creation of a STAAD.Pro analysis stiffness matrix. 2) The Pushover analysis is complex and requires a significant amount of detail to be defined for a successful analysis to take place. These parameters are defined in the Definitions of the Load dialog box. To set up these parameters, enter the General > Load Page and expand the Definitions shown in the Load box to display the Pushover Definitions. Click on the description Pushover Definitions and then click on the New (or Add) button to start entering the required data.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 28 of 59
Figure 35 There are 5 parts to setting up the pushover parameters which are:- 1: Define Input - 2: Load Patterns - 3: Spectrum Details - 4: Hinge Properties - 5: Solution Control - 1: Define Input The first part of defining the pushover parameters is to define the following in the Define Input sheet:-
Figure 36 The input can either be as a General Input or as Member Specific Parameters. If the option of General Input is selected then the following data must be defined.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 29 of 59
Type of frame Chose whether the structure is a fixed rigid moment frame or concentric braced frame. Geometric Non-Linearity Effect Ignore or include Geometric Non-Linearity Effect. If the Geometric Non-Linearity effect is included then Displacement Tolerance and No. Of Iterations under Convergence Criteria for Geometric NonLinearity will appear highlighted. Convergence Criteria for Geometric Non-Linearity Displacement Tolerance and No. of Iterations can be specified by checking the boxes and editing the value in the edit box. If nothing is specified, analysis engine will assume the default value. Input value for No. of Iterations for KG Matrix and Maximum No. of Analysis Cycles can be specified by checking the respective boxes. If nothing is specified, analysis engine will assume the default value. Save Output Results for Multiple Steps Incremental value of displacement at roof or at control joint in current unit system is to be given. Also incremental value of Base Shear can be specified after checking the box. If nothing is specified, analysis engine will assume the default value. Print Output Results Select the Print Results check box for printing final analysis results (joint displacements, member end forces and support reactions) in the output file. Click the Add button as shown in the figure below to add the inputs specified under Pushover Definitions in Load dialog box. If the alternative option of Member Specific Parameters is selected, then a number of specific values of th listed with a check box active are added to the Loads dialog each time the Add button is clicked.
Figure 37 These values need to assigned to a range of members in the model, e.g. to assign an Expected Yield Stress of 36 ksi to a range of members, the following steps need to be taken:-
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 30 of 59
Figure 38 - 2: Load Patterns As the name suggests, this sets out how the loading pattern is applied.
Figure 39 If the loading pattern is set to Auto, then Vertical Distribution of Base Shear must be defined. To do this check the Method for Lateral Load calculation check box and select the method from the drop-list of Method 1, Method 2 or Method 3. If nothing specified, STAAD will use the default method. Additionally, with the Auto loading pattern selected, then it is possible to define the Total Base Shear to Be Distributed. If selected, then the Direction and amount of Total Base Shear to be distributed must be specified. If base shear to be distributed is not defined, the analysis will assume 10 percent of the gravity loading as a lateral load.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 31 of 59
The maximum number of load step increments is defined with the Number of Push Load Steps. Once defined, the data from is added to the model by clicking on the Add button. - 3: Spectrum Details This is used to specify the parameters of the spectrums that are to be used.
Figure 40 The inputs on this sheet are the percentage of Critical Damping for 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th spectrums. Note that the Values for 2nd, 3rd and 4th spectrums are optional. The class of the Site Category should be selected from the drop-list of Class A, B, C, D or E as defined in the FEMA document. The Mapped Spectral Acceleration as defined in the FEMA document should also be specified. Once defined, the data from is added to the model by clicking on the Add button. - 4: Hinge Properties There are three options on the creation of hinges which is set up on this sheet, either use the FEMA specification, Ignore or create a User Defined hinge. If either the option of FEMA or Ignore is selected, then no additional data input is required. Simply click on Add to add this setting to the pushover parameter settings.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 32 of 59
Figure 41 To define a User Defined hinge, select User Defined from the drop-list and carry out the following:Enter a Type Identifier (Hinge Property number). Specify the co-ordinates (A, B, C, D and E) of Load Deformation Curve, Yield Moment, Yield Rotation and Acceptance Criteria (Immediate Occupancy, Life Safety and Collapse Prevention). Once defined, the hinge is added to the parameter list by clicking on the Add button. All the hinge types now need to be assigned to the model. Defined hinges will appear in the Load dialog box, for example if a single user hinge, Type 1 has been defined, it will appear thus:-
Figure 42
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 33 of 59
The hinges should be assigned to members as applying loading thus to assign a User Defined Hinge, defined as Type 1, the following steps should be performed:-
Figure 43 Note that different hinges cannot be assigned to different ends of a beam. - 5: Solution Control The final sheet of the pushover definition defines the limits for the pushover analysis.
Figure 44 The pushover can be terminated by the defined Base Shear limit and/or Displacement limit. If the Base Shear limit is selected, then the direction, X or Z should be selected and the limiting base shear in the current force units.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 34 of 59
If the Displacement limit is selected, then the direction, X or Z should be selected and the limiting displacements for a specified joint. 3) Create the primary load cases as for any other analysis, and add the analysis command 'PERFORM PUSHOVER ANALYSIS'.
Figure 45 Click on the Add button followed by the Close button. Perform Pushover Analysis will be added as follows:
Figure 46 Note that a pushover analysis will be performed on ALL load cases defined from any previous analysis commands and the COMBINATION load cases are NOT analyzed. B) Perform Analysis 1) Run the analysis as for any other STAAD model using the menu command, Analyze>Run Analysis... CTRL+F5. Note that the Pushover analysis should only be used with the STAAD engine option. Note that this is not a feature available in the Stardyne engine. C) Results Mode
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 35 of 59
1) The results from the pushover analysis result in a new set of pages being available in the PostProcessing Mode. The pages are:- Loads
- Capacity Curve
- Node Results
- Beam Results Figure 47 Each page offer the following information:- Loads Page
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 36 of 59
Figure 48 The table on the right hand side of the figure shows forces Fx, Fy and Fz at the nodes and maximum base shear corresponding to different load steps. If the load steps are changed up to the Max. Load Steps, Base Shear and Forces at different nodes will also change as shown in the figure below.
Figure 49 - Capacity Curve The Capacity Curve page is used to display the Capacity Curve and a table of the relationship between displacement and base shear for each load step.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 37 of 59
Figure 50 This page displays a graph of the Capacity Curve above a table of the data points. The Capacity Curve displays the relationship of Base Shear to displacement of the Control Joint.
Figure 51 Right click on the Capacity Curve graph to obtain a pop-up menu, which allows a Target Displacement to be set. If selected from the pop-up menu then a wizard of three steps is presented in the dialog box. Step 1, Define Modification factor C0
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 38 of 59
Figure 52 This sets the Modification Factor C0 which can be selected from the table or calculated based on entering the data of the Building Type, Loading Pattern and Number of Stories. The resulting modification factor, whether selected from the table or calculated is displayed in the lower right corner of the dialog box. To accept the value of C0 and move on to the next page of the settings for the Target Displacements, click the Next> button. Step 2, Define Modification Factor C1
Figure 53
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 39 of 59
This sets the Modification Factor C1which is selected from the table. The graphs show the Demand Spectrum for all the spectrums defined in the pushover definition specified for the analysis. Recall that up-to 4 spectrums could be defined. The value of Cm is defined according to the selected Spectrum damping and item in the Cm table (FEMA 356:2000, table 3-1). To accept the value of Cm and move on to the next page of the settings for the Target Displacements, click the Next> button. Step 3, Define Modification Factors C2 and C3
Figure 54 This sets the Modification Factor C2 which is selected from the table. To accept the value of C2 and move on to the complete the settings for the Target Displacements, click the Finish button. The value of the calculated Target Displacement is added to the Capacity Curve Graph, thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 40 of 59
Figure 55 The Capacity Curve Graph can also be enhanced by indicating the Idealized Capacity Curve. To show this right click on the Capacity Graph diagram and select the option Show Idealized Capacity Curve. The graph is then added and colored in blue, thus:-
Figure 56 By right clicking on the Capacity Curve Graph there is also an option to Show Data Points. If this is selected, the points displayed in the Capacity Curve table are marked directly onto the curve, thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 41 of 59
Figure 57 As with other graphical windows in STAAD.Pro, the Capacity Curve window can be recorded as a picture to be included in a User Report. To take a picture of the Capacity Curve, either right click on the window and select Take Picture from the pop-up menu. Alternatively select the option from the Edit menu or Toolbar icon as elsewhere in the program. - Node Results
Figure 58 The two tables on the right of the screen display the Node Displacements and the Support Reactions for a given load step. Both tables and the displacement diagram are updated if the selected Load Step is changed on either table. - Beam Results
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 42 of 59
Figure 59 There are two tables displayed along the right side. The upper table, called Beam Hinge Results table, shows the Status (Linear or Non-linear) of the beam, Location of hinge formation in a beam and Status of the hinges (with respect to Acceptance criteria) formed against each Load Step. In the hinge status column, status of hinges is displayed if hinges are formed i.e. whether the hinges lie between Linear and Immediate Occupancy (<=IO), Immediate Occupancy and Life Safety (IO-LS) or Life Safety and Collapse Prevention (LSCP) or exceeds Collapse Prevention (>=CP) levels. If we keep on increasing the load steps more beams will become nonlinear due to formation of hinges. If the member crosses Collapse Prevention level it becomes inactive.
Figure 60 The location of hinges at beam ends is highlighted on the drawing as the number of selected load step is increased. The color of the hinge itself gives the indication at what level it is. Level : <= IO , Color : Green
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 43 of 59
Level : <= IO-LS Level : <= LS-CP Level : >= CP
, Color : Blue , Color : Magenta , Color : Red
When the member is inactive, the color of the member changes to red at the load step at which it is deactivated.
Figure 61 Restrictions Pushover analysis, currently implemented in STAAD, is limited in application to buildings that are regular and do not have adverse torsional or multimode effects. The capacity curve is generally constructed to represent the first mode response of the structure based on the assumption that the fundamental mode of vibration is the predominant response of the structure. PERFORM PUSHOVER ANALYSIS cannot be repeated more than once. PERFORM PUSHOVER ANALYSIS PRINT is not a valid command. CHANGE command cannot be used in conjunction with a Pushover analysis. LOAD COMBINATION command is not accepted. SET Z UP command should not be used. The pushover analysis should only be used on models defined with the Y up co-ordinate system. SET RESTART 1 command will not work i.e. <filename>.L17 file will not form. SURFACE objects are not considered. Only steel structures should be considered. Non-prismatic sections should not be used. Curved beam specification is not considered. Cable specification on members is not considered. Plate and solid elements are not considered. Beta angles other than 0 and 90 degree are not valid.
Please refer to the example files ExampPush01.std, ExampPush02.std, ExampPush03.std and ExampPush04.std in the folder X:\SPro2006\STAAD\Examp\Pushover\ , where X: is the default drive where you have installed STAAD.Pro 2006.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 44 of 59

AD.2006.3.2 Steady State Analysis
Please refer to section 5.37.1 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual for details. Also refer to the example files SVM33.std, SVM32.std, SS-beam2.std, SS-beam3.std, Exam07.std and Exam14b.std in the folder X:\SPro2006 \STAAD\Examp\STEADYSTATE\ , where X: is the default drive where you have installed STAAD.Pro 2006.

AD.2006.4 Features affecting the RC Designer Mode
Several new features have been added and existing features have been modified in the RC Designer mode of the program. They are explained in the following pages. Refer to the RC Designer Manual for full details. Note that references made here are for sections in the RC Designer Manual.

AD.2006.4.1 Slab Design to BS 8110
This a complete new mode that allows slabs to be defined from a collection of finite elements created from user defined meshes or surface objects. This release has added the design of slabs to BS8110. See also:General Overview, 1.3.3 Slab Design Briefs Getting Started, 2.6 Slabs Page, 2.8.4.5 SB8110 Slab Engineering Information, 3.4.4.3. BS8110 Slab Design Principles

AD.2006.4.2 BAEL Beam Design Enhancement
The BAEL 91 design code has been updated so that the limitation of reinforcement defined in clause A.8.1,21 is applied to the entire cross section, not just the compression zone of the cross section. This therefore allows for a greater amount of reinforcement in any given section. This new interpretation of the code is more in line with the code requirements in the
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 45 of 59
EC2 and DIN codes. See also:Engineering Information, 3.4.3.1 BAEL Beam Design Principles

AD.2006.4.3 French GUI
A French language version of the RC Designer interface has been added. This is accessed by selecting the option 'Francais' for the Interface and Tools in the STAAD.Pro Language Setup tool.
Figure 62 The STAAD.Pro Language Setup can be launched from Windows Start>All Programs>STAAD.Pro 2006>STAAD.Pro Language Settings Note: The language option should be set prior to opening STAAD.Pro or RC Designer.

AD.2006.4.4 DIN 1045-1 Beam and Column Design
A new DIN 1045-1 set of design codes have been added for the design of beams and columns. See also:Getting Started, 2.8.6.1. DIN1045 Beam, 2.8.6.2. DIN1045 Column
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 46 of 59
Engineering Information, 3.4.6. DIN1045-1

AD.2006.4.5 Use of Generated Load Cases
The RC Designer has been enhanced to make use of the results of loadcases created by STAAD.Pro's LOAD GENERATION command. These loadcases are now available for use in the Envelope definition, used by beam and slab design briefs and in the loadcases available for column briefs.

AD.2006.4.6 Use of Primary Load Cases in Column Designs
The RC Designer has been enhanced such that all column briefs can include the results of primary loadcases as well as combination loadcases.

AD.2006.4.7 BS8110 Beams Torsion Check Added
The BS 8110 beam design brief has been enhanced with the additional option of identifying the additional reinforcement required for the torsional forces. The additional reinforcement requirement is displayed in the Detail Design option of a user report. See also:Engineering Information, 3.4.4.1. BS8110 Beam Design Principles.

AD.2006.5 Additional STAAD.Pro 2006 Features
The additional enhancements made to STAAD.Pro 2006 are explained in the following pages.

AD.2006.5.1 STAAD.Pro Language Application
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 47 of 59
Purpose An application that allows various aspects of STAAD.Pro to be set to local language settings. Description The STAAD.Pro Language Setup application is a simple to use application that allows the user to select a language for displaying various components of the STAAD.Pro application. The program has four drop lists, each setting the language resource to use. Interface and Tools Analysis Messages Section Wizard Advanced Mesher
When STAAD.Pro Language Setup is launched, the interface will query the computer for the current settings and display the currently selected settings in the drop lists. The change the settings, simply select a new language for one or more of the components and click on the 'Apply' button. Note that in order to correctly effect the changes, STAAD.Pro and its components should be closed prior to setting a new language.

AD.2006.5.2 Section Wizard databases
Purpose Section Wizard Section Builder module and FreeSketch modules make use of defined standard steel databases. 3 new additional databases have been added and 3 have been updated. Description New Additional Databases INDIAN.PRF - Indian JAPANESE.PRF - Japanese SAFRICA.PRF - South African Updated Databases BRITISH1.PRF UK Corus DIN.PRF - German
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 48 of 59
USA.PRF - ASTM Note, all other databases are unchanged.

AD.2006.6 Features Added in STAAD.Pro 2005 Previously Undocumented
The following pages explain features that have been introduced into STAAD.Pro but were not fully documented in previous Release Reports.

AD.2006.6.1 DESCON, Advanced Connection Design Mode
Purpose The DESCON, Advanced Connection Design Interface is a facility provided in STAAD.Pro to link the analysis results of a steel framed structure directly into the application, DESCON produced by Omnitech Associates. DESCON is a third party product, which has its own license and installation. Contact your STAAD.Pro supplier for more details on purchasing this application if you do not currently own a license. Description The following describes the process of creating a connection design using the Advanced Connection Design Interface. Note that prior to using this functionality, you must first install a copy of the DESCON application and supplied a valid license. Additionally your STAAD.Pro license must also be programmed to include the feature Advanced Connection Interface. This can be verified using the REI Application Assistant. Create or open any STAAD input file, containing a number of connecting steel members. Perform an analysis to obtain a set of analysis results. On successful completion of the analysis the Advanced Connection Design will become available in the Mode bar along the top of the window, as shown in the figure below, will become available to allow access into the advanced connection design mode. Click on the text to enter the Advanced Connection Design mode.
Figure 64
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 49 of 59
There are three stages to the process of creating the connection designs which are reflecting in the Page names displayed on the right of the screen. 1) Define the Load Envelopes for the design 2) Define the Connection Design Parameters and carry out the design. 3) View Diagrams and Reports of the connection designs. Start by creating the envelope of load cases by clicking on the New Envelope button at the bottom of the Envelopes Table on the right of the screen.
Figure 65 In the Load Envelope dialog box select the required load cases from the range of Load Cases, for which the connections are to be designed and click the OK button as shown below. A number of envelope definitions can be made which can be used for different connection designs later.
Figure 66 The defined Load Envelope(s) will be listed in the Envelope table as shown below:
Figure 67 The second stage is to define the connection parameters. For this, click on the Define Connection Page tab on the left of the screen
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 50 of 59
Figure 68 The screen is re-arranged with the Connections table displayed on the right of the screen. To create a connection, select a connecting beam and column and then click on the New Connection button at the bottom of the Connections table.
Figure 69 If a suitable selection of beams /columns has been selected, then a Define Connection dialogbox will be displayed, as shown below:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 51 of 59
Figure 70 Select the appropriate connection details including: Select Beams / Columns / Girders box and define all the relevant details, Design Codes. Select the appropriate code from the drop-list. o AISC-LRFD o AISC-LRFD (metric) o AISC-ASD o AISC-ASD (metric) Load Envelope, Choose the required envelope of load cases as defined earlier. Bolt Details, these setting are dependant upon the typ of connection. Connection Details, define the method to be employed for transfer of moment and shear. Seismic Provision, allows for the option of setting a range of seismic settings to be included in the design. Select Material defines the material strength used in the various elements.
Some connections allow for a FEMA-350 Connection design. If available and this option is selected, then the above option list is changed to suit. Once all the required fields have been defined, click the OK button to add the definition in the Connections table as shown below:
Figure 71
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 52 of 59
All connections of a single type can be designed by selecting the menu item: Connection Design>Perform Connection Design AISC-LRFD Connection Design>Perform Connection Design AISC-ASD Connection Design>Perform Brace Connection Design AISC-LRFD Connection Design>Perform Brace Connection Design AISC-ASD Alternatively, individual connections can be designed by right clicking on their detail in the Connections table and selecting the design option such as:-
Figure 72 The details provide are then passed into the DESCON connection design program. Additional modifications can be provided in the programs own interface. Refer to the DESCON design manual for more information on the options that are available in its own interface. However, upon completion of the design in DESCON, the results are available for use in STAAD.Pro The final page within the STAAD.Pro is the Drawings and Reports Page. Upon entering this page, the screen layout is arranged so that a graphical display of a connection and its design report can be viewed.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 53 of 59
Figure 73 By clicking on any row in the Connections table on the right of the screen, the connection drawing and design report from the DESCON design is displayed. The details of the DESCON report can be added to a User Report by selecting the required connections from those shown in the Adv. Connection Design Reports item in the Available drop list. The diagram can also be added by taking a picture of the ones required in the same way as taking pictures elsewhere in STAAD.Pro.

AD.2006.6.2 ADAPT Slab Design Mode
Purpose ADAPT Slab Design Mode enables concrete slabs defined with or without holes to be designed using the ADAPT-Builder software. The pre-conditions to use this facility are a. The hardware lock must be programmed for ADAPT Slab Design INTERFACE b. The ADAPT-Builder software should be installed in that machine. ADAPT is a third party product, which has its own license and installation. Contact your STAAD.Pro supplier for more details on purchasing this application if you do not currently own a license. Description The following steps are to be followed to design a Slab from STAAD.Pro with ADAPT: 1. Open the input file (containing the slab to be designed) in STAAD.Pro.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 54 of 59
2. 3.
Before going into the ADAPT Slab Design module, make sure that the input file is analyzed with STAAD.Pro. Now click on the ADAPT Slab Design tab, as indicated in the figure below. This tab will be visible only when both the pre-conditions as stated above are satisfied.
Figure 74 4. The user will be enable to view the Load Envelope and Slab Design tabs at the topleft side of the model window, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 75 5. While in the Load Envelope > Define page, click on the New Envelope button located at the bottom-right corner of the screen.
Figure 76 6. The Load Envelope dialog-box will open, as shown below.
Figure 77 The Load Envelope name should be entered, being defined by the chosen load cases by clicking the check boxes corresponding to each load case.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 55 of 59
In addition to that the user must specify the Load Type for each individual load cases. The Load Type-s are classified into Dead / Live / Lateral Load as shown below.
Figure 78 7. Create as many as Load Envelopes, as required to design the Slab. The created Load Envelopes are listed in the tabular form at the top-right corner of the screen.
Figure 79 8. 9. Any Load Envelope can be edited by selecting the particular envelope and then by clicking the Edit Envelope button. To define a Slab for design, click on the Slab Design tab and select the geometrycurser to select the plate-elements constituting the slab and the associated beams and columns to be designed.
After selecting the plate-elements and the associated beams and columns, click the New Slab button to define the Slab. A Slab Definition dialog-box will pop-up, and select a Load Envelope associated with the Slab definition. In case, while selecting the plate elements, if some disjointed plate-elements (i.e. plateelements which has no common edge) are chosen to form a slab, the program itself will create multiple slab definition. 10. The user can create a number of Slab definitions to be designed. The created Slab definitions are listed in the tabular form at the top-right corner of the screen as shown.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 56 of 59
Figure 80 11. The created Slab definitions can be edited, deleted, highlighted by geometry after selecting one Slab definition, and then by selecting the corresponding option from the context menu.
Figure 81 12. Export ADAPT Floor Geometry and Export ADAPT Floor Loading Information:
Select one Slab Definition, and either from the context menu as shown above or from the Adapt Link main menu, select Export ADAPT Floor Geometry or Export ADAPT Floor Loading Information to export the corresponding information. Following the same procedure, the user can run the ADAPT-Builder module by clicking Run ADAPT.

AD.2006.6.3 BS5950 Part 5 - Cold Formed Steel Design
Please refer to section 2E of the International Codes manual for details.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 57 of 59

AD.2006.6.4 EC5 Timber Design
Please refer to section 5C of the International Codes manual for details.

AD.2006.6.5 Canadian Timber Design
Please refer to section 3D of the International Codes manual for details.

AD.2006.6.6 South African Steel Design
Please refer to section 12B of the International Codes manual for details.

AD.2006.6.7 South African Concrete Design
Please refer to section12A of the International Codes manual for details.

AD.2006.6.8 EC8 Earthquake Loading
Please refer to section 5.32.10.1.2 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual for details.
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 58 of 59
AD.2006.6.9 Additional Kingspan Cold Formed Steel Database

Please refer to section 5.20 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual for details.

AD.2006.6.10 Imperfection Analysis
Please refer to section 5.26.6 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual for details.

AD.2006.6.11 Tapered Steel Design Added to BS 5950
Please refer to section 2B of the International Codes manual for details.

AD.2006.6.12 User Tools
Purpose The users can utilize their own customized tools, in form of VBS Macro, to operate on STAAD.Pro models. Description The procedure of associating a user tool in STAAD.Pro is furnished below: 1. 2. 3. Run STAAD.Pro and Open an input file. From the Tools menu, run Configure User Tools. A dialog-box will pop-up as shown below:
03/Apr/2009
Introduction
Page 59 of 59
4. 5.
Figure 82 In the Menu-Items, add a name of the Tool, and in the Command, locate the Tool (VBS Macro) using the browser. Click OK to confirm. Now the Tool name will appear in the Tools menu User Tools and also by clicking the button in the Tool-bar.
6.
To Run the Tool (Macro), click on the Tool name in any of the places as described in 5.
03/Apr/2009
STAAD.Pro 2007 build 1001 Release Report
Page 1 of 89

Introduction
The Software Release Report for STAAD.Pro 2007 build 1001 contains detailed information on additions and changes that have been implemented since the release of STAAD.Pro 2006 build 1005. This document should be read in conjunction with all other STAAD.Pro manuals, including the Revision History document.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1 Features Affecting the PreProcessor (Modeling Mode)
Several new features have been added and existing features have been modified in the pre-processor section of the program, also known as the Modeling Mode. These are explained in the following pages.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.1 New Start Page
Purpose
STAAD.Pro now includes a start page with access to the functions normally required when first starting STAAD.Pro, including shortcuts for starting a new file, accessing the recently accessed files, launching the help file and configuring STAAD.Pro.
file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhF1B7.htm
03/Apr/2009
Page 2 of 89
Description
The new Start Page is divided into 4 sections that can be used to achieve the following:1) Project Tasks, to a. b. c. d. 2) 3) Start a New Project using the STAAD.Pro wizard. Open an existing file using the traditional windows browse dialog enhanced with a model preview window. Set the program behavior with the Configuration options. Setup the automatic Backup configuration requirements.
Recent Files to preview and access the last 6 models opened. Help Topics, a. b. c. Quick access to the online Help document. Locate the technical support centers and contact details. Find out the latest information on the program online from the Product News link.
03/Apr/2009
Page 3 of 89
d. 4)
Access the growing STAAD.Pro online knowledge base
License Configuration. To quickly identify which SELECT licenses are being used by the current session of STAAD.Pro, they are displayed and color coded on the Start Page thus:If the license is available it is marked with a green circle thus:-
Licenses that have not been selected are marked with a grey circle thus:-
If the selected license can not be obtained or is not available from the server will be shown with a red circle, thus:-
Additional configuration of the Bentley SELECT license, such as specifying the server name and activation key, can be viewed and set using Bentley License Management Tool which can be accessed from the link at the bottom right of the License Configuration section.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD 2007-1001.1.2 Enhanced Grid Tool
Purpose
03/Apr/2009
Page 4 of 89
The Snap/Grid Node tools have been enhanced to 1) 2) 3) Allow multiple different grids to be created. Import a DXF file and use it as a template Import grid files created in another STAAD.Pro model
Description
Beams, plates (both triangular and quadrilateral) and 8 noded solid elements can be generated using the appropriate Snap/Grid Node tool.
When this function is launched, the following dialog is opened which will include a Default Grid. This grid will be of type Linear, there are also options to create Radial, Irregular and imported DXF grids which will be described later.
As new grids are added or modified, the information is stored in the STAAD.Pro data folder with a GRD extension that allows other STAAD files to re-use these defined grids.
The effect of the current grid settings are displayed in the graphics window, thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 5 of 89
To change the settings of this grid click on the [Edit] button to display the current grid properties, e.g.:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 6 of 89
The current plane of the grid is set by selecting the required option. This can be rotated about one of the global planes by selecting the axis of rotation and setting the angle.
The origin of the grid is marked on the graphics with a small circle:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 7 of 89
The location of the origin, specified in global co-ordinates, can either be defined explicitly in the given X, Y and Z co-ordinates, or it can be set to the co-ordinates of an existing node by clicking on the icon, (the cursor changes to ) and then on the node itself in the graphical window. Note that at this point the origin co-ordinate is updated.
The construction lines are used to specify how many gridlines are created either side of the origin, the spacing between the gridlines and if there should be a skew in degrees along either axis.
Click on the [OK] button to accept these settings.
Additional grids can be defined by clicking on the [Create] button. Three different types of standard grid can be created:
Linear Radial Irregular
03/Apr/2009
Page 8 of 89
The type of grid required should be selected from the drop list of types available at the top of the property sheet.
Each new grid should be identified with a unique name for future reference. The functionality for each type of grid is thus:-
Linear The Default Grid defined above is a Linear Grid and thus see above for the settings of a Linear Grid.
Radial The settings for a Radial grid are defined in the following window:
03/Apr/2009
Page 9 of 89
The Plane, Angle of Plane and Grid origin options are as for the Linear (or Default Grid). The construction lines options Start Angle, is the angle in degrees about the orthogonal axis to the plane from the axis first referred to in the definition of the plane. E.g. if the selected plane is X-Y, then the angle is measured about the Z axis (using the right hand rule) from the axis parallel to the X axis.
Sweep is the angle in degrees measured from the start angle which is divided into the selected number of Bays, thus:-
Irregular The settings for an Irregular grid are defined in the following window:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 10 of 89
The origin is set as described above for both Regular and Radial grids.
The plane of the grid can either be set in one of the global planes X-Y, X-Z or Y-Z and rotated about one of the global axes. This method is identical to that described for the Regular or Radial Grids. Alternatively, the directions of the two axes can be specified as relative co-ordinates from the origin:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 11 of 89
The gridlines are defined by the distance to the next gridline and the numbers separated with a space.
There are two import options that can selected that can allow either DXF files or grids defined in another STAAD.Pro model (all but the default will be imported).
The option to import a DXF file will open the following dialog:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 12 of 89
To select a DXF file click on the
button and navigate to the required file.
The file will be opened and displayed in the preview window. Individual layers can be turned on and off from the Layers droplist. The individual entities in the selected layers are displayed and can be toggled on or off for import. By clicking on an entity in the graphical window, the entity is highlighted in the table so that it can be turned off if required.
03/Apr/2009
Page 13 of 89
With the required entities selected, a suitable reference name supplied and unit selected, click on the [Import] button.
The data will be imported in the plane in which it was defined in the original DXF. However, if required this can be rotated about any of the global axes. Also, the origin of the grid can be located at any 3D co-ordinate.
03/Apr/2009
Page 14 of 89
The option to Hide DXF text can be used to toggle the display of grid labels if they start clashing with the rest of the model. The grid is displayed thus (Note curved lines are currently not imported):-.
03/Apr/2009
Page 15 of 89
The DXF grid operates as the other forms of grid in that when the [Snap Node/] button is clicked, nodes can be created at the ends and intersections of grid lines.
The second import option is to Import Grids previously defined in another STAAD.Pro model. Selecting this option opens a browse dialog box to identify a GRD file created by the Snap Node Grid tool. Note that GRD files are only created by STAAD.Pro 2007 (or later).
Icons on the Geometry toolbar are:Snap/Node Beam Snap/Node Triangular Plate
03/Apr/2009
Page 16 of 89
Snap/Node Quadrilateral Plate
Note this is an update to sections:2.3.6.2.1 Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Beam, 2.3.6.2.2 Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Plate and 2.3.6.2.3 Geometry | Snap/Grid Node | Solid of the Graphical Environment Manual
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.3 Fly-out toolbars

Purpose
The amount of screen space occupied by a number of toolbar icons has been recovered by collapsing a number of similar icons into a single icon.
Description
The active icon can be changed by holding down the left mouse button when clicking on the button. Icons that have this property are identified with a black triangle in their lower right corner:-
There are four Geometry Toolbar icons that have this property:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 17 of 89
Add Beam Add Plate Add Solid Snap Node Grid
The Add Beam icon supports four commands:-
Add Beam for Node to Node Add Curved Beam Add Beam Between Mid Points Add Beam Using Perpendicular Intersection
The Add Plate icon supports two commands:-
Add Quadrilateral Plate Add Triangular Plate
The Add Solid icon supports five commands:-
Add 8 Noded Solid Add 7 Noded Solid Add 8 Noded Solid Add 6 Noded Solid Add 5 Noded Solid
The Snap Node Grid icon supports three icons:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 18 of 89
Snap Node Beam Snap Node Quadrilateral Plate Snap Node Triangular Plate
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.4 Physical Member Query
Purpose
The addition of the Physical Member to the range of objects supported by STAAD.Pro, requires that there is access to a query tool to get information about the Physical Member.
Description
To access information on a Physical Member, use the Physical Member Selection Tool the required object and then select the menu option:to highlight
Tools>Query > Physical Member
This will display the Physical Member Query dialog box:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 19 of 89
This dialog box can also be accessed from Double clicking on a physical member with the Physical Member Cursor Selecting the physical member, right clicking and selecting Properties from the pop up menu.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.5 In-plane area loads on plates
Purpose
STAAD.Pro can now apply plate loads in the local X and Y directions to represent in plane friction loads.
03/Apr/2009
Page 20 of 89
Description
As shown in the nest figure, pressure on the full element can now be now be applied along local X and Y axes.
2 Thus a -2 kip/ft2 load applied to an element that is 3 ft will result in -6 kips being applied in the plane of the element.
This applies only to Pressure on Full Plate.
See also update of technical reference section 5.32.3.1.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.6 Front to front channels
Purpose
STAAD.Pro has been enhanced to support the definition of steel channel sections being defined in an arrangement with the toes pointing to each other with a given spacing, between thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 21 of 89
Description
Front to front channel steel sections can be defined in the Properties dialog box by selecting the required channel section and choosing the FR (Double Channel Front to Front)option and any spacing required between the channels.
The command that appears in the STAAD.Pro STD data file is:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 22 of 89
<Member List> TABLE FR C4X5 SP 0.5 Note that the SP parameter is optional, but if it is not set, the section will NOT be assumed to be a closed box for torsional calculations.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.7 Automatic property calculation of User Provide Table (UPT) angle sections
Purpose
User Provided Tables (UPTs) of Angle sections require section properties that can now be calculated when the section dimensions have been defined.
Description
Angle Section UPTs require the following data to be entered for each section:-
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
D, Depth of angle WF, Width of angle TF, Thickness of flanges R, radius of gyration about principal axis, shown as r(Z-Z) in the AISC manual (see below). This must not be set to zero. AY, Shear area long Y axis AZ, Shear area along Z axis
03/Apr/2009
Page 23 of 89
Define the dimensions of the angle (shown in bold above:-
Then click on the [Calculate] button to have STAAD.Pro calculate the remaining properties are provided:
03/Apr/2009
Page 24 of 89
Note that when these sections are added to a STAAD.Pro model, the angle will be oriented such that the Z-Z axis as defined in the AISC manual will align with the local Z axis.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.8 Consolidation of multiple property references
Purpose
When a STAAD file has a number of references of the same property, there is now a tool to consolidate all these properties into a single command.
Description
STAAD models that have the same property defined multiple times can be consolidated by clicking on the new menu item, Tools > Merge Properties:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 25 of 89
A warning is given and thus an opportunity to cancel the property collation if not required or selected by mistake.
All instances of a given section property will be collated into a single property reference.
NOTES. Properties references with differing additional parameters will not be collated. Properties references with differing assigned material properties will not be collated.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.9 Section property reduction in analysis to account for cracking
Purpose
03/Apr/2009
Page 26 of 89
Concrete design specifications recommend the use of cracked section properties for the analysis and design of concrete sections. Though the methodology to handle cracked section properties is non-linear in nature, i.e. the section capacities should be checked and modified depending upon the section forces the section is handling. The model should then be re-analyzed with modified reduced section properties and redesigned. This iteration should be continued until the forces in all sections designed are below the allowable limit of ultimate strength.
In STAAD.Pro this approach has been simplified as per the recommendations in the ACI-318 : 2005 standard which suggests a user input of reduction factors for the individual members. Section 10.11.1 of ACI-318 has provided a list of suggested reduction factors of section properties dependant upon the nature of stresses the member is subjected to.
Description
An additional sheet has been added to the Beam Specifications dialog to allow the reduction of section properties for analysis to be created and assigned. The method is identical to that for creating any other beam specification.
The Specifications dialog can be accessed from the:General > Specifications Page in the Modeling Mode:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 27 of 89
The reduction factor should be a fraction of unity; hence a factor of 0.5 defined for RAX will reduce a defined cross sectional area of 0.5 ft2 to 0.25 ft2.
The format of the command that is generated in the STAAD.Pro STD file is:-
MEMEBR CRACKED <Member List> REDUCTION {RAX/RIX/RIY/RIZ}factor
Multiple factors can be assigned on the same line
Note - The reduction factor is considered only for analysis but not for design.
03/Apr/2009
Page 28 of 89
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.10 Tension /Compression only spring supports
Purpose
The STAAD.Pro can now graphically define spring supports that are to allow tension only or compression only forces.
Description
The Tension/Compression Only Support command is created from the Supports dialog box.
The Supports dialog can be accessed from the :General > Supports Page in the Modeling Mode:-
Click on the [Create] button and select the Tension/Compression Only Springs sheet thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 29 of 89
The selection of Reaction Type indicates that if, after any of the cycles of analysis, the direction of the force in the spring is of the wrong type, then the support will be removed from that direction and a new analysis performed.
Reaction Type Support will remain if the reaction is:Support will be removed and a new analysis flagged if the reaction is:-
Tension Only - ve + ve
Compression Only + ve - ve
This support definition should be either added to the Supports dialog (by clicking on the [Add] button) or assigned to the currently selected nodes (by clicking on the [Assign] button) that have previously been assigned with spring supports. If the support is not assigned as it is created, it can be assigned later from the Support dialog. However, note that if it is not assigned to at least one spring support when STAAD.Pro is closed, then the definition will not be saved in the STD file.
03/Apr/2009
Page 30 of 89
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.11 Enhanced ELASTIC MAT / PLATE MAT options
Purpose
The Elastic Mat and Plate Mat commands can be set to behave as compression only springs and include the influence area that each node has been subjected to in the ANL output file.
Description
In order to allow Elastic Mat and Plate Mat commands to perform as compression only supports to model lift of support situations, the command has been enhanced with an additional parameter which can be set graphically from the command definition.
The Elastic Mat and Plate Mat commands are created from the Foundation sheet in the Supports dialog box.
The Supports dialog can be accessed from the :General > Supports Page in the Modeling Mode:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 31 of 89
When the Compression Only option is set, then if after any of the cycles of analysis, the force at a node included in the command range (in the elastic mat range or used to define a plate in the plate mat range) is found to be tensile (i.e. negative reaction), then the load case is marked for a re-analysis with that support removed.
There is also a new option to include in the output file, the area that has been used in the calculation of the spring stiffness of each joint used when defining a Plate Mat or Elastic Mat command.
See also updated technical reference section 5.27.3.
03/Apr/2009
Page 32 of 89
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.12 Reference load cases
Purpose
Large models can include multiple load cases which do not require analysis in their own right and are simply the building blocks for inclusion in primary load cases. This is similar to a REPEAT LOAD command, but has the added benefit of not being solved in its own right.
Description
A reference load case is listed in the Load dialog box of the General Load Page of the modeling mode. A Reference load case is listed in the Definitions section of the data file and displayed thus:-
To add a new Reference load case, highlight the Reference Load Definitions in the Load dialog and click on the [Add] button. Provide the title for the load case and number (however, similar to that of creating Primary load cases, the next available reference load case number. Note that these reference load case numbers can be the same as a primary or combination load case number (however a combination load case number cannot be the same as a primary load case number).
03/Apr/2009
Page 33 of 89
The Reference load case names are shown in the Load dialog box. Load items should then be added to this load case in exactly the same way as adding load items into a primary load case. Select the Reference load case and click on the [Add] button to display all the load items that can be added to this load case, thus:-
To be analyzed, the loads defined in a Reference load case must be added to one or more Primary load cases. This is done by selecting the required primary load case and clicking on the [Add] button. Select the load item Repeat Load>Reference Load:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 34 of 89
Select the required defined Reference load cases and click on the [>] button to select them for inclusion in the current load case. The [>>] button will select all defined Reference Load cases. These are added with a factor of 1.0, however, each can be modified with its own specific multiplication factor:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 35 of 89
The format of the definition of a Reference Load (i) in the data file is thus:DEFINE REFERENCE LOADS LOAD R(i) LOADTYPE (type) TITLE REF LOAD CASE 1 (Load items) . END DEFINE REFERENCE LOADS
The format of a reference to a Reference Load in a primary load (j)case is thus:LOAD (j) LOADTYPE (type) TITLE LOAD CASE 1
03/Apr/2009
Page 36 of 89
REFERENCE LOAD R(i) 1.0
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.1.13 Enhanced Beta Angle Definition and Assignment
Purpose
Assigning beta angles on members has been improved visually by displaying the commands that are stored in the STAAD data file, making them easier to manage.
Description
Beta angle definitions are created and listed in the Beta Angle sheet of the Property dialog box. Each new command is listed in the dialog as shown below and can be assigned using the assignment methods commonly used throughout STAAD.Pro:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 37 of 89
The creation of beta angle commands includes three options 1) 2) 3) Define specific angle to rotate the beams about their local X axis. Specify the command Angle(*) Specify the command RAngle (*)
03/Apr/2009
Page 38 of 89
(*) The Angle and RAngle commands are specifically for equal and un-equal angle sections. All sections are aligned with their principal axes aligned with the global axes, however, angle sections are often required to align their flanges with the global axes. By assigning either the Angle or RAngle command, the section will be rotated to align the flanges. For more information see section 5.26.2 Specifying CONSTANTS for members, plate elements and solid elements of the Technical Reference Manual.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2 Features Affecting the Analysis and Design Engine
The following section describes the new features that have been added to the analysis and design engine and existing features that have been updated or modified.
03/Apr/2009
Page 39 of 89
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2.1 P-Delta analysis including stress stiffening effect of the KG matrix
Purpose
The P-Delta analysis capability has been enhanced with the option of including the stress stiffening effect of the Kg matrix into the member / plate stiffness.
Description
A regular STAAD P-Delta Analysis performs a first order linear analysis and obtains a set of joint forces from member/plates based on the large P-Delta effect. These forces are added to the original load vector. A second analysis is then performed on this updated load vector (5 to 10 iterations will usually be sufficient).
In the new P-Delta KG Analysis, that is with the Kg option selected, the effect of the axial stress after the first analysis is used to modify the stiffness of the member/plates. A second analysis is then performed using the original load vector. Large & small P-Delta effects are always included (1 or 2 iterations will usually be sufficient).
The KG option is activated by selecting the option on the P-Delta Analysis dialog thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 40 of 89
For a full description of the updated analysis commands see section 5.37 Analysis Specification in the Technical Reference Manual.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2.2 P-Delta analysis including Small Delta
Purpose
A regular STAAD P-Delta Analysis can now account for the small P-Delta effect whilst performing a PDelta analysis.
Description
Without the Small Delta option, i.e. a regular STAAD P-Delta analysis, STAAD performs a first order linear analysis and obtains a set of joint forces, from members/plates based on the large P-Delta effect,
03/Apr/2009
Page 41 of 89
which are then added to the original load vector. A second analysis is then performed on this updated load vector.
With the Small Delta option selected, both the large & small P-Delta effects are included in calculating the end forces, (5 to 10 iterations will usually be sufficient).
The option is activated by selecting the option on the P-Delta Analysis dialog thus:-
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2.3 Buckling Load analysis
Purpose
03/Apr/2009
Page 42 of 89
STAAD.Pro can now identify the factor by which the loads in the selected load case should be increased (or decreased if less than 1) such that Euler buckling would occur.
Description Basic Solver

By including the command PERFORM BUCKLING ANALYSIS, the program will perform a P-Delta analysis including Kg Stiffening (geometric stiffness of members & plates) due to large & small P-Delta effects. If a non-singular stiffness matrix can be created, then buckling has not occurred. Then the load is increased from the last increment repeatedly until buckling does occur. Then the load is decreased halfway back to the prior increment. This bounds the buckling factor between the last 2 increments. Then STAAD proceeds to halve the interval until either the change between increments is 0.1% of each other, or the specified number of increments has been exceeded. The resulting factor is reported in the output file. The buckling deformed shape is simply the deformed shape from a static analysis with the near buckling load applied. This could appear more like a crushing, small displacement shape rather than a buckling mode shape. 15+ iterations are recommended. Buckling will be applied to all primary cases.
The option is activated using the new option in the Analysis/Print dialog thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 43 of 89
The results of the Buckling analysis are presented in the output file thus:-
Description Advanced Solver

This buckling method is automatically activated if an Advanced Analysis license is available. When using the Advanced Solver, the corresponding buckling modes are included in the output file. [See section AD.2007-1001.2.5 on the procedure to invoke the alternative standard buckling load analysis solver the use of which is explained in section AD.2007-1001.2.3.1 of this document]
The option is activated using the new option in the Analysis/Print dialog thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 44 of 89
The program performs a P-Delta analysis including Kg Stiffening (geometric stiffness of members & plates) due to large & small P-Delta effects. The eigensolution, | [K] BF [Kg]|=0
is solved for the buckling factors and buckled mode shapes. The first 4 buckling factors and buckled shapes are calculated and included in the output file:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 45 of 89
The buckling modes and shapes are available to be viewed in the Post Processing Mode in a new Buckling Page.
This page includes both a Buckling Factors table:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 46 of 89
And a Buckling Modes table:-
Only the primary load case just prior to the PERFORM BUCKLING command is used. The number of iterations entered is ignored. The buckling factor result is reported in the output file and in post processing.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2.3 Modal Analysis including stress stiffening effect of KG Matrix
03/Apr/2009
Page 47 of 89
Purpose
STAAD.Pro can include the stress stiffening effect (geometric stiffness) based on the axial member forces/plate in-plane stresses from a selected load case when calculating the modes & frequencies of a structure.
Description
Position the selected load case from which the axial stresses are to be used to modify the stiffness matrix, such that it is the last static case before the dynamic case which is in turn immediately followed by a PDELTA KG command.
The dynamic load case should contain mass data followed by one of the following:a) b) c) d) A MODAL CALCULATION REQUESTED command. A response spectrum definition, i.e. set of SPECTRUM command data. A reference to a time history definition, i.e. include TIME LOAD commands. Valid Steady State data.
Example ... LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1 ******* This is static loading case from which the axial stress is ******* used to compute the stress stiffening effects (P-Delta) ******* This case will be solved as a PDelta case with large & small ******* P-Delta effects SELFWEIGHT Y -1.0 JOINT LOAD 2 3 6 7 9 TO 12 FY -3 LOAD 2 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 2
03/Apr/2009
Page 48 of 89
******* Enter masses in weight units SELFWEIGHT X 1 SELFWEIGHT Y 1 SELFWEIGHT Z 1 JOINT LOAD 2 3 6 7 9 TO 12 FX 10 FY 10 FZ 10 ******* Declare this to be a modes/freq analysis ******* Note that dynamic cases use the factored matrix from the last ******* load case; which is a (K+Kg) case MODAL CALCULATION REQUESTED PDELTA KG ANALYSIS
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2.4 Enhanced Master/Slave command processing
Purpose
The internal processing of any Master Slave command has been enhanced to allow an automatic bandwidth reduction to take place.
Description
The analysis engine now performs a bandwidth reduction on files that include Master/Slave commands which must occur in the input file after the definition of supports. In previous versions of STAAD.Pro, for the bandwidth reduction to take place, the data of Master/Slave would need to be repeated before the support definitions. This requirement is now no longer required.
For a full description of the updated analysis commands see section 5.28 Master/Slave Specification in
03/Apr/2009
Page 49 of 89
the Technical Reference Manual.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2.5 Advanced Solver

Purpose
A new substantially faster analysis engine has been produced which can provide solutions of large structures in a fraction of the time currently required by the standard STAAD engine. The Advanced Solver generally uses less disk and memory as well.
Description
The Advanced solver is a new addition to the STAAD Analysis Engine (*) which can be used for solving both static and dynamic problems. It is part of the STAAD engine with no special command required to run it. It is automatically activated if a suitable license is available (**), however, this can be turned off and the standard solver used by including the option:-
SET STAR 0
This command must be included in the header information block at the start of the file and before the first JOINT command block.
The engine can operate in two modes, in-core and out-of-core. The in-core solver will be used for models with under 20000 joints and the out-of-core solver for models over 20000 joints. In most situations, the in-core mode will provide the quickest solution, but where there is insufficient memory available, then the engine will use the out-of-core mode. Again, selection of the mode is automatically chosen by the analysis, but can be over-ridden.
The full set of overrides for the advanced engine are:SET STAR -3 SET STAR 4 use in-core solver regardless of size use out-of-core solver regardless of size
03/Apr/2009
Page 50 of 89
SET STAR 3 SET STAR 0
default use STAAD standard solver
Notes:-
(*) The Advanced Solver is NOT available for use with a Stardyne Analysis. (**) To use this feature requires access to a STAAD Advanced license. If you do not currently have this feature, please contact your account manager. (***) Global Euler Buckling analysis is different between the two solvers. See section AD.20071001.2.3 of this document for the differences.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.2.6 Eurocode 3:2005

Purpose
The latest UK release of Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures part 1-1: General Rules and rules for buildings has been implemented.
Description
This code is an update to our current Eurocode 3. The changes are minor and the code checking process remains the same as the previous Eurocode 3 design. The design parameters are the same and apply as defined for the current Eurocode 3, the only exception, however, is the Code parameter which must be set to EC3 BS. This setting is available form the GUI list of codes.
03/Apr/2009
Page 51 of 89
Note that a design performed to the new Eurocode 3 standard is displayed in the output file (*.ANL) with the following header:-
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (BS EN 1993-1-1:2005) **************************
PROGRAM CODE REVISION V1.1 BS_EC3_2005/1
The equivalent header for a code check (or member selection) to the older standard is displayed thus:-
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (DD ENV) ***********************
PROGRAM CODE REVISION V1.14_EC3_94/1
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.3 Features Affecting the PostProcessor (Results Mode)
03/Apr/2009
Page 52 of 89
A new feature has been added to the post-processor section of the program, also known as the Results Mode. It is explained in the following pages.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.3.1 Statics Check Table
Purpose
The equilibrium check that has been available in the output file is now automatically included in the Post Processing Mode.
Description
The Node>Reactions Page has been enhanced with a new table that displays the results of an equilibrium check. This is the same information that in the past would have been only available by including a PRINT STATICS CHECK in the perform analysis command.
The Statics Check Table can be accessed from the:Nodes > Reactions Page in the Post-processing Mode:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 53 of 89
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.4 Features Affecting the Concrete Design Mode
The enhancement made in the RC Designer section of the program, also known as the Concrete Mode, is explained in the following pages.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.4.1 Beam and Column Designs to the Russian Concrete code SP52
Purpose
Two new design options have been added that allow concrete beams and columns to be designed to the
03/Apr/2009
Page 54 of 89
Russian Concrete design code SP52-101-3.
The Russian Design Codes are only available with the Euro-zone Eastern Design Codes SELECT license.
Description
The SP52-101-03 design checks are initiated by creating a design brief based on this code. This option is now available and can be selected when creating a new design brief. Beams and columns can be designed using design briefs tailored to the requirements of the specific item.
Design Briefs are created in the Design Layer > Groups/Briefs Page of the Concrete Designer mode. Click on the New Brief button on the base of the Design Brief Table:-
Beam Design Briefs

An SP52 Beam design brief is creating by setting the design brief options in the dialog that is presented when the [New Brief] button is clicked on the Design Briefs dialog:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 55 of 89
The beam design brief contains two sheets of data that are used in the calculation of the reinforcement of any member that it is associated with. Default values are provided which should be changed to the specific values required for the design. These sheets are titled General and Reinforcement thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 56 of 89
Column Design Briefs

An SP52 Column design brief is creating by setting the design brief options in the dialog that is presented when the [New Brief] button is clicked on the Design Briefs dialog:-
The column design brief contains three sheets of data that are used in the calculation of the reinforcement of any member that it is associated with. Default values are provided which should be changed to the specific values required for the design. These sheets are titled General, Reinforcement and Member Loadcases thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 57 of 89
03/Apr/2009
Page 58 of 89
With the Design Brief created, Design Groups must be defined. These are created by selecting the design members that are required and clicking on the [New Design Group] button on the base of the Design Groups dialog:-
This pops up a dialog to allow the required Design Brief to be assigned to the selected design members that are now in this Design Group.
03/Apr/2009
Page 59 of 89
The group is added to the Design Group table and by double clicking on the group label, e.g.G1, then the list of members in the group is displayed and can be edited.
Note from here on, a suitable license is required to perform a design or review the results of a design.
To perform a design or review results of a previous design, requires entering the Concrete Member Mode by either clicking on the tab on the left of the screen or selecting Member Design from the Mode menu.
The program uses the Design Brief of the current Design Group to determine the page tabs and page layout that is now presented. The current Design Group is selected by choosing it from the drop-list of design groups displayed at the top of the screen:-
Beam Designs
When the current group has a beam design group associated with it, entering the Concrete Member Mode, there are the following 7 pages:Summary Design Main Layout
03/Apr/2009
Page 60 of 89
Main Reinforcement Shear Layout Shear Reinforcement Cracks
The Summary Page displays the current status of the design of the members in the design group in a Summary table. Each member is identified with the principal checks including the span and section where the maximum utilization occurs. If any section cannot achieve a solution such that the design ratio is greater than unity, this is identified in red, thus:-
The Design Page is laid out in the same manor as the Summary Page but also launches the Design options dialog, where members from the design group can be selected or removed from the design process:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 61 of 89
The Main Layout Page displays the reinforcement displays the design reinforcement for the current member selected from the design group drop list:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 62 of 89
Note that the section arrow displayed on the elevation of the beam or the moment diagram, can be moved to display the reinforcement at any location along the beam. By clicking on either the beam elevation or the cross section, then clicking on the Take Picture toolbar icon, a picture will be added to the picture album which can be included in a User Report:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 63 of 89
The Main Reinforcement Page displays the summary of the calculations at each of the design sections for both the maximum positive and negative moment at the given section for the current member.
The Shear Layout Page displays the shear reinforcement for the current member:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 64 of 89
The Shear Reinforcement Page displays the summary of the shear reinforcement calculations at each cross section for the current member.
The Cracks Page displays the summary of the crack width check for both short and long terms and both maximum hogging and sagging moments:-
Column Designs
When the current group has a column design group associated with it, entering the Concrete Member Mode, there are the following 6 pages:Summary Input Design Main Layout Results Drawing
03/Apr/2009
Page 65 of 89
The Summary Page displays the current status of the design of the members in the design group in a Summary table. Each member is identified with the bars provided and a safety margin, thus:-
The Input Page provides a table to set the effective length factors (enter b to reset to the value set in the brief), an indication as to whether either direction is braced and what size link bar is to be used thus:-
The Design Page is laid out in the same manor as the Summary Page but also launches the Design options dialog, where members from the design group can be selected or removed from the design process:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 66 of 89
The Main Layout Page displays the reinforcement layout in the column, including the shear links. For a typical rectangular or square column it is shown thus:-
For a circular column it is shown thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 67 of 89
The Results Page displays a table of the principal check for each column in the group thus:-
The Drawing Page allows the current column details to be exported into a DXF file that can be used imported into a CAD package. Also a simple summary schedule of bars for the current member is displayed.
03/Apr/2009
Page 68 of 89
Printing Reports
Refer to the RC Designer manual for more information on creating user reports.
Exporting to Bentley REBAR

Both beam and column designs can be exported to Bentley REBAR by selecting the menu option, Groups>Export Group to Rebar. For more information see Whats New in STAAD.Pro 2006 Build 1004 AD.2006-1004.4.1 Bentley Rebar Export from RC Designer.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.5 Features Affecting the Connection Design Mode
03/Apr/2009
Page 69 of 89
A new mode has been added that allows quick design of connections using the RAM Connection application. This is displayed on the Modes toolbar with the above icon.
Full use of the RAM Connection Mode requires access to a valid RAM Connection license. If you do not possess a license, contact your Bentley account manager to have it added to your SELECT licenses. Without a valid license, only a small subset of the full range of available RAM connections can be utilized.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.5.1 RAM Connection Design Mode
Purpose
There is now a new mode in STAAD.Pro to dynamically link structural model data, including section properties and analysis results, to the RAM Connection application to check connection designs for code compliance. The resulting data and diagrams of the connection can also be included in the User Report.
Description
Connections are designed in the RAM Connection Mode by creating Joints, from the geometry, section properties and forces resulting from the analysis and assigning a Design Brief of connection templates from which a suitable connection, where available, is reported.
The RAM Connection application operates using Basic or Smart connection templates. A Basic connection template contains all the information about the connection (such as the plate sizes and bolt locations etc) which is applied to joint and then checked for code compliance. A Design Brief that is to use Basic connections can contain multiple connections, i.e. each with a different plate size and bolt diameter, if the first connection does not achieve compliance, then the next is selected until either a suitable connection is defined or all the connections in the brief have been checked.
03/Apr/2009
Page 70 of 89
A Smart connection template contains parametric rules defined in a macro which allows characteristics of the connection to be modified (within limits) in order to achieve code compliance. A Design Brief that is to use a Smart connection can only specify a single smart connection definition.
The definition of each connection template and the order in which they occur, are defined in a database which can be displayed and/or modified from the Connection Design menu. See the RAM Connection manual for more information on editing the connection database:-
Each folder contains a number of templates. The sequence of these templates determines the order that will be used when performing a design.
A similar database of properties of Bolts and Welds exists which can be edited if required:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 71 of 89
Workflow
The following 6 stages outline the steps that should be taken in order to create and design a connection. The workflow is essentially controlled from the Connection Definitions dialog on the right of the Connection Page, displayed when entering the RAM Connection Mode:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 72 of 89
1)
Create Design Envelope
The list analysis load case results that are to be checked for compliance are collated in Design Envelopes which can be defined here or selected if already defined in the STAAD file.
The Design envelope is defined by clicking on the [Create Envelope] button on the Connection Definitions dialog:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 73 of 89
2)
Create Joints
A joint is defined by a number of analytical beam elements meeting at a node. To create a joint, select a number the beams that meet at a node and click on the [Create Joint] button. If a valid joint can be created, then a dialog box is shown to specify the type of joint that could be created with the given beam selection, similar to the following:-
The range of Joint type and the number of beams that should be selected before clicking on the Create Joint button is clicked is shown in the following table:-
Type (code) Beam-Column Flange Joints
Sample
No. of selected beams required to form. 2 or 3
03/Apr/2009
Page 74 of 89
(BCF)
Beam-Column Web Joints (BCW)
2 or 3
Beam-Girder Joints (BG)
2 or3
Beam Splice Joints (BS)
Column Splice Joints
03/Apr/2009
Page 75 of 89
(CS)
Continuous Beam Over Column Joints (CC) Column Cap (CP)
2 or 3
Column-Beam Braces (CBB)
1 or 2 column 1 or 2 beams 1 to 4 braces Braces must be defined with the TRUSS command
Cheveron Brace (CVR) Aka Beam-Braces
1 or 2 beams 1 to 4 braces Braces must be defined with the TRUSS command
03/Apr/2009
Page 76 of 89
Vertical X Brace (VXB)
4 braces Braces must be defined with the TRUSS command
Once created, a joint is marked on the graphical window with a triangle symbol thus:-
The status of a joint is identified with a color code:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 77 of 89
Color Grey
Example
Meaning No Design Brief associated to the joint. (see Assigning Design Briefs below)
Cyan
A Design Brief has been applied, but no design has yet been performed.
Yellow
A design has been performed, but it is not possible to find any template which does not report a problem. The results of the last template will be reported.
Green
A design has been performed and a template has been found which when applied there are no reported problems.
Red
The connection has been selected with the joints cursor:-
3)
Create Design Briefs
The Design Brief contains the connection templates that are to be assigned to the joint in order, until a suitable connection template is found.
To create a Design Brief, click on the [Create Brief] button on the Connection Definitions dialog. The dialog appears thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 78 of 89
Define the name and select the required design envelope from the drop-list.
A Design Brief can be used to provide a single connection that can used by all joints that have the Design Brief assigned to them or by having the option Design Connection Individually selected then each joint could end up with a different template.
The design code that is to be used should be selected from the drop-list.
The connection template group that is required should be selected from the drop-list. The default list of groups with an installation of STAAD.Pro include:-
Basic Connection Templates
03/Apr/2009
Page 79 of 89
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37 38 39 40 41
Basic BP BCF Basic BP BCW Basic BP BG Basic DA BCF Bolted Basic DA BCW Bolted Basic DA BG Bolted Basic DA BCF Welded Basic DA BCW Welded Basic DA BG Welded Basic EP BCF Bolted Basic EP BCW Bolted Basic EP BG Bolted Basic EP BCF Welded Basic EP BCW Welded Basic EP BG Welded Basic SP BCF Basic SP BCW Basic SP BG Basic SSL BCF Bolted Basic SSL BCW Bolted Basic SSP BCF Welded Basic SSP BCW Welded Basic ST BCF Bolted Basic ST BCW Bolted Basic ST BG Bolted Basic ST BCF Welded Basic ST BCW Welded Basic ST BG Welded Basic TP BCF Basic TP BCW Basic US BCF Bolted Basic US BCW Bolted Basic US BCF Welded Basic US BCW Welded Basic CP Bolted Basic CS Bolted Basic CS Welded Basic FP BCF Bolted Basic FP BCW Bolted Basic FP BG Bolted
Bent plate, beam to column flange Bent plate, beam to column web Bent plate, beam to beam Double angle bolted beam to column flange Double angle bolted beam to column web Double angle bolted beam to beam Double angle welded beam to column flange Double angle welded beam to column web Double angle welded beam to beam End plate bolted beam to column flange End plate bolted beam to column web End plate bolted beam to beam End plate welded beam to column flange End plate welded beam to column web End plate welded beam to beam Shear plate beam to column flange Shear plate beam to column web Shear plate beam to beam Stiffened seated angle bolted beam to column flange Stiffened seated angle bolted beam to column web Stiffened seated plate bolted beam to column flange Stiffened seated plate bolted beam to column web Shear T bolted beam to column flange Shear T bolted beam to column web Shear T bolted beam to beam Shear T welded beam to column flange Shear T welded beam to column web Shear T welded beam to beam Through plate beam to column flange Through plate beam to column web Unstiffened seated angle bolted beam to column flange Unstiffened seated angle bolted beam to column web Unstiffened seated angle welded beam to column flange Unstiffened seated angle welded beam to column flange Cover plate bolted Column splice bolted Column splice welded Beam flange plate bolted beam to column flange Beam flange plate bolted beam to column web Beam flange plate bolted beam to beam
03/Apr/2009
Page 80 of 89
42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Basic FP BCF Welded Basic FP BCW Welded Basic FP BG Welded Basic EEP BCF 4Bolts Basic EEP BCF 8Bolts Basic EEP BCW 4Bolts Basic MA Bolted
Beam flange plate welded beam to column flange Beam flange plate welded beam to column web Beam flange plate welded beam to beam Extended end plate, beam to column flange, 4 bolts Extended end plate, beam to column flange, 8 bolts Extended end plate, beam to column web, 4 bolts Moment angle beam to column flange
SmartConnectionRange
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Smart DA Smart DA Beam splice Smart EP Smart SP Smart SP Beam splice Smart ST Smart SS Smart US Smart DW Smart FP Smart EEP Smart MA Smart Gussets Double angle connections Double angle beam splice connections Shear end plate connections Shear single plate connections Shear single plate beam splice connections Shear T connections Stiffened seated connections Unstiffened seated connections Directly welded moment connections Flange plate connections Extended end plate connections Moment angle connections Gusset connections
Once a connection group is selected, all the available templates are displayed as available. If the group is a Basic type then one or more templates can be moved to the Selected side by clicking on the [>] or [>>] to move all templates to the selected side. If the group is a Smart type, then only a single template should be moved to the selected side using the [>] button. Once the Design Brief is defined, it is saved by clicking on the [OK] button.
4)
Assign Design Briefs to Joints to create Connections
The final stage in setting up the design is in assigning Design Briefs to Joints. The process is simple and similar to that used elsewhere in STAAD.Pro. The Design Brief should be selected in the Connection Definition dialog,, the choice of assignment selected from the options at the base of the dialog and then click on the [Assign] button
03/Apr/2009
Page 81 of 89
Note that when a design Brief is selected the joints that have been assigned this brief are displayed in the dialog above the Assign button. When changing to the option Assign to Edit List this list can be edited and is updated when clicking on the Assign button.
Note that STAAD.Pro will check that only suitable briefs are assigned to defined joints, e.g. it is not possible to assign a Design Brief of templates Basic BP BG (Bent Plate Beam Girder) to a joint that has been defined as type Beam Column Flange (BCF)
5)
Design Connection
To perform the connection design, select the required design option from the Connection Design menu:-
All connections with associated briefs will be designed and their status reported in a Connection Design dialog:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 82 of 89
During the design process, an [Abort] button is provided to allow the design process to be cancelled. Upon completion, this becomes a [Done] button which must be clicked to complete the design.
6)
View connection details
The connection design results can be viewed on an individual joint, by double clicking on the symbol with the joint selection cursor. The information is displayed in the RAM Connection design window thus:-
03/Apr/2009
Page 83 of 89
If a design has not yet been performed (i.e. the joint is color coded cyan), then one will be performed and the resulting connection displayed. Note that the status of the connection is reflected in the color code of the icon in the top right corner:-
Status RAM Connection Connection DOES pass all design checks
Joint color code
Connection DOES NOT pass all design checks
A preview of the DXF drawing of the connection can be displayed clicking on toolbar icon:-
This DXF image will be available in STAAD.Pro
03/Apr/2009
Page 84 of 89
Additionally, both the input data and results can be displayed and printed directly here by clicking on the relevant icon:-
7)
Drawing and Results A full list of the defined connections, templates used, capacity ratio and overall status is displayed in the Drawing & Results page.
03/Apr/2009
Page 85 of 89
Any connection that has been designed, not matter if its ratio has exceeded unity or has failed for some other reason, by clicking on the joint name, the DXF diagram of the connection and the design results for the current template are displayed thus:-
8)
Add to report
The connection details and the diagrams can be included in a User Report along with other STAAD.Pro information.
03/Apr/2009
Page 86 of 89
a) Results To add the connection results, click on the menu item, File > Report Setup to open the report setup dialog. On the Items sheet select the RAM Connection Report from the Available drop-list. All connections with results are displayed and those that are required in the Report should be moved to the Selected side.
b) Diagrams If a diagram of the connection is required, take a photo as with any other graphic and it can be included as any other picture.
Pages
The RAM Connection mode operates with two pages:-
The two pages are:-
Connection, in which the joints, briefs and connections are defined and designed.
Drawing and Result, in which the summary, layout and the results of designs can be displayed.
Menus
When entering the RAM Connection Mode, the menu structure changes to the following:File Edit
03/Apr/2009
Page 87 of 89
View Tools Select Connection Design Mode Widow Help
All menus apart from the Connection Design menu are available in other modes, however, there is an enhancement to the Select menu.
The Connection menu contains the following options:Design All Connections All defined connections (i.e. Joints with defined Briefs) are designed according to the setting s of their associated brief. Only connections selected with the joint cursor are designed. Launch the Connections database
Design Selected Connections Configure Connection Database Configure Bolt & Weld Database
In the RAM Connection mode, the Select menu is enhanced with two additional items:-
Joint Cursor Changes the cursor such that individual defined joints can be selected from the graphical display.
03/Apr/2009
Page 88 of 89
Select Joints All joints defined as one of the following 9 joint types are selected:Beam-Column Flange Joints Beam-Column Web Joints Beam-Girder Joints Beam Splice Joints Column Splice Joints Continuous Beam Over Column Joints Column-Beam Braces Beam-Braces Vertical X Braces
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.6 Features Affecting the Piping Mode
03/Apr/2009
Page 89 of 89
Several new features have been added and existing features have been modified in the pre-processor section of the program, also known as the Piping Mode. These are explained in the following pages.
STAAD.Pro 2007 Build 1001 Release Report AD.2007-1001.6.1 Persistency of Pipe models
Purpose
When a pipe model is loaded in the Piping Mode, the location of the data is retained along with the connections defined in the Supports Page. Thus, if STAAD.Pro is closed and re-opened, it is no longer necessary to redefine the pipe model or the support relationships.
Description
This feature is an enhancement of the functionality of the Piping Mode as described in the item AD.2006-1002.6.1. Refer to that article for more information.
03/Apr/2009

Learn Staad Pro at Home

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Learn Staad Pro at Home

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

Contents of the STAAD.Pro CD Installation Copy Protection Device

Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

Getting Started - Installation & Start-up

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

Analysis Type Steel Design

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

tutorial, let us choose the English units (Kip, Feet, etc.).

Figure 1. 6 The dialog box shown in Figure 1.3 will re-appear.

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

in a different location, type in the name, or click the

button and specify the desired path.

After specifying the above input, click on the Next button.

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

Figure 1. 43 The resulting diagram is shown below.

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

1.5.16 Re-specifying The TRACK Parameter

1.5.17 Specifying The Check Code Command

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

Figure 2.61 shows the structure with the annotations.

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

file://C:\Documents and Settings\Admin\Local Settings\Temp\~hhD24F.htm

CONSTANTS E 29000.0 ALL POISSON 0.3 ALL

The length unit is changed to FEET to facilitate input of loads.